Full text of "Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal"

See other formats

Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at|http: //books .google .com/I

•l

t r

■ H ■.

., A»

. ■ ••>;

■.■ i

I .

■ •■ . / " 1

■,•■- »■■,

-''ioix.,-^"'C;^

, t

t -'. *

.. I

■ ■• V

^ ^

r '.■-'

r-., .. r.

« ."

w ■ ) •■•

.',■''■ s < <

► ^, ,

i ■ ,

. •, s ■

>"■■ v;. , •■

■'••■ ^: .;.:'■: ■.■ 'V':,

- ■»"

"-^z J,

..'■^u.

^ '■ <•

;; f

^ ».•-.•

■■ ■^•- '"" Va':, -.

.:' '-'■^ ^.. •

*> >•-.■■■-■

1 .,

i ^ V '■J- , ,^. ,.

■", J

• ',-1?-: : ' ,_ ^

-'-.p -,^

'■' .. •■ ■ ' ;

.. • • * ' ' -

■\ '•.■■.

~' ■■' ^■- ,-'-

.>> \: ■ ' ■;■

> ,•': '

■'.)"

^■

, -V

-.' ■/.

i ;. . ,i •%

; ,■.■/. /

■ -.« •

, . V

::( '.

.*>. ..

<; ,--

' ^.

' ■< ,

1 ■ .

^.' ■•-.'. -■, )■•

/s-J

JOURNAL

OF THB

ASIATIC SOCIETY

BSHOAXi.

BDITBD BT

THE SECRETARY.

VOL. XIV.

PART I,— JANUARY TO JUNE, 1845.

Nos. 157 to 162.

NEW SERIES.

"Itvillfloorlih* ifnatturaliiU, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of science, in diflferent
parts of Asia will commit their obserrationa to writing, and send them to the Asiatic Society,
in Calcutta ; it will languish if such communications shall belong intermitted ; and will die away
if Uiey shall entirely cease."— Sib Wm. Jonxs.

CALCUTTA:
BISHOP'S COLLEGE PRESS.

1845.

• ♦

coittent«^

PART I.

No. 157.

Pag€,

!•— Mr. Ivory's Tables of Mean Astronomical refractions, revised and augmented
by Major J. T. Boileau, B.B. Superintendent Magnetic Observatory,
dimia* •••• >••• •••• •••• •••• •••• A

II.— Ab Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Storms in India; being the Storms
in the Bay of Bengal and Southern Indian Ocean, from 26th November to
2d December, 1843. By Henry Piddington; with a Chart. ...• 10

llI.~ProceediDgs of the Asiatic Society for the month of January, 1845 i

No. 158.

L— Translation of the Toofut ul Kiram, a History of Sindh. By Lieutenant

Postans.— -^Conltntm;^.^ .••• •••• •.•• •••• •••• 75

II.— V^d&nta-Sara, or Essence of the Y^d&nta, an introduction to the V^d&nta
Philosophy, by Sad^nanda Parivrlyak&ch&rya, translated from the original
Sanscrit By £. Roer, Librarian to the Asiatic Society of Bengal. ••.• 100

III.— Note of the course of study pursued by Students in the Sanskrit College,

Calcutta. By W. Seton Karr, Esq., B.C S •••• •*•• 135

IV. — Memorandum on the Ancient bed of the River Soane and Site of Pali-

bothra. By E. C. Ravenshaw. Esq., B.C.S., with a Coloured Map 137

y. — Proceedings of the Asiatic Society for the month of February, 1845. .... xvii

VI. — Officers and Members of the Asiatic Society for 1845. • • • • .... xxxi

VII. — List of Members. •••• .••• .... ***- .... zxxiii

No. 159.

I.— Translation of the Toofut ul Kiram, a History of Sindh. By Lieutenant

Postans. — (Concluded* J •• •• •. •• •• 155

II.— Notices and Descriptions of various New or Little Known species of Birds.

By Ed. Blyth, Curator of the Asiatic Society's Museum. • • . • 173

III.— Observations on the rate of Evaporation on the Open Sea ; with a descrip-
tion of an Instrument used for indicating its amount. By T. W. Laidley,
Esq. •» •• •• •• •» •• ••»• 213

iv Contents.

Page.

lY.— On the AJpine Glacier, Iceberg, Diluvial and Wave Translation Theo-
ries; with reference to the deposits of Southern India, its furrowed and
striated Rocks, and Rock basins. By Captain Newbold, M.N.I., F.R.S,
Assistant Commissioner Kurnool, Madras Territory. With a plate. •# 217

y.~ Proceedings of the Asiatic Society for the month of March, 1845. . • xzzi

No. 160.

I. — Description of Caprolagus, a new Genus of Leporine Mammalia. By Ed*

Blyth, Curator of the Asiatic Society's Museum. With two plates. •• 247

II. — Report, by Lieut. E. J. T. Dalton, B.N.I., Junior Assistant, Commis-
sioner of Assam, of his visit to the Hills in the neighbourhood of the
Soobanshiri River. From the Political Secretariat of the Government of
India. With a map. .. •• .. .. .. .. 250

HI. — Notes, principally Geological, on the South Mahratta country—Falls of
Gokauk* Classification of Rocks. By Captain Kewbold, F.R.S. &c., As-
sistant Commissioner Kurnool. . • • • . • • • • • 268

IV. — An Account of the early Ghilj&ees. By Major R. Leech, C.B., late
Political Agent, Tor&n Ghilj&ees at K&l&t-i-Ghilj&ee. From the Political
Secretariat of the Government of India* •• •* •• .. 306

No. 161.

I. <— Report, &c* from Captain G. B. Tremenheere, Executive Engineer, Tenas-
serim Division, to the Officer in charge of the office of Superintending En-
gineer, South Eastern Provinces ; with information concerning the price of
Tin ore of Mergui, in reference to Extract from a Despatch from the Ho-
norable Court of Directors, dated 25th October 1848, No. 20. Communi-
cated by the Government of India. .. .. •• •• .. 329

II. — A Supplementary Account of the Hazarahs. By Major R. Leech, C.B.,

Late Political Agent, Candahar. •• •• .. •• .. 333

III.— Rough Notes on the Zoology of Candahar and the Neighbouring Districts.
By Capt Thos. Hutton, of the Invalids, Mussoorie. With notes by Ed.
Blyth, Curator of the Asiatic Society's Museum. C Continued* J .. 340

IV.— On the Course of the River Nerbudda. By Lieut-Colonel Ouseley,
Agent G.G., S. W. Frontier. With a coloured Map of the River from
Hoshungabad to Jubbulpoor. • • . . • . . . . . 354

v.— A Twelfth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India; being the Storms of
the Andaman Sea and Bay of Bengal, 9th to 14th November, 1844. By
Henry Piddington. .• .. •• .. .. .. «, 357

VI.— Some account of the Hill Tribes in the interior of the District of Chitta*
gong, in a letter to the Secretary of the Asiatic Society. By the' Rev. M.
Barbe, Missionary. .. .. •• .. •• .. .. 380

VII.— Proceedings of the Asiatic Society for the month of May, 1845. .. xxxix

Contents.

No. 162.

Pag«.

1.— Notes on the Religion of the Sikhf, being t Notice of their Prayers, Holi-
days, and Shrines. By Major R. Leech, C.B., Political Agent, N.W.P.
From the Political Secretariat of the GoTemment of India. • • . • 393

II.— Notes, principally Geological, across the Peninsula of Southern India, from
Kistapatam, Lat* 14** 17' at the Embouchure of the Coileyroo River, on the
Eastern Coast to Honawer, Lat. 14^ 16' on the Western Coast, comprising
a visit to the Falls of Gairsuppa. By Captain Newbold, P.R.8., M.N.I.
Assistant Commissioner Kurnool, Madras Territory. •• •• •• 396

III.— On the Meris and Abors of Assam. By Lieut. J. T. E. Dalton, Assistant
Commissioner, Assam. In a letter to Major Jenkins. Communicated by
the Government of India. •• •• •• •• .. .. 426

IV.— Notice of some Unpublished Coins of the Indo- Scythians. By Lieut.

Alexander Cunningham, Engineers. •• .. .. .. •• 430

v.— On Kunker formations, with Specimens. By Captain J. Abbott, B.A. •• 442

VI.— An account of the Early Abdalees. By Major R. Leech, C.B. Late

Political Agent, Candahar. •• .. .. •• .. .. 4J5

VU.— Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal for the month of June, 1845. Iv

9Fn2»^x

TO PART I. VOL. XIV.

AstroDomical refractions, Mr. Ivory's
Tables of mean-— revised and aug-
mented. By Major J. T. Buileau, 1

Ancient bed of the River Soane and
Site of Palibothra— Memorandum
on the. By £. C. Kavenshaw, Esq. 137

Alpine Glacier, Iceberg, Diluvial
and Wave Translation Theories;
On the— with reference to the depo-
sits of Southern India, its furrowed
and striated Kocks, and Uock
basins. By Captain Newbold, •.217

Account of the early Ghiljaees. By
Major R. Leech, 306

Course of study pursued by Students
in the Sanscrit College, Calcutta ;
Note of the. By W. Seton Karr, 135

Caprolagus, a new Genus of Leporine
Mammalia; Description of. By
£. Blyth, 247

Candaharand the Neighbouring Dis-
tricts ; Rough Notes on the Zoolo-
Sr of. By Capt. Thos. Button, of
e Invalids, Mussoorie. With
notes by Ed. Blyth, . . . . 340

Course of the River Nerbudda; On
the. By Lieut. Col. Ouseley, .. 354

Evaporation on the Open Sea; Ob-
servations on the rate of— with a
description of an Instrument used
for indicating its amount. By T.
W. Laidlay, Esq. 213

Early Abdalees ; An account of the.
By Major R. Leech, . • . . 445

History of Sindh. Translation of the
Toofut ul Kiram. By Lieutenant
Postans, .. .. 75-155

Hills in the neighbourhood of the
Soobanshiri River; Report of his
visit to the. By Lt. E. J. T. Dalton, 250

Hazarahs, A supplementary Account
of the. By Major R. Leech, .. 333

Hill tribe in the interior of the Dis-
trict of Chittagong ; Some account
of the. By Rev. M. barbe, .. 380

442

Pags^»

Kunker formations, with Specimens
By Capt. J. Abbott,

Law of Storms in India: An Eleventh
Memoir on the. Being the Storms
in the Bay of Bengal and Southern
Indian Ocean, from 26th Novem-
ber to 2nd December 1843. By
Henry Piddington, .. ••

Law of Storms in India; A Twelfth
Memoir on the. Being the Storms
of the Andaman Sea and Bay of
Bengal, from 9th to i4th Novem-
ber, 1844. By Henry Piddington, 357

List of Members, xxxiit

Meris and Abors of Assam ; On the.
By Lieut. J. T. £. Dalton, .. 426

Mergui Tin- ore ; Report, &c. from
Captain G. B. Tremenheere, . • 329

New or Little Known species of
Birds ; Notices and Descriptions of
various. By Ed. Blyth, .. .. 173

Officers and Members of the Asiatic
Society for 1845, xxxi

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society
for 1845, . . i-xvii-xxxi-xxxix-lv

Peninsula of Southern India, from
Kistapatam ; Notes, principally
Geological, across the. By Capt.
Newbold, 39S

Religion of the Sikhs, being a No-
tice of their Prayers, Holidays,
and Shiines ; Notes on the. By
Major R. Leech, 393

South Mahratta country— Falls of
Gokauk— Classification of Rocks.
Notes, principally Geological, on
the. By Captain Newbold,

Unpublished Coins of the Indo-
Scythians ; Notice |^ some. By
Lieut. Alex. Cunningham,

Vedinta Sara, or Essence of the V^-
danta, an introduction to the Ye-
danta Philosophy by Sadlnanda
Parivrltjak&charya, translated from
the original Sanscrit. By E. Roer, 100

268

430

INDEX TO NAMES OF CONTRIBUTORS

TO FABT I. VOL. XIV.

Page.

Abbott, Capi. J. On Kunker forma-
tions, with Specimens, • • .. 442

BoiLBAU, Major J. T., Mr. Ivory's
Tables of mean Astronomical re-
fractions, revised and augmented, 1

Bltth, Bd. Notices and Descrip-
tions of various New or Little
known species of Birds, •• •• 17S

''—' Description of Caprola-

sus, a new Genus of Leporine
Mammalia, 247

Barbb, Rev. M. Some account of
the Uiil Tribes in the interrior of
the District of Ghittagong, .. 380

CoHMiNGBAif, Lieut. Alex. Notice
of some Unpublished Coins of the
Indo-Scythians, 430

Dalton, Lieut. £. J. T. Report of
his visit to the Hills in the neigh-
boorhood of the Soobanshiri Ri-
ver, 250

On the

Meris and Abors of Assam, .. 426

Hdtton, Capt. ThoB. Rough Notes
on the Zoology of Candahar and
the Neighbouring Districts, of the
Invalids, Mussoorie. With notes
byEo. Blttu, 340

Laidlbt, T. W. Esq. Observations
on the rate of Evaporation on the
Open Sea; with a description of an
Instrument used for indicating its
amount, 213

Lbbch, Major. R. An Account of
the early Ghilj&ees, .. ..306

• A Supplementary

Account of the Hasarahs, . . • . 333
Notes on the Reli'

gion of the Sikhs, beine a Notice
of their Prayers, Holidays, and

Shrines, 393

— An account of the

Early Abdalees, . . • • . . 445

Page,
Nbwbold, Capt. On the Alpine
Glacier, Iceberg, Diluvial and
Wave Translation Theories : with
reference to the deposits of South-
ern India, its furrowed and striated
Rocks, and Rock basins, . . • . 217

— — Notes, principally

Geological, on the South Mahratta
country^ Falls of Gokauk— Classi-
fication of Rocks, 268

Notes, principally

Geological, across the Peninsula
of Southern India, from Kistapa-
tam, 398

OusBLBT, Lieut* Colonel, On the
Course of the River Nerbudda,.. 354

Piddinoton, H. Eleventh Me-
moir on the Law of Storms in
India, being the Storms in the Bay
of Bensal and Southern Indian
Ocean, from 26th November to 2d
December, 1843, 10

. Twelfth

Memoir on the Law of Storms in
India; being the Storms of the
Andaman Sea and Bay of Bengal,
9th to 14th November, 1844, .. 357

PosTANs, Lieut. Translations of
the Toofut ul Kiram, a History of
Sindh,t. .. .. .. 75-155

RoBB, E. V^d&nta-Sara, or Essence
of the V^d&nta, an introduction to
the Vid&nta Philosophy by Sad£-
nanda, Parivr^ak&cn&rya, trans-
lated from the original Sanscrit, • • 100

Ravbnshaw, E. Cf. Esq., Memo-
randum on the Ancient bed of the
River Soane and Site of Palibothra, 137

Sbton Karb, W. Esq. B.C.S.
Note of the course of study pursu-
ed by Students in the Sanscrit
College, Calcutta, • • . . . . 135

Tbbmbnhbbkb, Capt. G.B. Re-
port, &c., 329

JOURNAL

OP THB

ASIATIC SOCIETY

Mr, Ivory's Tables of mean Astronomical refractions, revised and
augmented by Major J. T. Boilbau B. £. Superintending Mag-
netic Observatory Simla*

The first of these Tables was published in the Philosophical Tran.
sactions of the Royal Society for 1823, pp. 49 1> et seq: and a second
paper and Table by the same author, appeared in the Philosophical
Transactions for 1838. The mean refractions for Zenith distances
under 83^ correspond exactly in both the above Tables, but the re-
fractions differ for Zenith distances between 83® and the horizon.

In Table I. of the original (of 1838) the mean refractions are given
for each degree only as far as Z. D. 70^ inclusive, and thence for
every 10' to the horizon. In the accompanying Tables intermediate
numbers have been obtained by interpolation to differences of the
third and second order^ and they have been so arranged that the
tabular refractions for that part of the Table of most practical utility
shall vary only between one and two seconds.

The numbers in the original Table for the last degree of Zenith
distance^ however, were found to give such irregular differences that
the whole of the intermediate numbers between the limits of 89^ and
90® have been obtained by differences to the third order, from the
mean refraction for 89^ i. e. 24' 26."8, and the horizontal refraction
34' 32." And although the alterations which this arrangement has

No. 157, No. 73, Nsw Sbribs. b

Mr, Ivory's Tables of mean

[No. 167.

introduced are of no practical importance/ the following detail of the
interpolations is inserted here as a guarantee for the course which has
been adopted.

TABLE L Interpolations between num' TABLE IL Interpolations between Ta-
hers as m the Original Table of 1838. bular refractions for Z, D, SB** is Z. D.^^P

Zen,
dist.

o
89.00

60.00

24:16.80

25 : 00.97
» ...
S5: 46.80

26:29.46
» ...
27 : li.20

28 : 00.86

* ...
«8: 49.50

29:m!24

* ...
30:SS.S0

SI : 28.12

* ...

32:t5.10

SS: 26.30
* ...
S4: 82.00

•••

• ••

87.40

• ••
•••
•••

95.30

•••

10S.70

•••

111.90

•••

K6.90

The numbers to winch asterisks are affixed^ are those of the original
Table.

With a view to facilitate the computation of numbers still interme-
diate between those in the present Table, Log. differences correspond,
ing to one minute of altitude and to one second of refraction, have been
given in separate columns.

The Tables (II and III of 1838) containing the Log eo.efficient for
Barometric pressure and for temperature, have been extended by con*
tinuing the application of the tabular differences to the limits of prac-
tical utility, and the co«efficients of the correction for altitudes under
10^ have been taken from their respective columns in the original Ta-
ble L and extended by interpolation as above.

The following examples, will explain the use of the Tables.

Let P* denote the height of the Barometer.
„ T. „ the temperature, Fahrenheit.
„ T. „ the Zenith distance of the object.

Wi5.J Astronomical refractions. 3

Then as far as 80" of Zenith distance the log mean refraction is
equal to Log. P. From Table r.

+ Log. T. From Tablr ii.
+ Log. Z. From Tablb hi,
and to the refraction so found, must be applied the following correc
tions when the Zenith distance exceeds SO"* vizt.

-~ T. (T. — 50".)
— b. (30 in.— p.)
The values of T. and b. will be found in Tjiblb iv.
Example L The observed Zenith distance of Capella being
80", 24', 09."4.

The height of the Barometer 29.73 and the Temperature 47."75.
Fahrenheit required the refraction ?

Log. P. 29.73 Table, i 9.99607

Log. T. 47.75 Table, 11 0.00214

Log. Z. 88** : 20' : 00 Table, in 3.08087

Propl. part for 04' : 09".4 = 04'. 157 840

Nearest Tabular refraction, . . . . 20' : 04".68 8.08748

Log. diff. 661 -?- 36 or Tab. diff. for 1".= + 18.37
T. (T.— 50*>) (Table iv.)= — .92+— 2.«25= + 2 32
b. (30 in. p.) (Table iv.)= —167 +,+.27— — 0.45

Mean refraction, 20':24".92

Example II. From the appendix to the Greenwich Transactions

for 1836.
To find the refraction for Zenith distance 83". 22', the Barometer

reading being 29.63 and Thermometer 58". 1.

Log. P. 29.63 Table, I. 9.99461

Log- T. 58."1 Table, 11. 9 99239

Log. Z. 83" 20' Table, in. 2.66759

Propl. part for 02' , 190

Nearest Tabular refraction, . . .. Ti 30".2 1 2S564 1

4 Mr. Ivory's Table$ offMan^ Sfc, QNo. 157.

Log. diff. 308. H- 94 or Tab. diff. for 1." =, + 03.28
T. (T.— 50') Table iv,=, -.08 X, + 8. 1 =,—00.65
b. (30 in. p.) „ — .14 X, + .37=, —00,05

Mean refraction by the Ubles, • • f: 32/79

Ditto ditto by P. Bessel's Tables, ap. ) «?' qi ''Ti
pendix, Qr. Tr. 1836, . . • . f ' ' "^^^ '^

Refraction by Ivory's Tables, .. •• + 1"08

When the altitude of the body is observed it is advisable to convert

it into Zenith distance by subtraction from 90% the proportional parts

of the Logs, being then additive.

Example III, The altitude of the sun's lower limb was observed

45": 15': 42''5, the Barometer standing at 23.33, and the Thermometer

at 47*2 Fahrt. required the refraction.

(90^ — 45^ 15.' 42".5) = 44^: 44': 17".5. = Z."

Log. P. 23.33 Table i. 9.89079

Log. T. 47^2 Table II 0.00266

Log. Z. 44«:30' Table in 1.75855

Prop, part for 14'.292 do. 357

Nearest Tabular number, .. .. 0': 44."80 1.65557

Log. diff. 43 -5- 96^ or Tab. diff, for 1"= + 0.45

Mean refraction, 0' : 45."25

The following' errata in the Original Table (PhiK Trans, for 1838)
have been corrected.

Mean Refraction for Z. D. 89"": 50' printed 32': 1 5". 10 should be 32':25". 1
Log. diff. Z.D. 89^:00' and 89^• 10' .. .. 2316 .. .. 2306

86^:40' and 86^:50' .. •. 1627 .. .. 1527
85'':40' and 85^-50' .. .. 1312 .. .. 1808
83*':00'and83*':10' .... 833 .• .. 933

H.E.IC. Magnetic Observatory, Simla, December, 1842.

(Tablb I.) Ivory's mean Attronomicai Re/ractiont. (Table II.) 61

Pabrbmhbits Thbrmombtbr.

Log.
arithm.

0.03952

0.03849

0.03746

0.03644

0.03542

0.03440

0.03338

0.03237

0.03136

0.03034

0.02933

0.02832

0.02730

04)2630

0.02531

0.02432

0.02332

0.02232

O.U2ia3

0.02034

0.01935

0.01837

0.01738

0.01640

0.01541

0.01444

0.01346

0.01248

0.U1I51

001063

O.U0957

0.00861

0.00764

0.00668

0.00572

0.00476

0.00380

0.00285

0.00190

O.O0094

0.00000

9.99906

9.99611

9.99717

9.996*23

9.99529

9.99434

9.99341

9 99248

9.99154

9.99061

9.98969

9.98875

998783

9.98690

9.98598

9.9B506

9.96414

9.96323

9.98231

9.98140

103

102

101

102

101

100

o
H

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130

Log.
aritlmi*

9.98240
9.98049
9.97958
9.97867
9.97777
9.97686
9.9759t>
9.97509
9.97416
9.97326
9.97237
9.97148
9 97058
9.96969
9.96880
9.96791
9 96703
9.96615
996527
9.96440
9.96352
9.96265
9.96177
9.96089
9.96002
9.95914
9-95827
9.95740
9-95953
9.95567
9.95480
9.95394
9 95307
9.95220
9.95135
9.95U50
9.94965
9.94880
9.94794
9.94709
9.94625
9.94540
9.94455
9.94371
9.94287
9.94203
9.94119
9.94035
9.93951
9.93868
9.93785
9.93701
9.93618
9.93535
9.93452
9.93370
9 93288
9 93205
9.93120
9.93041
9.92958

IM tCr

fiAROMBTBR.

«1
M

Ins.

32.0

31.9

31.0

30.9

30.0

29.9

29.0

28.9

28.0

27.9

27.0

26.9

..3

26.0

Log.
arithm.

0.02803
0.02667
0.02531
0.02394
0 02257
002119
0.01981
0.01842
0.01703
0.01564
0.01424
0.01284
0.01143
0.01002
0.00860
0.00718
0.00575
0.00432
0.00289
0.00145
0.00000
9.99855
9.99709
9.99563
9.99417
9.99270
999123
9.98975
9.98826
9.98677
9.98628
9.98378
9.98227
9.98076
9.97924
9.97772
997620
9.97467
9.97313
9.97159
9 97004
9.96848
9.9:>692
9.96536
9.96379
9.96221
9.96063
995904
995745
9.95585
9.95424
9.95263
9.95101
9.94939
9.94776
9.94612
9.94448
9.94283
994118
9.93952
9.93785

3.2

36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
46
47
47
ifi
49
49
249
50
51
51
52
52
52
53
54
54
55
56
56
56
57
58
58
59
59
60
61
61
62
62
63
63
64
64
65
66
67

,60
'S

Ins.

26.0

25.9

250

24.9

24.0

23.9

23.0

22.9

22.0

219

21.0

20.9

20.0

Log.
arithm*

993785

993618

993450

993281

9 93112

9 92942

9.92771

9.92600

9.92428

9 92255

9.92082

9.91908

9.91733

9.91558

9.91381

9.91204

9.91037

9.9U849

9.90669

9.90489

990308

9.90127

9 89946

9.89763

9.89579

9.89395

9.89209

9.89U-23

9.88837

9.88649

9.88460

9.88271

9.88U81

9.87890

9.81699

987506

987313

9 87118

9 86923

9 86727

986530

9.86332

9.86134

9.859.34

9.85733

9.85532

9.85329

9.85126

984921

9 84716

9.84510

9.84303

9.84094

9.83885

9.83675

9.83463

9.83251

9.83037

982883

9.82607

9.82391

<5j

200

201

203

205

206

207

209

310

212

214

216

Ivory's mean Astronomical Refractions, (Tabls III.)

Alt.

Zen*
diet.

Mean

Kefrac-

tion.

Log.
Z.

Log.

diff. for

Alt.

Zen.
dist.

Mean.
Refrac-

'^-

Log

• diff. for

1' of

l"of

Toi

, 1" of

o /

ZD.

Refn.

o /

0 /

tion.

ZD.

Refn.

/ tr

/ //

90.00

00.00

00.00.00

0.0000

46.00

44,00

00.56.35

1.75100

01.02

0.0085

45.30

44.30

57.85

1.75855

756

02.04

0.3097

2953

58.36

1.76611

741

03.06

0 4860

1728

44.30

45.30

59.39

1.77367

734

04.08

0.6112

1227

01.00.43

1.78123

727

05.11

0.7086

955

43.30

46.80

01.49

1.78880

714

00.06.14

0.7882

773

02.57

1.79687

701

07.17

0.8557

656

42.30

47.80

03.67

1.80396

690

08.21

0.9144

570

01.04.80

1.81155

672

09.25

0 9663

500

48.15

05.37

1.81535

667 1

10.30

1.01 29

448

05.94

1.819)5

667

11.35

1.0553

404

06.52

1.82296

667

00.12.42

1.0941

366

41.00

49.00

01.07.11

1.82678

648

13.49

1.1300

356

07.70

1.82060

648

14.56

1.1634

309

08.80

183442

637

15.66

1.1947

287

08.91

1.83825

628

16 75

1.2241

267

40.00

50.00

01.09.52

1.84208

628

17.86

1.2519

250

10.13

1.84592

624

00.18.98

1.2784

237

10.75

1.84976

624

20.11 1.3036

233

11.38

1.85861

611

21.26 1.3277

210

39 0O;5L0O|

01.12.02

1.85747

604

22.42 1.3507

199

12.66

1.86134

604

23.60; 1.3729

188

13.31

1.86521

595

24.80 1.3944

179

13.97

1.86909

588

0026.01

1.4151

171

38.00

52.00

01.14.64

1.87298

581

27.24

1.4352

163

15.31

1.87688

581

28.49

1.4547

156

15.99

1.88079

575

29.76

1.4736

149

16.68

1.88461

568

81.05

1.4921

143

37.00

53.00

01.17.38

1.88863

561

61.30

28.30

31.71

1.5012

135

18.08

1.89256

561

00.32.38

1.5102

134

18.80

1.89650

555

60.30

2930

33.05

1.5191

133

19.51

1.90044

547

33.72

1.5279

131

36.00

54.00

01.20.24

1.90440

542

59.30

30.30

34.40

1.5366

128

20.98

1.9U838

535

35.09

1.5452

125

21.73

1.91.237

531

58.30

31.30

35.79

L5537

121

45'

22.48

1.91637

525

00.36.49 i:5632

121

35.00

55.00

01.23.25

1.92038

520

57.30

32.30

37-20 1.5706

118

24.03

1.92440

515

87.93 1.5790

117

24.81

1.92843

517

56.30

33.30

38.66, 1.5873

114

25.60

1.93247

511

39.39 1.5955

112

34.00

56.00

01.26.41

1.93653

501

55.80

34 30

00.40.14! 1.6036

108

27.22

1.94060

503

40.89 1.6116

107

28.04

1.94469

499

54.30

35.30

41.65 1.6196

105

28.38

1.94879

488

42.42 1.6276

104

33.00

57.00

01.29.78

1.95291

485

53.30

36.30

43.21 1.6356

100

30.59

1.95704

480

44.10 1.6435

100

31.46

1.96129

477

52-30

37.30

44.80

1.4513

32.84

1.96536

474

00.-15.61

1.6591

32.00

58.00

01.33.22

1.96955

' 28

47 J

51.30

38.30

46.43

1.6668

34.14

1.97375

462

47.27

1.6746

35.06

1.97797

460

50.30

39.30

48.12 1.6823

85.99

1. 9822 1

456

48.99 1.6901

31.00

59.00

01.36.93

1 .98646

452

49.30

40.30

49.87 1.6978

37.89

1.99073

445

00.50.76" 1.7055

38.86

1.99502

442

48.30

41.30

51.66' 1.7131

.SO.a*)

1.9y984

436

52.471 1.7204

30.00

60.00

01.40.85

2.00368

434

47.30

42.30

53.49 1.7283

41.86

2.00804

432

54.43,1.7358

42.89

2.01242,

425

46.30

43.30

55.381 1.7434

48.94

2 01682

419

00.56.35 1.7510

29.00 61.00

01,45.01

2.02124

413

(Tabls III.) Ivory',

9 mean Astronomicai Refractions.

z-ll

Loga-
rithm.
Z.

Log. diff. for

Alt
o '

Zen.

diet.

o '

Loga-
rithm.
Z.

Loi{.

diff. for

^It d

0 t

Ut.

I'of
Z. D.

1' of
Refn.

I'of
ZD.

1" of
Refn.

i if

o //

».00 6

i.OO

1.45.01

2.02124

20.00

7O00

^19.86

X20185

45.73

2.02420

412

39.87

^20379

271

46.45

2.02717

411

40.59

2 20573

271

47.19

2.03015

404

41.31

2.20768

271

«)

47.93

2.03315

404

42.04

2.20963

271

48.68

2.03616

401

42.78

121159

266

&00C

>2.00

1.49.44

2.03918

398

2.43 52

2.21856

266

50.20

2.04221

398

44.26

2.21554

265

50.97

204526

896

45.01

^21752

265

51.76

2.04632

887

45.77

2.21951

262

52.55

2.05138

.387

46.53

2.22150

262

58.35

2.05446

885

47.80

2.22351

261

17.00 (

S3.00

1.54.17

2.05755

877

19.00

71.00

2.48 08

2.22562

269

SO 10

54.99

2.06065

377

48.86

2.22754

258

40 20

55 82

2 46877

377

49.65

2.22956

256

30 30

36.6G

2.U6690

374

5a45

2.23159

254

57.50

2.07004

373

51.25

2.23863

254

58.35

2.07319

371

52.06

2.23568

263

26.UO

64-00

1.59.22

2.07635

363

2.52.87

2.23773

263

2.00.10

2.07954

363

53.70

2.23979

849

4U 20|

00.99

2.08274

360

54,53

2.24186

249

01.89

2.08595

357

55.87

2.24394

248

02.80

2.08918

355

66.21

2.24603

248

03.72

2.09242

852

57.06

2 24812

246

25.00

65-00

2.04.65

2.09567

350

18 00

72.00

2.57.92

2.25022

244

05.59

2.09894

348

58.79

2.25233

243

06.54

2.10223

346

59.66

2,26446

243

30
40

07.51

2.10553

340

3.00.54

2.25657

241

06.49

2.10885

339

01.43

2.25870

239

09.48

2.11219

337

02.38

2.26084

238

24.00

66.00

2.10.48

2.11556

336

3.03.23

2.26299

238

11.50

2.11892

330

04.14

2.26515

237

12.53

2.12230

328

05.06

2.26732

236

1357

2.12570

427

05.99

2.26950

234

14.62

212912

826

06.93

2.27168

233

15.69

2.13256

322

07.87

2.27388

233

23.00

eiJOO

2.16.78

2.13602

317

17.00

73.00

3.08.83

2.27608

2'i8

17.88

2.13950

816

09.80

2.27829

228

4fl

► 20

18.99

2.14300

315

10.77

2.28051

227

) ^0

20.12

2.14652

312

11.75

2.28274

227

20 40

21.27

2.15006

308

12.74

2.28498

225

10 50

22 43

2.15362

307

13.74

2.28723

225

22.00 68^

2.28.61

2.15720

303

3.14.75

2.28948

22;s

) 10

24.81

2.16080

300

15.77

2.29174

222

1 4(

) 20

26.03

216442

297

16.60

2.29402

221

} 30

27.26

2.16806

296

17.83

2.29631

220

) 40

28.50

2.17172

395

10 50

18.88

2.29860

220

) 50

29.76

2.17540

292

06 55

19.94

2.30091

218

21.0(

) 69.00

2.3164

217911

290

16.00

74.00

3.21.01

2.30323

217

b 05

81.69

2,18097

287

22 09

2.30556

216

5 10

32.34

2.18284

287

,50

93.18

2.30789

i 15

330C

2.18471

884

'45

24.28

2.81023

213

D 20

83.66

2.18659

284

25.39

2.31259

213

b 25

34..^^

2.18847

981

26.52

2.31496

212

0 SO

2.S5.0(J

1 2.19036

281

3.27.65

2.31734

210

5 35

35.68

; 2.19226

279

28.79

2.31973

20b

0 40

> 36.36

» 2.19416

279

29.95

2.32213

207

5 45

37.05

2.19607

277

31.12

2.32454

206

0 50

» 87.75

» 2.19794

275

32 30

2.32696

205

5 5S

> 88.45

2.19992

275

33.49

2.33039

204

20O

0 70.0C

» X39.16

> 2.20185

272

15.00 75.00

3.3470

2.33184

203

Ivory's

mean

Astrvnomical Refractions, (Table III.

)

Zen.
dist.

Mean
Refract

Loga-
rithm.
Z.

Log.

diff. for

Alt.

Zen.
dist

Mean
Refract.

Loga-

rithm.

Log
I'oi

diff. tori

Alt.

V of

l"of

' 1" of

o /

Z.D.

Refa.

o /

o //

ZD.

Uefn.

O 1

1 II

1 //

15.00

75.00

334.70

2 33104

10.00

80.00

5.20.19

2.50541

35.92

2.33430

202

22.76

2.50887

135

37.15

2.33677

201

25.36

2.51237

134

38.39

2.33925

200

28.01

2.51589

133

39.65

2.34174

197

30.70

2.51943

132

40.93

2.34424

197

33.43

2.52300

13.

3.42.21

2.34676

196

5.36.20

2.52660

131

43.52

2.34929

196

39.02

2.53020

128 1

44.82

2.35183

195

41.88

2.03387

128

46.14

2.85438

193

44.19

2.53755

127

47.48

2.35695

192

47.74

2.54125

125

48.84

2.35953

190

50.74

2.54498

124

14-00

7600

3.50.21

2.26212

129

0900

81.00

553.79

2.54874

123

51.60

2 36473

188

56.89

2.55253

122

53 00

2.36735

187

600.04

2.55635

121

54.42

2.36998

185

03.24

2.56019

. 77

12U

55.85

2.37263

185

06.50

2.56409

119

57-30

2 375ii9

183

09.81

266798

118

3.58.76

2.37796

183

6.13.18

2.57192

117

4.00.24

• 2.38064

181

16.61

2.57589

116

01.74

2.38334!

180

20,09

2.57989

115

03.26

2.38606

179

23.64

2.58393

114

04.79

2.38879

178

27.26

2-58800

112

06.34

2.39154

177

30.94

2-59210

111

13.00

77-00

4.07.91

2.39430

176

08.00

82.00

6.34.68

2.59624

111

09.50

2.39708

175

38.49

2.60041

109

11.41

2.39987

173

42.37

2.60462

109

12.74

2.40268

l72

46.31

9.60886

108

14,39

2.40550

171

50.33

2.61313

106

16 06

2.40834

J7i

54.42

2.61774

105

.30

4.17.75

2.41119

l69

6 58.59

2.62179

104

19.46

2.41406

l68

7.02.85

2.62618

103

21.19

2.41695

07.19

2.63062

102

22.95

2.41986

l65

11.62

2.63509

lOl

24.72

2.42278

j65

16.13

2.63961

lOO

26.5!

2.42572

l64

20.73

2.64417

12.00

7800,

4.28.33

2.42867

162

07.00 83001

7.25.42

2.64877

30,17

2.43164

30.21

2,65341

32.04

2 43464

160

35.09

2.66809

33.93

2.43764

l59

40.07

2.66282

35.84

2.44066

l58

45.15

2.66759

37.78

2.44370

157

50.34

267241

4.39.75

2.44677

'56

7.55.64

2.67727

41.74

2.44985

155

8.01.04

2.68218

43.76

2.45295

l53

06.55

2.68713

45.81

2.45608

153

12.19

2.69213

100

47.89

2.45902

151

17.95

2.69718

iOl

49.99

2.46238

151

23.84

2.70229

102

11.00

79.00

4 52.12

2.46556

149

06.00

84.00

8.29.86

2.70746

103

54.28

2.46876

148

36.02

2.71267

104

84
83

56 47

2.47198

147

42.31

2.71793

105

58.69

2.47552

146

48,75

2.72225

106

5.00.94

2.47848

145

55.33

2,72862

107

03.22

2.48176

144

9.02.04

2.73405

109

05.54

2.48507

143

08.96

2.73954

110

07.89

2.48840

142

16.03

2.74509

111

10.28

2.49175

140

23.25

2.75070

112

45;

12.70

2.49513

140

30.65

2.75637

113

15.66

2.49853

138

38.23

2.76210

115

17.66

2.50196

137

05 55

46.00

2.76970

116

10.00 80.00

5.20.19

2.50541

136

05.30.85.00

9,53.96

2.77376

117

vm*.

(Table IV. 9

A\S. for

|-ri>.ni

Horn.

BcfimcL

tsfi:

Z>n.
dill.

I'of

l"of

Alt.

diff.blr

dlKfor

Z.D

aitn.

l'Z.D.

1'Z.D.

9.53 96

2.77376

10.00

aaoo

.03

10.0ZI3

2.77969

]I9

09. OU

81.00

.04

10.52

2.7B5G9

130

U8.0U

8-i.ou

.05

.«

19.11

2.79176

1-21

S2.30

.06

.08

37.90

2.79789

123

07.00

8S.00

.07

.001

.10

36.93

2.8U409

124

83.15

.06

.11

.001

46.21

2.81037

136

.09

.12

10.&5.75

LSI 673

127

.09

.14

11.05.55

IS23I6

128

06.00

81.00

.10

.15

16.60

2.82967

130

.16

.002

25.90

2.83626

132

.18

36.31

2.84393

133

0.15

.13

.30

1U7.43

-2.8496S

136

05.00

E U

.IS

.003

.3-2

58.66

3.866a3

1S7

.17

■34

.003

IZ 10-21

28634i

139

.18

.27

22.10

2.B7046

140

.30

.29

34.S4

2.87757

142

.31

.33

46.94

2.88176

144

.33

.003

.S4

1X69 93

2.89205

146

04.00

8 »

.24

.003

.37

JNM

13.13.31

2.89944

I4S

.-26

.39

27.11

2.90693

150

.-29

.43

41-34

2.91463

152

.31

.47

bi.99

X93220

154

.34

.61

SXb

14.11.13

8.93999

156

.36

.57

26.76

2-93790

158

03-00

8 0

.39

.004

.62

4X9U

2.94991

160

.41

.67

.008

59.54

162

.43

.71

IS. 16.75

165

.45

.75

34.55

167

.47

.005

.79

S2.9S

a97906

169

.50

.83

16.11.95

3 98764

172

.53

.87

31.64

2.9963&

174

.55

.91

.010

52 03

S.O0SI3

i?7

.58

.96

17.13.16

S.UI1I7

180

.61

.013

35.06

3.02329

182

.63

.006

1.07

67.77

3.03254

.66

1.13

ia21.33

3.04192

188

02 OU

88.00

.69

1.19

18.45,76

3-05144

190

.74

.009

1.-21

J)I7

19.11.07

3.061 10

193

It]

.78

1.32

1S.37..35

3.07091

196

1,41 1

30.01.6S

3.06087

200

1.50

20.33.09

3.09099

203

.92

1.58

21.02.60

3.10ri7

-206

.96

.011

1.67

2I.3S.28

3.11170

309

.03

1.75

.025

210j.2a

3. 12-229

-212

.012

1.87

22.38.47

3.1330&

215

!is

2.00

2S. 13.11

S.I4S98

319

.19

.013

2.13

2349.2

3.15509

323

.36

*-2J

34.-26.8

3.16637

226

01.00

89.00

.32

.038

2.36

35.06

3.17783

229

.42

2.48

.043

25.46.9

3.18917

333

■28

.52

.70

26.296

3.20130

-237

2.91

37-14.2

3.21331

240

.73

.13

28.00.8

3.-,»asi

244

■2G

.83

3.34

2S.4S.4

3.23789

248

.93

3.56

.098

29.40 3

3.35046

251

2.06

3.77

U.S3.S

3.36333

35S

3,20

4.05

3I.W.9

S.27630

359

234

4.34

.067

3127.1

8.28938

364

2.48

.026

4.67

SS.28.1

3.30378

-26tt

5.00

iwitm

34-32

3.31639

272

004W

90.00

An Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Storms in Jndia^ beings the
Stroms in the Bay of Bengal and Southern Indian Ocean^Jrom 2Gih
November to fid December^ 1843. By Henrt Piddington; tiHiA
a Chart.

In this memoir, for much of the material of which I am as usual
indebted to the zealous exertions of Capt. Biden, Master Attendant of
Madras, we have the advantage of tracing at the same time storms
raging on the North and South sides of the Equator, of having a re-
gister of the weather almost upon the Equator while the storms were
blowing on both sides, and finally of tracing with abundant data in the
dangerous " Storm track" (as I have called it in another publication,)*
extending from 5° to 15' South and from Tff* to 90' £. a most severe hur-
ricane, and this investigation has moreover developed a new feature in
these storms, viz. that there are some which are comparatively ^a/^'on-
ary ! having but an exceedingly slow progressive motion ; and should
this be found by future research to prevail frequently, it will be of im-
portance both in our theoretical and practical views of storms. It will
be found in the postcript to the Memoir that after this was sent to the
press I obtained from the Mauritius, the details of a storm there, in
which a vessel, the Charles Heddle, was fully proving for us by what
I may call a beautiful experiment, the truth of our researches here !

I have as usual first given the documents carefully abridged, then a
Tabular view of them for each hemisphere, a summary of the grounds
from which the positions of the centres of the storms on different days
are developed, and finally a few remarks on the whole.

Copy of Report kept at the Master Attendants Office MadraSyfram

Captain Biobn.

Barometer.
8 A. M. 4 p. M. 10 p. M.
30M Ifovemher 1843.-6 a. ii. North West wind, North
current strong and high surf* 7 a. ii. North West

wind, current very strong, high, and irregular surf, •• 30.012 29.925 29.997
1^/ December 1843«— 6. a. ii. North West wind, North
current, strong, high and irregular surf no boats or Cat*
tamarans could cross the surf. Bain 29.964 29.877 29.953

* Horn Book of Storms p. •

1845.] Seventh Memoir oh the Law tf Stormi in India, 1 1

Barometer.
8 A. M. 4 p. M. 10 p. M.
'id December ]843.~6 a« m. North West wind, North cur-
rent, strong irregular and high snrf, cloudy, .. •• 29.944 29.861 29.916
IMtto.— 6-30, p. M. North wind, North current, strong and
very high surf, no boats or Cattamarans could cross the
surf. Raining, •• .. ,. •• .. •.
3(1 December 1843.~4-55, a. m. North East wind, North

current and high surf; cloudy weather, 29.9d6 29.893 29.986

DiUo^ — 3-15, p. M. South East wind, South current, high

surf and rain,. • •• •• ••

DUto. — 6 p. H. South East wind. South current and rain,
4<A December 1843.— 5 a. m. East wind. South current,

high and irregular surf ; driuling rain, 30.006 29.912 29.988

DUto. — 10-30, A. M. East wind, South current strong, and

moderate surf, •• •• •• •

(Signed) Charlbs Bidkm.

Abridged hog of the Ship Vxbnon, Captain J. Gimblbtt, from
Madras to Calcutta, reduced to civil time.

The Vernon left Madras roads, on the 30th November 1843, at

7. p. M. and stood to the East, with a fresh monsoon from N.N.E.
till midnight.

let December^ — a. m. strong breeze N. N. E. till noon when Lat.
12" 5' N., Long. Chro. SS*" 29', E., Bar. 29.68., Symp. 29.52:,
p. M. fresh gales to midnight with the wind veeriDg at 9 p. m.
to N. £. and at midnight to E.N.E.

2d December, — a. m . heavy squalls ; at 2 wind shifted to E. S. E.
with confosed sea and much lightnings Bar. 2964. 9 a. m. wind E. by

8. moderating a little ; noon squally and heavy sea Lat. D. R. 11® 48'
N. Long. D. R. 83'' 38'> Bar. 29.69., Symp. 29.54. Ther. 81''
p. M. strong gale Easterly, moderatiug to fine, at 7 p* h* when wind at
£. N. £.

Eleventh Mtmoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 157.

1^1
1.1
It

111

3.-I'
111
111

!j|

^^1 a

s.S*

i
1

1
1

in
I 111

1 w-

? 1

iJfi

ki iiPJIil

IS3S 3i|,-gs3g.«a

ffil pIlM!!

iji '

" jiriyiiiij

£ MC r

i? 1 Si Ji Jus

?M£ 4

:2 ! s ! a ! S MS

SSSSSS3 £
S ! iS M J 1

! i

SS 8 £S«S ZSSZSSS
■ 1 ■ S ! : 1 ! I ! 1 i i i

-.M.B0OH 1 L i i M { ' ! i ; Hi i MM M ! M ! i

." . 1'' n " 11'' 1 l'

■5 i Siii|!i|H;

|Hf 1

ii 1 liniiiiii;

iiiiiiiiiiii

1 1
1 J

1 1 i J i
J ■ i 1 1 J

i i

1845.] Eievenih Memoir an the Law qf Siorm» in India, 18

Report of the Barque Niagara Capi. W. Champion, forwarded by

Captain Bidbn.
Friday Ui December 1843.— LaU 10^ N.» Long, 87<> E., ezpe.
a hard gale from S. W. to £. S. E. with a tremendous high
on ; lost sails and sustained other damage, strong gales from East-
ward on Saturday the 2d. On approaching the coast, found the
weather more moderate and a smoother sea ; during the above days
it rained incessantly, and the Bar. fell to 29.10, Ther. 78*^0'.

Abridged Log of the Ship Candahar, Capt W. Ridlbt, from the
Mauritius bound to Calcutta ; reduced to civii time.

26th Nov. 1842.-^Wind variable from N.N.E., N.b. E., and N.
E. b. N., Course North 54'' W. 94', Lat account 8» 19' N., Long. 84<'
W E., heavy squalls Bar. 29.80.

27th November, — To noon cloudy, wind N. E., strong wind till
midnight when N. E. b. £., Lat. noon 9^ 5' N., Long. 83^ 60', Sunset
heavy squalls. Bar. not marked.

28^ November, — Strong Monsoon N. E. b. E. 2 a. m. veering to
Northward 11 a. m. Violent squall ; noon heavy weather, Lat. account
9^ 15' N-, Long. E. 83° 45', heavy squalls and strong monsoon till
midnight. Bar. 29.70.

29ih November — Heavy breeze N. b. £. with squalls, noon every
appearance of a storm, Lat. 9° 26' N., Long. 83'' 48' E. 4 p. m. rapidly
increasing. At 6 wind North ; laid to, heavy squalls and rain, Bar.

29.7.
20th November. — Heavy gales, and tremendous squalls. Wind

1 A. M . N. W. by N. Lat. 9° 40', North, Long. 83'' 57' E. 1 1 a. m.
terrific squall of wind and rain. Bar. 29.50. p. m. heavy gale N. W.
to midnight.

1st Deeember.'^A. m. heavy gale N. W. with terrific squalls. At

2 A. M. wind N. b. E. 8 a. m. N. W. b. W. Noon, to 3 p. m. very
little wind, Lat. lO"* 32' North, Long. 84'' 3' E. At 3 p. m. wind
Mfted to S. W., Bar. fell to 29.40., 5 p. m. shifted again to N. W.,
9 p. M. set fore-sail ; at 10 wind veered again to S. W., midnight, gale
appearing steady, shook out close reefs, steering North.

14 Eieventh Memoir on ike Law ef Statme m India. [No. 157.

N. B« — From 11 a. m. to midnight steering North 41 per hour. At
11 and 12^ 4^ per hour*

2nd December* — 1 ▲. m. gale suddenly increased to a most violent
storm S* W«, hove to under try-sails ; 4 a. m. South. 5 to 6 raging with
increased fury. Bar. 39*40» 8 a. m. more moderate, bore up steer-
ing North 6 miles. At 10 wind South. Noon Lat account ll*" ID'
North, Long. 84'' 04' E., Bar. a. m . 29.60, 2 p. m, steering N. N. W.
wind S.S.E. at 4 N. W. by N. wind S. E. 11 p. m. passed a ship, steer-
ing to the S. W. midnight. Bar. 20.80.

Zrd December.^A. m. Strong breeze S. E. day.light steady, noon
Lat Obs. 12^ Sr, Long. 84" 7^ fine weather.

Abridged Log of the Ship Fazzulbarry, Capt H. Handle y from
Bombay bound io Calcuita, reduced to civil time.

27th November. 1843. — At noon moderate breeze from E. S. £• but
threatening looking weather to the Eastward. Lat. 5^ 38^ N., Long.
Chr. 88^ 40', Bar. 29.72, and folliDg, Ther. 82<*. For the last two days,
current 110 miles to the Westward. Remark by Capt Handley, at
the beginniDg of this log. '' Observed many thick white clouds densely
packed to the Eastward which I have always found to precede an
Easterly gale."

p. M . Strong breezes Easterly (and at 8 p. m . E. N. E.) dark eloudy
weather and very threatening appearance to the Eastward with
heavy N. E. sea on, increasing to a strong gale with daric threatening
weather and heavy sea; Bar. 29.65.

28/A November* — 6 a. m. Wind N. E. Noon strong gale with
dark threatening weather to the N. E. making all preparation for a
gala Lat. T"" 22' N., Long. Chro. 8810., Bar. 29.54, Ther. 81.0. p. m.
Wind E. N. E. heavy gale with thick dark weather. Sh.dO p. m. saw
the '* John Brightman/' steering to the Southward. Midnight gale
increasing, Bar. 29.45.

fi9th November. — a. m. gale blowing most furiously^ saw a ship
running to the Southward. 10 wind N. E^ b. E. marked at noon N* E.
Bar. 29.14^ Ther. 83^' No observation. Long. 87" 20'. ^. m. furious
gale N.N. E. Bar. 29.40. At 11.30 ship in distress and Arab crew

1845.] Eieventh Memoir on the Law of Siormt in India. 15

alarmed. Wii^d at Nortbi bore up at midnlgbt ruDniiig 8. E. and at
3 A. M . on 30th. S. S. £.

20ih November. — Running to the 8» S. £• 6^ knou. 3 a. m. gale
at the greatest fury " blowing so bard that it was scarcely posdble to
hold cm;" at 8, a little more moderate; noon moderating Cut, but
Barometer running low 29.40» Ther. 82^, Lat. indilferent Obs.
T 22' N., Long. 87* 35' £., having since midnight made 74
miles to the 8. 8. £. and South. 8 p. m. wind N. N. £., course 8. £•
5' per hoar; winds marked as variable N. N. £• to 8. W. at 7 f« h.
when (from 5 p. m. ship had only been going 1.4 knots) remarks are " va*
riable dark cloudy weather and a high cross sea; easterly gale
broken, but Barometer very low, 29.31. At 7 ?• m. ''a heavy Westerly
sea rolling up and overpowering the Easterly sea" run from Noon to
8 p. m. S. £• 32 miles : a brig in sight. At 8 p. m . dark gloomy
weather with packed masses of clouds to the 8. W., vivid lightning. Ves-
sel steering N. £. 23 miles, from 8 to midnight^ when a strong breeze
from the S. W. and the S. Westerly sea very high, dark threatening
weather, vessel running 8 knots to the N. £.

lei Decefnber.^—A, m. Increasing gale ; at 4 a. m. violent and severe
gale S. S. W. if possible worse than before. 7, tremendous 8. 8. W,
gale. Bar. 29.30 to 9 a. m. when Bar. on the rise ; at 10 a. m. Bar.
29. 45 gale moderating; at 11> 29.55 strong gales from 8outh; Lat.
indifferent obs. 9^ 55' N. Long. 88^ 00' £., Bar. 29.65., Ther.
82., p. If. Wind 8. 8, W., course N. £. 9^ knots, and run 107 miles ; to
midnight strong gule ; 3 f« m. Bar. 29.75. 10 p. m. 29.80. Wind
8oath, midnight moderating and sky clearing.

2d December.— Midnight to noon N. £. 51^ miles N. £. b. N.
494 miles. A. M. Wind 8. 8. £• 6 a. m. 8. £. 11 a. m. £. 8. £. At
noon fine weather ; Lat. 1 1"* 17' N., Long. 89*' 45', Bar. 29.90, Ther.
83*.

Madras. The Colonbl Bubnby.

The barque Colonel Burney,{rom Moulmein to Bombay passed by
Galle on the 10th instant, under jury masts, having lost her main and
mizen masts in a heavy gale on the Ist, in Lat. 6" 50' N., Long.
Sb*" 20' E.— Record, Dec. 30.

16 EUvenih Memoir an the Law of Sianm in India. [No. 157.

Extract of a letter from Capt. Durham, of the Barque Col. Bubnby
to hie onmers dated, 28th December, 1843*

Mb88B8. ApCAB and Co.

Dbar Sib8, — I beg to report the arrival of the Col. Barney here
yesterday, after a passage of 33 days from Rangoon. I have lost main
and mizen-masts by the deck during a heavy gale in Lat. 6^ N.,
Long. 85® £., the vessel was thrown on her beam-ends ; to save ship
and cargo I cut away my masts, when she righted with 7 ^^set water
in the hold. Your obedient servant,

(Signed,) R. B. Durham.

Report from Kattb, Ceylon^ forwarded by Capt. Bidbn.

My Dbar Captain Bidbn. — You will no doubt have heard of the
gale we have lately experienced down here ; and as it was evidently
one of the rotatory description I send you an account of it, supposing
that any information on this subject will be interesting. It appears to
have travelled in a W. S* Westerly direction, the Southern portion of
the circle passing over Kayts, Delft island and Paumbum: At Manar,
although the weather had a wild appearance, it was not felt at all. I
was myself at Paumbum at the time, where I noted the changes closely ;
but at the other places, the variations may not be so correct : still they
are sufficiently so to trace the track of the gale. To begin then with
my windward station, Kayts.

It commenced here from the N. W. about noon on the 1st; increas.
ing in violence till 6 p. m. of the 2d, between which and midnight
it blew with great fury, accompanied by a very heavy fiUl of rain.
On the morning of the 3d it shifted to W. S. W. strong, and by noon
moderated at South.

At Delft island on the 1st the wind which had been moderate all
day at N. W. freshened towards evening from the same quarter, and
gradually veered round to between W. N. W. and W. by S ; at which by
6 A M. on the 2d it was blowing a heavy gale. This continued all that
day and night till 1 1.30 a. m. on the 3d when the wind suddenly

1845.] EleomUk Memoir on the Law of Siomu in India. 17

chipped round to S. by W. and moderated by daylight ; next
morning the wind was from S. S. E. and eventually settled at S. E.

At Panmbum.

1st A. M. Wind fresh at N. W.

p. M. More moderate at N. E. ; freshening during the night but fine*

2d. A. M. 6 Moderate N. N. W. very ckmdy.

10 Freshening and veering to the Westward ; Ther 72^ ; lower than it
has ever been before during the last 4 years ; noon very fresh at N. W.
with confused appearance, scud flying fast and low from Norths 3 p. m.
fmh, W. by S.

6. Ditto W. S. W. Scud still flying from North, but not so Cut ;
heavy bank of ndn to N. E. but without any appearance of wind from
that quarter.

9. Increasing at W. S. W. Midnight, hard gales at W. S. W. with
very heavy rain.

* 3d. A. M. 6, Sky a perfect lead colour, gale and rain continuing from
same quarter till 3 a.m. when it moderated and p.m. veered to S. S. W.
aad South ; scud now flying to N. E.

6. Strong breezes from S. W. to S. S. E. the wind not remain,
ing flteiidy for two consecutive minutes, still thick and hazy with
rain.

4/ft A. M. Fresh South to S. S. E. and hazy.

You will find it easy with these dates to trace the progress of the
whirlwind from Kayts to Paumbum, and if it continue in the same
eourse it must coast along the shore of Madura and part of Tinnevelly,
going to sea again from the Malabar coast at a little to the North of
CapeComorin ; leaving Colombo untouched ; a matter to be rejoiced at,
ss the eraft there at this fine season would hardly have been prepared
Inr a blow from any point South of West.

My vessel had a very narrow escape, having parted and drifted to
within 80 yards of a reef. She lost bowsprit, rudder and boats, had
her stem stove in and was otherwise much injured ; but fortunately
the wind coming round enabled her to get a start olDT and run round to
leeward of the island where I picked her up a sad plight. We are
repairing her now and I hope to be at sea again by the end of the
week.

(Signed) J. J. Franklin.

18 Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Storms in India* [No. 157.

BarqueQAK^miLfrom Ceylon towards Madras^ reduced to Civil tifne*

A long detailed extract of this vessel's log was kindly sent me by
Capt. Biden, and it would have been highly interesting from her posi-
tion between b^ and 13^ North Lat., had any Long, accompanied it, but
unfortunately there was none. And we are thus reduced to the necessity
of saying only that she had,

On the 25M November Winds E. to N. W. in Lat. at Noon i?

b& N.

2Qth November.^W'mds Northerly in 5*^ 43' N., strong breezes and
cloudy.

27th November. — Bar. 28.80., (by Capt. Biden*s correction, 29.50.^)
No observations, winds apparently N. E. to N. N. E.

28th November.— Wind N. E. by E. to N. N. W. No observations,
weather hazy and much rain.

29th November.— li. W. to N. N. E. and again W. N, W. ; light#
winds, cloudy and squally.

30th November.— N.N. W. Westerly and S.S.W. winds. Lat.
6« 57 North.

Ist December. ^lAi. 9^ 51' N. winds Southerly increasing at 4 p. k.
to a strong gale obliging the vessel to scud under a reefed fore-sail.
, 2d. Decem^fr.— Moderating, Lat. 12'' 17' N. p. m. S. E. wind.

Abridged Log of the Brig Bittbrn, Captain Q. Scott, from the
Mauritius to Madras, forwarded by Capt. Bidbn.*

28th November 1843 1 p.m. Wind W. S.W. fresh breeze and

cloudy; 7> Bar. 29.50 ; at 10 p. m., hard squalls.

29th November. — 11 wind S.W. first part strong breezes, middle
and latter parts fresh gale, with squally weather and rain. 9 a. x.
Bar. 29.35. Noon, fresh gale and cloudy, Lat. Obs. 5^ 33' N.

1 p. M. wind S. W. fresh gale and squally; at 4 Bar. 29.24; at 3
wind S. S. W.; at 5 South more moderate but threatening in appear-
ance, made preparation for bad weather ; 10 wind S.S.E , 12 squally
with small rain.

* With this log also no Longitudes are given.

1845.] Eleventh Memoir en the Law of Stornu in India. 19

^fUh November. — At 3 a. m. wind East ; at 6, wind E. N. E. squally ;
at 7 Bar. 29.34 ; noon, fresh gale and doady, Lat. Obs. 8^ 23' N.

1 p M • wind £. N. E. fresh gale and cloudy, at 3 wind N. E .by E.
at 5 Bar. 29.30, 8 Bar. 29.40. Hard squalls with small rain; II
wind £ N. K. fresh gale throughout with frequent hard squalls and
small rain ; under storm trysails.

!«/ Decefnber. — 3 a. m. furled the fore topsail, 5 Bar. 29.30, 7 more
moderate, 10 wind East, Bar. 29.24. Noon, fresh gale and cloudy,
Ut. Obs. 9*^ 49' N.

1 p. V. wind S. E. fresh gale with hard squalls, 5 wind South, 8 hard
squalls with small rain, 6 Bar. 29.35, fresh gale throughout with fre-
quent hard squalls and small rain. Midnight Bar. 29.49.

2d December. — 2 a. m., wind S. S. E. very hard squalls with small
rain, 4 Bar. 29.60, 5 more moderate, i 1 wind S. E., noon more mo-
derate. Bar. 29.60. Lat. Obs. 11'' 21' N. after which fine weather.

Report from the Barque Mary Imric, Captain Boyd, forwarded by

Captain Bidbn.
30/A November f 1843.— Blowing a strong breeze from N. N. E.
all possible sail set, daylight the weather became very cloudy, heavy
dark masses rising in the North and passing over with increasing
velodty to the Southward. Noon, weather dismally dark, with a very
suspicious appearance, sun obscured, Lat. by account 12^ 20' North,
p. X., the sea rising and the breeze increasing fast, took fn ail small
sails and sent down royal and top.gallant yards, and close reefed the top.
sails, indeed at this time I would have been induced to lay the
vessel to, the appearance of the weather was so bad ; as well as being
mider the impression, that the farther you run into a storm the more
likely yoa are to suffer from its effects* had the Barometer not kept
well up; at daylight it stood at, •• 30 03

At noon it rose to, • • . . 30 1 1

2 p. M. down to, . . . • 29 83
where it continued till midnight, at which time it blew a terrific gale
with a heavy cross sea, wind steady atN. N. £. and scudding under

* This is the old axiom. It depends of course on which side of a stoim circle the
ship is, to be correct. A ship should certainly never run irUo a storm, but she may
as certainly often run out of it»-^H, P.

20 Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 157*

two close reefed top-fiiails ; I may here add that I never saw the m^ciiry
fluctuate so much, although it never feil lower than 29. 60.*

\st December. — From midnight till daylight, the gale continued ^th
unabated force, with frequent hard squalls and heavy rain^ and a
dreadful sea running, that washed away nearly all the bulwarks,
and drowned nearly the whole of the live stock. The sea was un-
commonly cross, and evidently produced from other causes, besides the
gale we were then in^ and had we not taken the precaution to get every
thing well secured on deck> as well as made secure aloft, the eonse*
quences might have been serious ; towards noon the weather cleared
away so far as to enable me to measure the sun's altitude, which placed
us in lO"* 4' N. Long. 84"* V £. p. m. the gale continued
with very unsettled weather, wind veering round to the Westward,
Bar. 29.60; towards midnight weather tolerably clear overhead,
but a dense wild looking haze all round the horizon, Bar. 29.25.

2nd December, — The wind continued to veer to the Westward till
2 A. H. when it fell nearly calm, the weather then looking dismal
with continued flashes of vivid lightning and loud peals of thunder^ got
all the canvas secured as fast as possible, which we had just time to
do when the gale burst out from about S. S. W. Fortunately we were
prepared for it, and had nothing set but a new small close reefed main*
top sail, which we lay to under till noon. Bar. stationary at
29.25. It is impossible for me to describe the sea that we had to contend
with. It had been blowing a gale (and no ordinary one,) from N. N. E.
round to S. S. W. for the last three days, and every way we looked a
mountain of water appeared coming towards us. Shortly after noon
the Bar. started up to 29.80, but the gale continued without any
abatement till midnight.

2rd December. — The gale began gradually to abate and the Sea to
fall ; Barometer at daylight up to 29.90.

Abridged Log of the Ship Ftzul Currbeh, Captain J. Ballantinb,
from Calcutta towards the Mauritius, reduced to civU time.

2Qth November, 1843 Noon, fine breeze N. and cloudy, Lat.

T 50' N. Long. 83** 59' E., course South, 7 knots per hour. p. u. and
to midnight squally. Wind steady at North and N. by £• .

* These fluctuatioBS are highly iDteresting particularly when limits are given.«-H. P.

1B45.3 Elevenih Memoir on the Law €f Storms in India. 21

VJth November.— K. v. to 9; Wind aboat North ; 10 to Noon N.N. W.
aqoAlly ; noon Lat 5"" IT N. Long. 83'' 36' £., 9 p. m. heavy squalls,
nind and rain from N. N. W. to midnight.

28^ November — a. m. to noon, fresh breeze, dec. tolerably elear ;
wind varying N. N. W. to N. W. b N., 8.30 a. m. an English bark
standing to the Northward and Eastward. Noon Lat 2" fl N. Long.
83° 40|^ E- ; by 8 p.m. increasing to fresh gale W. b S. ; to midnight
course South, 8 knots throughoat.

29iA November.^A, m. fresh gale West increasing with heavy
aqoalls to a strong gale and sea by noon, when Lat. 00° M' 8., Long.
84° 30^' £., Current of about 24 miles to the Eastward, p. u. Gale
continuing and increasing at times, to midnight, wind strong at West
sod course South 7 cmd 8 per hour.

30lA November.—^ a. m. more moderate, noon fresh gales. Wind
steady at West throughoat. Lat. account 3° 50^ 8., Long. 85"" 2T
E. Current of 21 to the Eastward, p. v. more moderate and clear,
wind West ; and at 7 p* h. W. ^ S., midnight moderate and clear, a
strong sea from the W. S. W.

\^ December, — a. m. a little squally ; by 10 a. m. wind at N. N. W.
light 3 knot breeze; noon fine, Lat. 5° 39' S. Long. 85'' 37i' E. Current
and sea estimated by Captain Ballantine at 29' to the E. N. E. a
strong sea from the W. S. W. p. m. winds N. N. W., and at 9 N. W.
and fine to midnight.

2dDecember — a. m. to noon, light N. N. E. winds with a heavy head
sea. (Ship steering S. W. by S.) Lat. e^" 41' S. Long. 85<>00f £. no
current, but the sea has retarded the ship's progress 10 miles.

Mauritius Ship NBWs/r^m the Englishman.
We are indebted to Captain Renaut of the Ship Active, for the
following details respecting the hurricane which he experienced on the
30th November. On the 24th November, the weather was very tem-
pestuous, blowing from the S. W. and veering round to the N. W.
then N. E. and finally settled at E. on the 30th, and blew a perfeet
hurricane for 48 hours in Lat. 10° 23' S.and Long. 85° 1?' E. The gale
abated on the 2nd December in Lat. 13° 58' S. and Long. 13° 31' E,
The Ship sustained the loss of a few sails and a quarter boat ; but for-
tunately none of the coolie passengers on board sustained any injury.

22 Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Snorms in India, [No. 157.

The Bark Ward, Chapman^ from Bombay, reports haTinnezperienoed
a hurricane in Lat. 12'' 30' S. and Long. 84° dCy £. commencing on
the 30th November from S. W. and blowing right roond the compass.
It abated however on the 3rd December, Lat. 14° S. and Long.
79° 30' £ ; she lost a few sails.

Abridged Log of the Barque Flowers op TJqie, Captain Annand,
from Madras to the Mauritius, reduced to civil time.

24th November, 1843. — The Log worked back from 25th, gives for
this day, Lat 4° 5T, Long. 84'' 33' E. with light Southerly and S. S.
W. airs and breezes, from noon to midnight.

25M November, — a. m. heavy squalls and rain, wind S. and S. b
W. to noon when strong gale about S. S. W. Lat. 5^* 36* S. Long. 85'
27' £-9 Bar. 29.80, Ther. 81° high cross sea. p. m. to midnight strong
gale S. W. by S. with squalls and rain ; preparing for bad weather*
Midnight Bar. 29.68.

26th November, — To Noon gale increasing from S. W. Lat. 6° 5' S*
Long. 86° 21' £., Bar. 29.62, Ther. 81°. p. m. increasing and S. W. b.
W. 6 p. M. hove to under bare poles. Heavy sea running, midnight
the same.

2Jth November,^^ a. m. weather a little clearer, noon heavy gales
Lat. 6<' 20' S. Long. 88° 4' £., Bar. 29.57> Ther. 83^ Easterly current
of 60' since noon of the 26th. p. m. wind W. N. W. At 10 N. W. to
midnight.

28/A November* — 4 a. m. wind hauling to the North, being N. N* W.,
at 2 A. M., when the ship bore up and ran 27' to the S. W. by S. when
hove to again, having sprung the fore- topmast in rolling. Noon wind
about N. N. W. Lat. Obs. 7° 41' S. Long, 88° 49' £., Bar. 29.63. Ther.
84°. p. M. .wind North. Strong gales and heavy sea to midnight.

29/A November. — a. m. apparently moderating, noon strong gales
Lat. 8° 46' S., Long. 87° 40' £., Bar. 29.6?, Ther. 83°. 10 a. m.
bore up and steered S. W. b S., p. m. strong gale N. N. E. Ship
running to the S. W. b. S. to midnight. Bar. at 4 p. m. 29:66 and
wind at 10 p. m. N. E., midnight strong gales and Bar. 29.69.

30/A November. — At 8 a.m. wind N.E. bE.^ strong gale heavy
squalls, turbulent sea, and Bar. falling, 9 a. m. hove to again, hav-

'1846.] EUnenih Memoir an the Law €tf Siomu in India, 23

ing since 10 a. m. on the SQtb, ran 158 miles to the S. W. b. S.,
noon heavy gale, Lat, 10'' 52^ S., Long. 86"* 24' E. Bar. 29.59. Ther.
SS". p. M. wind N. £. Strong gales, heavy sqaalls and a dark doady
appearance all round in the sky. 2 p. m Bar. 2958. At 10 p. m.
Bar. 29.53. Gale very heavy; at midnight Bar. 29.49.

\si December. — 2 a. m. wind E- N. E. 8 a. m. abating a little,
10:30 bore op again to S. W. Noon strong gales Lat. 1 1" 2' S.,
Long. 86^ &., Bar. 29.50, Ther. 84^ p. m. Wind N. £. b£., 4 p. m.
Bar. rising, midnight strong gales and heavy sqaalls, ship running to
the S. W.

2nd December.-^i a. m. to noon moderating; 10 a. m. Wind N. E.
ship steering to S. W. Noon clearing away, Lat. 13** 20^ S. Long.
83" 49^ East. Bar. 29.83, Ther. Se"*. p. m. fine E. N. E. breeze to
midnight.

^d December.-^Hoon fine, lat. 14° 22' S. Long. 81'' 15' £., Bar.
29.87, Ther. 85^

Abridged Log of the Ship Jons Flsmino, Capt CLEnK,from Cakuifa
bound to Mauritius, reduced to civil time. N, B. Some additions
made/ram a letter of Capt. ChBBK's/ornHirded by Captain Biobn*

21«r November 1843 — The weather, firom calm and cloudy with
light airs on the 20th and 2l8t, is at 5 p. h. on the 2l8t marked as
** heavy cloudy weather in the North West."

22d November. — At 5 a. m. the wind became steady at W. S.
W. At noon fine and cloudy, Lat. OO"* 30' North, Long. 82'' 29' £.
p. M. to midnight wind about S. W. ship running to S. E. and S. b
£• 7 and 8 knots*

23d November.^A. m. squally ; at 8 a. m. wind West, 8 knot
breeze, coarse South. Noon strong breeze and cloudy, Lat. 2° 15' S.
Long. 88» 30' E. Ther. 82«, Bar. 29.72. p. m. wind W. b N. and
at 5 W. S. W., midnight heavy cloudy weather.

24M November, — a. m. increasing, noon under close reefs, strong
gale W. S. W. and thick weather with rain, Lat. 4* 47', Long. 84*' 30'
£. p. M* to midnight wind W. b 8. hard squalls, strong gale and
heavy sea. Course to the S. and S. S. E. 5 knots.

24 Eleventh Memoir am ike Law of Siormu in India. QNo. 157.

25ih November. — a. m. modeimtiDf a little^ high head sea, noon
Lat. 5"* 1' S., LoDg. SS*" 31' £., Bar. 29.70., Ther. 7^ p. m. wind
W. 8. W. more moderate ; to midnight heavy head sea eontinnea.

26ih November. — a. m. to noon wind W. S. W. At noon every
appearance of a gale, Lat. 5® 58' S. Long. 86^ 24' £., p. m. wind
marked S. W. b. W. blowing very hard ; Bar. fiUling to 29.50, lying
to under storm staysails, head to the S., midnight blowing excessively
hard.

27/A November, —a. m. Sea increasing ; at noon Lat. 6® 26' S., Long.
ST 10', Bar. 2950. Ther. 80% p. m. Bar. 29.40, heavy gale (appa-
rently from N. W. or W. N. W.*) continues till midnight

28^A November. — a. m. wind drawing to N. W. (ship coming up
to W. S. W.) Noon more moderate, Lat. T f S. Long. 87* 24' E.,
Bar. 29.50, Ther. 80"*. p. m. wind marked N. N. W. gale continning ;
very irregular sea. At 8 p. m. wind had veered to N. £., ship running
S. W. b S. and S. W. 98 miles from 1 1 a. m. to midnight when strong
gale.

29/A November. — a. m. Increasing to a hurricane about N. E. ;
noon Bar. 29.00, Ther. ^9^, Sympiesometer 28.9^ ship on her beam
ends. Lat. 8^ 47') Long. 86^ 20'. p. m. Hurricane between North and
East, head to N. N. W., Bar. broke ; oil disappeared in the Simp.
At midnight ship buried in the sea and half swamped.

30/A November. — a. m. Cut away the top masts which relieved her
a little ; boats blown into the rigging and over the poop, at 4 blowing
a hurricane still between North and East.

\8t December. — To noon still blowing a heavy gale ; Sympiesometer
28.4. at noon, oil having re-appeared ,* at 5 a. m. set a storm stay-
sail, moderating to midnight.

2d December — To noon moderating, wind not marked, Lat. obs.
W 5' Long. 79"* 29' ; 7 p- m. wind marked N.E. At midnight fine.

* Nothing 18 marked in the Log, but it is clear that the wind must have been to
the Northward of West, at least since midnight, by the Lat. for lying to under
storm staysail, with a gale from S. W. b W. the ship must have been making nor-
thing at least from noon to nearly midnight, when if we suppose the gale to have
drawn to the Northward of West she may in the 12 hours to noon of the 37th
have drifted back and made the most part of the 41 miles of Lat. which appear
on the log to noon of the 28th ; for it was only one hour before that time that she
bore up.

1845. ] EU»etUh Memoir on the Law of Siarms in India. 25

Abridged Log cfthe Barque Elizabstb Ainblis, Capiain T. Ltb-
TSRy/riMn Madrae to the Mauritius, reduced to Civil time*

2Brd. November, 1843.-.Noon, Lat. Obt. 3* 5' 8. Loog. 84"* 8' Bar
39.80. Ther. 82^. Daring the preceding 34h had mn 6 to 7 knoU
to ibe 8. b. £. with windi varying from to 8. W. b. W., wind
W. b. 8. to 8 A. M. when W. to boob, fresh breese and latterly
tqualiy. 9, H . the wind W. to midnight*

24M November. — Wind W. b. 8. to 8 a. m. and W. to noon, when
Ut. S** icy S., Long. 84"* 25' £., Bar. 29.78. Ther. ^9'. f. m. fresh
breeae and squally wind W. to midnight.

25/A. November.— To 5 a. m. Wind 8. W. and to noon, 8. 8. W.
and high swell from the Soothwaid, Lat. Obs. 5* 41' S. Long. 85"* 50"
E. Bar. 29.78. Ther. 80^ p. m. fresh gale increasing from S. W. b. 8.
and S. W., at 1 1 p. m. W. S. W.

2Sth November. — a. m. fresh gale W. S. W. to noon, and high sea
from the SoaUiward ; noon Lat ef" 2ff S. Long. 86" 53.' £. p. m.
hard gales and heavy squalls W. S. W. hove to till midnight head
N. N. W. when more moderate.

27/A. November.^^MBde sail to the Southward, and to noon ran
02 miles to the S. b. W. Winds 1 a. m. W. N. W.; 7 a m. W. b. N.;
at 10, W. N. W. fresh gales and cloudy with drizaling rain and high
sea ; noon Lat. Obs. 6"" 2J' S. Long, account 87<' 22' E. Bar. 29.60.
Ther. 80*. 1 p. m. wind N. W., 6 p. m. N. N. W. 10 p. m. North ;
midDight N. N. £.

2Bth November. — 3 a. m. Hard gale from N. E. with heavy squalls ;
4, hove to under close reefed main- top.sail, Bar. 29. 30 ; noon tremen-
dous sea, Lat. acct. 8'' 21' 8. Long. 87'' 02' E. Bar. 29.5. Ther.
80*. To 5 p. H. wind £. N. £.; 6 p. m. East. At 5 p. m. Main-top.
sail blown to pieces and ship labouring greatly, set the reefed fore-sail
and kept the ship before the wind. At 6 p. m. foresail blown out of
the bolt ropes, broached to with head to the N. N. W. midnight,
gale blowing with great violence^ and tremendous high sea.

29/A Novetnber, — 5 a. m. A sudden lull and high confused sea. 7 a.m.
cMnmenced blowing from the North; noon, heavy thick cloudy weather
all rounds with a high confused sea, hard pbiTs and lulls at times^ Bar.
29.00, Ther. 77''. At I p. m. wind S. £.; at 6, to 8, North ; at 9, N. N.
W.; at 12, North, heavy puflk, and lulls with a high sea. Bar. 29.00.

26 Eleventh Memoir on the Laiw of Storms in India. [No. 1^7

30M November.^Wm^ North to noon, at 2 a. m. Bar. 2&90. J\. I
4, Bar. 28.80.; at day-light blowing very hard with tremendous gusec
at times. Noon, Bar. 28.80, Ther. ^^ ; lying to with ship's head Co
the West. p. m. commenced a perfect hurricane, ship on her beacm
ends, and expecting masts to go at every moment, every thing ready
to cut away. 4 p. m. Bar. 28.90.; 6 p. m. still blowing violently.
7, wind North, the furled main-sail blown from the gaskets. 8«
Bar. 28.90, wind N. N. E. Midnight, weather the same. Bar. 29.00.
lying to, head West to W. N. W.

\st December, — Daylight inclined to moderate, wind from N. N. £.«
to noon Bar. 29.10, head N. W.; noon, heavy puffs and lulls witli
thick cloudy weather, and much rain, Bar. 29.20. Ther. 78*. At 6
p. M. Bar. 29.30. At 8 p.m. Bar. 29.35., midnight 29.45. p. m. wind
N. E.

2d December»^6 a. m. Bar. 29.50., noon 29.70. making sail ; Lat.
12'' 34' S., Long. SI"" 55' E., pleasant breeze N. E.; 4 p. m. E. N. £ ,
9 p. M. N. £.

3d December.^Noon, Lat. W. & S. Long. 80''. 53' £. Fine weather.

Abridged Log of the Ship Edmonstonb, Capt, MacDougal, from
Calcutta bound to Mauritius, reduced to Civil time^

25th November.^ Ai noon in Lat. O"* 15' S. Long. 82'' 30' £., p. m.
Winds variable from the S. W. to S. S. E. ; to midnight, light breezes
and cloudy.

26/A November. ^^ieiAy light breeze to noon from S. 8. W., no ob.
servation, Lat. account &* 42' S. Long, account 83'' 06' E. p. ii. to
midnight, winds S. S. W. to South, brisk breeze.

27/A November, — ^a. m. strong breeze about South, with hard squalls
and turbulent sea. Lat. Obs. 6" 58' S. Long. 83'' 36' E., p. m. va.
riable strong breezes from the Southward with hard squalls. Mid-
night ** strong gale.'*

28/A November. — a. m. strong gale and mountainous sea. Wind
about S. S. W. Noon, Lat. Obs. &" 50' S. Long. 84" 04' E. p. m. wind
S. W.; gale increasing to midnight.

29/A November — 2 a. m. wind W. S. W. severe gale; 9. a. m. hove
to under reefed try.sail, wind West, no observation; Lat. account
7" 12' S. Long. 85" 02' E. p. m. " violent gale W. b. S," heavy cross sea.

J 846.] Skventh Memoir on the Law of Siormt in India.

6 p. V. '' wind hauled to W. N. W. and moderated, Bar. rising ; 10 p. m.
W. N. W. made sail and stood to the S. 8. E. 9' till midnight.

30/A Nopember.-^S a. m. wind N. W. ; at 6, N. N. W. Daylight,
gale increasingy and Bar. falling; to noon^ severe gale N. N. W. with
fnrioiis gusts^ Lat. account 9^ 3' S. Long, account 85^ 4'. E. ; 9 p. m. wind
N. N. W. severe gale and high cross sea ; at 8, wind N. b. E. to mid-
night, when Bar. rising a little.

\st December, — By 9 a. m. strong gales N. E., to noon Lat. by account
W 15' S. Long, account 84'' 22' E. p. m. the same, wind N. E.to mid.
oight ; carried away chain plates and hove to ; midnight more moderate.

2d December. — a. m. moderating to noon ; wind N. E. to 9 a. m.
and I^orth to noon, when Lat. 12'' 23' S. Long. 84'' SO' E. f. m. wind
N. £., moderate breeze and heavy cross sea.

3d December. — Noon, Lat. IS'' 51' S., heavy sea still continuing,
wind £. N. E. and fine.

Note. — Captain MacDougal informs me that during the storm, his
Bar. was at 29.38 and the Symp. at 29^28' the lowest, the Ther.
steady at ^^ throughout the gale.

The Lat and Long, given, are partly from the chart, and partly
from account worked either forward or backward to the near,
est day of observation. Captain McDougal observes that having 220
emigrant coolies on board, he was obliged, during the height of the
storm, to steer various courses to obtain for them as much comfort and
safety as the weather would allow of, so that he can only give me
limits mihin which he thinks the vessel's position must have been.

The log gives as nearly as can be ascertained, a current of 149 miles
to the South and 1 16 miles to the West, but it is necessarily very
imperfect, and the set of the storm wave and current on one day was
doubtless counteracted, in some degree, by that on a different part of
the storm circle on another.

Abridged Log of the Barque Baboo, Captain Stv art, from Madras

to Mauritius, reduced to Civil time.

26th November, 1843.— At Noon, Lat. &" 17' S. Long, about 83''
40^ E., wind S. W. b. S., ship steering to the S. E. b. S. 4^ knots, squal-
ly and rain. Spoke the Tartar 7 days from Ceylon. Midnight, wind
8. S. W.

28 Eleventh Memoir an Me Law cf Stomii in India. [No. 157.

27M. November — a. m. to Noon strong breeze and cloudy ; no Obs. ;
p. M. fresh gale S. S. W., 6 p. m. South, course E. S. £. Midnight
heavy squalls and rain.

28/A. Nov. — A. M. Heavy squalls and rain continuing, wind from
8. to S. W., course S. E. to S. S. £. Noon Lat. T 8' S. Long. 85'' lo'
£., heavy gales S. W. b. W. and sea. p. m. Wind W.. S. W. at 6
and to midnight when strong gales and rain ; course marked as S. b.
E. to S. b. W. In the Newspaper report Captain Stuart states this
to be the day on which the wind became very tempestuous.

29/A. Nov. — A. H. Strong gales continuing W. S. W. and at 6 a. m.
this day, course S. S. W. Noon heavy gales throughout, p. m. increasing,
wind marked N. W. Course S. W. and at midnight S. b. W,

30/A. Nov- — Daylight heavy squalls and rain N. W. Course S. W., 7
knots. Noon. Lat. 9° ^ S. Long. 85® 9' E. strong gale. p. m. wind
N. W. Midnight heavy squalls and rain.

Xst December. — Wind N. W. to noon; course S. W. b. S. and S.
W. Lat. 11° 0' S. p. M. heavy gale N. N. W. Course, 74 knots to
S. W. and at 6 p. m. to W. S. W. Heavy gale and rain ; midnight
increasing.

2d, December . — Wind and weather as before, course W. S. W. T^'i
Noon, no observation, p. m. wind marked Easterly, course W. b. S.
Heavy gale and squalls to midnight.

M. December, — Wind Easterly, course W. b. S. 7^ knots. Noon,
heavy gale, no observation, p. m. wind Easterly, course W. S. W.
6 p. M. wind N. E. Hove to at 8 p. m.

4dh. December, — Mizen top-mast went, lost main.yard and sprung
mam.mast, ship labouring as if in broken water on a reef. No obser-
vation, p. M. fresh gale and fine, wind E. N. £. lying to; midnight
moderate and fine.

5M. December,-^6 a. m. bore up to the W. by S. Wind Easterly,
noon Lat. Obs. 18"* 6' S. Fine weather.

Abridged Log of the Ship Sophia, Capt. Andrew, from Bombay

towards the Mauritius, civil time.

On the 22d November. — At noon the Sophia was in Lat. 4** 53'.
S. Long. 79'' 54' E. standing till midnight to the S. S. E. with a mo-
derate breeze from the S. Westward, squally weather.

1845.] Eleventh Memoir on the Law ef Siamu in India. 29

23d November. — Threatening dark weather and puffy, to noon,
when Lat. 5*" 54! a Long. 80*" 80' B. p. m. to midnight, strong
breese and cloudy ; ship standing to the E. S. £. and E., wind 8. 8.
Westerly, throughout heavy head swell ; midnight more moderate.

24M November. — At 4 : 30 a. m. a heavy squall and shift of wind
from S. 8. £. to W. N. W. when a strong breeze and heavy head sea,
ship aUnding to the S. E. ; noon Lat. account 0^ 30' S. Long. 81'' 20'
£. p. M. wind S. W. b. S. ; midnight squally and calm.

25/A November. — Throughout variable* squally and calm ; noon Lat.
Obe. 5"" 50' S. Long SI** 49'. £. Midnight moderate and squally
weather.

26IA November. — Moderate S. S. W. breeze to noon, when Lat.
Obs. 6** 24' S. Long. 82"* 53' £. 6 a. h. saw the bark Ward,
Chapman, from Bombay ; 8 p. m. wind S. fresh breeze and cloudy,
ship standing to the West and W. b. N.

271A November. — Wind South to noon. Standing S. E. b. E. to
8 A, M. when W. b. N. for 2 hours and again S. E. b. E., strong
breezes and a heavy, S. E. swell ; noon Lat. Obs. ff* 36' S. Long,
not given ; p. m. to midnight hard squalls.

28ih November.-^W'md from S. b. £. to S. 8. W. of variable
strength, and with thick weather, noon Lat. 6^ 23' S.Long. 81®
34' £. p. H. increasing with a heavy head sea from the South,
ward from 3 p. m. to midnight, wind S. W. and S. W. b. W.

29lA November.^Wmd S. W. b. W. to S. S. W. to noon strong
breeze and high head sea. Lat noon 6* 48' S. Long. 82® 00' E.
r. M. increasing in puffs Westerly and W. N. W. ** very dirty ap.
pearance all round the horizon."

30M November. — Wind N. W. throughout, a. m. increasing to a
gale with tremendous puffs at intervals ; daylight heavy gale ; noon hard
gale, no observation ; p. m. heavy sea in all directions; ship lying to,
up S. W. off S. S. W. 1 and 2 knots.

\»t December. — a. m. heavy gales and a fearful sea running in
all directions, lying to under a close reefed main-top-sail and fore.
sail. 6 A. M. moderating a little. Wind marked N. W. throughout,
no observation; p. m. still moderating. Midnight heavy sea running
from the S. Westward; wind veering a little to the Northward
apparently.

30 Eleoentk Memoir on the Law of Siorms in India. [No. 157.

2d December.— A. m. wind marked North, fresh breeze and cloady
with cross sea ; noon Lat 9°56'S. and Long. 8 1 .48' E , wind and weather
the same to midnight.

Sd December, — Wfnd marked N. N. £. to midnight, and fine wea-
ther ; noon Lat. 1 1"* ?' S. Long. 80^*49' £.

Abridged Logo/ the Ship Futtlb Rozack, Captain Rundlb, from

Calcutta to Mauritius, civil time.

This very able, careful, and really scientific log, which reflects the highest credit
on Captain Bundle, was kindly placed at my disposal by him, being his private one.
Every nautical and scientific man will I am sure join with me in wishing we had many
such observers afloat, and access to their observations. 1 need not say that with the
necessary abridgment as to manoeuvres and private matters, I have as nearly as possible
preserved Captain Bundle's expressions. — H P.

On the 20th November, 1843 The Fattle Rozack^ at noqn was

in Lat. 0* 39' N. Long, by 2. Chrs. 82* 30' E. and Bar. 29.93.* Ther, 78**
Winds variable between W. S. W. and S. W. with light fine weather;
at 8 p. H. a fresh breeze and squalls, sun-set very fiery, Bar. is
high. At midnight squalls less frequent^ course S. a little Easterly.

2\8t November. — 1 a. h. to i, strong breeze smart squalls and
torrents of rain. Noon^ pleasant weather^ Lat. Obs. 1° 22' S. Long.
83" 10' E. Bar. 6 a. m. 29.93. Ther. 79''; noon Bar. 29.93. Ther. 82%
winds ,A. M. S. W. to W. N. W. and at times South, p. m. moderate
breeze and passing squalls ; a long Southerly swell just perceptible,
clouds A. M. spherical cumuli and nimbus, p. h. cumuli and dark
nimbi; wind p. m. West and W. N. W. and N. W. in the squalls ; p. m.
Bar. 5 p. m. 29.93. Ther. 80% at 1 1 p. m. Bar. 29.03. and Ther. 80^ At
9 p. M. Capt. R. remarks, *' I observed those modifications of lightning
more like the Aurora Borealis which I have seen in the North sea,
or rather more like the Aurora Australis which I have seen off Van*
Dieman's Land and New Zealand. I have never seen it in low
Lats. but as a precursor of strong weather. It gradually lightens
up the western horizon with a sudden dark red glare, and thus flickers
about for a few seconds and gradually disappears. Bar. is still
high. The stars too have a very sickly appearance, and a peculiar

* As corrected by comparison with the Standard at Calcutta. --H. P.

2845.] Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Stoftns in India, 31

dancing motion. I thought at first my eyes deceived me, but my
mates observed the same ; I suppose occasioned by some dense vapour."

22d November, — a. m. wind marked S. S. W. to West; course from
3 to 7 knots to the Southward. Squally, making preparations for
bad weather. Noon, Lat. Obs. 3** iff S. Long. Chr. 83^ 22f £. Lunars
83° W £. Current for the last 24 hours S. E. b. £. 20'. Clouds a. u.
eamulo stratus with flying nimbus. Bar. 1 a. u. 29.93. Ther. 79^ ; 6
A. M. 29^93^ and 78''; noon 29** 88' and 82^.

p. M. Squally, winds West to W. b. N. 4 p. m. scud flying swiftly
to the Southward, 8 p. m. observed many phosphoric flashes in the sea,
tlie luminous space from one flash as large as the cutter ; running 6 and
7Icnots to S. b. W. ; midnight fresh breeze. Bar. 9 p. m. 29.91, Ther.
80°; at 10 p. m. the same clouds p. m. at intervals lofty cirrhi, then again
obscured, a nimbus and light scud flying to the South above all.

23(2 November. — a. m. to noon, winds West to S. W. 6 and 7 knots,
breeze to noon, when Lat. 5"* 22' S. Long. 83'' 53' £., current 59' N. B.
b. £. for the last 24h. Bar. a. m. 29.70. Ther. 76'' ; at 8 a. m. 29'' 50' and
TT; at 10 p. M. 29.53 and 78''. Noon 29.46 and 80, clouds hemis.
pherical cumuli interspersed with ponderous nimbi.

Capt. R.— remarks. '' I find Bar. considerably fallen with an exceed.
ing long swell from the Southward, and at 7 & high N. N. W. sea
meeting the Southerly swell created an exceedingly turbulent sea.
In the squalls the sea has a strange appearance, the two seas dashing
their crests against each other shoot up to a surprising height and
being caught by the West wind, it is driven in dense foam as high as
our tops. TheNirhole horizon has the appearance of ponderous breakers.

At 8, Bar. still falling; has there been a gale? Much electricity
by the appearance of the clouds. Current 59 miles N. E. b. £. ^ £.
this 24h. p. M. breeze decreasing to 1^ knots, winds West to South and
at times calm. Clouds, strata and nimbi, making preparations for bad
weather, appearances being auspicious, 11. 30 p. h. Lat. by Aldebaran
5° 37' S., midnight squally, rain and calms, dark dismal appearances
all round and increasing Southerly swell.

24M November, — Dark and gloomy winds variable from S. £. to S.
W., Noon, Lat. 5" 32' S., Long. 84^49' E., Bar. 5 am. 29. 57. Ther. 77^
At 9, 29. 63 and 78^ at nOon, 29. 64. and SO"*. Clouds, low strata and
i^ioibus. Currents apparently 30 miles N. E. b. E. | £. for the last 24h.

32 Eleventh Memoir on the Law cf Storms in India. [No. 157.

p. M. A French aod English barque in company, the English we tup-
posed the Baboo, Capt. R. remarks ** I do not like this gloomy weather ;
with wind lulling and then coming on again with a warning noise *
there either has been or will be bad weather. At 4 calm> at 5 serere
squalls from S. S. W. tremendous high sea from the Southward, ship
rolling dreadfully at intervals. Bar. at 4 p. m. 39.63 ; at 8 p. m. 20.^.
clouds marked as very low, scudding stratus to the Southward.

25th November, — a. m. wind South veering to S. W. ''and vioe
versa/' strong gusts from S. to S. W. with a high cross sea, occasioned by
a short Northerly sea meeting the long South swell. Noon, stroog^
gale at intervals, but decreases as the wind hauls to S. W. increasiog
to Southward, ship under dose reefed main.top-sail and fore*sail Lat.
B'' i^ S., Long. bS** 3' £., standing to the E. S. E, a current N. W. 7^
W. 27 miles in 24h. Bar. at 6 a. m. 29.64, Ther. 76° ; 9 a. m. 29.64
and 78° , noon 29.68 and 80°. Clouds marked as low stratus, at times
scudding to the South, at times stationary, then flying to the N. E.

p. M. strong gales S.W.b.S. mostly from S. W. attended with
violent squalls. The rain water exceedingly cold, the sea water very
warm, much more so than usually. Two Barques still in sight a head
5 p. M. mountainous sea from the Southward. Lofty scud above the
lower strata of clouds flying quickly to ihe Souihward at 7> breaks ia
the clouds, stars visible, but very dull. Bar. at 6 p. m. 29.62, Ther.
77°* At 10, 29.61. and 77°- Midnight wind in severe gusU succeeded
by lulls of a few minutes duration. Clouds, low stratus not per*
haps at 100 yards height, flying before the wind, breaks at times in
the clouds, stars visible, with lofty scud flying with ind5nceivable ra-
pidity to the Southward.

26th November. '^A, m. Laid to under close reefed main.top-sail.
Wind S. to S. W. squalls with rain, exceeding turbulent sea, noon
Lat. 6«*. 30' S. Long. BG", 23'. E., Bar. 6 a. m. 29. 62, Ther. 7«'';
at noon 29.63, and 80®, clouds very low stratus with lofty scud above
all flying to Southward, nimbus at intervals. Strong set to N. £. b
£. 65 miles for the last 24th. p. x. fresh gale with furious squalls

* This warning noise 1 have more than once adverted to as certainly heard also on
shore; see Jour As. Soc. 7th memoir Vol. XI, p. 1000. but it might there be suppos-
ed to arise from local causes. It is curious to find it remarked at sea by such an atten-
tive observer. What can it be occasioned by ? See remarks in summary.

1845.] ElevetUk Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 33

aDd nin as cold as ice. Edging away to E. 8. E. and S. E. b. £.
under two close reefed top-sails, wind S. W. and at intervals W. 8.
W. and West. At 8, ropes and gear on deck brilliantly spangled by
small lominous sparks from the sea which when examined appeared
ta be fragments of Mednsce. Again visible to the W. 8. Westward
the sullen red glare and flickering lightning ; midnight squally, sea
presenting flashes of phosphoric light in all directions. Bar. at 9 p. m.
29.63, Thar. 7B^> clouds low stratus and ponderous nimbi.

^^(h November, '^•A. x. Increasing gale West, and at 2 N. W. to
Noon; very high sea; at 1^ wind shifted from W. 8. W. to N. W.
ereating a tremendous sea ; 10 a. m. struck by a heavy sea which laid
theihipon her beam ends, lost main-top-mast ; scudded before the wind
to the S. £. under barepoles. a, m. Bar. falling rapidly, noon Lat. by
D. R. &" 38' 8., Long. 86^ 53' E., Bar. 5^ a. m. 29.63. and Ther.
79". tt7h. Bar. 29.62 ; at 9h. 29.57; at lOh. 29.53; at lO^h. 2950;
It lib. 29.47; at Hi 29.44; at noon, 29.43 and Ther. 80^ clouds
throughout exceeding low stratus.

p. M. Wind N. W. to 10 p. m. when North ; course 8. E. to 10, and
then South ; 3 feet water in the hold and most of the crew sick ; vessel
miking only 4 knots per hour before the wind and labouring exces-
lively. At 6 Bar. rising very fast, and at midnight falling again with
dark gloomy threatening weather all round. Bar. at 2 p.m. 29. 46, Ther.
Sl^* ; at 4h. Bar. 29. 47 ; at 5h. 29. 56 ; at 6h. 29. 62 ; at 7h, 29. 63, and
Ther. 79''; at 9h. 29. 61 ; at Q^h. 29. 58; at lO^h. 29. 62; at llh.
29.50; at midnight 29.49. Ther. 77^* clouds, exceeding low stratus.

28/A November.^Wind N. E. the whole 24h. a. m. increasing gale,
wind veering euddenfy to N. E., in a furious squall, lost fore-top.mast,
ship lying to in much distress, Bar. 29.47 at 1 a. m. Ther. 79" ;
2 A. M. 29. 45 ; 5 A. h. 29.44 ; at 6h. 29.43. Ther. 80» ; at 1 Ih. 29.45
• Ther. 81«, noon 29.49 and 82**. Lat. D. R. 7* 39' S. double Alt. 7* if
U&g. 87** 17' E.^ clouds low stratus with ponderous nimbi.

p. M. wind N. E. tremendous squalls blowing with inconceivable
fury. The sea rising in huge pyramids yet having no velocity but
rising and falling like a boiling cauldron. I have never seen the
Uke before, I was in the height of the terrible hurricane of September
1834, in the West Indies, I have been in a tyfoon in the China sea,
in gales off Cape Horn, the Cape of Good Hope and New Holland, but

34 Eletenih Memoir on the Law of Siorms in India, QNo. 157.

never saw such a ooofiued and strange sea, I have seen much
higher seas^ and I am sure wind heavier but then the sea was re*
gular and the wind steadier.*

10 p. M. dreadful squalls and a oonfused sea, both cutters wadied
away and mieeni^topmast carried away, blowing still harder but Bar.
rising; midnight tried to set the fore..sail and scud but it was blown to
pieces clouds low stratus and nimbus; Bar* 2 p. m. 29.49. Ther.
82'' ; at 5h. 29. 5 and SO^" ; at lOh. 29. 58 ; at 1 Ih 29. 54 ; at midnight
29.56 and 79^

29/A Nopember.-^A. u, wind N, £• till noon> still blowing fearfully
at times. Again tried to scud and ran S. by W^ 58 miles to noon^
Bar. steadily rising, 10 a. m. good sight for Chr, 2 a. m. Bar. 29.57 > At
7h. 29.57. and Ther. 79''; at lOh. 2958. and80''; at noon 29 59. and
8P. Lat. 9« 47' S. Long. 87** 18'.

Noon blowing with inconceivable fury at times^ with the sea I
think more agitated and ccmfused than ever ; rising up in monstrous
heaps and falling down again without running in any direction.
Noon laid to again.

p. M. violent squalls and tremendous high sea, 3 feet water in the
hold, wind N. £. to East. Midnight more moderate at times. Bar.
2 p. M. 29.60, Ther. 82", and to midnight the same, but Ther. 79""
clouds during this 24h. are exceeding low stratus scndding in all dis«
rections, upper strata to the Southward, lower to the west; at other
times apparently to North and East.

30M November. — a. m. gale abates a little, high sea^ ship lying to
with tarpaulins in the mizen rigging, wind marked N. £. to East.
Bar. 4 a. m. 29.60, Ther. 77^ Noon 29.61. Ther. 80% Lat. 10* 55'
S. Obs 10"* 48^ S. by double altitudes Long. 86^' 46' E. Clouds low
stratus.

p. M. moderate gale at times but the sea does not go down ; at 4,
heavy rain, wind N. E. throughout, midnight the same weather;
heavy squalls of rain. Bar. 1 p. m. 29.61. Ther. 8r; at 6h. 2961. and
78* ; midnight clouds low stratus with nimbi.

il This is by far the clearest, most graphic and seamaii'like description of " the pyramidal sea"
found at, or near, the centre of Indian Hurricanes and to which I have frequently alluded in
former memoirs, which I hare yet met with.

1845.] JSlevetUk Memoir an the Law of Siarms in India. 35

lit. December — 'A. m. gale and tea moderating. Winds N. £• to
noon when Lat. U^ W. 8. Long. 85M7' B. Bar. 6 a. m. 89.61. Ther.
7T- Noon 29.63. Ther. 81* Clouds oirro^timtos and nimbi, p. m.
iqoills of rain at intervals, wind N. fi. to midnight. 6 p. m* Bar.
29.03, Ther. SO*" j midnight 39.64. and 78" ; clonds cirro-stratus and
pooderons nimbi.

%i December. — Moderate and passing squalls, sea much gone down,
repsiriog damages. Winds tSast to noon when Lat. 12^ 80' Long.
Luiiara Sfi"* 26" £. Chro. 85^ 84'. Bar. noon 99.67.

Zd Deeembert — At noon quite fine.

Abridged extract /rem the Log of the Barque WBhuvQvoti, forwarded

bjf Captain Biobn, CivU time,

dO/H November, 1843.^At noon in Lat. 13« 87' S., Long. 84* 7' E.
Bar. 29.6a Ther. 82*. Wind marked B. S. £. Inereasiog to 2 p. m.
when hove to, having prepared for bad weather.

W December. — Wind marked East; gale increasing, noon Lat.
19" 2y S., Long. 83* 47' E., Bar. 29. 58. at midnight and noon, Ther.
88^> sea increasing.

^ December, — Heavy gale N. E. 9 a. m. saw a Barque scudding
under reefed fore-sail. Noon Lat. 18*5' S., Long. 88'' 27' E., more mo.
<lerate, 6 a. m. Bar. 29.58. ; at 10, 29. 70., Noon 29.77- Sail made
Kradoally.

3(f December Noon, N. E. light breeze and rainy, Lat. 12*' 34' S.,

Long. 84* 34' E. Bar. 29.90. Ther. 71.

^^aet from the Log Book of the Ship Trub Bmton, /rom lAmdon

to Madras. — Capt. G. C. Oonsxtt.

Friday let December 1848 p. m. Wind E. by 8. commenced with

shard gale with occasional tremendous squalls with hail and rain.
^f wind increasing to a hurricane nearly, with a tremendous heavy
^ striking the ship severely, washing away the quarter galleries,
above and below, and loosening the stern frame, causing the water
to come in there rapidly and obliging us to keep a strong gang of
bands in the lower after Cabins bailing continually, the lower deck
^nipletely afloat fore and aft, ship's sides and water-ways leaking

36 Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. QVTo. 157.

much, washed in and unshipped Larboard Cutter ; daylight, found one
of the shrouds of the main rigging carried away and the wedges
round both fore-mast and bowsprit worked right out; blowing heavily
at East with tremendous squalls and rain. Ship lurching and rolling
heavily and shipping much water over all. The lower deck complete-
ly afloat, the water washing over the combings. No Observations.

Bar. ranging from 29.50. to 29. 60., Simp, from 29.2 to 29. 10.
throughout the gale the Ther. 83^.

Saturday 2d December, 1844.— p. m. Wind £. by 8. Hard gale
with heavy squalls, rain and hail and a tremendous sea on ; ship being
struck very heavily about the stern frame and under the Larboard
main channels, the quarter galleries completely gone, the quarter
deck and waist ports stove and washed out, the sea rolling in on either
side in a large body ; 8 ditto weather ; 10 The gale moderating and glass
inclined to rise ; midnight less wind with a high sea on, ship labouring
severely, the sea striking her heavily and taking in much water on
deck and below.

2d December — Daylight found the driver-boom tossing astern.
8, wind still blowing strong with less sea; well 14 inches; throwing
overboard 5 horses, that died from fatigue and want of air during
the late bad weather ; noon moderate and fine. Lat. Obs. 12^ 58^
South. Long. 82'' SO'. East.

I now, as in the former Memoirs, arrange the logs of the ships in
tables to shew at one view the weather and winds prevailing over
this great space of the ocean which, it will be observed, reaches on the
1st and 2d November, over 24 degrees of Lat. including the equator,
and during 5 days with severe storms blowing on both sides of it.
This is alone a Meteorological curiosity of no small interest.

Ekventh Memoir on tit Law of Slarmt in India.

i H!^ fit

3 - -" - 1 "a: .

^ t} 111

4 13 ijl-

1=1 1^ 1^=^

•S : : a S :

: r = 8

i = = fi 8

•III

ij^:^:3:i: ^

M 5 •; *^ ^

- s a s a 3 8

- sis S 2 S S

l! li: :

» E 4 a £ ,8

EUvtniA Memoir on tht Lav> of Stormt in Iitdia. [No. 167-

1 j

i if

t !l

1 a'l

if 1

l| *

« I
■ 1 ii

S S :

S ; s

8 a ■

t S SB

a a as

1
1

"ill" is ^r i

jitiBBrt!

JliftirliiiiS ji-

.8 a " s

s s s § s a

S 3 3 ' SS » S

-2 S 3 S

•3" - -3" -

1 I ;
III 1

Mi: i i

1 i u. i 1

iti

1 845.] ffaemlA Mema^ on tke Lam of Storms m India.

TO
0

-a

•
JO

ts and
litUe
aallt.

heavy
g Ukd

<•

•

•
V

«3
. S

So* m o

•

ll': 111

in tit

OQ QO

»•

w Q

o S

• •

s s

•
•

•

• •

•
•

• •

•

1 •

• •

68 K

• •

Sa a

■

•

a. .«3!}

2 S • •

5|a •

M "^ «!

•8 •

-d pfe
in

2 .2g 5^ .-3 ^525 S5 "OS'S-
H S^a % J in

•

S Sii sg

«» s

•g

s ss s

• 8

fcS

•

5^ «8 ::

«s

o «o

tote

<3t^ c»io o

: ^»

•
•

• •

•
•

• • • •

• •

«>

E-S*

'Sb

• •

: : : a"

^00

.•£• £

-o Si Si 0

0 S M 0

1 S3 S!.

.- 1

S > •

•

■5

O OCQ

0 O

|25S

^Si

Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 167.

n .

• u

a a

2 OQ

o ffl H

ft*
3

«J9

« «

cStd
d-2

J9
32

9 c««

eo
00

•A 3 r^
cotoo

00^

s
s

!a!o

a
o

s •

B .

SB'S
2 «*

o «

CO 33

•d o^ •

g^ •
d .

.25

55^- :

pd •

73^ •

►••^ a!
a5>0

31 • d •
J—! **"

"^^ 5

d O •

X*^ QAd ^

73 « d^ rt^
h en s;

>2 8

ox 00

00
00

e«n3 •
M d d •

S g *
as • •

* --a

.^d

2^-55

o et
o o

55 -a
.63

• ^

00
CO

o «o (O

CO to

04 cL
d:5

d "*

»** JO

d <*

•d •>«

4 a

§
OQ

: M

GO fa

•a
s

*•

N
M

o
Q

d >an

1845.] Eletfenih Memoir on the Lata of Storms in India.

.41

a
«

a
•»^

«a M

3.2

5 2-^
a • M>

O • '<

«2

d o

** ©.5

Ham

..sl

111,

o
3)

Mn^ as

s s^ *

to .

^ d S
■« • .

** -p* M

S ^d •
2

0) • •

-a* •

'« e« J

. s *
• dfA

"Stn d
o <* •

CX)

o •

-s|
*^?

d « o

0
O

3 !8

O
00

• §

o
d

d
2

3 S

,i4

d
fa

o ooo
®255f

►^ ^^00

42 Eievenih Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. l^^T

•

^2 3

0. ^ e«
^ a 9 M

H
CD

0(5 .

a *

ualla
ising

• S5

* s

•a«3

dan
eath

^'.S

■
O

•2 3 -a

nning
n grea

s-«s

•

£•«•«

iss

•
0.

s
si

•

1 « S :

-^ • • •

GO • ■ ■

•

• •

• • • •

f«
O

«a

M
S
0.

o be

;25

.T3

s ic

-Is

«
P4
SB

fit

M
B

•o.a •

o « «
• «* ^

t>o<a

^ 0 60

SB OS

. > **

• •«« «^^ •
55 §•©

10 C3 0* •

«.S etf fit

_Q • •• •

• *•«
!Z! r^ •

»>« •
§S5*

0 n •

^>SCi 0 S
•C" •Sp0

^3.

g . •

JSQOOQ

fa . ,

s
s

3 -

Ik
O

cu.S*

i^-0
OGO

t^^OO

^00-"

i845.] Eleventh Memoir on the Lata of Storms in India,

4 I

•So

h* MB

« «•

S a

• cu

< 9

o
-vi

►
O

'£'3

SflQ

9
9

^Srn ■

••« -^ ^3

= SS.:S 2

* - g

0.55

§ s

«8 'a

»^ J

« 2 • 9

Si • • 2

«> • .

tDO> O

^taL <3 9

3,-
a a!

9
-« o
•^ "p

♦* 9 *i

» . ■ eg

.as

za
.s . .

^8a

a MO.

e
o

B
3

09 «»-

^
o

CO
00

a
9
u

I
a

a
9

0)
N

a
9
9

u
9

a ^ -2

o
OQ

9
N

o
o

« ■»-

44 Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, [No. 157*

•

Vessel running to the S. W.
S. S. W. and S. b. W. position
from estimate only.

Steering to the Eastward from
Madras roads from 7 p. m.

Surf very high and strong cur-
rent to the Northward.

11 A. M. Terrific squall.

Vessel first steering to the S. S.
E. and then to N. E. with the
S. W . breeze.

Bar. 30.3, noon 30.11, 2 p. m.
29.83.

5 p. M. Bar. 29.30 and 8. 29.41.

P. M. wind moderating and ship
making some sail.

•

• -a 04 . a •

• -a 00 • . •

•

a
•

• • • a a a •

a
•

• a

> 30.12
V 29.92
S 39.99

29.50
29 40

a a

29.84

1
1

«D

SODTHBRN HbMISPHBRB.

Strong gales Wa S* W. and
Westerly p. m. N. W. a,

•

NORTHBRN HbHISPHBRB.

Fresh monsoon, Na N. E.

A. M. N. W. p. M. N. W.

O A. M. •• aa
4 p. M. a a a .
10 Pa M.

N. W. b. N. and N. W.
heavy gale,

3 A. M. North gale at its
highest fury, noon mode-
rating, p. M. N. N. E. 5
p. M. Easterly gale bro-
ken. Midnight strong
breeze S. W

N. N. E. strong breeze dis-
mal weather. • •

E. Na E. Fresh gale

throughout. a • .a

1 A. M. N. N. W. strong

gales, at 7 Westerly, Pa m*
• S. Wa •• •• ••

Lat. S. Long.E.

•

• • *Q CO » m •
a a CO • ■ •
OD fc

**" 00

- • • 0> t^ (M 00 •

Name of Place or
Ship.

•
•

Vernon, off Madras,
At Madras.

Candahar, . •
Fyzulbarry,

Mary Imrie, . .

Bittern, . • • .
Carena, . . • .

•

•
"3

Noon

29 Nov.

1843.

Noon
30 Nov

1845.] Elevenih Memoir on the Law of Storm* in Iniia. 45

;= g

a js

.9 a

s Is

« 2.2

-S) is

a «tt eo

JS2

iB^

•
•

d ^

8 S

aher
from

0 ^t

.S*P

.HM

«j ^ a

S> •

• mm «i4 •*

S b ^

eog.S
- .go

CO
00

S
S

«
H

e«
10

s
X

pa
s

a
o
CX)

• 00 s

55.2

a
a«fc

gap

• 9 •

o
ja
to

• 9

• 2 •

"So

'S'P «*

CMD

.0 •

-a ctf

a **
3 0

Mil.

I":

flD ^^^

•

5=8

Odt^

61)
§

•
•

••ss

• O)

•

oc^

eoo

OicO

»:)

^«

p^ ^

•i^

■a

<* a

61)

** cs

►.9
CuCfa

3
bo

0 oco
o^oo

•a

o
3

46 Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 157.

-a

a
a

0
•»* •

u o

a .

o '»•
0 xo

0 • *

is,

a « S

* ► rt

«: • **•

«^*

2 3^

•■14

SQ g

a o«

.fl >« fc9

v-0 S

•
•

a
§

1 1

• • • w • »

•

all

o S
.g

a.
o

»5|

H • ett

fiSS5 •

5525

o
tn

•

a
o

1-3

°8

o 2

80
o

1-^ *"

2«

fik.
• •

•^ o
o o

■J

a S

^ 1

af S

d «

1845.] ElevenA Memoir on the Law tf Stornu m

d
0

i 2

^ I

OQcO

«
a

-a

M
fit

^
S

a>cn

81 I

i i

d
^25 00

M
•««

•a.

.>B

a §«

goo •

"S • '
J."

d) d •

OQ ai .

d ^ •
re* a.

2 d •«

d 5 OB

d **
B.Afd o d

• -d

• d

•d

«• d

55 B

8 -*»

'3 «

5 ^b
^ d d

S>fl d'M •

SCI d .
^•d«£ ^

gss-gg

. d r" .5

• 9 d • t^

:»

fig «

d S

« ^

• a •

a. • «rf n

o ? I S

H 9Q

a
o

*
o S •

«
s

CQg
o.tS

§ a *s

"S d

« 4 b

•> flQ

I •

d S
OQ H

55 'sS

Eteventh Memoit on tiie Law of Stormt in India. [No. 1 51.

1" j

1 !

»4 s -

11^ i if

1|: 1 Mi

m n n

•1 i| 1

. a SI 1

fctBr ;

1"^ ' it K J*

"^ . Z « J

a . . : :

<»

■s a . 2

3= : : : :

•! i

1 11 1
1 II 1

1 \ \\\

§ a Kd Q h
> 3 3*3

i!i

•J

Elamlh Manoir on Ik Law of Slorm, in InJi^ U

Ki, hi HI ill 1
H jii III i^l

: g : ; : a :s : S : : : ;

p-p n s n ■• ^ -^ ■■ s n ••■ ••

-S = . 5 = "^SS S" a iS . S SS"

1 11 M a, ll s 1 1 |. gji

^0 Eleven^ Memoir on the Law of Stormi in India, [[No. 167 .

PART I.

Summary.

Southern Hemisphere.

I have divided this summary into two parts to separate the storms
of the Northern and that of the Southern Hemispheres from each
other. If we review the tables^ and this will be usually found the
best means of forming an approximate judgment, at a glance we
shall find, that.

On the 2ith of November — There is fine weather in the Northern
Hemisphere with the Winifred in 15^® N. and we have no other
Logs for that day in Northern Lat. nearer to the equator. In the
Southern Hemisphere in Lat 4"* 47', S. a gale had so far begun with
the John Fleming as to reduce her to close reefs, but her Bar. had
not fallen below 29.72. : yet the thick weather, rain and heavy sea
might be thought sufficient indication, that she was on the verge,
at least, of the commencing storm, the centre of which must then have
borne about S. S. £• to S. b. £. of her ; as in the Southern Hemis-
phere we assume, — and this memoir will amply prove it, — that the re-
volution of the rotatory storms is from the South (on the left hand)
to the West, North and East.

But we shall observe at the same time, that at Noon on the same
day the Flowers of Ugie was, by her Log worked back from Noon of
the 25th* within 12 or 15 miles of the John Fleming and yet she had
but light airs, calms, and breezes from the South and S. S. W. from
noon till midnight, when the weather began to be squally, increasing
to a strong gale at Noon of 25 th, though even then her Bar. was
at 29.80.

We have then the Elizabeth Ainslie in 5*> 10' 8. and Long. 84<' 25'
E. or within 3 miles of the Ugie (though their logs do not mention being
in sight of each other) and there are thus possibly errors in the positions

* The extract sent me begins on the 25th. Nautical time and though the Log
is perfectly well and even carefully kept, it has the fault of adopting the -
Coaster form of marking the run per Log erery two hours only ; which thus always
renders it in some degree obscure for purposes of after reference and exact calcula-
tion.

1845.] Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, 61

of all the shipe sufficient to put them out of sight of each other.* This
ship had also, up to noon, a fresh breeze and squally weather, and her
Bar. at 29*78. the wind at West and W. b. S. and becoming more
squally as she ran to the S. Eastward between noon and midnight.
The Futtle Rozack was the next ship to the Southward, being in 5® 32'
S. and 84** 49^ £. on this day. As will be seen by her log, which is
well worth an attentive perusal, she had indications of suspicious wea-
ther from the 21st in 1^ 22^ S. and these were increasing every day ; her
weather on this day (the 24th) being dark and gloomy, with variable
squalls and even calms at times, but with a tremendous high sea from
the Soath, '' the wind" lulling and coming on again with a moaning
noise/' her Bar. was yet at 29.64.t We have thus four ships, the John
Fleming, Flowers of Ugie, Elizabeth Anslie, and Futtle Rozack, in a
space comprised within 45 miles of Lat. and 25 of Long, so that allowing
for slight errors of instruments and observations the whole were within
less than a square degree of each other, and as we have seen they seem
to have had just such variable etreams of wind and intervals of calms
or light breezes, with even fine weather, as we might suppose a priori
to exist on the outer verge of a storm, and which those who have fol.
lowed the investigations of them, both here and through Col. Held, and
Mr. Redfield's works have found in both Hemispheres. It is curious
that none of the other ships remark on this day, though they do so on
the 25th, upon the heavy sea, so carefully noticed in Captain Bundle's
remarks ; I shall advert to this again. We may thus consider the gale
of the John Fleming as perhaps a commencing stream of wind on the
circumference of a vortex, for I must again reiterate here that while of
eourse a storm must begin somewhere and somehow, we are profoundly
ignorant, both of the how and the where it begins, whether at the centre
or on the circumference, and what its effects at the circumference
are both when beginning and after it is in progress, and can only
therefore carefully register every fact which may tend to throw the
fointest light upon the manner in which these tremendous phoenomena

* This however may not be the case ; a Commander of one of the ships told me
that there were " several of us close together when the gale commenced'' and he
aeant m tight, for he remarked upon the want of preparation apparent in one or two
reascls.

t Nearly correct, for its slight error of *07 was ascertained here.

62 Eleventh Memoir on the Law (tf Storms in India, QNo. 157.

first develope themselves, or are felt, at the extreme verge of their
peripheries or at their centres.

We cannot therefore assign any centre for the storm on the 24th> for
we have no evidence beyond the heavy swell just alluded to that it
was fairly begun any where on that day ; though it should be borne
in mind that it may have been also coming up from a distance, and
that the incipient gale of the John Fleming was perhaps an extra^vor^
tteal stream thrown off from the main body of the storm,* and the
heights of the Bars, of the John Fleming'and Ugie as late as noon of the
25 th lends some countenance to the probability that the storm had
formed and was really coming up. It is remarkable also that on this
day the Fleming had the weather '' more moderate" than on the 24th^
while with the flowers of Ugie it was ^' a strong gale" at noon.

On the 2Sth November.-^ At noon it will be seen that these four
ships the Fleming, Ugie^ Ainslie^ and Futtle Rozack, were all within a
square space of 45 miles on each side, or as before^ allowing for slight
errors, all within a square degree, having made from 16 to 85 miles to
the S. £. by Eastward. The Fleming was the northernmost ship, and
in about B'* S., the other three nearly on the same parallel of 5.4Q. S.
and from SS"* to 85° 40' East. The Fleming as above remarked has the
weather moderating considerably on this day^ and this is a proof that
her gale of the 24th, was as we supposed, in all probability, an extra-
vortical stream thrown off from the gale into which the other three
ships 40 miles to the South of her, were now fairly entered.t They
had all four on this day the high Southerly sea, which may be said for
the Ugie, Fleming, and Ainslie, to have begun from midnight, 24th
25th, when the Ugie marks 2 points of lee- way and she begins her pre-
parations for bad weather also from this time. Excluding the Fleming
since she was not yet fairly in the storm and taking the three other
ships just mentioned to have been within it, we find they had all the

* The vignette titles to the Charts are purposely drawn to shew these kinds
of irregularities either at the circumference or in the bodies of the storms. If con-
sidered attentively the reader will see that the arrows may curve more inwards
or outwards, or be in the exact circumference of every circle, from a hundred varying
causes and forces.

t Here we have an explanation of this treacherous moderating of the weather
which I have often remarked upon, see ** Horn Book of Storms,'' p. 11, and which
every seaman of experience in tropical seas knows.

1845.] Ekvenih Memoir on the Law cf Siormi in India. 53

wind at from between South to S. S. W. tnd S. W. those which had
it steadiest and were farthest to the Eastward^ i* e. nearest to the centre,
which are the Ainslie and Ugie, having it between South and S. S. W.
10 that we may call it almost S. b. W. on the average, which would give
the centre bearing at noon £. b S., from the centre of the triangle formed
by them, at any distance we may suppose; but it is barely possible to
usign thiSy as we know nothing of the general sizes of the Tortioes in
the Southern hemisphere or of this one in particular. We may notice
also that to this day the two ships Edmonstone and Sophia which
weie^ though in about the same Lat three or four degrees to the West
of the others, had nothing but variable light breezes, and fine weather*
On the 26/ft N&vember, — We have still the same four ships near
eadi other, though somewhat more dispersed ; two, the Futtle Rozack
and Ainslie, being at 73 miles from each other and the other two
aixmt midway between them, the whole four had severe gales and
by noon, the Fleming was lying to under storm stay sails ; the Ugie
under bare poles at 4 p. m. and the Ainslie also hove to at noon.
These three ships had the wind between W. S. W.and S. W. The Fut.
tie Rozack, the northernmost ship, having it about S. W. at noon, though
ss she was running away to the S. E. b. £. she found it drawing more
Westerly. Taking a spot in the middle of the acute rhomboid formed
by their four positions,* which will only differ 35 miles at farthest
from the two most distant from each other, and this in the line of
the perpendicular, we shall find it to be in Lat. 6^ b' S. Long. 86''
^ £. and if we take it that here the average wind was really S. W. b.
W. ^ W« we shall have the centre bearing from us S« E. b S. ^ S. and
we may perhaps assume that the distance of it did not exceed from
this spot 150 miles, which would place it as I have marked it in Lat.
8"" 17' S., Long. 87^ 45' E. It was not much more than this distance,
for the Sophia «and Edmonstone which were about 220 miles due
West of these four ships, had still fine weather with a brisk S. S. W.
and Southerly breeze at noon in this day and the Baboo, as nearly as we

* This, when the positions of vessels do not afford cross bearings by the perpendi-
culars from their tangents is far the safest and mast be the most correct method, par-
ticalarly if we take into account how ill the exact positions can be ascertained in
inch weather and with bow little exactitude the direction of the wind also is noted
in most logs.

54 Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, [No. 157.

can judge from her Lat. and Long, was in Long. SS"* 40' E. Lat. 6^ 17'
Soath or about 180 miles also to the Westward, standing close hauled
A\ knots to the S. £. b 8. with the wind at 8. W. b S. but with only
squally and rainy weather, whereas had the storm been of much larger
dimensions, that is if its centre was at any much greater distance from
the mean point between the four ships already noted above, the Baboo
must now have felt it more severely. Hence 150 miles is certainly
the utmost semi-diameter we can allow to the storm on this day, sup-
posing the circle to be fully formed.

VI th November, — The positions, of the same four ships^ again form a
triangular figure, of which the longest diameter from W.S. W. to
E. N. E. is 7^ mW^s and the perpendicular about 20. Three of thenci
indeed, the Fleming, Ainslie, and Futtle Rozack are so placed that
their mean distance is but about 18 miles, and I take this spot, Lat.
6"* 32' S. Long. 87'' 13' E. to be the average position of those three
ships. Their winds as marked in the logs are ;.

Elizabeth Ainslie about N. W. b W.
Fleming about W. N. W.
Futtle Rozack N. W.
N. W. b. W. is thus about the mean of their winds and the Ugie we
find had it W. N. W. Projecting these for the supposed bearing of the
centre 8. W. b 8. and S. 8. W. it will give us two diverging lines, not
an unfrequent case where ships are near each other, the weather severe,
and the wind not probably '^ filled up," (if marked at all in the log)
till a day or two afterwards.* To the Westward we have the Edmon.
stone and Baboo with apparently etreams of winds from the South
and 8. 8. W. and a sea from S. £. such as might be expected on the
Western verge of a gale, and exactly analogous to those experienced by
the Ainslie, Ugie, and other ships on the 25th when on its Northern
verge ; and those ships Edmonstone, and Baboo, were also standing on
the starboard tack to the E. S. E, so as to run towards it. The Sophia,
a degree farther to the Westward, has the S. E. swell but less wind.

* This is no exaggeration, as every one who knows what the severe and anzioos
duties of the master and officers of a merchant ship, under the present economical
systems of sailing them, become in bad weather will fully admit; and we must add
here that most of our ships had Lascar crews and Coolies on board. I do not then
it will be understood, make the remark in the text disparagingly, but as necessary
to put the reader in full possession of the facts and the grounds of my judgment.

]845.] Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, 55

We miut therefore, as the gale had not yet reached the Baboo^ which
ship is the nearest, and at about 150 miles from the Futtle Rozack,
Ainslie, and Flemings conclude that it did not much exceed 100 miles
in its semi-diameter, and taking this distance on each bearing line and
then the mean point between the two> we obtain a spot in Lat. 7^ ^^ 8*
Long. 86^ 5Qf E. for the approximate place of the centre of our storm
for the 27th9 but we shall find on the 28th that this very nearly ap-
proaches vhat must have been its true place as shewn by the veering
of the winds, as the ships running and drifting to the S. S. E. aaUed
cUme round the centre, which was slowly moving to the N. W.

On the 28/A of November^ — We find on this day three of our ships
the Fleming, Futtle Rozack, and Ainslie^ nearly on the same meridian,
but with a difference of J5 miles in Lat. between the Fleming, the
northernmost and the Ainslie the southernmost ship, all having run
or drifted, as the wind veered with them, to between the S. S. East
and S.b. Westward, and the hurricane having been stationary or pass-
ed very slowly to the N. Westward, judging from its approximate
track already laid down. Now if the circular theory be true, and if
there was this progressive motion we ought to find that these ships have
brought the winds from N. N. W. to North and N. East, according to
their positions on various parts of the circle, having run or drifted, as
before said, round the N. Eastern and Eastern, and one of them, the
Ainslie, reached the S. Eastern quadrant of the storm circle. We have
seeordingly at noon.

IMore moderate and drawing to the
N. W.* p. M. N. N. W. and as the
ship was running to the S. W. at 8
p. M. N. East.

{Wind N. E. throughout, having veered
from North with tremendous sea, her
course neariy parallel to the track of
the storm.

-,,..,. J N. E. hard gale, tremendous sea. p. m.

TheAtnslte ^ E N. E. 6 p. m. East.

While the U^ie from 80 to 90 miles to the Eastward of these ships has
the gale first from N.N.W. but by running to the S. W. b S. brings
it to North : all this is, as will readily be comprehended in exact con-

* I suppose it to be about N. W. b. N.

56 Eleventh Memoir an the Law rf Storms in India* [No. 157.

formity with oar law of storms for the Southern Hemisphere ; and to

the Westward we have now moreover.

I With wind from S. to S. W. and nt
The Baboo. < noon S* W. h W. and at 6 p. m.

( W. S. W. strong gale.

( With strong gale and mountainous sea

The Edmonstone ^ wind about S. S. W. veering to S. W.

I after noon.

which are also about the winds which ships entering the storm on its
western quadrant should have. The Sophia is yet too far to the West-
ward to feel much of the storm. Taking all these data we find that
the nearest spot which will reconcile them, within either a lew miles
of their position as given or calculated, or within a point or more of the
direction of the wind/ is one in Lat J'' 18' S. and Se"" 45' E. where
I have therefore placed the approximate centre of the storm for this
day.

On the 29th liovemher.'^The positions of the ships are now becoming,
it should be recollected^ very uncertain from the continuance of the
bad weather, and thus any estimation of the true place of the centre of
the storm from their supposed places at noon, becomes more and more
difficult. Nevertheless if we take a point near the calculated f»iaoe

* I use here these words, intentionally, and as writing for unprofessional as well
as professional men, and anxious that not only all onr data, but also all the cmdder"
ationt which would influence the mind of a scientific seaman in conaideriog what
weight he would give to these data, should be known to all. It occurs to me that
I may usefully set down here, what considerations must be taken into account in
considering log-book relations of storms. The seaman is acquainted with most of
them, but some may be new even to him. The data are first the shot's place, secoad
the direction of the wind, third the run or drift, fourth the sea, these are influenced

by.

1 Want of observations.

2 Bad observations set down as good ones.

5 Run or drift ill kept or badly estimated, few ships marking their lee-way for

instance, and some being much more lee-wardly than others.

4 Storm wave, 1 See 8th Memoir, Jour. As. Soc. Vol. XII. p. S97 for the ex^
0 Storm current, J planation of these terms.

6 Wind carefully or carelessly noted 1

7 Not noted at all till a day or two after the storm ?

8 Veering of the wind set down at the wrong hours.

9 Alterations of courses also set down wrong, or at wrong time,

10 Inaccuracy of all data from errors of copyists or printers ; the. last^almost con-
tinual in Newspaper accounts.

1845.3 Eleventh Memoir an the Law of Siorms in India. 57

of the Elisabeth Ainalie which ship muit have been cloee to the centre
at iKM!D» fox she was in it at 5 p. k. on this day, we shall find, that it
tfiees so fiir as to make the following ships have the winds by the
chart and by their logs as follows : —

Wind by Log. Wifui bjf the prqfeeiion.

Elizabeth Ainslie, • • about North. • . Assomed correct.

John Fleming, • . between N. and £. N. ^ £.

Flowers of Ugie, . . about N. b £• N. ^ £.

Fsttle Rosack. . . N. £ast. * . N. N. £. ^ E.

Baboo, Westerly. .. W. by N.

SdsiQaaftone, .. West West.

Sophia, . . * . about W. S. W. S. W. by S.
i^kh is near enough for these seven ships to allow us to assume it.
It will then be for this day in Ut. ff 3B' S. Long. 85'' 00 E.

On the 20tk November. -^Vfe find that a number of the ships
whidi had drifted or run to the SoiUh and South Westward, were evi-
dently on the Eastern and South Eastern and Southern quadrants
•f the storm, having the winds from N. by E. to N. £. and East,
while others were on the Northern, and the Sophia on the extreme
North Western verge. The Edmonstone which ship had run down
about a degree and a half to the Southward, (S. S. £. South and S. S.
W.) had the wind ako veering as it should veer with a Hurricane
dswly progressing to the Westward, while she was running partly
roand the N. fiastefOj. and towards the Eastern quadrants of it ; and
her Bar. also was Hailing from midnight of the 29th to 30th, as by bearing
^, she run down again towards, and neared the centre. We find it again
rising alsa when, having brought the centre of the Hurricane to bear
W. b N. of her (wind N. b E.) towards midnight of the 1st Decem-
ber, she again heaves to and allowed the storm to pass slowly away
born her, while she drifted away from ii. The following will be
found the directions of the wind as given in the ship's logs and those
which the centre of the Hurricane, as assumed* for this day, and the
positions of the ships give at Noon.

* I IMS Om word " assumed" rather in contradistinction to *' shown" or " de-
aonstnted" bocaose of the great uncertainty of many of the ships' positions, of
which^some have now been three or four days without obserFatlons and keeping a
▼ery indifferent note of the drift, sea, and even of courses, and winds.

58 Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Starmi in India. [No. 167.

Wind b^ the Log, Winds by their poet*

Hone on the chart,

Edmonstone N. N. W N. N. W.

Flowers of Ugie, N. E N. E.

Futtle Rozack N. £ N. £.

Active/ about East E. N. £.

Baboo, N. W N. b. W.

WelliogtODi > • • • •••••• E. S. E. ••• E. ^ S.

The Ainslie and John Fleming's positions are both atterly uncer-
tain on this day, though both ships were doubtless from the violence
and veerings of the wind with them^ close to the centre ; no sort of
account indeed could well be kept in these ships as from stress of wea.
ther, they were obliged to steer various courses so as to ease the vessel
as much as possible, on account of their cooley passengers. The Ward
from the inperfect newspaper account appears, though a degree or
more to the North of the Wellington, to have had it at S. W. commenc-
ing on this day, though her position is quite uneertain^t as the Lat and
Long, given, as in the case of the Active, seem to have been intended
to express the spot where they had the heaviest weather and not the
ship's place.

The log of the Sophia offers a considerable anomaly. By the posi-
tion of our centre from which she is at 180 miles distance, which
is much less than the distance of the Wellington, and about the
distance of the Futtle Rozack and Ugie from it, she should have the
wind at S. W. while she has it at North W. by her log ! I am unable
at present to reconcile this. It may be an error in copying, or it may be
that she met with another and a new storm thrown off in advance of
the principal one, or finally she may have been carried much further to
the Eastward than she supposed, and thus have been really on the N.
Eastern quadrant as her wind would place her. I leave it therefore
for the present.

* This vessers place is also uncertain , for the Lat. and Long, given in the new§'
paper appear to be that of the ahip when the atonn waa at its height, rather tbaa
that of a given date.

t The position is wholly wrong. The Ward spoke the Sophia on the tSth in 6|
S. and therefore could not be on the 30th in iS. 30, So, both having Soutb«riy
winds. She was probably on this day somewhere between the Sophia's «nd ^aboo'i
tracks which would give her the S. Westerly gale mentioned.

1845.] EUventk Memoir on tho Law of Storms in India. 59

Om ike Ise Deeember.-^We hftve the Flowers of Ugie and Puttie

Ronck close together with a heavy gale at N. E.^ and the Edmonstooe

also^ which ship had ran to the Southward about 150 miles^ making but

little westing, was now nearly on the same parallel, but 90 miles to

the Westward of the two former ships, also with a N. Easterly gale;

Tliis places all three ships on the S. E, quadrant of the storm circle ;

iDd we have the Fleming with a hurricane between North and East

" and the Ainslie with pufb and lulls from the N. E./' indicating that

both were not far from the centre and also on the same quadrant. The

Fleming appears to have run in company with the storm for some time,

ind as the Ainslie was hove to, we see by her rising Bar. that it was»

by her drift, rapidly passing from her. The track laid down for these

two vessels it will be remembered is merely a line to Join the two

points between the 29th November, and 2nd and 3rd December, their

position being wholly uncertain between those dates. The Baboo and

Sophia both mark winds at N. W. but the positions of both are very

oncertain. Hence we may I think place the centre of the storm for

this day about in Lat. 9"" 35' S. and Long. 83'' 42' E. and it will give

the winds to the ships as follows : —

Ugie and Futtle Rozack about, • . N. E. by E.

Ainslie and Fleming's positions 1 ^ PnntwRrd
wholly uncertain, f ^'•"wwa.

Edmonstone, £. N. £.

Wellington, East.

which with the exception of the Edmonstone is not far from what
they had. For the position of the Baboo, we have only her Lat. which
however would undoubtedly place her on the N. £. quadrant and
therefore give her a North Westerly wind. The Sophia (or her posi-
tion) is an anomaly which I must leave as I find it. She has by the
position given, and with our centre, the wind a little to Southward of
West, but by her log as marked she had a heavy North Westerly gale,
the may have again been farther to the Eastward than she supposed
for she could have had no good observations for the preceding 8 days,
ind this as before remarked would place her on the right quadrant of
the cirde for a N. Westerly gale, I have however, marked a storm arrow
dirongh her supposed position for this day.
On the 2nd December. — We have the Futtle Rosack, Edmonstone,

60 Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, [No. 1 57.

Ainslie, and Flenring, all not hr fimm the Mine parallel of Lat.
but dispersed over four degrees of Long. The Fleming (poritios
uncertain) being the Westernmost, and Futtle Rozack farthest to the B.
We have the Ugie also about a degree to the Southward of them, aeod
the weather is fair, or clearing up fut with a £ur Easterly breeze, for «1I
these ships by noon on this day, as being on tlie S> E. quadrant of the
storm, had run or drifted out of it ; and had no doubt now a pnrt of
the usual trade wind. The Sophia is found on this day in about the
Lat. of the centre of the Ist, and she has the wind at North, at noon,
Jrom a heavy gale at N, W. on the preceding days, shewing evidently
that her storm could not have been the same as the one we have been
considering, t. e. that of the Futtle Rosack, Ugie and and other ships.
She notes also, that at midnight between the Ist and 2nd there was a
heavy sea coming up from S. W. which was in all probability the sea
from the Ugie's storm, to judge by the positions of our circles.

PART II.

Storms in the Northern Hemisphere.

25ih November.-^ln the Northern Hemisphere we have nothing
extraordinary for this day, the Careoa off Ceylon having light airs
and the Winifred in the middle of the bay in Lat. 13** a fresh monsoon
with an average Bar.

26th November The Winifred, Gandahar, and Fyzul Curreem,

have winds and weather indicating a change, though there is nothing
sufficiently pronounced to be called, as yet, the commencement of s
storm, and the Bars, of both the Gandahar and Winifred are faif^.

27/A November,--^We have three ships, the Winifred, Pyzulbarry
and Fyzul Gurreem, each with signs of the approaching storm, which
was afterwards so severe unth the Fyzulbarry, (and perhaps the Colo^
net Burney}) The Winifred in Lat T 4' N. and Long. 85<' 56'
£. at noon is running rapidly to the South, the wind veering from E-
N. E. at noon to North at 8 p. m., and N. N. W.at 4 a. m. with thick
gloomy weather and violent squalls, ''giving little warning" says Gap-
tain Webb ; an apt phrase to designate squalls thronm of from the
periphery of a rotatory storm, if they were such.

1945.] Sievim^ MtmM' on ths Lau> nf Storms in India. 61

Tiie Fysul Carrran in Lat. 5« 1 V S., bat in Long. 83^ 86' E., or two
d^iees farther to tbe Wactwmrd htt squally weather from N. N. W.
ma the Fyznlbarry in Lat. 5"" 88' and in Sa"* 40' East, has it
tbreateniog from the Eastward with a heavy N. E. sea, her Bar. falling,
•ml F. M. the wind increasing to a gale from E. N. E. with a heavy
lea. We may thus assume that with this ship, at midnighti a storm
bd fiiirly began from N. E., at which we find it marked at 1 a. k. on
te morning of the 28th ; at what distance we have no means of jndg-
>iig. I have therefore for this day marked bat a single segment of a
eirde through the Fysalbarry's position, from a centre 240 miles due S.
E* of it, which 18 to be taken rather as an indication of the storm than
•oy thing else.

On the 28/A November.^We have the Winifred in 4'' 27' N. and
Fjsnl Curreem in 2"* 06' N. the first with '' strong gales N. W. and
N. N. W. and gloomy weather with her Bar. &)ling a little, and
the latter with only a fresh breeze from al>oat N. W. The Fyiul.
bairy had her N. Easterly storm continuing and veering to £. N. £.
It is probable that as the Winifred and Fyiulbarry were only 220
miles iapart on this day, the Winifred was just on the outskirts of the
storm wiiich evidently lies betwixt them ; and as she was running to
the Southward she soon got clear of it. The Fyzul'Curreem was
wholly out of its influence and the Candahar has, as yet, but a strong
monsoon gale. I have therefore placed the centre of the Fyzulbariry's
lUnrm in Lat. &" 00' N. Long. 88^ 45' E. marking an arrow through
the Winifred's position to shew its efibct upon her.

29M November, — We have the Candahar with an evidently com-
mendng gale at N. E. and the Fyzulbarry with a furious one at N.
E. We have no otiier bearing or datum whereby to estimate the dis-
tance of the centre of this storm which now bore about S. £. from the
Fyzulbarry, but we find that it veered rapidly with her to N. N. E.
tnd by 11 : 30 p. m. to North ; of course as the vessel ran and drifted
round the N. W. quadrant. From the best estimate I can make, I
should with every allowance place the centre, which bore at noon S.
B. of this ship, in Ut. 6^ 52' N. Long. 87^ 48' E.* We have no
Lat. of the Garena, and of the Bittern only a Lat. of this day !

* It was really in about 6® 00' N., Long. 88® OC East, by the Log of the John
Brightman. See note at the end.

62 Elevenih Memoir on the Lawof Stornu in India. [No. 157»

I have printed the ahridgment of these extracts, indeed, almost to
shew what meagre and disappointing documents we sometimes obtain. *^
We cannot from such data affirm that the Fyzulbarry'sand Candahar'a
storms were the same, and indeed the great size of this circle is entirely
I think against the probability that they were» for it would be if com*
pleted 600 miles in diameter, and we shall find on the dOth and 1st
December that the storm eouid not have been the same, and we that
obtain distinct evidence of three separate storms at the same tinne ; two
in the Northern and one in the Southern Hemisphere*

BOih November. — We have first the Fyzulbarry running to the
S^ S. E. and S. £. and evidently towards the centre of the storm,
which does not appear to have been an entirely calm one or at least
the ship did not get into it. At 7 p* k- b^c had the Westerly sea,
" rolling up and overpowering the Easterly one," and the S. W. and
Southerly gale coming up. She had an observation, though indiffer-
ent on this.day, so that we may take her position as within a little
to be that of the centre of the storm, and projecting it would give to
Candahar a N. Easterly gale at 250 miles distance from the centre ;
and therefore a moderate, instead of a furious N. Westerly one which she
had,) shewing that her storm as before remarked, was certainly a
different one from that of the Fyzulbarry. I have then placed the
centre of the Fyzulbarry's storm for this day in Lat. T 30^ N. Long. 8T
SV. E. The Mary Imrie in 12''20' North, though we have not her longi-
tude this day, was doubtless on the N. W. quadrant of the Candahar's
storm, and at Madras the high surf and strong current to the North ward
are indications of the approaching tempest there. The Vernon we find
went to sea, on this day from Madras roads, with a fresh N. N. E. gale at
7 p. M. The Bittern and Garena's logs give us no information for want
of Long, but the Winifred's is interesting as showing that though the

* And, as it has often scnick me, to remark on the absurd practice of keeping a
log book without entering the Longitude. It is quite possible that a case might
arise in which, at least ignorance of his position, if not of wilful destruction of bii
vessel might be alledged, if not proved, in a court of law against the master of a
▼esse! through this omission ; and his insurance thereby become vitiated in case of
an accident. The private *' Chronometer book" of a Captain would barely be called
a legitimate document when the book which should contain the vessel's place at noon
is blank.

1845.] JSieventh Memoir an the Law of Storm$ in India. 63

centie of the Fysulbarry's storm and that of the shipi in the South*
era Hemiephere were sixteen degrees of Lat. apart on this day, there
was still aboat the equator considerable atmospheric disturbance, with
bttTj streams of wind from the Westward, agreeing with what we
sboald look for as the general effect of the Southern and Northern
balves of the storms in each Hemisphere. The Winifred's Bar. aIso»
and it was evidently most carefully observed, is yet about two tenths
below the averages before and after the bad weather which she expe«
perienced. At midnight of this day we have the Candahar with a
bcavy gale at N. W. and the Mary Imrie with a terrific one at N. N.
£. and taking the last ship to have made about a South course, we
find by projection that on the 30th, at midnight the centre of what
I shall now on this evidence call the Candahar's storm was in about
Let. 10"* 45' N., Long. 65^ 0' East, the centre passing near the Cauda,
bar about noon the following day ; the Mary Imrie scudding to the
Southward on its Western side.

\a December. ^^^e have first the Fyzulbarry, which ship had run
with her Southerly gale 150 miles to the N. N. £. from noon 80th to
soon of this day with the winds between S. S. W. and South, raising
her Bar. as she increased her distance from the centre of the storm
Irom 29.30, at 7 a. u. to 29.80 at 10 p. u. or half an inch in fifteen
hours; and obtaining also moderate weather at midnight. I have before
ihewn on the 29th and 30th November that this ship's storm must
have been a separate one from that of the Candahar, and it will
be presently seen that it clearly was so. The loose report of the
Niagara informs us of nothing more than that she had a rotatory
itorm aboui in Lat. 10^ Long. 2f]'* of which we may suppose the
strength was about noon on this day, and that she was not for from the
eentre of it ; drifting or running round the S. Eastern and North
Eastern quadrants of it, if indeed the expressions used do not mean
that she had a shift of wind ; she would then at all events, if not in the
centre, be on the Eastern side of it ; so that taking the Fyzulbarry's and
this to be the same storm we find that it may have travelled up to the
H. b. Westward about 150 miles, or something less, in this 24 hours,
ind to this the run of the Fyzulbarry 150 miles to theN. b. £. btit
carrying always a Southerly wind, lends much probability. However
the Niagara's position and times of the wind, &c are so loosely given

64 Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Stormy in India, [So, 157-

that we can only nuurk this as an approximation. HcrnpidcluaigeoC
wind, however, and her distance from the Candahar on this day^ whieh
was nearly, or qaite, three degrees of Long, exclude the idea of its
being the same storm, and I have placed its centre, approximately, dose
to the Niagara in Lat. 9"" 55' N. Long. 86^ 55' E.

We now come to the Candahar, Mary Imrie and Vernon on tliia
day, and here we must first remark on the Candahar's poaition
which must be I should think erroneously given,* for she was tying to
with a tremendous heavy gale from North fVestward veering at one
time to N. by E. and again to N. W. by W. and yet she has made near,
ly a Northerly course ! This is of course impossible, unless we aaf^xMe
her to have been carried as far to the West by the storm wave as she
was drifted to the East by the wind and storm current, both of which
tended to carry her to the Bast and E. S. E» and her position indeed
on this day can but be an estimated one : I did not observe this at the
time I made the extract, and there may be some clerical error of nay
own. It is now too late to rectify it, and we must therefore allow that
one way or the other there is an error between these two days. The
Vernon's position was certainly correct but then she had only a " strong
breeze" with her Barometer at 29.68^ and we cannot thus allow her to
have been in the storm though close to the outskirts of it. The Mary
Imrie was running free and had an observation, so that her position
may be taken as nearly correct, but we have unfortunately the wind
but loosely given as veering *^ to the Westward^ (from the N. N. £»)
after noon. We may guess it to have been about North or to the West-
ward of it, at Noon which placing the Candahar, somewhat further to
the Eastward, if we please, will give us a spot in about Lat 10^ 18'
Long. 84® 2' E. as the approximate position of the centre of this storm
on this day which was evidently passing the meridian of these ships
and close to the Candahar, and this apparently on a track to the
Southward of West.

The difference of their positions indeed is but 28 miles, an error
which might easily occur with the Candahar, having no observation.
The repeated shifts of wind from N. W. to S. W. may be aooounted
for very simply, by reflecting that when near to or in the central space,
there are many causes such as irregular blasts, storm wave and cur-

* Or that of the d»y preceding may be so ?

1845.] Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Stornu in India. 65

ieiity-*-the ship's own run or drift &c—- *to induce these irregularities;
sad wef find that as the centre passed on and she fell into the 8. Eastern
quadrant of the stornii she again experienced it blowing a hurricane
from S. W. shewing that (as she had run a little to the North) she had
been on the Southern side of the central space ; of whatever extent this
was. It is indeed I think most probable that on this day she was not
to the Northward but the Stmihward of tlie Mary Imrie's position.
Both ships were probably very near to, though they did not see each
other. The Vernon's position gives a radius of 1 10 miles, or a diame-
ter of 220, for this storm for this day, and we are satisfied that it eould
not be the Niagara's or Fyzulbarry's, the Niagara being evidently
dose to die centre of hers. I shall remark on the 2nd» on the Madras
sad Ceylon reports for this and the next day.

On the 2nd December. — We find that the Mary Imrie on this day
while running down say about 80 miles* to the South and South East-
ward, before a terrific hurricane veering from the N.N.E. to the N. West,
waid^ had her Bar. always falling, and was at 2 a. x.in another, and of
eonfse a different centre from Uiat of the Gandahar^s storm of the day
proeeding, for she was now perhaps 100 miles from that ship, This centre
gave her another hurricane at S, S, W. and Capt. Boyd's description
of the sea is exactly what we should suppose the eflbct of a second storm
pitting over any part of the sea left by one just preceding it to be. I
think it most probable that this second hurricane may have been the
Niagara and Fyaulbarry's storm and have so marked it; supposing the
Mary Imrie to have been in Lat 9<* 20' and Long. SS"" OO' and ihe
oentie a littie to the Westward of her.

The Candahar^ on this day had run to the North and N. W. round
the Eastern and North Eastern quadrants of her storm, while the Ver.
non, which ship had stood to the E. S. E. with the N. Easterly gale of
the pieceding day, had a smart shift of wind of four points, as the
eentre approached her, and a fall of 0.14 in her Bar. As the storm
however passed to the South of her, and she was bound to the North,
ward, she was soon out of its influence. We find also on this day that
a Westerly and N. Westerly storm prevailed at the stations on the
North end of Ceylon. To obviate confusion, I have preferred consi.

* We must take this by guess having no log of the distance.

66 Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Storm* in India. [No. 157.

deriDg the reports from Madras and Ceylon, for the 1st and 2d to-
gether.

First, in reference to the general effects of the storm on the Coast:
we shall observe on inspecting the chart, that there are at least two
storms on this day, the Mary Imrie, Niagara and Fyzulbarry'a being
one, and the Candahar's another, travelling up on a N. Westerly
course more or less curving, apparently to the Westward, as
they approach each other,* and this bending by the way is a
very, remarkable feature. The average distance of the centres of the
two storms from the coast we may call about 3^ degrees. The Oai»-
dahar^s storm we know to have been of very small extent (taking
her position on this day as correct) as it is determined by the Vernon's
which is certainly exact within the trifling distance arising from
the defects of all observations in bad weather. The Mary Imrie's
storm we have admitted to be the Niagara's on this day, and we shall
find that this projected will bring the circumference of her storm
to within two degrees of the North end of Ceylon, and that the joint
effect of both vorticse would be to create a Northerly, and N, West-
erly wind, stream, or gale if their influence extended so far ; and they
ought moreover to create a Northerly and N. Easterly stream at
Madras. Now we know that at Madras which is as far to the N. W.
as Kay to and Paumbum are to the West, and W. S. W. of the centres
of the 1st and 2d, there were also the indications of an approaching
storm in the increasing surf and slight fall of the Bar.t as well as the
North current, (see remarks on Capt. Biden's report,) and that the
wind was from the North and North East on the 2d, and to 4 a. u.
on the 3rd, changing afterwards to S. E. From the effects of the ranges
of hills (and even mountains) between Madras and the north end of
Ceylon, it is impossible to go farther than to indicate generally what
the average effects of a storm would be, as every separate spur and
range would produce necessarily some local effect. On the coast we
have the effects of the storm current in the '^ North current," and we
have finally within these three days :

* The Colonel Bumey^s storm may have been a thiid for anything we know, and
it may be to it, that the Logs of tbe Carena and Bittern relate.

1 1 shoald consider this slight fall of the Bar. as some evidence in favor of the
relation of the two storms and their bending to the Westward which I have sup-
posed.

1845.] JEleventh Memoir of the Law of Stoma in India, 67

lit, 2d and 3rd Nov. — The Bar. first falling, then about stationary,
tod lastly rising again to its former level as if it had just felt the
storm, but no more. The indications at Ceylon on the 2d are clear.
]y those of a storm passing over the South extremity of the Peninsula,
and probably, if we had any reports from Tranquebar or between it,
and point Calymere we shall find that there really was a shift there.
aboQts, while the rapid veering at the station of Paumbum was taking
place. It is possible that the tendency of the whole aerial impulse,
like a storm or tide wave, was as usual, to force its way through the
Panlgatcherry pass, as shewn in my eighth Memoir.

I most not conclude this part of the summary without noticing the
remarkable /lu;t of the Mary Imrie's Bar. remaining so high, though
fiaetnating greatly, in the first storm ; and in the second falling to 29®
25. It will be noticed and for the present I should suppose this is the
cause cf this anomaly, that she was at the time her Bar. stood so high,
in the N. West quadrant (having the wind at N. N. E.) of her first
storm, and she had thus both the effect of the verge of the coming storm
which sometimes and perhaps lilways, raises the Bar.* and also that of
the monsoon from the N. Eastern part of the Bay. The Ariel's storm
in my sixth Memoir, Vol. p. 686 of Journal is another instance in which
tUs seems to have occurred with two storms coming up in different
directions and both at a considerable angle to the monsoon. We find
from the Vernon's log that it was blowing a fresh monsoon from the
N.N.E. on this day. The oscillation I have frequently remarked
apon, and if Gapt. Boyd had had a Sympiesometer on board, no
doobt the warning would have been still more distinctly given.

Extract from the Log of the Ship Emily, Captain Andbhson from
Shields to Calcutta, reduced to Civil Time.

The following log reached me after the chart was lithographed;
it will be seeui by it that the Emily was skirting the Fyzulbarry's
storm to the Eastward on the 27th and 28th, as the Winifred was to
the Westward. From the heights of the Emily's Bar. we may infer
that she had really no part of the vortex but rather a heavy monsoon

* See Col. Reid quoting Mr. Redfield's explanation of this phcenomenon. Second
^tionp,5l4to 519.

68 Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Siomu in India* [No. 157.

settmg Id, though od the 27th she is near enough to the Fyzul-
barry^s place to allow us to suppose that both were partaking of the
strong Easterly stream of wind which prevailed thereabouts on that
day.

The Emily was on the 6th November 1843, at noon, in Lat. 3''.40
N. Long. 91° .34' (to 54' by Lunars) East. Bar. 30.5 Ther. 85**, staod-
ing to the N. N^ E. with variable N. N. W. to N. W, and N. Caster-
ly breezes to midnight.

27M November, — Increasing breeze N. E. b. E. to noon, when Lat.
S" 28. Long. 9r 46' and 92^6'* Bar. 30.5 Ther. 83*'. p. m, strong breease
East and sudden squalls. Ship standing 6 and ^ knots to the N. N.
W. and N. -^ W. Midnight the same, and increasing with incessant
rain.

28/;4 November, — a. m. Thick cloudy weather, continued rain and
heavy squalls. Wind 2 a. m. E. S. E. ; at 6 East. Noon Lat. Obs. T
42' N., Long. 91° 38' E. Bar. 30.5 Ther. 81°. p. m. Increasing breeze
and a high confused sea^ wind E. b. N. Midnight heavy squalls.

Wth November, — a. ic. strong gales East with tremendous squalls
and a continuance of heavy rain, 8 a. ic. wind N. E. b. E. Noon Lat.
Obs. 10° 17' Long. 91° 3' t9l° 40' by 8 p. m. finer; out all reefe.
Wind N. B. b. E. and N. E.

20th November. — Increasing again from the N. E., noon Lat. 14*'
13' N. Long. 89° 40' E. Bar. 70.00 Ther. 83^ p. m. hard gales East to
N. E. with tremendous heavy squalls and a high confused sea. Mid-
night, wind E. b. N. more moderate.

let December,— jl, m. Variable weather with squalls, wind about E.
N. E. Lat. 1 4° 13' N., Long. 89 °44' Bar. 30, 10. Ther. 83° p. m. squally
and torrents of rain. Wind about E. N, E.

2d Dec^mft^— -Moderate from N. E. Lat. 15° 35' N. Long. 89° 22' £.

Concluding Remarks.
One of the first peculiarities which strikes us in considering the
storm in the Southern Hemisphere, is its almost stationary character,

* The several Longs, apparently Lunar brought on by Chr.
t 91^ SO' is probably meant here, giving a mean Long, of 9l^ S5' for the ship's
place.

1846.] Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Siorme in India. 69

u eompared with the storms we have been aoautomed to consider.

We find it moving only.

Miles.

From the 26th to the 27th Nov.

27 th

„ 28th „

28th

„ 29th „

135

29th

„ 30th

30th

,, let Dec.

Or in five days.

331

Giving an average of per Day, . •

661

Or per hour not more than 2f

iod this also on a singularly curved track* This slow motion of the
storms heie^ if future researches should show it to be usual, will be a
new and carious fact, and will explain, not the frequency of their oc
correnee hereabouts, but the frequency of thdr being met with in the
track of the outward-bound ^ips and on the verge of the trade.t

With respect to the track itself; we have, I think clearly established
tkat it must first have moved up from the S. E. to the N. West-
ward and then curved away to the S. W. The exact position of the ships,
18 of coarse liable to great errors after three, four, or five days of bad
weather or hurricane ; but still these errors are reducible to moderate
limits, and when we have ships on both sides of the storm, or ships on
one side and others at or close to the centres, we are very sure that our po-
sitions for these points from day to day cannot be very hi wrong ;
and certainly not far enough to invalidate our general conclusion as
to the extent of the space passed over by the storm in these five days4

There are some other matters worthy of note which I take here

* The true track was in all probality a sharp curve passini^ near the different
pointi.

t Col. Reid remarks p. 241 . that the Albion's storm was apparently almost sta-
tionary or forming.

X See postcript for an extraordinary confirmation of the truth of our work, and of
these remarks, which were written months before the intelligence there given reached
lae.

70 Eleventh Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. QNo. 157.

in their natural order to direct the attention of future observers to
them> and these are :

Atmospheric signs indiccUing the approach of the storm. The most
remarkable of these is the warning noise noticed by Captain
Bundle p. 32, to which I have there appended a note refer-
ring also to Journal Vol. XI. p. 1000 for another instance where it
was carefully noted, and I have heard it also on other occasions ; though
not noting it on the spot I will not refer more particularly to them.
It is exactly that sort of noise which we hear, and read of, in old houses
in England, and with which most of us are acquainted ; but we there
attribute it to the noise of the wind in the chimneys, or amongst the
trees, or, on board a ship to the rigging : yet here there can be no
doubt of its being distinctly heard at sea as the *' roaring and screaming'*
of the wind in a tyfoon or hurricane certainly is. My present theory
to account for it is this. I suppose the storm to be really formed
and to be *' roaring and screaming" at say 200 miles' distance, and
that the noise, if not conveyed directly by the wind, may be so re.
flectively from the clouds, as in the case of thunder claps. A noise
is known on some parts of the coast of England by the name of *^ the
calling of the sea" as occurring in fine weather and announcing a
storm, and also in mountainous countries. All these may be con-
nected, and seamen may reader great service to science and to them-
selves by noting these curious phoenomenae.

The sickly and dancing appearances of the stars, as noticed by
Captain Bundle is also remarkable but more easily explained, as we
may suppose the sickly (hazy) appearance to have arisen from the
atmosphere being loaded with vapour half condensed, and the
''dancing" to be occasioned by their appearing at times through
spaces and intervals somewhat less loaded with vapour wreaths*
If I am not mistaken the fixed light of a Light House has sometimes
this dancing motion,, by the effect of small wreaths of vapour passing
before it, as at the breaking up of a fog ? The vibrating appearance
of distant objects seen through a telescope in the morning in tropi-
cal climates and owing to the different rarefactions of strata of air is
fiimiliar to us all.

Phosphoric flashes in the fvater, are common enough in fine wea-
ther, but are nevertheless well worth noting; we do not yet know

J845.] £lleventh Memoir on the Law of Slortnt in India. Ti

more common in particular parts of the ocean, or at particular sea-
fioDs, or in particular weather than at others.

The appearances of the clouds are of special interest, for there can
[be no doubt that many indications can be drawn from them of great
[talae^ both to the careful mariner and to the man of science. The
lemark of Captain Handley p. 14, shows the storm was forming to
the eastward of him, and those of Captain fiundle, both as to appear-
iDce and motions are exceedingly interesting^ as showing that there
hvere different currents prevailing above, probably from one part of the
[itorm or vortex over-reaching another.

The kind of lightning described by Captain Bundle, pis also worthy
of great attention : should this be found always to precede these storms
in particular latitudes it would be, in addition to other signs, of great
ntyity*

The tiaies of the Barometers and Sympiesometers of the various ships

both as relates to the approach of the storm, and to the manner in

which the instruments were affected every time the ships bore up, and,

tempted no doubt by the&ir winds, ran down to the S. Westward and

thus neared the centre, is of peculiar interest ; and it is highly worthy of

remark that not one of them thought ^ running to the E. N. E. or

eom N, E. while the wind and sea admitted of it, which was

the true course to steer, as may be seen by the chart and storm card.

Tbey would thus have raised their Barometers and should have then

bsuled gradually to the Southward, and South-westward, and so

have tailed round, and eventually out of it. In this point of view

the logs of the Fleming, Ainslie, Futtle Bozack, and Flowers of Ugie

ve remarkable, and most instructive lessons for us. These ships will

almost indeed, to the eye of the studious seaman, appear to be

manoeuvring for the purpose of proving the value, the truth, — and I

will add the beauty, — of the Law of Storms.

* I have found, while correctiD§r this page, in the press a single instance in which
thii remarkable kind of lightning is described. It occurs in one of the replies
^ a circular addressed at my suggestion by the Hon'ble the Court of Directors
K> I. C. to their retired Officers, requesting information on storms in the Indian Ocean
ind China seas, by Captain Jenkins, then commanding the H. C. Ship City of London :
wiiosays, speaking of an approaching hurricane in March 1816, in Lat, 12^ to 18^ South
LoDg. 78° to 76' East, for which, warned by his Bar., he was preparing. ** At 7, the
appearance of the atmosphere altered, constant vivid lightning, resembling in the dis-
tSRce the Northern Ughta with frequent hard gusts of wind," &c. We are not to
nppose from its being so unfrequently noticed that it is therefore of unusual occur-
fence; teamen are so accustomed to lightning that they rarely take the trouble to
deicribe it.

72 Eleventh Memoir on the Law cf Storms in India, [No. 157.

In the Northern Hemisphere,

We have principally to remark here on what we may call the
'* generation of separate storms" at short distances from each other so
analogous to what certainly occurred in the Calcutta storm of June
J 842, though we might there suppose it to have been occasioned by
the influences of the land, as hills, valleys, &c., but it would'now ap-
pear that the state of the atmosphere which induces one rotatory
storm often disposes, or gives rise to, others^ just as after certain states
of summer weather in Europe, we hear of a succession of thunder
storms all over a large tract of country.

Thus we find that when the Fyzulbarry's storm (a true rotatory
one) had travelled up from the S. Eastward two or three days^ 27th
or 28th to the 30th, another storm appears to have commenced at four
degrees' distance with the Candahar, which we trace accurately enough
through two days as travelling to the W. S. W. and if our conclu-
sions be correct as to the Niagara and Mary Imrie, that the Fjrzul-
iMirry's storm when approaching this of the Candahar's, curved away
to the W. b. S. This looks strange enough, but whatever are the
causes of them^ the dust whirlwinds on the plains of India, of which
I have seen as many as four or five at a time, certainly do influence
(repel) and alter each others tracks. We do not know if these arise from
the same cause, but it is the only analogous fact that I am acquaint-
ed with,* and the scientific reader will judge from the data set down
whether he thinks they are sufficient to entitle us to lay down the
tracks which I have here given. There is I think no doubt of the
storms being altogether separate ones.

It is remarkable that all these forces and storms seem to have been
blended so as to produce one about Palks' Passage^ evidently travelling
to the Westward also, or rather generated like the other in advance
of those raging in the bay, for we find that the Ceylon stoifns all be-
gan on the 1st, when the nearest centre, that of the Candahar's storm
was at least at three degrees of distance ; and it could net be part of
this, for the Vernon's position limits it to the N. W. within a much
more circumscribed circle, and I am therefore inclined to believe that
at sea as on shore, independent vortexes arise like independent thunder
storms.

Postscript.
In the preliminary notice to this Memoir, I announced that I had ob-
teined from the Mauritius the detoil of what I may call a beautiful ezpe-

* *' It is possible that one storm may deflect another says Col. Keid," p. 433, 2d(1
Edition of his work.

1845.3 JSleventh Memoir an the Law of Storms in India. JZ

limenty in which a vcBsel called the Charles Heddle was fully proving
for usthere, the truth of the researches we were making here. The
following is the newspaper notice of it, written by myself, which will
lolly explain enough of this remarkable, or rather wonderful, &ct and
eoinddenoe of actual experiments with theory and with resurches
going on at thousands of miles distant.

" I have just received from Capt Royer> the Master Attendant at
Mauritius, who, like every one else, was much staggered by the report
of the Charles Heddle's circular sailings for so many days in a hurri-
I ctne, a number of logs, and with them her's, which he has taken the
trouble to copy himself that there might be no mistake about it^ and
you will learn with pleasure that I have fortunately just completed
a Memoir now printing, of which the evidence leaves no manner of
doubt as to the possibility of a fast sailing ship, that could scud well,
having really done what the Charles Heddle has; and it teaches us
moreover, by two perfectly independent storms, at more than a year's
distance of time, and in quite different parts of the Southern Indian
Occean, that there are storms of great intensity, lasting for long periods
(in both cases five whole days) and which have yet so slow a progres-
sive notion that one might, comparatively speaking, almost term
them stationary storms. If you like to print this, for it is advan*
tsgeous now and then to draw attention to the subject, and to show
how much yet remains to be learnt, particularly with respect to the
storms of the Southern Hemisphere, here are some of the data as
briefly as I can give them.

First, from the accompanying chart (of this Memoir) you will see
that between the 26th of Nov. and 1st Dec. 1843, and between lati-
todes 5"" 30' and 1 T South and longitudes 83. to 89"* £^t, there was a
hurricane raging for the whole five days, which, traced by the logs of
many ships, appears only to have travelled in that time, from point to
pdnt of its centre, about 255 miles, or allowing for the curves about
a degree a day only.

The Charles Heddle, by her log now before me, appears to have
scudded from the 25th to the 28th February, 1845, for five whole days
round and round in a Hurricane circle! during which time she ran
upwards of thirteen hundred miles ; the wind made with her five
complete revolutions, and from calculations derived from the dis-
tances and shifts of wind and the positions of the vessel, to have been
on an average about 50 miles from its centre ; which was slowly mov-
ing on, like the one of which I send you the chart, to the southwest,
ward, at not more than three miles an hour; and the direct distance

74 Eleventh Memoir on ike Law of Storms in India, \^i\

made by her> from point to point, was but 354 miles. Now»
the Charies Heddle, any of our ships in this November stor
scudded the whole time, they might undoubtedly have made
such a set of circles as you see on my chart, and yet have made
trifle of direct distance in the whole five days ; and in a word ^
so to a^y^prove by this Memoir that there is nothing at all of r<K
in her account, and that she has been performing for us a very c
and beautiful experiment ; as cleverly as if she had been sent i
do it! The investigation of this and the other Mauritius s
for which I have data, will, I doubt not, lead to other equally
portant and curious facts in that dangerous quarter of which sdl
as yet know so little, but the difficulties and trouble of obtainiaf
books are positively incredible."

The value of this experiment as a proof of the circular t|
generally, if it requires any now, and of the truth of our researd
need not dilate upon. In a future Memoir I trust to be able to I
forward a great deal more in relation to the tracks and other pecal
ties of the storms of the Southern Hemisphere.

Note. — While the laat sheets of this Memoir were passine through the press, I o|
ed by the kindness of Capt. J. Viall, the loff of the ship John Brightman, just arrived
the Mauritius, and which ship it will l>e recollected was. seen by the Fysulbaa
the 28th November, (page 14,) being bound to the Southward. This log, while it 4
borates exactly the general direction of the track of the Fyxulbarrv*s storm, enah*
to correct the place of the centre for the 29th, which being laid down from the
a single ship, without observation, is necessarily subject to error, though here as
quently before, the error does not amount to much, and all the relative da
practical purposes on board either of the ships in the storm, would have been the
as for the management of a ship, what is required to be known, is the bearing
centre of the hurricane, and the track of the storm, provided there be ample sea

From midnight ^th November.— The John Brightman had heavy squally w
and winds from East to B. S. £., and N. N. E. She was at noon in Lat. 9^ 4
Long.87o 44' £., Bar. at 29.63. (having been at 29.71. at noon 26th, since which
she had run down South, and S. b. W., 188 miles.) p. m. wind E. b. S., and E.
to midnight, when it was a strong gale with a tremendous cross sea, the vessel h»
always run to the South and S. b. E. to midnight 56 miles. Bar. 29.58.

28M Nov.— Wind and weatherthe same, 7 a. m. wind E. N. E., Noon strong gale I
high sea, Lat. indifferent Obs. 7.48 N., Lone. 87° 48' E., p. m. wind E. N. £., B|
and E. S. E. to midnight when Bar. 29.41. Snip's run from noon between S. S. E. ^
South 53^ miles.

79th Nov. — Hard gales, squalls, and sea continuing as before from East, £. S.'l
and £. b. N., Noon more moderate, but weather looking very suspicious, Lat. Aoi
6O03' N., Long. 87<>58' East. Bar. 29.30. Ther. SS^. Ship^s course from midnij|
to noon South to S. S. £., 51^ miles, p. m. wind veering from E. b. N. at noon, tol
£• b. N., and N. W. to West, and by 4 p. m. to W. b. S., light variable winds id
thick weather. At 2 p. m. breeze increasing, thick unsettled weather. Bar. 29.24* i
4 p. M. fresh gales W. b. S. hove to. At 8 heavy gales and vivid lightning with i4
and squalls. Bar. 29.28. Midnight Bar. 29.20. ,

30m Nov.-'k. M. to noon hove to. Bar. rising to 29.36. ; at noon Ther. 83°, wtt
W. S. W. Lat. by indifft. Obs. and Acct. 5° 46^ N., Long. Acct.88° 31' East., p. I
Wind S. W. and at 5 p. m. S. S. W., weather moderating. Midnight Bar. 29. 49. Wit
South at 5 p. M., and S. S. E. by noon 1st December when Lat. 5° 19' N., Looi
Chr,90oi6'E. Ther. 84°, Bar. 29.59.

"*.

9;
C4

JOURNAL

OP THB

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

Tratulation of the Toofut ul Kiram, a HUtory of Sindh, By

Lieut. P08TAN8.

Introduction.

The following translatioD of the most saocinct, consistent, and continued
history of Sindh, which I have yet met with, has been made under the
idea that, intimately connected as we have become with that country, its
history cannot be otherwise than highly interesting, and that there are
many who may desire information on the subject. The author of the
'' Toofut ul Kiram," has in his 3rd vol. collected materials from the best
authorities; I have o%ly omitted legends and stories, which have been
given elsewhere, (Bengal Asiatic Society's Journal,) as also the histories of
holy Seers, Sheikhs, and Seyuds, they being alone interesting to the fol-
lowers of the prophet ; for the rest I believe it to be nearly a literal ren-
dering of the text into English, with a few explanatory notes. I regret,
that want of time, and emergent public duty, will not allow me to do more
at present.

It will be seen that, with the exception of a very short period prior to
•the Mahomedan conquest by Bin Cassim, in the first century of the Hejira,
we have no account of the country under its Hindoo rulers ; and I regret
to say, that all efforts to procure any information on the subject have
Miherto proved unavailing. Had the Mahomedan historians sought for
materials, they might doubtless have been found, and thus the hiatus
between the expedition of Alexander, and that of the Khalif Waiid, might
have been filled up, so as to throw some light upon a portion of the coun-
No. 158, No. 74> Nbw Series. m

76 Translation of the Toofut ul Kiram, [No. 158.

try, rendered memorable by the great conqueror's passage down the Indus.
As it is, we have a blank of nearly eleven centuries ; and we only know,
from the description herewith given of the extent of country tributary to
the Sindh Rigahs or Bahis, that they were powerful princes, and that the
kingdom of Sindh possessed in their time a degree of importance which
declined after its subjugation by the Moslems, when it became dismem-
bered, and fell a constant prey to succeeding conquerors.

From the period of the Mahomedans entering Sindh to the accession of
the present family of Talp^r chiefs, the chronological order of its various
rulers may be thus briefly given, and the number of dynasties during a
period of about 1200 years, affords a curious instance of eastern revolutions.
From Bin Cassim downwards, Sindh has fallen to the arms of the great-
est conquerors of the East

Taken by the Khalif Walid.

•••

Beni Oomhae,.*. ... ... ...

Falls to the Abbasides,

Subdued by Mahomed of Ghuzni,

Tribe of Sumrahs usurped the authority, ...

Invaded by Jengiz Khan,

Tributary to Delhi,

18 Jams of the tribe of Sdmah,

Conquered by Shah Beg Arghdn, «..
Divided between the Arghdns and Tirkhans,
Conquered by Akhbar under the Khan Kha-

nam, and ceases to be independent.
Invasion of Nadir Shah, and annexation to

A vfoia, ... •■. ••• ... ...

Kalora Chiefs rule in Sindh, tributary to

\y&lJUl| ... ... ... ... «a.

Kaloras overthrown by the Talpdrs,
Talptlrs cease to be tributary to Cabul, ...

The downfall of the Kaloras during the time of Sir Afraz Khan (where
the manuscript ends,) and the rise of the present Talptir family, have been
so fully given elsewhere, that I do not annex the account to this transla-

* To this list we may now add, ** Conquered by Sir C. Napier, and annexed to British
India, by Lord Eilenborougb,— A. D. 1843."— Eds.

133

416

446

610

694

752-

927

950

999

1149

1166

A.D.

1779

1839«

1845.] a Hutory of Sindh. 77

tion*. Of the languages of the country the Sindet haa been described by
Mr. Wathen, and an excellent grammar, written by that gentleman, publish-
ed by Goyemmentf. The Persian language is used by the higher classes,
tnd is that in which all the State correspondence and revenue accounts are
kept ; most of the Hindoos of Upper Sindh speak it fluently, the result of
their intercourse with the natives of Affghanistan. A slight knowledge
of it will be found of very considerable service to individuals stationed in
the country.

As connected with this translation, I would beg to refer all those desir-
ous of obtaining information on the inhabitants, cities (ancient and mo-
dem), and divisions of the country of Sindh, to the admirable papers pub-
lished in the Transactions of the Royal Geographical Society, and written
by the late Capt. Jas. McMurdo, <* An account of the country of Sindh, with
remarks on the state of society, manners, and customs of the people, &c."

J. POSTANS,

Shikarpore, 5th July^ 1841. Atsittant Political Agent.

Siodh is one of the sixty-one divisions of the world, situated in the
four first climates, belonging chiefly to the second, and is in the same
region as the holy cities of Mecca and Medina; the river of Sindh
rises in the mountains of Cashmere, another joins it from the moun-
tains of Cabal, in Maltan it is met by the river SUnne, and there
proceeds to the sea. Its water is very clear and cool : in the language
of the country it is called Hichrand; all the rivers of Sindh flow towards
the south, where they empty themselves into the sea, such as the waters
of PUahy Ckinabf Sehae, Suttanpur and Bajawareah. The climate of
Smdh is delightful, its morning and evening cool : the country to the
north, hotter than that to the south ; its inhabitants intelligent, and
of large stature.

Let it not be concealed, that whilst the people of Sindh were formerly
Authors of Sindh ignorant of the Persian and Arabic languages, no
imtohes. account as a compilation existed of those countries ;

bat in the year 613 H., AUi Bin Akmid, Bin Alii Bukur Kufi, an
inhabitant of Ooch, wandered to this valley, and arrived at the cities of
Baknr and Alor, where he saw the families of the great men and descen-

* See Dr. and Sir A. Burnes, and Sir H. Pottinger.

t A vocabulary by Capt. Eastwick, and a grammar and vocabulary of the Brahooi

ud Beloochi languages, by Major Leech, have also been published in our Journal.—

Eds.

78 . Translaiion of the Too/ui ul Kiram, CNo. 158.

dants of tbe Arabs, and searched for accounts of the conquest of the
Moslems in all its particulars ; he also became acquainted with Cazi-
Ismaily Bin AUiy Bin Mamotned, Bin Moussa, Bin Jcthir, and saw
in the possession of that great man a description in Arabic, written by
his ancestors, of the conquest of Sindh : this he translated into Persian.
After him, Meer Masoom Bukeri, and after him Meer Mahomed

Jahir Massiani, in the times of Akbar and Jihan-

The work known as gir, composed works, and also the '' Urffhim Na-

which brings the^Ws- wcA," ** Jukhar Nameh,** and ** Byler Nameh" were

tolbout ll°A.D.f 7m compiled. Subsequent to.these no clear account

written by Meer Mig- existed (or no one was acquainted with affairs) up

to my own time ; by abbreviating and selecting
from various books, and by recording some new events, I trust it will
be found acceptable to all men.

Let it be understood, that according to what has been previously men-
tioned, the province of Sindh was so called from '' Sindh'' (the brother
of Hindb, the son of Hob) whose descendants from generation to genera*
tion governed in that country, and tribes without number came forth
and ruled, whose accounts are not recorded. From amongst these the
tribe of Nubuja^ the men of Jah^ and the tribe of Momid ruled in their
turn : of these there are no detailed accounts, so that they pass on to the
last of the Rahis ; and after that they relate the histories of other classes.
The dynasty of the Rahis had their capital at Alor*, and the
Dynasty of the boundaries of their dominions and possessions were
^ *^' to the eastward as far as Caahmir and JSXmuf^

westward to Mikran and the shore of the sea of Ofnan^ i, e, at the
Boundaries of their port of Deijul, to the south to the confines of the
empire. port of Surat, and to the north to Candahar,

and Seistan, with the hills of Sulliman, Kirwan and Kaijkanan.

1, Rahi Ditoahijy a distinguished prince ; his sway extended over the
boundaries described, and was absolute. The princes of Hind were in
treaties of friendship with him, and in all his territories the merchant •
(Caravans) travelled in safety.

* The ruins of Alor are still to be aeen about four miles from Roree ; opinions
differ as to the river having at any period flowed in that direction, as stated in the
** Tooputal Kisum." I cannot lep^m that there are any traces of Hindoo architectme
to be found at Alor.

m5.2 a Hisiory of Sindh. 79

2. When he died, his son Sahiras was exalted to the crown, and in
the steps of his father he for a long period enjoyed ease and prosperity :
after his death, his son,

3. Rahi Sahasi, succeeded happily to the high seat of empire and
the throne of Dominion ; he conducted his affairs prosperously, and
saceessfully followed out the institutions of his predecessors : after him,
bis son,

4. Rahi Sahiras the 2nd, took his place. The king (of) Nimraz
brought a force against him; on learning this intelligence, he met
him in the country of Kick and prepared for battle ; from morning until
noon they were occupied in conflict, but by chance Sahiras was wound-
ed by an arrow in the neck and died. The king Nimraz despoiled his
eamp and returned. The army of Sahiraz agreed together, and placed
his son Sahasi upon the throne.

5. Bahi Sahasi the 2nd, excelled his ancestors in endowments and
good qualities ; in a short period he consolidated and settled his domi-
nions as far as their boundaries extended, and remained at his ease in
his capital. He ordained for his subjects in lieu of tax, that they
should fill up with earth (repair) six forts, viz. Oochf Matilah^ Siwari,
Mudf Alar, and Seewistan.

They say be had a porter named Ram, and a minister named fioid-

Introdaction of the firah- himan : one day a brahmin named Chach, son
mm Chach to the Rahi. ^^ g.j^j^j^^ distinguished amongst his class,

eame to Ram, and they became acquainted ; the porter was well pleased
with him, and took him to the minister, after some time, and when
Chach was intimate with the minister, it so happened, that the latter
became sick, and the Rahi's order arrived, to call the agents of the
provinces together : now since he (the minister) saw that Chach was
acute and intelligent, he sent him from himself to the Rahi, who
was in the inner apartment of the palace. His wife Rani Sohindi
wished to draw the veil, but the Rahi said what necessity can there
be for a veil before brahmins ; and when the brahmin Chach entered,
Sohui became delighted with his eloquence, and dictated his replies
to him ; so in time, when the ability of the brahmin became apparent
to the Rahi, he directed that in future the curtain should be dispen-
sed with in his favor, and that the necessary affairs of State should be
transacted in the inner department of the palace ; at this juncture the

80 Translation of the Toojut ul Kiram, [No. 158.

Rani became enamoured of Chach to distraction ; bat notwithstandiog
The Rani becomes ena- she sent messages, Choch would- not consent
moure o oc . ^^ |^^^ views, until his aflPairs prospered, and

he had laid all classes under obligations for his favours and wisdom.
By the chance of fortune's favours the Rahi Sahasi was attacked
with a mortal illness. The Bani called Chach, and said, ** The Rahi
has no children or descendants, certainly his relations will be-
come heirs to the country, and it will not remain with yoa
and me; I will therefore devise some scheme, in order that the
throne may be secured to you:" to this he agreed. The JRani

Succession secured to sent messages in various directions to the in*
CAacA by the Rani. ^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ g^^^^, ^^^ become

convalescent, but had not strength to conduct his own afiairs, (to
rise up) ; *' some time has elapsed, and the affairs of the country were
in confusion, now he has directed and given his signet to Chach, who
is to sit in his place on the throne, and who will demand from yoo
the particulars and accounts of the important business of the State,
wherefore by all means let all of you be present :" all the rulers and
great men, in obedience to the summons, presented themselves, and
made their obeisance and .bowed the knee to Chach. A short time after
the Rahi died ; the Rani's first care was to conceal his death, and hav-
ing separately called those of the relations of Sahasi to the palace, who
had claims (on the succession,) under the pretence of explaining the
late Rahi's will, she imprisoned (chained) them ; then calling their
poorer connections, she said — *' I have arrested these claimants to the
throne on your account, each of you having his enemy here should
precede the assembly and kill him, and having taken possession of his
property and riches, let him become obedient to Chach; thus will he
attain all his wishes." Thinking this the height of good fortune, these
people did as they were directed : the period occupied by the rule of
the five preceding Rajahs is 137 years, and then it descended to the
Brahmins.

' 1st, — Brahmin Chach Bin Silabij. When Chach after the manner
Brahmln^Chach. ^ described became sole heir to the throne, as ad.
vised by the Rani, he opened the doors of his treasury and bestowed
largely upon high and low ; at length the Rani having accomplished her
ends, called together the nobles, head brahmins and great men, &c

1845.] a HisUny of Sindh. 81

directed tbem to make h^r lawful (as a wife) with Chach, and they
were married, (conoected in that linot) accordingly.
The Rana Mihrut ChUoofi^ who was a relation of Sahasi, having

The Rana of Chittore ^^^ ^^^ coUected and brought a counUesa
gputes the throne with army by Stratagem, and wrote to Chach

saying, '* What have brahmins to do with rule
or government ; give me the authority, and you shall be reinstated in
your former appointment."

Chach went himself to the Rani and said, <* A powerful enemy
has come forth — what do you advise ?" the Rani said, '* War is under-
stood by men, (but) if you will change places and apparel with
me, I will go forth and do battle with the ^emy ;" Chach was afflicted
and distressed. The Rani, encouraging him, said, ** You have treasure,
quickly propitiate the soldiers, so that you be victorious.'' Chach
immediately acted on this advice, and bestowed much wealth (on his
araiy)— «he thus was prepared. Bana Mihrut arrived in the neighbour-

Rana of Chittore's j^^^ ^f ^^ ^l^^n ^he two armies met, Rana Mihrut

amies near Alor.

came forward, and said to Chach, ** We are alone concerned in this quar-
rel, why should a multitude be needlessly destroyed ; advance and let us
make trial of our strength :" to this Chach replied, *' I am a Brahmin,
and cannot fight on horseback ; descend, and I will combat with
joa.** Bona Mihrut alighted from his horse, and Chach directed his
groom to bring his horse slowly after him. Rana Mihrut being off his
gaard from this excuse of Chach^ left his horse behind : they met— CAocA

sprang swiftly on his horse, and with' one blow killed

Chach kills the ^r ° mu « , i. J J.

Ruia and returns his adversary. The Ranas forces returned dis-
Tictorious. pirited and discomfited, whilst the victorious Chach

returned to Ahr. These affairs occurred about the first year of the
Hijera. In short, after the victory over Rana Mihrut^ Chach took
counsel with the minister Budhiman, and appointed his own brother
Naib of Alor for the settlement of the dependencies thereof. One
^ ^ named MuUah was sent to govern Sewistan, and

GoTemors to coun- ^ '

tries appointed by Akham Lohana, governor of Brahmanabad. and
CAacA. _

Basar Bin Kakah having subdued some of the holders

of the forts in Sewistan (or Sibi,) as also some tribes of Sewis (the

afiw'^^Ki^^nin^^^o ^P^^*^ ®^ ^^^^^ Country being Kaka Raj,) and Chadi
y«&n. after having passed 40 years prosperously died, his

82 Translation 0/ the Toojut ul Kiram, [No. 158.

brother Chundur Bin Siiabij was vice-regeDt of the empire. MuUahy
Chundur Bin Si- ^^^ governor of Sewistan, went to the Rahi of Runniij,
^^^'j' reporting Chach's death, and saying, ** His brother is

now lieutenant of the empire, if yoa attempt it the possession of the
country will be an easy afiair.'* The Rahi sent his brother named
Basahis to Muttah ; and Chundur immediately on hearing this prepar-
ed to oppose his enemy, and pursued Muttah and Basahis through
various portions of his dominions up to the vicinity of Alor ; they tried
various schemes, but at last failed. In short, he f Chundur J ruled pros-
perously, until the 8th year, when he died. After him, his nephew,

2nd.'^Dahir Bin Chach, adorned the throne ; his brother Dihir Sin
Dahir, soQofChach, he sent fo Brahminabad as governor. One day he
2nd Brkhmin. inquired of the astrologers as to his fate ; they told

him there was no bad omen in it, ** but with whomsoever your sister
marries he will succeed to Alor, and rule the country.'' Through fear of
losing the country, Dahir contrived and married his own sister. His
brother Dihir Sin was vexed at this intelligence, and prepared a force^
Dihir Sin, his bro- and in time arrived at Alor. but died from small-pox ;

ther, rebels against "^

him : his death. Dahir caused him to be burnt, and proceeded to
Brahmanabad, where he married his wife (brother's) the daughter of
Akham Lohana, and remained there one year ; and having appointed
the son of Dihir Sin, named Chach governor of Brahmanabad : he re-
turned to Alor, where he repaired the fort, which had only been half
completed by his father, and arranged that four months of the cold wea-
ther should be passed in Brahmanabad, and four months of spring at Alor.
In this way he occupied himself for eight years, and by degrees the afiairs
of the State were settled satisfactorily.

In short, having fixed the boundaries of his dominions to the east,
he planted two cypress trees as a mark on the confines of Cashmere,
and returned.

Accounts of the Joining f assembling J of the Allafi Arabs.

The learned in such matters relate, that during the time of the
Khalifat of Abodal Malh Bin Mirwa^ when Hijjaj was governor of
the Iraks, and his designs were directed towards Sindh and Hind, he
sent a Seyud to Mikran, who killed Siffooi Bin Lam Himami ; Abdul--
lah Bin Abdul Bihenif and Mah Bin Mohawyah called together the

18450 o Hiitory cf Sindh. 88

Arabs of Beni Asamah, and represented, that '* the Siffooi, who was one
of oar tribe and people, has been killed unjustly ; we must aisemble and
revoige him."

In short, they acted on this suggestion, and killed the Seyud and
took possession of Mikram ; after some time they fled through fear to
Kharfusan: Mujahameh Bin Seyud came to Kirman to conquer
Kharassan^ and sent forward Abdyl Ruhman^ Bin Askahas. The
AUifis laid wait for him, and killed him ; they fled to Sindh and came

Th AUafi t 'be f ^^ ^^^^^ ^^0, thinking them well adapted for the
Aiabs are taken into police and protection of his country, took them

the service of Dahir.

into his own service. The above mentioned AUqfig
were in Sindh until the coming of Bin Cassim, and the conquest of
that country, when having procured a promise of pardon, they joined
Bia Cassim. At length the princes of Hind having learnt the abso-
late dominion of Dahir, agreed together that previous to his attempting

TheprincesofHind ^^^^ Conquest, they should take an army and
jealous of Dahir's conquer his country, and according to the agree-
ment of the Rahis, Rahi Ra Maly governor of
^nuj collected a large force, and advanced upon Dahir and sur-
roonded Alor ; Dahir was afflicted by his enemy, and asked advice of
tbe minister Budhiman, who said, ** The Arabs are expert in battle,
entrust the affair to them." Dahir came to Mahamed AUafi, and sought

his friendship (assistance) ; the latter said, " Be satis-

deftf*te^the^ o^^ wnor ^^^* bring not your forces, and direct that a deep

of Kannuj by a strata- ditch be dug to the length of a fursakh ; cover it over
gem.

with grass, and leave it ; after that, do as I direct."

When Dahir had thus done, Mahamed AUafiy with 500 Arabs and Sin-
dees, picked men, made a night attack on the troops of Ran Mai: these
being taken by surprise and awaking confused, fell on each other and
destroyed themselves, and the illustrious Mahamed AUafi gave the
signal for flight ; the enemy, when they learnt that so small a force had
attack^ them, pursued and fell into the ditch ; now Dahir himself with
his force came out and took 80,000 men prisoners, and 60 war ele-
phants : according to the directions of Budhiman the minister, he set
them all free. BudhimatCs wisdom was proved, and Dahir lavished
his &vors on him, and according to his entreaty, directed his name to
be struck on one side of the copper coins.

84 Translation of the Too/ut ul Kir am, [No. 158.

From this victory Dahir*s position became strengthened, but the
surrounding provinces and states were dissatisfied, and nourished more
rebellion and sedition. He conducted Ihe affairs of his country pros*
porously for 25 years, when his punishment was the loss of his kingdom,
as will be related with other circumstances.

Account of the capture of the Slave Girls of Sirundip.

They relate, that the country of Sirundip* is of the ruby islands ; from
this had been sent some Abyssinian slaves with many valuable jewels
and curiosities for the Khalif and Hijjaj, in the care of confidential
servants in eight boats ; by chance these were driven by a storm to the
port of Diwalf J in the sea of Oman ; robbers belonging to that place, of
the tribe of Nikamrah, seized these people, and the representations of
the agents of the king of Sirundip, that they were presents to the

Reason of the first Mohamedan Khalif, had no effect. They said, ** If
invasion of Sindh. y^^^ g^^^y jg ^^^^^ ^^ ^ ransom and procure re-
lease." In that assemblage were certain women in the purity of Islam-
ism, who had intended making the Haj, and seeing the capital of the
Kalifs ; and Hijjaj, one of these, cried out thrice, " Oh Hijjaj ! hear
our complaints."

This intelligence was conveyed to Hijjaj ; when he heard that the
women had complained thrice in his name, he replied, three times, ** 1
attend," and prepared to remedy the affair.

' Account of the death of BaziL
When Hijjaj Bin Yusaf prepared to release the Moslem captives, he

B 1 th fi t M • '6P^®s®n^®<^ ^o ^b® Khalif, and sent a messenger with
homedan leader, sent threats to Dahir ; the Khalif was unconcerned in the

against Sindh.

matter, and Dahir said, " I am ignorant of the affair,
these robbers do not acknowledge my authority, they may hav.e done
80 or not ; but you must judge." On the receipt of this answer, Hijjaj
again represented to the Khalif, and obtained the required permission.

* Ceylon, thus proving a traffic between that place and Damascus,
t Is called from the Diwala, a temple for which it was famed. See Capt. McMurdo,
Transactions of Rl. Geog. Society.

1845.] a Hisiory ofSindh. 85

He appointed Abdul Allah SuUimah to Mikran, and ordered Bazil that
when he arrived at Mikran, he should collect 3,000 men and ad-
vance on Sindh. Bazil arrived at the Fort of NeiruUf and threatened
DtwcU; Dahir having learnt this, sent his son Jaiiisih with a large force
to Diwal ; from noon to night they contended. Bazil, after the utmost
resutance, was killed, and many Moslems were captured. They say

Battle at Diwal *^® govemor of the Fort of Nmrun^y who was named
nd death of BasU. Samam^ became terrified, and said to himself, '* I
guard the pass of the Arab forces into this country, they (the Sindees)
have thus opened the road of revenge to the Arabs, it may not be that I
should be crushed between the parties (hereafter) :^ accordingly he sent
a confidential agent to Hijjaj and profibred bis obedience, and obtained
pardon. Amur Bin AbduUdk said to Hij)aj^ <* Commit this momentous
bosiness to me, and I will proceed to Sindh and Hind ;" but he was
refased* Hijjaj said, '* I have consulted the astrologers, and they report
that Sindh and Hind will fall to the hand of Mahomed Bin Cassim, In

Q. ^ short, the period has now arrived for the settinir of

Bm Cassim pre- ' r o

ferred to the command the star of the unbelievers, and the ascendency

oftheSindli Army. ^ , , -

of the religion of the prophet in those countries ;
this afikir is more important than former undertakings, and must be
intrusted to Bin Cassim." It shall soon be related from first to
last
Here I proceed to relate the extraordinary birth connected with the
g f Jauisih ^^^'^ ®^ Jaisisth, They nay the Rahi Dahir was

•oa of Dahir. one day hunting, suddenly a tiger sprung from the

jongle, Dahir stopped those who were running away, and himself pre-
pared to attack the beast. His wife at this time had been pregnant ten
months with Jaisisih, and being very fond of Dahir, and learning this
she cried out and swooned ; at length Dahir killed the tiger and re-
tamed unhurt, but he found his wife dead : seeing the child moving in
her womb, he ordered her to be opened, and they brought out the
child ; and this name, which signifies ** the hunter of tigers," was given
to him, and indeed when be became of years he was renowned for his
courage and intrepidity.

* Neiremkote, site of the present capital Hyderabad ; this latter was founded by

Gholam Shah Kallnah.

86 TransiaHan of the Too/ut ul Kiram, [No. 158.

Accounts of the arrangement and arrival of the Moslem army for the

conquest of Sindh*
Iq true histories it is related, that daring the Khalifat oiihe chief of the
Arraiiffement and true believers, Umur Bin Khotah, (God's approval

Srn'ajf/^^^^^^^ »>« ^"^ ^^^'"O '^'^^'^ ^'«"^ ^«« ^^ '^^^ appointed

quest of Sindh. govemor of Bartfiy who having arrived at Oman, sent

some vessels properly equipped xxn^et Mughirah Bin Abut Has to Diwal ;
at that time the brother of Chach, named Samami Bin Salabi^', was
govemor of the place ; he opposed the Mahomedans, and after a great
deal of slaughter Mughirah Bin Abut Has was killed, with many others,
also many prisoners were taken. Abu Mussa Ashghuri^ who ruled in

Mikran, reported this circumstance to the Khalif,

oi'^w^^r^iZ^i *^*^ ^"^^ ^ Wly wme remedy, but was prohibited
to subdue Sindh and f^^ collecting troops ; again at the time of the Khal-

lifat of the chief of the believers, Ashnuin Bin
Hassan (may God's approval be towards him) Abdullah Bin Atnir^
Bin Rvbiahy became governor of Mikran, it was ordered that a confi-
dential agent should be sent to Sindh, to spy into and discover the
state of affairs. He sent Hakim Bin HuUiyah with directions to
make himself well informed of every thing and report thereon ; the
Hakim said, that the water was black, the fruits were sour and poison-
ous, the ground stony, and the earth saline. The Khalif asked, what
he thought of the inhabitants ; he replied, '* They were faithless." Thns
the preparation of a force from that quarter (Mikram) was abandon-
ed. Then in the Khalifat of the chief of the true believers, Alii,
a force passed from Mikram, and victorious and successful arrived
at the hill of Kag-Kaman, which is one of the boundaries of Sindh,
20,000 hill men ot>posed theirs ; the Moslem army calling on the Most
High, began the attack, the noise of the shouts terrified the enemy,
who cried for quarter, whilst others fled. From that time on occa-
sions of conflict, the Moslem noise of calling on the Most High is
heard in those hills. The news of the death of the Khalif arrived,
and any further advance was stopped. The force above mentioned
returned to Mikram. When Mohawiyah obtained sovereignty, he
Mohawiyah prepares appointed AbduUah Bin Sawad with 4,000 men
a force for Sindh. for Sindh ; by chance they arrived at the hill of

Kag-Kaman^ and were defeated by a large force of the unbelieversj

1845.] a History of Sindh. 87

and at length returned and arriTed at Mikram ; at that jancture, Zyad
was governor of the Iraks on the part of Mohawiyah^ who wrote to^
him to send Rcuhid Bin Oomur to Sindh, and he took pOMOsiion of
tbe hiU of Pageh, taking also the whole of the property found there.

Thns he also possessed himself of Kag-Raman : he arrived at the
hills of Mamzur and fiihung ; the liill men, to the number of 50,000,
assembled, and took possession of the passes ; from morning to evening
tliey fought desperately, Rcuhid was killed, and the Moslems defeated.
The repairing of this affair was deputed to Rashid Bin Salim, he
defeated the men of Kag-Kaman, and arrived in the territories of
BrtAfha^ where he was killed. Then Munzir Bin HartU^ Bin Bashar^
became governor of these provinces. He fell sick at Purabi, and died :
at this time also Mohawiyah died, and Minaan succeeded him ; in his
time no one was deputed to his enterprise until the time of Abdul
Malk; he gave the governorship of the Iraks to Hijjaj, who sent the
Seynd to Mikram ; he, it so happened, was killed by the AlleiJU as has
been before related, whereupon Hijjaj sent Mujjah to Kirman, to take
revenge upon the AUafis of Sindh ; he died there in the distractions of
these times. Abdul Malk the Khalif died, and Walid succeeded him,
aending Mahomed Bin Haris to Mikram to settle the affairs of Hind
and the Allafis ; he killed one of the Allafis, and in the space of five
noDthg settled the country of Mikram satisfactorily, and took
possession of various districts. After that the circumstances of the
death of Bazil occurred as related, which increased the desire of revenge
in Hijjaj, and it was settled to send Bin Cassim Suklfi, as will be
related.

SelaUon of the arrival of Bin Cassim in Sindh, and account of the

victories tohieh he there achieved.

After the circumstance of the death of Bazil Hijjaj Bin Yasaf it
^as represented to the Khalif that in Sindh insolence had obtained such
vcendency, and punishment was so loudly called for, that he must issue
^ order for remedying these things, as also for the release of the
Modem prisoners, and taking revenge for the rebellion of those unbe-
"^^ 80 that the country might l>e conquered. The Khalif replied^
"The country is distant and unproductive, the ezpence of collecting
'^es will be ruinous, and only accomplished by oppression ; it is better

88 Tramlation of the Toofut ul Kiramj [No. 158-

to abandon the project, and pass it by." Hijjaj continnallj repre-
sented, that by the permission of the Most High, and the protection
of the religion of the prophet, the infidels would soon be sabdued, and
the prisoners of the faithfni who, for so long a period had been con-
fined there, would be released, whilst the outlay for collecting an ttrmy
should be paid over and doubled by those who were its causes. The
Khalif being without option issued the order, and in the 92nd year of

the Hijera, Mahamed Bin Cassim^ Bin Akib SuM^,
iJo:^l)^L^^^^ cousin and son-in-law of Hum Ya^af, and 17
juration of Sindh in ygars old, made exertions, and they collected and

the 92nd year H. "^ ' » j '-

sent with him 6,000 men from Sham and Irak*
They arrived at Shiraz, where they made the necessary preparations,
Hijjaj then sent five battering rams with the equipment for breaching
forts, in boats, in the care of Mugheriah and Khizam^ with a select
party. Thus they arrived at the port of Diwal, where they afterwards
joined him (Bin Cassim). In short. Bin Cassim with all his previous
and present forces, mustered 6,000 horse and 6»000 camels (of the
class I^nown as '< BukbtiJ*' to carry his baggage, and set out for Mik«
ran, and Mahamed Harun^ notwithstanding the infirmity of his health,
accompanied him ; when they arrived at Mapilah, Harun by the decree
of the Almighty died, and was buried there^ They relate, that at that
time Jaisisih the son of Dahir, was in the fort of Neirun^ and wrote ta
his father the intelligence of the arrival of Bin Cassim : he consulted
the Allafis ; they said, " The cousin of Bijjaj is coming with a large
army, do not oppose him." Bin Cassim subdued Arman Biiah» and
proceeded towards Diwal ; in the mean time Mugheriah and Khizan with
their party had arrived at Diwal, where they joined him. Bin Cassim
„. ,^ . . , threw a ditch round Diwal and encamped ; he wrote

Bm Cassim invests .

l>iwal. intelligence of his arrival to Hijjaj, They say, that

the news reached Hijjaj in seven days, for such was the swiftness of the
messengers, that the intelligence of seven days' date, from and to, was
daily received by each party. It is said, that in the fort of Diwal was a
temple (place of idols) 40 guz in height, and in it a dome 40 guz high,

. and on the top of the dome a silken flag with four

The temple at Diwal ^ m. . ^^ , . ^

is considered as a uiis- ends. The mfidels in fear and dismay made no pre-
S*the counuy^ **^^*°" paraCion to fight: after some days a brahmin came

out from the fort and asked for safety ; he presented

1845.] a Huiary of Sindh. 89

himself to Bin Casiim^ and said, *' I learn from my books that this
country will be conquered by the Moslems, and the time has arrived,
and you are the man. I am come to shew you the way : those before
our times have constructed this temple as a talisman; until it is broken
your road will not be opened ; order some stratagem, so that the banner
on the dome may be thrown down." Mahamed Bin Cassim bethought
him how he should accomplish this ; the engineer with the Catapulta
9aid, ** If you give me 10,000 dirhems I will agree by some means or
another to bring down the banner and dome in three blows, if not I
will have my hand cut off." Mahomed Bin Cassim having obtained
Do f th te - permission from Hijjjd^^ ordered the Catapulta to be
pie thrown down. ^g^^ hqcI by the help and power of the Almighty,
in three blows the work was accomplished, when the army of Islam
getting into ranks and order attacked the fort, and the infidels being
confounded were powerless and begged for quarter, Mahamed Cassim
directed, that none should he given, but to deliver up the place. The
^ ^ « ^. 1 governor threw himself from the breastwork, and

Capture of Diwal °

and massacre of ^ the fled| and the people of the fort being helpless

infidels*

opened the gates : for three days there was a mas-
sacre ; they then brought out the Moslem prisoners^ and captured im-
mense treasures and property ; they destroyed the temple of idols^ which
was called Diwal after the place, and built a musjid. A man named
KihUah, one of the infidels, was the keep^ of the Moslem prisoners ;
when these were brought out it was discovered that he had exerted
himself greatly in their behalf and was overjoyed at their release a»
well as the victory of the army of Islam : Mahamed Cassim called
him and pressed him to embrace the true faith, and he became a Moslem.
After many honours an> favours^ he shared with Ahmed Bin Darah
Nifdi the governorship of that place. At length, having satisfactorily
arranged the affairs of that quarter, and placed his battering rams in boatSy
he started them by the river Sakurah to Neirun, and he himself proceeded

Bin caasim proceeds ^J ^*"^ ^ ^« ^^^ direction. They say that the
to Neirun. gou Qf Dahivy Jaisisih^ was formerly at Neirun, but

after hearing of the victory at Diwal^ Dahir called him to Brakamana'
badf and Samani the former governor of Neirun, who had procured
a certificate of pardon from Hijjaj^ as before mentioned in the account
of the death of Bazil, was with Dahir. Now when Mahamed Cassim

90 Translaiion of the Toofut ul Kiram, [No. 158.

after seven days arrived in the vicinity of Neiran, the defenders of
the fort fastened the gates. The army of the Moslems were mach dis-
tressed in the neighbourhood of Neiran for water, by reason of there
being no inandations ; Mahamed Bin Cassim made applications to the
Most High, and they were immediately succeeded by a supply of rain,
and the springs and tanks of that part of the country overflowed like
fountains ; still there was a deficiency of forage : by good fortune, Sa-
mani arrived at Neirun, and sent his confidential agents with the cer-
tificate of pardon to Bin Cassim, and said, ** I am

The governor yields

up the fort of Nei- the slave to be obedient, the reason of this omis-
'^'^* sion is, that during my absence the people in

the fort have closed tb6 gates ; I wish if you will pardon the fault
and warrant my safety to come and kiss your feet/' Bin Cassim
having paid due attention to those who had been sent, ordered ** That
it was necessary to punish those who had guarded the gates, but since
you have interceded, come have an interview, and open the gates."
Samani having done so, took the keys with suitable presents, and
made his obeisance; he was favored, and provided every thing that
was required. At length the army of Islam entered the fort ; they
destroyed the temples, and built musjids and minarets in their stead,

Governor appointed. Mouzzins and Imams were appointed, and Shunbeh
was made governor of the place. Taking Samani with him, Bin Cassim
advanced ; when they had proceeded some distance from Neirun at the
place called Mauj, Samani sent a letter to Bicharah, son of Chundur,
governor of Sewistan, thus : " We are not the men to bear force ; this
Arab army is all powerful; there is no use in opposing them;

Governor of Sewis- ^^ *® necessary to look after the interests of yourself
Un refuses to submit, qq^ people, come and proffer your obedience, the
word of Bin Cassim is powerful, undoubtedly this is the best policy."
Bicharah refused to accede to submission, but prepared for battle.
Thence the Moslem troops having advanced, reached the fort of
Sewistan ; one week was occupied in laying siege and attack ; until
at length Bicharah becoming dispirited, fied and went to Budyah;
Bin Kakahf Bin Kotah, who was governor of the castle of Sim
Mahamed Cassim entered the fort of Sewistan*, and took posses-

* Setcistan always means the modern Sehwan.

1845.] a History of Sindh. 0 1

sion ; be favoared such persons as were brought to him by Samami^ and
Bin Cassim enten then started for Sim. The forces of Budyah and
" * Buharah prepared for opposition. The infidels went

to Kakah^ Budyah' s father, and requested permission to make a night
attack. Kakah said, ** I know from the astrologers that the army of
Idam will conquer this country* and that the time has now arrived ;
do not entertain such ideas." They would not be restrained, but pre-
pared for a night attack ; it so happened that they lost the road and
dispersed into four parties, and although they wandered all night, they
foond themselves in the morning near the gate of the fort of Sim.
Being aflUcted they became penitent, and went to Kakah Chanah and
stated their case. He said, '* Do not think me less valiant than yourselves^
bat I know for certain that there is no use in contending with these
men." In short, Kakah went himself and proffered his obedience ; he
was received with favour, and obtained safety for his followers. Maka*
med Bin Cassim sent with him Abad al Mulk Bin Kies Aldaki^ and
ordered them to bring all who would be obedient (to his sway,) and to
panish all who resisted. The Almighty gave them daily victories over

GamfreshYictoric, ^^"^ ^°^^®^*' ^""^ *' ^**^ ^**®** *^^« frustrated, fled
tlie infidels proffer to the forts of Bultur Saluj and KandaiL when

obedience. , ,. . * . »* m

they solicited promises of safety and pardon, and,

agreeing to pay tribute, departed to their own country : at this time an

Hijjig sends order order arrived from Hijjaj, that Mahomed Bin Cassim

to Bin Cassim to sub- , .. J/,

due Dahir. should return to Nearun to prepare to cope with

Bahiry and cross the river Mihran.
It is related that the tribe of Chanah, which at that time was a large

The tribe of Chanah *^^*°» Collected from various places, and sent a per-
become obedient. son to bring intelligence (of the Moslems) ; he ar-
rived when the forces of the Arabs were arranged behind. Bin Cassim
^gaged in prayer, and in their devotions obeying the postures of the
Hoollab, he reported to his tribe, that those who could by thousands
be made to obey one man, it would be futile to oppose. Thus they
determined to declare allegiance to the Moslems, and after sending
citable presents they arrived when Bin Cassim was at table, who
^ '* This tribe is fortunate," and they were ever after styled the tribe
^^^ Chanah Mirzook^* or * fortunate;' they then proffered their obedi-
ence and assistance of tribute, which was accepted, and they departed,

92 Translation of the Toofia ul Kirantt [No. 158.

and it was decreed that the land on that side of the river in the
possession of the tribe of Cfaanah, shonld be taxed at a tenth, the same
as that at Neirunkdit where the people had voluntarily tendered their
obedience. In short, pursuant to the orders of Hyjaj^ Bin Cassim
returned, and having crossed the Mihrau, arrived at the fort of Rawnr
. , „ and Jeyur, where he sent an order to the governor

Governor of Rawur ^ ®

and Jeyur joins Bin MOkih Bin Btsayok to come and proffer his obe-*

dience. He replied, " If I do so I incur the displea^
sure of Dahir; in a certain place at uncertain time, I will come forward
with a certain number of troops ; direct your men tp attack me, and I
will appear to oppose them, and then allow myself to be taken
prisoner.'* Thus did Mukih at that -place become obedient, and was
taken into great favor : he shewed the road (to conquest.)
They relate that the Rahi Dahir^ hearing of the power of the army
^ , . XI of Islam, prepared with a large force to oppose the

Dahir opposes the » r r o in-

passage of the Mos- passage of the river. A party of the Moslems were

lems on the Indus. ^ ,. ,. <«««,.« . «

crossmg, Dahir himself killed one with an arrow.

He left Jahamin Budah there, and himself retired ; Jahamin took such

strong possession of the passage of the river, that it became difficult

At this junction Chundram Balah, who was formerly governor, seized

Rebellion at Sewis- ^^^^l^tan from a party of horsemen of the Moslems

^°- who were left at that place. Mahamed Cassim

on hearing this^ despatched Ussiib Bin Abdul Rahim with a thousand

horse and 200 foot to Sewistan. Chundram prepared to oppose them,

and was defeated : he wished to escape to the fort, but the fort gates

had in the mean time been closed, and he being frustrated, fell into

the hands of the Moslems and was killed, (sent to perdition.) The

Moslems then surrounded and took the fort, whence they rejoined Bin

SewisUn retaken, Cassim : Rahi Dahir sent his son Jaisisih to the fort

and governor kiUed. ^^ g^^^ ^^ ^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ ^j ^^^ ^^^ ^^ j^j^^^ . ^y^^^

50 days were thus passed^ and the Moslems began to suffer want, such
The Moslems suf- horses as died of starvation were eaten. Dahir sent

ferforwantof provi- ...•«. . * • ^l -

sions. a messenger saymg, " The state of your army is thus

reported : if you wish well to yourselves I shall not oppose, but will
perform my service (become obedient,) and you had better return.''
Mahamtd Bin Cassim replied, << By the will of the Almighty, this
country shall be a Mahomedan country, and until you come and proffer

1845.] a History of Sindh. 03

obedience and pay the tribnte of aeveral years, I will nerer abandon my
ifltentions respecting you." (I will never take my hands from yoo.) They
cay that B^jaj in hearing the news of the loss of the horses, des-
patched 2,000 others with strict iojanctlons not to

Hijjai sends rein- • , , ,

forcemenu and orders delay in the important afikirs of DoAtr, but to pass
to Bin Cassim. ^^ ^^^^ quickly and settle them first On the re-

ceipt of these injunctions, Mahamed Bin Camm having arrived at
Jofaam, directed them to collect boats for the passage of the river, and
to make a bridge. M^tki Bin Biiayah collected several boats, and
Bridge of boau. filling them with sand and stones, and fastening
them with wedges, made them firm one to the other. On this intel-
ligence Dabir wrote to his son to arrest Muki by some means for
his evincing such audacity. RaU the brother of Miiki was with
ZkAtV, and having formerly been an enemy to his brother, said,
''Eotrust this order to me, and I will go and bring my brother; I will
moreover pledge myself to prevent the passage of the river.'' At this
time, by the help of God, the army of Islam having prepared the boats
began to cross, and with showers of arrows dispersed the Infidels
viio dared to oppose them on the opposite shore. A large party
arrived on the other side, and having cleared the shore of their

The Moslems cross enemies, took up a position, until the rest of the

^"^*'' army should have passed safely. It is said, that

ivift horsemen of the unbelievers, by travelling all night, conveyed the
Bew8 to Dahir early the next morning : he was still asleep when they
tnnooDced it ; the groom roused Dahir, who^ when he awoke from a
tnnqail sleep, was so much annoyed that he struck the messenger on
the face so heavily with his slipper, that he died immediately. In
short, Dahir being astonished and dismayed, knew not what to do :
when Mahamed Casnm had crossed the whole of his army, he pro-
claimed to his troops-^** The river is in oar rear and the enemy in

Bin Cassim exhoru ^°^* whoever is ready to yield his life, which act
Ui troops. ^m \^ rewarded with eternal felicity in such a

c^uue, let him remain and have the honor of conflict ; and any amongst
yoa who, on second consideration, does not feel able to oppose the
^«my, let him recollect that the road of flight is not open — he will
iwaredly fall into the hands of the Infidels, or else be drowned in the
fWer, and thus suffer disgrace, which is the worst of all evils in religious

94 Translation of the Toofui ul Kiram, [No. 158.

or worldly matters ; bat still, let these now take leave, for brave men
determiDe either to conqaer or die.'' Of the whole force only three
persons, one under a pretence of an unprotected mother, another of a
motherless daughter, and a third of want of means, left; the rest declared
they were only anxious for battla

At length Mahamed Bin Cassim perceiving the unanimity of his
troops directed a march from that place, and from the fort of Bat
arrived at Rawur ; he arrived at a place called Jeyur, Now between
Rawur and Jeyur there was a bay, on passing which they came in

First view of Da- ^^S^' ^^ Dahir's forces ; Mohazar Bin Sabit JStsi
fair's forces. ^|^jj 2,000 and Mahamed Ziad Abdi with l,O00

troops^ were directed to oppose them : they drove the enemy back. At
this time, Dahir called Mahomed Harts AUafi and represented, '* For
advice in such a day as this have I protected you ; now you most exert
yourself and take charge of the advanced party.'* Mahomed HarU re-
plied, ''Indeed I acknowledge that I ought to exert myself to the utmost,
but there is the necessity of opposing Mahomedans, and to become
The Allafi chief re. '^negade, sell my religion for gold, to have on me
fuses to oppose the the blood of Mahomedans, and when I die to go to

army of Bin Cassim.

perdition ; spare me, I pray you, the performance of
these tasks : any other duty I will perform with my life." Dahir was
disconcerted, and remained silent. He sent Jaisisih with a large party of
troops to oppose the enemy, but after the loss of the greater portion he
was defeated and returned. The next day the brother of Muki was ap«
pointed, but he secretly sent a message saying, ** Take me in battle as
you have done my brother :" and they did so. Thus for ten days in this
way the Infidel forces came out to battle, and, being defeated, returned.
In the meantime the victorious Moslems besieged Dahir in his own

g. ^ be s^^i^g^ol<^> ^^^ o^ ^^ ^^^^ ^y* ^bich was Thnrs^
Alor. day the 10th of the month Ramzan in the 93rd year

of the Hejira, Dahir notwithstanding the prohibitions of the astrologers
came out himself with a powerful force; he had 10,000 horse with
armour, and 30,000 foot with many war elephants, (on one of which)
Dahir gives batfle. Dahir was seated in a howdah with two beantiful
girls handing him wine, and fanning him; They contended fiercely from
morning until night, and the Moslems so plied their rockets and arrows
that it could not be exceeded.

1845] a History of Stndh. 95

At first the army of Islam became confused ; Mahamed Bin Cassim
beeame alarmed^ and offered ap prayers to the Most High, who favored
bim, and gave him at length the victory. They relate, that Bin Dahir
bad at all times daring the battle an iron mace in his hand, with
wbich he cleft the head of every horseman against whom he launched
it; bat at length on the approach of the Arabs, when he wished to leave
tbe battle, the war elephants became frightened at the rockets of the
Modem troops, and fell amongst their own soldiers, who were thus
destroyed. A party of the Infidels demanded quarter, and said ** The
army of Dahir is now confident and careless ; give us troops and we

A part? of the Infi- ^^^^ ^^^^ them in the rear, and break their pride and
dels desert. Btrei^th." In this way the ground was cleared and

tbe enemy broken.

By the power of the Almighty an arrow struck Dahir in the neck

Death of Dahir. and killed him ; they drew his elephant to the rear,
bat by chance tbe elephant stuck in the mud of the river, and they all
tried to conceal the Ring's position. The army of the Infidels being de-
feated, the Moslems so guarded all the approaches that a bird could not
bave flown past. The Brahmins fell into the hands of Keiss^ and to
preserve their own lives reported the death of Dahir. At this time

Certai B h ' the two daughters of Dahir were Captured by the Mos-
^rted the death of lem troops. Mahamed Bin Cassim fearing lest

Dahir should escape, caused a proclamation to be
usoed, that they should close to the rear to prevent the concealment of
tbe enemy. Keiss hearing the proclamation called aloud on the Most High
after the Mahomedan fashion, and the whole army taking it up, Bin
Cagiim became aware of the death of Dahir. He came with some of his
varriors to the edge of the mud, and on the testimony of the Brahmins
Uxk the polluted body out ; he cut off the head and stuck it on a spear,

The bod of Dahir ^^^^^^^g ^^ ^® ^^^ daughters for their confirmation
discovered. (of his death> He then directed, that the army

>b(Kild occupy itself all night in prayer and thanksgiving for the
IHvioe favour, and in the morning of Friday he sent Dahir's head with
bis two daughters to the gate of the Fort. The defenders of the gar -
n>on declared it was false. Sadi the wife of Dahir, having from tbe top
of tbe palace seen the head of her husband, became insensible, and ut-
tering a loud cry, threw herself off (the palace:) in short, the people in t)ie

96 Translation of the Toofut ul Kiram, [No. 158.

fort opened the gates, and the Moslem army entered, and having erected

The Moslem amy * ^^^^^^ P'^^P*' ^° ^^ temple, performed the prayers
enter Alor. of Friday. They then took possession of the riches

and property of every kind, and constitated Keiss the keeper of these.
In the beginning of the month Shawal after the settlement of all that
territory, they sent the head of Dahir with his daughters, the prisoners,
and the wealth with 40 horsemen accompanied by EeUs to the Khali*

Dahir ruled for 33 fat capital. The period of the rule of Dahir was 38
mi^;^^ ^^^ ^'**'" yeaw, and the whole time occupied by the dynasty

of the Brahmins was 92 years.

It is related, that after the death of Dahir the men of Samah from the
neighbourhood of Thurri* having collected, came with tabonrs and
clarions and proffered their allegiance, and began to dance: Maha-
med Cassim asked who they were, and what they were doing. They
replied, '* This is our custom, that when a Monarch is victorious, we
thus testify our joy." They returned. And the BhatHas, Lohawu, Sa-
hutahs, JundurSf Machees^ and Xter^W^, introduced by AlU Maha*

Tribes who a ^"^^ ^*^ Abdul Rihman^ came to pay their respects,

homage to Bin Cas- with head and feet bare. After their pardon had been
Sim.

pronounced, it was decreed that whenever any of the

Mahomedans should come from the Capital of the Khalifs or go in that

direction, these tribes should be their guides and be answerable for

their safety.

Then Mahamed Bin Cassim^ with the sanction of Hijjaj^ took to wife

the sister of Dahir^ (whom the latter had married through fear of

losing his country,) and proceeded to acquire other territories. At this

Sons of Dahir re- ^^^^ *^ '^® commencement of the year 94, it was
^®^* announced that the sons of Dahir had possessed

themselves of the fort of " Sikundar^^' and had assumed indepen-
dance. Mahamed Cassim proceeded in that direction, and endea-
voured to reduce the fort ; after many engagements he took complete
possession, destroyed the temples, and laid the foundation of Mus-
jids, and directed certain punishments to be inflicted on the inha-

* Thurr or Tkulli the little desert separating Sindh from Cutch.

t These last are Jhutts, the cultivators of the soil and rearers of cattle in contra*
distinction to the Beloochees who are foreigners ; they are doubtless the aboriginal
Hindoos converted to Islamism.

JM5.] a History of Sindh. 97

bitanU. He also in the same way subdued Barhamanabad ; they

tty that one day Mahamed CoMsim was sitting, when an assemblage

The Brahmins repre- ®^ Brahmins, about 1,000 in number with their

Mot their claims to heads and faces shaven, came into the camp. On

follow their religious ^

cutons: the same enquiring their case, he learnt that they were
* mourning for their chiefs as is their custom. Hay*

iog called them, on the advice of Sadi the wife of HoAtr, he sent
them all as formerly to be collectors in the districts. In their helpless-
ness they represented that they were a class of idol worshippers, and
belonged to idol temples: ** Now we have accepted obedience to yon, and
acknowledge our amenability to tribute, yon must give us leave to
erect our places of worship elsewhere, and to pray for the prosperity
of the Khalif." Mahamed Cassim^ after having represented the case to
B^j who reported it to the Khalif, gave the permission required,
that they should act according to the usages of their ancient fiiith.
He then ordered that, to distinguish them from other Hindoos, they
iboidd carry in their hands a small vessel of grain as mendicants, and
ghoold beg from door to door every morning. This custom still re-
mains, and all the Brahmins carry the khulsal.

It is related, that when Hijjaj heard of the conquest of the fort of
^ihmdar and Barhamanabad, he wrote to Mahamed Cassim, '* Since
by the blessing of the Almighty, Dahir and his country had been
talLen, yoa must also talLC the Capital city ; and not rest satisfied with
that, but turn to the east and proceed towards Hind, and by the blessing
of the Mahomedan religion it will every where protect the Moslems.
On this order, Mahamed Cassim set about the settlement of Alor,

In the disorder of affairs, news arrived that a son of

The sons of Dahir

takepossessionof Alor, Dahir was Strong at AloTy having denied the death
Dahirf"^ e ea o ^^ Dahir^ and reporting that he was only lost

from his troops, and had gone towards Hindostan
whence he would soon arrive with an army and talte revenge. So
implicitly did he believe this, that whoever mentioned the killing of
his father to him, was destroyed. Thus few alluded to the subject in
his presence. He called to him his brothers Jaisisih and Wukiahy
who in the tumult of affiiirs had been dispersed. Bin Cassim proceeded
in that direction, and besieged the fort of Alor ; he sent Sadi the wife
of Dahir to the gate of the fort, in order that she might explain the

98 Translation o/(he Toqfut ul Kiram, [No. 158.

death of Dahir. They called her a liar and stoDed her, saying ^* Yoo
have become one of the eaters of cows." The siege was prosecuted,
and the inhabitants of Alor soon began to suffer for want of food ;
they meditated surrender, Fufi began to think that there was no chance
of his succeeding, but a false hope prevented his withdrawing. They
say, that there was a sorceress in that place; they requested her to
give them intelligence of the death of Dahir. This woman, whose name
weL9 Jokiu, asked for one night's delay, and after that she came into the
presence of Fufi with two green branches of Jaw and Filful trees
and said, ** I have searched every span of earth from Sirundipf and
have brought this reply, that if DoMr were alive I should certainly
have seen him ; do not entertain the idea, and do not heedlessly and
unprofitably doom yourself to destruction." When Fufi knew for cer-
tain from the sorceress, and became convinced of the death of Dahir,
he left the fort at night and fled to his brothers whom he had called
to him, but who had not yet arrived. In the morning the AUafis sent
the intelligence by letter to Mahamed Cassim^ and called for a promise*
Bin Cassim enters ®^P*''<ion for themselves ; they directed the holders of
^^0'* the fort to open it, and Mahamed Cassim with his vic-

torious army entered the city. He saw a large assemblage of the people
prostrating themselves in the place of worship ; he asked what they were
doing, he learnt that they were paying adoration to an idol, and entering
the temple he saw a well-formed figure of a man on horseback : he drew his
sword to strike him, but those who were near him cried out, ** It is an
idol and not a living being." Making way for Mahamed Cassim he
advanced to the Idol, and taking off one of his gauntlets he said to the

Bi Cass'mr a h- ^P^c^^^^^^i " ^^ ^^ ^^® ^^^^ ^^ ^^® ^^^^ there is this
88 the idolaters. one gauntlet ; ask him what he has done with the

other." They replied, ** What should an Idol know of these things." Bin

Cassim said, yours is a curious object of worship, who knows nothing

even of himself. They were ashamed at this rebuke. In short, after

the capture of Alor which was the capital of the country, the rest of the

dependencies became tranquil, all the inhabitants were grateful to Bin

Cassim^f and pursued their former avocations. He appointed Hurun

* There is an apparent inconsistency in our author here, for he tells us that Alor
was taken by Bin Cassim when Dahir was overthrown, and does not account for the
Kajah's sons getting possession of it, and its being necessary to recapture it. Bin

IMo.] a History of Sindh. 99

Bin KeisSf Bin JRowah Assidi^ to the governorship of Alor, and the

Various eoveraors ""'^ of Cazi he conferred on Mussa Bin Yakribf Bin
ippointed. Tahi, Bin Nishban, Bin Ashman Sakufi, and he ap-

pointed Widah Bin Ahmid al Nijdi to the command of Barhamanabad,
and Nchah hin Daras to the fort of Ratour^ and the conntry of Korah
he gave to Bazii Bin HUlazuwi, Then he turned towards Multan ; and
in the course of the joumeyy at the fort of Bahiyah, Kuisur Bin
Ckmdurf Bin TiiiabiJ a cousin of Dahir*s, who had been at enmity
with Dahivt and was remaining at that place, came out and tendered
his allegiance. After that, they conquered the fort of Sukkur, and
Atta Bin Jamahi was .left there as Governor, and having seized
MtiUan with its dependencies and fortified places, Khazimah Bin Abdul
Mi^ Bin Jumim was left at Mahpur, and Daud Bin Mussarpur, Bin
fVaUd Himmanif was appointed to MuUan, McLhamed Cassim then

Maha ed G proceeded towards Dibalpur^ and he had at that

eitcDdthiBcoDqaests. time nearly 50,000 horse and foot under his ban-
Bers, independent of his former regular army ; in short, he conquered
as far as the confines of Kunnqj and Ccuhmir^ and saw those two
cypress trees which had been placed by Dahir.

Everywhere he left trust-worthy agents and returned to Yassur*
where it was decreed by fate that his life should terminate.

( To be continued.)

Gttsim had otherwise proved himself too ^ood a General not to have provided for the
leearity of the Capital of the coantry when once in hia power to render its falling into
tks hands of the enemy at all likely.

* In the Chach Nameh " Hadapoor."

100

Fiddnia^Sara, or Essence of the Veddnfa, an introduction into the
Feddnta Philosophy by Sttddnanda Parivrdjakdehdrya, trans^
lated from the original Sanscrit by E. Robr, Librarian to the
Asiatic Society of Bengal.

FRBFACB*

Of the Ved^nta-Sara two translations have already been published,
one by Mr. Ward, (in his work View of the History, Literature and
Mythology of the Hindoos) and the other in the German language,
by the late Professor O. Frank. Ward's translation, which is evident-
ly not taken from the Sanscrit, is very far from conveying a fair like-
ness of the original to the reader, and I need only quote the opinion
of Colebrooke with regard to it, to prove its entire failure as a correct
rendering of the original*.

The German for which we are indebted to O. Frank, was published
together with the original text, in 1835 ; but, however creditable it is to
the author, it is also inexact as a translation. Although a good Sanscrit
scholar, and one of the first in Europe, who devoted his talents to that
language, he had to struggle with the difficulty of ascertaining the real
value of its technical terms, a difficulty which he had hardly the means
of removing ; for in Professor Wilson's excellent Sanscrit Dictionary,
only a few philosophical terms are explained, and without an expla-
nation of such terms by pundits, or an extensive course of reading, the

* Transactions of the Royal Asiatic Society Vol* II, p. 9. note. Mr.Ward has given,
in the fourth volume of his View of the History, Literature and Mythology of the
Hindoos (third edition,) a translation of the V^dfinta-Sara. I wish to speak as gently
as I can of Mr. Ward's performance, but having collated this, I am bound to say,
it is no version of the original text, and seems to have been made from an oral expo-
sition through the medium of a different language, probably the Bengalese. This
will be evident to the Oriental Scholar on the slightest comparison, for example the
introduction, which does not correspond with the original in so much as a single word,
the name of the author's preceptor alone excepted ; nor is there a word of the trans-
lated introduction countenanced by any of the commentaries. At the commence-
ment of the treatise too, where the requisite qualifications of a student are enumerat-
ed, Mr* Ward makes his author say, that a person, possessing those qualifications,
is an heir to the Veda ; there is no term in the text, nor in the commentaries, which
could suggest the notion of heir, unless Mr. Ward has so translated adhicari, (a com-
petent or qualified person) which in Bengalese signifies proprietor, or with the epithet
uttara, uttara adhicari, heir or successor. It would be needless to pursue the com-
parison further. The meaning of the original is certainly not to be gathered from
such translations as this, and (as Mr. Ward terms them) of other principal works of
the Hindoos, which he has presented to the public.

I3i5.2 Vedanta^Sara, or Essence of ike Veddnia. 101

exact metaphysical meaning of them muBt remain problematical. Be-
sides O. Frank is the disciple of a particular philosophical school, that
of Hegel» and has very often coloured the ideaa of the original so as to
oorrespond with his own system. I hope, therefore, that I have not
undertaken a useless task, in bringing before the public a third trans-
lation, in which it has been my constant endeavor to render the original
ts faithfully as possible* For the language of this translation, I have
as a foreigner to solicit the indulgence of the reader ; and, independently
of other considerations, it will be remembered, that Bnglish in itself
presents difficulties, in rendering with exactitude the real force and
meaning of Sanscrit philosophical terms. As regards, however, the
laaguage of the preface, I am much indebted to the valuable assistance
of Mr. H. Torrens, V* P. and Secretary to the Asiatic Society, and
I take this opportunity of acknowledging my great obligations to him.
In publishing this translation, it is my principal object to attract the
attention of the public once more to a branch of Hindoo learning,
which, successfully cultivated as it was by Colebrooke, has been of late
almost entirely neglected. The researches of that eminent scholar, as
ia other departments, were also with regard to the philosophy of the
Hindoos, of the most comprehensive character. He not only gave a
general sketch of the different systems of their philosophy, but also
a critical introduction into this branch of Hindoo literature, almost
entirely unknown before his day. As his labors then created extensive
interest in Europe, it is much to be regretted, that these researches
were afterwards but lamely followed up. The Germans indeed did as
much as the want of material allowed them. I here allude to the
researches of the two Scblegels (Fr. and A. W. von) W. V. Humboldt.
Ritter. (in his History of Philosophy) O. Frank, Lassen and others, who
published either original texts, or translations, or critical treatises.
But however meritorious these labors were, most of them, as founded
upon Ck>lebrooke's works, could not much enlarge our information on
Hmdoo philosophy. For this object the publication of Sanscrit texts,
or translations was necessary, which were looked for chiefly from India
and England. Here, however, it appears, that the interest in Hindoo
philosophy was only enforced by the name of Colebrooke, as with him
almost all further investigation ceased; for, with the exception of
Professor Wilson, who edited Colebrooke's translation of the Sankhya

102 Feddnta.Sara, or Essence of the Veddnta. [No. \58.

Karika, and translated the native commentaries on this work, no one
has published any work of importance with regard to Hindoo philosophy.
Without endeavoring here to enlarge on the causes of this neglect* I
must not omit to touch on the principal one*-*the want of encourage-
ment* with which philosophical researches are met in England. The
study of philosophy is of its very nature adapted but to few ; but even
they will be deterred from it, if that part of the public, to which they
are to communicate the results of their enquiries, is totaUy indifferent
to them. If philosophy generally be but in little repute in England,
it is easy to conclude, what must be the neglect of the systems of the
Hindoos in particular, which, it appears, are entirely superseded by the
much more elaborate systems of Europe. The Hindoos, it is said, are
acute enough in nominal distinctions, but their enquiries, originating
from an absurd and gross superstition, recur only to this root, instead
of explaining the phenomena of nature. Without entering into a full
discussion of this subject, I may be allowed to observe^ that this view
would at once destroy all historical study. On account of their histori-
cal interest, we not only direct our attention to the works of Ghrecian
art, but also to those of Egypt, Etruria, Persia, Peru and of other coun«
tries, because they show us the characters of those nations in different
states of civilization. If these possess a general interest, Hindoo philo-
sophy is a monument, which must claim the attention of every enquiring
mind, as it reveals to us the inmost character of the nation, closely in-
terwoven as it is with all institutions of public and domestic life, with
their literature, religion and their views of the means, by which their moral
welfare might be advanced or retarded. But waiving this general inter-
est, we must be aware of the connexion of Hindoo philosophy with the
development of European science, by the new platonic philosophy, which
evidently contains the principles and results of Hindoo philosophy, a
connexion which can be only fully understood, when we know more oi
the history of the Hindoo systems.*

The V^d^nta-Sara is an abstract of the doctrines of the V^danta
philosophy, and expounds more particularly those tenets which are
ascribed by Colebrooke to the modem branch of this school. It com-
prehends in a very condensed form the whole range of the topics, which
are discussed more fully in the different works of this school. The ob-
* Ritter's Geschichte der Philosophie. Vol. 4, p. **•

1845.1 Fedanta-Sara, or Essence of the VSddnia.

103

scanty, which prevaUs in some passages, is rather owing to the concen-
tration than to the indistinctness of the ideas. The principles of the
system are clearly laid down, and though in a few passages there is a
deviation from them, they are never lost sight of. Other philosophical
systems are only touched upon, when it is the object to prove their
principles to be entirely inconsistent with themselves and with each
other. The demonstrations, though short, are perspicuous, and some*
times even elegant. The illustrations are generally well selected and
striking ; and, if we consider the work to be rather of a descriptive than
of a argumentative character^ we must acknowledge, that it is a most
ezcdlent introduction to the study of that philosophy.

The following exposition is intended to place before the reader the
chief metaphysical topics of this work and to compare the doctrines,
explained in it, with those philosophical systems, Hindoo as well as
European, with which it has an affinity in its principles. There exists
according to it only one eternal and unchangeable being, who has the
attributes of existence and consciousness. The manifold distinctions
in what may be called, the material and intellectual worlds, are toge-
ther with those worlds, mere uhaika, produced by unconsciousness,^
(which objective is something analogous with matter, and subjective
a want of clear perception of the unreality of all material objects.)
For example, if you reflect on the reality of the world, you find it has
none, because it is changeable throughout ; all reality is centred in
one being, who is beyond change, and concerning whom there is not
even change or plurality of ideas, as it includes no distinctions in it-
self. Thus of the supposed reality of the world, nothing remains ;
naught exists but mere ciSoiXa, which, in contradistinction with the
knowledge of Brahma (or of the infinite being without plurality,) may be
called ignorance or unconsciousness. It is the principal work of philoso-
phy to destroy this ignorance, or to unite our .finite being with the infinite
Brahma, or in the words of the V^d^ta; to know ourselves as Brahma. It

'* The words consciousness and anconsciousness do not express the full meaning
of the corresponding Sanscrit words. Conscioasness means tbe knowledge of what
passes in the mind, that is, a reflected knowledge, while* the Sanscrit term refers to
knowledge in general. As Colebrooke, however, has used in his essay those words,
I thought it better not to introduce another terminology, and have only to remind
the reader, that consciousness and unconsciousness are here always to be understood
in the more comprehensive sense.

104 Veddnia-Sara, or Essence of the Vedania. [No. 153.

is, however, impossible for any individual immediately to obtain this
knowledge, as any idea, wluch we may conceive of Brahma, previoua to
the performance of the conditions, conducive to that knowledge, mast be
one of the various illusions, which are created by ignorance in our minds.
The true knowledge can only be obtained by a systematic method,
which is twofold, theoretical and practical. The theoretical method is
the direction of there flective power upon Brahma, and it proceeds first
synthetically from the infinite substance to the ccSoiXa <>' appearances,
showing the various modes, in which Brahma is successively represented
by unconsciousness ; and secondly analytically, from the manifold crea-
tions of unconsciousness to the infinite substance, successively sho^wing*
the unreality of them and returning to Bramha as the only source of
reality. The practical method presents the means, by which our senses,
passions, and thoughts are subdued; the mind is gradually detached
horn worldly concerns, directed to the performance of good acts alone,
and finally fixed upon the contemplation of Qod.

It is remarkable, how in the principle itself the fallacy of the system
is manifest. If Bramha be the only real being, all other things (materi-
al or immaterial) are unreal, and this inference is expressly recognized,
there should be not even the appearance of an existence oi them ;
but it is also said, that those things must not be considered as nothing ;
so that they have, to say so, a kind of imperfect existence, but still an
existence, which cannot be derived from the infinite Bramha. In short,
there is not one principle, but, against the express assertion of the V^-
d&ita, iUH) principles, the infinite, undiangeable, omniscient being, and
the finite, changeable and unconscious being. This is also evident from
tiie consequences ; for the world or its appearance is not produced either
by Bramha or by unconsciousness, but by their mutual causality ; for in
Bramha only, when clouded by the mists of ignorance, is the spectacle
of a world produced. According to this exposition of the theory, which
must, I think, be allowed to be correct, Bramha would coinci^ with the
notion, which occidental philosophers form of substance, and uncon-
sciousness with that of attributes and modes.

What is called unconsciousness, has, however, a twofold meaning ;
according to one, it is delusive appearance, by which unreal things are
represented as real ; according^ to the other, it is the origin of the
actual world. We shall consider only this «econd meaning, which we

1845.3 Vedania^Sara, or Essence of the Viddnta. 105

esdeaTOur clearly to define. It is evident, that an adequate notion
of that origin can only be obtained from its productions, as the nature
of the cause is perceived by the nature of its effects, and this mode of
Bileience vre may the more insist upon* as the inductive process is re-
ooBineiided by the system as one of the means, whereby to arrive at true
knowledge. Now the Vdddntista hold, that unconsciousness causes the
enumation of five elements, ether (likisa,) air, fire, water and earth.
Tliese elements, though subtile and imperceptible to the senses, have
material qualities, and are therefore themselves special kinds of matter.
To know their origin, we have then to divest them of their special
qualities, by which we arrive at the notion of matter in general
(separated firam all differences of space and time,) and we must therefore
say, that unconsciousness and the general notion of matter are virtually
the same, a necessary inference, however, but one which the V^d&n-
tists took care to avoid, because the vague notion of unconsciousness
suited admirably as a cloak to the radical error of their system.

As it is here my object to place before the reader the most prominent
eharacteriatics only of the system, I am not to enter into the various
emanations from unconsciousness, but will at once state the opinion,
which the V^tota forms as to the highest form of knowledge, to which
the individual mind can aspire, and which in fact is a consequence, ne-
cessarily derived from the first principles of the system. When we have
perceived, that all the emanations of unconsciousness are unreal, when
we are able to distinguish in the universal as well as in the individual
soul, that which is real and eternal from the unreal and the transient,
then is our noti(m of Bramha firmly and adequately established, in the
knowledge, that the individual soul is the same with the eternal Bramha,
as the differences, which at first sight seemed to exist between them,
became gradually destro3red by the progress of reflection. But even
thia adequate notion of Bramha, as an act of the mind, is included in
die emanations of unconsciousness, and it is therefore an unavoidable
inference, that this act also, when once arrived at, should be destroyed
as one, though the purest and highest, of the emanations of unconscious-
aess, when the individual soul, comprehending its reality, returns to
Bramha, with whom it is identical.

The philosophy of the V^d&nta, as explained in the V^dtota-Sara,
differs undoubtedly from the more ancient expositions of this doctrine,

106 Vedania-Sara, or Essence of the Viddnld. [No. 15&

and I fully concur in Colebrooke's opinion, that the attempt to pro«
claim the material world as mere illusion, had not originated with the
founders of the V^ddnta. The centre on which all Hindoo philosophy
depends, is the opposition between the phenomena of the mind and of
the body, by which they were led even in early times, as it appears,
to maintain the existence of two principles, soul and matter.* This is
likewise observable in the V^dnta ; soul and matter, though produced
from one and the same substance, are at first real productions, which
have the same claim to existence, and only at a later period, when
on comparison of both with the substantia absoluta their reality came
to be questioned, the reality of matter was denied, and the expedient
of an illusion was resorted to, in order to explain its existence-.

The V^ddnta in general differs from the Sankhya ; the two systems
assimilate tn their explanation of productions of the material world ; but
while the Sankhya lays down the original independent existence of
spirit and of matter, the V^d&nta derives both from one and the same
substance, in which their differences are destroyed. The two schools
of the V^^nta, the ancient and modern, agree as to this substantifii
absoluta ; the material productions, however, derived from it, though
created in the same successive order, are differently explained ; they
are real productions accordifig to the ancient school, while the naodem
one believes them to be a mere illusion, produced by unccmsciousness.

Among the various systems of the Greeks, we can only find that of
the Eleates, with which we may compare the principles of the V6dtota.
We there perceive the same all comprehensive substance, which has the
same attribute of eternal, unchangeable existence which is without
differences, either with regard to itself or others, and the sole attribute
of which is thought. We also find in the disputes of the Eleate Zeno
with other Greek philosophers the same inclination to consider all
material things as mere illusion. But I abstain from further comparison
of the systems, as the V^ddnta treats of the subject matter synthe-
tically as well as by analysis, whereas the Eleate school has confined
itself wholly to the latter process.

The -modern V^d&nta bears the closest affinity to the system of Spi-

* Though it appears a matter of course, that all philosophers should commence
from these principles, history shows the reverse. Thus, Greek philosophy was at
its commencement entirely physicaK

1845-3 Vedanta-Sara, or Essence of the Feddnia. 107

noza« His Bramha is that infinite Bubatance with infinite attributes,
beside which there is nought else existing, though he so far differs from
the modem V^d&ntists as to assign to it two attributes, that of thought,
and that of extension, which the V^d^tists of that school deny the
existence of.

They inaintain a perfect Ens or a real unity without any element of
opposite qualities. Spinoza indeed asserts, that his Ens Cogitans is
identical with the Ens Extensum, difference existing only in the percep-
tion of the whole under the one or under the other attribute ; but on
the other hand he also asserts* that each attribute must be understood
of itself, that is to say, that it has no relation whatever to any other
attribute.* Though the V^4nta philosophy in this instance is evidently
more strict in the definition of the principle, it deviates from the origi-
nal purity of its notion, when attempting to explain the phenomena of
its world.

Both systems present likewise a singular coincidence in the mode,
by which they connect finite things with infinite substance. Spinoza
declares it altogether impossible to derive finite things from infinite
sabtance, because any finite substance is only finite, if determined by
another substance of the same kind, that is, infinite substance is always
co-existent with finite things.f The V^inta-S^ra maintains also, that
the perception of Bramha as one whole or as many parts, depends merely
on the accident of that perception ; if perceived as one, it would be one ;
if perceived as many, it would be many; but in the latter case the unity
of entity would be iq no sort destroyed or altered. Here likewise we
find a plurality of material objects, not derived from the one whole (which
has the attributes of infinity, eternity, &c.,) but co-existent in it, so

* Though it shonld be hardly necessary to make quotations in such ^ general
sketch as this, still it may be not found useless to confirm some of the above as-
sertions. Per attributum intelligo id, quod intellectum de substantia percipit, tan-
quam ejus essentian constituens* Spin. £th. I. Def* 4. Unnmquodque unius sub-
stantise attributum per se concipi debet. £th. Prop. 10. Duae attributa, realiter
distincta, per se concipiuntur, idest, unum sine ope alterius. £th. Def. S.

t Quodcunque singulare sive quavis res, quae finita est et determinatam hsebet ez-
istendam, non potest ezistere nee ad operandum determinari, nisi ad ezistendum et
operandum determinetur ab alia causa, quae etiam finita est, et determinatam habet
existentiam ; et rursus haec causan on potest etiam ezistere, neque ad operandum
determioari, nisi ab alia, quae etiam finita est et determinetur ad ezistendum et ope-
randum, et sic in infinitum. £th. !• Prop. S8*

108 Feddnta.Sara, or Essence of the Veddnta. [No. 15a

that both views are essentially the same: this way of reasonings
however, must not be applied to the pure Bramha. Here then both
systems differ, and if we must assign to the V^ddnta the meed of
greater purity in its principle, we must expressly state, that in the
development of the system Spinoza is as infinitely superior to the V^d^ta
as the science of his time was to that of the Hindoos generally*

It is easy also to find many points of resemblance between the
modern V^^ta and the doctrines of Fichte* and Schdling ; as the
world, being a production of Majra, or unconsciousness, and according
to Fichte, being a phenomenon of the Ego in its different modes of
considering itself, and Schelling's negation of the nothing by the abso-
lute substance, his absolute Selbstbejahung, compared with the infinite
Bramha, without whom nothing exists, are ideas closely related ; but
we abstain from further comparisons and conclude this introduction
with some remarks on Hindoo philosophy in general.

We must acknowledge the ingenuity and originality of thought^ by
which this system was brought forth. It is evidently not a primitive
notion of the mind, such as might almost arbitrarily assign a general
cause to certain phenomena, which provoke reflection. It is an elabo-
rate system, in which the principle and the method are clearly defined^
and the inferences are fairly deduced, and compared with the original
impulses, by which reflection was called forth. It is also evident, that
such a doctrine, especially as it was considered as the last goal of . per-
fection by all classes, must have had a powerful influence in the form-
ation of individual character as well as on the civilisation of the people ;
for to obtain its final object, purity of the moral character was indis-
pensable. It is, to confess the truth, a philosophical system, elevated,
far above the crude notions, connected with national superstitions,
above the prejudices of caste, as well as above the formalities of ceremo-
nial worship ; for the supreme substance is only known by a continued

* Fichte, in assertiDg that the external ohjects are merely productions of the
ego, appears to be most closely connected with the modem V^d&nta. This is,
however, not the case. The V^dn&tists maintain the world to be appearance, be-
cause it cannot be considered as real : Fichte, on the contrary, from its being a mere
appearance in the Ego, argues its unreality. This Ego moreover, as the identity of
subject and object, is very different from any doctrine in the V^d&nta, and the idea-
listic principle, from .which it appears to proceed, is only pretended, as the pheno-
mena of nature are in fact derived from a realistic basis.

ia45.~i Feddnta^Sara, or Essence of the Vtdanta. 109

and m^hodical direction of the reflective power of the mind upon it,
and the Sankhya exprendy asserts, that the religious ceremonies
and doctrines of the V6das are not sufficient] for final salvation.* It
IS, however, not surprising, that similar effects were not produced by the
philosophy of the Hindoos, as by that of the Greeks. In Greece no
caste existed ; men of science rose from all classes of the people, and
the work of the higher feusulties of the mind was not restricted to the
priests. When therefore philosophers found the religious doctrines of
their people inconsdstent with sound reason and morality, they did not
hesitate to pronounce them as such, and to demonstrate their pernicious
effects upon the moral and religious principles of the people.f In India,
on the contrary, the cultivation of science was incumbent on the priests
abne, and if the results of their enquiries were strongly opposed to the
religious prejudices of the people, their whole position most forcibly
recommended them to conceal what they considered truths, because
destructive of those very prejudices, whence they derived their privileges
and subsistence. Thus influenced on the one side by the power of truth
to the revelation of their opinions, on the other by worldly advantages
to their conceaLnent, they fdlowed a middle course, that is, they
endeavored to reconcile the tenets of religion with their philosophical
views, without deserting the consistency of their principles. By this
proceeding must religion, of course have been degraded from its state
of sublime agency, as advancing the best interests of mankind, to be-
coming the base instrument of delusion on uncultivated minds, while
^osophy lost its dignity and genuine character, being mixed up with
a corrupt theology, and the distance between the learned and the
people in general became the wider. It was only one of the conse*
quences of such a position, that the common people by nature and law
were unfit to enjoy the knowledge possessed by the privileged castes.
Owing to the exclusiveness of science it is another consequence, that
philosophy in India was more directed to theoretical contemplation
than to practical purposes ; the Ghreeks as well as the modem European

* ThiB is in fact also maintained by the V^d6nta, absorption into Brahma bein;
the final end of an individual intelligence, and all efforts which are not directed to
this end, retarding it in a more or less degree.

f Seztns Empir. Adv. Math., where he speaks about Xenophanes, Itnd Clem*
Alex. Chrom. V. Xenophanes ; but the principal passage, and perhaps the best, what
bu been said on the pernicious results of polytheism, Plat. Repub. Lib. It.

1 10 Veddnia-Sara, or Essence of the V^ddnta. QMo. 158.

nations, on the contrary, bestowed the same attention upon practical as
on abstract questions ; for while, according to the one, it is a duty of
mankind to remain in social connexion, a duty which should even be
enforced, it is, according to the other, the highest privilege of the
wise to separate himself from all sodal connexions, to endeavour at
a total abdication of the impulses and motives for action, which the
world or our ownselves can present, until the soul has arrived at that
condition, in which it returns to the source of all truth and reality, and
in which the individual becomes annihilated by absorption into the g^at
origin of all things, who is all, and in whom all are included.

Salutation to Ganesha.

For the accomplishment of my desire I take refuge to the soul, in.
finite in reality, in knowledge and in bliss,* the place of the uni.
verse, which neither by word nor thought can be approached.

Having worshipped my teacher Adwydnanda,f who by overcoming
the notion of duality, is in truth so named, I shall expound the
Essence of the Veddnta according to my understanding.

The name of Veddnta applies to such arguments as are taken from

Ved&nta. the Upanishadsj: to the Sharirikasutra8§ and other similar
Shastras, which tend to the same end.

As this work is an introduction to the V^d^nta, it need not ae.

^^«8^y- paratedly explain the categories, by which the Ved^nta is
^^^^' completed. There are four categories in the Ved^nta^ the
qualified person, the object, the connection, and the final end.

* This may also be translated, ** the infinite, eternal, omniscient, blissful soul,"
or '* the soul, which is the bliss of infinite being, and knowledge." 1 here observe,
that the soul is not something different from those predicates, but the identity of
reality, knowledge and bliss.

t Adwy&nanda means who finds his felicity in non-duality*

X Upanishad, the theological part of the Ved&nta, or argumentative part of the
y^das* Wilson. The commentator, R&makrishna Tfrtha remarks, that it is the object
of the Upanishads to explain the unity of the universal and the individual soul.

§ The S&rfrika, Mlm&nsa, Brahme>stltra or S&rfra-siltra, above mentioned, is a
collection of succinct aphorisms, attributed to B&darayana, who is the same with
Vy&sa, or Vedavyfisa, also called Dwaip^yana or Crishna-dwaipiyana. Colebrooke
Tr. R. A. Soc. Vol. II, p. 3. '

1845.3 Viddnta^Sara, or Essence of the F^ddnia. 1 1 1

A qaalified person is he, who by the perusal, as it is prescribed,

Qualified persom. of the Vedas and Vedtogas having first obtained

'^hsi^lll^J the true sense of all the Vedas, who in this or a former

life having renounced the objects of desire, and the works which are

JMndden^ who by observing the daily ceremonies as well as those pre*

scribed on certain occasions, the expiations and acts of internal worship,

being liberated from all sin, and therefore thoroughly purified in his

mind, and who having performed the four means, has become perfect

in knowledge*

Objects of desire, as for instance the Jydtishtomas*, are such as are

Okfects qf desire. means of obtaining heaven and other desirable ob.

4|i|4>|||f«| jects ; prohibited is what causes (the punishment

Mdo/ aversion. of) hell and other undesirable objects, as for in.

fsf^pgjfsf stance the killing of a Bramhan. Daily ceremonies

DaUy ceremtmies. are for instance the Shandhydbandana\ which to

fifcMfSrf omit is the cause of sin. Ceremonies on certain

Ceremomes <m certain occasions are for instance the Jateshtya and others

^ °"^' ^ for the birth of a son. Expiations are for instance

•n^flTiqmn ijig Chandr^yanas,J which are causes of remov.

^ .^X'^f^ ^^ti '"O* ^^^ 0^ internal worship, for instance

«ii«ii«^Tiii«i g^^lJ ^ originated from Shandilya, are actions

rJ_^_^^f^ ®^ ^® mind, whose object is Bramha, united

H^ltl^llH ^itjj Ihe iijj^e qualities. The principal fruit of

the daily ceremonies is the purification of the mind, that of the acts
of internal worship is the fixing of the mind upon Bramha.

** It is bim, whom the Bramhans by the word of the Vedas and by
religious austerities wish to comprehend,'* says the Sruti.

'' By austerities sin is destroyed ; by knowledge, immortality obtain,
ed," says the Sruti.

* A particular sacrifice, at which sixteen officiating priests are required. Wilson's
Sanscrit Diet.

t Religions abstraction, meditation, repetition of Mantras, sipping of water, &c
to be performed by the three first classes of Hindoos at particular and stated periods
in the course of every day, especially at sunrise, sunset, and also, though not essen-
tially, at noon. Wil. S. D.

t A religious or expiatory observance regulated by the moon's age, diminishing
the daily consumption of food every day by one mouthful, for the dark half of the
Booii, and increastng it in like manner during the light half. Wil. S* D.

112 VSddnta^Sara, or Essence of the Viddnia. [No. 158.

The secondary fruit of the daily oeremoDies, of those enjoined on

certain occasions^ and of the acts of internal worship, is the gaining of

the world of the forefathers and of the celestials.
" By works the first is obtained, by knowledge the latter^" says

the Sruti.
Means are : First, the distinction of the real from the unreal thing ;
Means. Secondly, the disregard of the enjoyment of £ruits

tf|V|«iir«4 (arising from works) as well in this as in a future life ;

Thirdly, tranquillity of mind, self-restraint, &c. ; Fourthly, the desire

of emancipation.
The distinction of the real from the unreal thing, is to know, that

^. ^ Bramha is the real thing, and beside him all is

'^^1!I! unreal. Disregard of the enjoyment of the fruits,

^^5 T^TwV* arising from works, in this as well as in a future

fr^'^T^e^i'm^g^' 1^^^' " ^^^^^^^^ ^° ^^^^^^ *« enjoyment of

things of this world, as for instance, of wreaths or

Disregard of ensoy*

ment in this as well as in sandel wood, &c which are transient, because they

another world. a u v* • j v i_ n a

must be obtamed by works, as well as to renounce
the enjoyment of things of another world, as for instance, of the juice of
immortality, &c., because they are also transient.

Means of self-command are, a. tranquillity of mind, 6. self-restraint^ e.
Means of self -command, resting, d. endurance, e, religious contemplation

Tranquillity^ of mind. ^^^^ ^^^^ Tranquillity of mind is the refraining

^^* of the mind from objects of the ear and the other

senses, with the exception of such objects as refer to Bramha, (Bramha

as united with the three qualities) self-restraint is the coercion of the

Self-restraint, external senses from all objects, with the exception

^TT: of such as refer to Bramha* Resting is to rest from

Resting.^ all objects, when returning (into the mind) with

"^^^In* exception of such as refer to Bramha, or to abandon,

according to prescribed rules, all works that are enjoined. Endurance

Endurance. is the sustaining of cold and warm, and of all those

tif^QHifll sensations that have their contrary ones.

Religious contemplation is to keep the mind fixed upon the hearing

Religious contemplation. &c. of Bramha, and upon such objects by which

^TT'HT* this is facilitated. Faith is belief in the words

IM5,2 Viddnia-Saray or Essence of the Viddnia. 113

of the spiritual guide and of the Ved^nta. Desire of emancipa-
^<>*^ tion is the wish of liberation. He that is per-

D^ emancipation ^«^^ ^" knowledge, having obtained this state of
Jj^'WfW mindj is called a qualified person.

'' Tranquil in mind and self-restrained/' says the Sruti, and it is also
observed, '* To him who is tranquil in his mind, who has subdued
his senses, whose sins are removed, who acts according to the precepts
(of the Shastra) who abounds in virtues, who is a follower of the
teacher and strives for emancipation, to such a one must always this
(the Shastra) be given."

II. Oljeety isii the V^d^nta,^ is the unity of the sentient soul and

€}b9tcu of Bramha, the soul in its pure state, as to be

T%^F7* proved from arguments of the Ved^nta.

III. Canneeium, between that unity as object of knowledge, and
Connection, the Upanishads which eitplain it, is the relation
^•^nf: between the object of knowledge and that which

makes it known.

IV. Final end is the destruction of the ignorance which obtains
Final end, with regard to the knowledge of that unity (of

IfVt^pf the individual and universal soul) and the gaining

of beatitude in accordance with his (Bramh^) being.

*^ Who knows the soul, overcomes misery," says the Sruti, and
further,

" Who knows Bramha, becomes like Bramha."

That qualified person, being burned by the fire of birth, death and
other worldly misery, as a person whose head is burning, takes
refuge in the sea, repairs with offerings in his hand to the teacher
who knows the V^as, and puts his faith in Bramha, and becomes his
(the teacher's) follower.

*^ Holding (he) offerings in his hands, (repairs) to him who knows
the VMas, and puts his faith in Bramha," says the Sruti.

II. Object. That teacher with deepest love instructs him by means
of the improper transferring and of the true abstraction.*

" To him, when arrived, thus spoke the teacher," says the Sruti.

* Adbykrdpa (the same with Ardpa, Adhy&sha, Bhrama^ is literaly *' placing
upoD,'* and signifies error with regard to the infinite being.

114 V^ddnia^Sara, or Essence of the V^ddnia. [No. 158.

Improper trans/erring is the placing of an unreal thing upon
Improper trantferring, the real thing, as the placing of (the notion of)

^J^I^H* a snake upon a rope, which is not a snake.

The real thing is the eternal, omniscient, blissful Bramha, without

Real and unreal thing, duality. The unreal thing is all, that is in.

^%W^^ animate without consciousness.* The thing

« without consciousness is according to some Mrhat

Thing without consci^ «^°no' ^^ explained by (the ideas of) exis-
ousness. tence or non-existence, according to others, the

something, composed of the three qualities,t which exists, and ob^
structs knowledge.

I am ignorant, this and the like you perceive by reflection, and

Unity andmuUipHcity " y«" ^°^^ ^*^^ P^^^' ^^ ^^« «^^^' ^° ^^'^'^ ^^

of the thing without own qualities are inherent," says the Sruti. This

consciousness. ^ . , . . t . •■

(something) without consciousness by the ideas
of generality and speciality is perceived as one thing and many
things. For as by the application of (the idea) of generality to trees the
word forest in the singular number is perceived, or by the same notion

• Vide preface.

*<IUI» Commonly translated, quality, but more adequately degree of mmteiial
existence. Guna is likewise here in the text not a quality of the thing without
consciousness, but the three Gunas are its actual being. A Guna, as being the
source of all derived material existence, can consequently not be explained, but by
its effects. Lassen renders these three modes of existence by — essentia, impetas,
and caligo. Colebrooke, Miscellaneous Essays, Vol. I. p. €49, says, with regard to
them : " The Sankhya, as other Indian systems of philosophy, is much engaged
with the consideration of what is termed the three qualities, if indeed quality is
the proper import of the term ; for the Scholiast of Capila understands it as mean-
ing, not quality or accident, but substance, a modification, fettering the soal,
conformably with another acceptation of Guna, signifying a cord* The first and
highest is goodness, (sattwa.) It is alleviating, enlightening, attended with plea-
sure and happiness ', and virtue predominates in it. In fire it is prevalent, where-
fore flame ascends, and sparks fly upwards. In man, when it abounds, as it does in
beings of a superior order, it is the cause of virtue. The second and middlemost
is foulness or passion, Crajas or tejas.) It is active, urgent and variable, attended
with evil and misery. In air it predominates, wherefore wind moves transversely.
In living beings, it is the cause of vice. The third and lowest is darkness, (tamas).
It is heavy and obstructive, attended with sorrow, dullness and illusion. In earth
and water it predominates, M^herefore they fall or tend downwards. In living beings
it is the cause of stolidity. These three qualities are not mere accidents of nature,
but are of its essence, and enter into its composition. We speak of the qualities
of nature, as we do of the trees of a forest," says the S&nchyas.

1845.] V^ddfUa^Sara, or Essence of the Viddnia. 115

many waters appear as a single thing, so by the application of the idea
of generality to the unconscious things which are united with sentient
souls and manifested by (the idea of) plurality^ they appear as one
nngle thing.

''Which is not produced, which is one" (ignorance^ Maya,) says the
Sruti.

In this uniyersality (of unconsciousness) by being the attribute of the
perfect one, is the principal quality, viz. that of goodness, prevailing ;
the soul in which this (aniversal unconsciousness) is inherent, and which
has the attributes of omniscience, omnipotence, supreme government
and other perfections, which is manifested by (the notions of) existence
and non-existence, which is the ali.pervading cause of the world, is

Supreme ruler, called the supreme ruler. His omniscience arises

fIK^« from manifesting all that is without consciousness.

** Who knows all, is omniscient/' says the Sruti.

This universality (of unconsciousness) is the causal organism (of the

Causal organism, bouI,) since it is the cause of the universe^ it is

qn^^H^^ the cause of blessedness, since it involves all bliss

and has the quality of covering like a case ; it is profound sleep, since

it rests above all ; it is therefore said to be the place of destruction of

the subtile and gross expanses.

As by the application of (the idea of) speciality a forest is perceived
as trees in the plural number, or water as many waters, so by the ap.
plication of (the idea of) speciality the universal unconsciousness
appears as many unconscious things.

'* Bramha is by his May& manifold/' says the Sruti.

In this instance by the application of universality and speciality arises
Ihe name of universality and speciality, (of unconsciousness.) This speci-
ality of unconsciousness, by its being an attribute of the single soul, has
the principal quality of goodness in its impure state. The soul, in which
this (special unconsciousness) is inherent, and which has therefore the
attributes of ignorance, subjection and other imperfections, is called the

J&idtwrfttoi /n*e%eitcc. individual intelligence ;• it has the attribute of
'^[^l partial knowledge, since it manifests only one

* I hare rendered the Sanscrit term : I||^; by individual intelligence. The

adequate version would be : who knows only a little, which is, however, in fact the
8am« with the idea of an individual intelligence.

1 16 Vdddnta^Sara, or Essence of the V4ddnta. C^o. 158.

uDcoD8ciou8 thiog ; it is not able to manifest many^ because it has the
quality of indistinctness*. Since it (the special unconsciousness) is the
cause of selft> and of other similar attributes, it is the causal organism
(of the soul) as it includes all bliss, the case of blessedness^ as it rests
above all, profound sleep, therefore the place of destruction of the sub-
tile and coarse organisms. In that state the supreme ruler and the in-
dividual intelligences enjoy by the subtle powers of unconsciousness,
which are the manifestations of the soul, (perfect) blessedness.

** The individual intelligence, which is the same with the soul, en-
joys bliss/' says the Sruti.

This is also confirmed by the fact, that one who awakes from
sleep, makes the reflection,— Sleeping I was happy, I knew
nothing.

There is no distinction between both the universality and speciality,
(of unconsciousness) as there is none between forest and the trees, and
water as one thing, and water as many waters. There is no distinction
likewise between both, the supreme ruler and the individual intelli-
gences, in which that universality and speciality are inherent, as there
is none between the sky, which covers the forest and the trees,
and between the sky which is reflected by the ocean and by many
waters.

'' That Ruler of all," says the Sruti.

As there is for both the forest and the trees, and the sky, which
is attributed to them, as well as the water and the waters, and the
sky, reflected by them, another not attributed sky, which is the loca-
tion of them, so is for both, the unconsciousness and the soul, in which
it (the unconsciousness) is inherent, another soul which is not inherent,
and which is called the fourthj:.

"They call him blessed, tranquil, without duality, the fourth,"
says the Sruti.

* This indistinctness is produced, according to the Tfka, hy the state in which the
single soul is placed, viz., in which the first quality, heing suppressed by the second
and third qualities, cannot be clearly manifest.

^ ^TYZTC^ Self, more properly what produces self, the notion of egoity, the
faculty or piower to refer all perceptions and notions to a self, an ego.
% This term of the fourth will afterwards be explained.

J845.3 Viddnta^Saray or Essence of the V^ddnia. 1 17

This fourth, the soul in its pure state*, if^ like a burning iron.ball,
not distinguished from the unconsciousness and the soul, in which it
is inherent, is the literal meaning of the great sentence, (viz., that
art thou, which the teacher first addresses to his pupil) if distinguish,
ed, it is the real meaning of the great sentence.
The unconsciousness possesses two powers, the covering and the il-
Covering power of un- iuslvef. The unconsciousuess, though finite, hides
coDSGiousness. y^^ .^ covering power the infinite, incorporeal soul,

by obstructing the mind of the observer, in the
same way, as even a small cloud covers the orb of the sun, which ex.
tends many miles, by obstructing the direction of the eye of the ob.
server.

Thus it is said, ^* As an ignorant man, the eye of whom is cover-
ed by a cloud, thinks the sun to be covered by a cloud and without
ndiance, so the self as soul, which is infinite knowledge, appears be-
fore the eye of the ignorant as constrained in limits."

When the soul is covered by this power, then arises the impression
of dominion, possession, happiness, misery and of other notions, con.
neeted with material things, as from a rope, which is not perceived to
be a rope (which is covered by its own ignorance) the idea of a snake
Illusive power. |g produced. — As the ignorance with regard to a
'RW'nrni* rope, produces by its own power (the idea of) a
snake and similar things upon a rope which is not perceived to be a
rope (which is covered by its own ignorance) so shows the unconsci-
oiisness (ignorance) by its own power all the expanses of the universe
upon the soul, which is covered by ignorance. This power is called
the illusive power.

It is said, '* The illusive power of ignorance creates the world from
the internal organisms of Bramhd's egg."

* That is to say, considered in its absolute state, in which all differences and at-
tributes are annihilated, and which can only be expressed by the notions of infinite
existence and knowledge.

t There is this difference between the two powers, the one is negative, there is
an absence of truth, because it is concealed ; the second, however, is a creative
power, it creates appearances, illusions which claim to be realities ; the term illu-
nve does not fully express the Sanscrit word, but I did not find a more adequate
one.

1 18 F^ddnta^Sara, or Essence of the V^ddnta. [No. 158.

The soul, in which the ignorance with its two powers is inherent^ is

by its own principality the instrumental caase*

Oriffin of the world. ,^ ^ ♦. j i. ^l . . i.. * ..

(MptTt) «^o« ''y t**« principality of its qaality
(ignorance) the material cause (^l||^|«|), as a spider by its o^vn
principality is the instrumental cause, and by the principality of ita
body the material cause of the web. From the soul, covered ^vith
unconsciousness, as illusive power, (the second power) in which the
darkness (the third quality) prevails, is produced the ether,t from
the ether the wind, from the wind the fire, from the fire the ivater,
from the water the earth.

'' From this soul, in which unconsciousness is inherent, the ether
is produced," says the Sruti. In the cause of them (the five elements,)
darkness predominates on account of the prevalence of the inanimate
in those elements ; in that state are the three qualities, (truth, action
and darkness) produced in the ether and the other elements accord-
ing to the quality of their causes. Those subtile elements are called
atoms (n«^*iN) and uncombined elements.

From them are produced the organisms and the gross elements. The
subtile organisms are the seventeen organs, and the internal organisms.
Those organs are the five intellectual senses, understanding and reason^
the five organs of acting and the five internal airs. The intel-
lectual senses are the ear, the sense of touch (skin,) the eyes the
tongue and the nose. They are separately, according to their

order, produced from the united parts of the first
Un^tanding. ^^^jj^y ^^ ^^ime elements. Understanding is called

Rea^. ^^^ action of the mind, by which it asserts; reaeom

9T7r* ^^^^ action of the mind, by which it doubts or de.

^^^' ^^^®8 ' *^ ^^^^ (actions) are thinking (f^rf) ^^^ con-
^^^ sciousness included; thinking is that action of the

* There are three kinds of causes, 1. Samav&yik&rana, the same which is here
called ^md|«f, which signifies ^e elements, of which any sabstance may be
produced, therefore material cause ; 2. Asamav&yik&rana, the actual union of the
componing parts ; 3. Nimitta K&rana, the instrument, by which an effect is pro*
duced ; vide Bhasha Parich^da.

t HU|oKm. is the first element, in which all others are comprehended ; Accord.
ing ^ the Bhasha Parichlda it is everywhere, and has, with the exception of the
sound, the same attributes with time. In want of a more appropriate term ether
perhaps expresses best its meaning.

1845.] V^ddnta-Sara, or Essence of the Vdddnta. 1 19

Consciousness, mind, by which it examines ; oonsciousness, by which
'^'^*«niV \x perceives its actions as its own actions. They
are also produced by the united first qualities of those elements^
which is evident firom the fact, that they have the power to manifest
The understanding together with the intellectual senses, forms the
bMUgeni case qf the intelligent case of the soul ; this (case) on ac-
'ouL count of its manifesting the impulses of dominion,

possession and pride, is called the administering sentient soul, the posses-
sor of this and another world. The reason together with the organs of

, action form the mental case. Organs of action

Mental case of the soiU. ^

are word, hand, foot, the organs of evacuation and
generation. They are separately according to their order, produced by
parts of the second quality. The tnUU airs are those of respiration,
of inspiration, of circulation, the guttural air and the equalizing air,
(of digestion.) The air of respiration {TfVS*) is going upwards
through the nose, that of inspiration (^h|«!I«) going downwards to
the lower extremity of the intestine, that of eireulation is diffused
throughout the whole body. The guttural wind (^^PT*) moving
upwards turns back again, and has its place in the throat. The equa-
lizing air (^TPT •) passing through the middle of the body, equalizes
the food, which is taken by eating or drinking; to equalize is to digest
and to produce the different substances for assimilation or excretion*
Others maintain five airs, different from those above mentioned, viz. of
eructation, of winking, of digestion, of yawning and of nourishing. The
air of eructation {nm) produces belching, that of winking (^RiTt*)
effects the closing of the eyes, &c. that of digestion \^^V*) produces
hunger, that of yawning (^^f^:) produces yawning, that of nourish.

ing (^«19>^7;) makes the body stout. Others assert, that the latter
five airs are included in the former classes. The five vital airs are
produced by the united second qualities of the five elements, and

FUai case. form together with the acting organs the vital case ; it
is produced by parts of the second qualities, because it is living action.

Among those cases the intelligent case, having the faculty of
knowledge, is the ruling, the mental case, having the faculty of desire,
is the causal, and the vitcU case, having the faculty of action, is the
performer of works. The divisions of the cases are made according to

120 VSddnkuSara, or Essence of the Vdddnta. CNo. 158.

their fitness (for certain actions.) They are called, when united, the
subtile organism of the soul. Here also becomes the whole subtile
organism by being the object of One mind, universal organism like
the forests and the sea, and by being the object of many minds,
special organisms, like the trees and the waters. The soul, in which the
--. ^^ universality is inherent, is called (Hiranyagarbha)

Utranyagarbha,

the cause of himself, the sentient (conscious) being,
because all things are arranged in him, and because the powers of
knowledge and of action are inherent in him. The universality o(
this is the subtile organism (of the soul,) because it is subtler than
the gross organism. The threefold case, having the desire of awaking,
is dream, and therefore called the place of destruction of the gross
organism.*— Taijasa the soul, in which the speciality of this threefold
organism is inherent, is called the manifesting mind» The speciality
of this is the subtile organism from its being subtler than the gross
organism. This threefold case having the desire of awaking, is dream,
and therefore called the place of destruction of the gross organism.
Both Shtitrata and Taijasa perceive in that state the subtile objects by
the subtile powers of the mind.

'' Taijasa, the subtle possessor," says the Sruti.

In that state there is no difference between Sh^thita and Taijasa,
in which the universality and speciality are inherent, as there is
none between the sky which covers the forest and the trees, or the
sky which is reflected by the sea and many waters. Thus is the
production of the subtile organism.

The gross elements are composed of the subtle ones according to the
Production of the gross combination of five. The combination of five is to

elements, combination of divide each of the five elements into two parts,

Jive* f

M^^fff ^^^° equally to divide each of the five former oi

the ten parts into four parts, to separate these four

of the one half from their own parts, and to join them with the parts

of the other elements. The combination of five is proved beyond doubt

by the Sruti, in which a combination of three of the same kind occurs.

Though the elements are equalized with each other (containing ft

fourth part of their former halves) yet it is proper to call them by their

own name, according to the greater proportion of one element (in that

combination.)

1^5.] Viddnta^Sara, cr Essence of the V^ddtUa. 121

In that state sound is manifested in the ether, sound and feel,
ing in the wind, sound, feeling and colour in the fire, these three
with taste in the water^ and these four with smell in the earth.

From these five elements, comhined in the said manner, were produc
'cd the different Upper Ltfkas* (worlds) viz., Bhur-ltfka, Bhuvar-Mka,
Swar.loka, Mahar-ltf ka, Janar.ldka, Tapar-ltfka and Satya-ldka, which
are placed above the others, then the Nether-lokas,t viz., Atala, Bitala,
Satala, Rasatala, Tal^tala, Mah^tala and Pat^!a> which are placed one
beneath the other, farther Bramha's mundane egg, the gross orga-
nisms in their fourfold division, contained in that egg, and food, water
and other substances.

Bodies (organic) are either produced from the womb, or from eggs, or
from damp, or from germs. Those produced from the womb are
bom alive, as men, animals, &c. ; from eggs come forth from an egg, as
birds, serpents, &c. ; produced from the damp are worms, insects, dec. ;
which are born from hot moisture, produced from germs are those
which emerge from the earth, as creepers, trees, dec.

Here also is the gross organism in its fourfold division, by being
the object of one or many minds either a totality, like the forest or
the ocean, or separated into a plurality of bodies, like the trees and
waters. The soul in which this totality is inherent, is called Va-
ishwanara, Vir^j, on account of its knowing itself as the totality of
men, and of its governing the universe. This gross body is here

* ^T7* (J^^^^ world, dWisioii of the uniTene in general, three diTisions are
enmiierated, or heaven, hell and earth ; another classification enumerates seven,
exdosive of the infernal regions, or BhurUhat the earth, Bhuvar-l<$ka, the space
between the earth and the sun, the region of the Munis, Siddhis, &:c. Sver-ldka the
heaven of Indra, between the sun and the polar-star. Mahar-ldka, the usual abode
of Bhrigu and other saints, who are supposed to be co-ezistent with Brahma. Du-
ring the conflagration of the lower worlds, the saints ascend to the next, or Jana-
Idka, which is described as the abode of Bramha's sons, Sanaca, Sananda, Sanatana
and Sanatacumara j above this is the fifth world, or the Tapar-ldka, where the dei-
ties, called Vairagis reside ; the seventh world, Satya-ldka, or Bramha-ldka is the
abode of Bramha, and translation to this world exempts beings from farther birth •
the three-first world are destroyed at the end of each calpa or day of Bramha ; the
three last at the end of his life, or 100 of his years ; the fourth Ldca is equally per-
nnnent, but it is uninhabitable from heat at the time t'he three first are burning.
Wils. Sansc. Diet.

t Internal regions, in which various evil beings have their abodes.

122 V^ddfUa^Sara, or Essence of the F^ddnta. [No. 158.

the universal gross body of the soul, and because it is subject to change
from nutriment, it is called the nutritious case of the soul ; it is called
awake, because it is the place in which the gross organisms are en-
joyed.

The soul in which the speciality of this gross organism in its four-
fold division is inherent, is called Bishfva, (which enters into all)
because, not leaving the subtler body it enters into the gross body.
The gross body of the soul as speciality, because it is subject to
change from nutriment, is called the nutritious case of the soul, it is
called awake, because it is the place in which the gross things are
enjoyed. In that state perceive both Biswa and Baishanara (the
universal soul and the single soul, in which the gross organism is in-
herent) by their five intellectual organs, which are respectively ruled by
the quarters of the world, the winds, the sun, Varuna (god of waters)
and the Aswis (Gemini) sound, feeling, colour, taste and smell, by their
organs of action, which are respectively ruled by the fire, Indra,
Upendra, (form of Vishnu) Jama, (death) Praj^pati, (Bramha as crea^
tor) they possess the power of speech, taking, going, evacuating,
generating, and by the internal four organs, understanding, reason,
consciousness and thinking, which are respectively ruled by Chandn
(moon) Chaturmukha, (the fourfaced, a form of Bramha) Chankara, (a
form of Shiva) Achyuta, (Srikrishna) they possess the power of
asserting, deciding, consciousness and thinking, that is to say, they
possess all the objects of the gross organism.

^^ In the state of awaking knows the soul the external objects," says
the Sruti.

In that state there is also no difference between Bishwa and Baishi-
nara, in whom the universality and speciality of the gross or-
ganism are inherent, as there is none between the sky, which is
covered by the forest, and the trees, or between the sky, which is
reflected by the sea, and by many waters. Thus is the production of
the universe of the gross organism from the five elements, in the
combination of five. The universality of the expanses of the gross,
subtle and causal bodies is one great expanse, as the universality
of inner forests becomes one great forest, or as the universality
of inner oceans one great ocean. The soul, in which this is inherent,
from Bishva and Baishanara to the Supreme Ruler is one soul, like

1845.3 V^ddmaSara, or Essence of the V^ddtUa. 123

the sky, covered by inner foresU, or like the sky, reflected by the
inner oceans. The uninherent soul, when like a burning iron-ball,
not separated from both> the great expanse and the soul, in which the
former is inherent, is the literal meaning of the great sentence : all
this is in truth Bramha ; when separated^ it is the real meaning.
Thus iJB the improper transferring of an unreal thing upon the real
thing generally explained.
The various modes of placing this and this, or that and that.
Various modes of ^P^" ^® all-pervading soul, will now be sped.

iransferrinff, fled.

A very common man, because the Sruti says, " The soul is born
ss a son," because he loves his son as himself, and because, when his
son is in good or bad circumstances, he thinks himself so, asserts, that
isle eon is the soul. A Gh^rvitka*, because the Sruti says, '* This
8oal is a body of blood and flesh,, because he leaves his own son in a
boming house to save himself, and because he thinks, I am stout, I
sm thin, asserts, that the gross body is the soul." Another Ch^rv^ka,
because the Sruti says, '' The sentient souls, repairing to the Lord
of creation, addressed him thus," because there is a want of bodily mo-
tion, when there is a want of the intellectual organs, and because he
thinks, I am blind, I am deaf, asserts, that the intellectual organs
ire the soul. Another Chil^rv^ka, because the Sruti says, " The other
internal soul is vital," because there is a want of action of the intel.
leetual senses, when the vital airs are wanting, and because he thinks,
I am hungry, I am thirsty, asserts, that the vital airs are the soul.
Another Gh^rv^ka, because the Sruti says, '' The other internal soul
is reason," because there is a want of the action of the vital airs,
&c., when the mind sleeps, and because he thinks, I assent, I
doubt, asserts, that the reason is the soul. A Bauddha,t because

* Colebrooke, R. A. Tzana. vol. i. p. 59T, says of the sect of the Ch&rv&cas, that
they restrict to perception only the means of proof and sources of knowledge, that
besides the four elements, earth, water, fire and wind, they acknowledge no other
principles, that the soul is not different from the body.

t Col. Miscell. Essays, vol. i. p. 396. The Bauddhas or Saugatas are followers
of Buddha or Sogata. No less than four sects have arisen among the followers of
Boddha. Some maintain, that all is void. To those the designation of Mfedhy-
uuca is asserted by several of the commentators of the V^d&nta. Other disciples
of Buddha •••maintain the existence of conscious sense alone< These are called

124 V^ddnUuSara, or Essence of the VMdnta. [^fo. 158.

the Sruti say8> '^ Another internal soul is knowledge," becauae
there is no action of the organs, when there is no ruler (first mover,)
and because he thinks, I am enjoying, asserts, that the understand-
ing is the soul. Pr^bhdkaras and logicians, because the Sruti says,
** another internal soul is pleasure, because it is evident, that igno.
ranee destroys the understanding, and because they think, we are ig-
norant, we know, assert, that ignorance is the soul.

The followers of Bhatta, because the Sruti says, ''The soul is
knowledge as pleasure,'* because in deep sleep manifestation and
also non-manifestation take place, and because they think, we do
not know ourselves, assert, that the soul, in which unconsciousness is
inherent, is the soul.

Another Baudha, because the Sruti says, '^This (universe) was
before (the creation) nothing," because in deep sleep there remains
nothing, and because he who awakes, naturally thinks, I did not
exist in deep sleep, asserts, that the soul is nothing.

In all those assertions, commencing with the son and terminating
with the nothing, (void) the soul is asserted to be what really is not the
soul. As the apparent arguments from the Sruti, inference and obser-
vation, which commence from the common assertion of the son, clear-
ly show, that one argument from the Sruti, inference and 4>bser-
vation is refuted by arguments of the same kind, it is evident, that
the soul is not the son, &c. That the soul is not mind, not a first
mover, that it is mere knowledge, mere existence, follows from the
contradiction of a much more powerful Sruti, it follows from the rea-
son, that all those inanimate principles from the son up to the void,
by having their existence only through the manifestation of the soui^
are transient like all material beings, and also, that there is much greater
authority in the thought of the wise : I am Bramha. It is therefore
evident from the contradiction of these arguments from the Sruti^
inference and observation, that none of these principles is the souL
Therefore the eternal, pure, omniscient, free, true, self-existent (or

Jdg&cb&r&s. Others, again, affirm the actual existence of external objects no less
than internal sensations. Some of them recognise the immediate perception of in-
terior objects. Others contend for a mediate apprehension of them. Hence two
branches of the sect of Buddha, one denominated Sautr&ntica, the other Vaibha-
sbica.

1 845.] V^ddnia^ Sara, or Essence of the Viddnta, 1 25

whose nature is true) all pervading Ch^itanya, which manifests all
those principles, is the supreme soul, this is the opinion of those
that know the Veddnta. Thus the improper transferring.

Abstraction (^TfVT^:) is called the action, by which the real thing
is acknowledged as the only real thing, after the expanse of the un-
real things which commence from the unconsciousness^ has been removed
fipQin it, as a rope is acknowledged to be a mere rope, when the (notion
of the) serpent has been removed from it In this manner has the
place of fruition, viz., the gross body in its fourfold division, the
substances which are fit to be enjoyed, as drinking, food, &c., in this
manner the place of their support, the earth and the other fourteen
worlds, in this manner firamhi's egg (the universe) all this has its
existence alone in the gross elements in the combination of five, which
are the cause of them. The elements in the combination of five together
with the sound and other objects of the gross bodies, all this has its
existence alone in the uncombined elements, which are the cause of
them. The uncombined five elements together with the three quali-
ties (truth, action and darkness ) all this has its existence alone in the
soul, in which unconsciousness as its cause, is inherent, further,
this unconsciousness and the soul, in which it is inherent and which
has the predicates of supreme lord, dec , is merely the fourth Bramha,
the uninherent soul, which is the place of support for them.

The sentence, that* art thou,t becomes by means of both, the im-
proper transferring and abstraction explained in its full meaning; 1,
the universality of ignorance and what is connected with it ; 2, th% soul
in which it is inherent and which has the predicates of omniscience,
&c.; and 3, the uninherent soul, these three are, like a burning
iron.ball, when perceived as one, the literal meaning of the term
that: the uninherent soul, being the place of support, in which the
properties of that (universality) are inherent, is the designable (real)
meaning of the term, that. These three — 1 , the speciality of ignorance ;
2, the soul, in which it inheres ; and which has the quality of igno.
ranee and other imperfections, and 3, the soul in which this is not
inherent, these three like a burning iron.ball> when perceived as

* The universal soul.

t Any indiTidual intelligence.

126 F^ddnta^Sara, or Essence of the Fdddnia. iNo. 158.

one, are the literal meaning of the term, thou ; the all-pervading bless.
ed, fourth, supreme soul, being the place of support, in which the
properties of that (speciality) are inherent, is the designabie (real)
meaning of the term, ihau.

III. Connexion. — The meaning of the great sentence will now be
explained. The sentence : that art thou, explains the true signification
of the infinite Bramha by the three categories of relation. The three
isategories are : 1^ the relation of what is identical in these two terms ;
2, the relation of what is distinguishable and distinguishing (subject
and predicate) in the meaning of them ; 3, the relation of what is
designabie and what is designing in the meaning of those terms, viz.
the universal and the single soul ; for it is said, *' that the identifica.
tion, the fixing of what is distinguishable and distinguishing, and the
relation between what is designabie and designing explain the meaning
of the terms of the single and universal soul."

1. The category of identification; as in the sentence, that is this
Devadatta, the term that, which refers to Devadatta, as being in a
past time, and the term this, which refers to Devadatta, as being in
the present time, (both terms) design the connexion in one and the
same place ; thus also in the great sentence, '' that art thou," both
terms, viz. the term of th€U, which means the soul, as having the attri-
butes of invisibility, dec. and the term of thou, which means the soul,
as having the attributes of visibility, drc, design the connexion in one
and the same soul.

2. The cateffoty of what is distinguishable and what is distinguish-
ing (subject and predicate) ; as in the former sentence, (that is this
Devadatta) the meaning of the term that, which refers to Devadatta,
as being in a past time, and the term this, which refers to Devadatta,
as being in the present time, both come into the relation of what is
distinguishable and distinguishing by the annihilation of their mutual
differences ; thus also in the great sentence both terms, viz. the term
that, which means the soul, as having the attributes of invisibility,
kc, and the term thou, which means the soul, as having the attributes
of visibility, dec. come into the relation of what is distinguishable and
distinguishing by annihilation of their mutual differences.

3. The category of what is designabie and what is designing, as in
the same sentence, (that is this Devadatta) the relation of the design.

J845.] V^ddnta^Sara, or Euence of the Viddnta. 127

able lAd the designing refers simply to DevadatU, in which there is
no contradiction, after the contradictory terms of thaU and thi$ or
their corresponding meanings, being in the past and in the present
time, have been dispensed with ; thus also in the great sentence the
relation of the designable and the designing, refers simply to the soab
in which there is no contradiction, after the contradictory terms thai
and thou, or their corresponding meanings, viz. having the attributes
of invisibility and visibility, have been dispensed with.

This eategory is called the partial designation. In the great sen-
tence the meaning is not consistent/ as it is in the literal meaning of
the sentence — the lotus is blue* In this case, as in the term blue, the
quality of blue, and in the term lohu, the thing lotuff, exclude other
qualities and things, as for instance white, and cloth ; and as the unity
of the mutual connexion of predicate and subject, or the unity of the
one, determined by the other, are in correspondence with each other,
because there is no contradiction from another argument, (in this case)
the meaning of the sentence is consistent ; but if you think that, in the
great sentence, by excluding the mutual differences of the term /Aa/,
which nieans the invisible Ch^itanya (squ1>) and of the term thou,
which means the visible Ch&itanya, the meaning of the sentence does
agree, viz. the connexion between predicate and subject, or of the unity
of the one, determined by the other, we must maintain, that the mean-
ing of the sentence is not consistent, because it involves the contra-
diction of the invisibility, &c. Nor is here an omitting designation
(ellipsis,) as in the sentence— on the Ganga lives the herdsman, con-
sistent. As there is in this case a perfect contradiction in the meaning
of the sentence, which expresses a connexion between the support, and
what is to be supported, viz. the Ganga and the herdsman, the ellipsis
is called for, because there is a propriety in the designation of the bank
of the Ganga, by entirely dispensing with the meaning of the sentence.
In the great sentence, however, as there is no contradiction in one part
alone of the meaning which shows the unity of the invisible and
visible Ch^itanya, the ellipsis cannot take place, because another
ellipsis would be improper without also dispensing with the other

* The aathor, after having discussed the three categories of relation, refutes
three other forms of relation, which at the first glance may appear to express the
■eaoug of the great sentence.

128 Viddnia^Sara, or Essence of the Vdddnta. [No. 158.

part. If you 8ay» as the term Ganga, by entirely rejecting its owa
meaning, points to the term bank ; so also the terms that and thou
by entirely rejecting their literal meaning, point to the terms, thou
and that; why then should the ellipsis be inadmissible : then we most
say, you are not right, because in the former sentence, if you did not
mention the term of bank, its meaning was not known, which therefore
required such an ellipsis ; but in the latter sentence, by mentioning
the terms that and thou, their meanings are fully known, and conse-
quently there is here no necessity of knowing the meaning of one
word by another through the mentioned ellipsis.

Nor is here the case of the not omitting designation admissible,* as in
the sentence — red runs. The sentence, which speaks of the moving of a
quality, is contradictory ; but here by not omitting it in the ellipsis
of a horse, which is the place of this or other qualities, the contradic-
tion is removed, and the not omitting designation is proper ; but in the
great sentence, on account of the contradiction in the meaning, which
points out the unity of the invisible and visible Gh^itanya, if you, not
dispensing with the invisibility and visibility, refer through the said
ellipsis to any other terms, the contradiction is not removed, and there-
fore this ellipsis cannot take place. But if you say, that the terms that
and thou, by rejecting the contradictory part of their own meanings,
point to the terms that and thou, as united with the other part, and if
you continue, why then do you not grant a partial ellipsis by another
means ? We must say, that this is not proper, because it is impossible
to grant an ellipsis for both, viz., for a part of its own meaning and for
another term by a single term ; and also because the meaning of the
terms being known, there is no necessity to know them by an
ellipsis.

As therefore the sentence, this is that D^vadatta, or its meaning on
account of the contradiction in a part of its meaning, which refers to
Devadatta, as being in the present and in the past time, by omitting
the part which refers to the contradictory terms, being in the present
and in the past time, the not contradictory part only, viz. Devadatta,
remains ; so in the great sentence, that art thou, or the meaning of
it, on account of the contradiction in a part of its meaning, which

* Tbis term means, that a word retains its literal meaning, while at the same
time it points to a term, which is not included in it.

1845-3 V^ddntiuSara, or Essence of the Viddnta, 129

refers to the invisible and visible Chaitanya, by omitting the part
which refers to the contradictory terms, having the attributes of invi.
ability and visibility, refers to the not contradictory part only, viz.
ChfiUmya (soul.)

The meaning of the great sentence, I am Bramha, which was
received by internal perception, will now be given.

When the teacher has thus, by means of the improper transferring and
of the true abstraction, purified the two terms, thai and Mom, and the
meaning of the infinite one has been explained by the great sentence,
then is produced in the mind of the qualified person the act of the
noderstanding, formed by the form of the infinite firamha, viz., I am
the eternal, pure, omniscient, free, true, self-existent, ever blessed, in.
finite Branha, without duality. This act (of the understanding,)
together with the (adequate) likeness of the omniscient being, by making
the all-pervading, undivided, unknown, supreme Bramha its object,
destroys the ignorance with regard to him.

Then as cloth is burned by the burning of the thread, which is
the cause of it; so by the destruction of the ignorance, which is the
cause of the whole creation, the act of the understanding, formed by
the form of the infinite substance, is also destroyed, as included^n that
ereation. As the shine of a lamp is absorbed by the overpowering
nys of the sun ; so the soul, which is reflected by that act of the un-
derstanding, and absorbed by the self-manifesting, all pervading, undi-
vided, supreme Bramha, which it (the understanding) is unable to ma-
nifest, (the soul) becomes, since the act of the understanding, which is a
part of his qualities, is destroyed, the all-pervading, undivided Bramha,
as the face only remains, when the looking-glass, in which it was re-
flected, has been removed. If this is true, the contradictory statement
of the two passages of the Sruti, viz., " by the mind it must be com-
prehended," and " what is not perceived by the mind> is reconciled,"
because by granting, that the act of the understanding makes Bramha
its object, the effect (the manifestation) must be at the same time
prohibited. It is also said, to make (Bramha) object of manifestation,
is prohibited by the authors of the Shastras* For the destruction of
the ignorance respecting Bramha, that act of the understanding is
required, and it is not proper that he who manifests himself, is

manifested by another.

130 Veddnia^Sara, or Essence of the V^dd$Ua. C^^o. 158*

The partieulan of the act of the undentandiog, formed by the form
of the inanimate substances, are as follow. For instance, in the per-
ception of this thing, the act of the understanding, formed by the form
of this thing, in making the (this) unknown thing its object, manifests
even the inanimate matter, which is this thing, by the manifestation of
the knowledge, which that act of the understanding has acquired, after
the ignorance with regard to that thing has been removed, as the shine
of a lamp in making any thing, concealed by darkness, its objeot,
manifests by its own power (shine) the thing, after the darkness^ in
which it was concealed, has been removed.

IV. The four means. — ^The diligent application of the four acts, vise.
hearing, attention, of contemplation and meditation, being required,
until the perception of the soul, which has no other likeness but with
itself, is obtained, they must be here described.

1 . — Hearing means the fixing of the opinion of the Ved&ntas with
regard to the being without duality, by the six modes of determination,
which are, the commencement and the end, the practice, the exclu-
sion of other arguments, the final end, the proper speaking, and the
demonstration.

a. The commencement and the end is the fixing of any sub-
ject, to be explained in a chapter (of the Veddnta) in its com-
mencement and end ; for instance, in the sixth chapter of the Chan*,
dogya Upanishad, the definition of the being without duality, which
is to be explained in that chapter, is in the commencement, one even
without duality, and in the end, that Bramha, the . life of the whole
universe.

b. Practice is repeatedly to mention a subject in a chapter, in
which it is to be explained ; as for instance, in the middle of that chap.
ter (Chandtfgya) the nine times mentioning of the being without dua.
lity by the great sentence, that art thou.

c. The exclusion of other arguments is not to demonstrate a subjeet,
to be explained in a chapter, by other proofs, as in that chapter the
being without duality is not demonstrated by another proof.

d. Final end is the fruit from the knowledge of Bramha, to be
explained in a chapter, or from the practice of that knowledge, as
it is mentioned in that chapter, '^ that the man who has a teacher,
knows that he belongs to him, until he is liberated ; then he will

18450 V4ddnta^Sara, or Esaenee ofihe V^ddnta. 181

be saved." Thus the principal fruit from the knowledge of the infinite
beiig is to gain that end.

e. The proper speaking is the praising of any subject in a chapter,
in which it is to be explained ; fbr instance, it is a praise of the being
without duality in that chapter. *' O thou (disciple) you asked for
such adTice, by which that which is never heard, is heard; that
which is never thought, is thought ; and that which is never known,
is known.

/. Demonsiraiion is the prc^r mode of deduction for the attain-
ment of complete understanding of the subject, to be explained in a
diapter ; as for instuice, in that chapter, '* O thou handsome youth,
ss all things, made of earth, are known by one clod of earth, the dif-
ference consists in words only ; the real thing is earth, so the demon-
stration in that chapter is the proper mode of deduction in the attain-
ment of the complete understanding of the being without duality,
that there is no difference but in words."

^.'^Atteniion is the constant attending to the being without duality,
by those demonstrations, which refer to it in the VM^nta.

3. — Contemplation is the remaining of the same state of the under-
standing, formed by the form of the being without duality, with
regard to that being, which is not believed to exist in the transient
ferm of a body.

4. — Mediiation is twofold ; the one in the form of difference, the
other without it. Meditation, which has the form of difference, is to
place upon the being without duality the act of the mind, formed by
the form of it (that being) without removing the difference between
him who knows, the object of knowledge, and knowledge itself.
As in the percepti<m of an earthen elephant, earth only is actually
perceived ; so the being without duality is perceived even in the per.
caption of duality. Thus it is said by philosophers, who maintain
the being, which is like the eye, which is (the support of all) like the
ether, which is supreme, which is at once manifest, which is not pro-
daced, which is one (without difference in itself and from others) im-
perishable, in which all differences are annihilated, which is omnipre-
sent and without duality, even this being am I, who is for ever liber-
ated. I am perfect in knowledge, pui'e, unchangeable; I am not fet-

tered, I do not require salvation.

132 y^ddnta^Sara, or Essence of the V^ddnta. LNo. 158.

The meditation without difference is to place upon the being without
duality the same^act of the understanding, formed by the form of it
(that being) after having removed the diflferences between him who
knows, the object of knowledge, and knowledge itself. As water alone
appears by the disappearance of salt, which is formed by the form of
water ; so appears the being without duality alone by the disappearance
of the act of the mind> formed by the form of that being. Still it
must not be thought, that there is no distinction between this state
and sound sleep : for though in either the same absence of the act of the
understanding does occur, yet, from the existence and not existence
of that act in either state, the distinction between them is evident
This meditation includes : refraining, religious refraining, sitting in a
peculiar posture, suppression of breath, coercion, internal fixing and
meditation*

Refraining includes the following acts : refraining from injary,
regard for truth, abstaining from stealing, obedience to the spiritoal
teacher, and not accepting (gifts.)

Religious refraining includes purification, contentment, devotion,
reading (of the Vedas) and meditation on the Supreme Ruler.

Sitting in a peculiar posture are the different modes of placing the
members of the body in a prescribed form, as in the form of a lotus, dec.

Suppression of the breath is the peculiar mode of expiration and
inspiration, and of keeping the breath.

Coercion is the refraining of the senses from their objects.

Internal fixing is to fix without intermission the acts of the internal
senses upon that being.

Meditation, is here the first one, which has the difference in itself.

There are four obstacles to the perfect meditation without differ-
ence : viz. listlessness, absence of mind, passion, and propensity to
pleasure.

Listlessness is the sleep of the mind, (caused) by not attending to
the being without duality.

Absence of mind is attention to other things by not attending ^
the being without duality.

Passion is inadvertence to the being without duality, not from li>^
lessness, or absence of mind, but from the act of the understanding!
being fettered by the desire of love, or other passions.

]845.] VSdanUt^Sara, or Eisenee iif the VSddfUa. 133

lYopensity to pleasure is, to eojoy by the act of the mind, no
being direeted to the being without duality, the pleasure, produced by
the meditation, which has its difference in itself, or the enjoyment
of pleasure, produced by that meditation at its commencement.
When the understanding, free from those four obstacles and immov.
tble like a lamp, protected from the wind, thus becomes the infinite
Chsitimya alone, then the meditation is called that without dif*
ferenoe. It is said, he will awaken the ondentanding, sunk in list,
knness^he will concentrate it, when lost in absence of mind ; he will
eslighten it, when blinded by passion; he will not move it, when
steadied by austerities; he will not let it taste pleasure; by the
coosideration (of universal things) it will be without fondness. As
a lamp, protected from the wind, dec. dec.

Definition of the living free. The living free is the Bramhanishta
(devoted to Bramha) who, after the infinite, self-like Bramhais known,
when the ignorance with regard to him is removed by the knowledge
of the self.like, infinite, pure Bramha, is free from all worldly fet-
ters, by the destruction of the ignorance and its creation, of the
unrewarded works (those works which have not borne their fruit
^ previously to the true knowledge) of doubt, (viz. whether there is a
sool different from the body or not) and of other misapprehensions.
''When he, the universal soul, has been perceived, then all the con.
. seious acts of the understanding are extinguished, then all doubts
are removed, and also his works are annihilated," says the Sruti.

Though he in the time of awaking (the Bramhanishta) by his body,
which is like a vessel of flesh, blood, dec., by his senses, which are like
vesBels of blindness, bluntless and unfitness, and by his mind, which
is the vessel for the sensations of hunger, thirst, grief and error, per-
forms the works which are worked by the impulses of his former de-
sires, and enjoys the fruits of his undertakings, which (the fruits) are
00 obstacles to the true knowledge ; still he does not actually perform
or enjoy them, since he has destroyed the whole creation of ignorance,
as a person, who knows a thing, which he perceives to be an illusion
of his senses, does not actually believe in its reality, .though he may per-
ceive it. ''As one seeing does not see, or hearing does not hear," says
the Smti. It is also said, who in a waking state is like a person &st
Mleep, who does not perceive, though perceiving, duality, because he is

134 VedafOa^Sara, or Essence of the VeddfUa, [No. 158.

above duality, who« though acting, does not act, he knows the soul
none else ; this is certain. As previously to the obtainment of this
knowledge he followed the sensations of hunger and other appetites, so
he (now) follows (only) the impulses to good works, or there is the
same indifference to good and evil actions. It is said, " If he, who
knows the i^ality of the being without duality, can act according to his
desire, what differ^ice is then between a dog and him who knows the
truth, as regards the taking of impure food. He knows the soul, who has
purified the knowledge of Bramha (from ignorance) not another, must
be the answer. Humility of mind, the cause of true knowledge, benevo.
lence and other virtues will adorn him like ornaments (in that state.) It
is said, he who has gained perfect knowledge of the soul, possesses bene,
volence and othw virtues, without effort on his part; but not he
(possesses them without effort) who is striving for the means of salva-
tion. What else can I say? He, who for the maintenance of his
body only suffers the happiness and misery, resulting from his works,
which are done to accomplish his own desires and aversions, as well
as those of others, and brings to light the impulses of his mind,
will on the approach of death unite his life with the alLpervadisg,
ever blessed, supreme Bramha ; and having thus destroyed the
perception of ignorance and of its creation, he will exist as the
supreme Bramha, who is perfect salvation, the fountain of all bliss,
and free from the signs of every difference. His life is not taken to
other places, but to him (Bramha) it is flowing. Free, he is made free ;
thus says the Sruti.

135

NUe of He Course of Siudy ptirsued 6y StutUnU in iht Sanskrit
Ceil^e, Cakuita. By W« 8bton Karr» Esq., B. C. S.

The coune of study pursued by the students of the Sanskrit College
18 at follows : they begin by studying Vyakaranam, or gnunmar, for
tlie first three years. The grammar mostly used is one called the Mugda
Bddka, written in Sanskrit, as those written in Bengali are despised
hf the Natives. It is a peculiarly native idea, that until a thorough
teqaatntanoe with the rules of grammar, as seen theoretically, is obtain,
cd, nothing can be done towards acquiring the language by reading
other books ; .no attempt is therefore made to combine the learning
of the rules of grammar with the reading of the Hitopadesa or other
boob of an easy style. When, however, they have acquired such a
thorough knowledge of grammar as to be able to repeat whole pages of it
\sj heart, they plunge at once into some of the hardest books of the Ian.
gaage ; the next two years siicceeding the three spent on grammar are
devoted to reading the following works : the Bhatti Kavya, or poem
of Bhatti, a work made principally to aid the acquisition of grammar,
every line being an illustration of some particular rule ; the Raghu
Vann, the Kumara Sambhava, Naishadhai Sisupalabadha, Sacontala,
Veai Sanghara, Murari, Bharovi, Prasanna Raghava, Ultara Rama
Charitra, Raghava Pandavi, Vasavadatta. Several of the above works
ire known by the name of *' Mahakavya, or great poems/' a title applied
toonly six works ; those of the above which lay claim to it are the Raghu-
vanoa, Kamara Sambhava, Sisupalabadha, and Naishadha. The next
year is devoted to AlankarCy or rhetoric during which the following
^orks are read : Sahitiva Darpanam, Kavyo Prakasha, and Chando
Maogari,-^all these they learn off by heart.

The next year is devoted to the Vedantas, or works of later
^ters, illustrating the scope and objects of several passages in the
Upanishads of the Vedas, relating to an abstract and speculative
moDotheism. The works read are the Vedanta Sara, Panchdasti, and
Sharirika-shutra. ^

The next year is devoted to Nyaya, or logic. Works read, Bhasha-
laricheda (the division of language) and the Gautama-sutra.

The next year is devoted to mathematics. Books, the Lilavati and
Bijganita.

136 l^aie on the Studies in the Sanscrit College. [No. 158.

The next three years are devoted to Smriti, or law. The books read
are Manu, the Mitakshara, Daibhaga, Dattika Mimansa^ Dattaka
Chaodrika, Udraha-tattiva, Shuddhi-tattiva, Dayakrama, SangraHa,
and Dhaiva-tattiva. The whole of these last, with the exception of
Manu. are committed to memory ; besides this they are in the habit
of learning by heart the greater part of a dictionary, called the Amara-
kosha ^immortal treasure, J which contains the various synonyms of
nouns current in the Sanskrit language, which, with regard to re.
markable objects, as the sun, the ocean, Brahma, Vishnu, Shiva, a
lotus, a serpent, &c. &c. are unusually numerous.

No student can be received after fourteen years of age in the
Sanskrit College, and the whole time of study spent there is twelve
years I

There are also a number of verses or slokas handed down tradi-
tionally from father to son, generally expressive of some pithy sen-
timent. It is pretty certain that they are not to be found in any
book ; of these, five hundred were known by one individual. Many of the
Pandits during the whole of the above course of study have never read
the Hetopadesa, one of the most curious books in the language^ as
being the only one written in prose ; all the immense ocean of San-
skrit literature is in verse— «even an unprinted novel, containing the
history of an heavenly Apsara, who loved a prince named Ghandrapiiri,
is in verse : the love of the Apsara reminds us of that of Aurora to Titho-
nus, or Venus to Anchises. The ponderous tomes of the Mahabharata
are often totally neglected by the Pandits, although that poem is called
the '^ fifth Veda" from its sacred character and great antiquity. This
poem and that of the Ramayana, which Sir William Jones termed
the two epic poems of the Hindus, are thus quite cast out of the circle
of the Sanskrit College reading.

As Sanskrit scholars in Europe might feel interest in the above abstract, 1 pub-
lish it as communicated by a member of our Society, W. Seton Karr, £sq. C. S.,
who originally suggested to me the obtaining a statement of the sort for the
Journal. « iTi

137

Memorandum on the Ancient bed of the River Soane and Site of Pa^
Ubotkra. By £. C. Ravbnshaw, Esq.^ B. C S., with a Coloured

Map.

One of the chief difficulties in identifying Patna as the site of Pa-
talipootra, the capital of Chundragupta, has been the distance which
at present exists between the river Soane and the city of Patna*
Any satis&ctory evidence, therefore, which can be brought to esta-
blish the fact that the confluence of the Soane and Ganges in former
days took place in the vicinity of Patna, is of importance both in a
feognphical and historical point of view. Major Rennell, in his
" Memoir of a map of Hindoostan/' (page 50,) observes, that " Late en-
qoiries made on the spot (about 1787 A. D.) have brought out this
interesting discovery, that a very large city which anciently stood on,
or very near, the site of Patna, was named Patelpoother (or Patalipu-
tn secording to Sir W. Jones,) and that the river Soane, whose con.
floence with the Ganges is now at Moneah (Muneer), 22* miles
above Patna, once joined it under the walls of Patelpoother. This
Bsme agrees so well with Palibothra, and the intelligence altogether
fomishes such positive kind of proof, that my former conjecture
respecting Conoge must fall to the ground." In page 53, he adds,
that *' The ancient bed of the Soane is yet traceable on the south of
PatDa, and seems to have led into the Ganges near Futwah."

On accidentally meeting with the above passages in Major Rennell's
work, at the time that the Professional Survey of the Patna district
was going forward, I requested Lieutenant Maxwell of the Bengal
Artillery (the officer in charge of the survey) to endeavour, if possible,
to trace out the course of the old bed of the Soane, with a view either
to verify or disprove the correctness of Major Rennell's information.
Lieutenant Maxwell entered into the enquiry with his usual zeal, and
with no other hints than what are contained in the above quotations,
was successful in clearly tracing the old bed from a point on the Soane,
near Sydabad (about 18 miles above Muneer) vift fiikrum, Nowbut-
poor, Phooiwaree, Meeth^poor to B&kipoort, where it appears to have

* It isnow only IS miles above the Golah, and 17 above the Western Gate of the
old Fort of Patna.

f Called by European Kesidents, Bankipoor.

138 Memorandum on the Ancient bed of [No. 158. ^

joined the Ganges about 200 yards west from the Go]ah> and nearly
opposite the point where the Gunduck falls into the Ganges from the
north. I forwarded the sketch map, prepared by Lieutenant Alaxweil,
to Mr. J. B. Elliott, late of the Civil service, the oldest European resi-
dent at Patna, who informed me in reply, that some years ago he had
been led, by the perusal of the Drama called ^ Mudra Rakshasha,"
to make similar enquiries from the natives of the place. The follow-
ing is a translation of the result of his enquiries, which corresponds Z
very remarkably with the scientific survey : *' Formerly the course
of the Sone turned eastward from near Sydabad, whence it proceeded
by Ghorhutta and Bikrum to Nowbutpoor, thence vift Moorgheea
Chuch Mooradpoor, Danapoor, Ghosunda, Koorjee, and Khugwul to
Phoolwaree. From the latter town it flowed past Khwajapoora,
Sheikhpoora, and Dhukunpoora to Meethapoor ; whence in two
streams ( Jurrah) it fell into the Ganges near Bftkipoor at the Takeea
of Shah Rookun Phulwan. From Phoolwaree a small stream (SoCah)
flowed to the eastward, and from opposite Meethapoor, proceeding
in a south-easterly direction, it finally united with the Ganges near
Futtooha, (Futwa). In the time of Mukhdoom Shah Shuruf Ooddeen
Ahmud Yaheea Mun^ree, (from which a period of upwards of 470
years reckoning tO the end of 1251 Hijiree has elapsed,) the OEiain
stream of the Sone, taking its course west of the town of Muneer,
united with the Ganges near that place, and the eastern course with
the Sota became dry."

Lieutenant Maxwell in his first survey was unable to find any
trace of the river south of Patna, but the information contained in
the above statement regarding the branching off of a Sota, or small
stream, from Phoolwaree, enabled him to discover and to follow the
bed of the stream to the south of the city by Khemee Chuck and
Mirchee, and its exit into the Ganges through the arch of an old
bridge, about 3^ miles above Futwa.

The accompanying reduced map on a scale of four miles to the inch,
prepared by Lieutenant Maxwell, will I hope be thought satiafiic-
tory as being the first ever published, which clearly defines the ancient
course of the Soane. After receiving this map I met with the follow-
ing passage in Buchanan (page 11, volume I, Mr. Martin's edition,)
which was written about twenty.three years after Rennell's remark

mp«

1845.] the River Soane and SUe of Paliboihra. 1 39

above quoted. '' The Son, according to the Bengal atlas, formerly join-
ed the Ganges at Mftn^r, but a tongue of land has been formed project.
ing east from the Shahabad district, so that Mftner is now three miles
It least above the junction of the two rivers. The Son receives no
bnnch during its course in these districts, but sends off some old
channels that in different places are called by its name. The chief of
these separates from the river 11 or 12 miles above Mftner, runs
straight east to the thanah of Vikram, and then bends north until
it passes Noubutpoor. Immediately beyond this it sends to the right
a branch*, which, running through the whole breadth of the division
of B&kipoor, joins the dry channel of the Ganges, and is called Mo.
hauleya. The main channel of the Mftr.Sont, soon after the separation
of the Mohauleya, divides into two branches, which re- unite before they
M into the Ganges at Danapur j:. That to the west is called Deonar,
that to the east Bhadaiya. It must, however, be observed that an
old channel may be traced running from this Mftr.Son, and parallel to
the Ganges, a great part of the way to Bftkipur, near the western
atremity of the Patna city, and this may have been the old channel
of theSSn; and Patna may, therefore, have been once at the junc
to of this river with the Ganges."

This account, though differing in some particulars from that of the
inney, agrees generally as to the fact of the confluence of the two
nVers having been at Bftkipoor near Patna ; and this &ct corroborated
hyso many separate investigations made at different time8,by different
individuals, may therefore be considered as fully established. The
(Iteration in the course of the Soane is supposed to have taken place in
^ time of Shah Shuruf Oodeen Ahmud Ehya Muneeree, 781 Hije-
Ke, corresponding with 1379 A. D. The following extract§, from
the Memoirs of the Emperor Baber, proves that in the time of that
i&onareh the Soane flowed by Muneer in 1529 A. D., and so far cor-
n)borates the tradition of its having changed its course about the end
^ the fourteenth century. The '' Mudra Rakshasa'* shows that the

* Bachanan aeema here to have been misinformed, and to have alluded to the
otuich which separates at Fboolwaree, instead of at Noubatpoor.
t ** Mftr," means dead or dry Soane.
t Diaapoor.
i ^ W, Erskine's Translation.

140 Memorandum on the Ancient bed of [No. 158.

change had not taken place when that play was written in about the
eleventh century. '' As they informed me that the Son was near at hand,
we rode to see it. In the course taken by the river Son below this
there are a number of trees, which they say lie in Muner. The tomb
of Sheikh Yahea, the father of Sheikh Shuruf Muner, is there. As
we had come so far, and come so near, I passed the Sdn*, and going two
or three ko8 down the river surveyed Muner. Having walked through
its gardens, I perambulated the Mausoleum, and coming to the banks
of the Son bathed in that river."

Having established the fact that the Soane, in some former age prior
to 1529 A. n. united its waters with those of the Oanges in the vici-
nity of Patna, it is now to be considered how this foct supports the
opinion that the capital of Chundragupta was situated at the junction.
Sir W. Jones, Major Rennell, Wilson, and Wilford, concur that tradi-
tion assigns to this locality the ancient city of Pataliputra. Buchanan,
(in page 26, Volume I. Mr. Martin's edition) has the following
observation on this point : ** I have found in this district (Patna) no
traditions concerning Chundragupta, nor his descendants the Bolipu-
tras, although Palibothra, his capital, is by Major Rennell supposed to
be the same with Pataliputra, or Patna. This city indeed is allowed
by the pundits to be called Pataliputra, but Pataliputra has no great
resemblance to Palibothra, nor can Patali be rationally considered ss
a word of the same origin as Pali, said to be an ancient name of this
country and of its people and language."

The following extractt, (freely translated) from the Brihud Kntha
(or Brihut Kutha,) a work supposed to have been written by Banich
(Vararuchi) pundit in thetimeofVikrumaditya, king of Oojeen, about
57 B. C. may not be uninteresting, as conveying a popular tradition
through the medium of a fiction, which however it must be owned
is more suited to the Arabian Nights than to the gravity of history.

*' In Kashomunee, a brahmin named Bhoom Deo, had two sons,
Kooshun and Bukshun, who married Soomut and Purmut, the
two daughters of Surub Siah Mooni. Soomut becoming pregnant, the
two husbands reflected that, as they had scarcely means of subsistence

* He probably crossed near the present Ghat or Ferry at Koilwar.
t N. B. I believe this is not literally an extract, but a Potee, or tale, founded on
it by one Shunkur Duct, and called ** Patalipootur Pokyan*"

J845. J the Riffer Soane and Site of Paiiboihra. 1 4 1

saffident for four persons, they should be reduced to starvation on the
appearance of a fifth. They accordingly agreed to set off secretly in
the night in search of better fortunes, and leave their wives to take
cue of themselves. The next morning the wives found that their
husbands had deserted them, and wandered about the forest in search
of them. It so happened, that Mahadeo and Parbuttee were making
in excursion through the air, and the goddess seeing the distress of
the two women at the loss of their husbands, entreated Mahadeo to
comfort and relieve them. Mahadeo thereupon called to them, and
told Soomat that the child, which would shortly be bom to her, would
prove to be a source of wealth instead of poverty ; that whenever he
twoke from his sleep 1000 deenars would be found in his sleeve.
The celestial visitants then disappeared, and returned to their home
It Kylas. Soon after the birth of the child, which was a boy, the
loxious mother Soomut discovered, to her amazement, that whenever
the boy awoke from his sleep 1000 deenars really appeared shining
froBi under his elbows. She and her sister Purmut, therefore, speedily
hemne rich and went to Casi, where they purchased a large house,
ind became celebrated all over the country for their munificence and
diarity. The boy, being called Pootur (or son) by his parents, was
ifterwards styled Raja Pootur by the people of Casi, on account of
hii wealth and magnificence. In the mean time Kooshun and
Bnbhun, the two husbands, who were residing in Karnath (Camatic)
heiring the fiune of his charities, proceeded to Casi, and applied to him
IS mendicants for food and alms. The two ladies recognising their
kit husbands, but not being recognised by them owing to the sump-
tnonsness of their dress, placed before them an excellent repast, and
inquired, who they were and whence they came? Upon which
Kooshun detailed their history as above. Soomut then observed, that
there was a remarkable coincidence in their histories, and proceeded to
Burrate how they had been deserted by their husbands ; how Maha-
deo had appeared to them ; and how her son had been endowed with
the wonderful gift, which was the source of their wealth. The bus-
Wnds then beginning to recognise the features of their wives, the latter
threw themselves upon their necks and wept rejoicingly.

"All went on happily for some time, when the husbands grew jea.
l<Hii of the great attention which was paid to Raja Pootur, and con.

142 Memorandum on the Ancient bed of [No. 158.

eeiving the story of the wealth.giving sleep to be a fiction, invented
by their wives to conceal the real source of their wealth, they resolved
to remove the youth from their path, thinking that by so doing they
would obtain the entire control over the money, which was now
squandered by him. On the pretence of its being necessary to the
tompletion of his education and the benefit of his health that he
should travel to Bindachul, they sent him, in spite of the remonstran-
ces of their wives, under the charge of eight assassins with instructions
to murder him on the road. Arriving in the depths of a gloomy forest,
they prepared to execute their commission, but their hearts relentingi
they informed Pootur of the real object of the journey, upon which he
promised to reward them if they would allow him to sleep for sa
hour. The assassins retired, and at the end of an hour he brought
them 1000 deenars, and gave them a ring from his little finger to
fthow to his father as a proof of their having murdered him. The assss^
sins returned to Casi, and showing the ring obtained their pro-
mised reward from Kooshun and Bukshun ; but the two wives im*
mediately on seeing the ring of Pootur conjectured his fate, and died
on the spot. The wicked husbands were thus reduced again to the
poverty from which they had been relieved.

*' In the meantime the youth Pootur proceeded on his journey, and
presently encountered two Rachases, named Bunkut and Sunkut, sons
of Ghurbhaj. They told him, that their father had recently died and
left them three wonderful things, which they found it difficult to divide
between two, and they accordingly requested the advice of Pootur as to
the best method of settling the dispute. The three things were— FirBt,
a pair of wooden shoes, which had the virtue of transporting the wearer
immediately to any place he might wish to go to. Seccmdly, a purse,
out of which the possessor could draw jewels and precious stones of
any kind he desired, ad libitum. Thirdly, a staff* which on being erect-
ed in any chosen spot, a beautiful city would arise and endure forever.

'* Pootur, in answer to the application of the Raehasea, proposed that
they should decide the matter by a race, and that whoever first reached
a distant point which he indicated, should retain possession of the three
prizes. Agreeing to this, and depositing the stakea with Pootur, they
set off at full speed. Immediately after their departure, Pootur heard
a voice from Heaven, saying, ' Put on the wooden shoes, fix the po^

1845.] the River Scane and Site of Paliboihra. 143

(0 jour girdle^ take the staff in your hand, and depart for Sioghal^deep,
(Ceylon)/ Pootur acted aceordiogly, and was out of sight belbre the
Rsdiases returned from their race.

"On arriving at Singhal-deep, Pootur alighted on the edge of a tank
where some women were washing clothes. On seeing so handsome a
youth, they declared he must be Kamdeo (the God of Love) himself.
On his informing them that his name was Pootur, they declared that
August Mooni had prophesied, that Patlee the daughter of the king of
SioghaUdeep, would marry a person of the name of Pootur, and that
he must be destined ^ fulfil the prophecy. In the meantime Patlee
hsd been prepared for his arrival by Narud, a Mooni, then residing
at the palace, who told her that the person destined for her husband
would come from Casi.

''At night while Patlee was sleeping among her hand-maidens, Poo-
tur, having put on the magics shoes, appeared at her bed-side, and
iwakening told her that he was Pootur, who had come from Casi to
diim his destined bride. She said, she was willing to attend him ;
Ua must first get her jewels. He replied, that it was unnecessary, as
lie had only to put his hand in his purse, and he could bring out what
jewels he pleased ; in proof of which, he suited the action to the word,
isd continued drawing forth jewels without end, set in the most beau-
lifol forms. Upon this the lady said she was quite at his disposal;
80 he took her by thehand^ and thus addressed the Spirit of the Shoe:
'Go to a spot which is north of Gya, east of the Sonebhudur (Soane
river), west of the river Poonpoon, and which has the Ganges on the
north.' The Spirit of the Shoe accordingly ascended with them into
the air, and transported them in the course of one hour to the present
lite of Patna, where Pootur planted his staff, and a beautiful city
arose from the ground ; which, in honor of his wife, he called Patlee.
poora, or Pataleepooturpoora.

"On the morning after the flight of Patlee, Narud informed the king
of the event, and consoled him with the reflection that, as it had been
predestined, there was no help for it NarUd subsequently paid the
happy pair a visit at Patlee-pootra, and informed Pootur that as the two
Kaehases were dead, he need be under no apprehension as to their
esqoiry after the three Tulismans which he had walked off with. He
ordered him to keep them for 100 years, and then to go to Kylas (the

144 Memorandum an the Ancient bed of [No. 158.

heaven of Mahadeo.) The Mooni departed after making five things:

'' ist. A tank, called ' Sham Talao/ in which whoever bathed was
certain to have children.

*' 2nd. The Goor Tulao, by bathing in which the sick were cored.

'*drd. The Moonsurwur Tulao^ by bathing in which a pregnant
woman was sure to have a boy.

'Mth. Ram Tulao, by bathing in which the poor become rich.

*' 5th. Two ' Sidh Peets/ the existence of which secures to a city
perpetual duration and prosperity.

*' Patlee and Pootur lived very happily their 100 years, and then
went to Kylas. They left behind them two sons, Koosum and Pattno,
and one daughter Putnee, from whom the modem name of the city
is said to be derived."

Moonshee Kunhya Loll, who translated the above story intoOordoo
from the Sunscrit, has attempted to id^tify the site of the four tanks.
He maintains with considerable gravity, that the " Jeeuj Pokor''
near the Durgah of Shah Arzan, is the Sh^m Tulao^ and that women
still bathe in it with the same object. An excavation in the moholls
of Mogulpoora, called '' Nalbund ke Gurha/' he holds to be the Goor
Tulao. A place called Sheikh Muttee in Ghuk Shekarpoor, he consi-
ders to be the remains of the Munsurwur Tulao ; and the khye, or ditch
of Begumpoor, he boldly affirms to be the Ram Tulao. He has not
ventured, however, to discover any traces of the two '* Sidh Peets."
In the Mudra Rakshasha, a Sanscrit Play supposed to have been
written about the eleventh century, the principal scenes of which are
laid at Patalipootra, the capital of Chundragupta, a passage oeciusi
which evidently indicates the vicinity of the city to the river Soane.
It will be found in Act IV. page 106, of H. H. Wilson's translation;
Molaya Ketu, who is encamped at a distance of five days' march, thus
issues his final orders for the advance of his army to besiege the city
and dethrone Chundragupta:-*

Then let us march. Oar mighty Elephants
Shall drink the Sone*s dark waves, and echo back
The roaring of its waters; spread through the groves
That shade its bordering fields intenser gloom ;
And faster than the undermining torrent,
Hurl its high banks into the boiling stream \

\84S.] the River Soane and Siie ef Palibothra. 145

Then rolling onwarda, like a line of douda,
That girta in rain and thunder Vindya's Peaka,
£nyiron with portentous atorm the City,
And lay its proud Walla level with the ground.

That Patalipootra was not only in the neighbourhood of the Soane
bat also on the banks of the Ganges, is evident from the following
soliloquy uttered by Chundragupta from the terrace of the Siigftnga
Palace, at the festival of the autumnal fall moon, that is, in the height
of the rainy season, when the river is full and rapid in its course.

How beauteous are the skies at this soft season,
'Midst fleecy clouds, like scattered ialea of sand
Upon whose breast the white Heron hovers, flows
In dark blue tides the many channelled stream ;
And, like the pearly blossoms that unfold
Their petals to the night, the stars expand.
Below is Gunga by the Autumn led,
Fondly impatient, to her Ocean Lord,
Tossing her waves as with offended pride,
And pining fretful at the lengthened way.

In this Play the city of Ghundragupta is called by the personages

of the Drama by several different names, viz. Pushpapoor, Kasumapoor,

" The City of Flowers," and Patalipootra. The first cannot be identi.

M with the name of any place in the neighbourhood. With respect

to the second, it may be remarked that in the tradition above given

iirom the Brihudkutha, the name of one of the sons of Patlee was

Koostim, from which Koosumapoor may not unreasonably be supposed

to have been derived. ** Koosdm" in Sunscrit means ^* Flowers/' and

Koosumapoor, the City of Flowers. There are several names of similar

import at present in the vicinity. Phoolwaree, the name of a town

atuated on the bank of the old bed of the Soane, about six miles from

Patoa, means '' a place of flowers/* and one of the muhuUas, or divi-

nons of the present city of Patna, is denominated *' Goolzar Bagh,"

which in Persian has nearly the same meaning, and which may have

been the Mohamedan translation for Koosumapoor. Indeed it is pos-

lible, (though I cannot say it is very probable) that the different names

given to the city in the Sunscrit Play, may have been the names of

146 Memorandum on the Ancient bed of [No. 158.

the different mohallaa^ or divisions of the old Hindoo city, whi<&
have been preserved^ under altered designations to the present day.

The Grom Deota, or tutelary divinity, is now Putnee Devee, to
whom a small temple is dedicated, and to whom worship is still offer-
ed. Buchanan remarks, (p. 42, vol. I.) ^* The Goddess is said to have
been placed in her present situation by Patali, daughter of Raja
Sudarson, who bestowed the town now called Patna on his daughter^
and she cherished the city like a mother, on which account it was
called Patali-putra> or the son of Patali." According to the Brihud*
kutha, Putnee was the daughter of Patlee or Patali, but other tradi-
tions preserved in the Skunda Pooran, derive the name of Patna from
a Sunscrit word meaning '* a cloth," the goddess Parbuttee, the wife
of Siva, having dropt her mantle on the spot during her flight to
Kylas. In the '^ Pali Buddhistical annals" of Ceylon, translated by the
Honorable G. Tumour, (p. 998 vol. vii. of Journal of Asiatic Soci-
ety) Patali is mentioned as having been a mere village in the time of
Buddho, (i. e. 541 B. C.) Biiddho is said to have rested here on his
way to Benares from Rajgeer, the capital of the king of Magadha,
whose ministers were then employed in building a citadel for the pur-
pose of checking the inroads of the warlike tribe of Wajjions. Bud-
dho predicted, that the village of Patali was destined to become a great
city, and that it was destined to suffer under the calamity of fire^ of
water, and of treachery.

It is worthy of remark, that in the memoir of the Emperor Baber
no mention whatever is made of the city of Patna. The residence of
the Put'han rulers of this part of the country seems to have been at the
fort or town of Behar. Patna, therefore, must have ceased to be a
place of importance prior to the sixteenth century. It appears from the
Girnar* inscription, and also from the life of Shokya, extracted from
Tibetan authorities (p. 317, vol. XX. Asiatic Researches) that Asoka,
the grandson of Chundragupta, continued to reside at Patalipootra,
but after the extinction of the Maurya dynasty, the capital of the
Gangaridse, and of the Prachya (Prasii), seems to have been trans-
ferred to Ganoge, which under the Gupta dynasty became a city of
great splendour and renown for many ages. This transfer of the seat

* Asiatic Jouintil, Vol. vii. page 368.

1845.] the River Soane and Site of Palibothra. 14?

of Governmeiit was probably the cause of the desertion of Patalipootra.
and of the oblivion of the name, except when awakened from time to
time by the faint echo of tradition.

The site of the capital of Chundragupta having been fixed by the
evidence above adduced, the next step of the argument is to prove the
identity of Chundragupta with Sandracottas the king of the Prasii,
whose capital was designated Palibothra by Megasthenes, the ambas.
aador of Seleucus Nicator, the immediate successor of Alexander the
Great in the kingdom of Bactria. Atheneeus, Diodorus Siculus, Quintus
Cartius, Plutarch^ and other historians, mention Sandracottas as the
ooDtemporary of Alexander. Professor Wilson, in his Preface to the
Mudra Rakshasa, observes that *' Athenteus, as first noticed by Wilford
(A. R. vol. V. page 262,) and subsequently by Schlegel, writes the name
Sandrakoptus, and its other form, although more common, is very
pottibly a mere error of the transcriber." I may here remark, that the
Greek alphabet having no letter which corresponds with " Ch," the
Greek historians were obliged to substitute either the X or the <f»
Thus Praehi (which signifies, according to Wilson, the people of the
East) was converted by the Greeks into Prasii, and the river
Chambal into Sumbu. Diodorus Siculus, on the other hand, changed
Chsndromas, a synonyme of Chandra^ or Chundragupta, into ** Xan-
dnmas." If on the principle above explained, the initial S be re-
omverted into " Ch,"and the final " S," the usual Greek termination,
be struck off, Sandrakoptas will become '* Ghandrakopta," which bears
80 striking a resemblance to Chandragupta as to leave little or no
doubt of their identity. Professor Wilson has also pointed out the close
resemblance between the birth, parentage and history of Sandracottas
as described by the Grecian historians, and the account given of
Chondragupta in the Vishnooand Bhugwut Purftnas. The similarity
of names, supported by the coincidence in the history of the individuals,
tends to establish the identity of persons, and no reasonable doubt can
therefore be entertained that the Sandracottas of the Greeks was die
Chundragupta of the Poorans.

This point conceded, (and it having been shown that Patalipootra
was the capital of Chundragupta,) the identity of that city with Pa.

* N. B; He is called by both names indifferently in the Mudra Rakshas(u

148 Memorandum on the Ancient bed of Z^o. 158.

libothra (stated by Megasthenes, who visited it, to be the capital of
Sandracottas,) follows as a necessary consequence.

Here the argument might be said to have terminated^ but it may
not be uninteresting to advert to some other coincidences^ as well as
to some discrepancies which have led many learned men to a differ-
ent conclusion.

Arrian (page 214, Rooke's Translation,) who derived his informa«
tion from the Journal of Megasthenes, says —

''The capital city of India is Palibothra, in the confines of the
Prasii, near the confluence of the two great rivers Erannoboas and
Ganges. Erranoboas is reckoned the third river throughout India,
and is inferior to none but the Indus and Ganges, into the last of
which it discharges its waters. Megasthenes assures us, that the
length of this city is eighty furlongs, the breadth fifteen ; that it is
surrounded with a ditch which takes up six acres* of ground, and is
thirty cubits dctep ; that the walls are adorned with 570 towers and
64 gates."

The general resemblance in sound between Palibothra and Patali-
pootra is obvious, and would be more striking if we consider that the
conversion of the Greek letter 0 into " th" is an anglicism, and that
the French and other foreigners do not admit the pronunciation.
The Greek word vaXifioOpa would therefore be rendered Palibothra,
and the "b** and ''p" being convertible letters, we have Palipotra.
But Buchanan has remarked that P&tali and Pali are by no means
identical, the former having a distinct meaning. P&tali Devee
signifies the " Thin Goddess," whereas Pali was the name of a king,
a people and a language. Wilford (p, 36, vol. IX. Asiatic Researches)
says, ** We are informed in the Bhagavata, that king Maha Nanda
assumed the title of Bali and Maha Bali, consequently his oflspring
who ruled after him for a long time were Baliputras: the kingdom of
Mogadha was called the kingdom of Bali, P&li and Poli. The
city in which the Bali, or Paliputras resided was of course denomi-
nated from them ' Baliputra,' or ' Paliputra ;' and by the Greeks ' Pali-
bothra,* and in the Pentingerion Tables, ^ Palipotra.'" In page 38, he
adds, " According to Ptolemy, the country of the Baliputras extended

• JS. B. Thisisamis-tranBlationfor 600 feet broad, to €vpo<y e^airXtBpoV-

J845.] the River Soane and Siie of Palibolhra, 1 49

from the Soane to beyond Moonhedabad as far as Rungftmutty." It
leems evident, therefore, either that the Greeks confounded the name
«f the City with that of the Dynasty, or that the discrepancy in the name

y be ascribed to the error of copyists of the Greek MSS. at a time
hen printing was unknown. Indeed the discrepancies in the spelling

Oriental names at the present day are quite as great, without the

cose afforded to the Greeks by successive copies of MSS. Moongeer

invariably spelt in our maps and in public correspondence, Mon.

yr ; Khanpoor or Khanpur, is spelt Cawnpoor ; Chandanugur, Chan-
denu^ore; Singhalpetta, Chingleput ; and Mundirraj, Madras; Dihlee
18 variously spelt Dilli, Dehly. The right pronunciation of Patna
itself is P'ut'na; of Bankipore, B&kipoor ; and of Dinapoor, D&n&poor.
The instances of such corruptions are innumerable, and will readily
«eeor to all residents in India.

In the above quotation from Arrian, Palibolhra is said to have been
Btoated near the confluence of the Erranoboas and the Ganges. Sir
W. Jones^ in his Tenth Discourse, has shown that Hirunyabfthoo, or
^mnoboas, was a synonyme* of the Soane. Thus the argument for
the identity of the cities of Patalipootra and Palibolhra is materially
atiengthened.

The chief objection which has been urged by Wilford, Colonel Frank-
lio^aod others against the argument is, I believet, founded on the slate,
ment of Pliny, that Palibolhra was situated 425 Roman miles below the
oonfliience of the Jumna and Ganges, which taking the Roman mile

* N. B. AH the principal rivers of India have a number of synonymes. The
Omges has, I am told, 100, which are chanted in Sunscrit verse.

A Pundit has just informed me, in reply to a question whether the Soane had any
other name in Sunscrit, that it was called Hirunyab&boo in the " Amnr-kosh." I
^ not know whether this is the work alluded to by Sir W. Jones as being €000
yens old. The names of the Jumna, the Pundit told me, were Kalindi, Soorujtunia,
Jnm&a, and Sumuuasoosa*

t Since writing the above I have met with Colonel Franklin's work. His argument
i> founded upon some coincidences in names which appear to be more plausible
^ conclusive.

lit. He quotes an extract from the Ootur Poorana, to show that the original name
of a nnmll river, now called Chundun, which unites with the Ganges west of Bhau-
plpoor, was '* Errun Bhowuh," or Forest-bam. He considers this to be the
£iiQiioboas of the Greeks. This petty stream has scarcely a drop of water in it for
ax months in the year, and in Arrowsmith's Map, on a scale of SO miles to an inch,
it i« hardly distinguishable. To reconcile this fact with the description of Maga-
thenes that *'the Errunoboas was the third of Indian rivers," Colonel Franklin
^ construed the text to mean ** a river of the third magnitude.'* Then putting

150 Memorandum on the Ancient bed of [No. 158.

at the usually recognised length of 1666 yards*> would give about 402
English miles below Allahabadt, and 175 miles below Patna ; Bhaugul-
poor is only 364 English miles below Allahabad, while Rajmahl is
436 ; so that the proper site of Palibothra> according to this calculation,
would be about half way between the two latter stations. Rennell, in
his '' Memoir of the Map of Hindoostan," has shown, however, that the
Roman mile and Greek stadia varied so much that it is impossible to
say what was the real length of the Roman mile given in Pliny's
Itinerary. The following are the distances as given by Pliny.

Roman Miles.

Taxila on the Indus to the Hydaspes, (Jelum,) •• .. 120

From Hydaspes to the Hyphasis, (Beyah,) 390

,y Hyphasis to Hysudrus, (Sutledge,) 168

„ Hysudrus to Jomones> (Jumna,) ..168

yy Jomones to Ganges, .. .. .. •• ..112

„ Ganges to Rhodopa. .. •• 119

,, Rhodopa to Calinipoxa, (a City,) . . 167

Carried over, .. 1244

the Indus, Ganges, and Burampootur in the first class ; the Soane, Nerbudda, &c. in
the second j he places the Chundun in the third. The Greek text however is simply

o §£ eppavvojSoac rpiroq fxiv av eiri riov. TvSwv 9rora)uci;/i.

tnd. He next quotes extracts from the Voyu, Hari Vunsa, Markunda and Ootur
Furanas, which go to show merely that Bali, the son of Bhooput, begat a son called
Balipootra, who was Rajah of Aungdes* that his capital (ninety -six miles by thirty-
six in extent) was Balini, which however was usually called Chumpapooree. Colo-
nel Franklin says, (1 do not know on what authority^ that Chumpapooree is the
Chumpanugar of the present day, a village four miles west of Bhaugulpbor ; but sap-
posing this to be so, it does not follow that Chumpapooree was ever called Pali-
bothra. It is probable, that this Bali (who in another part of the extract is said to
have had three sons *' Aung, Bang and Culing," and all of whom were doubtless call-
ed Balipootras, or sons of Bali) lived long antecedent to the time of Nanda the king of
Magadha, who, according to Wilford, assumed the title of Bali, and from whom
Chundragupta and his descendants derived the title of Balipootras. It is very pos-
sible, that the original Bali may have dwelt at Balini, or Chumpapooree, in the vici-
nity of Bhaugulpoor ; but this circumstance would afford no proof that the capital of
Chundragupta was also situated on that spot.

Zrd, Colonel Franklin states, (page 19) that in several Hindoo works Falibothre
is mentioned as situated in the vicinity of hills ; but he has omitted to give a single
passage containing a fact so very important to hia argument. It does not seem ne-
cessary to discuss the minor points of Colonel Franklin's work.

* Adams* Roman Antiquities.

t By the Post-office Tables, it is, tt7 £• miles from Allahabad to Patna.

18450 the River Soane and Site of Palibothra. 1 5 1

Roman Miles.

Brought forward, 1244

To the oonflax of JomoDes and Ganges, 225

To Palibothra, 425

To the mouth of the Ganges, 638

Total, .. 2532

* N. B. — The total is not added up in Pliny.

, These distances are said to have been measured along the high road,
bat as they cannot be made to correspond with the distances by the
{wesent high road from the Indus to the Ganges, it is evident either
that some error as to the figures has crept into the MSS. or (which
is by no means improbable) that the high road 2000 years ago took a
very different course from the high road at present. Rennell, in order
to ascertain the length of the Roman mile assumed by Pliny, mea.
lured on the map along the line of the great road from the Hyphasis
(Beyah) to the mouth of the Ganges, and finding this to be 1140
G. miles while the Itinerary gave 2022 Roman miles, he concluded
that the proportion of one of Pliny's miles to a Greek mile was as
56 to 100 in horizontal distance, or 7-10th8. of an English mile in road
(distance. Agreeable to this mode of computation, he found Patna to be
only 345 of Pliny's miles below Allahabad instead of 425, as stated
IB the Itinerary. This diflerence of 80 of Pliny's miles, or 44
Greek miles, he did not consider of much importance, as owing
to the great changes in the course of Indian rivers, it was by no means
certain that in former times the confluence of the Jumna and Ganges
took place at Allahabad as now.

The mode of computation adopted by Rennell is not altogether free
from objection. First, he has omitted to give the stages of the high
road along which he measured the distance. Secondly, which mouth
of the Ganges he assumed as the eastern limit. Thirdly, the precise
point which he considered to be at the mouth of the Ganges. It is
also to be considered that whatever point may have been assumed
by Major Rennell as the mouth of the Gkinges, it is in the highest
degree improbable that the same point was situated at the mouth of
the Ganges 2000 years ago. The progress of the Deltas of all rivers,
though slow, is sure: Herodotus (Euterpe, p. 4) says that, '' In the

152 Memorandum on the Ancient bed of [No. 158*

time of Menes (*2320 B. C.) the first kiDg, the whole of Egypt, except
the province of Thebes was one extended marsh. No part of all that
district which is now situate beyond the lake of Mseris was then to be
seen^ the distance between which lake and the sea is a journey of
seven days." In para. 13 he adds, '< In the reign of Mseris as
soon as the river rose to eight cubits, all the lands above Memphis
were overflowed ; since which a period of about 900 years has elaps-
ed : but at present, (about 460 B. C.) unless the river rises to sixteen
or at least fifteen cubits, its waters do not reach those lands." Daring
the boring in Fort William with a view of making an Artesian well, a
fossil bone was brought up from a depth of 350 feett below Calcutta,
which evidently proves that that part of the Delta is (geologically speak-
ing) a comparatively modem accumulation of alluvial deposits, and it
is not impossible that Calcutta itself may at that period have been not
for distant from the mouth, or one of the mouths, of the Ganges. Ac
cording to the Mosaic account, or rather the ecclesiastical interprets,
tion of it, the world is not yet 6000 years old. If therefore it has
taken 6000 years to form the Valley and Delta of the Ganges, it may
be assumed that it must have taken 2000 years to form a third of
that deposit. The exact point at which the Ganges flowed into the
ocean at the period of creation is a geological nut, which I would de-
ferentially submit to be cracked by Dr. Buckland, or Mr. Lyell.
Geology, however, has unfortunately proved that the Mosaic chrono-
logy refers to the creation of man, and not to that of the globe. The
age of the latter seems to correspond more nearly with the endless
Yugs of the Vedas and Poordns, than with the more limited traditions
of the Pentateuch and Talmud.

Although Renneirs estimate of the Roman mile is open to the above
criticism, we may fall back upon that of D'Anville, a geographer cele-

* This date is taken from Wilkinson's Egypt.

t See Vol. VI, page £36, Journal of Asiatic Society ; also vol. ii, page 6B0,

The rise of the land according to the calculation of Herodotus, would be one foot

and four inches, (1 f. 4 i.) in a century. In 1709 A. D. the favorable height of the

Mile was 2S cubits, (being an increase of 7 cubits, or 10} feet), in about £l62 years,

(1702 -|- 460) or 5 inches and 8-lOths in a century. Taking the mean between

1 f. 4 i. and 5 inches -« viz. 1 1 inches as the average rate per century, and sup-
posing the rise of the Ganges to have been at a similar rate, a period of 38,i8l
years would be required to fill up the 850 feet of sand, and alluvial soil below Cal-
cuttta ; but it is probable that the rise was much more rapid prior to the reign of
Maeris, i. e. 3062 years ago, (900 -|- 1162) than subsequent to that date— at even
« feet to the century however, it would require 17,550 years !

1845.3 ihe River Soane and Site nf Paliboihfa. 153

brftted for an accuracy in details^ which was praised by Sir W. Jones,

and which even Oibbon* said he was afraid to dispute. Rennell ob.

serves in a note, '' O'Anville is of opinion that Pliny turned the Oreek

8tadia» (of Megasthenes) into Roman miles at the rate of eight to a mile»

and thus accounts for their shortness. D'Anville, who has gone deeply

into the subject, thinks that it requires 1050 Itinerary stadia to make

a degree of the great circle." Now a degree of the great circle being

equal to 60 geographical, or 69 English miles, 425 of Pliny's miles,

or 3400 Oreek stadia^ would be equivalent to 223 E. miles, which

is only four miles less than the real distance from Allahabad to the

Golah at Patna, as given in the Polymetrical Tables of the General

Post Office. So that if the estimate of the Greek stadia given by the

most accurate of geographers be adopted, the difficulty of reconciling the

distance given by Pliny with the site of Patna is altogether removed.

Beyond the evidence of history and tradition, however, little or

nothing remains to indicate Patna to have been the site of an ancient city.

It is probable that a great part of the original city has been swallow.

ed up by the Ganges. In a map lately constructed by the Revenue

Survey, and from decrees of the Civil Courts, it appears that the main

stream of the Ganges even so late as the Permanent Settlement^ or

1790 A. D. was several miles north of its present course. The river is

gradually wearing away the southern bank^ and the modern city is

likely to share the fate of the old.

In point of extent the modem town, including the suburbs, does not
&11 very far short of that of the ancient. Megasthenes states Palibothra
to have been ten milest long, and about two broad, surrounded with a
ditch^ and walls adorned with 570 towers and gates. The length of
the present town from the Golah at Patna on the west to Jafir Khan's
garden on the east, is about the same length ; but the breadth cannot
exceed a mile. It is just possible that the *' Sotah," or bed of a small
stream, exhibited in the map as running south of Patna from PhooU
waree to near Futwa, may have been the ancient ditch of Palibothra^
S8 it does not appear to have been ever the main stream of the Soane.
Of the gates and towers no traces remain. There are, however, some
high artificial eminences composed of brick. work, called *^ Punj
Poh&ree,'' or five hills, about a mile or two south of the town, which
may be the ruins of bastions or towers. There are likewise some

* Miscellaneoas Works.

t Calculated on D'Anville's principle, it would be much less.

154 Memorandum on ihe Ancient bed of the River SoaneSjcc- [No. 158.

other singular elevations in different parts of the town or neighbour-
hood, evidently composed of the ruins of buildings of considerable
magnitude. One near the Durgah of Shah Arzan, another at Bikna
Puh&ree> on which a large European house has been built, another
near what is called the Dutchman's house> and a fourth at Chujjoo
Bagh> on which the house I reside in is situated. It must be admitted,
however, that tradition does not agree in assigning such an origin to
these elevations. As the southern bank of the Ganges gradually gives
way to the undermining power of the current, several old brick wells,
long since closed and built over^ have been discovered, and in the
rainy season many ancient Hindoo coins gold, silver, and copper are
found. Gold ones of the .Gupta or Canoge series, and Boodhist coins
of cast silver and copper are the most common-
It is not, however^ a matter of surprize^ that the waves of time
should have obliterated what those of the Ganges may have spared,
in a country where the destructive power of vegetation is so great and
rapid.

In 2000 years how many cities, empires, and even religions, have
passed away ! Of Babylon, Susa, Ecbatana, and Persepolis, cities
cotemporary with Palibothra, scarce a stone remains to mark their
site to the puzzled antiquary. *' Assyria, Greece, Rome^ Carthage,
what are they."*

The empires of Montezuma and the Incas have likewise risen,
flourished^ and disappeared within that period. The religions of Zo-
roaster, Osiris, Jupiter, and Odin, have been superseded by that of
the Crescent or of the Cross. When cotemporary cities have perished,
and cotemporary empires have decayed, there is little room for won-
der that nothing should remain of the capital of Chundragupta save
a few mouldering heaps.

Tempus edax rerum ! tuque in vidiosa Vetust&s,
Omnia destraitis ; vitiataque dentibus sevi,
Paulatim, lent^, consumitis omnia morte.

Omnivorous Time ! and tboa invidious Age,
Consumest all things in thy wanton rage.
Worn, day by day, by Time's remorseless teeth,
Man and bis works at last must sink in death.

£. C. R.
* Childe Harold, Canto 4.

JOURNAL

OP THB

ASIATIC SOCIETY

Translation of the Toofut ul Kiram^ a History of Sindh. By,

Lieut. PosTANS.

, [Continued from page 99.]

Account of the circumstances attending the death of Mahamed

Bin Cassim.

Thug, when the two daughters of Dahir» Purmul Deo and Surt^'
Deo, who were on the howdah with him, arrived for the service of the
Khalif, he saw that tbey were extremely beautifal, and appropriated
them to himself; still, in order to dissipate their shyness and distress,
he committed them to the care of the keepers of the Harem, and after
a time called one to his bed. Now since the death of their father had
sorely afflicted them, she said, '^ I am not for the Kbalif, for Maha-
med Cassim took me to himself for three nights." The Khalif on hear-
ing this was enraged, and at once wrote an order himself and despatched
it, to the intent, that on seeing that order, he, Mahamed Cassim, should
cause himself to be enclosed in a raw hide and sent to the presence
of the Khalif. This order was received by Mahamed Bin Cassim
at Yassur : safficient was it that the order was from the potentate, to
which there is bat obedience ; he was sewed up in a raw hide and sent
off: on the third day he died ; they put his body in a box and took it
to the Khalif, who immediately called the two women and said, " See
how absolute is my power." They laughed and said, '* In the accom-
plishment of the wish of the Khalif there is no wavering; but in
justice and wisdom there is neither foresight or discrimination, seeing
the man, who treated us as if he were our father and brother, on our

No. 159, No. 75, New Sbribs. 2 a

156 Translation of the Toofut ul Kiram, [No. 159.

simple words, loQging as we do for revenge, without enquiry into the
truth or falsehood, has been destroyed : our wish was retribution for oar
father's death. Mahamed Ccusim moreover was deficient in wisdom ; he
should according to the order have started on his journey, but have
delivered himself from the hide after one day, and have arrived alive :
we have undoubtedly told the truth in our evidence, and we resign
our lives." The Khalif was ashamed, and ordered them to be tied to
the foot of an elephant and dragged through the bazar and burnt.

T/ie Khalif 8 of Bini Oomai and their Deputies.

After the conquest of Sindh by Bin Cassim, according to what has
Deputies of the Kha- been related, Harraf Bin Keiss Bin Bawah Assadi
Jifs of Bini Oomai, remained in charge of Alor, and the individuals before
mentioned were governors as appointed. After them the people of Hind
became rebellious, and from the confines of Dibalpur to the sea, remain-
ed in the hands of the Moslem deputies. After a time Abu Hifaz, Bin
Kutibah^ Bin MussiUm arrived from Bijjaj^ and punished those who
had not embraced the true faith : the (Hindoo) deputies being help-
less, fled to Khorassan. About that time Jamin Bin Zeid also arrived
from Hijjaj, and on the part of the Khalif Suliman Amin Bin Abdul'
lah, openly obtained the government of Sindh ; and in the year 100 H.
Oomur Bin Abdul Aziz^ Bin Umeer^ Bin Muslim came to conquer
Hind. He took some of those countries, and made some of the tribes of
Sindh Mahomedans ; but in the time of the Khalif Hashamy they se-
ceded. StUitnan Bin Hashan^ as is related in the first vol., fled from
the army of Mirwan and came to Sindh, where, intent on rebellion, he
remained until Saffah obtained the Khalifat ; he then^ embraced the
service of Saffah : also Abul Khitab arrived on the part of Mirwan.

The period of the government of the deputies of the Khalifs of Bi^i

Oomai extended from the year 93 until 133 H. All
The authority of the this period from the commencement of the 93 H.

Khalifs of Bini Oomai -i . i a* ik^

over Sindh extends to until the period mentioned, is 40 years. Since toe
periodof 40 years?' * government of the deputies of the Khalifat of the

house of Bini Oomai was as described, now it is neces-
sary to relate the government of the deputies of Bini Abbas, Still there
are a few circumstances connected with this period which mast be
related, and which 1 shall compress as briefly as may be.

18^5.] a History of Sindh. 1 57

Let it DOt be concealed, that when the deputies of Bint Oamai took
Smdh, some of the dependencies of the country were yet disobedient
to the great authority (of the Khalifs.) In short, JDihi Rahi, descended
from the RahiSt was in the city of Dihir a place of renown, and Bim*
hul Jiahi was at Bhunbur, which city he had founded.

Account of the Deputies of the Khalifs of Bini Abbas,
When Setjffahy who was the first Khalif of Bini Ahbas^ came to the
UmMie, in the year 133 H., he sent a force under Ddud Bin Alii, and
the government of Sindh was taken from the deputies of Bini Oomai,
After four years Abu Jaffir Mimsur Abbasiy ordered and prepared an
army for Sindh and Hindoostan : in the time of Harun Reshid, Moussa
the brother of Fazii came from Mecca to the governorship of Sindh,
bat, giving away all he obtained, he was dismissed. Alii Bin Isa, Bin
Haman came in his place ; at this time the fort of Tibm^ an impreg-
nable fortification near Sahurah and the city of Bahar, and other
places- in that vicinity, westerly from Sindh, were in the hands of
Sheikh Abdul Tihrah, whose tomb with those of other holy men (mar-
tyrs) are still places of pilgrimage to true believers, and on the top of
tbe dome it is written, that he died in the year 171 H. The city of
Bhunbur having been destroyed, they proceeded elsewhere. At length
Abul Abbas arrived as governor of Sindh, and remained there a long
period. In the time of Mammon, some further portions of Hind were
added to the possessions of their deputies. After him, other individuals
were appointed from Bagdad to the governorship of Sindh, until during
the Khalifat of Abdul Kadir Billah al Abbasy when Abmed Assaky Bin
Ahmukhtidar Allah, was appointed. In the middle of the month

Ramzan 416 H., Sultan Mahmdd Ghazi arrived at

416H., 1025A. D. _, , _ ^l . ^ .^ . , ^ .

Mahmtid of Ghuzni Multan from Ghuzui, and havmg captured Ooch,
Sindh, aSid teminates drove out the deputies of Abdul Kadir from the coun-
t^^TAhU^ah^ *'y of Sindh. The period of the government of the de-
283 yean. puties of the Khalifs of Bini Abbas, from the com-

mencement before mentioned is altogether 283 years.

The tribe of Sumrah had 200 years previously taken possession of
oertain portions of Sindh, but as they had paid tax and tribute, and had

Tribe of S m ah to be ^®®° obedient to the Moslem governors, no mention
dwcribcd hereafter, has been made of them : but. after having related the

158 Translation of the Toofut ul Kiram, [No. 159.

dynasty of the deputies of Ghazni, and considered the emperors of
Delhi, we will relate the rule of some of the above-mentioned tribe.

List qf the Deputies of Ghuzni, and narrative of the Emperor of Delhi.
As before mentioned, Abdul Rizak the minister of Sultan Mahmud
Ghuzni deputies. Ghazi^ in the year 4 1 7 H. having taken Bukkur, arriv-
ed at Sewistan and Tattah, and the governors of Bini Oomai and Bini
Abbas had not remained there, except a small portion who had formed
connections, and were encumbered with families : they were men of note,
and received stipends from the government.
From amongst these were 18 families, the heads of generations.

Distinguished heads ®"®^y ' ^^® Sukufis, a family of Cazis originally of
of families. Bakar and Alor, from the descendants of Mussa

Bin Yahtib, Bin Tahi^ Bin Mahamed^ Bin Shiban^ Bin Ushman Su-
hufi who, with the Cazi Ismail^ Bin Alii, Bin Mussa^ Bin Tahi
were the first relators of the conquest of Sindh in Arabia, and their
great grand-father Mussa Bin Yakub^ was confirmed by Bin Cassim as
Cazi of Alor after the conquest of that fort : and the " Tamims** and
*' Hal Mogheirahst^* (which term became slightly changed to Hal
Tuhim and Ibn Soriaht) and the Abbasis and Sadihs^ Farukians and
Ooshmamansy who up to this present time are to be found in all Sindh;
and the Phonwarans descended from^^Tam and the tribe of Mungi^
a branch of the Tamins, the family of Jubiriah^ of whom Sheihh Tahi
in the account of HuUani will be mentioned ; and the family of Bini
Assadf of whom is Sheikh Mirtaht will be alluded to at Futtipur ; the
family of Hal Hutbeh of whom is Cazi Bahran, he also will be referred
to at Futtipur ; the family of Bentoabi Sufian^ of whom are some dur-
veshes of Rahib; the family of the tribe oiBajur^ governor ne^xJehanker^
the descendants of Jaremah Jusari^ of whom is the tribe of Sapiah,
who are the possessors of Sewistan ; and the Jhutts and Beloochees
are originally from Harun Mihrani, and it will be more convenient
to relate the genealogies of the Beloochees and Jhutts without delay.

Origin of the Jhutts and Beloochees*
Mahamed Bin Harun Mikrani^ who has been mentioned in the ac-
count of the officers of Mikran, and who came with Mahamed Cassim
at the time of the conquest of Sindh as far as Armanbihahf where he

1M50 o, Hilary of Sindh. 159

died and was buried, is the son of Mahomed Haban^ Bin Abdul Rahim^
Bin Hamzeh^ Bin Abdul Mathab. Once, when Meer Hamziih (may God
approve him) went out to bant in a country far in the desert, he became
alone there, and, according to the favour of the Most High who is always
propitious to good and great men, a good genius or fairy appeared to
keep him company; by the Divine will he embraced her, and she be-
came hidden from his sight : afterwards she brought forth Abdul Rahim.
In shorty Mahamed Bin Harun had fifty-two sons by seven wives.
Thus, one: Isa, Mikran, HiJaZj ScUahy Bikram^ Rustum, and Jiildh
from one mother named Hamira ; Zumaly Mazid^ Radah^ BuhkU^
Shahbab, Nizam, Julal^ Marid, from one mother named Bamiri ; Roe"
dmy Mtusoj Nokit Noh, Mundah^ Raza^al-diny from Miriam ; JuUal
from HiMshiai ; Adam^ Kumal, Ahmedy Humad, Hamud Said^ Masud^
from Musma, ; Mudi, Shir, Koh, Babund, Karhy Nowar al din, HuS'
son, Hasein, SuiimaUy and Abrahim, from Faiimah ; Alim, AUi, Tir-
huh, Buhpad, Teghzan, Mubariky TUrk, Taliah, Arbi, Shiraz, Taj-
al-deen, Takht, Gulistan, and Biirk from Khwah. When, according to
the order of Hijjaj as related, Mikran was cleared, that land with
others was appointed into two shares, and one share was given to the
descendants of JaUal al deen, and they came to Sowah and Kich,* and
their descendants are to this day scattered in great numbers all over
Sindh. The tribe of Lodah also called LuUan, have their origin thus.
The illustrious SuHman sent familiar spirits in the shape of men to
purchase slave girls at Riim. On their return, one of these had connec-
tion with one of the women; Suliman gave her to him, and a boy was
bom : afterwards his descendants mixed with the Arabs, and came to
Sindh at the time of the conquest, or before. *

Account of the origin of the tribe of Sumah.
The narrative of these people, as is necessary, will be fully told
in the course of this history. Sam, who is said to have been
the son of Amur, the son of Sham Bin Abal Suhvb, and again the son
of Umar Bin Akrameh Bin Alu Jahul, or the son of Akrameh Bin
Abul Hisam, Bin Abbu Jihil: there are, however, various reports, of
which the following is the most consistent. That they were de-

* Kich Mikran.

160 Translation of the Too/ut til Kiram, [No. 159.

scended from Jamshid^ whence they took the title of " Jam,'* with
which they were distinguished ; or else they were from Sam the son of
Noh : he had four sons, the first Budha, (his descendants were Budht
Sodahy Sittah, Ahkily Ootah^ Amiah^ Hazir, and in short there were
sixteen sons generally known by the title of Rathur^) and the second
Sankahf the third Hami, and the fourth Bhakirat This Bhakirat
had a son called DusruL Now Dusrut had three wives, one named
Kita^ the second Kuliah, and the third Simah: from Kila there
were two sons, one named J?am, the other Lukhman ; from Kuliah one
son Barat ; and from Simah one son Chutur Kim, To Sunkah the
son of Sam there were also descendants, and also to Hami ; they
were called Judur. Barat the son of Dusrut had descendants call-
ed Purhur, Jansipar^ Gorifah, and Rahih Chatar Khan ; the son
of Dasrat had descendants, called Charah, Lukhman; son of Das-
rat had no children ; Ram had one son, who had a son called Taw-
akitSf who had a son called Tatal^ who had a son called Nirkanat; his
son was called Kin^ (the city of Kin'* is so called after him.) The son
of Kin was entitled Samhat Rajah, Sambat Rajah had four children :

1, Sam Bir Kirarah^ also called Sham; 2, Nihrat ; 3, Dakhan;
and 4, Madah. In short, Sam the son of Sambat Rajah, had a son
called Jadim, Jadim had four sons : first. Habit whose descendants are
the Sumahs of Sindh ; the second Kajbit, whose descendants, are tfae
Chughdah; the third Biihobuty his descendants are the tribe of Bhati;
the fourth Chira Sumah, of his descendants is Rahi Diach^ the goiter-
nor oiKumal^ a fort situated in the land of Soorteh: he became a martyr,
and the tale of the love and devotion of his wife is well known. BabtC
the son of Jadim, the son of Sam, the son of ^Sambat Rajah, had a son
named Rubdari ; he had a son called Mijat, he had Nootyah, he had
Udka, he had Vdheh, he had Lakyah, and he had Lakah. Lakah was a
sovereign, and mauied into the Bhati tribe : he had four sons. Thus,
first, Udhuh without children ; Udhuh, which was his place of abodes
is called after him. Second, Mahir, who had four sons: 1, Sitah;

2, Waditar Patheria ; 3, Wirhah, without children ; and 4, Sand,
also without children. They say that the above-mentioned Lakah mar-

* " Kin and Kashmir," as they are called in Sindh, on the southern confines of the
Seikh territories ; they formerly belonged to Sindh, but now belong to Multan and
the Seikh government.

1M5.] a History of Sindh. 1 6 1

ried again in his old age, and had four sons. Firat, Oamur ; second^
Jeyur^ (his descendants are Babrahs, Dukemehtf Kuiah ;) third, Phul
Ltthah*, (the Philani are known as his descendants ;) fourth, Munayah,
OomuT the son of Lakah had a son named Lakah ; he had a son named
Sumah, who had two sons, one named Kakak, and the other Jikrah*
Kakah became a ruler, (the place called Kakah is so called after him ;)
he had two sons, one Palli and the other Raydin^ from the descen-
dants of PalU. Musruk Sumak became a governor, and Raydin had nine
80D8. Thus : first, SunuU^ the Samifahs are his descendants; second, No'
lysr, all the Nauts are his descendants; third, Lakahf his descendants are
Lanjar^ Mukdoom^ Sihar^ Lanjar, (God's mercy be on him) of whom
mention will be made in the account of the Sheikhs, belongs to him ;
fourth, il^roA, whose descendants BreDaodJ^ZahirNayaheindFalNayah;
fifth, Nayah; sixth, Chamir; seventh, Munhayah; eighth, Koriah (the
descendants of these three last tribes are the Mundrah;) ninth, Palli who
vas a chief and had two sons, first Oodahf whose descendants are the Ba-
riah Oodejah (also called Gordrah Puirahf) and second Saud^ who was
the chief of the tribe. Saud the son of Palli had seven sons : first, Kakah^
whose descendants are the Kakefah Puirah ; second, Jarah, who had de-
toeodants the Jahi^'ahs; third, Waderah; fourth *** ; fifth, Hingarak^ his
descendants are Hodejah, Juksia, Wurha and Hingqfa; sixth, Diraht
his descendants are Dirah Sumah in Cutch ; seventh, Jam ffoti, who
htdfive sons; first, Halahf his descendants are known as the Halah; se-
cond, Hingorah^ his descendants are Bumian^ Ruhuriah, Hingorak, and
they founded the places thus mentioned ; third, Sahif his descendants
are Sahir Sumah ; fourth, Chaiidriahf his descendants are well known as
Nihirah ; fifth, Jam Hapur^ who had two sons ; first JRaqfah, second Jam
Jiomir, who had a son Kirraha ; he had three sons : first, Samdh^ whose
descendants are Raoma^ Lakayatsnd Jekrah; second, Sumrah, who had
DO children ; third, Lakah Jan, who had one son ELalah, who had a son
called Lekah ; after whose death he had another called Brekanah^ he took
the name of his father. Lakah Bin Kahdhy the brother of Nahah, had
tvelve sons : thus, first, Jam Jumur^ from whom are descendants the
Svmahs^ the rulers of Sindh residents of Sanuir^ who will be mentioned

* '* Laka Philani/' an heroic R^jpdt prince, well known in Cutch traditions; the
Jhareejahs of Cutch date their origin from the Sumahs of Sind, (see Mrs. Foetans's
'' Cutch/' or the traditions of " Laka PhUani."

162 Translation of the Too/ut ul Kiram, [No. 159.

in their proper places ; second, Oomur, who ruled ia Buhriah^ he had
no children ; third, PMx^ whose descendants are Palli Sumah ; fourth,
Kahahf his descendants are Sodiari Sumah; fifth, Hoteh^ his descen-
dants are Sahih Sumah, HoUii Sumah, and Sehawutieh Sumah; sixth,
Jeysur (or Jeyur,) whose descendants are the fieyah Parya ; seventh,
Mangur, without children; eighth, Abrah, whose descendants are the tribe
oiAhrejahs; ninth, HingorahKonur ; tenth, SuUan; eleventh^ Rayidam;
twelfth, Lakah. In short, Hingorah fConur had three sons: first, Deynar;
second, Minagah ; and third, Miradeyah* Deysur had five sons ; Kah,
Halah, Rukun^ Hingorah^ and Jonah. Jonah the son of Lahah, above-
mentioned, had five sons : first, Khoreah; second, Ti^iah; third, Abrah;
fourth, Beioch; fifth, Babniah. The account of the descendants of Bab*
niahf who ruled in Sindh, will be mentioned in the dynasty of iheSumahs.
Let it not be concealed, that according to what has been related,

the descendants of Sumah are to this day the prlo-

Sumahs are the prin-
cipal inhabitants of cipal natives of the countries of Sindh and Guzerat,

(i?e. Cwtch.) "^®'*^ and Sindh was previously cultivated and inhabited

by them. Besides this tribe, the Jhutts and Beloo*

chees and the descendants of others as alluded to, were from the older

time inhabitants of that country : others might also be enumerated in

addition to these, but since it was not intended in this work to make

other than an abbreviated account, and to adhere to a few events

which are most interesting, if any one should require further partiea*

lars let him look for them (elsewhere.) In short, after the deputies of

Sultans of Delhi. Sultan MahmUd, those of Sultan Masudf Sultan

Modud, then of Sultan Mahdud, then of Sultan Kuiidf Aldin^ then the

deputies of Sultan Aram Shah, all of whom are mentioned in the l>t

and 2nd vols, as connected with Sindh, came to that country, sod

during the time of the Sultanut, it was divided into four portions $

Multan, Ooch, and the whole of Sindh fell to the government of \

Nasir Uldin Sibajah, and at that period seven Rajahs in Sindh from i

Seven Rajahs pay ^^® P^*^®* ^^^^^ ^^^^ ^ mentioned, paid tribate
tribute to Multan. to Multan. First, Rana Bhansur Satah Rathur, resid-
ing at Zihrah, belonging to DirpUah; second, Rana Sami^ son oiDui^
Kirecheh of the tribe of Sumah, belonging to Turk in the territories
of Rupah ; third, Jeysar, son of Hijah Machee Solanki, inhabiunt of
Maunklan ; fourth, Wahtjahi son of Panm Chunm, belonging to Dir^^

1845] a Hiitorsf of SindA. 1 63

Siwcy fifth ; ChunuHf son of Dehiuk, of the tribe of Chund, inhabitaDt
of Bukkiii ; sixth, Z^oAi son of Durya^ inhabitant of Julan (viz. Hami
Kot) ; seventh, Jiswad Dirhan Agrahy inhabitant of Min Tvhar^ be-
looging to Bhanirwah, In short, when Lahore was taken by the
depaties of TaZ'tU-din Yelduz, the prince Nasir-ul-din Kibq^'ih reiired
to Moitan, and at the end of the year 623 H., Mulk Khan Khiizye and

his - followers took possession of the town of Se-

623 H. Malk Khan . o , r, . i . . . *t.

KhiiiyeukesSewia- wistan. Sultan /inmti^ sent his minister iVtzam-«/-

MtUky Mahamed Bin Assad^ to besiege Ooeh, and he
bimself proceeded to Delhi. Nizam- ul- Mulk in the year 625 H., took
Ooch by negotiation, and proceeded towards Bukkor; Nasir^vl-din
fled and died, Sultan Shums^ul^Un became master of Sindh. ./Voor
vl'din Mahamed in the year 630 H. was governor of Sindh ; and in 633
Saltan liHmus died, and Masmd Shah was his heir. In the con*
fiision of events, a Moghul army crossed the river of Sindh and besieged
Ooch ; but, being defeated by Sultan Mussud, fled to Khorassan. Sultan
Mumid sent Mulk JuUah'Ul-din in the place of Noor-ul-din as go«
vmior of Sindh, and at this time Masir-ul-din Mahamed^ uncle of iSti/-
tea Massudf became heir to the throne and crown, and in the year 640

649 H. Sultan Mas- ^^^°K passed through Lahore, Multan, Ooch and
»wi„g™. Sind to the whole of Sindh, he gave that country to Mulk

MuIkSunjur. . ' d j

Swyur and returned ; and in the beginning of the
year 663, Sultan Ghias-ul-din succeeded to the throne of Delhi, and

663 H Sultan Ghias- ^^® '^® government of Lahore, Multan and Sindh

Bl-din succeeds to to his SOU ^ti^» Mahamed^ and after three years he

the Delhi throne. ^ ^

returned to the service of his father at Delhii and

retorned again after a year. In the year 683 H., SuUan Mahamed was

killed by the troops of Jenghiz Khan^ and his son Key Kosun succeeded

kim. Sultan Julal'ul'din KhUfy^ in the year 693 H. arrived at Lahore,

uid gave Multan and Ooch in charge to his son Arkuli Khan, and

NtunU Khan remained to govern Sindh. In short, in the year 695 *H.,

Sultan HuUaw'ul'din sent his brother Shah Khan to drive out

AfhuH Khan ; but Nusrut Khan^ as formerly, with a force of 10,000

retained possession of Multan, Ooch, Bukkur, Sewistan and Jattah. In

the beginning of the year 697 H., there was a report of the march of a

Vogbnl force from Seeistan to Sewistan, and it (Sewistan) was captured.

^utrui Khan released himself. At the close of the rule of the Sultan

2 B

^ I

164 Translation of the Too/ut 11/ Kiramy [No. 159*

Hillaw'ul'din, Ghazi Mulh was sent with 10,000 Sowars to Dibalpar
to drive out the Moghnls of Jenghix Khan. Multao, Ooch, and Sindh
were made over to him as a jahgir, but in the revolution of events
KosiiD Khan usurped the throne from his father. Ghazi Mulh taking
the army of Multan, Ooch and Sindh, overthrew Kos^ Khan and took
the throne, and he was styled Sultan Ghias^tU^din. At this time the

The tribe of Sum- ™®" ®^ Sumrah came forth and took possession of
rahukepoweMioDof Jattah. Snliwik Ohias-ul-din Bent Mulh Jt^'-ul-din la

MuUan, Kwajeh Khatria to Bukkor, and Mulh Hale*
shir to Sewistan. After a time when Mulk Kush'-hoo-Khan became re*
bellious in Multan, Sultan Mahamed Shah, the son of Sultan Ghtas*
id^din^ in the year 723 H., came to Multan and subdued him; then
having placed confidential servants at Bukkur and Sewistan, he returned.

751 n.JaghiOhul- In the year 751 H., Jaghi GhuUam having arrived
lam invades Sindh. at Jattah from Gujrat, Each, and other placet^
pitched at Jahir on the edge of the river ; but being annoyed with fever,
he marched from thence and came to Kandul^ where he recovered, and
returned to Jattah ; from which he remained and surrounded Jattah on
four sides, but he died of the same complaint as above-naentioned.
Sultan Feiroz Shah then possessed the throne. Jaghi was at Jattah,

The s h d ^^^ hearing of his death he attacked the men of
JharUahs defeat Fei- Sumrah. the Jharitohs and Sumahs, and was defeated.

roz Shah at Jattah. , , _ , . - « - #

The Sultan in the beginning of the month of Safar ox
the above year, marched from the neighbourhood of Jattah on the
river Sankrah; he directed a fort to be built Ami Nasur remained
there with 1000 horse ; he built a city called Nusurpur, and he ap-
pointed ilf t^ Bihramy chief magistrate in those districts ; he built M'
rjampare^ and Mulh AlHshir and Mulh JaJ Ka/uri were left at Sewis*
tan as governors. He then proceeded to Bukkur. Mulh Kuhnahda^
and Mulh Ahadui Aziz were appointed Naib and Dewan, with a partf
of trusty men as guardians of the fort; and Mulh Kuhu^ul^n had
the title conferred on lum of Ihkias Jam^ and was made governor of all
the country of Sindh. The Sultan then returned to Delhi. After this»
in the year 773 H. having determined to take Nuggur Kot, he came (0
773 H Sulun Fei- ^^^^^ » ^^^ Kheir-ul-din, the governorof Jattah^de-
roi Shah comas again fended himself in the fort, surrounded by water, ani

to Jattah. ' J 1^

the Sultan by reason of the want of grain and the

1M5.] a Hisiary 0/ Sindh. 165

•bandanee of musqaitoet^ retorned to Jattah. Jam Kkiir-ut'din being
promiied pardoo, proferred his service ; he took with him all the su-
meendara to Delhi, bat when they reached Sehwan it was discovered
tlitt the Jam meditated escape ; he was chained and imprisoned. After
a tune Jam Junur^ son of Jam Kkgir^ul'difh was invested with the
governorship of Jattab, and in the year 790 H. Feiroz Shah died, and

790 H Death of ^^^^^^ Jughtuk Shah succeeded him ; after him, Sol-
FeiioiShah. tan Ahu Bvkur^ then Sultan Mahomed Shah^ then

Saltan Sikundur Shah^ then Sultan Nanr'nl-din^ came to the throne
of Delhi : be sent Saxang Khan to take possession of Dibalpnr, Multan
and Sindh ; and in the year 800 H., Mirza Pir Maham^ Neeah, a noble
ol TimurSf crossed the river of Sindh, and invested the fort of Ooch.
Muik Allh who on the part of Sazang Khan was in that place, resisted
for a month. Sazang Khan sent JaJ-ul^n Khan with 4000 men to as-
Mt him ; he released Mirza Pir Mahomed^ and defeated Sazang Khan :
be invested Multan^ and after six months Sazang Khan became obe*
^Dt and delivered up Multan. At this time Sahib Karan in the year
801 H. descended on Multan : from this period the Sultans of Delhi lost

801 H Th ower of ^^°^^°^^ ^ Siudh over the governors in that country,
tke Delhi sovereign* who themselves obtained power.

m Sindh decline.

The Tribe of Sumrah.

Some of this tribe ruled in parts of Sindb, as has been mentioned,

previous to this. Thus the whole time that their

authority extended was 550 years ; and therefore,

after the descendants of Jamim^ the last of the deputies of Bini AbbaSf

leeiog their power, the narrators of history began to make mention

of them; at that time, as will be mentioned, the government of ^indh

psued to the Ghoris and Ghuxniris^ and this tribe of itself became

powerful, as will be related*

And now the origini of this tribe is not clearly traced ; but they

^ . . . „ , were evidently old inhabitants of the country, and

Origin of Sumrahs ** ''

obMuiv. they are apparently connected with the descendants

of <* SindhJ* In short, according to what has been previously related,
wben in the year of 720 H. Ghazi Mulk collected the army of Sindh

166 Translation of (he Too/ui ul Kiram, [No. 159.

and Maltan, and took it to Delhi and subdued Khoirow Khan^ he soo-
eeeded to the throne ; and Sultan Ghias-uLdin, Jughhik Shah was his

How they acquir- ^^^^ ' ^^^^** ^® ^^ occupied with afiairs in thtt
ed power. quarter, the men of S(imrah collected from the viei*

nity of Jhuri and placed a man named Surmah in the governor's seat,
and, having possessed the country, he espoused the daughter of a
zumeendar named Saud^ who was of power and rank :. by her he had a
son, named Bangur Khan. Sumrah died, Bangur succeeded him, and
his son Dodah took possession of the country to Nusurpur ; he bad a
son named Sungar, a minor, and the government of the country came
to Jaree^ daughter of Dodah ; and when Sungur became of years he
succeeded to the governorship, and proceeded towards Cutch and subdued
the country to the river Manak. As he had no children, his wife Hei-
mus' brother was appointed governor of the city of Toor and Thuiri.
After a short time Dodah Sumrah^ who was governor in the fort of
Dakahy collected his tribe from the surrounding country, and extirpa-
ted the brother of Heimus, At this time Dodu and Phaiu, descendants
of Dodah, came out with a large fprce, and gave him the chieftainship;
he ruled for some time, and after him Kheira took possession of the
country ; then Armil succeeded to it, but being an oppressor, the men
of Sumah collected and killed him ; this was in the year 752 H. : but the
beginning and end of this tribe as rulers is by others otherwise related.
Thus in the Muniukhib al Juwarihh, when Sultan Ahdul Rashid, Bin
Sultan Mahamed Ghazi, succeeded to the throne, his imbecility caused
the inhabitants of Sindh to be rebellious, and in the year 445 H. the men

of Sumrah collected near Thurri, and placed a per-

445 H. The Sum- son named Sumrah in the governship. Sumrah pes-

rafis placed Sumrah j . . i *. r i . j j u j ^-

on the musnud. sessed his elevation for a long period, and had a son

SumrahT ^^ ° Bangur by the daughter of a zumeendar named Sand,

and died. Bangur Bin Sumrah ruled for 15 years; in
the year 461 H. he died : after him Dodah Bin Bangur governed for
24 years, and in the H. 485 he died. After him Sungar for 15 years ;
after him HufifZ6 years ; after him Oomur 40 years; Dodah the se-
cond 14 ye&rs; Phutto 33 years; Khey surah Dodah third 14 years;
JaAt 24 years ; Chami 18 years; Bangur second 15 years; ffafifthe
second 18 years; Dodah the fourth 25 years; Oomur the second 35
years ; Bangur third 10 years : after him Hamir succeeded to the govern*

1845.1 a HUtory of Sindh. 167

The Somahs over- ment, bat being a tyrant, the tribe of SufiMth over-
threw the ^nmroA^. threw him, which will be mentioned in the coarse
of the hLitory of that tribe. Oomur Sumrah founded the fort of
Omur Koii DUu Rahiy son of DUu Rahi before-mentioned^ governor
nHDiluy was a tyrant and given to in&moos practices : to bis tyranny
lad oppression is ascribed the destroction of Alor.

Acomtnt of the destrudioH of the City of Alor.
It was a custom of that unjust tyrant to take half the property of

every merchant who arrived from Hind as duty

tiSdf AlSf tSS^h *^* *"» ^^"^ ^® "^'^^ ^® ^*^®* ®^ **** inhabitants.
^tyranny of DUu A wealthy and influential merchant who had the

title of SeifuUMulk^ and a few other princes
with him dresaed as merchants, but who were on pilgrimage to Mecca,
bang ignorant of that villain's proceedings, entered his capital : the
merchant had with him a beautiful woman named Budeh-al-Jumai ;
at that time the river Mihran ran close to Alor. Hearing of the
beaoty of Budeh^al-Jumal^ Dilu Rahi became anxious to possess her,
and wished to arrest the merchant under the pretence of his intending
to smuggle his goods. The unfortunate merchant for three days tried to
perniade the tyrant, and vented his complaints mightily to the Most
High; and as the supplications of the afflicted are accepted, he was
ifiipired with a dream, that in the morning he should conceal himself,
and talLing a party of stone-cutters famous as Firhad^ and having,
bribed them well, during the following night cut a passage through
the hills for the passage of the river, large enough for a boat, and on
the other side erect a strong embankment. Although both these ap-
peared impossible tasks, yet by the* help of the Almighty they were
accomplished. The merchant with his boats passed safely by that road ;
Ukd the river Mihran, quitting its former passage, took the course
which it now takes. In the morning the people told Dilu Rahi, but all
his efforts to repair the calamity were unavailing against the decree of
&te. The ruin of Alor is dated to have commenced from that day.
They say that Seiful-Mulk with his beloved Budeh-td-Jumal^ when they
returned from the pilgrimage to the Kaabah, arrived and lived in the
coQDtry between Derah Ghazi Khan and Sitpur and died. Budeh'uU
Jtml had two sons, Jah and Chatah; until now her tomb with those of
her two sons, are places of pilgrimage.

168 Translation of the Toofui ul Kiram. {Jtlo. 159.

Account of the decline of the City of Bhunbur^ generally knoum

as Brahmanabad.

They relate, that Dila Rahi after the min of the citj of Alor came to

Legend of the de- ^^® ^•*'®' P^^^ ^ reside ; he had a brother Chotth

dine of Brahmana- Oomrani : in his youth he had been blessed with
bad.

the true belief, so that leaving that city he had stu-
died and learnt the Koran, and performed the duties enjoined by his
religion sedulously. When he returned to the city, his relations pressed
upon him the acceptance of the governorship, but he would not accept
it : some one jokingly observed, ** This Turk has been to the Kaabab,
and married the daughter of a certain Arab/' fiy chance in those his
younger days he became anxious to perform the Haj ; and when he ar-
rived there, he one day saw a woman in a shop occupied in repeating
the Koran : he staid to listen. She asked him, why he staid ? He said,
to hear the Koran. *' If you will teach me to read, I will be your slave.'*
The woman said, '* My instructor is the daughter of a certain person ; if
you will disguise yourself as a woman and come with me, I will take you
to hen** In short, in this way he was taken there, and became occupied in
reading and meditating on the Koran. It appears, that his instractreis
was skilled in astrology : one day the woman came to her, and asked after
the fortune of Choteh in disguise ; she said he would be a governor or
chief. Choteh said, *' Since you know the fortune of others, can yoo tell
any thing of your own T* The girl said, '* You are right ; I shall wed with
some one who is an inhabitant of Sindh.'* They asked her, who it was?
she said to Choteh, *' You are the man." In short, concealment was at
an end ; the girl instructed him after this to go and change his garment^
and to demand her in marriage as she waa destined for him ; she then
communicated the case to her parents, and was shortly afterwards mar-
ried to Choteh. He after a time returned to his own country, and took
his wife, whose name was Fatimah^ with him : when he arrived at the city
of Dilu Rahiy that tyrant had made a practice of seizing newly-married
women, and then releasing them. Choteh tried to dissuade him froo
this, but he would not desist, until one day he heard the praises of
Fatmah. Whilst Chot^ was from home, BUu Rahi came to see her.
Choteh suspected his intentions ; coming quickly home, he took his wife
and left the city, crying out, " This city through the wickedness of iU

1845.3

a Hiitory 6f Sindh.

169

governor will be swallowed up this night ; whoever wishes to escape
firom destmctioD, has now the opportonitj of doing so." Some few be-
lieved him. On the first night the city escaped, in consequence of the
watchfulness of an old woman at her wheel ; on the second, from the
working of an oil mill : at length, on the third night, the whole city with
its inhabitants was swallowed up and destroyed, and one minaret, as an
example and to record the fact, yet remains.*

Account of the men of Sumrah taking possession of Cutch.

This tribe inhabited the country of Cutoh, and the ruler of that

province protected and encouraged them. After a

*"»« fonTf*CutSl ^""^ '^** ^^ ^^^* " ^® ^^ '''^"S *^^ numerous,
lageBd appertaining and we have lived safely under your shadow until we

thereto.

become troublesome : now give us a portion of waste
land, so that we may cultivate it and pay tribute." The Rahi of Cutch
with kindnesa gave them broad lands, and taxed them at 500 carts
of gnss from their crops. The tribe continued to pay the tax, and in
a diorfc time became acquainted with the manners and customs of the
people and governors ; they then determined amongst themselves to
acquire possession of the country. Now at the gate of the fort occupied
by the governor of Cutch, a brahmin and astrologer was placed, and he
penniited all to pass in after he had inquired their business. This tribe
had collected their 600 carts of grass, but in the grass of each cart they
placed two armed men, and one drove the cart into the city ; they say
that when the carts came in, the brahmin said ** there is the smell of
flesh in these carts :" the door* keepers rejected his suspicions, and saids
'* What can there be in grass ?** But some of those present thrust their
spears into the grass. They say, that those in the carts wiped the
blood of their bodies fr<»n the points of the spears, so that they should
not be discovered. So the door-keepers accusing the brahmin of false-
hood, allowed the carts to pass in, and thus the men took possession of
the city, and overthrew the Rahi of Cutch, and became Chiefs of the
country ; until this time the descendants of the Sumrah are, in various

* Brakmanabad must have been situated in the Lar, or delta division of Sindh ; its
site is not fixed.

170 Translation o/Hhe Toojui ui Kiram, [No. 159.

ranksy the governors of Cutch.* In short, when in consequence of
Diltt Rahi^s tyranny, the river Mihran flowed past Sewistan, and those
lands which are now fertile became so ; then the land of the men of
Sumrah becaoae nnproductivey and from inflicting brands and the op.

Pall of the tribe Pf^*^^<>QB ^^ ^^® before-mentioned tribe, complaints
of Sumrahs. were sent to the Sultan, Hiiaw-td-din at Delhi ; he

sent his deputy and chief of his army StUar Kkan^ who coming upon the
men of Sumrah, they sent their families in care of the tribe of Charwu,
which tribe is highly respected by both parties, to Abrah Abranee Sum-
ahi the governor of Cutch, and prepared to oppose the forces of the
Sultan ; these latter came upon them like the storm on a vessel — there
was a great battle. The son of Sumrah, who was the Chief of all the
forces of that tribe, was killed ; the rest could not hold out in the city
of Joor and fled to Cutch. The Sultan's troops pursued their wives and
children to Cutch, and every night when they halted they threw a large
ditch round the camp to prevent a night attack ; and these ditches
are still to be seen, and very deep. When they reached Cutch, Abrah
Sumah attacked the Sumrahs in conjunction with the Sultan's troops.
In short, after the fall of the tribe of Sumrah the tribe of Sumah became

Th s hs oil- ^^^ possessors of those countries, and the city of
tain power. Mahamed Joor was destroyed by the troops of the

Shah; and the city of Samwa was founded, and other new districts cul-
tivated. The country of the city of Joor^ which is situated near the por-
gunnah of Darah^ being through ill fortune abandoned, they founded
another Jooreh as shall be mentioned.

The Dynasty of the Jams of Sumah.

The origin of this tribe is traced to Ahrumeh Bin Hassan, Bin Abi-

List of the Jams Jihul as has been mentioned ; but according to what

of Sumah. jj^g Yieevk related, at the time of the arrival of Maham*

mS^\^''' ""^ ^^ ^'*" ^ ^»« CasHm, this tribe had embraced Islamism,

and the account of it is given by Meer Massum in the
" Chach Nameh.** Thus, the descendants of Ahrumeh about the year
93 H. the whole of this tribe entered the Mahomedan faith, andcoUect-
ed together from distant places in this country, and Ahrumeh at or nesx

* The ruins of Ooomtee in Cutch are in the traditions of that country, the scene of
the exploit of the Sumrahs*

la^.] a Histofy of Sindh. 1 71

that time was a governor, and he is' connected with Sam Bin Oamur^
Bm Hassan^ Bin Abi Lvkdb^ but I do doabt if this if correct
They are also said to be descended from Jam'shid; hence their

title of '* Jamt*' and this appears the most probable*

Reason of their

uking the utle of From Some great man it is related, that they are de-
Sumakot SamaJL scendants of Sam Bin Noh, and thus they are styled

Sumah. God knows.
1. Jam Oonur Bin Babineh. When they were released from oppres-

1. Jtm Oonar. ' aion of the tribe of Sumrahi the men of Sumah, who
befine were cultivators of gardens, collected and styled him ** Jam ;"
tbey constituted him chief and leader. It was thus in the year 762 H.,
asd in a short time this Jam obtained complete power ; Mulk Ruttun
oferthrew the remainder of the Tfirks, who were governors in Sewis-
Uo, and after three years and six months, he died. They relate also,
lliftt Rahah Bin Tamachi his vakeel, brought Ferroz tLnd Alii Shah from
Bokkar to Birkampur^ where they killed him ; and after three days the
■en of Oonur killed Mulk Ferroz.

2. Jam Junur Bin Babineh succeeded his brother ; he crossed over
Jim Junur. from mhati^ and ravaged and pillaged the towns and

▼illa^s ; he left Bukkur in charge of the TUrks ; after this he became
powerful in Sindh, until Sultan HuHaw'ul'din sent his brother Alt/ Khan
to Moltan and its dependencies ; Mulk Taj Kuffuri and Tatar Khan were
*nt to Sindh to oppose Jam Junur ; previous to that Jam Junur had
^M: his reign extended for 13 or 14 years. The Shah's army took Buk*
kor, and looked towards Sehwan. After Jam Junur^

3> Jan Tamaehi Bin Jam Oonur succeeded to the seat of government ;

I Jam Tamachi. the Sultan's army took him and his family prisoners
to Delhi. The tribe of Sumah went to Thurri, and for 15 years, 4. Jam
Bibkeh Bin Jam Oonur ruled over them, according to the ac-
^<^t of Meer Maasum, 5. Jam Kheir-ul-din, son of Tamachi, after
^ death of his father (according to the order of the Shah) came
^ Delhi to Sindh, and took possession. Sultan Mahamed Shaht
V'^ng Taghi Ghuttam as before mentioned, arrived in the vici-
nity of Tattah and died, and Sultan Ferroz succeeded him. He
vent to Delhi; Jam Kheir-uUdin pursued him to the territories
^ ^ ; after some engagements returned, ruled his subjects justly,
^ vn peace. After Kheir-ul^din, his son^ 6. Jam Babineh second> sue-

172 TranslaHan of the Tocfui nl Kiram, ENo. 159.

- , o , . , ceeded him ; Sal tan Ferroz Shah came over, but re-

6. Jam Babmeh

the second. turued, and coming again took him prisoner. After a

Mme when he had experienced his services he conferred the government
of Sindh upon him, and he ruled for 15 years and died : he founded the
city of Samwi ; some say it was founded by Paiyeh Bin Oomury but this is
7. Jam Tamachi wrong. 7. /ant Tamachi second, his brother, succeed*

t e second. ^^^ ^^^ tmIqA peaceably for 13 years: then his sod,

8.^am SuUah-ttl-din. 8. Jam Sullah-ul-din, who after settling his own cotin-
try proceeded to Cutch, and returned victorious : after 11 years^ he died.
In the praise of Sheikh Himar Jumali (may God'«$ mercy be towards
him) it is written, that Jam Junur sent Jam Tamachi and his son Jam
Sullah'Ul'din to Delhi, and they being released by the Sheikh above-
mentioned from Hind returned to Sindh, and overthrew Junutf
taking possession of the country ; first the fathe/, and then the son ruled:
but this differs with the first account of Meer Mussum, But God knows.
9. Jam Nizam-ul-din. In short, after Sullah-ul'din^ Jam Nizam-ul'^
succeeded to the government, and released his uncles.

The Editors at first hesitated to publish this article, fearing that their
readers might consider it almost a reprint, or an amplification of the
former paper by the same author, *' On the early history of Scinde from
the ' Chuch Namah/ &c.," as it in fact at first sight appears to be. Bat
Jjieut. Postans himself in his introduction has^ they conceive, aligned
the best reason why it should not, even at the risk of some repetition, re-
main unpublished, namely, that ** the author of the Too/ut ul Kira»
has collected his materials from the best authorities." And this is of
more importance than it at first sight appears to be, for it implies that
the author, who like our own early chroniclera was living in pait oi^
times of his own history, was like them also near enough to the epocns
embraced in it to exercise his discretion in the choice of the matters to
be chronicled ; and this doubtless founded on research amongst doca-
ments^ and histories, and men now long passed away and numbered ^

J845.3

a History of Sindh*

173

the d^cL Aad the known cuatomB of the Oriental writers of history, of
pahhshing their works only after reading them to circles of the learned,
would have furnished him with many facts, illustrations and conections,
which oral tradition had brought down, and which the stores of written
knowledge then undoijibtedly existing at all the courts of the Kalifat
probably contained.

Onr readers will thus, we hope, agree with them in their judgment that,
assn historical reference, this translation is alike curious and useful, and
tiiey could not have given it otherwise than by printing it entire.

Eds.

Notices and Descriptions of vaHons New or Litde Known species of
BirdSf by Ed. Bltth, Curaior of the Asiatic Hocieiy's Museum*

Nisa&us alboniger, nobisr A smaller species than either of those
of India, measuring about twenty-one inches and a half in leogtb,
wiog thirteen iuches, and tail nine and a half ; tarse three inches :
occipital crest three inches and a quarter. Adult black above, with a
pnrple gloss, the large alars embrowned and distantly banded with black ;
tail black, with a broad light greyish- brown bar, occupying about its third
quarter from the base ; the longer upper tail-coverts have each two
crQss-lMQds of the same ; lower parts pure white, with black mesial
line on throat, large intense black drops on the breast, and the belly,
Teat, lower tail-coverts, tibial plumes, and short tarsal feathers, are
tkrooghoat closely barred black and white : beak black ; and toes wax-
yellow. A younger specimen has the drops fewer and smaller on
tbe breast, an admixture of rufous about the head, several unmoult-
edt brown feathers ampng the wing-coverts, and one unmoulted tail-
feather has three narrowish dark bars, with two more at base closer
and less de6ned« A remarkably handsome species, from Malacca.

Of the four Indian species of this genus, N. aJhoniger approaches
nearest to N, cirratus^ (Ray> Shaw,) v. Falco cristatellusy Tem. ; and
I doubt whether either of these becomes wholly black with age, like

174 Notices and Descriptions of various new [No. 159*

the N. caligatus^ (? Raffles), v. F. niveus ( / ), Tem., v. nipalensiSf
Hodgson*, &c. a change, too, which would seem to obtain in the
Astur melanoleucos figured in Dr. A« Smith's * South African Zoology,'
and which converts the ArchUnUeo lagopus into the Falco SancH
Johannis of the earlier systematists. A South African species of Nisaetut
exists in the *' Aquila coronata^ also figured by Dr. A. Smith,
in which, if that naturalist be correct, the progressive change of
colouring Is from light to dark ; but his alleged adult is so like the
young of the Indian iV. caligatus in its first dress, that I suspect the
changes will be found analogous in the two species. It may be fur-
ther remarked that the Aguikt hellieosay (Daud.) A. Smith, v. Ptdeo
armigevy Shaw, pertains to a very distinct and long- winged form, exem-
plified also by the Indian Aq. Bonelliit v. Nisaeius grandis of Hodgson ;
and in this group, which may be distinguished by the name JSutoltnae'
tus, the adults only exhibit white under parts : whilst in another
aquiline form which may bear the name of ButaetuSf exemplified by
the Falco pennaiuSf 6m., v. Spizaetus milvoides of Jerdon, the
reverse change of colouring obtains, as in the ordinary^ Nisaeti, In-
deed, a further approximation to the latter group is shewn by an
occasional distinct, though slight, enlargement and elongation of
the central occipital feathers, in fine adult examples of Butaetus pen*
natus.

' With respect to Nisaetus cirratus, which is evidently the " Crestrf
Indian Falcon" of Willoughby, I described two specimens in a note to
Vol. XII. p. 306 ; and those I must now consider to be young or
imperfectly mature : for the Society has since received a much finer
adult from Capt. Robt. Shortrede, shot at Midnapore, having a pend-
ent occipital crest consisting of twelve elongated feathers, the font
longest measuring five inches and a half. In other respects, thtf
species is not very strongly characterized apart from N. caiigo^
(apud nos,) but has the belly, flanks, and upper tail-coverts, niacb
darker than usual in the corresponding state of plumage of that
species, the head also being darker, and the throat more streaky;
the dorsal feathers, however, are decidedly of a different form, being

♦ Mr, Hodgson's crested variety of bi$ N, nipalmsis refers to N, cirramf •"**•
called by him 2V. palUdus,^E, B*

J845.3 or tiitte knmn spedei of Birds. 175

much longer and narrower, instead of broad and rounded, a diffiBr-
ence which is strongly marked on the lower interscapnlaries. Size
the same. The splendid occipital crest is deep black, each feather
tipped with white : upper parts empurpled hair-brown, the inter*
seapolaries, scapnlaries and tertiaries, more or less black, and the
secondaries having distant dark bands ; fore*neck and breast
pore white, with a broad dark mesial streak to each feather ; the
belly, yent, flanks, and lower tail-coTerts, dark brown ; and thighs
the same, a little freckled with whitish : tarsal feathers whitish,
mottled with brown: head and neck falvescent-brown, with mesial
dsrk streaks ; the osaal three dark lines on the throat somewhat
ill defined : tail as in iV, caUgalu$^ but less dashed with ashy.

This species seems to be peculiar to the hill districts of India, inha-
biting alike the sub-Himal^an region, and the hilly parts of Central
sad Southern India. Mr. Elliot describes it to ''sit on the tops of the
Ikighest trees, on the watch for hares, pea*fowl, and jungle-fowl, on which
it swoops from its elevated perch. Solitary. Shot in the Rampoor
jangle, inland from Nellore, at the foot of the Eastern Ghats." Mr.
Jerdon and Lord Arthur Hay have since procured specimens from the
same loc^ity. The crest-feathers of this bird are not only longer and
more copious than in either of the other species, but are of a more lax
texture, so that when elevated they curve and droop backward, instead
of remaining up straight. N* ealigatia alone has invariably but a mere
indication of this occipital crest, which is well developed in all the rest.
The other Indian species of NUaitus are N*pulcher, J. A. S. xii, 305 ;
and iVL Kienerii, (de Sparre), v. Spizaetus albogularis, J. A. S, xi, 466.*
The following description was taken from what I conceive to have
been an adult, male of the former, in fully mature plumage. Length of
wing seventeen inches and a half, and of tail thirteen inches. - Old
crest-feather measuring four inches and three-quarters, and new 'Ones
growing, - which would apparently have been considerably longer.
Plumage very Hawk- like : upper parts hair- brown, the exposed ter-
minal portion of the feathers darker and purple* glossed ; wiog-co verts
banded with white ; throat with the usual three «^us, and the under
parts light brown, transversely rayed with whiter the colour darkening
towards the white, and upon the tibial plumes. Received from Cherra*

* The latter has since been received from Darjeeling.

179 Notices and Descripiions o/vano$is new [No. i59«

PooDJee ; and forwarded by the late lamented Dr. Griffith to the Mmen
um of the Honorable Company.

Of the SfdzaUus rufijtinctus^ HcClelland and Horsfield, Pr^e*
ZooL Soe. 1839, p. 153, Mr. Strickland informs me» that "Dr.
Horafield now classes this as a LimnuetuSi and it seems only to differ
in having the lower half of the tarsus bare and scutate.. The beak has
a lateral undulation. Wing ten inches and a quarter^ and tail ei^l
inches. Fourth and fifth quills equal and longest. The breast is
barred brown and white, the bars and their intervals being each about
a quarter of an inch wide, and on the thighs about an eigbth of an
inch wide. The feathers of the breast haye two brown bars on eacL
Tail with four light and four darker ^brawn bars." As thia is one of
the very few Indian Raptores still wanting to the Society's, museum, I
shall also quote the original notice of it, as follows :.— <' Upper part of
the body dark brown, with slight undulations of a deeper tint ; bresst
and throat longitudinally striped with brown : belly and under surfiice
of the wings white, transversely barred with brown : tarse feathwed
to the lower third, each feather marked with fine transverse barsj
the rest shielded : the beak short, much hooked, and sharp : claws and
toes strong and formidable.

*' It inhabits the banks of the Boorampooter and other rivers in
Asf am, where it conceals itself in bushes and grass, along the verge of
the water, seizing such fishes as approach the surface within its reach."
This is also said to be the habit of the large naked-legged Owls which
constitute the genus Ketupa*

Another species wanting to the Society's museum, and also distin-
guished by partially feathered tarse, may be described as

Buieo aquilinus, Hodgson. Length (of apparently a young female)
about twenty- six inches, of which the tail measures eleven and a half;
wipg eighteen inches and a quarter ; beak to forehead (in a straight
line,) one and a half, and two inches and one-eighth to gape ; tarss
three and one-eighth, and plumed anteriorly for an inch and three-
quarters. General colour hair-brown, the feathers edged with dull
rufescent-brown» and their white bases shewing conspicuously about
the nape ; ear-coverts and sides of the head white, more or less dark-
shafted ; throat white, streaked with brown, the fore-neck coloured
like the back, and the breast white for the greater portion of each

M45.] or iHile kn&mn species of Birds. 177

letilier ; the renmiaing termiDal portion mingled pale And dark brown,
i)eing also dark-abafted ; abdominal region and flanka, with the tibial
phunesy dark brown, slightly rafoaa-edged towards the breast, and the
axillaries more vividly rufescent ; fore part of the ander sorfaoe of
tile wing dusky-brown, the primaries freckled while beneath, eicept
beyond their emargination where they become blackish ; tail mottled
with nvEmeroas dark bars, alternate on the two shafts of each feather,
ifpon an albescent ground. Bill dark, aa is apparently the cere: the
toes appear to have been wax-yellow.

This bird might be mi^aken, oo a cursory view, for a variety of B^
mneaeens^ J. A, S, lii, W8, were it net for itshaif-feathered tarsi ; and
lie beak also is larger and more aqoHine, so that ^e name is felici-
tensly bestowed. It is by no means a common species in Nepal, as I
learned from Mr. Hodgson's people, and as might be inferred from the
eiteumstance of Mr. Hodgson requiring the only specimen he had sent^
to take with him to England. Not improbably it may prove identical
with the Pctlco osiaHotis of Latham, described as nearly simUar to the
European Buzzard in the colour of its body and wings, the under parts
•kite with stripes on <the breast, tail silver-grey, the outer feather
marked by obscure bars ; bill bluish-black, and legs yelk>w and half
fiaAeretL Length twenty-two inches. Inhabits China." From the
eircumstanoe of its partially feathered tarse, it might be presumed
that the present species would fall under the division Arekibuieo
sf Brehm, but the general character t>f the bird is not that of the
* Rough-legged Buzzard' of Northern regions.

B. pys/nuBus, nohin. This is the smallest species of true Buzzard
with which I am acquainted. Length eighteen inches, or perhaps
iather more ; of wing thirteen inches, and tail eight inches : bill to
forehead (including cere) fifteen-sixteenths of an inch in a atraiglit
Kne, and an inch and a quarter from point of upper mandible to
gape : tarse two inches, and feathered for nearly its upper third. Colour
of the beak blackish, the cere and base of both mandibles appearing
to have been yellow i legs and toes also yellowish, and talons black.
General hue of the upper parts uniform hair- brown, the scapularies
and coverts slightly tipped with rufous-white : nape white, tipped with
brown, and sli^tly edged laterally with rufous, which colour incr^ses
OB the sides of the neck and tinges tha icings, the greater feathers

178 Notices and Deser^tions of various new [No. 1S9.

of which have their outer webs UDiform brown, and the inner rofesoeot
near the shaft and white towards the margin, being barred with the
same brown as that colouring the outer web ; the coverts are slightly
edged and more largely tipped with dull rufous : the longer upper
tail-coverts are tipped with whitish; and the tail is nearly of ths
same brown with the back, but rather paler and more greyish, its
middle feathers having four broad, dusky bars, the ,last subterminal,
sind a rudiment of a fifth which becomes gradu^ly more obscure
to the outermost : over and beyond thjs «ey^ is loi copspicuous whit-
ish streak: the under par^ are |,iri|fesq^i|t*wliitish, paleat on the
throat and lower tail- coverts, wjiich ane. ^^qut niarkings, except*
ing a slight dusky mesial line^along the throat 9^ the Inreast hat
a broad mesial dusky streak to each feather, assuming on tbe belly and
fianks more or less the appearance of transverse bands, which are unit^
ed along the shafts of the feathers leaving oval intevvals 4>f white, and
the feathers being externally margined ^h pale fulvous : tibial4>lumes
very pale bufi^, or with rufous central mari^ngs ; and fore part .of the'
under surface of the wings similarly colourecj^^the quills albescent nn«
derneath and obscurely barred, but dusky towaj(ds j^eir tips. Inhabits -
the Tenasserim provinces, where pj^cured Jji^ the late Djt. Helljer.

The other Indian species of true Buzzari^re— ^i?. caneseens, HodgsoD,
upon the Himalaya, i^id spreading ^ene^ally over the Upper Provinces
^-J?. lonpipes, Jerdon, found chiefly to the west, but alsq, in sou^faem
India-^and B. ruftventer^ Jerdon, peculiaj^ (so far as known) to the
south. Mr. G. R. Gray, in his catalogue of the Sqgtores ia^ the firi-
tish Museum, evidently mistakes £, canescens for B. iongipes. , From
the description in the Diet Class,, I suspect that the latter species is
the Circus pectoralis, Yieillot, (placed, however* among the * Buses^,
or Buzzards, not among the * Busards,* or Harriers,) in, which case it
must rank as Buteo pectorcdis ; but Mr. Jerdon, judging from another
description of the latter, is of opinion that it cannot be identified, with
either of his species. ' '

The Circus teesa, Franklin, v. AsturhydeTy Sykes, assigned to Buteo
by Gray and others, must now be referred to PoUornis of Kaup ; Bu'
tastur, Hodgson, J, A* S. xii, 311, sinking to the rank of a synonym*

Hamatomis, Vigors (nee Swainson); Spilornist G. R.' Gray. The
distinctive characters of the species referred to this genus are at pf^

]M5.j

or auk known species of Birds.

179

sent mach in need of determination. Firstly, there is the Bacha of
Lendllant, or Paleo haehoy Lath., which is described to be of the sise
of the Common Bozzard of Europe ; female larger : this does not oc-
cur near the Cape, but was obtained fiir inland towards the tropic.
Ifext, Faico hido^ Horsfield, from Java, subsequently considered as
identical with the African species by Dr. Horsfield: Mr. Vigors,
hcwever, in Proc. SSooi, See. 1881, p. 170, *' expressed his doubts
whether the Pako backer Lath., and F. Indo^ Horsfield, were the same
species, although they were generally supposed to be identical. He
bad' not the opportunity of examining a sufficient- number of African
speeimens to determine the point" Three specie^ however, were dis-
tinguished by Mr. 'Vigors on that occasion, that of India being des-
eribisd by the name BtBm. undmlaius : but this Indian bird had pre-
nonsly been designated Paleo eheela by Latham and Gmelin, and the
jouDg was termed P. aUndut by Cuvier ; it has also since been named
Cireaeiiis nipaknsis by Mr. Hodgson, and the youDg Buteomelanotis
bj Mr. Jerdon*. The distinctions of Mr* Vigors's three species ** con-
list chiefly in size, the Htsm. hohspilus (from the Philippines) being
one^third smaller than \£r. bcu^; while H. undulatus considerably
exceeds the latter. The first is spotted all over the body, the second
only on the abdoinen ; while the third is marked by spots on the wing-
coverts, and by oeeUi bearing an undulated appearance on the abdo-
men, the breast also being crossed by undulating /oscue." These
last are chiefly seen in the females.

In Mr. G. R» Gray's catalogue of the specimens of Raptorial birds
in the British Museum, specimens from India and Java are referred
to Spihmis bachaf and Others from Iddia to Sp. unduiata. I
doiflit, however, altogether the existence of more than one species in
hdia, of which I presume that the males have been referred by Mr.
Gray torH. baefM^ and the females to H. unduUUus ; this latter name
mdst indcied be superseded by eheela of Latham. But a specimen
from Malacca agrees with the description I have lately received of Dr.
Borsfield*s Javanese bird, and differs from every one of a very exten-
ave series of the Indian bird now before me^-^lstly, in its inferior

* Latham's *' Noble £agle" woal4 seem to be merely a foWeBcent specimen of
tb« young of this bird, such as are by no means uncommon.

2 D

180 Notices and Descriptions of various new [No. 159.

8ize, the wing measariag but fourteen inches, and tail nine and a half* ;
2niily, in the abaence of the distinct white spots on the small wing-
coverts, the extrega^ bend of the wing only b^ing thus marked* and dight
trace9 of theoi alone shewing dsewhere ; and 3rdly^ there is some
difference in the barring of the primaries underneath^ fhe third prima*
ry, for instance, having its aubtermiaal pale band much narrower and
ill defined, inetead of thia being broad and well defined. I should
lik^ however, to emimine several Halayan spedmena before coming to
It final deciaion ; although my jmpreaaion cefti^nly is that the Indian
and Malayan apeciee are dittinct, and I ibaU proviaio&ally regard tbam
as such, terming the former H. eheelot (Lath%)t and the latter H, hido (v.
bacha ?) At all eventa, I feel coi^ent of their being only ooe apecies
in India, and it ia probable that there if oae only in Weatern Malaria,
but a third in the Philippines and Cbina^

Urrua (Hodgson, founded on Otu$ bengaimsis, Fnanklio, Gould,)
umbrata, nobis. Length two feet or nearly so^ of dosed wing sixteen
inches, and tail nine inches ; bill firom point to gape nearly two inches,
and tarse scarcely more. General caat of colour deep freckled om-
bre brown, unrelieved by fulvous i the outer acapulariea having the
usual dull white oval spots on their exterior webs : wpga dashed with
cinereous; tail crossed with three dark banda, and an indlstiQct
fourth at base : aud the under parts pale, with a narrow dark brown
mesial streak on each father; bill light yellow; a^^d taloqs pal0*
Aigrettes blackish-brown. The feathera of the crown and nape are
dingy grey at base> with their aorface portion freck|^i and a narrow
meaial dusky line on each : those of .,t]|e p^k^ ^4^^ acapolaries have
this central dark streak much brqp4ni This fine Owl ia common
in Lower Bengal, was forwarded from Kepal by Mr. Hodgson, and
has been obtained by Mr. Jerdo||.j jni the Indian Peninsula* It is
clearly that alluded to by Latbaii^ ^hia description of U^iAJ ^^^^
mandot as represented in a drawing twenty inches h^ t.,f^ H is
the Urrua coronmnda apud Hodgson, as noticed by hioi in J, A. S>
vi. 373, having beeu.. forwarded by him under this naoie iQ ^®
Society'a museum.

* la the India-house specimen, from Java| Mr. Strickland informs me that U10
wing measures fifteen inches and three-quarters, and the tail ten inches ; «4ich size
corresponds with that of the very amallest Indian epecimens.

1846.] or lUtle known species of Birds. 181

** Le peiii Hibou de la edte de Coromaindd^ ai described bjr 8011-
loeity mnd upon wbioh is founded fiM« ootomandA^ Lath., and Btr,
wromMtdMotMf Fortter, does not appear to have been tinoe verified ;
and the pobliahed drawing of an Owl^ referred to tbie, in Hardwicke'a

* nioatrationa of Indian Zoology,' repreaents a species unknown both
I0 Mr. Jerdon ailffmysell It is not improbably a large Scops : this
bring a genus particolairly rich in Indian and Malayan species, some of
which are aa yet n6t qoite" satisfactorily understood. Mr. Jefdon espe-
ciaUy baa made^great effbf(fel6 elucidate them ; and the following is
about our preaent stattf%f fnlbi'mtftlbn res^ting the group.

h Se, TfrfeseenSj (BoAfield), LinS^r. xiil. 140. This species has
been determined with the afeistatKfe of Hugh £. Strickland^ Esq., who
has kindly txamiaed the 6ng\M specimens of the birds des<^bed
Jo Dr. Horifield's Javanese liftfand has favored me with more minnte
lotioea of aonft of them, and- identifications of others with species pre«
Tiottsiy'derfcrlbed. Elsewise/ks'Dr. Horsfield had given the entire
kogth i& eight' inches only;l had some hesitation in agreeing with Mr.
Jcrdon In referring a' Btalacca apecimen in the collection of Lord
Arthur Hay,' to the presllot species ; but the difl^ulty is now removed
by ay firDnid Mr. Strickland} and I Nhve the pleasure of giving the fol*
lowing descrijltion front Lb^d A. Hay*s specimen. Length about
eleren inches, of which the tairmealures four incBes and three-quar-
ters ; wing six and thrse«quarters ; tarse an inch and a quarter. General
edoor fem^nous-brown, much paler below ; the forehead, lower part
of disif' attd aigretdis in part, conspicuously white, with a fSsw minute
dark speckles^: upper parts marked with 'whitish spots along the
shaft of each feather ; the lower variegated with dusky and whitish
ineroas-sirkie.* primaries and tail with numerous broad dusky bars,
amounting to about twelve in number on the latter : tarsal feathers
not continued over the joint at the base of the toes. A strongly
marked species, apparently peculiar to the Malay countries.

* The next in point of size is

2. Sc. ieUiay Hodgson^ As. Res. xix^ 176 : probably Sc. lemp^
apod Horsfield, from Assam, Prod ZooL Soc. 1839, p. 165. This
is the largest of three closely allied species, the distinctions of which
were first observed by Mr. Jerdon. Its wing measures from six inches
to six and a half, apparently according to sex ; and the young have a

182 Notices and Descripiiam 0/ various new [No. 159.

more ferraginous shade of general colouring than the adalta. In a
living specimen which I saw, the moat remarkable feature (for an Omk
of this genns) was its very dark irides, appearing black : and Mr. Hodg-
son, in his description of the species, remarks, ** Iris variable, yellov
in the young, brown in the old birds". It inhabits the 8ub*Himalayan
ranges, extending to those of Sylhet and Arracan, iind doubtless to
all those of Assam.

' 3. Sc. ietHoideSi Jerdon, MS. Differs from the last in its constant-
ly smaller size, and more ashy colouring ; the short tarsal plumes
appear to be always white, *with at most obscure traces of mottling.
From the next it also differs in its predominant ashy tinge. Lengtii
of wing five inches and a quarter to five and three-quarters. Peculiar
to the Coromandel coast, and it would seem there generally common.
' 4. Sc, kmpifi, (Horsfield) : Sirix noduia^ Reinwardt ; Scops Java'
nicust Lesson. Specimens which (from Mr. StricklandV description of
'Dr. Horsfield*8 Javanese bird,) I refer to this, from the vicinity of the
Straits, are often deeply imbued with fermginous-brown throughout:
some of these being evidently in nestling dress, from the flimsy texture
of the feathers ; and the others are perhaps in second plumage. Others
again, 'have merely a weak'shade of ferruginous-brown like the young of
Se. iMta 7 and the mottling of the upper parts is coarser and more
blotched. * The latter are perhaps distinct ; for while the former seem to
be peculiar to the Malay t^ountries, these occur not only in Malasia,hat
along the Malabar range, and in China. The Society possess, a spe-
cimen from Macao. Future observation must determine whether the
ferruginous-brown birds aire so '-spread ; and specimens should be soogbt
for that might exhibit a transitional mouli

5. Sc, suniOf Hodgson, As, Res.^xix. 174. This beautiful speciei
appears to be generally diffused over the country, though, it wonld
seem, rather sparingly. Mr. Jerdon has obtained specimens near Nel*
lore, and I have twice met with it in Lower Bengal. A very handsome
adult female, shot near Calcutta, has the whole upper parts uniform
bright chesnut-ferruginous, with inconspicuous black shafts to the
dorsal plumage, tending to become obsolete, and more distinct black
shafts to the frontal feathers, the aigrettes, and the fore-part of
the wings; exterior line of scapularies albescent, with conspicaoos
black tips ; and there are smaller black tips to the plumelets ^^^

i845.] or note known speeus of Birds. 163

oorapoae the disk : under parts deeply tioged with the hae of the
back, bat ao admiztare of pure white on the belly and under tail-co-
verts ; and the breast and sides of the belly have some tolerably broad
bisek central streaks to the feathers, those of the latter being also va«
negated with transverse pencillings : the unspread tail has its bands ob«
solete ; and the bars on the outer webs of the primaries are indistinct.
A male and female, apparently in second plumage, which I procured
alive, have the ferruginous colour of the upper-parts somewhat deeper,
though less bright, with the black, centres to the feathers much more
developed, and these are copiously variegated with cross- pencillings
everywhere but on the forehead, crown, and the aigrettes ; the under
parts have also a much greater admixture of white, and the black
streaks and pencillings are considerably more developed ; primaries
and tail conspicuously banded. The colouring of the nestling plumage
would, however, seem to approximate more to that of the adult (and this,
accordingly, may be likewise the case in Se. kmpijt) : it is distinguished
by the usual weak and unsubstantial texture of the clothing feathers,
and by the narrower and more pointed form of the wing-primaries.

6. S. pemuUOy Hodgson, mentioned in J. A. S. vi, 369, and re-
cognised in Mr. G. R. Qray's list as distinct from the European
Se. zoreoy to which it is nearly allied * : Sirix bakkamoenay (?) Pen.,
and indica (?), Gmelin, founded on a rude drawing of a Cingalese speci-
men, no doubt inaccurate as regards the ''scarlet*' colour of the irides,
the exceedingly small size given as that of nature (about four inches
long), and alsa the excessively contrasted barring of the primaries ;
likewise in the lay^r portion of the tajvi being represented as bare.
The present species is snnJleip than any of the foregoing, its wing
measuring from four inches and five-eighths to five and a quarter
long ; and it so nearly resemUes Se. sunia in its general characters,
thatvlHfDcmerly suspected it jfoiild prove but a grey variety of that
bird : Its under-parts are marked very like those of Sc. suniOf and
there is a certain admixture of ferruginous especially about the breast,
and a decided tinge of the same chiefly upon the large alars and
their coverts, and seen elsewhere more or less upon the upper parts,

* A specimen of Sc. storca is there noted from China ; and this species has long been
stated to occur in Northern Asia ; at least the Strix pukhella, Lin., of Russia and
Siberia, has been currently identified with it.

184 Notices and Descriptions of various new [No. 159*

af partieularly about the aigrettes^ that is very apt to iDduce a bus*
pidon of its identity with Sc. sunia. From the other grey species^
it is generally distiDgoished by the delicacy of its pencilliDgS) and by
those of the crown soaroely^ if at all, differing from the markings of the
back, instead of blending into a large blaclL mass: bat without a se*
ries of the Sc. zorea for comparison^ it is quite nsekss to attempt
giving a satisfactory minute description of this Indian bird, widch is
an inhabitant alike of the Himalaya and Southern India* A Malacca
specimen in Lord A. Hay's collection also approaches very nearly both
to this little Indian Scops and to Sc. zorcUf of wlneb latter I had a
specimen on loas when I took the following brief descriptton of his
lordship's bird : '* Darker-coloured and more uoilormly pencilled (i &
less variegated) above, than either Sc, zorca or Sc* pennata ; and the
tail marked with four or five distantly placed, and well defined, fisi*
rowish chesnut bands. Probably a distinct species.*' In the speci-
mens of Sc* pennata before me, the tail-markings are comparatively
ill defined, but consist of pale chesnut bands^ margined with dusky*
and the intervening spaces dotted with the same.

A Sc, gymnopodus, from India, is mentioned In Mr. Gray'a catalo-
gue, but which does not appear to have been yet "described : and the
same gentleman gives two new species irom the Philippine Islands, 8e*
phiUppinensia and Sc» meffahUs. «

The genus, ii^flfts is scarcely less developed in this part of the
world. Inlindia, wehave

1. Alh. cucuUndeSf (Vigors). Common in the Himalaya, in the
hill radges of Assam, Sylliil,.iAvraean, and the Tenasserim provinesf,
and extending eastward 4o "Chiisan : but unknown in the raises of
peninsular India.

2* Aik. i9roe?tst|( Burton) : Niietua tMgert Hodgson ; Strix passe-
rina ( ? )» mentioned in Royle's list Himalaya. •

3. Ath, radiatus, (Tickell) : Atk. erythropterust Gould; No^uapsr*
lineaUZy Hodgson ; N. cucuUndes apud Jerdon, Catat, Himalaya, and
the ranges of Central India.

4. Aik» castanopterus, (? Horsfield) : Sinx spadicea^ (? Reinwardt).
Malabar range, and the upland districts of Ceylon. This species differs
from the last in its more rufous general colouring, especially on the
whole wing, the basal portion of the primaries (except the three fir^)

1845.3 or ItiOe known $peeies of Bird: 185

betDg spotlfitt deep rafoua. A Cingaleie example, procared by
H. R. H. Prince Waldemar of Pratiia, had the entire back and winga
deep rafoaa-bay; while the pale bare on the head were only a little
more rofeacent.thaii in Aih, radiaius. Atk. oaHanoptnrui^ from India
aa well aa Java, ia mentioned in Mr. Gray'a liat of Britith Maaeom Rap*
iMier / and it ia alao stated to oocor in the Tenaaaerim Provinces.

5, Ath. SfmneraHy (Tern.) Non. vuU*,

6. Aj^ bramot (Tern.) : Noeiua indiea^ Franitlin ; N, tarayentU^
Hodgson; Siriat perska, (9), Noun. Diet. ^HuL Nat , vii., 26.t Very
common in Lowor Bengal^ and in India generally.

A Nodua omibaHns ia mentioned by Mr. Hodgson, J. A. 8. ▼!•,
369 ; and an AA. badia, Hodgson, in Mr. G. R. Gray's list of the
Baptoriid birds in the British Moseam. These remain to be de«
aeribed.

Symium nivieoiitm^ Hodgson, n. j. This sp nearly resembles
certain non-rofons speoimena which I have seen of the European S*
ahieo, that I even suspected the identity of the Himalayan and the
British bird% until a second specimen (presented to the Society by
Mr. Jerdon) repeating tbe characters of tiie one whick Mr. Hodgson
took with him to England, inclines me now to the opinion that they
an distinct ; the present being also decidedly a larger. MrdiT The
length of Mr. Hodgaon's specimen was about seventeen inches^ of wing
eleven and a half, and tail seven and a quarter ; tarse two inches t and
I took the following brief description of it ** Colour of the upper
parts mingled brown and blackbh ; rather minutely mottled, produc-
iag a dark brown omemble ; head and neck tawny or fulvou8*browo,
with dark mottling at tips of feathers ; a streak above each eye,
ascending from the facial disk, and the mesial part of the cnown, be*
tveen these streaks, blackish* Under parts bright tawney-brown,
mingled with dark brown and whitish : feathered tarsi and toes fulves-

* ** IphabiU Iixdia. Lejigth eleven inches ; all the upper-parts of the body are
reddish-brown, the head being adorned with small white spots, and the wing-coverts
with large spots of the same : the quills and tail-feathers are like the back ; the space
looiul the eyes is reddish-white, as well as the face and throat : all the under-parts
ve white, transversely but distantly barred with brown : the down on the tarsi and
toes is red : the beak and claws are y^Wo^**'— Stephens,

\ Ath. brama is common about the foot of the mountains near the town of Erseroum*
Proc Zool. Soc. 1839, p. 119.

186 Notices and Descrtptiom of various new CNo. 159.

centy with deeper tawney spots ; alaf s and tail banded, the latter with
mottled light brown upon a dark ground.'' The second specimen (also
Himalayan) has the wing twelve inches and a quarter long, and the
tail seven and a half. It agrees generally with the foregoing descrip-
tion, but has less of the fulvous tinge, and is, I think, more obviously
distinct from S. alueo. The minute mottling of the plumage is diffi-
cult to express in words : but the feathers of the under parts may be
described as whitish, partially tinged with fulvescent, and having a
dusky central streak, broader towards the tip of the feather, and three
or four narrower transverse streaks of the same; and the like may
be described as the basis of the markings of those above, modified so
that the pale portion appears, more or less, as a series of pale spots on
the two webs of each feather ;— the well developed transverse markings
of the feathers constituting a good distinction of this bird from the Eu-
ropean S. cUuco^ independently of its deficiency of rufous colQuring. The
form is perfectly true to the generic type of 3. aktoo.

Of the species of 8iinx, as now limited, three pertain to the FasM
Indica.

L Str. java$ucat 6m., de Wnrmb, apud Latham: Str. catU^
Tickell, «/. A, 8. u. 672 ; Sir. hngimembris, Jerdon. Bachanan fi*
gured'H; but Latham is wrong in stating that the claw of its middle
toe is not serrated ; and it has also four wdl defined blackish bars oo
the tail. Found chiefly in peninsular India. Whether it be truly de
Wurmb's Javanese species, I have no immediate means of ascer*
taining*.

2. Str,flammea^ Lin. : Str^javanica^ apud Horsfield ( ? ), Sykes^ and
Jerdon. Very common, and differing in no respect from the British
bird.

3. Str, badiuy Horsfield. Mr. Hodgson obtained a single mutilated
specimen of this bird in Nepal ; and the Society has been favored with
a very fine one by Captain Abbott, shot in the island of Bamree,
Arracan. About Malacca and Singapore, it would seem to be not an-
common.

* ** Honfield*8 Strix Javanica,** writes Mr. Strickland, " has the tarsi five-ei
of aiiAkich longer than in a British Str, Jlammea. It comes near longtmewb'yf
J etdohfhui is mottled grey shoveyimiesid of blotched with brown." Dr. A. Smith
has figured a species from South Africaj idlied to true javanica (?'v* lonffimembrisjt
by the name M, capensis.

18450

cr HiUe known species of Birds.

187

We will now leave the Rapiores, and commence the varied tribes of
Perchers with a new Hornbill :

Buceros carinatus, nobift. Length about thirty-two inches, of
wing thirteen and a quarter, and tail a foot, its outermost feathers
an inch shorter than the middle ones : bill to eye five Inches, the
casque little elevated, at most about three-quarters of an inch, and the
depth of bi&and casque together two inches and a quarter. Form of
the casqae truly carinate, like the keel of a boat, rising with a curve
from the forehead, extending for two-thirds of the length of the upper
mandible, and its anterior portion sloped forward : a lateral ridge ex-
terior to the nostrils causes these to open upwards. In one specimen
befMe me» (which I suspeet is an old female,) the bill and' casque are
trholly black ; but in another, with the latter somewhat less develop-
ed, (iM^bably an adolescent male,) the bill is yellowish* white, except
the basal two-thirds- of the lower mandible, and the extreme base of
the appeiv continued along the tomiae for half Its length, and along
the. upper portion *of the casque to near its extremity. In the former
specimen, the medial portion of the belly, the vent, and the lower tail-
cowetiMf are dark brgir^ish-albesbent ; while in the lattesMhis is con-
fined to the vent iife^ lower tail-coverts : but there is no other differ-
ence of plumage. The throat ii naked, as likeprise a large epaoe sur-
nmoding the eyes. Occiput adorned with a large full crest of length-
ened feathers, rounded at the tips; and measuring twp. inches and
three-quarters long, or rather less in the black-billed specimen ^or old
female ?). General colour black, \rith green and purple glosses, the
edges of the secondaries and tertiariei, a^i^f the lengthened oecipi-
tal feathers (more or less), whitish-browa--i«mch as in B. ffingalen^
tiif to which the present species is certainly allied : terminal four and
a half to five inches of the tail deep black, the> rest brownish-ashy,
darkest at base^ and paling to its junction with the black. In both
speeimens the edges of the mandibles retain their original serration,
more or less perfectly, which is seldom seen in adult Hombills. Pro-
eared at Malacca by the Rev. F. W. Lindstedt, to whom the Society
is indebted for a large and valuable collection of the mammalia and
birds of that particularly rich, but little explored, locality.

The B» comatusy Raffles, Lin, Tr, xiii, 339, would seem to be allied
to the above in form of bill, but is eviden tly distinct. B. malayanus,
Haffles, ibid, p. 292, would seem to approximate the adolescent B,

2 E

188 Notices and Descriptions of varioue new \_So. 159.

bieoloTy EyioD, except that it has " a white stripe extending from be-
hind each eye to the back of the neck, and so encircling the head."
B, bicolor is probably the B. malaharicus apud Raffles, and B. al*
biroitris apud Horsfield ; and with reference to my description of
this species in «/. A. S. xii, 996, 1 may mention that the casque does
project forward, and very prominently, in«old specimens. Of the other
species noticed on the same occasion, I have been since informed that
B. crisiattts, Vieillot (p. 988,) has been renamed B<: bucetnator by Mr.
Gray ; B. pucoran (p. 990, as Swainson misled me in spelling it,)
should have been written B. pusaran, it being rightly identified with
the bird of Raffles ; B. malabaricus (p. 993,) must rank as B» pica,
Scopoli ; and B. ginginianus (p. 996,) as B. birosttis, Scopoli, the
names given by this author holding priority over those of Latham and
Gmelin. Lastly, with respect to Raffles's assertion that the females of
B. rhinoceros are rather smaller, and have the horn more recurved
than in the male, it shews that that respected observer was anacquaint-
ed with the perfectly matured male, which not only, is larger than
the female, but has the tip of its casque reflected so as to point down,
ward, wherj^ in the female (so far at I have ej^rved) it rarely, if
ever, even points backward: the sexes in this.iipi^ies being readily
distinguishable, like thpse of J9. cavatus^ B. pica, and other allied
species, by the posterior surface of the horn, above the forehead, being
black in the male,4nd coacolorous with the rest in the female ; besides
which the viale Rhinoceros Hornbill has a black line dividing the bill
and casque, and continued forward and upward upon the latter, paral-
lel with its anterior margit|» < It may be remarked further, of the Rhino-
ceros Hornbill, that this^^peeies seems to wear away the cutting edges
of its mandibles more than any other ; so that when the tips meet, a
wide hollow occurs along the medial portion of its bill.

Genus Irrisor^ Lesson. In the ' Annals and Mi^azine of Natural
History' for 1 843, pp. 238 et seq., is inserted a paper read by Ur.
Strickland to the Zoological Section of the British Association Meet-
ing of that year, wherein is argued the near affinity of this well mark-
ed genus for the Hoopoes C Upupajy in opposition to the opinion of
the Baron De la Fresnaye and others, who have contended that these
two genera are, at most, but very distantly allied : and though Mr*
Strickland has hazarded no decided opinion respecting the immediate
affinities of the combined group formed of Irrisor and Upttjxh

1845.;] w litHe knottn speeiea 0/ Birds. 180

which groap he styles Vpupida^ and regards its two generic sections
to be of the valae of sabfamilies, adding the remark, that the qaes*
tion where the UpupidfB should be placed cannot, as he thinks,
** be answered satisfactorily till more facts are collected respecting
the food, habits, and anatomy of this group and of others with which
it may be compared," I may here notice that while I quite agree
with Mr. Strickland in approximating the two genera under con-
sidentioD, I still retain my conviction expressed several years ago (vide
Mag, Nat, Hist.^ n. «., 1838, p. 593), and formed upon anatomi*
cal data, that the Hoopoes are nearly related to the Hornbills;
and the hiatus between these two allied, but distinct, groups is con-
riderably lessened by the interposition of Irrisar, which genus I
suspect is subordinate to Bucerotidm rather than to UpupicUSf and
ss a sab&mily of the former, I conceive it to be most naturally
pboed. In the configuration of the sternal apparatus, the chief
differences occur in the anatomy of the Hornbills and the Hoopoes^
the alimentary organs presenting a very close similitude ; and in the
form of the sternum and its appurtenances, I will venture to hazard
the oonjectore that pfpof will be afforded of the near affinity of Irrisor
for Bmeeros. As i%.bodi Bveeroa and Vpupa, I observe that Irrisor
has only ten tail-feathers, whereas the allied genera of JBdeyanidcBf
fcc have twelve; and perhaps we should not be wrong in arrang-
ing both IrrisarimsB and Upupina as subfamilies of BuceroHda.

Hoopoes {Upupc^ Lin.) There are three distinct, although closely
allied, species of this genus, as follow :

1. 27. epopsy Lin. The common £urop^^ Hoopoe, which is nu-
merous in Bengal, and in Upper India generally, but of rare occur-
rence in the south of India. . Mr. Jerdon has obtained it in the Neil-
gherries. Length of its wing six inches.

2. U. senegalensis {? % Swainson, * Birds of W. Africa,' ii, 114,
Nat lAbr. : U* minor^ apud Jerdon. This quite agrees with Mr.
Swainson*s description of the Senegal Hoopoe, except that some spe-
cimens have a trace of whitish on the hinder crest-feathers, where
iodeed it chiefly appears in {7. epops. The wing varies from four
inches and three-quarters to five and three-eighths in length ; but the
bill is as much elongated as in the last. Common in most, if not all,
parts of the peninsula of India.

3. U. mifwr^ Shaw. Distinguished from both the preceding by
having the primaries plain black, without the broad white band con-

190 Notices and Deseripiiom of various new QNo. 150.

staiit in the two others ; and also by having the white caadal bar
placed much nearer the bate of the tail. The colour, too, espect-
ally of the crest, is more niibus, and there i« ao intervening white or
whitish between the rufoas portion of the ereat -feathers and their
black tips. Length of the wing five inches and a quarter. It has
only been met with in South Africa.

Specimens of each are in the Society's Museum.

Akech grandie, nobis, n. s. Resembles A. iqndtL and A. bmga'
lensist but is distinguished by its much larger size. Length of wing
three inches and three*quarters, of tail two inches, and of bill to fore-
head two inches and one^ighth. From Darjeeling. It may be re-
marked that several specimens of A. hengalensis occurred in the same
collection with A. grandist which I mention with a view to refute the
opinion entertained by some theorists, that the disparity of siae be-
tween either of these species and A, iepida is due to tiie influence of
climate and other local causes.

Halcyon oapensis, (L.) Specimens of this bird (if absolutely the
same,) from the vicinity of the Straits, di£fer from those of India in he*
ing much more intensely.ooloured, both above a^d- below; the f»migi«
nous of the under.parts, which is very deep m afiparently the male^
sufftising the nuchal collar and throat, which latter does not tend to be
albescent, and there is a considerable bluiah-green gloes upon the
brown cap^ never seen in Indian ape<amens, and remindii^ one of the
cap of Todkamphus coUarig, (Soopolt and Swainson, v. chloroeephaiw
of Gmelin.) In fact, there seems as good reason for dislioguisbiog
these Indian and Malaya» -birds as specjies, as exists iu the instance f^
Cergk rudis of Africa, and C* foria, Strickland, of A«a ; and another
example of a Majayan bi^d which greatly exceeds it» lodian refresen*
tative in intensity of colouring, occurs in the common Jungle-coek ef
the twO) regiona, alike referred to G^Uus hankivasj Tern.

Coraeias f^niSf McClelland and Horsfield, Proe, ZooL Scte. Id3ft
p. 164, The numerous specimens of Rollers from Assam, Arracap»
and Teoaisierim, which I have aeen^, all pertain strictly to thie special ;
having the upper parts greener than in C. indiea, the neck and bre98t
devoid of the reddish-brown colour proper to the latter spedesi being
purplish-dusky vsiried with bright purple on the fore-neck, and tbe
entire under surface of the wing, except near the tipa of the primaries
is deep purple : but I have obtained several specimens in the vidaity ^
Calcutta^ and Bome 4rom TipperaJn which present every gradation of pis*

1845.1 or IM0 knonm species of Birds. 191

OMge from ooe to the other of these species, and also one or two in the
pore offinis plamage ; from which I infer that where fonnd together
in the same locality, they not unfrequently interbreed, and tend to
meige into a single blended race. It may be farther remarked that I
hare never seen an example of trne C offinis with the broad terminal
parple band to the tail, which distinguishes the adalt C, indica ; bat
I have seen this imperfectly developed in the mixed race, which latter
has also Qommonly the fore-part of the under surface of the wing in«
termingled parple and verditer. On the western side of India, the C
§iarrula waa obtained, together with C. indiea^ by Sir A. Barnes
ia the Moultan ; and both this and Merops apieuier are common in
Afghanistan. Whether the C indica and C. garrula likewise in*
termix, remains to be ascertained.*

Woodpeckers. Of the species of this group noticed in J, A, S. XII,
998 ei seq^t I have now to remark, that P. (Gecinus) viridanus
would seem to be the P. dimidiaius of the Diet, Class., though not of
Hardwicke and Gray ; P. occipitalis^ Vigors, should be termed barbais^
Gray (if it be not offinis of Raffles), as there was previously a P. oceipi-
Is/is, Valenciennes ;. P. nipalensiSf Gray, may, I think, be safely refer-
red to P. ehhropatSf VieiUot, as I before suggestedf ; P. (Chrysoeo^
lapissj melanofyts, nobis (p. 1005» and XIII, 394,) v. P. Ellioih
Jerdon, is decidedly the P. go^nsis, Gm., founded on the Pic vert de
Goa of Danbenton; and P. fChr.J strietus of Horsfield, v. sultaneus^
Hodgson, V. strenuus, Gould (noticed in Proc. ZooL Soe. 1839, p. 165,
and also in Dr. Boyle'a list of birds from the neighbourhood of Saharun-
por«^ though nsver, I belierei described by this name), which has been
eomoKmly refened to P.go^nsis, must retain the name strictust Horsf. :
laady^ having obtained a Malacca specimen of Microeolaptes abnormis,
Tem. (p. 1005), I am enabled to confirm my former suspicion of the
near affinity of Sasia oehracea, Hodgson, which, though distinct as
a species, ia most closely allied to M, abs^ermis. M. ochraceus is com-
mon in the hill ranges of Assam, Sylhet, and Arracan, being generally
seen hopping from twig to twig of bushes or low branches of treea,
though oecasionally climbing like an ordinary Woodpecker.

* Two specimens just received from Gow>hatti ^Assam; were both pure C. cjfinit ;
while tfarte others from the Deighbouring district of Kungpore were unmixed C.
indica,

t This bird makes a near approach in structure to P. (Dendrobates) immaculatus,
Sw. (received from the Cape) : accordingly, it would appear that Dendrobates, is
icarcely, if at all, separable ffom Qetinus*

192 Notteei and DescHptians ofvariou$ new [No. 159.

Picus ( GecinusJ malaccensis, Lath., foanded on ie Pic de Malacca
of Sonnerat, may be described anew with advantage from specimens
presented to the Society from Malacca. It is allied in size and form to
P. chlaropus (v. nipalensis), and in plumage also to the species of Brc"
chyhphuSt but differs very decidedly from the latter in the shape of
its bill, which is larger and more that of a typical Gecinus than the
DendrobateS'like beak of P. chlaropus : it has also the yellow nuchal
crest less developed than in the latter, and resembling that of Bra*
chylophus puniceus. General colour dingy green, brightest on the
back, where more or less tinged with yellow, especially on the rump ;
beneath inclining to dusky, barred with dull white on the flanks, hot
the latter less predominating than in P. chhropus : wings crimson,
with dusky primaries, and green tips to the longest tertiaries : tail
black. The male has the whole top of the head, lengthened occipital
feathers, and moustaches, crimson ; while the female has the coronal
feathers green, tipped only with crimson, and merely the long occipi-
tal feathers as in the male, below which those of the nape are yellow in
both sexes. Bill dusky above, the lower mandible yellow ; and feet
have apparently been green. Length ten inches, or nearly so ; of wing
four and three-quarters to five inches ; and tail three and a half to
three and three-quarters ; bill to forehead an inch and a quarter. From
Malacca.

Subg. GecinuluSt nobis. This is a third form of three- toed Wood-
pecker (in addition to PicoideSf Lacep., of northern climates, and TigOt
Kaup, V. ChrysanoiuSf Sw., of south-eastern Asia and its islands), most
nearly allied to GecinuSf from which it differs in the shortness and la-
teral compression of its beak, and the small size of the feet, which have
besides no inner fourth toe. As a peculiar form of Woodpecker, it is
very distinct, though represented only (so far as I am at present aware,)
by

P. (Gee.) Graniia* McClelland and Horsfield, P. Z, S. 1839,
p. 165. Length nine inches and a half, or ten inches; of wing fi^^
inches ; and tail three and three-quarters : bill to frontal bone an inch
and one-eighth ; and spread of foot an inch and three-quarters. Colour
somewhat brownish red above, the secondaries and tertiaries having
three light red bars, and the greenish-dusky primaries four or five
yellowish ones : tail similarly banded ; breast and under parts dosky

* Quaere, Orantii, or OranH f

1M5.3 or little known $peeie$ of Birds. 193

green ; head and neck light yellowish-green, paler and browner towards
the beak, and the crown of the male only, dull crimson, fiill white,
with some dusky at the base of both mandibles ; and feet apparently
dark slaty. Hab. Darjeeling, and the mountain ranges of Assam.

Of the subgenus Tigti^ Kaup, three allied species exist, which have
never been yet properly distinguished.

\,P.fTJ Shorei, Vigors, P. Z. 5. 1831, p. 175 ; Gould's * Century,'
pi. XLIX. Distinguished by its superior size, the wing measuring six
inches long ; by the crimson of the rump spreading over, or rather
tinging, more usually the entire back (more or less); and by the
elongated pale central streaks of the coronal and occipital feathers of
tlie female, these streaks being continued nearly throughout the feather,
and anteriorly often spreading over the whole feather, so that the fore-
bead becomes almost plain light brown. In one female before me,
there are also some intermixed crimson feathers on the occiput, which I
have never seen in either of the other species : but whether these are of
eomstant occurrence I do not know, and another female in the Soci-
ety's museum is unfortunately deficient of feathers just at this part. Inha-
bits the sub- Himalayan region, as well as the hill ranges of peninsular
India ; but I have never seen it from the eastward of the Bay of Bengal.

2. P. {T.) intermedius, nohx^. Exactly midway between the two
others ; the whitish on the coronal feathers of the female forming very
elongated spots, rather than central streaks ; and the back above the
ramp not usually suffused with crimson. Wing five inches and a
half to five and three-quarters long. Common in Nepal, Assam,
Sylhet^ Tipperah, Arracan, and Tenasserim ; and the only kind which
I have seen from those parts, Nepal excepted.

3. P. (T,J tridactytay ( 8 w.) Strickland ; Ptc«« ^t^a, Horsfield.
Wing but four inches and seven-eighths, to five inches and one- eighth,
long : and the whitish spots on the head of the female very much
contracted, tending indeed to become obsolete, and their form a
lengthened oval, narrow and minute. The bill to gape in P. Shorei
measures an inch and three-quarters, in P. intermedins one and a
half, and in P. tridactyia one and a quarter ; in a young female of P.
tridactyla before me, scarcely one and one-eighth. The specimens
descrilied are from Malacca, and are of the only size that I have
hitherto seen from the Malay countries. Dr. Horsfield, however, gives
the length of his P. %a as eight inches and a half; whereas Raffles

194 Notices and Deicripiions of various new [No. 159.

assigns " above ten inches," and may therefore allude to P. interme"
dius. From peninsular India, I have as yet only seen P, Shorei:
but Mr. Jerdon remarks that ** the specimens shot below the Ghauts
are considerably smaller than those obtained at a great elevation ; the
latter attained the size of P. Shorei^ though not differing in colour
from the smaller ones. The length varies from nine inches and a half
to nearly twelve inches."

Of the closely allied division Braekyptemus^ Strickland, there seemt
to be a second species in southern India, additional to P. auTa$Um
(v. bengalensiSy &c.) :

P. (Br,) micropuSf nobis. Distinguished from P, aurantUu by
its inferior size, the wing (of an adult male,) measuring but five
inches, instead of five and a half, as in several adult specimens (male
and female,) of P, auraniius ; bill to gape an inch and five-sixteenths,
instead of one and five«eighths ; and extended foot one and seven-
eighths, instead of two and one-eighth. There is a general neatneM
and well defined character of the markings, as distinguished from
those of P. aurantius, which arrests the eye at a glance : the fron*
tal feathers, to a level with the anterior portion of the eye, are
not tipped with crimson, as in the other ; the black of the nape is
continued lower upon the shoulders, considerably contracting the
golden orange of the back ; and the wings are duller aureous, con*
trasting more with the brilliant dorsal hue: the white markings
of the throat and fore-neck are also reduced to small rounded oval
spots, those of the breast being larger but similarly oval, and of the
under parts below, narrower than in P, auraniius. I found this speeies
upon a single specimen forwarded by Mr« Jerdon, but feel no doubt
of its distinctness, especially when I recall to mind the dose simili-
tude of the three species of the preceding group ; from which divistoa
the present one is only just separable.

Mtcroptemus, nobis. By the same rule that Brachypternus is re-
cognised apart from Tiga^ this must be separated from Meigiypies ;
having the inner fourth toe and claw minute. The colouring is also
peculiar. Type P. badius. Raffles, under which, again, two species
have been hitherto confounded.

1. P (MJ badius, Rafiles: P. brachyurus, Vieillot. Wing but four
inches and one-eighth to four and a quarter long : head pale above,
the throat dark ; the feathers of the latter dusky, with pale lateral

1815.3 or liUie Miown speeiet of Birds. 195

nai^ns ; black caudal bars comparatively broad. InhabiU the Malay
coantries.

2. P. {M*J phmoceps^ nobis. P, rufu§t Lath., apud Gray, nee
Gmelin ; Rt^aus Indian Woadpedar^ Latham* Wing four inbhes and
thrBe-qnaftdrB long, and the rest in proportion : head subfuscous above,
the throat pale ; the feathers of the latter conoolorout with those of
the body, or nearly so, having lighter lateral margins ; black caudal
bars narrow. Inhabits India proper, extending eastward to Tipperah
and Arracan.

The type of Meifftyptes is P. trisiUj Raffles, v. pcecilophus. Tern-
minck,* which together with an allied species, P. fM.J brttnneua, also
from the fiialay conn tries, is referred to Htmieercus by Mr. Eyton.

P. ( Sd\) jviguUms^ nobis, is a third species, of a shorter and thick-
er form than the two above-menticmed, and in size, form, and colour-
ing; much resembling P. (Hemieercus) canente^ Lesson, of which the
female is P. eardahtSi Jetton : but it is readily distinguished by the
v«7 difiereot form of the bill, by the bufiy-white colour of the nape,
and by the rays or specks of the same hue upon its black throat.
Length about seven inches and a half, of wibg four inches, and tail
two and one*eighth ; bill to forehead seven-eighths. Colour black or
brown-black, varied with* buffy-white, and an obscure dull crimson
moostache in the male ; occipital feathers elongated and black : neck
whitish, more or less deeply tinged with boSi and continued as a
•treak along each side of the breast ia front of the wings ; rump also
biifiy*white, a broad oblique stripe of the same upon the win^, and
their nether surface and edge are of this hue, the large alars being
broadly banded at base iiitemally, with slight narrow pale bars or se*
riesof small spots on their outer surface ; forehead, throat, and some-
times crown, more or less speckled or rayed with the same pale colour
that variegates the reat of the plumage. Inhabits Arracan and the
Tenasserim provinces (specimens from the latter territory having been
erroneously referred to P, poBeUopkus, Tern., in X, 828).

P. (H^icereus) c&ncreius, Tern. It is probable that there are two
species confounded under this name. All that I have seen are from
the vicinity of the Straits, and accord with Stephens's *' Sumatran va-

* Thete wonld seem enumeratctd as distinct in Mr. Eyton's catalogue, Proc. Zool.
Soct 1839, p. 106 ; but it is evidently a mistake of the printer.

195 Notices and Descriptions of various new QNo. 159.

riety" of P. concretus of Java. The adult male has the forehead and
crown bright crimsoDy continued on a few of the uppermost and cen-
tral of the long feathers of the occiput : in the young male, the fore-
head and crown are chesnut-brown^ with a tinge of red on the medial
long feathers of the occiput ; the pale yellowish buff portion of the
plumage of the upper parts being also more developed : and the fe-
male has the forehead, crown, and occiput, smoky-grey, like the sides
of the head of the males.*

P. (Dendrocopus) darjeUensis^ nobis. This Woodpecker is de-
scribed in J, A, S. XL 165, as the adult of P. himcdayensisy Jardine
and Selby; and true P. himalayensis is there given as the young:
but the two are distinct, the present one having a larger bill, mea-
suring an inch and three-eighths to forehead, in addition to its under
parts being streaked with black ; its white wing-spot is also con-
siderably smaller. Very common at Darjeeling, and in Nepal. Mr.
Hodgson sent it by the hybrid name majoroides, which can scarcely
be adopted.

The other Indian Woodpeckers of this subgenus are as follow :-*

2. Z. himalayensis^ Jardine and Selby, 111. Om,, Ist. series, pL
CXVI. Found chiefly, I suspect, to the westward of Nepal.

3. P. cathphariuSf Hodgson, nobis, /• A» S, XU, 1006. Nepal:
common at Darjeeling.

4. P. hyperythrus. Vigors, P. Z. 5. 1831, p. 23 ; Gould's * Century,'
pi. L. Remarkable for the slender form of its bill. Himalaya.

5. P. Maceiy Cuv. ; figured in Hardwicke's ///. Ind. ZooL : P.
analis. Tern. ; P. tninor^ apud Raffles and Horsfield ; P. medius from
India, apud Latham. Northern India generally, and Malay countries.
The only species of the subgenus found in Lower Bengal, where ex-
ceedingly common, as it also is in the vicinity of the Straits. It fre-
quently occurs^ likewise, in collections from the Himalaya.

6. P. brunnifronsy Gould's ^ Century,' pi. LII ; Vigors, P. Z. <$•
1831, p. 176. : P. auricepSf Vigors, iHd, p. 44. Himalaya.

7. P. mahraUensiSt Latham : P. aurocrisiatus, Tickell, J. A» S.
II, 579 : figured in Gould's ' Century,' pi. LI., and also by Hardwicke
and Gray. Hilly regions of India generally.

^ P. validust Tern., is allied in form to Hemicercus, but cannot be arranged under
it : and as another marked sub-genus, I may indicate the P. /tmebriSy Yalenciennes,
V. modestus, Vigors.

1845.3 or Utile known species of Birds. 107

8. P. pygnuBus^ Vigors, P. Z, S. 1B30, p. 44. A description of
this species, from a series comprising older and finer specimens than
those from which the Latin diagnosis was drawn up, may here be offer*
ed. Allied to the two next, but larger ; the wing measuring from three
inches and a quarter to three and a half, and tail one and seven-eighths
to two inches. Four middle tail-feathers wholly black, and the next
white only on its exterior margin : this constituting a good distinction,
as in all the following the whole of the tail-feathers are spotted with
white. The male has a crimson occipital crescent, the lateral halves
of which unite only in fine old specimens : in younger examples, this
crimson is confined to a mere lateral tuft, as in the following ; and I have
seen specimens in every degree intermediate. Forehead and crown
ashy-brown, the crimson of the occiput surrounded with black exter-
nally, forming a streak over each eye^ continued to meet and expand
posteriorly. Another and brownish-black streak, more or less deve-
k>ped, passes backward from below the eye ^ and between this and the
last is a large triangular white patch on the sinciput. Upper parts
black, with white cross-bands on the back, and the usual rows of white
spots on the wings : outermost and penultimate tail-feathers barred on
the outer web with white, and having a single white bar, and some-
times two, crossing the feather towards its tip ; throat dull white ; the
rest of the under parts brownish -white, with narrow dark central lines
to the feathers. The hoary-grey colour upon the back mentioned in
Mr. Vigors's descripti<m, must refer to that of the base of the feathers,
as shewn in a specimen thin of plumage. Common in the Himalaya.

9. P. canicapillus^ nobis. Differs from P. moluecensis in the much
blacker hue of its upper parts, in the pale ash-colour, of the head, a
little tinged with brown and bordered laterally with black, from amid
which appears the slight crimson sincipital tuft of the male ; the size
also is rather larger, the wing measuring three inches and one-eighth to
three and a quarter, tail one and three-quarters, and bill to forehead
fi?e*eighths : the under parts are whitish, purer on the throat, and the
rest marked with central dusky-black lines. Common in Arracan.

10. P. moluecensis^ Latham ; figured by Hardwicke and Gray. Distin-
guished by its prevalent brownish or sooty-black colour, and its rufes-
cent brown head and streak passing through the ear-coverts. Hab.
Central and Southern India.

10. P nanus, Vigors, P. Z S. 1830, p. 172. Has a larger bill
than either of the three preceding species, measuring three-quarters of

198 Notices and DeseripHons of various new CNo. 1S9.

an inch to the forehead ; wing three inches and a qoarter. The bseast
is marked witli dusky oval spoiSy passing inio streaks below ; 4he aspect
of the under parts being much more spotted and less streaky than in
the foregoing ; a very strongly marked white iiae commences above
the eye (as in the last), and is continued along the eides of the ooei'»
put to the nape ; and another broad white line from the angle of the
mouth is continued to below the ear-coverts. This spedes is alluded
to as a variety of P. moiuaeensie by M^r. Jerdon ; being thus met with
in Southern India, as well as in the Himalaya.^

Of foreign Woodpeckers in the Society's museum, one of which I
can find no description, may be designated

P. (Oolaptes) hypoxanthusy nobis. Length above a foot, of wing
five inches and three-quarters, and tail five inches ; bill to gape ooe
and three-quarters, its form less curved than in P. auratus^ the lower
mandible not being arched at all. Upper parts crimson, darker on
the wings, and passing to yellowish olive«>green on the external wehs
of the large alars, the secondaries and tertiaries with their coverts be-
ing broadly margined with dark crimson externally, and the primaries
having yellow shafts : tail black above, its outermost feathers freckled
with brownish-yellow : a large and broad crimson moustache, and the
apace between this and the crown, comprising the lores and ear-co-
verts, greenish-yellow : throat black, the feathers edged with yellowisl^;
those of the breast black margined with dark crimson, and leaving a
pale central mark on each, inclining to be linear on those of the fore*
neck, and gradually assuming the form of a transverse bar more down-
ward : the rest of the under parts and inside of the wings bright green-
ish-yellow, with some black bars anterior to the flanks. Bill black-
ish ; and legs brown. Most probably from some part of South America*

Before quitting the PieidtBy I may remark that the Himalayan
Honeyguide (ludieator xantkanotus^ nobis, «/. A. S. XI, 166, and Xll»
1010,) has a much shorter beak than in the various African species;
with which it accords, however, in all other re8pect8.t

* The whole of the above are in the Society's museum : and I have before remarkeci
that P. Bllioti, Jerdon, which was referred by that naturalist to the present snb-genuSt
is the true P. (ChrysocolaptesJ goensis, v, melanotus, nobis, passim.

t To give some idea of the present state of the Society's museum, in the department
of Oriiithology, it may be here mentioned that of the Linnsan genus Picus, there are
now 121 mounted specimens, appertaining to 49 species ; and of these but 10 speci'

Ifi45.3 or Kilie knonm specteg of Birds. 1 99

€beKfM£ee. Of the leries of this fiunily grading from Dasyhpkus
to Taccocua of Lesson, the ladian and Makjan species may be Urns
classified. Rkinortha belongs to the particular groop, bat ranges
apart ieam the gradaated saccession observable in the rest : and of this
gemis, I htiwe to remai% that the supposed two species which have
been hitherto currently admitted, are one and the same ; Rh. lueidt^
Vigors^ V. AfuuUenus rufeseens, Swainson, v. Phomieqphans mridiros^
iris, EytoB, referring to the yooog, and Cueuius dUoropluBui^ Raffles,
V. An, nrfuif Swainson, to the adalt ; the latter being also described^
and the former figured as Bubutus Isidaria by M. Lesson in the zoology
of M. Belaager*s Voyage. It will now rank as Rh. chloraphcBa^
(Baffles) ; and I have suggested that perhaps a second species exists in
the Cucuhts meianogosHr of Vieillot, vide J, A. S. XL, 924.

Dasyiaphus^ Sw. Species, Z>. Cumingi^ (Fraser,) and Z>« nperei'
Uosui, (Cqv.,) vide J. A, 8. XI, 925.

Pkisenioophaugj Vieillot.--«il. With the nareal apertures narrow, and
placed near the edge of the bill. (Cuv.) 1, Ph. pyrrhocephalusy
(Forst.,) vide J. A, 8. XI, 924 : (this species has the papillose naked
red skin on the sides of the face very greatly developed ; its alleged
Cingalese habitat needs verification, especially as it is likewise stated to
inhabit Africa.) B. " Nostrils elongate, and situate at the base of a
groove which extends nearly to the middle of the beak." (Horsfield.)
2, Ph. meianognathui, Horsfield. C Nostrils elongate, basal, and
oblique ; but no groove to the bill. 3, PA. sumatranui^ Raffles,

D. Nostrils basal, with rounded aperture. 4, Ph. viridis, Lev. {Cuculus
mehnognaihus apud Raffles, &c.): 5, Ph. Diardi, (Lesson ; Ph,
iriitis apudos, J, A. S, XI, 928, and probably Ph. Craufurdii, Gray).

E. IncerUB sedis. 6. Ph. (f) eahrhgnchuSi Tem., erroneously stated
to be identical with Zaneiostomus javanieus. Three of the above
are in the Society's museum, viz. Ph. viridis, Ph. sumairamtSf and
Ph. Diardi; these being all common in the vicinity of the Straits.
The first has a more tumid bill, and the second a proportionally

mens (of 7 species) are foreign to India and the Malay countries* Of other Picida
(eonsisting of the genera Yunx, Picumnus, Microcolaptes^ and Indicator^ the Bucco
group being excluded), we have 10 mounted specimens, of? species. Every de-
scribed (or at least every authenticated) Indian species of Woodpecker is now in the
collection : but there are several yet wanting from the eastern islands. July 6, 1845.

200 Notices and Descriptions of various new [JSo. 159

longer bill, than in the others ; bat ail are closely allied, and have a
large naked space sorrounding the eyes.

ZanclosiomuSf Swainson. A, Bill green ; nostrils with rounded oval
aperture; small bare and papillose skin surrounding the eyes; tail
greatly elongated. 1, Z. truHs^ (Lesson ; Ph, longieaudaiuSf nobis^
J, A. 8. XI, 1095.)— B. Allied to last, with green bill ; nareal orifices
oval and minute ; no expanded and papillose naked space surrounding
the eyes. 2, Z. fnridirostris, Jerdon.— C Red bill, and nareal aperture
linear ; no papillose skin on the face. 8, Z.javanicus, Horsfield, he.,
▼ide J, A, S. XL 1097 ;* Ptaya erytkrorhyneha, Lesson.— -D. A fourth
section would seem to be constituted by Z, Jlavirostris, Swainson,
' Birds of W. Africa,' Nat. Libr., Om., VIII, p. 183, and pL XIX.
Should it be thought necessary to separate the two first, they should
rank under Melias of Lesson.

Taccocua, Lesson. This will comprehend the species confound-
ed under the '* Sirkeer Cuckoo" of Latham. As compared with the
preceding, they have a shorter and more compressed bill, approaching
nearly in form to that of Ceniropus ; and they further approximate the
latter genus in the more than subspinous character of their plumage,
and in their ground habits, although their inner hind claw is short and
curved. The following are now for the first time distinguished.

]. T, injnscata, nobis; probably Coecyzus chrywgaster of Boyle's
list of birds from the vicinity of Saharanpore. At least two species of
this group are indicated in Liatham's description of his Sirkeer Cuckoo
{Gen, Hist III, 267), the present being that first noticed by him,
and being characterized by its larger size and infuscated colouring.
** Length nineteen inches at least : * * * plumage on the upper parts
dusky, with a tinge of purple."-— The specimen before me agrees with
others which I have seen from the Himalaya, and measures nineteen
inches in total length, the tail ten inches, its outermost feathers three
inches and a half less ; wing six and a half; tarse an inch and five-
eighths. Bill (as in the others) bright cherry-red at base, yellow at
the tip, with a triangular black spot on each side of the upper mandi-
ble : feet dusky -leaden, browner on the tarse. In all three species,
the upper parts may be described as brown, washed with dusky-green,
the feathers having shining black shafts ; but in the Himalayan bird,
* This species has the somewhat firmer tail of a true Pkcenicophaus,

1845.3 ^ ^^^ known species of Birds. 201

aeaicely a trace of the brown is visible ; lower parts paler» slightly
washed with ferruginous on the fore-neck and breast, the belly and
lower portion of the tibial plumes deep ferruginous^ of a much darker
thade than in the other species : tail with all but its middle pair of
feathers broadly tipped with white, as in both the others. Peculiar,
1 suspect, to the sub- Himalayan region.

2. T. sirhee ; Centropus sirhee^ Hardwicke and Gray : C eueuUndes^
Smith and Pearson, /• A. S, X, 659. This is probably that, next
mentioned by Latham as figured in a drawing \ and it is of course the
Cawnpore species subsequently noticed by him as weighing <*four
ooiices eight drachms." I believe it also to be that figured by Hard*
wicke^ and referred to by Latham as weighing but ^* three ounces six
drachms and a half ;" a difference from the preceding which might de-
peod upon condition, and to a certain extent on sex, these birds being
often extremely &t. Describing from Hardwicke's drawing, Latham
gi?es the two middle tail*feathers as " eight inches in length," but
from the published copy of the same drawing, I should say that they were
nearly ten inches. A fine specimen before me (from Cawnpore) mea*
lores seventeen inches in length, the tail nine and a half, its outermost
feathers three and three-quarters less ; wing six inches ; and tarse an
inch and a half. Upper parts much paler and more brown than in the
preceding species, having scarcely a trace of the green \ below paler fer-
rnginoos, more generally and uniformly diffused on the belly, flanks, and
tibial plomes, and tinging much more deeply the fore-neck and breast.
Mr. C. W. Smith describe9 the upper parts as being of a brownish satin
colour, a term which does not convey a very definite idea in the ab-
lence of a specimen, but which is nevertheless sufficiently recognisable
when the bird is under examination : the hue is lighter and more rufe-
seent than in the next species. Hab. Bengal.

3. 7\ LesckenauUHf Lesson : Zanchstomus sirhee^ apud Jerdon. Dis-
Uogushed by its inferior size, and generally more or less ashy fore-
neek and breast, and whitish throat ; the ferruginous colour of the belly
u scarcely so deep as in the last, and there appears always to be a
marked distinction of hue between the breast and belly, although the
foraier is more or less tinged with ferruginous ; whereas in the Bengal
species there is no such marked distinction of hue, the fore-neck and
breast being concolorous with the belly, or very nearly so, shading im^

202 Notices cmd Descriptions of vartow netc QNo. 159.

perceptibly from one to the other* In the hue of its upper parts,, this
species is intermediate to the two others, but approaches nearer to the
Bengal one. Its entire head has often a distinct ashy cast, not seen
in t^e others. Length fifteen or sixteen inches, the tail eight or nine
inches, its outermost feather three inches and a half less ; wiog five and
a half to six inches ; tarse an inch and five-eighths, but considerably lesi
robust than that of T, infitseata. Inhabits the peninsula of Iadia%*

Centrapus, lUiger. The variations of plumage exhibited by the
birds of this genus are very remarkable, and appear oftentimes to be
independent of age or sex. Having ascertained the identity of my C
dimidiatus, J. A, S, XII, 945, with C. lepidus, Horsfield, but whieh
species will bear the prior name of C Lathami^ (Shaw), I was subie-
quently led to suspect that C. sinensis^ (Shaw), J. J. S. XII, 247,
might prove to be analogously identical with C, phUippmsis \ notwith-
standing the great difference of plumage in both cases ; and upon more
minutely examining the Society's Chusan specimen of C situnmsi I
found, on turning aside the feathers of the nape, some glossy steel-
black ones just put forth, different in texture from the old plumagej*
and exactly according with those of ordinary ^AxjlipMUppsnHs ; more-
over, the two entirely correspond in size and proportion, and I feel
now p^fectly satisfied of their being one and the same.

In my description of C. philippensis, J, A. S« XL 1099, it was men-
tioned that some of the young birds, in their first or nest dressy were
throughout unbarred, being coloured much as in the ordinary adnlty
except that the rufous is less bright and is deeply infuseated upon tile
back, while most others of the same age are conspicuoosly bamd
throughout, as in a young Cuckoo. In general, these moult into the
usual adult dress, fiigured by Horsfidd as C. Imbuius ; but soae
would appear to assume a peculiar second dress (in which state it is
C sinensis)^ analogous to that of ordinary occurrence in C Lalthiom^
and which seems likewise to be analogous to the h^oHcus plumage of
Cueulus canorus, more frequent in Cue. poUocephalus {v. kimaU^amii,

* These three species of Taccocua appear more decidedly distinct, when seen toge-
ther, than perhaps would foe inferred from the above descriptioiks : some might deem them
local varieties merely of the same, in which case intermediate specimens shoaM occur
in intermediate districts; but even then races so nearly allied might perhaps have in-
termingled, like Cbracias wuUca and C. <vffinis ; but to me they certainly appear as
distinct as Atcedo grandis, A, ispiday and d, bengalensii*

]845.] or Utile knanm species of Birds. 203

Vigors), in Cue. tenuirosiris, Gray, and its Malayan near ally, Cue,
merulinus (v. fiavus). Raffles was aware of this variation of plumage in
Cemr, L€Uhamiy which he identifies with Cuculus iolu, Auct, (a Mada-
gascar species, or more probably variety of several alleged African spe-
cies, all of about the same size, as CerUr.maurus^ C. rufus, and C sene*
gaiensisy Anct.,) which it undoubtedly makes a near approach to in
the instance of some specimens ; but he certainly reverses the order
of pri^ression in the states of plumage, in his remarl&s upon the latter,
cited in /• A» 8, XI, 1103. One young specimen, in undoubted
nestling garb, I have described in XII, 945 (at the end of the foot-
note) ; the second dress (probably more frequent in the female sex)
in XI, 1003 ; and the fully mature plumage as C dimidiaius, toge-
ther with the notice of the young : in a fine series now before me, from
Bengal (vicinity of Calcutta), Cuttack, and Malasia, are some inter-
mediate to what I have now specified as the second and third phases,
bat which were not killed during moult, the feathers themselves ap-
pearing as though they had been in process of changing colour ; but
I think it more likely that they had been put forth thus intermediate :
these have the rufous back more infuscated, a greater or less number
of the shafts of the feathers yellowish.white, on a black or rufous
ground, according to the part, and in one instance many intermixed
psle and barred feathers on the under parts, the black bars on some
of these being enlarged and more or less tending to blot the entire
feather. The Polophilus Laihami of Shaw is decidedly a specimen
in this imperfectly mature dress ; the thoroughly mature garb difier-
ing only from that of C philippensis in the less deeply rufous hue of
the mantle and wings, but the species being readily distinguishable by
its much smaller size, and the shorter and deeper form of the bill.

Analogous difierences present themselves in the Cenir, phasianus
of Australia; and I doubt not in the alleged African species, of several
of which I have suggested the identity, having no means of personally
iavestigating the problem. In the Malayan islands, the Centr» me-
lanopSf Par, Mus,, of Lesson's Traitd, vide J. A. 8. XII, 946, is pro-
bably also to be referred to C, Lathami ; and C bicolor, ibid*, perhaps
to the same, or to C. philippensis, A distinct species occurs in C.
viridisy Scop., Iiath., (founded on the Coucau vert d^AnUgue of Son-
nerat,) v. C affinis, Horsf., vide •/. ^. S. XIII, 391 ; and another in

C. hengalensis, Lath., (founded on the Lark-keeled Cttckoo of Brown's

204 Noiiees and DueripHam tf various new QNo. 159.

Zoology,*) V. C pumiluSf Lesson, vide XII, 945; but with these two
I am nnacquainted.

Of the species of CuculuSy I have now nothing further to add, than
that I feel satisfied of the identity of C fttstco/br, Hodgson, J. A, S.
XII, 943, with the common C, fugax : of C micropterus^ a particu-
larly fine male has the wing as much as eight inches and a quarter
long, and the rest in proportion ; while of C. eanorus, an equally fine
male has the wing fully nine inches long ; the general characters of the
two birds, however, rendering them easy of distinction : of C SanneroHi
(v. pravatuSy Horsf., v. rufovittattis, Drapiez), a specimen in nestling
dress is altogether more coarsely barred than the adult, with pale rufes-
cent upon a black ground above, the under parts white banded with
dusky, and having the cross bars broader than in the mature plumage;
bill but fifteen*sixteenths of an inch to gape^ but the general'resem-
blance to the adult still suflicient to indicate the species at a glance, the
half-feathered tarse helping to characterize it apart from C tenuirostrU
and C. merulinus .* lastly, of Eudynamys^ besides the Australian CoSl,
which was identified with that of India and the Malay countries by
Messrs, Vigors and Horsfield, but which Mr. Swainson has separat-
ed (on account of its considerably larger size,) as Eu» austraiis, the
Cue. taitensis, Sparrman, of New Zealand and the South Sea Islands,
is referred to this genus by Mr. G. R. Gray, (vide Appendix to Dr.
Diefienbach's ' New Zealand,' Vol. II, 193).

Caprtmulgida. Three allied species of this tribe appear to have
been lately confounded under the name Caprimulgus maerums, Hors-
field. These are— -

1. C. aWanaiaiuSy Tickell, •/. A. S. II., 580: C. gangeticuSt
nobis, mentioned in An. and Mag. Nat. Hist. 1843, p. 95; regarded
as distinct from macrurus^ Horsfield, in J. A. iS. XII, 178 (dt^),—
but referred to macrurus in XL, 586, an identification in which Dr.
Horsfield coincided. The size, however, of C. macrurue of Java is
considerably smaller ; and there is a closely allied species in Southern
India, which, agreeing better in dimensions with the Javanese birdi
I therefore presumed might be identical with the latter. Mr. Jerdoo,
who has treated critically of the Indian species of this genus io the

* On the same plate is figured a " Spotted Curucui" from Ceylon, which is evidently
the Cuculus (Chrysoeoccyx) lucidus.

18450 <^ fi^ known species of Birds. 205

secoDd No. of hb * UlastratioD* of Indian Ornithologyi' provisionally
assented to this suggestion ; but with proper distrust, ** in a genus
where the plumage is so very similar/' remariied that the bird of
Southern India might yet prove to be distinct, in which case he pro*
posed for it the specific name airipennis: Mr. Strickland^ however,
has informed me that he had lately received from Mr. Jerdon " a
specimen of his small C. macrurus from the Neilgherries, which
evidently ^eems to be the same as Horsfield's macrurus** ; yet it does
not appear that the latter naturalist actually compared the two toge*
ther, and the Society has now a distinct Malacca species which I
feel very confident will prove to be the true macrurus of Hors*
field, and I as little doubt that the species of Southern India is
C. makraUensis of Sykes. That immediately under consideration
is acknowledged by Mr. Strickland to be quite distinct, and this
naturalist has suggested for it the felicitous name gagateus^ " from
its rich agate-like markings :" of its identity, however, with the species
named as above by Captain Tickell, I feel no doubt, although the
statement of that observer that the sexes are alike, does not fully
apply. It is a common bird in Lpwer Bengal during the cold season,
and appears to be generally diffused throughout Northern India,
bat it has not been met with in the southern part of the country,
where it would seem to be replaced by the next. A fine male of
0. albanoiatus measured thirteen inches long, by twenty*five in
spread of wing ; the closed wing nine inches, and tail seven inches :
a small female eleven and a half, by twenty-one inches ; wing eight
and three«eighths, and tail six and five-eighths. The tarse (as in the
others,) is anteriorly feathered nearly to the toes. This bird has the
crown and tertiaries light cinerascent, minutely mottled, and marked
with a atripe of black dashes along the middle of the crown : upper
range of scapulartes black, more developed in the male, and bordered,
more broadly externally, with rufesoent*white : lores and ear-coverts
brown : wing-coverts black, mottled with rufous, and largely tipped
with rufescent- white : a broad white patch in front of the neck, as
in several allied species: there is a band of white on the primaries,
contracted and rufescent in the female ; and the two outer tail-feathers
are broadly tipped with white in the male, and much less broadly tip-
ped with slightly mottled pale rufescent in the female. Altogether
the females are much paler, and browner or less ashy, than the other

206 Notices and DeseripHons of various new CNo. 159.

sex. The riciorial bristles are conspicuously white at base, and black
for the remainder of their length.

2. C mahrattensiSt Sykes, Proe. ZooL Soc. 1832, p. 83 : C. mar
crurus apud Jerdon, ///. Ind, Om. (vide his description of C. indicus).
Very similar to the last, but much smaller ; a male now before me
having the wing but six inches and a half in length, and tail four and
three-quarters : in another the wing measured seven inches, and the tail
five ; but Mr. Jerdon assigns " about seven inches and a half" aa the
length of the wing, and *' five and a half to six inches," as that of the
tail. He adds, that he considers it may perhaps be the C. tuiatieus^
var., of Latham. In the only specimen before me, there is a russet tinge
about the nape, back, and breast, not seen in the preceding species.
Formerly, I regarded what Mr. Jerdon pronounces to be a mere pale
individual variety of the variable C indicus, as Sykes's mahraUensis;
but looking more attentively to the description of the latter, the state-
ment that the two outer tail-feathers are tipped with white^ cannot
refer to any variety of C indums, wherein the four outer tail-fea-
thers (or all but the middle pair,) have subterminal white tips, the ex-
tremities being always dark. In other respects, I conceive that Sykes's
description will apply sufficiently ta the generality of specimens ; par*
ticularly as he states that it *' differs from C' moniicohis and C asiati'
euSf in the prevalent greyness of the plumage, and in the absence of the
subrufous collar on the nape." Hab. Southern India.

3. C. macrurus, Horsfield, Lin. Trans. XIII, 142. To this I re-
fer two Malacca males, and two Arracan females, in the Society's col-
lection, which are intermediate in size to the two preceding, and are
further distinguished by their much darker general colouring, and the
males by having the primaries black to the end, instead of being mottled
towards their tips. Wing seven inches and three-quarters in the
males, and tail six inches : in the females^ the wing measures seven and
a half, and tail five and three-quarters : the males have the crown and
nape dark brownish-ashy, minutely mottled, with black dashes along the
middle of the crown, as in the preceding species, and the scapulariea
and wings are similarly marked with black, set off with bright rufons-
white, the margins so coloured being narrower than in the others:
breast and fore- part of the belly dark, and contrasting strongly with
the light buffy tint of the hind-part of the belly, vent^ and lower tail"
coverts, which last tend to be whitish in one specimen, barred with

]845.]] or UiUe knonm species of Birds. 207

black : the primaries UDderneath have no rufoaa bars whatever, or
mottlings either at base or tip, and these are but imperfectly developed
towards the base of the tail anderneath : bat the white spots on the
middle of the primaries, and largely tipping the two oater tail-feathers,
are the same as in the others. There is also the same conspienoos
white mark in front of the neck, which is represented by pale buff in
the female. The latter is altogether browner and less ashy, particular-
ly on the head and neck ; but is still considerably darker than the
males of the other species ; the contrast of the dark breast and pale belly
and vent is much less decided ; the primaries are barred at base with
rufous, and slightly so towards the tip, the white of the male being re-
pfesented by a contracted rufous bar ; and the two outer tail-feathers
are also much more narrowly tipped, with rufesoent instead of pure
white. On comparison of these three species together, particularly
with a good series of specimens, it is impossible not to regard them as
distincty however nearly allied.

The other Indian species are—

4. C. asiatieus^ Lath. ; C. pecioralis, Cuv., Levaillant, Ois. d'J/r., pi.
XLIX, apud Did. .Class. ; Bombay Goaisucher^ Latham. This small,
comm<HVJind generally diffused species over the country, is allied in co-
kmring to the three last, but has the tarse bare, and the sexes are alike in
idmnage. 3Cr Jerdon is << still inclined to believe that the species
figured by Hardwicke and Gray as asiaUcus, differs from the common
kind. I obtained/' he adds, *< what answers to this very closely in
the north of the Deocan. It differs from the common one in its larger
size, more prevalent and lighter grey tint of the plumage, and in some
other trifling points ; but I have now no specimens for comparison.'*
Could this have been C. mahrattensis ? I certainly think there can be
little doubt that Hardwicke's figure was taken from a Bengal specimen,
and is meant to represent the common species. C. affinis, Horsfield, is
a Javanese species allied to the present one, and this and macrurtis are
the only kinds noticed in Dr. Horsfield's list of the birds of Java ;
while, in Sumatra, Sir Stamford Raffles also speaks of but ** two va-
rieties, one with much brighter and more marked colours than the
other. They are very abundant in the neighbourhood of Bencoolen."
Different species of Lyncomis^ as well as of Batrachostomus, are how-
ever common in the vicinity of the Straits, and the former of these
would have been classed by Raffles in Caprimulgus.

208 Notices and Descriptions of various new QNo. 159.

6« C, indieus, Lath., Jerdon : C. cinerasoens^ Vieillot. This hand-
some species appears subject to considerable variation, in its dimension^
depth of colouring, greater or less development of the black on its
upper-parts and inversely of the fulvescent* white upon the 8capnlaries»
wing-coverts, &c., and also in the amount of the rufous barring
upon the primaries, which I think is generally less developed in the
smaller specimens of both sexes : its tarse is feathered ; and all the
caudal feathers of the male, except the middle pair, have a white
spot near the tip, which in the female is scarcely indicated, in ge-
neral, these white spots have only a slight dark margin, tipping
the feather ; but in one variety before me, with wings as much ss
eight inches and a half long, the white on the tail-feathers is some-
what contracted in quantity, and has a dark border fully half an
inch in breadth, tipping each feather*. This species is, I think,
commonest in the sub-Himalayan region, but it extends sparingly over
India generally, and I have once known it to be shot in the neigh-
bourhood of Calcutta.

6. C. moniicoiuSy Franklin : Great Bombay Goatsuckery Latham.
In this the male is distinguished by having its two outer tail-feathen
on each side wholly white, to near the tip, whereas in the fenale these
are barred throughout rufous and black. The female is also paler than
the male ; and both sexes are, throughout, more uniformly, minutely
mottled ashy, than in either of the other species, this plainness of colour-
ing being relieved by the pale rufescent hue of the borders of tbe
middle scapularies, by a white throat-band in the male, considerably
less bright and contrasting in the female, and by the white on tbe
primaries and tail of the former. With C. asistieus it accorde in har**
ing the tarse naked, and a sort of collar surrounding the neck. I have
twice obtained it near Calcutta, and it appears to be sparingly difiused
throughout the country from the Himalaya southward ; Capt Abbott
has also sent it from Arracan.

* The specimen here adverted to is probably not Indian, but from the eastward ;
and may prove to be of a distinct species : and one Neilgherry specimen forwarded by
Mr. J«rdon has also much the appearance of being distinct ; in this, the ashy portion
of the plumage is much more albescent than usual, contrasting strongly with the
black, and there is scarcely a trace of rufous, except some broken bars of thiscolonrat
the base of the primaries ; a row of whitish spots bordering the scapularies shew v<r7
conspicuously ; the white spots on the tail-feathers are larger than usual ; and the
wing measures but seven inches and a quarter long : it is a remarkably handsooie
bird.

1M5.3 or Uule knanm species of Birds. 209

That very beaatiful bird, the Lyneomis csrvinieeps of Gould, extends
so high as Arracan, where it is not very uncoBunon ; and the Society
also possesses L. Temminckii from Singapore. Bombyeistama FuiUr^
fiMtt, Hay, J. A. S. X| 573, is identical with Batraehosiomus
imriius, (V. and H.), Gould, which name it must bear; and with
respect to the supposed Podargus (or rather Batraekostamus) javensis
of Coorg, in southern India, noticed in XI, 798, Mr. Jerdon has since
inftHTBied me that " it is not that species, but a smaller one, about eight
or nine inches long ; of which," he remarks, ^* I have seen a Malacca
specimen. It is, I think, distinguished in Lesson's < Manuel d^OmMo-
logiey* which I do not possess. I can perfectly trust to the descrip*
tions I received of it, and hope yet to obtain specimens." Most pro-
bably it is the Podargus (now Batraehosiomus) sUUatus^ Gould, Proe.
ZooL Sac, 1837» p* 43, which, together with Bat auritus and B.ja^
veusis (t. Podargus comuius^ Tem.), inhabits the Malay peninsula.

Cypseiida. SwifU. To Mr. G. R. Gray is due the credit of first
separating the Hirundo esculenta^ Lin., (the constructor of the cele-
brated edible birds'-nests,) from the group of Swallows, and transfer-
ring it, as a new and distinct generic type, CoUocaiioy to that of the
Swifts : and I can now announce a second representative of this type
ID the Hirundo unieolor of Jerdon, since regarded by him as a Cgpselus,
upon which I altered the specific name to concolor (•/. A. S. XI, 886), as
there was previously a Cypselus unieolor ; but it must now rank as Col^
iocalia unieolor, (Jerdon). From the true Swifu (Cypselus), the
spedes of Collocalia dtfier in their considerably less robust general
conformation, in their comparatively very slender tarsus and toes,
and in having the hind- toe distinctly opposed to the three an-
terior toes. Mr. Jerdon ^'only found this remarkable species in the
Neilgherries, and about the edges of the hills. It fiise in large
iocks, and with very great speed." The Society has also received it
from Darjeeling. Is it, therefore, exclusively a mountain species, which
constructs glutinous nests like the other, but in mountain caverns?
Or does it resort* like its congener, to the caverns of clifis overhanging
the sea-shore during the breeding season, in this case being perhaps
the constructor of the edible nests which are found on the western coast
of the peninsula of India, as, for instance, in the group of small islands
about eight miles west of Vingorla (which is 276 miles from Bombay),
commonly known as the Vingorla rocks, where about a hundred-

210 Notices and Descriptions of various new O^o. 159.

weight of these nests are prodaoed annually ? To myself, who» long ago,
following the accounts of the edible nests being constructed by a true
HirundOf found this a stumbling block to one of the distinctions
which I drew between the Swallows and the Swifts, I confess it yielded
some gratification to find my suspicions in this matter completely con-
firmed ; for the nest of Cypselus apus of Europe is essentially similar
to that of CoUocaUa escuienta, containing a large quantity of glutinoos
matter, which there can be no doubt is secreted by the very large sali-
vary glands of the bird* ; whereas in Hirundo vrhica^ the nests of which
species might be thought to present a marked analogy, the fabric is con-
structed of mud, or, as Vieillot remarks, worm-casts are selected for the
purpose, and the birds may be commonly seen on the ground collect-
ing material of the kind, many of them often resorting to the same wet
place, — the Swifts, on the contrary, never descending to the ground
at all. The two groups of Swallows and Swifts present a very
remarkable instance of what is termed analogy^ or mere external
and superficial resemblance, as opposed to affinity^ or intrinsic phy-
siological proximity. Though externally resembling in their adaptive
characters^ as a Cetal may be said to present a superficial resemblance
to a fish, sufficient indeed to have occasioned the group to be still popu-
larly classed with fishes, the difference between the Swifts and Swallows
is analogous in kind, but inferior in degree, to that which necessitates
the Whales and Porpoises to be removed altogether from among fishes :
and the same intrinsical similarity in the essential structure, which com-
pels us to arrange the Cetals in the class of mammalia, equally approxi-
mates the Swifts to the Trochilida (or American Humming-birds),
while the Swallow conformation is modelled on the ordinary passerine
type, from which it deviates only in external modifications, having re-
ference to mode of life. In the Swift, as in the Humming bird, the
entire structure, alike as regards the rudimental anatomy and the ex-
ternal characters, concurs to produce the maximum of volar power ;
whereas n the Swallows there is no such general concurrence^ but the
potency of flight seems entirely due to the development of the wings
and tail, the sternal apparatus in no respect differing from that

* Vide Mag* Nat. Hist. 1834, p. 463 et seq* The nests there described passed into my
possession, which enables me to state that the gelatinous matter was in greater quan-
tity than would appear from the account given by Mr. Salmon* The fact is, it con-
stitutes the basis of a Swift's nest, by which is made to adhere the various light sub-
stances gathered in the air by these birds, when such are blown about on a windy day.

ISiS.] or UiUe kn&nm spedei of Birth. 2 1 1

of a Sparrow, or a Robin, bat retaining the peculiar configuration ob*
servable throughout the passerine type, in all its integrity. It would be
out of place here to pass in review the principal details of conforma-
tion of the groups to which the Swifts and Swallows respectively belong,
and to shew how essentially they differ in the whole siceleton, in the ali-
mentary organs, that of voice, &c. ; even to the structure of the feathers,
and to the circumstance that the Swifts (like the TrockUida and Ca-
prumdgtda^) have never more than ten redrieeSf while the Swallows
have twelve, in common with the whole of the grand series of passe-
rine birds, save one or two peculiar exceptions, of which the Drongo
(or King-Crow) group is the most remarliable one. I shall conclude
for the present by indicating the Indian species of Cyp9eUd€B.

These fall under four generic heads.

Aeanih^lis, Boie, v. CkaturOf Stephens : from which Pailene of Les-
ion, containing the Indian species, is placed separately by Mr. Gray,
for reasons with which I am unacquainted. Mr. Hodgson, also, says of
the Himalayan species, that it is " certainly not a Chaiura as defined by
Stephens. I have set it down in my note book," he adds, *' as the type
of a new genus, called Hirundapus" (a bad hybrid name, which holds
priority over Pailene). Mr. Swainson, however, had long previously fi-
gored the same bird as a true Chatura, from which genus I cannot per-
ceive in what it differs.

1. Ac. gigatUea, (Tern.) Inhabits the Malay countries, extending
northward to Arracan, where it is of rare occurrence ; it also occurs in
the Neilgherries. Chin albescent, but not forming with the throat a large
pore white patch, as in the next species ; and the spinous tail-feathers
are much stouter, with their webs tapering, and not terminating ab-
ruptly as in the other.

2. Ae^ eaudacuta^* (Lath.j: Hirundo fusea^ Shaw; Chaiura ausiralis,
Stephens ; Ch. macroptera^ Swainson ; Ch. nudipes, Hodgson, •/. A, S,
V. 779; Cypselus feuconotus, Mag, de ZoqL 1840, Oie., pi. XX, and
figured in the Souvenirs, &c. of M. Adolph^ Delessert, pt. II, pi. IX,

* The Himalayan bird is certainly the macroptera of Swainson; and as this is
given u a synonym of Latham's eaudaeuta by Mr. Strickland, {An. and Mag. N. H.
184% p. 3S7,) on the authority of the drawing upon which Latham founded his
<lcicription, now in the possession of the Earl of Derby, I of course bow to the decision
of that naturalist; though Latham's statement that it has the ''forehead white, and
thint Tery pale dusky," certainly applies better to Ac. gigantea of the Malay countries.

212 Little known species of Birds. [No. 159.

p. 25. Himalayan ; and said to be the same as the Aastralian species,
though I qaestioQ if specimens have ever been actually compared.
Cypseltts, Illiger. Ordinary Swifts.

1. C. melhay (L.) : C alpinust Tern. Neilgherries, Travancore, &e.;
also Southern Europe.

2. C. pacifieua ( ? Lath.) : C. australis {f), Gould, Proc. ZooL Soe.
1839, p. 146 ; vide J. A. S. xi, 886. Penang.

3. C. leuconyXf nobis. Closely allied to the last, and deicribed
from a Deccan specimen in /. A. S. zi, 886 : a Calcutta specimen
(being the only one which I have yet heard of) flew into the window of
a house in Garden Beachy and was obligingly presented to the Society
by Willis Earle, Esq. It minutely agrees with my description of the
other, except that the wing is a quarter of an inch longer. The
marked difference in size of foot from the preceding species forbids
their being considered of one kind.'*'

4. C. affinis, Gray» Hardwicke's ///. Ind. Zool: C. mpa/«n«», Hodg-
son, J. A. S* V. 780. India generally i very common about Calcutta.

5. C. palmarum, Gray, ibid. India generally ; common.
Collocaliay G. R. Gray.

1. C. unieolorf (Jerdon) : Cypselus concolart nobis, J, A. S* xi, 886.
Darjeeling ; Neilgherries.

2. C. esculenta, (Lin.) Malay coasts : common in the Nicobtf
islands ; and Captain Phayre informs me that *' it is to be had on the
rocky islands off the southern part of the coast of Arracan :" it also
(or possibly the preceding species, vide p. 210,) breeds along the Mala-
bar coast, and so far northward as the Vingorla rocks.

Macropteryx^ Swainson.

M. hlecho, (Raffles): Cypselus Umgipennis, Tem. Central and
Southern India, and Malay countries.

Mr. Swainson gives, as a second species, the Sumatran Cypsehs com*

tuSt Tern., which I have not seen; and as a third, C. myitaeeuh

(Lesson,) who applies the name Pallestre to the genus.

July I2th, 1845. E. B.

^ There is a Cypselus viHatus, from China, figured in the 2nd series of i»dis»
and Selby's ' Illustrations of Ornithology/ which I believe is allied to C. pacificft* i^)
and C. liuconyx ; but it has the tail forked to the depth of an inch.

(To be continued.)

213

Obtervai^ms on the rate of Evaporation on the Open Sea ; with a de-
icripiian of an Instrument ueedfor indicating its amount, ^ By T.
W. LaidIiBT, Esq.
. It has often occurred to me, thai a simple and convenient inBtru.
ment for ascertaining the actual amount of exhalation from a humid
8iurfM», could not fail of being essentially serviceable to meteorologi-
cal science, as well as to the arts. An instrument for this purpose
was indeed contrived by the late Professor Leslie^ to which he gave
the name Atmometer: but though very ingenious, and fulfilling
tolerably well the intentions of the inventor, it fails in a very impor-
tant qualification of scientific instruments, simplicity of construction
and use ; and is consequently less frequently employed in observing
the condition of the atmosphere in reference to dryness and humidity
than is desirable. The instrument is thus described by its inventor •
The Atmometer consists of a thin ball of porous earthenware, two or
three inches in diameter, with a small neck, to which is firmly
cemented a long and rather wide glass tube, bearing divisions, each of
them corresponding to an internal annular section, equal to a film of
liqaid that would cover the outer surliace of the ball to the thickness
<tf the thousandth part of an inch. The divisions are marked by por-
tions of quicksilver introduced, ascertained by a simple calculation,
and they are numbered downwards to the extent of 100 to 200; to
the top of the tube is fitted a brass cap, having a collar of leather,
and which after the cavity has been filled with distilled water, is
aerewed tight* The outside of the ball being now wiped dry, the in-
strument is suspended out of doors, exposed to the free access of the
air. In this state of action the humidity transudes through the
porous substance just as fast as it evaporates from the external sur-
&ee ; and this waste is measured by the corresponding descent of
water in the stem. If the Atmometer had its ball perfectly screened
from the agitation of the wind, its indications would be proportional
to the dryness of the air at the lowered temperature of the humid
inrface ; and the quantity of evaporation every hour as expressed in
thousand parts of an inch, would when multiplied by 20 give the hy.
grometric measure. The Atmometer is an instrument evidently of
extensive application, and of great utility in practice. To ascertain
with accuracy and readiness the quantity of evaporation from any

214 Evaporation on the open Sea. LNo. 159.

surface in a given time^ is an important acquisition^ not only in meteo-
rology, but in agriculture and in the various arts and manu&ctures.
The rate of exhalation from the sur&ce of the ground is scarcely of
less consequence than the fall of rain, and a kno;(i?ledge of it might
often direct the fBurmer advantageously in his operations. On the
rapid dispersion of moisture depends the efficacy of drying houses,
which are often constructed most unskilfully, or on very mistaken
principles."

The instrument which I have found to answer extremely well,
consists of a glass tube the bore of which must be equable^ and may
vary from one or two- tenths of an inch in diameter to a much larger size,
according to the pleasure of the constructor. If the bore be not quite
equable, its varying capacity must be ascertained and allowed for on
the scale to which it is to be attadied. One end of this tube, after
being ground quite flat and smooth, is to be closed with a porous sub.
stance, which space permits the free transudation of water, but yet not
so freely as to accumulate in drops or to fall. I find that common cedar
wood possesses the requisite quality, and forms a plug which swells
so as to become water*tight ; and by its porous structure permits the
fluid to permeate as rapidly as the atmosphere removes it from the
exposed surface. The tube thus prepared, and filled with distilled
water^ is to be attached to a scale divided into fiftieths or hundredths
of an inch, upon which as the evaporation proceeds and the column of
fluid descends^ the daily amount of evaporation may be conveniently
observed. No other precaution seems necessary in using this Atmometer
than to supply it with very pure rain or distilled water ; for any saline
matter it might contain would be deposited upon the evaporatiog
surface^ and would interfere very materially with the result. To
prevent error from this source, the entire tube should be very frequent*
ly (sfty every time that it is filled^) washed in a quantity of clean
water to remove accid^tal impurities ; and the cedar plug occasion-
ally renewed.

The following observations made with this instrument on board of the
ship ^' Southampton," on her recent voyage from England to Calcutta,
showing the rate of evaporation on the open sea in tropical latitudes,
ihay not be altogether uninteresting to such as are curious in oceanic
meteorology* The instrument was suspended in a shaded part of the
vessel, exposed freely to the action of the wind.

18tf.J

Evaporaliati <m the mien Sea.

316

Latitude.

Longitude.

Barometer.

Thermome-
ter.

Evaporation
in

inches.

O 1

o t

October 3

37 158

40 31E

29.00

0.40

37 13

44 05

30.13

0.38

37 19

47 50

30.10

051

37 09

5151

30.06

0.33

36 38

56 14

30.08

0.40

3558

59 50

30.12

0.45

35 39

62 21

30.16

0.40

34 46

67 19

30.14

0.40

33 24

7147

30.02

0.41

3151

76 04

29.94

0mS5

30 27

79 05

30.09

0.38

28 54

,82 87

30.16

695

0.87

*i6l4

84 25

30.18

0.39

24 25

86 10

30.19

71.5

0.60

23 02

86 14

30.24

0.62

2106

86 18

30.10

0.72

J825

86 34

30.11

0.68

16 39

86 36

30.10

77.5

0.70

14 42

86 54

30.11

0.70

1107

86 54

30.00

0.78

739

86 34

30.09

0.80

3 57

87 10

30.05

84.5

0.82

208

87 19

30.04

83.5

0.75

109N

87 57

29.97

0.86

4 19

89 32

30.00

82.5

0.98

6 41

90 16

30.00

1.00

7 58

90 40

30.00

84.5

1.U6

850

90 52

30.02

81.5

0.88

935

90 40

30.00

0.72

November 1

10 55

9015

30 00

0.93

1310

89 56

30.03

0.82

14 15

90 00

30.05

0.40

1520

89 80

30.05

0.70

17 25

88 49

30.00

0.67

1884

88 24

30.00

0.72

18 52

88 45

30.02

0.68

19 23

88 53

30.10

0.88

19 18

89 37

30.00

1.15

19 56

89 43

30.00

1.25

20 37

89 00

30.00

1.24

2054

89 12

29.95

1.32

Sandhe*

aids.

29.98

1.04

The reader will perhaps be surprised at this high rate of evaponu
tion on the open sea, differing as it does so widely from that deduced
by M. Von Humboldt from his own observations with the hair hy.
grometer. That accomplished observer gives the following results^
calculated from a formula of M. d' Aubuisson> which does not how.
ever appear to meet all the circumstances of the case.

216

Evaporation on the open Sea.

[No. 159.

Latitude N.

Thermometer,
(Cent grade.)

Hygrometer.

Quantity of water
evaporated per hoar
in millimetres.

o f

3910

14.5

0.13

3036

20.0

85.7

0.14

29 18

20.0

83.8

0.16

1853

21.2

81.5

0.20

16 19

22.5

0.13

12 34

24.0

0.13

10 46

25.4

0.12

11 1

25.0

0.09

** It follows from these researches/' says M. Von Humboldt, ** that
if the quantity of vapour which the air commonly contains in our
middle latitudes, amounts to about three-quarters of the quantity ne.
cessary for its saturation, in the torrid zone this quantity is raised to
nine- tenths. The exact ratio is from 0.78 to 0.88. It is this great
humidity of the air under the tropics, which is the cause that the
evaporation is less than we should have supposed it to be from the
elevation of the temperature."

These inferences seem scarcely compatible with the actual indica-
tions of my instrument. But it must be observed, that besides being
imperfect as a hygroscope, De Luc's instrument takes no cognizance of
the important agency of the wind in promoting evaporation. So fu
from diminishing, the exhalation from the surfoce of the sea would
appear to augment very rapidly as we approach the torrid zone : my
observations exhibiting a daily average of 0.398 in. from latitude
2T 15' S. to latitude 24<> 25', and of 0.809 in. through the tropics.

217

Oft the Alpine Glacier, Iceberg, Diluvial and Wave Translation Theo-
ries; with reference to the deposits of Southern India, its furrowed
and striated Rocks, and Rock basins. By Captain Nswbold,
M. N. I., F.R.S. Assist. Commissioner Kurnool, Madras Territory,
With a plate.

The geological reader in looking over the published remarks of ob-
senrers on the geology of Sonthem India, can hardly fail being struck
with the almost utter absence of any notice of a boulder or drift
formation, analogous to that which prevails to a great extent over the
mrfaee of the northern parts of Europe^ and in the higher latitudes
of the opposite hemisphere. Nor has any undoubted testimony been
hitherto laid before the geological world as to the existence in Southern
India of the polished surfaces of rocks, grooves, parallel strisB, perched
blocks, truncated conical mounds, tumuli, and long ridges of gravel,
which have been so conspicuously pointed to in Europe by Agassis
and others, as unquestionable evidences of the overland march of gla-
ders conveying boulders, gravel, sand, and loam to great distances.

Gharpentier and Venetz were the first, I believe, to promulgate the
theory — that ancient Alpine glaciers extended far beyond the pre-
sent limits of glaciers from the Alps to the Jura, and were the means of
eonveying the gigantic angular granite and crystalline blocks of the
former chain, to the strange position they now occupy on the lime,
stone slopes of the latter ridge, over the intervening valley, which is
one of the deepest in the world and upwards of 50 miles in width.
To account for the extension of glaciers across this valley to the Jura,
now entirely destitute of glaciers, M. Gharpentier supposes the eleva-
tion of the Alps to have been much greater than now : and it ap-
pears certain that moraines, striee, and furrows, considered to be
indubitable marks of glacial action, can be traced in the Alps to
great heights above the present glaciers, and to great horizontal dis-
tances beyond their lower limits. The Jura, which is only about
one-third of the average height of the Alps, presents similar marks of
gladal action to the Alps, although now entirely destitute of glaciers.

It was subsequently objected, that the phenomena of erratic boul-
ders extend over the northern and more temperate zones of Europe,
Asia and America, in flat tracts, and consequently could not be ac

218 On the Alpine Glacier, Iceberg, [No. 159.

counted for by so local a cause as the former greater elevation of the
Alps.

To explain these difficulties, M. Agassiz repudiates the former
greater elevation theory; and supposes a former colder state of
climate prevailing over the countries^ in which the phenomena of
boulders are founds and which covered them, as is now the case in
Greenland, with sheets of ice and glaciers.

He supposes that most of the large longitudinal beds of unstratified
gravel we see in the North and West of England, Scotland and Ire-
land, to be the lateral morainesi and the conical truncated mounds
and insulated tumuli to be the terminal moraines of ancient glaci«9,
(left by their retreat^ and not pushed forward by them as supposed by
Charpentier,) broken and washed by debddee occasioned by the thaw-
ing of the ice, masses of which were thus drifted in diverging direc-
tions, conveying the large insulated angular masses of rock called er-
ratic blocks to the strange situations we now see them occupying.

Circles of such angular blocks seen round the summits of conical
peaks are supposed to be occasioned by the glaciers lodging on it and
melting on it. They are usually called perched blocks.

The rounded or bouldered blocks and gravel are supposed to have
been produced by the trituration of the masses of ice and glaciers
upon the subjacent surface, and the angular blocks which are found
on the surface of the rounded materials, to have been left there by the
melting of the ice. The interstratified deposits of mud, gravel and
sand are considered to be a re-arrangement of the smaller materials of
a moraine produced by the water resulting from the melting of a
glacier. M. Agassiz observed polished surfaces, furrows, cavities, and
strise in the rocks of England, dec. where the boulder formation ex-
ists, similar to those in the Alps, and considers them also as proofs of
the former existence of glaciers in those now temperate regions.

The longitudinal furrows, &c. were observed by Seffstrom and others
to have a general direction of N. W. and S. E. in the rocks of Lapland,
Norway, and Sweden ; which, added to the circumstance of blocks of
granite confessedly from the mountains of Scandinavia being found im-
bedded in the boulder and drift of the eastern coast of England and
Scotland, over Russia and Germany to the borders of Holland, and
other reasons, induced many distinguished geologists to suppose the

1846.] Diluvial and Wave Translaium Theories. 219

boulder deposit to have been produced by a deluge, or great oceanic
wave from the north. These parallel furrows were supposed to have
been caused by the passage of grarel propelled by this great current,
and hence called " diluvial schrammen."

Botlingky however, has observed that some of these Scandinarine
furrows have centres of dispersion (like those formed by modem gla*
eien on the Alps,) ecmformable to the major axis or longitudinal di*
netion of each valley. In the south of Sweden, he says, the striSB in-
dine southerly ; but on the east of Lapland northerly to the Icy ocean ;
he itates, the general direction of the striae on the summits of Scandi-
mvia to be from N. W. to S. E. Those also in North America ob.
served by Professor Hitchcock, have a similar direction.

M. Agassis repudiates this diluvial theory as applicable to the
drift and parallel furrows on the rocks of England and Scotland,
which he states to diverge every where from the central chains of the
country, following the course of the vallies; and that the distribution
of the blocks and gravel follows similar directions, each district often
having its peculiar debris traceable in many instances to its parent
ndc at the head of the valley. Hence, he infers, the cause of the trans-
port must be sought for in the centre of the mountain ranges, and
not from a point without the district. The Scandinavian blocks in
the drifi of England, he confesses, may have been transported on float,
iogice.

M. Agaasiz does not deny the power of water to produce the fur-

rows, and polishing of rocks in sUii; but states he has not been able

to find them on the borders of rivers, lakes, and on sea coasts; that

the effects produced by water sure sinuous furrows proportioned to the

hardness of rocks; not even, uniform, polished surfaces, such sm those

piesented by rocks acted upon by glaciers having both loose gravel

under them, and pebbles and pieces of rock firmly set in their lower

surface like teeth in a file, and which are independent of the compo-

sitionof the stone: Ibr, he states, wherever the moveable materials,

which stfe pressed by the ice on rocks in sit(i, are hardest, there occur

independent of the polish, striae more or less parallel in the general

direction of the movement of the glaciers. Thus, in the neighbourhood

of glaciers, are found those polished round bosses which Saussure dis*

tlnguiahes by the name of ' roches matUannie.' The most striking Ilea.

220 On the Alpine Glacier, Iceberg^ QNo. 159.

tures in the distribution of Alpine glacial striae are thus diverging at
the outlets of the vallies^ and their being oblique and never horizontal
on the flanks, which they would be, were they due to the agency of
water, or floating masses of ice.

The cause of their obliquity M. Agassiz ascribes to the upward
expansion of the ice by the freezing of the water infiltered into the
crevices and pores of the glaciers, and the descending motion of the
glacier itself which he considers produced by this expansion of the
mass and its gravitation.

From the resemblance in shape, and the interior arrangement of
the beds of the so-called diluvium of England^ France and Germany,
that of the moraines confessedly produced by existing Alpine glaciers ;
from the presence on these rocks of furrows, &c. resembling those
now produced at the bottom of moving glaciers ; their radiation from
mountain centres of elevation and coincidence of direction with that
of the vallies down which glaciers would descend ; their obliquity just
described, and from the existence on the Jura limestone of basin and
funnel-shaped cavities, and small indentations similar to those
seen forming at the bottom of glaciers by small and temporary cas-
cades descending through cracks and chasms in the ice, and from the
association in those regions of these Alpine phenomena, which M.
Agassiz contends are inexplicable on any theory of aqueous action apart
from ice ; he infers, as already stated, that very large portions of the
now temperate regions of the globe have for a long period been covered
with ice and snow.

A few shells of an arctic character, which have been found in the
boulder deposits of Scotland and North America in addition to the above,
constitute all the evidence we have of the period of intense cold, on
which rests the Alpine glacial theory as applicable to the boulder de-
posits ; and which M. Agassiz ingeniously imagines^ accounts for the
extinction of the mammoths which flourished in the warm period
immediately antecedent, and the appearance of their frozen remains in
arctic glaciers. The frozen period was followed by the more temperate
human epoch.

The views of M. Agassiz on the origin of the boulder deposit have
met with powerful support from Dr. Buekland, and partially from
Mr. Lyell.

1845] Diluvial and Wave Translation Theories. 221

Mr. Murchison, the late diatingukhed President of the Geological
Society, and M. Vernenil, reject the Alpine glacial theory, considering
it as totally inapplicable to the boulder formation overspreading great
part of Russia ; the large granitic and other crystalline blocks of which
(previously alluded to) have attracted so much attention from the days
of Pallas up to the present time. These blocks, which have all been
evidently derived from the North, are shown to have been deposited
under the sea, or in other words, on a sea bottom, since they cover
marine shells of the post-pleiocene period. The smaller blocks of the
detritus are in general carried to greater distances than the larger ; the
distance being sometimes 1000 miles from the parent beds to the
N. W. As in the English deposits, although a large proportion con-
sisted of material brought from a distance, yet it contained a con.
siderable portion of the detritus of the subjacent and adjacent rocks,
the nature of which was often indicated from the colour of the
superficial clay and sand. Mr. Murchison and M. Vernenil obser-
ved no instance of any substance having been transported from
5. to N. except by the modern action of streams, and by local causes
dependent on the present configuration of the land.

In room then of the Alpine glacial theory these authors substitute
that of Icebergs. They believe that these great blocks have been transm
ported on floating icebergs set adrift from ancient glaciers supposed
to have existed in Lapland and the adjacent tracts; from the northern
chains of which the blocks were originally dislodged and impelled
southwards into the sea of that period, in which the post-pleiocene
shells they are now seen to rest upon were accumulated.

They did not observe any parallel strise or polishing of the surfaces
of the rocks of Central Russia, but describe the most southerly of
the scratches which came under their notice near Petrazowodsk on
the Lake Onega.

They consider these marks may have been caused by the ice-floes
and detritus dislodged and set in motion by the elevation of the
northern continental masses, grating upon the bottom of the sea ; since,
if they were caused by the overland march of glaciers, the glaciers
must have been propelled from lower to higher levels, which is
against what they conceive to be an axiom, viz., that the advance
of every modern glacier depends on the superior altitude of the
ground behind it.

222 On the Alpine Glacier^ Iceberg, [No. 159.

Mr. Darwin's researches in the opposite hemisphere show, that
the boulder formation, with all its European features, exists over ex.
tensive regions of South America ; in the plains traversed by the Rio
Santa Cruz (Lat. 50° S.) ; Tierra del Fuego,— including the Straits
of Magellan and the Island of Chiloe (Lat. 48'' S., Long. 78*' W.)
Mr. Darwin, in order to account for the interstratification of regular
beds, the occasional appearance of stratification in the mass itself
the juzta-position of rounded and angular fragments of various sizes and
kinds of rock derived from distant mountains, and the frequent
capping of gravel, follows Mr. Lyell in believing that floating ice
charged with foreign matter has been the chief agent in its formation ;
but^ he adds, it is difficult to understand how the first sediment was
arranged in horizontal lamins; and coarse shingle in beds; tvAUe
stratification is totally, and often suddenly, wanting in the dasdy
neighbouring till, if it be supposed that the materials were mere.
]y dropped from melting drift ice ; and he is disposed to think that
the absence of stratification, as well as the curious contortions de-
scribed in some of the stratified masses, are mainly due to the dis.
turbing action of the icebergs when grounded.

He believes also, that the total absence of organic remains in
these deposiU may be accounted for by the ploughing up of the
bottom by stranded icebergs, and the impossibility of any animal
existing on a soft bed of mud or stones under such circumstances. In
conformation of the disturbing action of icebergs, Mr. Darwin refers
to Wrangel's remarks on their effects off the coast of Siberia.

Professor Hitchcock, and more recently Mr. Lyell, have made us
acquainted with the great extent of the boulder formation in North
America accompanied by parallel stris, and rounded and polished sor.
faces of the harder rocks in sitfi ; also vast longitudinal mounds
and detached tumuli of detritus. The prevailing direction of the
striee observed by the former, as before observed, assimilated to that of
the furrows on the Scandinavian rocks, viz., from N. W. to S. £•

The advocates of the iceberg theory consider these ridges and
mounds of unstratified gravel (the moraines of the glacialist) to have been
the wreck of icebergs fi^ighted with the detritus of circumpolar rocks,
and stranded on the shores of seas, estuaries, or lakes ; or as having
been deposited in deep water by floating icebergs melting as they
approached warmer seas. The interstratified deposit, and occasional

184o.]| Diluvial and Wave TranslaHon Theories. 223

Bi^teantnce of stratification in the mass itself is supposed to be occa-
aioned by a re-arrangement of these materials by subsequent aqueous
eorrents, which are ako referred to as having given to the mass the
configuration of longitudinal ree&, or truncated mounds.

It is well known, that the present general course of existing ice-
bergs is from the polar regions towards the equator. These icy masses^
as we glean from the writings of Scoresby and other navigators^ are
seen drifting in the open seas — laden with beds of rock and stone,
brought from polar regions, the weight of which has been conjectured
at from 50>000 to 100,000 tons, which are deposited as they dissolve
either on the bed of the ocean, on the coasts, or when they ground.
The breadth of one of these icebergs was about 15 miles.

A recent letter to Colonel Sabine from an Officer of the Antarctic ex-
pedition, states^ that in Lat 70*^ immense cliffs of ice were met with,
forming the sea borders of an enormous glacier, above which, at
a great many miles distance, the top of the mountains were visible.
The ice-cliff was constantly breaking and tumbling down, and the
disjointed masses congregated and floated away towards the equator
to 60^ S. Lat., where an enormous extent of iceberg was constantly
to be found floating, and not fixed to any submarine ridge. Here they
were constantly depositing by dissolution immense quantities of
stones, earth, and other materials brought from the distant antarctic
mountains. Still more recently, Mr. Hopkins the mathematician,
8iq>ported by Professor Sedgwick, accounts for much of the drift on
the flanks of the Cambrian chain without invoking the aid of glaciers
or icebergs, by the hypothesis of the transporting forces of diverging
waves of an ocean consequent to the elevation, or paroxysms of
ekvaiion, by which the mountains were raised from its bed. Such
waves he terms '' waves of transkUion," because they are found not
to rise and fall like common waves, but wholly to rise, and maintain
themselves above the level of the water. The powers of such waves
have been reduced to laws by the experimental . researches of Mr.
Scott Russell, which prove that a sudden elevation of a solid mass
from beneath the water causes a corresponding elevation of the sur-
fiice of the fluid, which infallibly produces a wave of translation of
the first order.

Arguing that this wave is propagated with a velocity which varies
with the square root of the depth of the ocean, Mr. Russell determines

224 On the Alpine Glacier^ Iceberg, QNo. 159.

the velocity of wave transmission^ and that the old idea of the power
of waves extending only a little way down in the sea is not true as
touching waves of translation, — the motion and power of which is
nearly as great at the bottom as at the top.

He further demonstrates^ that the motion of this wave do^ not fluc-
tuate, but is continuous and forward during the entire transit of its
length ; hence a complete transposilion is the result of its movement :
and the wave of translation, he says, may be regarded as a mechani-
cal agent for the transmission of power as complete and perfect as the
lever or inclined plane.

Reasoning from such data, Mr. Hopkins states, that currents of 25
and 30 miles an hour may be easily accounted for, if repetitions of
elevations from 160 to 200 feet be granted ; and with motive powers
producing a repetition of such waves he infers, from mathematical and
mechanical arguments, that there would be no difficulty in transport-
ing to great distances masses of rock of larger dimensions than any
boulders in the north of England.

Mr. Hopkins has also shown by mathematical analysis, that the
overland march of glaciers over large and flat continents is a theory
founded on mechanical error, and involves conclusions irreconcilable
with the deductions of collateral branches of physical science.

Such is a brief abstract, derived principally from the Geological So-
ciety's Proceedings of the theories which divide the geological world
at home regarding the boulder formation. General Briggs, perceiving
that India was silent, while Europe, part of Asia, and America in both
hemispheres, were contributing to the general stock of knowledge on
this head, applied to some of the local authorities in the East to lend
their aid in eliciting information, and among others to the Marqais of
Tweeddale and General Fraser, to whom I have already transmitted
some memoranda on the subject, at their request.

On mature consideration, however, I am of opinion that the mode
I have adopted, of publishing an abstract of the theories on the
subject which agitate geologists, with a notice of the leading feature
of the principal alluvial deposits of Southern India as far as hitherto
known, followed by a short description of the characteristics of the
true boulder formation, by which it may be recognized when found in
Southern India, and a list of the chief points to which the observer's
attention should be directed in gaining useful information on this bead,

1845.] ZHluvial and Wave TransloHofi Theories. 225

in langaage free, as far as possible, from scientific terms, will serve
more effectually towards the carrying out General Briggs's views.
Existence of erratic Blocks and Bouiders in Southern India,

It was Brongniart, I believe, on the authority of M. de la Luc, who
first spread among the Savans of Europe the idea that the rounded
blocks of granite around and in the vicinity of Hydrabad in the plains
of the Deccan were true erratic boulders; but after a close and ex-
tended examination of them, and of the rocks for many miles around,
I am convinced that these blocks are in sitd (in place,) or nearly so,
since they invariably rest upon> or near a granite of the same petro-
graphical character ; and that they owe their prevailing globular and
rounded form to a process of spontaneous concentric exfoliation which
I have endeavoured to explain in a paper published in the Journal
of the Royal Asiatic Society for 1840.

The granite and limestone blocks at Puttuncherroo near Hydrabad,
around Bangalore, Bellary, and in the Carnatic, wherever examined
closely, I have found to be of precisely similar origin.

The formation in all these localities is one of granitic rocks, gneiss,
and other contemporaneous crystalline schists, penetrated by dykes of
basaltic greenstone, varying in structure from compact basalt to crys-
talline and porphyritic greenstone. The disposition of the last rock
to assume a globular or spheroidal shape in weathering is still more
remarkable than in the granite, which is often seen in rhomboidal and
eaboidal masses, the angles of which are first blunted, and then round-
ed off by the exfoliation.

The Hydrabad granite blocks are seen lying singly, in confusedly
piled heaps, or resting as tors or logging stones on bare bosses of a
similar granite ; and sometimes buried or half.buried in a soil formed
by their own weathering.

At LuDJabunda, in the Kumool district, I observed a single globular
mass of granite about 18 feet in circumference, resting on a bare boss
of the same rock, from. which apparently the slightest touch would
send it rolling to a considerable distance in the plain, and of which
the subjoined diagram may serve to convey some idea. CSee plate,
Diagram, No, I, J

The globular block A, is cemented to the boss beneath it B, by a
paste a, arising from the decomposition of the granite itself, a felspathic

226 On the Alpine Glacier, leeherg, [tJJo. 159.

clay hardened by the oxidized iron of the miea and hornblende.
Now the block A, might either roll on to a gneiss, or any other crystal,
line schist at C, or become baried in the alluvion at D. It might be
set in motion not only by a stroke of lightning or an earthquake^
but by process of its own weathering or that of the boss beneath it, or
the washing away by the rain of the cement. The distance to which
it might roll would be in proportion to the height and inclination of
the boss on which it rests, the slope of the plane at its base^ and its
own weight and roundness.

In some cases the very rocks from which these globular masses
originated, and on which they rested, have weathered £uter than the
block itself, and have crumbled into the mounds of angular gra-
velly detritus so common over the whole granitic area of Southern In-
dia, known to native cultivators and well-diggers under the names of
MhuTTum and Ghurruet in contradistinction to the nodular lime-
stone gravel called Kunker.

Amid this granitic gravel evidently formed in sitA, in some places
near 80 feet deep, are occasionally found the hardest spheroidal nuclei
of granitic and basaltic rocks. These blocks have longer resisted the
decay which has worn down the rock of which they once formed veins
or dykes. Such is also the case in the angular gravel arising from the
weathering of gneiss and the other crystalline schists, in which gra-
nitic and basaltic greenstone so extensively occur in the shape of
dykes or veins.

That this gravel has not travelled far is evident from the angular
nature of its component fragments, and that it is not the transported
angular gravel of a moraine, or iceberg, is evident fr(»n the feet
of veins of quartz, extending into it from the less weathered portions of
the subjacent granite, or crystalline schists from which it is derived.
The vein A A, in the diagram is of quartz, which though crumbling
like white sand under the pressure of the fingers, is still seen to pre-
serve its relative place and proper direction in the gravelly detritiu
above B, from the subjacent gneiss. (Seeplaief Diagram^ No, ILJ

Ovoidal fragments of granite sometimes occur imbedded in gneiss
at considerable distances from any surface granite, which when ex-
posed by the decay of the imbedding rock, might in an apparently ex-
clusive gneiss area be difficult otherwise to account for than as a trans-

[846.] DiluffM tmd Warn TfmOmHon Thef>ries. 227

portMi Meek ; b«w0f«r, wiierever we find gneks in Southern India, the
gfuite n never fttr distant

Dr* fienia is inclined to consider the blocks of granite seen scattered
on the tableland of Mysore about Oolcondapatnam, from the confused
Bitore of their arrangements and the circumstance of no hills of any
Bsgnitnde being apparent, as erratic boulders ; but those which I
asmined in this locality proved to be out-croppings of granitic veins or
iyket in the gneiss which bases this plain, deserted by the softer and
more easily weathered imbedding schist. Granite and greenstone are
tbvndant in the surrounding country ; and even when not apparent^
its existence must always be suspected in the hypogene areas of
Soathem India. It must also be borne in mind^ if ever granite blocks
are found at great distances from the rock whence they were derived,
that the surfiice of India, like that of other countries, has been sub-
jected to waves of translation caused by elevation to the surfiice.

Insulated bloeks, knobs, clusters of granite, like those in the gneits
ttd granite plains of Hydrabad, Mysore and the Camatic, have never
been obsMved on the snr&oe of the extensive diamond limestone and
nsdstone patches of Guddapah, Kumool and the South Mahratta
oMmtry :— and only one small fragment of the former rock on thegra.
flitie and hypogene areas, at the base of the Neilgherries by Dr. Ben.
tt, which alone cannot be pronounced with any certainty as a true
boulder, or transported pebble, as it may have been dropped from the
collection of a traveller.

It will be proper to observe, that the Hindus like the ancient Bgyp.
(ians, in the construction of their temples and statues, manifest a parti.
>lity for granite and basalt ; blocks of which they will convey to great
distances, if quarries should not happen to be at hand. I have seen
a psgoda entirely built of granite amid the Moslem ruins of Bijapore,
^bidi is situated on a plain of the overlying trap 16 or 17 miles from
tlie nearest granite rocks.

The Egyptians, who had the advantage of easy water carriage,
^sported enormous blocks of granite from the quarries of Syene to
Wer Egypt. In the desert, as in the jungles of India, are fre-
^Hently seen fragments of this rock scattered on the sands-^the only
Knudning vestiges of former structures, and many miles distant from
^ parent rocks.

2 K

228 On the Alpine Glacier, Iceberg, [No. 159.

The tabular summito of the diamond sandstone and limestone in
Southern India are often covered with rounded pebbles, which an ex-
amination always proved to be those loosened out of the sandstone pad-
ding stones in weathering.

Diamond gravel. Beds of gravel, in which I have observed trans-
ported pebbles which could not be accounted for by causes now in ae-
tion^ occur in the valley of the Pennaur underlying a steep bed of
teguTy and in other diamond tracts. The diamond is found often as a
transported pebble in this gravel; and pits are sunk through the regur
to it. It is stratified, and bears more resemblance to the gravelly beach
of a lake in the size of its pebbles^ &c. than to the incongruous mass
of a boulder bed. It rarely exceeds a couple of feet in thick-
ness.

River terraces, S^c. Along the courses of the great rivers of India,
for instance that of the Bhima, are occasionally seen river terraces
and beds of gravel beyond the highest present floods and inundations.
Some of these may be owing to shifts in the course of the rivers them-
selves^ but others indicate the passage of more extensive currents of
water than at present.

Captain AUardyce informs me, that the Moyar valley, a mile or
more in breadth at the base of the Neilgherries, bears evident marks
of having been once the channel of a river, now only visible in an
insignificant stream, which even in the monsoon does not occupy one-
hundredth part of its breadth. There are beds of sand and gravel
in the cross valley of Baugapilly, through which a rivulet cuts its
way, which could never have deposited this gravel on the summit
of the Ghauts. Captain AUardyce writes me, that traces of a diluvial
current exist on the summit of the Neilgherries, upwards <^ 6,0(K) feet
above the ocean's level ; that the gravel and loam there are arranged
in such a manner, as could only take place by deposit from water,
the gravel being lowest, in a thin distinct and separate stratum, with
the lighter loam covering it to the thickness of several feet.

Lateritic gravel. Beds of a red ferruginous gravel, principally de-
rived from the true laterite, for which they have been mistaken, exist
on the table-lands, near the flanks of the Ghauts and in the maritime
plains at their bases ; but none of them assimilate the character of the
European boulder formation. Some of them are recent alluvia, bat

mS^J Diluvial and Wave TraHilaiion Theories. 239

othen are evidently derived from the denndation the laterite has
been subjected to daring the elevation of the land.

Sand bede of Baroche underlying the Regur, Beds of a yellowish
brown micaceous sand, I am told by Professor Orlebar, underlie the
regur near Baroche> extending inland as far as Ahmednugger, in
whieh DO fossils have been found.

The Black day of Coromandel The cities of Madras and Pondi.
eherry, and other places on the Coromandel Coast, stand on an alluvi-
om which overlies beds of bluish black clay, interstratified with layers
of sand and reddish clay. The sur&ce black clay imbeds marine shells
of existing spedes.

These beds sometimes extend several miles inland. The bluish black
clay appears analogous to the r^ur^ which will be described below.
This accumulation of clays and sands it is probable extends with little
intermission along the coast to the mouth of the Ganges^ where they
will be interrupted probably by the fiuviatile deposits of this mighty
river. The delta of the Ganges, as &r as we can gather from one
boring experiment, consists at Calcutta of a series of dark clays and
sands ; they rest at the depth of 350 to 485 feet on a gravel com-
posed of rolled pebbles of granitic crystalline rocks, similar to those
described by Captain Cautley at the base of the Himalayas. The
uppermost strata contained portions of peat, kunker, and fragments of
trees, and the lowest beds, beneath a layer of dark carbonaceous
day under which were fragments of coal, fossilized portions of tur-
ties, and the caudal vertebra supposed to be that of a Saurian. In
the arenaceous beds above this, more than 200 feet from the sur-
&ee, were found the lower half of a humerus, which Mr. Prinsep
sapposed to be like that of a dog, and a fragment of the carapace
of a turtle. From the granite and gneiss gravel it has been inferred
by Dr. M'Clelland, that bold mountains of these rocks existed in close
proximity to the present site of Calcutta. The superimposed carbo.
naceous beds indicate a marshy surfoce clothed with vegetation,
prior to which the currents which brought down the gravel, he thinks
were arrested by the contemporaneous subsidence of the mountains
and the lowering of the bed of the Ganges.

The Regur deposit. In a paper read before the Royal Society,

several years ago, I have already endeavoured to show that the re.

markable loam called Regur, is not a fiuviatile deposit, as supposed by

230 On the Jdpme Glackr, lcehev§y [No. 15a

Vo^ysey, nor a modern ailuTiam washed from the -teap recks aathotigii ft
by Christie, but a deposit from water in a state of repose, or nesEly ao*

The principal objectiou lo these theories of Voyaey ttadChriatie are,

\st. The great extent and geognostic position of the regur, eovev-
ing both the tabular summits of hills, the bottoms of vallaes, vast
almost treeless plains, with a sea-like. hocinoiitality of surluie, often: §mt
removed from the least ii^nience of existiiig riy«rs an4 low floodsL Its
occurring in broad detached patches often far above Ihe loskg, narrow
lines of drainage.

2nd. Its. underlying occasionally all present alluYial soils, those of
the trap included, and filling up chinks and fissures ia the asafejsb-
cent rocks.

Zrd. Its overlying granitic, bypogene, santibtonc^ Mmestone^ sub4
lateritic rocks indiscriminately, far distant from tr8f» csicks whieh it
also overlies.

4/A. All trap rocks in weathering, redden by peroxidation of ilie
protoxide of iron they contain ; and usually form fifst a bfown, then
a reddish-brown, or cc^ee-coloured mL

5ik, The regur, at a distance from trap rocks, iadbecte no frmgr-
ments of them, even of their hardest and most lasning ^ein stuff,, ssscls
as quartz, jasper, heliotrope, agate, and calcedony. It often imibeds
fragments of whatever rocks it may happen to onretlie, or whxdt aae
washed into it.

6ih* The remarkable homogeneous character and colour of the regar
over large areas, when free from recent £nreign admixture, to* whicb it
is subject^ as well as to re-arrangemen(r from present rains and Idiuu
daticms.

ti&. The different colour, generally shades of brown and red,, of the
present fluvial deposits of Southern India, and their varying charac-
ter over small spaces even.

In common with some clays of the boulder deposit, the stratificattoa
of the re^ur is rarely apparent, and always obscune* Boa this
phenomenon I have observed in ^e mud of tanks over which the
water has been deepest and stillest, and where the particles deposited
were of a very fine and homogeneous character. In proportion as the
nature of the mud deviated from these conditions, and became inter-
mixed with silt and sand, the layers of deposition became mose aod
more distinguishable.

1845.] DUuvud and Warn TnamheUm Theories. 3S1

Tins I ako remarked to be the case with tbe mod ef the Nile, par.
UcoJarly ia the upper parts ef ita ooorsa through Egypt : but oa the
Ddta where the slope of the bed is still less, aad the motioii of the
stieaBa lasguid, the stratification is more obscure.

Both in tbe mod of the Nile, and in that of the tanks ef India
vhere nsBoal layers of deposition may be strongly marked, the
hfff^n nf monthly, weekly er daily deposition are indiistinct or not
to be traced ; hence the interior of the annual layer individually has
an niffitmtified appearance. The same is obsenrable in the structure
of seme individual beds of enormous thickness, as in the thick-bedded
aandatones, in which, if the particles are of a homogeneous nature,
siratififiation is hardly visible even on tlie fiu» of clifb 200 or 300 ftet
high.

it B posstfale that Jhe regwr^ which is often thirty feet thick,
Irent its generally unstratified aspect and homogeneous diaracter-*
imsiisiwing no interstratified layers of sand or pebbles, was the result of
one period o£ deposition. In areas where stratification is said to/ be
more distinct^ for instance in Baroche, the deposit has probably under.
gPBie re^crangenient by subsequent currents. It is just such a de-
penii as mig^ be expected to result from deep waters charged witk
tib« debcia both mineral and vegetable of a submerged continent^
tlie eoaaer and heavier firagOMnts of which, as well as the silts and.
amad, had been deposited or left behind by the slowly retardisi^.
eorreni. At length, as the waters gradually gained their level, the
turbid fluid, now charged with nothing but the very finest and light.
eel paeticks, would move so slowly as to admit of their gradually
flinkiag and being deposited on its bed. Above the first cataract and in
Upper Egypt, where the current is more rapid, the deposit is usually
of a eoarse,. and more silty nature than in Lower Egypt and on the
I>elta, and not of so carbonaceous a nature. Many of the finest par.
tides are never deposited at all by the Nile in Egypt, but are carried
€Mit with ila waters, and discolour the Mediterranean upwards of ^^
■Hies ixQVEL its embouchure. The ses water firom its great ^>eoific
gravity adds to the obstacles against depoution. The deposit of the
Kile in some parts, as well as those of some tanks in India, not only
resembles the regwr in external appearance and colour, but also in^
chemical character. All three contain a considerable portion of vegeta.
ble matter.

332 On the Alpine Glacier, Iceberg, [^^o. 159.

In colour^ extent, and position, the regur resembles the Tchornoi
Zem covering the plains of Russia ; and in apparent want of stratifi.
cation that fine yellowish-grey loam called Loess, which covers great
part of the basin of the Rhine in beds sometimes 300 feet thick.
The regur, however, contains no fossils except such present fresh-
water and terrestrial shells as are washed into it. If we suppose the
regur to be the deposit of annual inundations from ancient glaciers
(which Mr. Lyell takes to be the origin of the Loess) charged with
the impalpable mud of their moraines, we must examine the Ghauts
and Vindhyasy or even the Himalayas below the influence of pre.
sent glaciers, for the usual signs of glacial action. The soil now
washed down from these mountains, I need hardly observe is reddish
and sandy, very different from the deep black or bluish black regur :
but this difficulty may be perhaps got over by supposing the vast forests
which clothed them during the warm ante- glacial period to have
perished with the mammoths they shaded, and to have been ground
down by glacial action with the felspathic, silicious, calcareous, and
ferruginous particles of the subjacent rocks.

If we suppose it to be a deposit from former great inland lakes, in
most cases we shall have to raise up rock barriers, not now in existence,
to separate them from the sea and the adjacent lower lands, to sink
them again; and, in fact, to change the entire physical configuration of
the country. If it be considered a deposit .thrown down on a sea bottom
from melted icebergs, we ought to see in it large angular fragments of
distant rocks, which no observations as yet show to be the case.

The non-fossiliferous character of the regur is common to the mud
of the Nile, and may be regarded as indicative of the great trituration
the debris composing it has undergone ; and probably that chemical
and other causes have combined to prevent fossilization in this soft
mud.

Rock^bcuins. Rock-basins, the giant's caldrons of the Swedes, are
seen occasionally on the summits of table-lands in Southern India, as
for instance near the Kurnool frontier, with Baugapilly, and in other
localities both in granitic and hypogenic rocks, and in the diamond sand,
stone and limestone in situations above the present action of running
water ; but when we see them in the fact of being excavated by water
alone in the rocky beds of the principal rivers of India during these
periodical rises and falls — conditions favourable to their production—-

1845.] Diluvial and Wave TranslaHon Theories, 233

there appears no necessity for introducing the action of glaciers to ac
count for their presence, which I have explained in detail elsewhere.*

Furrows and parallel Slriai. On and near the tops of the diamond
limestone ranges of Pycut Puspulah, and Yairypilly — not far from the
granite junction near Oooty, I have seen the surface of the rock tra-
versed hy furrows, having a common direction of N. by E., resembling
those attributed to the action of glaciers ; but in Europe even, where
these marks are so numerous, the opinions regarding their origin have
been latterly so conflicting, that their unsupported testimony ma^ be
regarded as much in favour of the diluviaiist or of the advocate of the
waves of translation, as of the glaeialist and icebergian.

I have since had opportunities of carefully examining the grooves
which cover the surfaces of the diamond limestone rocks near the
eaves of Billa Soorgum, Kurnool frontier, and on the summits of the
hills between Dhone and Yeldroog in the Bellary district*

The limestone slabs in these localities dip slightly towards the east,
and are in some places completely scored with furrows, which observe
a parallelism over confined spaces. These furrows vary from the
lize of a goose quill in diameter to two inches, and are often separated
by scabrous sharp edged ridges. They are often traversed by others
at oblique and right angles so close together that the dividing ridges
are cut up into a number of pointed cones, or pyramids.

It is quite evident from the sharpness of the edges and points of the
ridges, that the grooves were not formed by the passage of gravel moved
under the enormous weight of a glacier. The interior of the furrows
has frequently to the eye a smooth apparently water.worn surface ;
bat if the point of the finger be moved gently along the bottom, it will
(tften be found to undulate. These undulations have been caused
evidently by the wearing down of the lips which formerly separated
the now continuous trough into a chain of oval or spheroidal cavities
exactly resembling in miniature the chains of rock basins worn in the
granite and gneiss of the Toombuddra.

Like them the majority of these furrows are attributable to watery
eronon. They occur usually on the lines of almost imperceptible
fissures in the rock-like vallies of erosion thus. CSee Plate, No, III. J

* Vide Proceedings of Geological Society, 184l-2«

234 On the Alpine Glader, Iceber^y C^fo. 159.

They not only traverse the upper horisontal tarface of the strata,
but eonetimee oontiiiue over the ed^es down their Tertieal extremity
or sides, which is attributable to the action of water slowly trickliDg
over the edge^ and not propelled beyond the edge to a distance from
the vertical side, as is the case in a cascade.

The water, in many instances^ seems to have acted corrosiveiy as
well as erosively on the substance of the limestone ; for in examin.
ing some rain water, which had lodged in one of the eroded cavities^
I found it held a considerable quantity of lime in solution* Carbonic
acid might have been supplied from atmospheric exposure or from the
surrounding dense vegetation, which the rains refresh. The solvent
power of water too in tropical climates is considerably enhanced, not
only by the increased temperature of the water itself, but by expan-
sive action of the sun's rays on the atoms composing the rock-bare
surfaces, some of which I have found often heated to 130^ The solid
layers of schist are free from such furrows, but have a scabrous water-
worn appearance, as if the limestone had been washed away.

Any pre-existing cavity in the surface of the rock forming a lodge-
ment for the water, assists in the erosion of hollows. Strings of iron
pyrites frequently drop out in weathering, leaving a chain of oval
cavities, which the water soon works down into a continuous furrow.
Others commence in the perforations of lithodomous molluscs, or those
of existing snails which apparently by the chemical action of their
juices take up the lime necessary for their house and food, and are
found in numbers adhering to the surfaces and sides of the lime-
stone.

It is evident, however, that some of the furrows were scooped out
prior to the last displacements of the rock strata, as they partake of
the faults and dislocations ; and it is probable they were formed during
the elevation of the land by sea water, as it is well known that sea
water by the decomposition of its muriates and sulphates produees
furrows and wrinkles on the surface of limestone, particularly near
the water's edges, and subsequent rains have no doubt acted in extend-
ing and modifying them. The entire absence or great comparative
rarity of such furrows on the sur&ce of the associated sandstone, may
be regarded as a further indication of the chemical action of the water
in producing the furrows on the limestone.

J845.] Diluvial and Wave TranslaHan Theories. 235

In some places on the sides of the hills, the ends of the limestone
beds protrude in steps ahout a foot high^ down which the rain water
has evidently flowed in a series of miniature cascades, which have
hollowed out on the slabs below little cavities, and depressions not
unlike the lapiax of the Alps, marked by a a in the subjoined section,
a] diagram, (PkUey Diagram^ No. I V.J

Varidaied eurfacea. The surface of some slabs exposed to the air
I observed to be perfectly variolated with circular, shallow cavities,
caused by the dropping out of cubic crystals of iron pyrites. These
crystals may i>e seen in every stage of decomposition, — first tarnishing,
and losing their bright metallic lustre ; next passing into a bronze.
coloured hue : they then become liver-coloured, and lastly pass into
a loose rust-coloured dust* At this stage, the limestone becomes
stained by the rust nearly in semi-circles, marked a a a a, on each
side of the crystal marked 6, in the Diagram b, representing the de.
composing crystal of pyrites. (Plate, Diagram, No. F.J

In the next stage, the angles between a a a a, become discolour.
ed, and the whole stain takes a circular form ; then the centre occu.
{ned by the crystal drops out, and finally the whole circular space,
occupied by the rust-coloured stain.

Mark of ancient raine. Surfaces of rock variolated with such
cavities must not be set down as having been indented by an " ante,
diluvian shower," though marks exactly similar to those supposed to be
the effects of ancient rains exist on slabs below the surface covered
by other layers, the lower planes of which exhibit the casts of these
impressions.

Ripple marks. Ripple marks are seen in similar situations to the
rain-drop impressions, but are much more frequent in the associated
sandstone.

Stri(B and Furrows on granite and gneiss. Striae and furrows on
granite, gneiss, &c. in situations beyond the reach of present aqueous
causes are rare, and, from their conforming to the hard and softer parts
of the rock, cannot be set down- as marks of glacial action. These
rocks, as before observed, are much subject to exfoliation by atmospheric
exposure ; consequently ancient marks, if they did exist, are liable to
early obliteration on the air.exposed surfaces of such rocks.

2 L

236 On Ae Alpine Glacier, Iceberg^ [No. 159

Concluding observations. In reviewing all these deposits I can
trace nothing analogous to the true boulder deposit, or to the action
of glaciers, in the marks and furrows of the rocks jost described.
There is nothing which cannot be explained by existing causes, or by
the supposition of the action of water during the oscillations which,
there can be no doubt, the face of India has undergone.

The power of the wave of translation is written in large characters of
denudation over its entire surface ; or they stand out in bold relief
in the bare dykes and naked clustered masses of basaltic greenstone
and granite, and also in the harder beds and veins, which we see every
where abruptly projecting, like the trap of the Wrekin in Shropshire,
from the softer abraded strata around. It is visible in some <^
the larger gravels, and in the isolated horizontal beds of sand*
stone and laterite capping hills separated by denuded vallies and
plains.

To the gentler effects of the waters retiring as the land gradually
emerged from beneath, aided by minor oscillations^ may be attributed
the former wider channels of the rivers^the river terraces, the inland
marine clays and sands on the coast of Coromandel^ indicating former
estuaries, and coast lines and inlets^ now dry land ; beds of gravel
and loam in the interior ; furrows and rock basins beyond the reach of
existing aqueous causes, and ancient marl-bottomed lakes now desic-
cated, the existence of which is now only indicated by fossil lacus-
trine deposits, for instance, those of Nirmul.

The agency of floating ice in conveying the granite blocks we see
imbedded in the mud and gravel of the east coast of England, from the
mountains of Scandinavia across the intervening seas, is now pretty
generally admitted.

One remarkable feature of the boulder formation still remains to be
noticed, viz., its extreme rarity in warm latitudes^ and its great pre-
valence in the cold and temperate regions of both hemispheres. In the
northern hemisphere we behold it stretching from the icy regions of Scan-
dinavia to about 55% and overspreading part of North America; and in
the Southern world it has been traced, with precisely the same fea-
tures as in Europe, in Chili and Patagonia, between 41^ South and
Cape Horn.

1845.] Diiuviai and Wave Translation Theories. 237

This fact is considered by Mr. Lyeli to be in favour of the
leebei^ theory, since the masses of drifting ice in approaching warmer
ktitndes would melt from the warmth of the sea and the action of
the son's rays on their sides and sur&ee, and discharge their rocky
freight long before reaching the equator.

The abeence of the boulder formation in Southern India would add
weight to this supposition; but until it has been more thoroughly
aearehed for, we must not jump to this conclusion* Its comparative
rarity, however, from the evidence even at present before us, cannot
be doubted. I have sought for this formation, and also the old Silurian
beds in countries yet nearer the equator, in the Malay peninsula^ but
in vain : — also on the southern and eastern coasts of the Mediternu
sesD, the Red Sea, Egypt, the southern parts of Asia Minor, and the
PeDinsula of Sinai ; but with similar success.

To support both the glacial and iceberg theories a period of intense
eold in regions where a temperate climate now prevails, is supposed, as
before stated, to have existed at a period between the extinction of
mammoths and the creation of man. This cold, it is natural to
imagine, would influence more or less the climate of countries nearer
the equator, and among the rest that of Southern India ; but as yet
proofs of this decrease of temperature in the latter, either by the
existence of the fossil fauna of more temperate or colder aones, the
marks of ancient glaciers, or by other physical Dacts, are a desidera.
torn.

For recent marks of glacial action, the Himmalayas afford perhaps
the best examples nearest the equator, and should be examined with
care for ancient moraines, and other indications of a former greater
extension of the iee and snow which now cover portions of the peaks
and sides. If they be found, the next step will be to ascertain whether
ittch extension of iee is aseribable to a former general decreased tempe.
latore of the surface as it now exists, or from a former state of greater
elevation of these mountains. It has lately been argued, from the
eireamstance of fossil animals of warm climates having been found
in tertiary Himmalayan deposits now above the line of snow, that
the Himmalayas must have been elevated about 10,000 feet since
the extinction of these races. It is, however^ possible that dnr-

238 On ihe Alpine Glacier, Iceberg^ [No. 159.

ing the warm climates of the tertiary period these animals may have
existed at the heights at which they are now found, or even at greater
elevations. The geologist will do wel]> while marking the scale of
former glacial extent in these instructive regions, to note also the
nearest approach, habitual or casual, to the snow line of the subtro-
pical animals at its base. The monkey and tiger have been observed
close to it, and the elephant at no very great distance — 31° N. lat. 4000
feet above the sea. Tropical perennials are blended with a flora al-
most alpine, and the palm and the pine are seen in juxta-position.

The sub-Himmalayan gravel beds entombing the remains of the
sivatherium, mastodon, elephant, rhinoceros, hippopotamus, dec., and
the mastodon beds in the valley of the Nerbudda, are all stratified,
and belong apparently to the tertiary period immediately antece-
dent to the supposed cold epoch of the boulder formation. (Vide
concluding page at the end of Desiderata.)

India, stretching down from its vast icy barrier on the north to the
verge of the equator, presents a wide field for physical observation ; a
thousand-times-told fact, but one which should never be lost sight of.
Its surface has been but partially examined, and many large tracts
wholly unexplored by the geologist. A few years only have rolled on
since the great mammifers in its deposits, just alluded to, were
brought to light by the vigorous researches of Captains Cautley, Durand,
Baker, and Doctors Falconer and Spilsbury ; and still more recently it
has been proved by the splendid fossil discoveries of Messrs. Kaye and
Cunliffe in the limestone beds of Pondicherry and Verdachellum, that
Ihe cretaceous sea extended over the surfiice of at least part of Southern
India. Major Franklin has referred the diamond sandstone and lime-
stone to the Oolite and Lias, though at present they cannot be satisAu^
torily classed with these rocks until further fossil evidence be obtained.

The scantiness of these beds — the utter absence of the new red sand-
stone, magnesian limestone, and other aqueous deposits so abundant
in northern zones, has been long subject of enquiry. The Silurian
strata are also entirely wanting, and appear to thin out like Ihe boul-
der formation as the equator is approached ; although the temperature
of the Palaeozoic seas, if we may judge from the number of their corals,
must have been like that of the carboniferous period, warm. I am

1840.] Diluvial and Wave Translation Theories. 239

not aware^ that the Silurian strata extend in Europe further south
than the vicinity of Constantinople.

Are we to infer that these enormously thick aqueous deposits,
abounding in the remains of marine creatures of strange and un*
known aspect, since the appearance of which whole generations of
others equally strange have replaced them and been obliterated in
torn from the face of creation, have existed on the granites and trap
of India, but have since been swept off by waves of denudation: or
must we suppose, that these old fossiliferous rocks never had existence
in Southern India and tropical countries, from the peculiar chemical
eonditions, or temperature of the seas which then covered them?
Or, that the surface of these tropica] regions was above the water at the
time these deposits were going on in the then warm coraUproduciog seas
aroond the arctic zone ?

It may be also advanced, that the hypogene or crystalline rocks,
which prevail so much in Southern India, are nothing less than the
metamori^ic fossiliferous strata of these periods. It must, however,
be objected against this theory, that no fossil has ever been found in
them, even at great distance from granite or apparent Plutonic action.

It has already been inferred, from the rarity or absence of the
boulder formation in Southern India and other tropical and subtropi.
eal countries, that these regions enjoyed a warm climate during the frozen
period which M. Agassiz assigns to now temperate climes during the
boulder epoch. As there is no evidence of the climate of the former
regions during the Silurian period, or of the then chemical condition of
thier seas, it will be advisable, until better information be elicited, to
refer the absence and the rarity of the older fossiliferous groups of
Europe to the hypothesis of partial or entire elevation during such
periods. Of denudation there is ample proof in subsequent periods, as
before stated. We search in vain (the chalky spots near Pondicherry,
Terdachellum, and a few other marine patches — isolated, yet significant
monuments — excepted,) for remnants of these former fossiliferous cover-
uigs. I have not been able to trace a pebble from their detritus in any
of the conglomerates, breccias, or gravel beds which now exist on its
sur&oe. If such beds ever did occupy the surface, their wreck for the
most part must now lie in the bed of the ocean.

240 On the Alpine Glacier, Iceberg, [No. 159*

If Southern India was above the ocean daring the depoBition of the
Silnrian rocks, and other fossiliferous strata, of which no remains now
exist on its surface, it must have subsequently undergone oscillations
by which portions, or the entire mass, including the tract occupied by
its grand physical feature, the Western Ghauts, were submerged, and
again elevated to their present position with the laterite which, there
is every reason to believe, belongs to the tertiary epoch. That at
least a portion of Southern India must have been a sea-bed during
ihe cretaceous period, has already been shown.

Some of the points latterly touched upon in this pi^er involve, it
will be perceived, the highest and most interesting problems in phy«
sical geology, which cannot be solved until much more evidence be
accumulated regarding the geology and former physical phases of
tropical and sub-tropical zones- It has been ascertained beyond doubt,
that the seas of ancient periods formerly covered a &r greater extent
of what is now land in the northern hemisphere, and the contempo-
raneous and much greater relative prevalence of land within or near tbe
tropics is supposed, in order to account for the higher temperature
which, it is evident, then prevailed in northern regions ; bat the pre-
sent decrease of which is accounted for by Sir John Hersdiel on
astronomical grounds, viz., that the mean amount of solar radia-
tion is dependent on the eccentricity of the earth's orbit, that this
eccentricity is, as has been for ages, actually on the decrease; and
with it the annual average of solar heat radiated to the earth's
surface.

Desiderata on the Boulder formation. In the hope of eliciting
information touching the occurrence of the boulder formation in
India, (and how much might be obtained even from persons en-
tirely ignorant of geology now crossing India in every direction,) I
have drawn up a few plain directions by which the true boulder
formation may be readily distinguished from the ordinary graveli
and alluvia of the country ; and have added a list of the principal
points on which information is required.

Sir John Herschel has well observed, '' What benefits has not geo-
logy reaped from the activity of industrious individuals who, setting
aside all theoretical views, have been content to exercise the use-

1345.] Diluvial and Wave Tramhuion Theories. 241

fill and entertaiiiing occupation of collecting specimens from the coun-
tries they visit." This observation applies particularly to India—*
the geology of which is so little known — where, it is true, there are no
professed geologists attached to our surveys; but where every indivi-
doal has the means and ability of adding his mite to the general stock
of knowledge, without any serious encroachment on his duties or his
pleasures. *' £ven those who run may read" in the great open book
of Nature; and if they read, there is no reason why they should not
note, for the benefit of those who have not the opportunity of studying,
the same pages.*

Boulders and erratic Blocks. The term *' boulder" has been
often misapplied to any loose rounded biock of rock lying on a
plain, or elsewhere on rocks, or the soil of rocks, of which it ori.
gioally formed part. This is not a " boulder" in the geological
acceptation of the term, the block being in sUH; or not distant from
the rocks of which it once formed part. A true boulder is a mass
of rock^ the corners of which have been rounded,, from the size of
a man's head to that of a field^.officer's tent or a small bungalow,
found detached and at a distance from the parent rock of which
it once formed part, and resting on rocks generally of a different nature,
or imbedded in gravel, clay, or loam.

Erratic blocks are fragments of rock, with sharp or little blunted
comers^ found in similar situations as boulders, or what is termed not
*' in siiHy* or transported from their native beds. Among the most
remarkable erratic blocks in the world are the angular blocks of
granite and gneiss, some as large as a Swiss cottage, which rest on
the limestone rocks of the Jura. Now the nearest granite and
gneiss rocks are those of the Alps, from which it is certain those
blocks have been derived, although the great and deep valley
of Switzerland, upwards of 60 miles broad, separates the two
ranges.

* While Captain Newbold was writing this forcible passage at Kunioo], Lieute-
nant Sherwill was forwarding to the Society from Behar the splendid map and col-
lection of specimens which we noted in our Proceedings of January 1845, and
which the Society has most properly brought to the special notice of Government. It
is impossible to give a better illustration of the truth of these remarks.*-£D8.

242 On the Alpine Glacier, Iceberg^ QNo. 159.

A block of mica schist, weighing upwards of eight tons, lies on the
top of the Pentland hills, 1000 feet above the sea, 50 miles from the
nearest mountains of mica schist.

When loose, round, or angular masses of rock are seen on the sur-
face, or imbedded in loam, clay or gravel, the nature of the rock and
that of the subjacent and adjacent rocks should be compared. If
they are similar, it will be difficult to prove the masses true boulders.
If different, the bearing and distance ofthe nearest similar rocks should
be ascertained, and the nature of the intervening ground described whe-
ther intersected by valley, hill or stream, &c. In all cases, specimens
about two inches square or more of the blocks, the adjacent and subja-
cent rocks, and of those from which they are supposed to have been
derived, should be broken off, and wrapped up in strong paper and
carefully marked.

If it be certain that they are 6otf/^^«, or erratic blocks, and not ''m
siid!' their size and shape and number should be described, drawings
made, the arrangement and longitudinal direction of the blocks, their
bearings by compass, the height above the sea if possible, a description
of the physical features of the locality and surrounding country.
When circles of blocks are found round the tops of hills or other
projecting points of the surface, care should be taken not to confound
the old caim-like mounds, circular burial places, old sheepfolds, remains
of forts, or other old enclosures scattered over India, for the circles
called ** perched blocks.'*

The old inhabitants and watchmen (Taliaries) of the nearest village,
should be carefully questioned on such points.

When erratic blocks can be traced to the parent rocks, it should be
carefully noted whether they gradually increase in size as the rocks
whence they were transported are approached.

Gravels, Clays, and Sands of the Boulder formaiion. The
boulder formations of England, (called *' Till" in Scotland,) of
the north of Europe and America, and also that in the opposite he-
misphere, are — 1st, characterized, principally, by their generally unstra-
tified character ; 2nd, by imbedding both large and small, angular
and rounded fragments of rocks of all ages in juxta-position, con-
fusedly jumbled together without reference to the laws of gravitation

1845.^ Diluvial and Wave Tramlatum Theories. 243

or aqaeous deposition, which are often reversed in the boulder gravels
and the heaviest fragments found uppermost ; drdly, the great rarity
oi fosaiis. A few marine shells of an arctic character and the remains
of a mammoth have been found in the till of Ayrshire; arctic marine
shells in that of North America ; and I have observed marine shells
of ree^it species in that of Cheshire.

The boulder formation^ in short, consists of usually unstratifted
accumulations of clay, loam, silt, sand or gravel, often 100 feet thick,
imbedding sometimes great fragments of rock several yards in diame-
ter, torn in many instances from rocks, hundreds of miles distant,
separated by vailies, rivers, and even seas, as is the case in the drift
on the east coast of England, which imbeds granite blocks from the
mountains of Scandinavia. These deposits are sometimes capped by
stratified layers of sand and gravel, and occasionally contain marks
(tf stratification themselves.

The observer having, by these marks, ascertained that he has a
boulder deposit before him, should note its general shape, direction
and dimensions. If it occurs in detached truncated mounds, or
tumuli like the terminal moraine of a glacier ? or like lateral moraines,
in longitudinal ridges with a double talus? the continuity and pa-
lallelism at the same height which is supposed to distinguish the
lateral moraine of a glacier, from the debris disposed along the bottoms
of the valii^ by currents ? The thickness and extent of the gravel,
sand, clay or loam composing the deposit, should also be noted ; the
nature of the beds it rests upon, and also of those above it; of ail
which spedmens should be sent, as well as of the curious pebbles,
sands, days, &c. of the boulder deposit. It also should be noted whether
the stratified portions of the boulder clays or gravels be bent up or
o(mtorted> as if by lateral pressure ; and whether the subjacent beds
have been conformably or similarly disturbed.

The relative proportions of the pebbles of various sorts of rocks com-
posing the gravel, their relative size, degree of attrition or roundness,
should be ascertained ; and the different sites whence originally wash-
ed, searched for in the vicinity.

The gravel, clays, mud and loam should be examined for fossils;
and the condition of the latter, whether broken, water* worn or
entire, and in good preservation, noted.

^ 2 M

244 On the Alpine Glacier, Iceberg, ^No. 159.

Furrows, striated and polished surfaces. The sides and surfaces
of exposed planes, bosses, boulders, erratic blocks and masses of rock in
sitii, should be examined for polishings, strisB, or furrows, more par-
ticularly the surfaces of rocks which are protected by a covering of soil
or turf, which it will be necessary to remove for this purpose. It must
be noted whether the striae and furrows are parallel or otherwise ;
whether oblique or horizontal, and their general direction. If in a
valley, whether they run in the same direction as the valley, and di-
verge from it at the outlet*

Whether they run in right lines, with even, uniform polished sur*
aces, or are shallower or deeper, varying according to the different
degrees of hardness or softness of the different portions, and veins of
the rock, and whether their course is at all sinuous. '' Slickensides"
or the polished and striated surfaces of walls of 6ssured rocks and vaults
caused by their friction in dislocation, must not be confounded with
the marks of general or aqueous action.

The observer should endeavour on the spot to ascertain the possibili-
ty, or impossibility, by the supposition of present floods, rains, landslips,
or other causes now in existence, of explaining these depositions,
furrows, &c. ; and also of the circular, oval, and spoon-shaped cavities,
with smooth sides in rocks, termed rock-basins, which are often united
by shallow gutters. It should be ascertained whether they are or are
not within the reach of the highest inundations, or temporary petty cas-
cades caused by monsoon rains, the periodical risings and fallings of
rivers ; whether empty or containing sand, or pebble ; the nature of the
pebbles, the dimensions and shape of the cavities, and nature of the
surrounding ground.

Engineers, surveyors, and other servants of Government stationed
in districts, will have time to note on all these desiderata as affecting
their particular district ; but it will be sufficient for men who travel
rapidly from station to station, or on the line of march, to bear
in mind that the great points to ascertain are — whether the blocks
and gravel they see are composed of the adjacent and subjacent
rocks or not, their distance from their native beds; to send speci-
mens of all : and to see that the blocks and marks on the rocks are
above the influence of present water-courses, inundations^ and
rains.

IMS.] Diluvial and Wave Translation Theories. 245

Since writing the above^ I have perused Captain Herbert's valuable
report on the Himmalayas, so properly rescued from oblivion, and so
handsomely presented to the subscribers to the Journal of the Asiatic
Society by Mr. Torrens, and find that the author notices deposits of un.
stratified gravel and sand, including boulders some of three feet in dia-
meter, occurring in these vallies ; and also along their base in a vast
accumulation 192 miles long, nearly 10 broad, and sometimes up-
wards of 150 feet thick, and which, from being inexplicable by the
supposition of existing floods and streams, he calls diluvium.

From his description, it seems to me probable, that some of these
deposits and their attendant phenomena have been caused by the
action of glaciers and debacles, the result of their melting.

The whole of them, and the Tals or lakes upon them, are well
worth separate and extended investigation ; and diligent search should
be made on the rocks of the sides, surfaces, and outlets of the vallies,
for the other supposed marks of glacial action just enumerated, and
of which Captain Herbert has given us no information.

Among other promising localities may be enumerated the great
transverse Doons, or vomitories of drainage, through which flow the
^ges, Sutlej and Jumna, the Ramgunga and the Gaggur,from their
bases of glaciers ; the mouths and sides of the glens opening into
tbem ; the vallies of the Burral and Dhaolee, and of the Pubbur
Dear Massooleea.

The immense bed of gravel and masses of rock called the Bhabur,
which stretches along the base of the mountains, succeeded at its southern
^ by the remarkable terrace called the Terrai, both cut transversely
through by present river channels; and the level-surfaced gravel
and sand deposits locally termed Khadirsy through which many of the
streams run, may be particularly pointed out as subjects for detailed
information. Some of the mountain. streams are engulfed, according
to Captain Herbert, in the gravels of the Bhabur ; but probably re-
appear in the line of springs visible at its junction with the step of the
Terrai which, from its striking moistness compared with the dry
ahsorbent surface of the Bhabur, is probably a bed of some impervious
substance, such as clay.*

* See Mr. Batten's valuable observations on the Terrai of Rohilcund and Kemaon,
Journal, Vol. Xlll, p. 887.

246 On the Alpine Glacier, Sfc. Theories. [No. 159.

Outside of this so-called tract of dilavium^ Captain Herbert men.
tions a red earthy marl, with patches of sand and a blue clay^ the
relations of which with the unstratified gravels should be minutely
described, and every search made in them for fossils. The black and
blue clays may possibly bear some affinity to the rtgur in mineral
composition.

I have not been able to consult Professor Royle's admirable work
on the Himmalaya, or Dr. M'Clelland's valuable geological observa-
tions, in the remote part of India where I now write; bat <»nnot
conclude this list of Desiderata without strongly recommending their
perusal to the observer travelling through or located in the interesting
districts of which they treat.

• t

< M

•

fc« ,

'♦'.#:

- . t

. V «

. • »

JOURNAL

or THI

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

Deteription of Caprolaqus, a new Genus of Leporine Mammalia.
By £. Bltth, Curator of the Asiatic Society's Museum, — With two
piates.

In the ^Bengal Sporting Magazine/ for August 1843, p. 131, Mr.
Peanon has described an animal by the name Lepus hispidus, which
I htre long been very desirous of examining, and have sought to pro-
fiore by every opportunity that has offered ; and the Society has at
length been favored with a fine specimen of it by our esteemed corres-
pondent and contributor^ Major JenJLinS) Political Agent in Assam,
to whose JLlnd exertions in procuring this and other desiderata for
tbe Museum, our tlianJLS cannot be too often repeated.

As I fully expected, this animal has proved to be not satisfactorily
s^ssible into Lepus, as the limits of generic divisions are now cur-
rently accepted ; but must be regarded as a third generic type of the
^^portfia, Waterhouse ; or rather, it is a very strongly marJLcd modi-
fication of the L^fus subtype, and not so distinct a form (equivalent
^ Itepus,) as is that of Lagomys. In all \t^ more essential characters
it is akin to Lepus, but exhibiting very considerable modification in
^e various details of its structure. The head is large, the eyes small,
^ whisJLers slight and inconspicuous ; the ears are comparatively very
'^ ; tail the same ; limbs small, and much less unequal than in
^9*''; &nd the claws are particularly strong, straight, and very sharp-
Fointed« being obviously of important use in the creature*s economy :
lutly, the fur is very remarkable for an animal of the Leporine group,
^ account of its harshness, which is well expressed by the specific
appellation At^ii^tw.

No. 160. No. 76, Nbw Sbriks. 2 n

248 Description of Caprolagtu, {}^q. 160*

The skull is macb more solid and strong than in any LepuSt with
every modification that should contribute to increased strengtb^bat
upon the same subtypical model of conformation ; dentition also simi-
lar, but the grinders broader and more powerful, and the incisors and
rodential tusks proportionally much larger : the palatal foramina are
reduced so that the bony palate is as long as broad ; the ant-orbital
foramina are nearly closed by obliquely transverse bony spiculae, cor-
responding to the open bony network observable in Lqms ; the nasal
bones are broad, with an evenly arched transverse section, and are
less elongated backward than in the true Hares,— the maxillaries aod
intermaxillaries corres{U>nding in their greater width and solidity;
zygoma also fully twiee4is strong as in. Lepus ; the super-orbital pro-
cesses continued forward uninterruptedly, the anterior emargioatioD
seen in the Hares bei^g quite filled up with bone, while the posterior
is also much less deep : the ensemble of these distinctions is, however,
far better expressed by. the pencil than by the pen^ and the reader is
accordingly referred to the accompanying figures of the skull of this
animal, in different aspects of view.

What little is known of its essential anatomy is, as might be expect-
ed, identical, or nearly so, with that of typical Lepus, Mr. Pearson
notices that *' the manunae are from six to ten ; coecum very large, ap-
parently almost like a di^ond stomach: womb double.''

The length of the Society's specimen as mounted^ and as represent-
ed in the annexed figurie, is, in a straight line from nose to tail-tiP)
fifteen inches and a half ; ears posteriorly two inches ; tail with hair
scarcely one and a half ; tarsus to end of claws three and three-quar-
ters ; entire length of skull the same : fur of two kinds, that next the
body short, delicately soft and downy, and of an ashy hue ; the longer
and outer fur harsh and hispid^ and consisting partly of hairs anna-
lated with black and yellowish* brown, and partly of longer black bairs,
all the black having rather a bright gloss : lower parts paler or diogj
whitish: toes somewhat yellowish-white: fur of the tail rufescent
above and below, except near its base underneath, and not of the sswb
harsh texture as the body fur.

Mr. Pearson, in his original description of this species, remarks ^
follows : « From the notes of Mr. C. D. Russell, who sent the 8tuffe<i

FULL SIZE.

♦?.

«i 4 ■*

0:-

.» '»

'.•' * %

* t „. •

«»

f-'

«-

l»" k».i4,

> . ♦•

♦ • •«

^ • • . • ^ 4 •-

» • If •» *. II

• )•

• -_•

«*

• •?

4 «

I *

JM5.] a new Oenus of Leporine Mammalia. 249

skin from which the description has been drawn up, I learn that the
animal was killed on the right bank of the river Teestab, close under
the saal forest, and about six miles north of Jelpee Goree. In this
place tbey are said to be very scarce, not above four having been seen
bj Mr. Russeirs party during ten days, though game of all other
kinds was met with in great plenty ; and the following year the same
party killed only one. But towards the hills, as Mr. Russell was told
by the natives of that part of the country, they may be met with in
greater abundance. Of the habits of this animal little is known. Mr.
RoMell states, that < its flesh is white, and eats very much the same as
that of the Rabbit' ; and from the circumstance of his never having
s<K»eeded in patting one up a second time, he is almost certain that
it borrows. It is called by the natives of the country, where it was
met with, by the same name that they give to the Hare.''

Mr. R. W. G. Frith, upon examining the Society's specimen, be<
li«vea it to be the same animal as has been very often described to him
by sportsmen, who have on several occasions been shooting in the ex*
tensive 841 jungle in the district of Mymunsing, called the Muddapore
jungle, on the western or right bank of the Burrampooter river ; but
he never chanced to meet with it himself, though he long ago called
my attention to the existence of such an aniinal in that part.

It is included in Messrs. McClelland and Horsfield's list of the
^lammalia of Assam, Proc. Zool. 8oc. 1839, p. 152, but with the
statement that the ears are " very short, not projecting beyond the
V which is either a mistake, or another species is alluded to ;
though I believe the former to be the truth : Mr. McClelland remarking,
" I am indebted to Lieut. Vetch of Assam for the skin of this animal,
bat anfortunately the skull is wanting. According to Mr. Pearson,
however, it is the same as the skull of the common Hare, It inhabits
Assam, especially the northern parts of the valley along the Bootan
fountains.'* The differences of the skull from that of any Lepus
bave been already adverted to.

I propose that it should bear the generic name CaprolagtUf and be
Accordingly styled C kispidus, (Pearson,) nobis.

250

Report by Lieut. B. J. T. Dalton, Jumor Assistant Commissioner tfil
Assam^ of his visit to the Hilis in the neighbourhood of the Soobanskuii^i
River. From the Political Secretariat of the Gavemwieui of Iniku]
With a map. ■

Pathalipam Moozah, January 6th, 1845.-*Rea€hed this yesterdtf
evening from Luckimpore station, preparatory to setting out on a short 1
excursion up the Soohanduri as far as I can go in canoes, and theoestj
to the nearest Meri villages by land. My object being to pay Tear
Hazaree a friendly visit, and to ascertain if it be practicable - to makes'
more extended tour through the country of the Hill Meris and Aboni
next cold season.

This day will be consumed in making the neeessttry arrangements—'
to-morrow I hope to start. '

January Ith.-^On the Soobanshiri. With quite a fleet of canoes, I
started from the Pathalipam Ghaut at 11 a. ic., and considering t&e*
difficulty of procuring boats and the number of people to be provided
for, there was less trouble, confusion and delay than might have been
anticipated. '

Including my own boat there are eleven canoes, thirty-two boatmen,
and with servants, Tecklas, Katokees and Meri Bhoteas, a guard of
five sepoys ; tiot less than seventy individuals, all packed as tight as her-
rings in a barrel. The canoes are moved by gold-'^ashers who, from
constant practice in their gold-washing expeditions, are masters of the
art of managing boats in the diflicult rapids of this river. Indeed I
am told that no other men could venture to work up in canoes to Sip-
loo Ghaut, whence we are to proceed by land*. The canoes jure veiy
small, and, except a light mat over my boat, no choppers allowed.

Amongst these gold-washers are the Pawwas men, whose business
it is to convey the Hill Meris and their families who annually visit the
plains by this route from Siploo Ghaut to a Ghaut about six' miles
above Pathalipam. These men, six in number, bein^ Inost expert of alli
act as our steersmen.

They use paddles of " Hingoree," short and stiff in com]^aiieon
with the long elastic *' Bhola" paddles of the Suddiah and Debroo
Thooms. They work the boat however exceedingly well ; and no doubt
in the pattern and material of their paddles, they have adopted wh^t
experience has taught them to be most serviceable for the rapids of tins
river. In the shallows I see they chiefly work with the luggee poles*

1845.3 Viiii to ihe HiUs near the Soobamkiri River. 351

is a rapid, but a slight one, immediately above P^thalipam ; and
this to the Hills the river is divided by wooded islands into nu-
menms channels : two of these ialanda are partly oceapied by Ghuttiah
Mens, and they are moreover a froitfnl source of quarrelling among the
gold^waahers. On one of them, called " Indoor" Majali, they brought
^to oor canoes, and commenced making preparations for halting theie.
tl protested against this, as it was not 4 o'clock ; but they asserted very
positively, that there was no ground on ahead fit for encamping on that
we could possibly reach that night, and as I liked the appearance of the
'fisoe, a fine shelving beach of sand and gravel, I gave my consent.

They waited till my cook had arranged his temporary kitchen and
the dinner was in course of preparation, and then their object of halting
on this island was made manifest. A number of gold- washers from
tlie Bor Dolonee Mouzah, on the left bank of the river, were washing a
Uttk above the halting {dace. The Pathalipam gold- washers considered
tbe ground theirs, and vrished me to serve the intruders with a summary
ejectment. The left bank people as stoutiy asserted that they were on
their own ground, and it was by no means an easy dispute to decide.
It depended on which of the channels is the main channel of the river,
bat the river takes to them all in turn about.

Jamtary Stk^^ Started after all had breakfieusted at 8 a. m* The back
nmges of the mountains are disappearing one after the other behind
the upstart lower hills. The rapids numerous, but not difficult.

The.^onaris have boat songs, or professional melodies of their own :
when wading and hauling the canoes up the rapids they sing a sort of
"eheerly boys," the chorus of which is " Yoho Ram," and which heard
above the roar of the waters has a good effect. In hollowing out these
canoes the carpenters make in them holes of about an inch square to
ascertain tl^e tluckness as they proceed. These holes are afterwards
plngged. In my boat being driven in from above they protruded below,
and two of them were at the same moment unshipped as we bumped on
the stone of a rapid. The boat commenced rapidly filling, but we got
her on shore and the baggage all removed, before any serious damage
was done. I mention this as a warning to others. One minute's delay
and the boat would have sunk ; we were fortunately near shore, had
sormounted the rapid, and the crews of the other boats all at hand in a
moment to assist.

253 FiiU to the HtUs near the Soobanshiri River. CNo. 100.

Digression up the bed of a small stream called the Doolooni, to see
the Raj Ghur. This Dooiooni was one of the gold streams ; but lut
year its bed of shingle was covered with fine sand which the gold^wask-
ers can make nothing of, and they have abandoned it. It forms slao
one of the passes by which the Turbotiah Mens descend, the Dirjoo
flowing through Sugal-doobey, which forms the other starting from near
the same point in the hills. The Raj Ohur we found about a mile from
its mouth. I have seen this Ohur at Goomeri, where it crosses the Booree
river, and there it still bears the appearance of having been oonstmcted
as a rampart against the inroads of the hill people; but here it has
more tiie appearance of an old road. It is however a stupendous work,
and great is the pity that it is too far north of our population to be
used as a line of communication. Previous to the Moran or Mattock
wars, the villages of Luckimpore are said to have extended up to this
Raj Ghur, and there is every appearance even now of such having been
at some period the case. At the mouth of the Doolooni the Sooban-
shiri expands with a fine broad, deep and smooth basin, which it entetB
by three channeb formed by two islands, where the stream again meets;
above them it emerges from the hills, and here we halt for the night ;
our encamping ground is in the dry bed of the Bergoga.

Janmary 9th, Our last night's bivouac was not a comfortable one. A
stiff breeze blowing down the bed of the Bergoga, was met by anotiier
coming down the valley of the Soobanshiri, and they enjoyed themselTei
together at our ezpence, blowing the sand into the people's dinners, sad
the smoke into our eyes, and knocking the canoes iigainst the stones. Bat
we are now foiriy amongst the hills, and truly the scenery is sublime.
Beneath these hills, the great river wihds in graceful serpentines. The
basis forming the diffis are rocky and precipitous to*a considerable
height, along which foliage of various hues and a most vernal and vdvety
appearance waves in the breeze. Hie stream is about 25Q yards m
breadth, but of a depth (sounded several places on returning and foond
between sixty and seventy feet in dq>th throughout this glen) unfotbom-
able by any means we have at hand. There the rock of storms (the ^'
tahkowa hill) stands boldly out from the mass on a bed of huge boolders
screening the mouth of a deep, dark* narrow dell, the winding of which 1
esqplored for a little way — a way, where the sun's rays never penetrate;
sometimes huge Bon-trees springing from the rocks above stretch their

1845.] ViM to the Hills near the Scobanshiri Rher. 253

sioewy limbs oyer the deep waters, which reflect them ; and the fibres
that descend from them» finding no earth below in which to fix them-
fldres, swing in the breeze.

As we advance the river becomes still narrower, but not less deep or
amooth. Gockain Potana, a rock not less than 800 feet in height, rises
perpendicnlsrly from the stream. The fanoe is almost smooth to the top
which is dad with trees ; on the opposite side a similar diff, but not so
la^i on the summit of the former a god killed a deer; and, walking
(clever fellow) down the face of the smooth rock wi^h his q^uurry over
the shoulder, he ascended with it the opposing cliff, vnde nomen^ From
diove, th^ rock called the Pockain Potana. looks like a huge church-
iteeple rising from, the stream. We stopped for sometime at a place
caUed Pabo (ihai\t to collect cane to be used in towing the canoes up the
n^ids on ahead. The Ghaut is so called from its having been some
50 years ago the watering place of a tribe of Meris called Pabon. One of
the young m^ of this t^be stole from her village a young virgin of
Jema's tribe, then under the management of his father. Temees. For
this offqnce the insulted Teiaeeans waged a war of extermination against
the Pkbo tcibe. The villages of the latter were attacked by night when
the inhabitants slept, and men> women and children were promiscuously
sbng^teredor cairied away, and sold into hopeless captivity amongst the
Ahois. The tribe, consisting of two large villages, were utterly extin-
guished. Not far from this we halted for the night, on the right base of
the river, at the mouth of a beautiful stream called the Gaien Panee,
issuing fom a dark glen and dashing down the rocks into the well-
boond diannd through which the Soobanshiri noisdessly flows. Notwith-
stsnding the absence of large timber which appears to grow only near
aod on the summits of these predpitous hills, the verdure of this val-
ley is very beautiful: the rocks themselves are frequentiy covered with
BOSS and ferns of the brightest emerald green ; whilst springing from the
soil above them bamboos of a peculiarly light and feathery appearance^
the shafts not thicker than the most delicate trout rod, curve and waive
in the dightest breeze. The pine-apple tree, the drooping leaves of
which are found upwards of sixteen cubits in length ; the Toka palm,
varieties of cane and the mountain plantain, are all characteristic of this
scenery, and blend together in luxuriant mass.

254 FM to Oe Htils near the Soobanshiri River. [No. 160.

. 10/A. Barly this morning we emerged from this great glen, and
found the first of the great rapids at its mouth. The canoes were safe-
ly pulled up with the long cane ropes we had provided ; above this rapii
the stream widens, the valley expands, and more distant mountains ap-^
pear in sight. Huge blocks of rock obstructing the river.in its descent
render the navigation more and more difficult. We were obliged to
lighten our boats, and for soq^e distance the baggage ^was all conveyed
by land, whilst the canoes were dragged through fields of hissing fbaow
or over rocks nearly dry ; after surmounting several such rapids we
reached Siploo Mookh whence we are to proceed by land.

Luckimpare, February \lthf 1845.
February '2\st,

My dbab Major, — This being fk holiday, I shall devote it to giving
you some further accouitt of my late excursion.

I wrote you a few lines from Siploo Mookh, ^totalling briefly my prow
ceedings up to the date of my letter. Qn the 15 th January all the
headmen of Tema's tribe made their appeiD:9pce, tog^er witb the ladies
of Tema's family, who came expressly tQ 'welcome me>»-his two vnves
and daughter. I held an assembly, and particularly, explained to the
chiefs that if they had, the smallest objecj^n to my proceeding fiirtber
I was ready to return ; but they all assured me ^t such a proceeding
would cause them great pain. They would4)e delighted t6 shew me
all the lions of their country ; but only begged, that^as the snmll^pox was
raging in the Pathalipam village, I would leave behind me all tfae^Patha-
lipam men. This I readily consented to do, provided they proctiedme
a sufficiency of Meri coolies. Affidrs having been so far amicably arranfed,
a distribution of salt and rum concluded the conference ; and the^GMims
in high good humour disported themselves before ilie, shewing their agiUQT'
in racing over the rocks, and their prowess in throwing stones acEoss the
river : mean time I gave the ladies who had come to greet me some gsj
colored cotton cloths ; and here, alas, was cause for jealousy. The other
Oaums would know why Tema^s family alone should be thus favored ; but
I told them that when their wives and daughters came to greet me (^
Tema*s had done) and were neglected, they might take umhrage at my

1845.3 ^^ *o ^ Bilk near the Soodanskiri Riter. 8S6

pwtialtty, bill not now ; and with thit they appeared satiafied. Late at
sight Tuna anid one of the Torbottiah GanmB again Tinted me. lliey
■id a suffieieat number of cooliea would by morning be collected, but
tiiey expelled to be paid for the trip; considering the friendly nature of
my ?iait, and .the hofoion thns done them, they (the Gauma) were ashamed
to sak me to pay »the people for conveying the baggage, butthey had
no power to ^ve men without such pagfment being made ; and they
tbfl^rfoie wished, if agreeable to mei to be allowed to defray the coolff
upmote betwum tktnu . Of evorse I dedUned this offer, though I was
sot a little pleased at its haying been made, evindn^as it did a genuine
good feeling towards me* The rate was to be one seer of salt, or four
VDitts, for tlM trip for eac^ cooly, which the Gaums assured me was
what they 4pa3d.when, in bringing, as they yearly do, various commodities
fion the plains,' they are necessitated to avail themselves of extra
baods. Those who oaU themselves Gaums have no authority in their
bilh, but that of the rich over the poor. Aftef the above noticed trait
of Ifterality on Tema's part, att4<of the indepeifdenee of the Hill Mms in
geaeial,il was not a little iBiMJied.nezt morning when the Meri coolies,
male and innale, were recemng befotehand' their seer of sfdt, to ob*
sent amoD^t the^applicants for a load and a douceur, Tema's second wife
and his eldeat daughter, both fine young women ; bttt the latter much dis-
figoted by amaU*^. The loada were light, not more than twenty seers ;
hthojrl and girls, men and women, were all paid the same rate. Oon*
adadng a]| these ammgements had to be made, and that the greater
pait of the coolies had only arrived in the morning, I thought mysdf
littky by getting off by 10)- ▲. M* For the first two miles we pro-
ceeded along the left bank of the Siploo flowing from N. W„ then tum-
iog north ascended a very steep hUl; sometimes almioat creeping tmder
pnjjb so dense^ that nothing could be seen beyond what was a few
yards to our right and left : the path was less difficult than I had been
led to suppose it, but is sometimes zigzagged up or wound round preci«-
pbea in an awkward manner for nervous people. Tema was my con-
fitaat companion, always prepared to give me a friendly hand if neces-
ttry. He seemed at first td be under great anxiety on my account ; but
^ng me more active than h6 expected, he appeared more at ease.

Of the various timber trees and underwood, you know I am incapable of
giving any account ; the most remarkable of the former were Seea trees, a

256 Visit to the HiOs near the Soobamhiri lUver. [No. 160.

seed of which you returned me split open, Ae wood is hard, close-grained,
and finely colored as the Nahore ; the Assamese call it the Seea Nahoie^
and the fruit contains a fX>ison with whieh the Meris kill fish. ,GiesJt
varieties of hamboos and cane. The Meris thatch thek houses mik tlis
leaves of a species of thelatter called Tor» tte pine^apple«tiee, nad Ae
fern. ■ f . ' ^ ..

We passed several squirrel traps of an ingenious and umple ooostne-
tion. On an overhanging ;branch a seed (ohesnut) of which the eqak^
rels*are fond is {daoed, and bound to the branch by a d«iUe faaa^^^
cane ; the squirrel cannot get at the seed without ^putting Jiit hesf
through a noose of tiie cane, and on his dOstingagisg the bait the stxme
drops and tightens the noose round the squirrel'^ nedc: they eitf
the flesh of this animal as a great delicacy.. As we aseciideil«this intf,
the hill people frequently gave us lowlaaders a warning to be csrdiil
not to loosen a stone from its bed. .This was* very . neeessary* people
are apt to kick afVmy stones on a hill tiiat are.easily dislodged ; and had
this been done on the present occasion, they* must have fallen on or
bounded near those coming up the wisdiBg path below us. Having
descended a valley in which there was water, we commenoed the asoe&t
of another and lofder mountain called 'Ikepooka. Oa this hill tbeie
are magnificent Nalok trees of enormous dimensions ; despeadi^g ^^
we came to a rocky stream called the ^iikB, up tim bed of ^iriud^evf
path now lay, and this was to me the most difficult part of the roai
The current was strong, and the rocks slippery as glass* U was diffi-
cult for me to maintain my footing, and as I proceeded aloi^ stowly JSP^
cautiously, the Meri girls with their loads camenpandlanghingiypB^
me, bounding with astonishing actiidty and suretfpotedfltfiss from rode
to rock. This stream takes its rise in the Moyur.mountain, oyer sAdA
our path now lay ; and learning that m^ shayld not see water a^^ till
eveiiing I halted for stragglers, and wb^ aU had come .up it wee too
late to think of attempting to proceed further. Ccps^g the stream
accordingly, we formed our bivouac for Jfche j^ghl. Tema endeavoured
to persuade his people to assist in ctearing^jspace^or .me, a||d to cataad
bring wood and materials for a temporary^hut ; they treated hie.ordei*
with the utmost contempt : upon my applying to them in a more perBiia-
sive strain, they bargained that I should shew them some fan^itl> my
guns, and in this way I got them to do all I wanted. We started ^^^

J845.] Visa to the Hiiis near the Seobamhiri River. 267

moniing st 8 a. h., and commeneed a toilsome ascent of the Moyiir
momffin, tbe summit of vrhkh wv did not Macfa till 1 1 o'clock ; the
Ifieeiit was very severe in manyflioesi the natural kdd^s afforded by the
loots of iie trees alone -rendered if praetfteafale ; near the aunimit k was
ki»piftii|HtdH>imd here\(rere^frtntiber trees and Seeas, wild mangoes,
ekesmts aad'odts, the seeds of flil whieh I have sent fou; but unfor-
, tmtaif the acorns were all dead. Frpm thertOp of%the Moyur no
«ini^ WEus obtained ; deseending occasional openingar gave us glimpses of
seirmountaiaa, te wi ^ifere now on the dortb side of the great range
leo^firQm Lnckimpoi^, bvlrn» extended view ; the path less difficult, but
OMBonally piveentiii^^ixlKC mere ledge over a precipice, and danger-
M^ sfippei^^from deeajFedflllKres. We descended-*«bout one-third of
^distftilDe WB^lAid ascended, andjifaen crossed oversevewl smalls hills,
ti»iiorthem outworks of theuMoyur. •»ln one place a large tree had
fiOai across a chikm deep and'darl4^aiidt;was used as a bridge. It was
ippery as glass, and eveir the/Metis passed over very slowly and cauti-

Kdy ; I did net like iM^udi»«but Tema gave me a hand; and I got safe

•

^onm We now came to MMs thaMiad been cleared for cultivatiott, and
otfaer symiAotas of « near 'apfsieaeh to human habitatrons ; not that the
^was betteiiftt continued^ust as- before, but here M3rttons had been
gnmog, and Hiey^o not ittay fiar from their villages. Several times we
P>M ^at appeared to be ft well cleared path, but I was told that they
Uto'H^iefee epring bHws hftd been set to kill wild animals, and the
<^6ttaiAe #a8 ^ade^o'Mflilii Human beings not to go that way. De-
pettdiiig4Rich i:q>oh smh^^fetrafitgems for a supply of animal food, they
bie vdlcms ingenldu^^lxfetbods of taking or killing wild beasts. A
deer dip isibdnstructed Ify running a light palisading between two pre«
cqtiteg or other obstaclSb, in the centre of which the trap is placed,
ttal^n^ to offdr an e£t to the unwary animal, whose course has
Nh obftructed by thi* palisading, and through it he attempts to
'^i when the top composed of logs of wood bound together drops on
^crashes him. Bina Meris village was now before us, and drawn up
on the side of the road a deputation of the Sonrok Meris (the Bor Doionee
Mens) awaited my approach. These S<Hiroks I had hitherto regarded
^not near so well affected to us as the Temas and the Torbottiah
^^, and I had been informed by Tema that they were very irate with
^ for baving encouraged this excursion of mine. L was by no means

258 Viiii io4ke UHh near the S^obatOkiH tUver. CNiH 100.

anxiotts tonn^t'theitii'aiid fcad'^Aotih^ted Hfotfl to an iittertiew : butiieR
they were, and I covdA not ^tecM^itlr-eo "pnttiillf t bdld laoe on Ite matter.
I took a seat 'tiidefa tIdeSaid gaTerttamam andfenoe. ^ttat-Mmag
^aiDfld my^ject fU'viiftdig^^lUllf, iM^thanl^ tl{«faii^ tinlP
okffity fai oomulg to mlSet^e rVer^cuhRfliJKl fkiy snrpiiMpiDEfeM^ai WB$
objectionB being' fai8e#, Italy gave me Ik ikoft OrtBal i|l(f|iudiig in^ita*
tifmvtp proeeeditb «4iPil(villagea too, saying as Lhad cofne a8'*a fioend to
vkiK 'Dima, ir was tnOrftd^ that the hondraliltid^lsilieonfoxedoaaiai
alone; they too were xnostf^itfidtai* to entertflritine^aidnroii^^^
ptoidide every thing neoeasttry. J^6^&xA^A^lia^hl9iSiiga^
lanocipal Qaum resides, was^'an ea83^''mMh #aBi*wli«r^' we ^tnttt
They did allltlfeyWldd to indaoe me^tc^tghtoveM^igF SSl-i^fi(A^fB^oau
•s cataHed.i ^>hadt>nly supi^^for^' tiiree^diyt,«^t|ffcy wonia ysmk
every 'thing. At^littfr I said iMiF^ald hiiiil&proper lariae to go to^lhdr
village without brinj^ng with»Ms4lome pteseiits toTbefttow on their
Wives and daughter to cAuse'-lftM to r^^niaiber my visit. That of
the fe^ things I had* brought"^ this ieseri^tSon, had « been disposed
of, or were bespoke, and were I noUKto go-^mpty-haiided to wifrthem,
they would all day that f had t^stowed man^ marks Irf bvor on
*Tema'S people and to them had^givte ufS&t^. ^ I tBetefore oouldmot
ttiaw go; but if all turned out %eli; and iShey-behaved tbsmaelves [ffo*
porly on their next visit to die Ifdaimi, t£^stiould'>eteive a visitiiidB
me at another season intended for them," as my {iresent vtmt Vas f^
Tem&. With this they appeared satisfied, atM 6xS!f fardler Begged tiist
I would excuse the old'Oaum coming *fo milSf^e fn'^notHlA^Gaiiai'B
village, v^iBh would be derogatory to his di^it^, and tS^vfTB^rasM^
to pay his respects at Siploo Mookh, or on the road downt^ lUii waB
so ruled, and ^us quietly endbd the cfohfefenee with thOKferodioofl
Sonroks. Bini Gkum's village which: we now entered, is situatM on
one of the low hilb under the Moyur mountain; the himses ite
long, and raised considerably on posts of deft timber, indiserimmately
constructed on the top or side of tiie hill, but the level of the ftKff'
ing is tolerably well preserved by varying the hdght of the sup-
porting posts. It contains only toil dwelling houses; but as each
house holds an entire £unily, induding brothers and their wives, ana
married sons and their children, each may on an average contain aboat
twenty individuals. The situation of the village is very beautiful. Th^

J845.3 Visit to the HiOs near the Soobanekin Riner. 3S9

Unr hilb armmdy-^aone par^ cleared for the purpoaea of eoltiTatioii,
flottft eoAsif flOt and now ciMPered vidi tfie etcaw of the erop last
wptA-^aHpear iiir fine contiaat -with die dark tutta of tibe bftsr moim*
t&tt of Meyur and* YeldiK «ad othem more diatantihal anmmiid it.
The JBhehibaata, Bien» women aadchil^hNBik>:fiv from evinoing any aigiia
ef lear;'ccoffdjad ahont 100 as- 1 paaaed through the vyhge. The road
frOBB thia to Tema'a village, which ia ahout two nilea diatant and north*
weiftt^bl thte viUa^t oontinttea over low hiUa, many of which have been
deemd' and^ase Aow-fiHoWt'end after a.lime«wiU be again taken up.
Betwilea thtf ^riUagaa bakfioadea are ^natmeted in different placea to
Imp the Mfltena teoi fta ciltivstidn when neoeaaa^. We followed
ihewindinga of s atta«a caBtodrthe Kutoe; and w«e led by it into a
piel^litlie taU^ ooiepriaidgia letel apace of deared grotmd of some
cMot, wetsreb b]^*%he VeraiBg river which wiarif round the hill on
iriluclt'ireniaVlSilage''<B bnilt,>aflid. here we encamped ; Tnaa'si village
viHua hail above ua to the*^. 'Ek« the river flowing from the N* W.
Here were Mfembled to mcfetme, heiidea the notdblea of the three
fiUagea of/^IteA's/or the^Fambottiah tribe* all the headmen of the
TarbaititiMktimf^. JtSty* eM&ed to wonder much at my viait What
eoeld ifr^'^pdmiA^ a»d'':torhe iir aoaae alarm; but this aoon wore off;
Zbey deacribe flM^ coutltiy^aa much better Worth aeeiijg than thia.
Iba vdlagea are Ittrger, mffru uiilhefiHia/and nearer to each otiier than
-thoeetif thia^^ewal; the nearest a day's march from this, about twelve
mSerin #'daMtitoli norfii by weft. The villages are aix in number,
aiA vriMii hwl bfei^* other, on hiHa as Tema's and Bina^, and the
hadieet abnilarly Hfebioned; 61^ oultiyation ia txp&e extensive, the
ofoptf^VlWaild more* vdried. They have asso, dhan, and hali ; but
the laffer is not planted out. They sow the seed as we sow peas.
Thleiy/kept me "talking till, dinner time, and then all retired with
^Tema, who had a grand feast, not less than eighty individuals were
entertained by him ; all that came to see me were invited, and I am
teld hia house was tcrammed : nor were we neglected, a fine fat kid
and fowla and eggs, yams and sweet potatoes and Indian com were
mij^plied. Tema asked me if I would drink mhud, the spirit they distil ;
but thia I declined, or doubtless a large supply would have been sent.

* The Torbolliahs.

260 Viiit to the Hills near the Soobamhiri RHfer. [No. iW.

Next morning I proceeded to die i4ilage, and found them all bufeily en-
gaged in divination as to^wlMthermy iriait waa tobiisg Aemgioodor
evil.' I was told fthat-the anapieea weke- favorable.* A ri^an aat apait
from the rest-holding In teth'hittids Apvny ehieken; andinTdldiigalltlb
spirits of the woods by ntfmer Th0se4eitito who dehghtediii'dto blDodU
Myttons, and tfiose who tejoioed in the^slaiighteFof plgi^f tMse who
were propitiated by the sacrffioe of fdwk, or those nHio were caot^
with a* vegetable offering, Idi ftr^xm%iicb«btanoitS' in^bked ; and eHm the
Ch&ui is terminated, tii6iehidc:eA is cnt o^'add the aitsai^ezSmhll^i
from which they a«giir godd oTeHl, * (Hbem flir ^dlis^f < ampiinQm" h mj
knowledge has'flUed*HieiiV' tlejr IhMft pMSiAiiBiis!^ rfihere td*fUs
practice {^dliildfertaW btPktpidlt!Aitt?fi<itni9y of vtorh, wtthoartast
suiting it. I'^m^ilaitMflg/Sbdymu^^

en, and wH^if th&'iMrelimnjf w«s'cGnelflded/they*ten1!4blii^K|^lRpef
ine to i^ttto'to AjiOOitb ^^aodlbee. I ddlf ed lA'fitoce' ftiie to
give It where I iNit^bdttlltfTolrbc^diaiiE^tfrwisAed to pa^eiif respects
in^egular fottai/cibiMirottfth^y'sailf, witt |Hi»'pllety tLd^siTla "f ema's vil-
lage, ti'o^ev^irpfevknis to deiSbedili^ i*:|pild O^falli'rtrtfttlne^ visi^tff
whiebhi^ made li^objeetiods. ^ThtrhoftiA il^Vdf^ fi^ tbtg;, raised oa
timbei9/ ibvt^ perpenAcfilMHy and soke'.1i£%<tt9^"pia4s((8?'iif^rMcilf&
laid a platf6fti of IftnlbcMTforiei ITdOd^; 4^h€l*l(A>f hiS gkble^eilds, and is
pitched yer^ high ; the thatcfil)eil(| 98lnp6M^ ft tfi^eayes c^ a'«peefei
of cane as bef(bre n&entioned. Under the gables a cfoss ctTopjtei^overs
in an open^ tf&Tcoliy, oihe Ikf^each *^d< Ttii inteMr^dbnSBts of w
long aparffaibnt«^8kfy4e1lt»^ Ity uzteen, froft ^?lRii*^jfasage*ttU?tfiM|f
the entire lengtlP^ft petitioned bA^ -^^the large^artment dttflfthff
centre no less than four fires were buhung bn hearthtf^iMtt lUP Od
one side w%re ranged, witfiT some appeiQcluice of order, theZf^anns,
pouches, travelling apparatus, &c. ; another portion ff the apiflrtmdit
was decorated with trophies of the chase. In the centre between the
fires frames of bamboos su^nded from the roof served %s taUes,
on which various domestic utensils were deposited.*^! had hoped that tiie
passage which was partitioned off from this apartment contained tiie
dormitories of the family, but on examination it was found to be the
mhud cellar. In it were ranged conical baskets lined with plantain
leaves, in which the mhud is fermented, and received in vessels placed
underneath : in the large apartment the whole family eat, drink and sleep-

1845.] Fmt to the Hiii^ near Ae Soobamhiri River. 961

Tcma and his wives in t^e npper end or fint fire» hia sons and daugh*
tcEBiround tke neal:« ptfaffr m^mlien of thoiftiiuly round the third, and
darea an^^t^P^^^^^^ round the fourth. .F^u^fnl^of beipg pillaged by
Ae Abgsfi» they do not tentuaa to diiqilay. nawfa propertjL in theichonsea*
Zhe greater^^rtian of it Jiei^bvci|d.in aome^Eemote spot Igiown only to
Uie heads ofotto iuaily«, Bfsaidea .aillle» omamenta/ anna and wearing
i^ipBieL itaonaiata of large diahemnd cooking, vaisela ol metal, and w^
arecaUedJlao fbnukt^mkt^ Httfe b«Ba withiVniiPtta devieea and inacripr
tioBa, in whit Ifmcy jtmat be the ThihetaQreharacter i but I know ifenot.
The Meria doiiQt:kBow< wlirre.they eome from ; a few are occaaioa(|a)ly
otained iif hast^r^jnlih tiua Al^on, bvlr.the moat of them have ^been
kaaded diMm i» jMiaJaoma.fiW^ lMOily*.oad they ure regarded aa the
moat iridimbkpoi;^bi|.«p]l^ property. They ar^^oopaaioivdly uaed aa
aoney, and Takaadri^ from fpvi^annia tft twelve rupees each, according
to ahi^, aiae a^d ornament. Jlpqft with inacKiptiona inaide and out
are moat h^hly prized. ., Xhoae vi^ol inaeriptiona are little valued.
Theae beDs ^Bve common amongat jfchft.Duflaa. who can give ng better
acoaqat aa^tOibbw th^ became pime^aed of them* I am told the Butiaa
^ them, aiid it ao joa can pcrh^pa tell q^e aometbing of their origin.
Hi^ Meria td| the aaine atoiy if ^ak^ where they get their fine blue
beada, u #v4^t Ihey are|i^*looma ; j[ery ae^om* they aay, are they nq^
piaeurable in barter or exekttl|ge» though aome few are occaaionally
procured from the Abora^ .

It is n^ impoaaible that nmnbera of theae bella and beada thua
kaaded down aalieir-leoma may have been brought with them from the
country from whi<4i they ori^nally emigrated. Regar4ing their mi-
grationa tiiey iiave no traditiona. . They believe, and they are not ain-
gaKar iiy.the belief, that mjmy ordera and racea of n\en were created,
whom |he Creator allotted to dwell where aoil and aituation were beat
adapted^ the conatitution and habita he had given to each ; and thua
that ^^,Me$i\a wefe created for, and have ever dwelt in these hilla.
Their rdigioua ideaa are. very vague. They believe in a future atate,
and have an indefinite, idea of a apirit who preaidea in the regiona of
departed aoula, aa is ahewn in their mode of disposing of their dead.
The body is interred fully clothed and equipped with arms, travelling
pouch and cap, in a de^p grave, and surrounded by strong timbers to
PKvent the earth from pressing on it. Nor do they omit to supply

263 Visit to the BUUnear the Soobanehiri River. [No. 140.

the departed for his long journey with food, cooking ntenailB, wad orna.
ments of value* so that he^^nmy make a respectable appeaimnce in. lint
other world. They 'attach grent importance to dieir dead being thai
disposed of and buried neisur^the grKves of their .ancestors. If a man M
any influence dies in the ^plaina his'bad3K.i8 immediately xsoftveyed. to
the hills to be so* interred, should the disease of which he died not fas
deemed contagious.

Marriage, although its triolationjs considered the.direst of offisnoss, is
with*them a mere matter of barter or eatckange. Yonag^ ladies are in
the first instance valued aeoof^Uiig to thetiknealth and jreqieetability of
their parents. The price is suc^ that few suitbra.asa aUe to make it up
for several years after preliminaries hsviejieea arraiiged>*and they .pay it
accordingly by instalmenta. Itconsbts, if thie'danacl )>e'of high ikiiiSf»
of two or three My tt(ms» twenty or. thudtj? pigs»(fowh^ miiud, and eom^
times clothes. When the parenti^acft content, or the nkipaJiited amoant
has been paid, they invite ^e suitor ^iritli hb fponily and friendato come
for his bride,' and he is entertained. that day by the frthes of the lady.
On his return with his wife all thft friends and relatiaiis accoippaBy
him, and the bridegroom or his parents now in their turn have toieast
them and his own fHends mto die bvgaB'^r.sevtad successive
days. There is no fiorther ceremQuy. The pirties are nqw conadexed
man and wife ; and woe be to hitn that seduces from her lord the nife
so wedded. The adulterer is seized and securely bound» detained:nndflr
most rigorous treatment for a day. or two. If he be powerful his
friends come to his assistance, and make o£S»8 for his ransom, whiflb
must be considerable to be accepted ; but the chances are, he ie left to hi*
fate, and if such be the case he is put to death. The Woman who has
committed the faux pas is less severdy dealt with. A little wholesome
chastisement, and she is again admitted into the family circle. It must
not be omitted that when a marriage is concluded, the bridega)om ex«
pects to get fair value with his bride for his pigs, &c. that he has ex-
pended on her. If personally, or in default of an adequate trousiettu
she be found wanting in this respect, there is a dinner, an assemblage
of the mutual friends, and the parents of the bride are made to disgorge
should it be so det^mined ; or should they refuse, their daughter is treat-
ed as a slavCi and not as a member of the family : notwithstanding thiSf
a widow cannot leave her husband's family and heirs to contract a fresh

iSiB.] FisU to the HUU near the Soobamhiri River. 263

marriage nnlesB she can find the means of defraying all that was prigi-
nafiy paid for her ; if she can do-^bis and famish a feast on the occasion*
tiiere seems no objection touher making a second alliance. The costame
oi the women ia peculiar.: a>Bhort petticoat extending from the loins
to the knees is secured to a broad belt of leather which is omamlented
mth brass bosses, bmdes this they wear round theif middles an infinite
namber of rings made of filaments of bamboo embroidered with the
fibzes4rf.axK>ther plant. , A bandiofsttsikr material, from which a bit of
cloth is sni^ftended in front,iia bound tightly round the breast under the
arms.' This iaJtheift tranraUing and working >d«ess; but ait other times
tkey wrap tfaemaalTes in a hrgejfibth/doubled, brouglft over the shoul-
ders, and {sinned in front iike a shawLv They wear ronnd theirnecks an
eoocmous §^wiA^jsl beadiini^stly, of blue» like- turquoise, but also of
agate^ conmUaJui and onyx» and^ass heada of all colora. They have
Iffsceli^ of silvai or copper» and, anklets (tf.fiunl^,plaited cane or bam«
boo. Their hair is a^lttBtQii with n0atnesji».' parted in ..the xentr%, and
hanging dowaL.th(9ir»backs in^tifc^ pwr^idly |>)ait^ .taila^ In their ears
4ey wear mc»^|pti»sttepnwBtfii|t><iiOf silver^ whic^ it ;woul(]Jbe difficult
to describe^ a simple^ 4|^al ,scr<^; of this metal winding. 89akeUke
round, the eiil^ded' lgjb%cpf the qgT} is not |y|^n|p)pn ampogst ^mar-
ned girls^ but l^ear q||iami^t%',of^^e matiip^^are n^uch.more com-
pka^ Jh^ genei^y havj^er^^i^eft cqpntenani^s, though few could
be call^liap489me# The almond-shaped eye is oommoni but not uni-
TCifeal ; mq^th%gen(KaUy wl^formecU and teilh» nptwithst^Q^u^g the free
V.pf toJH^co, veiy.^fin^md ichite ; their coo^xiyn^httt tho^iatiyes of
Iad]%,woi|ld call fai%but th|^Jb^M|p.rofy cheeks ^and.fuddy lips, which
is a i||$nd|S[^ in^ovement.ion the AssamescApomplexion ; they are very
stoutly JEoilt, generally short of stature, bu^to this there ar^ remarkable
exceptions. The^nen have fine muscular figures ; many of them tall and
with good features, but the countenances of some are repulsive. The
variety of feature denotes an admixture of races, and no doubt many of
them have Assamese blood in their veins, but usually there is the high
cheek-bone and almond-shaped eye. lips rather thin, and face devoid of
hair except a few over each extremity of the mouth forming an apology
for a moustache. They gather the hair to the front, where it pro-
trades out from the forehead in a large knob secured by a bodkin ;

264 yisU to the UilU near the Soobanehiri River. [No. 100.

round the head a band of small brass or copper knobs linked together
as tightly bound. In their ears they as well as the women wear a
variety of ornaments, but of a distinct kind. The lobe is distended so
as to hold a knob an inch in diameter. It is gradually enlarged by
the insertion of a roll of the leaf of the pineapple tree. The chiefs wear
ornaments of silver, shaped like a wine*glass or egg- cup ; young men do
not venture to attach so heavy a weight to the slight ligament, and
insert a hollow plug of silver instead. The males also wear a pro&-
sion of the blue beads before mentioned, and others, all very large.
Their costume is simple enough— a band round their hips composed
of rings of bamboos, the same as worn by the women but not so nmner-
ous; an apron attached thereto before and behind, and a cloth wrap-
ped round their body and pinned so as to resemble a shirt without
sleeves ; a cap of cane or bamboo work with turned«up peak, which how-
ever is worn behind, and over their shoulders as a cloak, which
also serves as a pouch or knapsack, they throw a covering made of the
black hairy fibres of a plant, which at- a little distance resembles a
bear-skin. Their costume is not complete without placing on their heads
and over their caps a piece cut oat of tiger or leopard-skin, the tail of
which hanging down their backs has a droll appearance ! They are all
very filthy in their persons, man^ of them appear never to have had their
faces washed since their birth. As this was not their cultivatiDg
season, and the crops had been reaped, it was chiefly from infqrmatioB
that I could note any thing on the subject. Bach village has a certain
extent of ground, comprising hills, sides of biUs and valleys, which,J^ey
have been in the habit of cultivating from time immemorial ; but not moie
than a fifth of this ground is under cultivation each season. They cnl-
ti^nate each patch two successive years, and then suffer it to. be fal-
low for four or five, taking up again the ground that has been longest
fallow in lieu. They have a superstition, which deters them from break-
ing up fresh grounds so long as their ** Gra" (fallow) is sufficient^a
dread of offending the spirits of the woods and forest by unnecessaiiiy
cutting down the trees. In Tema's village the chief crops are *' Bobesa"
or bobsa dhan« the grain of which is large, pear-shaped ; and goom
dhan, or maize. Many of the villages have aoosa and hali, resem-
bling that which is grown by the Assamese; but the cultivated

1845.] VisU to the Hiils near the Soobamhiri River. "IQo

tracts appertaining to this village g^t too little sun for those crops.
The bohsa and goom dhan are sown in the same ground and at the
same time, and round the squares which contain these crops they plant
yams and other edible roots ; they have not got the potato, but it would
most likely grow well and be serviceable to them ; they sow red pepper,
wliich succeeds admirably. Tobacco is generally grown in patches
near the houses. The labour of cultivation and all labour faUs chiefly
on the women. They have few of them other implements than their
Idvf, which are used to clear, cut and dig with. The men consider it
sufficient to occupy themselves in hunting and attending to their vari*
oas snares and spring bows for wild animals, and when the season ar-
mes for the trade, in collecting manjeet, which is performed by both
sexes.

The manjeet grows in steep declivities, interlaced and entangled with
other shrubs, so that it is not easy speedily to collect a quantity, at
least all that I found of it was little ; the leaf of the genuine kind is small,
narrow and pointed, and slightly suffused with a tinge of the colouring
matter. There is a bastard kind also found in great quantities, the
kayes of which are very much larger and the plant altogether coarser
in appearance ; it is called the female manjeet by the Meris, and though
simiiar in growth with the other^ its flexible shoots contain scarcely any
oolonring matter. Nevertheless, it is sometimes brought down mixed
with the finer. The Meris assured me that this fraud was not theirs,
but was practised upon them by the Abors. I recommended them for
their own sake to bring down none but the best, and they promised that
none other should leave their country. They collect and tie it up in bun-
dles when fresh and flexible, then lay it on frames or hang it up to the eaves
of their houses to dry ; when it becomes rather brittle, it is fit for ex-
portation. The Mytton is the only species of homed cattle possessed
hy the Mens. It is rather a clumsy looking animal in make ; but a
group of Myttons grazing on the steep rocky declivities they seem
to love, would be a noble study for Landseer ; some are milk-white, some
nearly black, some black and white, and some red and white. To
the Meris they are only useful as food. On festive occasions one
is killed, and I should think the beef must be excellent ; they feed
most delicately on young leaves, and keep in excellent condition. The

266

Fisii to the Hills near the Soohamhiri River, QNo. 161

cows would, I have no doubt, give a large supply of milk ; but
Meris l\ave not yet found this out. I asked tbem to procure s<
for me, but received the usual answer, " Meris don't know how,
our custom/' The females appear tame, and submit to be teth(
the bulls rove their own masters, but do not wander far horn,
tethered females, so are in a measure tethered too; just now
all roam where they please, but when the crops are on the gi
a mountain or so is fenced round by strong timbers from tree to
and into this enclosure they are driven, and remain till the harrc
stored. They have pigs and poultry in plenty, and a few goaf
suppose there are no people on the faee of the earth, more utterly
rant of every thing connected with the arts than are the Hill
With the sole exception of the bands and other articles of bambo<
and fibres above-mentioned, which the women are everlastingly
every thing they use is imported ; were their communications
with the plains, and indirectly by means of the intervening tribes»j
the civilized countries on the other side of the great range cut off,
of metal and of women's clothes would be lost to them. The Abo]
forge themselves daws, but the Meris know not the art. Th&
distant tribes manufacture coarse cotton cloths ; but though the
are in constant communication with them, as well as with us,,
have not the remotest idea of weaving. They cannot journey t\
three days from their village, without having to cross a considt
river. If it be not fordable, a rough raft of Kakoo bamboos is
constructed for the occasion ; but though constantly requiring
and annually using tbem, they have never yet attempted to coi
a canoe : this is the more strange, as the Abors of the Dabong
considerable trade in canoes cut in the rough. I suppose that unl
Meris discovered the fertile plains of Assam, which they were
to visit by having killed birds in whose bellies they found rice, ani
covered by proceeding in the direction of their flight, they
mere savage hunters ; the skins of beasts their only clothing,
flesh their chief, if not only food.

Gould they be stimulated to a more industrious course of life,
might considerably improve their commercial relations with us.
great rivers that enter their country abound in gold grains ; the p]

1845.] Visk to the Hills near the Soobamhiri River. 267

of washing is simple, and the Meris have had for two centuries constant
opportunity of watching it in all its phases.

The last process of separating the gold from the remainder of the
sand or scoria, they might leave to the Assamese gold, washers ; but the
rough washing with the doorunnee and bottle gourd might be performed
by them, and a considerable quantity of gold introduced. The doonin-
nee, or tray, is very simple and easily made, and the gourds are obtained
from the Meris by the gold-washers. This would be a most lucrative
trade for them. By a little attention to the manjeet also, which they
are too lazy to give, its growth might I think be improved and its col-
lections facilitated, simply by the removal of other plants that choke it.
I have not much more to say ; but I may send you another chapter* if
you are not tired of me and the Meris. But this letter has grown to such
a length, I fear you will be inclined to throw it into the fire without
reading it.

I have no doubt that there are sundry errors in this account ; but I
cannot stop to correct them, for I feel sure if I were to read over what I
have written I should hesitate about sending it. I had not intended
sending you the journal up the river, it was copied to send home with
sketches ; but as you seem interested in the scenery of the Soobanshiri,
I have ventured to add it.

Yours very sincerely,
(Signed) E. T. Dalton.
(True Copy,)

(Signed) F. Jenkins,
Agent to the Oovernor General.
(True Copies,)

J. CVRRIE,

Secretary to the Govt, of India.

* Trade with us and with Abors ; position of villages ; rough estimate of population ;
Abors, Accas, not yet touched on. All these however might be included in a public
letter applying for leave to make a more extended excursion next year.

268

Notes, principally/ Geological^ on the South Mahratta country-^^Falh
of Gokauk — Classification of Rocks. By Capt. I^ewbold, F.R.S.
&c. Assistant Commissioner KurnooL

The reader has already been iotroduced into the South Mahratta
country at its. eastern angle near the confluence of the Kistnah
and the Gutpurba.* We will now proceed westerly across it, follow-
ing the right bank of the Gutpurba to the Falls of Gokauk on the
Eastern slope of the Western Ghauts, leaving the Kolapore territory
to the right.

I crossed the Kistnah about two and a half miles below the Sungum,
or confluence, and passed up the opposite bank towards the tongue of
land formed by the junction of the rivers. The apex consists of
silt, sand and clay, in regular layers, rising, as they recede, to the height
of about sixteen feet above the surface of the water.

A section of these layers was afforded in the sides of a deep cleft
running down to the Gutpurba. They present a striking illustration
of the formation of fissures in sedimentary rocks, simply by the mass
contracting in consolidation, unaided by subterranean movement or
displacement, which we are compelled to call in to our assistance in
explaining the great faults and displacements, attended with scorings of
the faces of the fissures, and the polishings termed ** slickensides,'' so
common in the coal measures, and other old sedimentary rocks of
Europe. Earthquakes, another cause of fissures, are unknown here.

The fissures in these layers of silt and clay are usually vertical, and
widest in the more consolidated layers ; their course is often zig-zag,
like that of the celebrated gap in the sandstone rocks of Gundicotta
through which flows the Fennaur ; or, like the fissures in the Begur
deposit : during the hot months they frequently intersect each other.

Horizontal seams, independent of the parallel laminae of deposition,
have been formed, partially filled with a titaniferous iron sand, which
owes its arrangement, and segregation in distinct layers partly to its
greater relative specific gravity, and partly to the motion of the water.
The truth of this is easily illustrated by the simple experiment
of mixing intimately some common quartzose sand with a portion of the

* See Journal, Vol, XIII. p. 1004.

1846.] Notes an the South Mahratta Country, ^c. 269

iron sand, and throwing them into a tambier a quarter full of

water.

- If the tumbler then be inclined to one side, and gently moved so as

to cause the water to move backwards and forwards over the surface of

the sandy the particles of quartz and iron gradually separate and become

arranged in distinct layers.

The upper beds of the section are of loose silt and sand, the lower
layers are more consolidated, and towards the base of the cliff thin
layers of an indurated liver-brown marl alternate ; both the silt and
marl effervesce slightly with acids. At the bottom of the fissure
raos a rain channel, which has washed the sides into salient and
re-entering angles. In some places they have been excavated and
undermined by it, and portions of the superincumbent layers have
fellen in. In short, we see on this diminutive, yet true scale, all the
striking features of precipice, ravine, pinnacle, and castellated form so
remarkable in the sandstone and limestone formations.
' Tabular cavities appear in many portions of the cliff which have
neither been caused by snails, nor other boring conchifers. They have
originated from the stems of long grasses, around which layer after
layer of silt, &c. had been deposited until the stem decayed away, leaving
an empty cavity modified by the action of the rain trickling down it
into the substance of the rock. In many of these cavities the grasses
are still seen. The iron sand is slightly magnetic, infusible per se
before the blow-pipe ; and forming with difficulty a blackish slag ; it
tinges borax of a brownish green. It has probably been derived from
the neighbouring trap formation.

- The Rivers Kistnah and Gutpurba, The Kistnah near the con-
flaence is apparently about 500 yards broad, and the Gutpurba about
100. The current of the former had a velocity of about two and a half
feet per second, and the latter about two and three-quarter feet.

The temperature of both rivers, one foot below the surface, was
exactly the same, viz. 76^ 5\ Temperature of air in shade 76** ; in sun
84** : month July, river swollen by the monsoon freshes. Mean tem-
perature of the South Mahratta country at Darwar, according to Christie,
is about 75®. As both rivers were nearly full, there was no opportunity
of examining the size and nature of the pebbles in the bed. On the banks
are scattered water-worn fragments of chert, quartz, granite, trap.

270 Notes on the South Mahratta Countty, ^c. [No. 160.

felspar rock, horablende schist, jasper, lateritic conglomerate, kanker,
ferruginous clay, greyish blue and sand-coloured limestone, sandstone,
and calcedony. None of the fragments that had been transported by the
current were more than three or four inches in diameter.

A tumbler-full of the turbid water deposited about l-20th of its
bulk of a fine sandy brown sediment, which effervesced with acids ;
very different, like those of the Bhima, Godavery, Tnmbuddra and
Cauvery, from the regur^ which, as before mentioned, is supposed by
some geologists to be a deposit of these rivers. The freshes of the
Kistnah do not, according to the testimony of the oldest boatmen,
ever overflow the banks more than half a mile ; and its inundations at
Danoor, and other places where I have crossed it, rarely spread
to a greater extent. These facts argue strongly against the theory
of the fluviatile origin of the regur which is seen covering vast fiat
plains like seas, which extend, I may say, hundreds of miles from the
banks of these great rivers. With regard to Christie's theory of
its being the detritus of trap rocks, I have before observed that
the iron contained in them oxidizes, becomes ultimately reddish
or coffee-coloured in weathering, and imparts its colour to the detritos;
and that the alluvium we now see brought down by the Kistnab,
Bhima, and Godavery, which rise in and flow over the great trap
formation, is of a brown colour, very different from the bluish black
of the purest regur. One of the richest and most extensive sheets of
regur in Southern India, is that of the Ceded Districts, which is watered
by the Tumbuddra, Pennaur, and Hogri rivers, the courses of which on
no point touch the trap formation, passing over plutonic and bypogene
rocks, sandstone and limestone. If the rich sheets o{ regur which cover
the plains of Trichinopoly, Artoni, and Cuddapah had been derived
from the great trap formation, one would naturally expect to find in it,
or associated with it, grains or fragments of calcedony, agate, jasper,
heliotrope, and other hard minerals so abundant in the overlying trap:
but there is no instance on record of such fragments having been found
in these regurs.

The regur is seen too, far above the present drainage levels of the
country. At Beder, as already observed, both Voysey and myself
found it on cliffs nearly 200 feet above the general level of the sar-
rounding country.

1845.] Notes on the South Mahratta Country, Sfc. 271

The boiliDg point of water at the SuDgam was 200.3. Temperature
of air at the time of observation 80^.

On the S. bank of the Gutpurba are aome low hills running £. S. E.
The only one which was examined proved to be a breccia, overlying
the light blue and buff limestone, composed of a dark red or liver
brown clay, highly indurated, and passing into jasper imbedding an-
gular fragments of the siliceous portions of the subjacent limestone,
chert, quartz, &c The angular fragments of chert are often so small
as to give this breccia the appearance of a porphyry, for which some por-
tions of the rock might at first sight be mistaken, and a bed of really
aqueous origin confounded with a plutonic rock — ^an error which has
happened.

Proceeding westerly from the limits of the hypogene schists, the
imbedded fragments in this breccia become larger, and the conglome-
rate character cannot be mistaken. It is evident, from the gradually
mcreasing size of the pebbles, that the rock whence they were derived
is neared as we advance west, and that the current which deposited
these beds of sand and pebbles must have had an easterly direction.

This inference proved correct; and the limestone was found in
Mfil at a short distance west from the hills, on the S. bank of the
Gntpurba, in broken*up and dislocated strata ; some of the lime-
itone slabs had been furrowed as if by the action of pebbles passing
along them in an east and west direction. Dark veins of chert projected
every where from the water- worn blocks and slabs of this limestone,
many of which are thickly encrusted with depositions of a ferru-
ginous kanker which abounds. The limestone often abounds so much
in silez, and is so indurated as to give fire with steel, and hardly effer-
vesces with acids, save in a pulverized state. Marks of aqueous abrasion
aod plutonic disturbance which preceded the formation of the breccia
are very apparent in this locality.

SUadonga kills. A plain almost covered with regur extends from
these low hills of breccia to the Sitadonga range, which abutting on
and confining the Gutpurba on the north, run down to Badami and
Gojunderghur on the south. The hills at this point consist of sand-
stone and conglomerates, the latter usually the lowest in position, both
partially capped by a lateritic conglomerate which, in many places, has

evidently been stripped off by denudation. The conglomerates are

272 NoUs on the South MahraUa Country, ^c. QNo. 160.

often of a highly ferruginous and jaspideous character, and imbedding
fragments of chert, quartz, and shales from the limestone.

As these hills are ascended, the sandstone gradually loses its coo-
glomerate character, passing into almost all the varieties it is suscep*
tible of, from yellow and reddish rock containing much argillaceous
matter, to a loose gritty sandstone with red and yellow bands, which
passes into a compact white sandstone, approaching quartz rock, con-
taining specks of oxide of iron, or decayed felspar, in minute cavities.

On the summit of the Pass was a fine whitish sandstone with reddish
streaks, composed of grains of quartz held together by whitish decom-
posed felspar.

On many of the slabs the ripple mark is distinct, running nearly N.
and S., which shows that the current must have had an easterly or
westerly course in this locality. At the western base of the Pass the
coloured argillaceous shales, into which the limestone usually passes
near the line of junction with the superimposed limestone^ have bees
invaded and cut by a dyke of basaltic greenstone, and converted into
reddish, greenish, and brown coloured jasper and bluish white chert
in alternating layers ; each line of which presents the original lines of
deposition. Two other dykes, or ramifications, are crossed in the plain
or valley extending from the base of the first Pass to another range
probably a spur or outlier of the ridge just crossed, and though
curvilinear, having a general direction nearly parallel with it. Green
argillaceous schists, altered by the basaltic dykes, and in almoft
vertical laminse, occupy the bottom of the intervening valley. The
spur or outlying range is of a compact sandstone capping the schuCs
and dipping at an angle of about 28<' towards the S. W. Near the
summit of the range it contains a bed of very fine white and red day
which is extensively excavated by the natives, who use the former as a
whitewash and to paint the mark of caste on their foreheads.

The Gutpurba finds its way easterly through a break just below
this rock, and rushes through the ridge just passed, by a still narrower
and more rugged gorge.

Leaving the excavations, the traveller descends the sandstone spQ'
into the extensive and fertile plain of Bagulcotta, based on limestone
and its associated coloured shales and schists ; bounded on the east
by the Sitadooga or Gujunderghur range ; and, as far as the eye can

J845.] Nole$ on the South JUahratta Couniry, SfC 279

reach, on the west by the ranges west of KoUadghur, and those of
Gokank on the flank of the Western Ghauts.

Plain of BagulcoUa, This plain continues westerly to within a
few miles from KuUadghi, watered by the Gntpurba on the north, and
bounded by a long, low, flat- topped range, evidently of sandstone ; to the
£L the limestone, which bases it, has a general dip of about 25® towards
the E. N. E. at Bagulcotta, and a direction nearly parallel to that of
the sandstone ranges, vis. N. N. W. ; both dip and direction, however,
vary occasionally, probably from flexures and disturbance by plutonic
iatmnon. The limestone in the vicinity of Bagulcotta and KuUadghi
is of various shades and textures ; sometimes as white and crystalline as
marble^ and composed almost entirely of carbonate of lime ; at others
niieeoos or magnesiao, or passing into whitish, green, blue, red and
ehocolate<^M>kKired argillaceous shales. At Bagulcotta a pale buff
coloured limestone occurs, portions of which might be applied to
lithographic purposes; specimens of it I believe have been sent to
Bombay for trial, but in consequence, probably, of not being selected
properly, have been rejected as too hard, or for being veined.

The site I hardly conceive has had a fair trial ; by the sending down
a person pracHeallp qualified to select specimens, and by the quarrying
a little deeper than has hitherto been done, I have little doubt that
better samples of the stone might be got. Talicotta however, as men-
tioned in a previous paper, is the most promising locality for lithogra-
phic limestone.

The purer white crystalline variety is broken up into small fragments,
and burnt into lime. I observed in it the same green chloritic flakes
which I afterwards found veining the marble in the quarries of Mount
Psntelicus near Athens, and in the Cipolin Marbles. A pale salmon,
or flesh-coloured subcrystalline variety, resembling Tiree marble^
occurs both near Bagulcotta and at SuUakairy, a village about three
miles S. from KuUadghi.

About three miles to the E. of KuUadghi a few low hiUs of a
lateritic conglomerate rest on the limestone and associated shales,
nmning paraUel with the sandstone ranges. The cementing substance
is partly a calcareous, and partly a clayey paste of a yellowish or red-
dish colour, imbedding nodules of laterite. The lower portions of this
rock are more compact than the upper, and exhibit distinct lines of

274 UeUi on the South MahroHa Couniry, ^c. [No. 160.

stratification. The range on the left, or south, of the road from
Bagulcotta to Kulladghi, consists of sandstone and conglomerate. The
latter imbeds pebbles both rounded and angular from the harder and
more siliceous portions of the subjacent shales and limestone, and also
pebbles of an older sandstone, which I did not discover in sUu;
these beds are not inclined so much as the limestones and shales
on which they rest, but dip to the same point of the horiaon.

Kulladghi. The nullahs in the vicinity of Kulladghi a£Pord good
sections of the limestone and its associated shales which, from their
highly inclined and bent strata, have evidently suffered much distur-
bance from plutonic forces. The frequent alternations we see of
those rocks, in a very confined area, induces the supposition of the
beds having been folded back upon themselves, and thus produced
the appearance of a double and reversed alternation,, the upper parts
of the folded strata having been carried away by denudation, as is
seen to be the case on the face of some of the magnificent precipices
of the Alps.

The shales are beautifully marked by white, blue, green, yellov,
and red coloured bands; and seamed with arenaceous layers. The
open seams of the rock are often encrusted with kunkerous infiltrations.

Slate quarries of Katurki. On the Maningpur road near the
village of Katurki, about one-half koss from Kulladghi, these slates
split into rhomboidal forms by joints, and yield good hones ; at Solla-
kairy tolerable roofing slates, slates and slate pencils are quarried.
SuUakairy, as before stated, is about three miles from Kulladghi, on the
Gujunderghur road-.

The lower beds of the quarried rock at SuUakairy are of a massive
blue slate interstratified with a softer lamellar variety, easily fissile,
and divisible into leaves which are often not more than a line thick ;
dendritic markings are frequently seen on the surfaces of the laminn*

From the more massive beds are hewn large blocks for pillars
of pagodas, Hindu idols, &c. Roofing slates are not much patronized
by natives, who prefer tiles, thatch or mud, but considerable quantities
have been here quarried and sent to the British cantonment of Bel-
gaum and the Portuguese Indian metropolis, Goa. The prices at the
quarries, I was informed on the spot, for slates of a foot square sod
quarter or half an inch thick, are five rupees per hundred slates ; they

1845.] Notes on the South Mahratia Country, ^c. 275

may be procured however of much larger dimenrions, and of any
degree of thinness. A capital writing slate and pencil were cat
for me oat of the qaarries, shaped and polished all in a coaple of
boars.

A loose, friable, dark blue slate in the bed of the nullah near the
quarries is sometimes pulverized and ground up with water and used
as a blue wash for houses, he.

Iron Mines of HircuiUaky. Iron ore is procured, according to
native information, near the village of Hirasillaky, about two and a half
koss from Kulladghi. The metal sells at from two to two and a half
rupees the pukka maund of forty-eight seers. Land carriage by bandies
or bullocks, and abundance of cheap fuel for smelting are readily pro-
curable.

From want of time and opportunity, my visit to the hone quarries
of Katurki was by torch-light, when little was to be made out regard-
ing the thickness or nature of the beds furnishing the Novaoulites.

From Kulladghi to the Falls of Gokauh, Proceeding in a W, by
N. direction near the right bank of the Gutpurba, towards the falls
of Gokank, over extensive plains of regur with patches here and
there rendered sterile by saline infiltration (the muriate and carbonate
of soda,) the limestone and its associated shales are occasionally
seen basing the plains intersected by dykes of basaltic greenstone^
of which four were counted between Lokapoor and Hulkoond,
about twenty-three miles distant from Kulladghi ; to the intrusion of
these dykes much of the alteration seen in the limestone is attri-
butable.

A little to the west of Hulkoond the great overlying trap of the
Deccan is seen to extend over the surface of the schists, and may be
traced nearly to the base of the sandstone difis to the south and west,
covered by sandstone debris ; a few scattered sandstone outliers occur
between Halkoond and Kulladghi.

At Munnikerry, about twenty-six miles from Kulladghi, is a ridge of
sandstone, approaching a quartz rock in compactness, intersected by
a net work of brown, ferruginous veins. The sandstone is, in some
situations, covered with a breccia composed principally of sand-
stone and quartz in angular fragments cemented by a ferruginous clay.

276 Noie9 &n the Souih Mahratta Cauniry, ^e. [No. 160.

Close to a small pagoda, the sandstone at the S. W. flank of the ridge
near the edge of the overlying tirap is penetrated with a vein of black
manganese, associated with iron, about three inches broad.

At Bugganala, about two and a half miles westerly from this sand-
stcme ridge, the limestone and shales are again seen dipping M. 20' E.
direction of strata E. 20^ S., layers and veins of a reddish jasper and
chert intersect the limestone* a phenomenon that is usually seen
where the limestone comes in contact with plutonic or hypogene
rocks.

Farther west, between Bettighirry and Ooperhutty, a bed of qnartzy
talcose schist, approaching protogine, is crossed with layers of litho*
marge*

Nearer Ooperhutty, the overlying trap is again seen in low cliffs
on the banks of a nullah, resting on a red amygdaloid, which contains
layers of a fine red bole with a shining streak, and conchoidal fracture.
It does not adhere to the tongue ; falls to pieces in water ; does not
form a plastic day.

The trap is associated with wacke, with green earth in nests, and
a chocolate amygdaloid reticulated with strings of calc spar, and im«
bedding oaloedony and zeolites.

A loose sandstone, associated probably with the laterite, and newer
than that which has just been described, rests in horizontal partial
layers on the trap, of which it imbeds small fragments.

On approaching the sandstone ranges of Colabanghy and Gokavk,
the hypogene schists are seen rising to the surface at their base^ and tbe
intervening limestone and its associated shales are wanting. Tbe biil
of Punchmi to the S. W« of the town of Gokauk has a base of
garnitiferous gneiss, hornblende and chloritic schists, capped with sand*
stone in massive beds. These beds are interstratified with layers of
conglomerate containing rounded and angular fragments of reddish
quartz rock^ quartz, and a greenish and grey chert. These fragments
in many instances appear to have been deposited so tranquilly as to
have been arranged agreeably to the laws of gravitation, and occur
most frequently at the seams of the thick sandstone beds.

The hypogene rocks have a dip of about 60^ towards the E. by N.,
direction of beds S. 6^ £• The sandstone rests on it unconfonnaUyi

I845.] Notes an ike South Mahratta Country, SfC. 277

dipping bat slightly in the same direction. A dyke of bftfaltic green-
stone, of about five feet broad, penetrates the hornblende schist in an
easterly direction, bifarcates at about the middle of the ascent from
the N. EL and is lost in the substance of the rock.

F€Ms of Gokauk. The sabordinate ranges of Gokauk and Cota-
bangfay now bef(H« ns, form the eastern flank of the Western Ghauts,
and ran in a parallel direction, here about 8. by E.. At Gokauk the
upper portions of this range present mural precipices with either well
flat tabular summits, or running in narrow crested ridges.

They are entered from the east by a picturesque gorge (cross
▼alley), through which the Gutpurba hurries from its mountain sources
iDto the elevated plains of the Deccan, near the town of Gokauk,
which is about three and a half miles easterly from the falls.

The road lay along the bottom and side of this defile on the right
bank of the river, which was now (July) swollen by the monsoon
freshes from the Western Ghauts. It varied in breadth from 90 to 800
yardsy presenting a rapid muddy stream, brawling and rushing from
the alternate confinement and opening out of its rocky channeL It
is nnfordable generally during four months in the year at Gokauk,
viz. from the middle of May to the middle of September, at the
eessation of the mmisoon. The water at the dry season ford, a little
below the town, is now 15 feet deep. The sources are said to be near
Bunder or Gunder Ghur, a little N. of the Ramghaut Pass from the S.
Conean to Belgaum. After a course of about 100 miles, watering the
plains of Ruliadghi and Bagulcotta, it finds its way through the gaps in
the Sitadonga hills just described, to the Kistnab, which it joins at the
KudU Sunffum,

After an hour's time spent in winding up this rugged defile, the falls,
the roar of which we distinctly heard during the silence of night at
the town of Gokauk, at a sudden angle of the road became partly visi-
ble, presenting the magnificent spectacle of a mass of water containing
upwards of 16,000 cubic feet precipitated from the tabular surface of
the sandstone into a gorge forming the head of the defile, the bottom
of which is about 178 feet below the lip of the cataract The Gut-
purba a little above the fall is apparently about 250 yards across, but
contracts to 80 as the brink of the chasm is approached ; consequently
the density and velocity of the watery mass is much increased, and

278 Notes on the South Mahratta Country, ^c. [Na 160.

it harries down the shelving tables of rock with frightful rapidity to
its fall.

The fall over the face of the precipice seems slow and sullen from
the velocity of the surface water of this rapid, and from the great
denseness of the body; and it plunges heavily down with a deep
thundering sound, which we heard during the previous night at our en-
campment, three and a half miles farther down the river.

This ponderous descent, and the heavy muddy colour of the water,
conveys a feeling of weight through the eye to the senses, which is re-
lieved by the lightness and airiness of thin clouds of white Tapour
and amber-coloured spray which ascend from the basin at the bottom
of the gorge in curling wreaths, curtaining the lower portions of the fall,
and through which the basin was only seen at intervals when its sur-
face was swept by the fitful gusts that swept up the glen.

Rising above the cliffs that confine the falls, the watery particles
vanish as they ascend ; but again condensing, descend in gentle showers*
which is felt at a short distance round the head of the falls.

Spray bows, varying in brightness^ distinctness and extent, accord-
ing to the quantity of light refracted, and the modification of the
▼apour, lent their prismatic tints to the ever-ascending wreaths ; the
largest, (observed about 4 p. m.) formed an arch completely across
the river, rose, and receding as the sun sank in the west^ gradually dis-
appeared with it. Like the rainbow they are only produced on the sur-
face of the cloud opposed to the sun's rays. The size and distance from
each other of the drops composing the different portions of the spray
cloud, evidently influenced the brilliancy of the refracted colours, the
tints being brightest in those portions where the drops were of mediom
size and density, and dullest where the watery particles were smallest
and closest together.

The velocity of the surface water of the rapid was about nine feet
per second, and its depth ten feet. About two and a half miles farther up,
the river near the village of Koonoor, beyond the rapid, is a ford in the
dry season, and a safe ferry during the monsoon. A tumbler-fiill of the
turbid water deposited l-60th of its bulk of a fine reddish clay, not cal-
careous,-—a fact showing that the lime which exists in the sediment
of this river at its confluence with the Kistnah, must have been derived
from the intermediate plains. The pebbles brought down are chiefly

1845.3 Notes on the SautFt Mahratta Country, SfC 279

quartz, granitie, and from the hypogene schistf, with a few of cal«
cedony ; the sands containing grains of magnetic iron. The boiling point
of water at the plateau of sandstone from which the cataract falls,
gives 2817 feet above the level of the sea.

The mean temperature of the place, approximated by Boussin-
ganlt's method, is 78**, which I should think rather too high, as the
temperature of a spring close by was only 75^ Temperature of air in
the shade at time 78^.

The mean temperature of Darwar, which stands much lower, is cal-
culated by Christie at 75^

The head of the fissure, which is elliptical in form, with mural sides
of sandstone, has much the appearance of having been cut back, like
Niagara, by the abrading action of the water, for the space of about
100 yards. Large rocks, with angular unworn surfaces, evidently dislodg*
ed from the rocks on the spot are seen in the bed, and on the sides of
the river below the deep basin-receptacle of the fallen waters and on
its margin. The great hardness and compact structure of the sand-
stone above the falls offers great obstacles to their rapid recession.

The cliffs, however, flanking the right side of the river below, are
rent by nearly vertical fissures from summit to base, by one of which
I descended to the bed. The direction of two of the largest was about
E. S. E. They are crossed nearly at right angles by minor cracks
which thus insulate portions of the rock. The bases of these totter-
ing pinnacles are often undermined by the action of the water, and the
mass tumbles headlong into the stream.

The sandstone in its lower portions is interstratified with layers of
shale, the softness of which facilitates this process of undermining.
These shales are of a purplish-brown and yellowish-brown colour,
with minute spangles of mica disseminated, and between the laminae
contain incrustations of common alum (sulphate of alumina). The
alom is earthy and impure, and sometimes has a mammiilated surface
resembling the alum incrustations in the ferruginous shales cresting
the copper mountain near Bellary. It is found in considerable quan-
tity in a small cave near the foot of the falls.

The ripple mark, so often seen on the sandstones of Europe, is

observed in great distinctness on the tabular surfaces of the cliffs and

ID the exposed layers of the subjacent beds, at least 100 feet below the

280 NoUs an the South Mahratta Ccuntry, S^c, [No. 160.

surface. Its longitudinal direction is various, but generally S. 25^
W., indicating the £. S. E. and W. N. W. direction of the current
which caused them. The ripple marks on the sandstones of Cuddapafa
and Kurnool have a general similar direction.

At the bottom of the deep fissures in the sandstone cliffs already
described, accumulations have formed of fallen fragments of rock,
sticks and leaves, he. from above, intermingled with the dung and bones
of bats, rats and wild pigeons, with a few sheep and goat bones.
Some of the latter have the appearance of having been gnawed by
hyenas, jackals, or other beasts of prey. Many however are evidently
the remains of animals that have fallen from above, as the bones are
fractured.

The upper portions of these fissures have sometimes been choked by
rock and rubbish from above. Their sides, though generally smooth,
are marked with shallow polished grooves.

I made two excavations through the floor of the principal fissure^ in
the hope of meeting with organic remains, but in vain. After pene*
t rating the surface layer of loose stones, and bats' dung, a fine red
earth was met with, imbedding angular fragments of sandstone, and
a few rounded pebbles of it and quartz. After digging for about four
or ^ve feet through this, farther progress was prevented by great blocks
of solid rock.

The seeds of creepers and other plants vegetate on this soil, and
shoot rapidly towards the surface, shading the fissures with their
leaves.

On the cliffs near the falls, on the right bank of the river, stands
a small group of Hindu temples dedicated to Siva. The principal
shrine is a massive and elaborately carved structure of sandstone^
elevated on a high, well built pediment above the reach of the ordinary
floods.

Seven years ago, three of the steps of the northern flight ascending
this terrace were submerged by an extraordinary rise of the river. The
Vimana of this temple contains the Phallitie emblem of Siva, the
LingOt guarded by the sacred bull. Here we passed the heat of the
day. On the opposite bank of the river rises a well wooded hilJ,
about 100 feet above the brink of the rapid, on which stand a few
ruins of other Hindu religious structures.

1845.] NoUi on the South Mahratta Country, ^. 28 1

The table-land to the S. of the falls is covered with low jangle of
Mimosa, Eaphorbia, Cassia and Bunder, the Mend bundati with its lilac
sweet pea-like blossom, the Carissa spinarum, Webera tetrandra an4
other thorny shrubs. The Euphorbia antiqua and tortilis were in
flower, (July).

Tr€uU between Gohauk and Belgaum, along the Western slope of the
GhauiB, From the falls of Gokauk by Padshahpoor to the cantom-
ment of Belgaum, about 34^ miles, the route lies nearly S. W. across
an elevated table-land sloping gently to the eastward, covered with
alternating bands of red and black soil, generally well cultivated, and
intersected from Padshahpoor, which is about 11^ miles from the
falls, to Belgaum by curvilinear spurs and outlying hills, belonging
to the Western Ghaut system, consisting of sandstone and sandstone
conglomerates as at Gokauk, in nearly horizontal strata. The ruins
of the fort at Padshahpoor stand on a low flat-topped hill of this sand-
stone. This formation has been covered in two localities by the overly-
ing trap. A little beyond the village of Kunnoor, about two miles from
the falls, a narrow eauiee of trap is crossed, containing olivine and dark
glassy crystals of felspar.

About a mile to the N. E. of Belgaum, another sheet of trap is
entered on, which extends to the sandstone ranges on the right. The
sandstone is now finally lost sight of on the line of route, and the trap
continues the surface rock to Belgaum, where it is covered by a
thick bed of laterite, over which is in some places superimposed a
layer of the more recent lateritic conglomerate.

Sections of these rocks are afforded by the quarries near the old
European Barracks, none of which have been excavated to the subjacent
trap. It has however been dug down to in some of the deepest wells of
the place. The laterite is used here as at Malacca, Goa, and pn the
Malabar coast, as a building stone.

The trap in the vicinity of Belgaum rises into hills with rounded
summits, covered in general with a dark, spongy mould, which is boggy
during the monsoon, the grassy and almost treeless surface of which
affords a strong contrast to the jungle-covered hills of sandstone to th^
N. W. The trap hills are rarely flat- topped, or in horizontal ranges,

28^ NoUs on the South MahraUa Country, Sfc. [No. 160.

as seen in the more central parts of its area. The trap at the summit
of these hills is usually dark, compact, and basaltic, but occasionally
contains almond-shaped and spheroidal cavities filled with calce-
dony and crystallized quartz, zeolites and green earth. Black crystals
of augite are occasionally seen shooting through its structure, which
decay sooner than the imbedding rock ; and, falling out in the state of
powder, leave numberless cavities on the surface. The rock itself in
weathering, resembles iron in rusting, and passes into reddish brown,
or coffee-coloured earth, or clay. Cavities occasionally are seen filled
with a black earth resembling black bole.

S, E. boundary of the overlying trap at Bangwari, This trap
passing into amygdaloid and wacke, and covered with patches of laterite,
extends about fourteen and a half miles 8. E. from Belgaum, a little to
the West of the village of Bangwari, though a few narrow slips are
crossed a few miles farther East. The edge of the trap is seen reposing on
the hypogene schists at the base of the trap hills close to the village,
the ferruginous quartzites with veins of a diaphanous bluish quartz and
hornblende schists, are here seen to basset out in nearly vertical strata.
From the Southern limit of the overlying trap at Bangwari to the
Malpurba, A few hundred yards to the W. of the village of Hoobly,
sixteen and a quarter miles S. E. from Belgaum, there is a low hill cover-
ed with alluvial soil, in which I found an angular block of quartz with a
fibrous structure resembling that of silicified wood, but evidently not of
organic origin. The exterior is brown and opaque ;— interior generally
translucent with microscopic longitudinal cavities. Minute longitudinal
fibres of talc are discoverable with the aid of a lens, having a parallel
direction with those of the fibres of quartz, and I have little doubt
that the rock owes its fibrous structure to the presence of talc. I have
observed a similar structure in the qaartzite associated with the talcosa
and acty noli tic schists of Mysore.

Malpurba River, About three-quarters of a mile from Hoobly the
Malpurba is crossed. It was swollen by the monsoon (July) and unf(Mr*
dable, having about eighteen feet of water in the main channel. Rate
of surface current, two and a half feet per second. Its breadth by a tri*
gonometrical observation ninety-five yards. A tumbler-full of the water

1845.] Note$ <m the South Mahraiia CoufUry^ Sfc. 283

deposited a scanty sediment of fine red silt, aboat 1 -50th part of its balk.
The temperature of the water afoot below the surface was 74°, of air in
shade 72% of a well thirty feet deep 74° 5'. The temperature of rain
water 73°. (The atmosphere had then been cooled to 70° and 74° by
eighteen days of successive rain, with a pretty steady westerly wind).
The banks of the river are of silt and sand, the left or Western bank
is steep and high.

From the Malpurba to Darwar. From the banks of the Malpurba
to Darwar, a direct distance of twenty-three miles, the country is
hilly and picturesque, particularly around the Marhatta forts and towns
of Kittoor and Taigoor, which command a lovely landscape of hill and
dale. The valleys are generally well watered, cultivated with dry
and wet grain, and studded, parklike, with clumps of the Mango and
Tamarind, while the sloping sides of the hills, verdant with the rain,
afford a plentiful pasture to flocks of sheep and herds of cattle. The
landscape around Darwar partakes of the same character, and was
frequently brought to recollection during subsequent wanderings in
Karamauia, the Troad, and other parts of Asia Minor.

The soil covering the surface of this pleasing tract of country, is
osually reddish, and the result of the decay and washing of the neigh*
bearing rocks. A few belts of cotton soil appear here and there. The
staple products of these soils are rice, yellow and white Juari, Bajra,
Raggi, Teimgoni, Till, Tobacco, Saffron, and Maize ; Mimosa, Euphor-
l»a. Cacti, Cassias, and Acacias constitute the majority of the wild
vegetation.

The schists forming the hills in the vicinity of Kittoor resemble^
petrologically, the jaspideous schists of Bellary and Sondur (described
in Madras Journal for July 1838, pp. 147-49,) and consist commonly
of chert and brown iron ore, or a ferruginous jaspideous clay in alter-
nate layers ; sometimes in straight lines, sometimes in flexures con-
torted, or bent at acute angles, and resembling those of ribbon jasper.
This rock, like that of Sondur, is sometimes magnetic with polarity.
It contains nests and cavities lined with blistery and stalactitic hema-
tite, quartz crystals, and veins of smoky quartz^ In some places,
like the Sondur rock, it puts on the appearance of a breccia consist*
ing of a dark chocolate, or liver- brown paste, highly indurated, giving
fire with steel, imbedding angular fragments of the striped ribbon jas-

284 Noies an (he South Mahratta Country, ^e. [No. 160.

per-like variety, aod appearipg, as Christie justly describes, as if the
latter rock had been broken into a number of small angular fragments,
which had been afterwards united by the consolidation of the brown
variety. I have seen this singular phenomenon most beautifully ex*
hibited in some specimens of a continental agate breccia in the coU
lection of Mr. Robert Brown, the celebrated botanist, where angular
fragments of beautiful jasper and agate are united together in highly
transparent quartz. The pieces of agate and jasper must evidently
hsve been once continuous, and re«united on the spot where they were
fractured ; since, in most instances, the sides of the fractured portions
are sharp and angular, and could be refitted into each other with per*
feet exactness; some are only separated a tenth of an inch by the
transparent medium in which they are set. The differently coloured
bands identify the fractured portions as having once constituted one
integral piece of jasper or agate.

If the reader can imagine a flat piece of ribbon-jasper or agate laid
down upon a table, and both broken, so that the fractured portions
shall not be scattered widely from their neighbours, and a layer of mol-
ten glass carefully poured over them, he may form an idea of the sp-
pearance of these beautiful breccias. He must not expect, however,
to see such regularity in rocks on the large scale.

Towards Darwar the schists pass into ehloritic and argillaceoos
slates and shales, of all shades of white, yellow, red, brown, and green ;
interstratified with beds of quartz rock, and the jaspideous rock josi
described, which generally forms crests and mural ridges on the sum-
mits of the hills. The latter is often found in irregular masses, ob-
scurely stratified ; but, in most cases, as remarked already, in regularly
interstratified beds with the clay and ehloritic schists conformable
both in dip and direction.

The lustre of this rock is sometimes equal to that of pitchstone, and
sometimes dull and earthy ; the fracture flat conchoidal, in the mors
compact varieties ; splintery and slightly granular in the less compact
The Kittoor and Darwar schists bear evident marks of the alternatioo
produced by the intrusion of granite, and trap dikes seen occasional-
ly at the bases of these hills ; and as in the Ceded Districts, and other
localities on the hypogene area, of Southern India, affords striking iilas-
trations of the correctness of McCulloch's remark on the formation

1845.] Note$ on the South MahfaUa Country ^ Sfc. 285

of jasper rock>* viz. " where strata of quartz rock» containiDg much
felspar or clay occur in contact with granite, they pass into jasper
if the clay abounds ; while in other places they are converted into
chert if less of that earth is present ; or, if pure, are rendered perfectly
crystalline/'

With regard to the classification of jaspideous rocks associated with
the metamorphic schists of S. India, it is clear they either belong to
the jasper rocks, or silicious schists of McCuUoch, both of which^
however, I have reason to think, pass occasionally into each other.
Both occur in strata among the metamorphic rocks ; jasper sometimes
forming hills in Siberia and Norway, and it is seen in Scotland and the
Appennines imbedded in micaceous and argillaceon§ schists.

The difficulty that sometimes exists of distinguishing these two rocks
has not escaped the notice of McCuUoch, who thus remarks: ** Jasper
presents a few modifications of internal structure which require notice.
It sometimes gives indications of a spheroidal concretionary dis*
position, more or less perfect, and resembling that which, under cir^
eumustances of a simUar nature, occurs in chert and silicious schist. In
the same way, it sometimes possesses a laminar structure, and in this
also it api^oximates to the silicious schists. It is easy to see how
from similarity of origin, connexion and composition, it may be thus
a matter of doubt to which of those two rocks any given specimen
or bed should be referred. The well known striped and spotted
jaspers owe their appearance to the two structures above-mentioned,
and occasionally the two are combined in the same specimen."

There is however a perhaps somewhat empirical distinction drawn
by some geologists between these two classes of rocks, founded upon
the supposed less stratified character of jasper, its intrusion into
other rocks in the state of veins, and its association with trap rocks,
which I will avail myself of to place, pro^tempore, the jaspideous
rocks of Southern India among the silicious schists ; from their, in ge*
neral, decidedly stratified character, particularly those of the Southern
Marhatta country, which pass into the associated schists, and preserve a
conformable dip and direction. The petrographical characters of the
Marhatta beds, varying according to the degree of induration, and

* Classification of Rocks, pp. 546-47.

286 Notes on the South Mahratta Country, 8fc. [No. 160.

structure, on tbe whole less assimilate those of jasper than in Sondor
and other places. The generality of its most jaspideons and lami-
nar beds may be classed in McGuUoch's second division of silicious
chert, viz.

** F. Laminar, with alternate colours, and forming varieties of the
striped jasper of mineralogists. The colours are commonly shades of
red| brown, yellow and purplish black, and these kinds appear to be
derived from the coloured shales.

" G. Containing imbedded crystals of quartz, and of a porphyritic
aspect."

The physical aspect of the country to the W. and S. W. of Darwar
is hilly. The elevations are generally, like those of the clay slate of
the Cambrian group, rouud-backed, smooth, of no great altitude, and
separated by well cultivated vallies, or narrow ravines. They are
partially covered with a low shrubby vegetation principally of Mimosa,
Cacti, and the Cassia auriculata. To the East stretches the great pkteaa
of the S. Mahratta country and Ceded Districts, covered for the
most part with a thick layer of regur^ and continuing, with but' few
hilly interruptions, across the peninsula to the Eastern Ghauts. The
soil in the immediate vicinity of Darwar is reddish and clayey, evident-
ly the alluvium of the schistose hills, and disintegration of rocks in
sitti*

The rocks composing the hills are schists passing into slates and
shales, (agreeably to Lyell's distinctions of these terms.) The general
structure is perhaps more schistose and shaly than slaty. The stme-
ture varies from massive, and obscurely slaty, to finely laminar ; and from
compact and flinty, to soft and sectile. The laminae are nearly verti-
cal, and generally run parallel with the prevailing line of elevation, viz.
N. W. and S. E. Tbe stratification, if not identical with the lamina-
tion, is obscure. It is well known, however, that the lines of fissility
in slates are not necessarily those of stratification, the former being often
caused by the arrangement of mica, chlorite or talc ; petrographlcally
speaking, the rock passes from a green chloritic schist into all shades
of white, yellow, red and brown, sometimes singularly arranged in
stripes, in contorted and waving bands ; red and white being the pre-
valent tints. Felspar, in a clayey slate of disintegration, is the preva-
lent mineral blended with quartz, and tinged with iron. The white

1845.J Nate9 on the South MahraUa Country, Sfc. 287

varieties seldom contain silez sufficient to give them the character of
Kaolin. The whole mass is sometimes relicalated by veins of a brow^
ferrttginous qaartz and impure iron ore, (often split in the centre, and
the sides of the fissure lined with quartz crystals) having apparently
DO decided direction. Iron pyrites are seen in the chloritic schists ;
this rock, particularly in the vicinity of trap dykes, has a tendency to
the prismatic and rhomboidai forms, in which the lamination, though
generally obscure, is sometimes still distinctly traceable. A system of
joints running nearly at right angles with those of lamination, often in*
tersect the whole group of these schists. These jointed portions are not
capable of that indefinite subdivision into similar solids by which Pro*
fessor Sedgwick justly observes, the true cleavage planes may generally
be distinguished from the joints. The difficulty in the schists of the
S. Mahratta country is to discriminate between the planes of cleavage,
and those of mechanical deposition, or chemical precipitation, for
which there are three good tests, viz. the interstratification of another
bed of rock, the coloured bands of successive deposition, and a pecu-
liar, but slightly dimpled appearance on the surfaces of the planes
ne?er seen on those of cleavage. From the occurrence of the latter
on the planes of the laminae of the Darwar rocks, and from the iron and
dip of the large interstratified beds of quartz and silicious schists, I
am inclined to consider that the true lines of stratification run nearly
parallel with that of elevation, viz. nearly N. W. and S. E., and that the
laminae are those of deposition ; while the microscopic fissures by which
the rock is cleft into rhomboidai and prismatic forms may be received
as those of true cleavage.

My friend Captain Allardyce, who has minutely examined the rocks
about Darwar, writes me that the direction of the laminae and that of
stratification keep very constant to one point of the compass, viz. N. W.
by N. for a great distance, perhaps over an area of from fifty to one bun*
dred miles. One may pick up a fragment of chlorite slate of a trian-
gular, pyramidal 'outline, the external planes of which will be ferrugi-
nous, while the interior is divided into minute laminae not ferruginous,
and coincident with only one of the planes. On examination of the
rock in sitCl, this minute lamination is found to be vertical, and invari-
ably divided N« W. by N., conformable, in short, to the line of eleva^-
tion. The chloritic schist N. of Darwar is of a bluish green tinge,

288 NoiM on tiie South Mahratta Country, ^o. [No. 160.

greasy to the touch ; and sometimes so massive in structure as to make
an excellent building stone^ although it rarely loses its slaty fracture.
Thin pieces, per se, before the blow- pipe, fuse partially on the edges
into globules of a greenish-coloured enamel.

It is often intersected by ferruginous quartz veins, or rather layers,
that, penetrating the lateral joint seams, and the almost vertical layers
of stratification, divide the rock into cuboldal masses. Veins of a
reddish grey or white kunker, both friable and compact, occur.

Country S. of Darwar to the Mysore and Canara Frontiers, From
the hills of Darwar to the Mysore frontier near Bunwassi and Chun-
dergooty, the face of the country presents a plain diversified with a
few mammiform and smooth conoidal truncated hills, which do not
rise to any considerable height. The soil is generally reddish and
alluvial, crossed in an easterly direction by narrow belts of cotton
soil. The formation is much the same as at Darwar. Dykes of
greenstone and beds of kunker now become more frequent. A large
deposit of the latter is crossed on the road between the old town of
Hoobly and the German mission house, about fifteen miles S. £. from
Darwar. The wells near are often brackish, and so deep as seventy feet.
Both Hingari and Mungari crops are cultivated. Rice too is grown
in some of the moist, shallow vallies and flats below the small tanks,
which now become more numerous.

Bunwassi and Mysore Frontier. Towards Bunwassi quartz rock
prevails with greenstone dykes, having a general easterly direction
often covered by beds of laterite and lateritic conglomerate imbedding
fragments of quartz rock in a cellular brown ferruginous paste. This
rock has been employed in the construction of the wall enclosing the
quadrangle of the ancient temple and the old temple at Bunwassi. A
little farther South rises from the schists the lofty rock of Chundergooty
in Mysore, a mountain mass of granitoidal gneiss divided by vertical
and almost horizontal fissures.

From Bunwassi to Gudduk. From Bunwassi, £. N. Easterly to
Savanoor, the chloritic and coloured schists and slate clays continoe.
Near the latter place dykes of greenstone become more frequent, ac-
companied by depositions of kunker, which is seen filling fissures in
the schists, and overspreading their surface beneath the alluvial soil*
The direction of the beds at Savanoor suffers a deflection after

1845.] NoU$ on the South MahraUa Country, ^c. 289

leaving Darwar of aboat 40^ being nearly dae N. and S., dipping at
an angle of aboat 40® towards the East. Tiiey terminate on the N.
£. between Savanoor and Gadduck, close to Lackmaisir. Here a spar
from the principal N. and 8. line of elevation runs nearly E. and W.
dipping towards the 8. ; several similar spurs are crossed between Bun-
wassi and Lackmaisir ; the dykes of greenstone run in a similar direc-
tion. The schists, in the vicinity of the dykes, are indurated, silicious,
and often abound with iron. Crystals of liver and brass-coloured iron
pyrites are scattered through its structure ; cotton soil alternates in these
strips with the red clayey alluvial soil; it was first observed W. of
Bankassur, near which the vegetation peculiar to the W. Ghauts ter-
minates rather abruptly.

At Lackmaisir, gnmss is seen on the bank of a nullah running near-
ly E. and W. with a dip of 35® towards the S., and farther N. it rises
into a low round backed ridge. Proceeding still more N. granite
occurs in low bosses and detached blocks, and rises into a few clusters
at the town of Kul Mulgoond. Near Hurti, on the S. flank of the
Kuppntgode range, resting on the gneiss, is a hill of mammiform shape,
having its surface covered with detached, angular, and rugged masses
of a calcareous rock, which appear to have been subjected to the action
of violent disruptive forces. It is very liable to be mistaken, from the
colour, hardness and granular texture, for a variety of the massive
chlorite schist we have just left behind ; and in some hard specimens it
resembles diallage and serpentine. The mass of it however, on the
application of a lens, clearly exhibits its true aggregate character : it is
composed of minute angular fragments of a dark glistening quartz, and
ciystals of a pale flesh-coloured felspar, cemented by a greenish, gra-
nular subcrystalline paste, composed principally of carbonate of lime,
and containing disseminated scales of mica. The application of dilute
nitric acid to the rock excited but a feeble efiervescence ; but from the
powder, the extraction of carbonic acid gas was abundantly evident*
Like the chlorite slate, it imbeds cubical, brass, and liver-coloured iron
pyrites. Before the blow pipe, per se^ it phosphoresces slightly, and
exhibits, on thin edges, shining points of black enamel. The compact
varieties of this rock are susceptible of a high polish, and are used for
ornamental architecture. Some of the finely polished slabs in the

290 Noie9 an ike Souih MahraUa Couniry, ^c. [No. 160.

elaborately acolptured mosqae in the town Laokmaiair appear to be of
this stone, retaining, like lapis lazuli, the pyrites which shine like so
many spots of gold in its polished surface. In weathered surfaces of
the rock these crystals are often seen projecting. It is not unlike
some varieties of the celebrated calcareous breccia di verde of Egypt.

From its massive character, and want of a proper section, I could
not find whether it was interstratified with the gneiss, or rested uncon-
formably upon it. Gold-dust is found in the Nalas of Hurti, of Soltoor,
and of Chick Mulgoond.

Beyond this singular hill runs a dyke of greenstone £• by S.,' which is
crossed on the road, and also a range of chlorite and clay slate hills crest-
ed with ferruginous silicious schist, having a similar direction. PassiDg
this, the country slopes northerly to Gudduck where gneiss and felspar
rocks continue.

From Gudduck E. to ike Ceded Districts^ and N. to Gujunder Gkur.
From Gudduck easterly to the Tumbuddra and the Ceded Districts,
the formations consist of gneiss, hornblende slate and granite; and
from Gudduck westerly to Darwar, first gneiss and hornblende slate;
succeeded, about seventy or eighty miles E. of Darwar, by chlorite and
coloured schists and shales. North of Gudduck the hypogene schists
and granite extend to Gi\junder Ghur, where they are covered by the
sandstone beds.

Kuppfutgode Hilis, The Rupputgode range presents an example of
one of the crop dislocations which traverse the table-land of the penin*
sula in a direction from, E. by S. to E. S. E. often influencing the courses
of the large rivers which, rising in the Western Ghauts, flow over the
table-lands through gaps in the Eastern Ghauts to the fiay of Bengal
It commences a little south of Gudduck, and proceeds in a curvilinear
direction easterly, until a little W. of the village of Kuddumpore where
it bifurcates; the principal branch taking a S. 26° E. direction to
the Toombuddra, which flows through a wide gap, and is continued
into the Ceded Districts by Harponhully. The northern branch
pursues an easterly course towards Dummul, where it traverses s
wide plain extending as far as the eye can reach to the N. E. The
strata dip near Gudduck towards the N. at an angle of 35^ Those
of the southern chain, below the bifurcation and change in the durectioD,

1845.] Notes an the South MahraUa Country, ^c. 291

dip £. 20* ]S. direction of strata S. 20'' £• The dip frequently rarieB
with the flexures and contortions into which the hypogene schists hare
been thrown. In one of the highest peaks it appeared qui qu& versal ;
and near the temple to Kupput Iswara, whence the range derives its
namOy I found the dip to the 8. W.

An immense dyiie of basaltic greenstone emerges from the base
of the strata near the point where the range suddenly bifurcates,
accompanied, as usual, by large deposits of Kunher^ which fill most of
the seams and fissures in it and the adjacent rock. Considerable
tendency to silicification is observed ; the schists are profusely veined
with quartz of different hues, white, pinkish, and diaphanous blue^
reddish, tmoky and black ; seams and large veins of basanite also
occur.

The Kupput hills are principally composed of hornblende and
chloritic schists, gneiss and mica slate; large interstratified beds of
silicions and ferruginous schists, as at Darwar, often forming thin
ridges ; seams and thin beds of a crystalline white marble occur ;
which, near their junction with the hornMende slate, are often coloured
green. On the flanks of the range, at the base, gneiss invaded by gra«
nite is seen, both quartzose and felspathic, containing rose-coloured
quartz and felspar. Near Dummul the gneiss is often so much
weathered as to resemble sandstone ; schorl and actynolite are usu-
ally seen in the quartz veins, which intersect it The dip of the
gneiss is nearly vertical at Dummul, in other situations it varies
slmost to horizontal ; some of the hills are capped with laterite, re-
sembling that of Sondoor. The beds of the Dhoni rivulet, which has
its rise in these hills, contain gravel and sand, in which gold-dust is
found associated with magnetic iron sand, menaccanite, iron ore, grains
of platinum, grey carbonate of silver, grey carbonate of copper, &c. Man-
ganese is also found in considerable quantities. Tippoo excavated pits
for gun-flints, of which I have given a description elsewhere.* Potstone
occurs with the talc schist in this vicinity, and is used by the natives in
sculpture, for cooking vessels, and for giving a smooth surface. The oc-
currence of gold, silver, copper, platinum, and manganese seems to have
escaped the observation of Christie, Marshall, and other writers on the

^ Madras Journal of Literature and Science for January 1840, p. 42.

292 Notes on the South Mahratta Country y ^c. QNo. 160.

S. Mahratta country ; and there doubtless exist many other minerals
in its rocks now unknown, but which the researches of other and
abler pioneers than myself, and with more leisure, will not fail to elicit.

Geographical position and extent of the various Rocks of ike S. Mqk*

ratta Country,

Hypogene Rocks. Commencing on the South, we find the greater
portion of our area occupied by hypogene schists and argillaceous shales
and slates, reaching on the North from Gujunder Ghur from the edges
of the limestone and sandstone tracts ; and at Bangwari, fifteen miles
S. £. from Belgaum, basseting from beneath the overlying trap whence
they extend by Darwar and Kittoor, forming the base of the Western
Ghauts, and underlying the laterite of North Canara to the Sea on the
West, stretching into Mysore on the South, and into the great plains
of the Ceded Districts and Hydrabad on the East.

Near the N, W. angle they are seen outcropping from the sand-
stones near Gokauk as a salbande at the edges of the overlying trap
formation along the N. bank bf the Kistnah, in narrow zones along the
Western base of the Sitadonga hills. They are seen with granitic
rocks on the summit of the Ramghaut, and below it hornblende schist
occurs on the sea shore at Vingorla.

Extent of the Limestone and Sandstotie Beds.

The Limestone. The Southern boundary of the limestone and its
associated shales has not been traced with accuracy, but we find it four
or five miles S. of Kulladghi.

On the North Eastern extremity it emerges from the overlying trap
near Talicotta, is capped by sandstone at Mudibhal, but re*appears in
the valley of the Kistnah at Chimlaghi. A little to the S. W. it is again
overlain by the great mass of sandstone forming the Sitadonga hills^
but again is seen forming for the most part the base pf the great plains
of Kulladghi and Bagulcotta, and stretching to the West to the sand-
stone ranges of Gokauk and Padshapoor which bound it to the West^
while the northern edge is fringed irregularly along the banks of the
Gutpurba by the overlying trap.

Extent of the Sandstone, The sandstone and conglomerate ranges
usually skirt the great limestone plains as the sand and gravel shores

1845.] NoUs on the South Mahratia Country, SfC. 293

environ the bed of some dried-up inland sea, and this appearance is
heightened by the bold, flat-topped headlands and receding bays pre-
sented by the sandstone ranges in their curvilinear oatline. This con-
tinuity of these long horizontal ranges, which usually preserve an uni-
formity of height, rarely exceeding 300 feet, has however been
greatly violated by, apparently, denudatory aqueous causes ; and it is not
ttttcommon to see outlying masses and short ranges of sandstone at
considerable distances from the principal deposit, for instance the de-
tached rocks of Noulgoond, Pedda and Chick Nargoond, (where it oc-
cors in scarped masses cropping granite and the hypogene schists,) and
the detached central range between KuUadghi and Gokauk.

The Sitadonga hills form the eastern fringe to the district, and those
of Gokaak the western, extending southerly from its northern limits
on both sides of the limestone plain of Kulladghi and Bagulcotta to
about the latitude of the Malpurba river. The subjacent limestone
thins out, or is entirely wanting at the edges, where the sandstone is
often seen resting immediately on the granite and hypogene schists.
The eastern ridge of sandstone turns westerly near Gujunder
Ghur.

Extent of the Lateriie. Laterite is seen capping some of the sand-
stone hills of the Sitadonga range, and a narrow belt along its eastern
flank. It also occurs in the form of low hills and patches overlying
the limestone in the plains of Bagulcotta and Kulladghi.

In the Southern parts of the district it occurs in a few patches
covering the hypogene schists of the Kupputgode range, and on the
summits of the Ghaut ranges West of Belgaum and Darwar.

Extent of Kunker, Kunker is pretty generally distributed ; there
are beds near Badami and Hoobly, of some extent, covered by alluvium.

Extent of the Regur. This remarkable soil, or deposit, for so I con-
sider it, resembles much the Tchomoi Zem covering the steppes of
Russia; it prevails almost exclusively in the plains East of Dar-
war, and those of Kulladghi and Bagulcotta, except where interrupted
by chains of hills, and covered by the alluvium washed from their sides,
in beds from a few inches to thirty or forty feet deep.

Extent €f Plutonic and Trappean Rocks, Plutonic rocks are rarely
seen developed in any extent on the surface of the South Mahratta
country, but their efiects are sufficiently apparent in the altered state
of many of the lower rocks.

294 Note$ on the South MahraUa Country^ ^c. [No. 160.

Granite is seen in bosses and rocks near Lackmaisir, at Gujander
Ghar and Noulgoond, underlying the sandstone at Malgoond, in the
gneiss of the Knpputgode hills, at Gaddak and Dammul, and in the
districts bordering on the Tumbaddra and East of Gojunder Ghar.

The largest dykes of basdtic greenstone, which I observed, were at
the West base of the Sitadonga hills, and in the Knpputgode range.

Extent^ Sfc. of Overlying Trap, The southern margin of the great
sheet of overlying trap, which overspreads almost the whole of Central
and Western India and the Concan, runs across the northern part of
the South Mahratta country, covering all rocks except the laterite,
kunker, and regur, all which overlie it: entering from the Nizam's
territories by Firozabad on the Bhima, it descends to the Ristnah near
Churilaghi, near its confluence with the Gutpurba and follows with
some irregularities the northern bank of the latter river by Kotabangy,
a little to the N. of the falls of Gokauk to the W. Ghauts and the sea,
which it reaches a little N. of Mai wan.

The narrow zone of oliviniferous trap, crossed between the falls and
Koonoor, possibly connects the outlier of this rock on which Beiganm
stands with the main Coulee,

North of the Kistnah the trap spreads over the Kolapoor, Sattarab,
and Poonah countries ; to the N. £• it covers the plains of Byapoce and
the Nizam's territories, stretching towards Gwalior. Where the trap
terminates to the W. of Belg^m is not exactly ascertained, as the
summits of the Ghants near the Pass down to Vingorla are composed
of granite and the hypogene schists ; but the river Gutpurba, as has
been observed already, brings down a few calcedonies to the falls of
Gokauk. The amygdaloid noticed at Bangwari, and in the vicinity of
Belgaum, appears to have escaped the observation of Christie, who
states he has not seen this rock in siiti.

Classification cf the Rocks of the South Mahratta Country,

Christie, partly adopting the Wernerian system, has classed the rocks
of the South Mahratta Country under five heads, viz.:

Ist. Granite.
2nd. Transition Rocks.
3rd. Old Red Sandstone.
4th. Secondary Trap.
5th. Alluvial.

J84J. j Notes on tie SouA MahraUa Couniry^ ifc. 295

Under the head of Transition he has induded the gneiss and talo
flchist of Dammol, Norgoond and Gainnippa. The chlorite and clay
tlatefl^ eilieioas schists and qoartzite of Darwar, Kittore, and in short,
the schiats of the whole of the central and soathem parts of the Darwar
district, together with the limestone of Kulladghi and Bi^olcotta.

Some clay slates associated with these limestones he has classed
among the grauwacke gronp, and the sandstone with the old red sand*
stone.

Thin classification has been apparently grounded on mineral resem-»
bUnce of the schists to the transition rocks of Werner* their in gene-
ral highly inclined strata, and on the circomstance of the sandstone
retting, in some localities, on the schists in unconformable, and almost
horizontal stratification. These facts^ without the additional evidence
of organic remains, and in the total absence of any associated stratum
the age of which has been distinctly ascertained, would hardly be
deemed by geologists of the present day, sufficiently conclusive to
warrant the rocks of the S. Mahratta country being referred to the
same epochs as the transition, grauwacke and old red sandstone rocks
of Eorope^ as now defined.

Wenier> in his improvement of the system of Lehman who divided
rocks into three dassas, viz. :

1st Primitive : comprising plutonio or granitic rocks, and the hypo-
gene or metamorphio schists formed with the worid» and containing no
fragments of other rocks ;

2nd. Secondary : induding the aqueous and fossiliferous strata which
resulted from the partial debris of the primitive rocks by a general
revdntion ;

3rd. Alluvial : comprehending the debris of local floods and of the

Deloge of Noah-<«

intercalated a 4th class between the ist and 2nd class, and under this

hesd he placed a series of strata, which he thought formed a passage

between Lehman's primitive and secondary rooks, hence called

transition, assimilating on the one hand to the crystdline structure of

miea, and clay date% and on the other, evinctag traces of a mecha-

ikicd origin, and organic remains. Theae bade were chiefly of diay slate

arenaceous rock, coralline and shelly limestone, and grauwacke, a grey

aiigiUaceons sandstone, often schiatoee^ imbedding small fragments of

quartz, flinty slate, or basantte, and day slate, cemented together

'2 T

296 Notes an the S^nUh Mdhratta Country ^ Sfc, [No. 160.

by argillaceouB matter. Werner, in the confined space that fell andei:
his observation, found both the primitiye and transition schists highly
inclined, while the newer aqueous or secondary li^ds were horizontal ;
hence his too hasty generalizations. It is now ascertained that seconda-
ry strata and green tertiary beds are often foond in nearly vertical po«
sition, and that some granites are newer than the lias and chalk ; on
the other hand, gneiss is often seen in horizontal beds, and Mr. Marchison
has lately discovered in Russia the older stratified rocks extending in
horizontal unbroken masses for the distance of nearly one thoasand
miles. The valae of mineral character unsupported by others, is of
small value as a test of the relative ages of stratified rocks ; we see la-
custrine strata of the Ek>cene period identical in all their mineral cha-
racters with the secondary new-red sandstone and its associated marls,
and certain arenaceous beds in the (cetaceous formations of the Alps^
and even in some tertiary deposits, which can hardly be petrologtcally
distinguished from the rocks of the grauwacke group.

Although it is quite possible that future discoveries may prove the
sandstone to be equivalent to the old red, and many of the rocks^
classed as transition, really to belong to that period ? yet I consider it
preferable, for the present, to arrange the rocks of the S. Mahratta
country agreeably to the acknowledged geological evidence they
themselves exhibit, in addition to that of a mineral character, viz : saper-
position, imbedded fragments of older rocks, intrusion with or without
alteration, conformable or non-conformable stratification, and this with
little reference to European formations. The classification will there-
fore, for the most part, be that of relative age. Not a single organic
remain, I may observe, has hitherto been discovered in the most
recent deposit in the S. Mahratta country to assist us to any conda
sion, except recent terrestrial and fresh-water shells in the newer
kunker.

The stratified rocks will be classed in the ascending order, commen-
cing with the hypogene, or lowest series. The plntonic and trappean
irocks will succeed.

Age of ffypogene Rocks. The hypogene schists are evidently the
lowest in the group of normal rocks, and have suffered the greatest
disturbance as already observed. The lowest member in this series
is usually gneiss, and the highest either marble or clay slate : bat
there are many exceptions to this remark.

1845.] NoUi on the South MahraUa CamUry, ifc. 297

Age efLimeHone. Christie has classed with the hypogene schists under
tnnaitioD, the limestones of Knliadghi and Baguloolta ; bat from extensive
observation of this rock, here and in other parts of India, I am inclined to
think it, with its associated slates and shales, of more recent origin, prin-
cipally from its resting on the gneiss, he in osually ancDnformable stra^
tification, often dipping but a few degrees over large tracts, and its
more intimate association with the sandstone which caps it ; these rocks
bong usually seen together. The limestone is inclined near Knliadghi
at an angle of 2&^^ bat this disturbance is confined to areas of small ex-
tent, speedily recovering its usual little inclined position. In some lo-
calities, as near Ryelcherro and Juldroogum in the Ceded Districts, it
it seen to alternate with the sandstone. Traces of coal have been dis-
eorered in a limestone in the Hydrabad country, which appears identi-
eal with the Kumool and Knliadghi limestones.

Sandstone. The sandstone, though sometimes alternatijig, and
often in conformable strata, with the limestone, is on the whole less
disturbed, as just observed ; and generally appears in almost hinrisontai
strata, particularly in the hills south of the Malpurba. On die north
hank of this river the sandstone beds have suffered more disturbance^
and Christfe observed them dipping at an angle of 40^ to the N. W.
at Chiek NUrgoond, resting on vertical hypogene schists, (talc slate).
In the N. £• portion of the district the sandstone of the Sitadonga
hills rests on vertical chlorite and silidous schists, with a dip towards
the N. £. varying from &^ to 28"^. In the N. W. portion, near
Gokauk, the stratification is obscure, the beds appearing as thick and
nearly horizontal tabular masses. Where the strata are horizontal, the
bills which they compose run in long, low, flat-topped, wall-like ridges
tenninating like trap elevations rather abruptly, and their sides often
presenting mural precipices. These ranges usually run in correspond-
ing elevations, averaging about 200 feet from the surface of the plain.
The maximum thickness of the deposit perhaps does not exceed 400
feet

From their being sometimes in unconformable stratification with the
Umestone, and imbedding fragments of its cherts, it might be infer-
red that an interval of plutonic disturbance took place between the
periods of their deposition ; though we have not as yet sufikient evi-
dence to refer them to two distinct geological epochs. Basanite,

300 Notes on tJie South Mahraita Country, ^c. [No. IGO.

weftthered nodules of the rocks from which it was derived. I have also
seen laterite resting on limestone without a traceable particle of lime in
its composition. This could not have been limestone weathered in sitd.

The fact of one hill being capped with latyite, and its neighbour
being left bare, is a circumstance also militating against another theory
adopted by some Indian geologists, viz. that of its alluvial origin froin
causes now existing. It is impossible to see the laterite capping in
tabular strata, as at Beder, hills of trappean or hypogene rocks separat-
ed by vallies, wide plains or elevations, in which nothing but the latter
rocks are seen, without coming to the conclusion that the beds of
laterite were once continuous over these spaces, and stripped oSbf
waters of which nothing but the trace of denudation now remains.
Natural sections often remind one forcibly of that striking instance of
denudation of the red sandstone, on the N. W. coast of Ross*shire
given by McCulloch in his Western Isles, Vol. IL p. 93, pL 31, fig. 4r

The annexed diagram is a section taken on the W. coast, between
Honawer and Sedashegur.

The rarely fossiliferous character of this iron clay or ferruginous chij,
as it has been call^, which has puzzled some geo]ogists,and inclined
others to the theory of its volcanic origin, may be in some measure at-
tributed to its highly ferriferous nature, often approaching that of an
ore of iron. It is a fact, and, asLyell observes, (Geol. Vol. II. p. 102,)
one not yet accounted for, that scarcely any fossil remains are preserved
in stratified rocks in which this oxide of iron (derived from the disin*
tegration of hornblende or mica) abounds ; and when we find fossils in
the new or old red sandstone in England, it is in the grey and usually
calcareous beds that they occur.

I have often observed, particularly in the W. Ghauts, and on the Ka-
labar and Concan coasts, wliere the rains fall heaviest, that the granitie,
hypogene and trappean rocks containing most iron, weather into fer-
ruginous and coloured clays that sometimes, lithologically speaking,
resemble laterite, and these when that rock is near, cause the appearaaoe
of their passing into it I have also observed beds of considerable mag-
nitude of an impure oxide of iron in gneiss and hornblende, sometimes
cellular and pisiform (and from which much of the iron in laterite has
doubtless been derived) ; but when we look up from the microscopic view
afibrded by these alowly weathering blocks of rock and beds of ore in siti^

»^

S€ciu>n skeu/cngr cUTiudcUi^n, of

1845.] NoUs on the South Mahratia Country, ^c. 301

and cast our eyes upon even the present extent of laterite over the sur*
face of Soathern India, the thickness of its beds (at Beder 200 feet») its
iat.topped ranges of hills, the great gaps effected in their continuity
evidently by aqueous causes no longer in action, its often elevated
petition above the drainage of the country, its imbedding layers of lig-
nite from silicified wood, and occasionally water^worn pebbles of dis-
tant rocks, we find we can no more attribute its origin to the weather-
ing of rocks in sitA, or to their present transported detritus, than that
of the old sandstones of Europe to the sandy disintegration now in
progress of accumulating by rains around the bases of older sandstone,
granite, and hypogene rocks, although a mineral resemblance exists as
in the case of the true and pteudo-laterites.

Having said thus much to warrant my placing laterite among the
rocks of aqueous and mechanical origin, I shall proceed to notice it as
it occurs in the South Mahratta country. It may be remarked, passim,
that fossil shells have been scarcely ever found in the tertiary Rhe-
niik brown coal beds, though in the vicinity of Bonn large blocks
have been met with of a white opaque chert, containing numerous casts
d fresh-water sheUs, which appear to belong to Planorbis rotundatus
and Limnea longiscata.* The laterite capping the overlying trap of the
South Mahratta country does not appear to have been invaded or
altered by it like the brown coal beds. But similar blocks of chert con-
taining fresh-water shells, viz. two species of Cypris, three of Unio, and
many individuals referable to the genera Paludina, Physa and Limnea,
and also Gyrogonites, have been discovered by Mr. Malcolmson and
myself entangled in it.

Near Kulladghi, where it reposes on the limestone, it exhibits
undoubted signs of horizontal stratification. It is never seen altered
by the granite or trap. West of Kulladghi, near Ooperhutty, beds of
a gritty sandstone loosely agglutinated, resembling that into which
the laterite passes near Bey poor on the Malabar Coast, rest in a
similarly horizontal and unaltered position on the overlying trap;
fragments of which occur in this superimposed sandstone.

Kunketf Gravelf and Regur. That singular deposit, for so I con-
nder the Begur, is superimposed on all the rocks that I have just de-

* LyeU, ElemenU, Vol. II, pp. 281-^2.

S02 Notes OH the South Mahratta Country^ Sfc. [No. 16a

scribed. There is freqaently an interveping bed of gravel or of the older
kunker, in which the remains of a mastodon have been discovered,
near Hingoli, Nizam's country. I have not met with gravel beds in
the South Mahratta country. The diamond is found in th^ gravel
beds below the Regur in the Cuddapah district My ideas regarding the
origin of those deposits have been elsewhere stated.

Age of the Pluumio and Trappean Roehs> — Granite. From the ra-
rity of sections, it is difficult to ascertain the relative age of the granite
by the tests usually resorted to by gec^ogists in fixing the ages oi
plutonic rock, viz. :

Ist. Intrusion and alteration.
2nd. Included fragments.
3rd. Relative position.
4th. Mineral character.

Christie evidently views the granite of the South Mahratta codu-
try as primitive, according to the Wemerian theory ; but states that
there is a granite at Gairsnppa, in Canara, '* not so old as the commoB
granite of India," which, from mineral character and association with
the gneiss and other hypogene rocks, he classes with them, in the
transition series of this school. But within the last half centary it
has been ascertained that this granite, considered formerly as the
oldest of rocks, sometimes belongs even to the tertiary period, and
its presence at Gairsuppa, and in the southern portions of the Soath
Mahratta country, intruding into, disturbing and altering as it does,
these crystalline schists, plainly proves its posterior origin.

But there is no proof adduced of any other granite of India being
anterior to the granite of Cktirsuppa, and there is every reason to be-
lieve that the granite of Gairsuppa and the Western Ghauts must rash
among the oldest granites of India, until the age. of the rocks they have
altered and intruded into be satisfactorily proved to be posterior
to the other hypogene rocks that prevail so extensively over its
surface.

There is, moreover, a granite more modern than the common g^'
nite of the Western Ghauts, Gairsuppa, and indeed of India, which i'
seen to penetrate the latter in veins and dykes, a fact proving its pes*
terior origin, — and which, although it has not hitherto been discovereci

1845.] Notes on the South MahraUa Country^ Sfc. 303

10 the state of dykeg in the sandstone and limestone, has converted the
former into quartz rock, and the shales of the latter into jasper and
• chert, indicating a posterior or contemporaneoos origin.

The dietorfoance and metamorphic effects produced by the eruption
of this granite do not appear to extend to any great distance from the
foci of platonic disturbance. The sandstone ranges in the S. Mahratta
country are usually little inclined, particularly in the ranges S. of the
Malpurba, resting unconformably on the hypogene schists and granite, in
highly inclined stratification ; but travelling a short distance north we
fii|d them showing more signs of plutonic disturbance, and, according
to Christie, the sandstone of Chick Nurgoond is aplifted at an angle of
40^ resting on the vertical hypogene schists ; a fact indicating two eras
of plutonic disturbance.

It is a striking fact that no fragments of undoubted granite or gneiss
have been noticed in the pebbles of these sandstone conglomerates,
which consist chiefly of quartz, chert, jasper, basalt, flinty slate, and
the bard portions of the chloritic and actynolitic schists, the two last
rocks bearing a small per centage in relation to the rest, and those of
quartz greatly predominating in the lower beds. The inference is,
either that the attrition which converted the wreck of the pre-existing
rocks into sand and gravel was so great, as to grind down their mass
beyond the possibility of recognition, leaving nothing but fragments of
their hardest nodules and veins, or that the oldest granite was still un-
denuded, and with the gneiss at this era was as yet but partially uplift-
ed and retained its natural subordinate position.

It is certain however from the included pebbles of the flinty slate,
jasper, actynolited and chloritic schists, that the plutonic action of
granite had commenced prior to the origin of the sandstone, and had
metamorphosed or crystallized the hypogene, or rather formed schists of
the wreck of which the sandstone is formed.

If this reasoning be admitted, it is obvious that at least two epochs
of great plutonic activity have taken place. The first anterior to the
formation of the limestone and sandstone, by which the hypogene schists
were rendered crystalline and partially subverted. The second, pos-
terior; and marked by another granitic eruption, which burst up
through fissures in the old granite, altering the limestone and sand-

304 Notes an ike South Mahratta Country, Sfc, [No. 160.

•tone. From the latter occasionally resting on the former in less dis*
torbed strata it may be inferred, that the limestone suffered some de-
gree of dislocation before the sandstone was deposited. There is little
doubt from the unaltered and highly inclined stratification of some of
the beds resting on the granite, that it must have been protruded by
this second upheaval in a solid form. Other highly inclined beds are
altered, which indicates a heated but solid state of the intruding rocka

The third movement or series of movements by which perhaps a great
part of S. India was slowly and gently lifted up to its present elevation,
raising beds of laterite in a horizontal position to the height of 7,000
feet and upwards, appears to have taken place during the tertiaiy
period. This great soulvement is perhaps rather attributable to vol-
canic than plutonic action, since the granites of both eras appear to
have been raised in a solid form, and no granite of India has yet been
observed altering or intruding into tertiary rook. Possibly its pheno*
mena were connected with those attending and following the grandest
eruption of trap in the whole world, the overlying trap of Western and
Central India, which evidently took place in the tertiary period.

During these epochs, it is almost needless to say, that the surface
must have undergone various oscillations at different periods, dariog
which the aqueous strata were deposited, consolidated, and partially
denuded, uplifted and submerged.

Aff€ of Basaltic preenstone. Like the granite the basaltic greenstone
is evidently of two eruptive epochs, as we see dykes of it crossed by
more recent dykes.

The greenstone of the first epoch is posterior to the older granite and
hypogene rocks which it penetrates, and with which it has been op*
lifted in a solid form ; partaking of all their dislocations and abrupt
truncations. This older greenstone stops short of the sandstoDe;
the conglomerates of the latter imbed pebbles of the greenstone.

The newer basaltic greenstone penetrates, and alters the Hoae-
stone and sandstone, but stops short of the laterite* Both rocks
are distinguished mineralogically from the tertiary or overlying tr^P*
by their rarely assuming an amygdaloidal character, and their freedom
from agates, opals, calcedonies, zeolites, green earth, olivine, ^ ^
abundant in the latter.

1845.] N^Um on tkt S<nUh MahraUa Country, ^e. 305

A§^ ^the ov0tlying Trap. It overlies and penetrates the sandstone
and newer basaltic greenstone, and from its altering and disturbing the
fresh^water limestones of Nirmol, and its superior position to all the
rocks of the 8. Mahratta country except the laterite, hunker, and re-
gar, is referred to the tertiary epoch. It is strikingly mineralogically
disttnguished from the older trap rocks, as just explained.

The ord^ of superposition of the rocks of the 8* Mahratta country
in desoeoding under appears to be as follows :-*

Ist group.

Begun

Old kunker,

Laterite,

Lateritic sandstone,
Overlying trap,

Basaltic greenstone, I

Granite, > 2nd group.

Sandstone, J

Basaltic greenstone, "^

Granite, > drd group.

Hypogene schistSi J

Comparison of these groups with classified European groups* There
can be little doubt of the rocks of the Ist group belonging to the
tertiary period, after what has been remarked regarding the age of the
overlying trap on which they are superimposed. The remains of the
Mastodon have been found, with other fossils pointing to the Pleiocene
division of the tertiary epoch, in the gravel and kunker below the
regur, near Hingoli, in the Nizam's territories. No fossils have been
yet found in the regur ; but its position, extent, thickness, and the im«-
possibility of accounting for it by causes now existing, warrant me
perhaps in referring it to an epoch anterior to the post- Pleiocene or
historic period.

2nd Group. No sufficient data for fixing exactly the age of these
rocks. The presence of coal and other mineral and fossil indijsatioas
point to the Devonian or carboniferous groups.

^d Group* The clue to the approximate age of these rocks will
be found in properly fixing those of the seconds a point of great impor-

306 NoUs on the South Mahratta Country, ^c, [No. IGO.

tance in the geology of India, and to which I would fain call the atten-
tion and endeavoars of all geological observers to fix, by searching for
fossils, &c. If the rocks of the second group belong to the Devoaian
series, the hypogene schists mast be either the rocks of the Silarian or
Combrian series, as their unconformable stratification points out a
greater age than the less disturbed and superimposed beds of lime-
stone and sandstone. We need not even despair of finding fossils in
gneiss, chlorite, and mica slates of India, since that illustrious geologist
Elie de Beaumont displayed to the wondering eyes of the Savans of
Europe the instructive fact of belemnites, (a fossil of the chalk period,)
in chlorite schist.

An Account of the early Ghiljdees. By Major R. Leech, C. B., late Po'
litical Agent, Tordn Ghiljdees at Kdtdt-uGhiljdee. From the Political
Secretariat of the Government of India,

[The character of part of this paper is somewhat of a lighter order thaa
usually appears in our pages : but our readers will at once understand the
mptives which have led us most readily to avail ourselves of it, almost as
written. The traditions of the Ghilzaees recorded by Major Leech, give a
valuable insight into the manners and habits, the social condition and the
ordinary train of thoughts, of a race of men very little known. The acute
observation of the writer of the memoir has let no point escape him which
may illustrate the real character of the curious tribe whom he describes ;
and the student in ethnography will, we are convinced, be thankful for the
exposition of social peculiarities thus afforded to him. — Eds.]

The following account has been compiled from notes taken partly
when Political Agent at Gandahar in 1839-40, and partly while in politi-
cal superintendence of the expedition under Colonel Chambers against
the Toran Qhiljaees in 1841, and while Political Agent at K^t-i-
Ghilj^ee in 1841-42, (during the siege,) and partly from a written

1815.1 jIn aceauni of the earfy Qikiffdeet. 307

account drawn up at my request by MuDa Pairo Lodeen, who staid
with me throughout the siege.

The Ghiljaees, as will be shewn, are only Afghans by the mother's
nde, being by the father'41 descended from the Sultans of Ghor.

The word is properly Ghalzo'e : from ghal, thief; and zo'e, son — ^mean-
ing the son of theft, the fruit of a clandestine amour. The Ghiljaees them-
selves give this derivation of the word, although they would appear to
be ashamed of it by turning Ghalzo'e into Ghiljaee. The Persians have
out of compliment turned it for them into Ghilzye.

On the 28th August 1841, while making a tour through the, till
then« unvisited Ghiljaee tribes of the Arghandah valley, a Rokhee Mulla
of some reputed sanctity and respect in the tribes, said they were all
Ghiljaees, as the Persians pronounced the word Ghiljyes as the Afghans
and themselves did, from being descended from Ghilj the son of king
Bet.

In my journal kept during the siege, I find the following memoran-
dum, dated 22nd April 1842.

" May not the word Ghilzye be derived from 9f^ Ghalech. (The

Persian vowel mark zer having in Afghanee the pronunciation of a
in hare) ; and Ghalech being often written for 9;^^ Kilech : and the

tribe may have been called Ghalechees, or descendants of Ghalech. An
acquaintance, a great grandson of Ashraf-khan, is named Ghalech-
khan."

A mistake has very generally been committed by supposing the ter-
mination zye or zai to the names of Afghan tribes to be derived from
the Persian word for to be bom. The word is a corruption of the
Pushtoo zo'e a son, and a true Afghan of the sarah or country would
tell you he was a Popalzo*e or Babakanzo'e as the case might be ; a Po-
palite or Babakanite ; and he would not say he was a Popalzye or Ba-
bakanzye, on pain of being abused as a spai zaman (comes filius) Par-
seeban.

It is related that the Caliph Abdul Malik, son of Marwan, despatched
bis commander-in-chief Hujaj, son of Yoosaf, a Sakufee. by tribe, to
subdue Ghoristan. It was then under two princes, Shah Jalaladeen
and Shah Muazzadeen, sons of Sultan Bahram who had the country
given him in grant by Alee, the cousin of Mahammad, on a visit he paid

308 An account of the early Ghiljdees. [No. 100.

the Hazrat at Medina. The great grandfather of Sultan Bahiam was
Soosee, alias Mahammad Sam Ghoree, who first introduced IslamidBi
into Hindustan. It was he that built the fort of Sealkot, ami that
killed Raja Pathoora.

The Sultans of Ghor were descended from Zohauk, aqplhew of Ibas,
son of £sam« son of Sam, son of Noah» who eiqpeiled Jamsheed from
Persia.

Shah Husein, the son of Shah Muazzadeen, emigrated on the intasioil
to the country of Shaikh Batanee» between Cabool and Candabir, by
whom he was received into his family. Batanee had a daughter, with
whom the tradition runs ; Shaikh Husein fonned a eonAfictio&, unknows
to the parents, until their daughter's appearance betmjed her.

The Ghiljaees still preserve tiiis time-honored cusitom, jttdgisg hom
several cases that came under my ni^ce, the most juromineat of whifik
occurred at Kalat-i-Ghilzye. A young unmarried lady of the aristocratic
Shah Alam Khel branch of Rokhee Ghiljaee, was aafely delivered of a
son and heir, the father of which, her intended* was no kss than a holy
Sayad of Pishing, then absent in lo^a. It appears that th^ were en-
gaged, and at liberty therefore to have their Namzat*baz0e; but as the
Sayad had not paid up the whole of the marriage settlement by some
100 rupees, the parents would not allow him to take her home. He
therefore resorted to this Ghiljaee mode of che^)ening his bargain.
I met him afterwards in India, but did not enquire whether his lady
was yet with her parents or with his own.

It is very probaUe that the A%hans, if tbey were really Israelites,
should have been posted by their Cabtu Bukhtanasar on the confines of
his dominions towards India. We find Sultan Shahabudeeft biingiai;
down the Afghans from Ghor and posting them on the borders of Indiit
and this system of colonizgng an unquiet border with convicts seems to
have been much in vogue. Thus we find the tribe of Hazarahs fiar froa
theu: present country, posted in the plains of the Punjab below Cash-
meer. A colony of Persians was planted in Cabool, and one of Ghiljaees
in Balkh. And between the Ghiljaees and Durances on the Gandabar
road, we find ten solitary houses of Hazarahs. so called by the A^hans,
at Asya Hazarah ; no doubt a larger colony was once posted there to
keep the peace between those two rival tribes.

1845.] An account of the early GhUj&cei. 809

I find from my journal, that on the 28th September 1844, I sent
for their chief men to gain information. They informed me they were
originally Uzbecka from Turkiatan, and are by tribe Sadleehees. They
have Uie water of the oanal called Bokanah. They fomiahed aix men
and one officer to the Duraneea, and were enrolled among the Baneezais.

Bnt to return to the lovers. On Shaikh Batanee and his wife diacoyer-
iog the atate of their daughter's affections and person, they became most
anxious to have the couple married; but fEunily pride was in the way, and
they were anxious first to know concerning the 9yal or rank in society
of their guest. He was therefore questioned, and gave himself out as a
prince bom, and invited them to ascertain the fact by despatching some
one to Ohor, his native country. This was done, and a confirmation of
Husein'a affirmation attained in time, it is to be hoped, to allow the
babe to enter without shame into the world. Husein is said also to
have married the messenger's daughter, in consideration of his taking
the trouble of going all the way to Ohor ; others say, that on his return
he refused to confirm Husein's assertion imtil he had promised to marry
his daughter also. This is probable, and according to the character of
an Afghan Cossid, getting a promise made before imparting good
news.

The OhUjaees say, that Sultan Mahmood of Ohuznee first brought
them down from the Koki-kase or Koki.roh, and they began to dig
Karez, (Vide the Karez of the Sulemanees near Ohuznee). Malcolm (I
think) says they were nearly exterminated by that monarch, as a punish-
ment for a party of them having plundered his baggage, and that they
only regained strength in the time of Timoor.

The first person of note known to the present inhabitants was Sultan
Malakhe, a Tokhee.

It is probable that Mahammad the progenitor of the Mahammad-zye
Tokhees, and Isaac the progenitor of the Isak-sye Hotakees were both

* No<«.— We have to apologise for omittixia a brief, and apparently carefully com-
piled liftt of ike genealogies of the Qhiliye families. It would be of interest were cir-
cvmstances suck as to place any of our readers in immediate communication with this
tribe; but, as it is, we may be perhaps excused omitting it«— Bos.

310 An account of the early Ohiljdees. [No. 160.

men of note in their day, from these tribes being considered the aristro.
cratic ones.

I saw a Rakam of Aurangzeb, dated the 9th of Jamadee'Lawal,
1022 A. H., appointing MaUk Malakhe to the charge of the high road
from Kalat to Karatoo, (the former is in the Tamak valley, and the latter,
in the Arghandah,) to protect it from Hazarah robbers. Aurangzeb no
doubt found Malakhe the most powerful of the Ghilzye chiefe at
enmity with the Hazarahs ; as patronizing an officer of his own creation
at court, he no doubt found very diflferent firom supporting a newly
created chief over his tribe.

The Hotakees I suppose from being removed from the high road were
not required by Aurangzeb, and therefore remained unnoticed; that
monarch's sole object being to secure his communication with Ohuznee,
Cabool and Hindustan, and not coveting revenue from their Karazees,
and almond orchards.

The Hazarahs are sid to have been driven out of the Arghandah
valley in four days.* Malakhe is said on this short campaign to have
received valuable co-operation from the Khan-khel chief Mane, whose
descendant I find from my journal visited me on the 13th August 1841.

Khuram says he is the son of Taj Mahammad, the son of Avqhan, the
son of Khajah, the son of Mane, the son of Taoos, the son of Daroo, the
son of Habeeb, the son of Khan, the son of Parwat, the son of Barak by
his wife Khatah, the son of Mahammad, the son of Yoonus, the son
of Rahmand, the son of Tokh, the son of Baroo, the son of T6lad, liie
son of Ghiljye. I have mentioned the descendants of Malakhe in a
former part of this account.

At the time that Malakhe was chief of the whole Toran tribe, (both
Hotakees and Tokhees,) Jabbar it is sud was chief of the Ibrahim
Ohiljyes.

The Peer.khanah, or spiritual fatherhood of Malakhe were the So*
deen (Ala-udeen properly) Sayads.

Malakhe had a daughter, by name Nazo ; who was one day playing
below Kalat-i-Ghiljye with girls of her own age, on the banks of the

* This might have been effected by Aurangzeb's troops, had they known of the
existence of the Passes discovered by me in 1841. That from Kalat«i-Ghilja«e t°
Sarkh Sang (No. 1, Appendix,) and the other from Cha8mah-i-'Moosaka» viA Cheeno
into Karatoo, (No. 3, Appendix.)

J845.3 An acoouni of the earfy Ghiljdees. 311

river Tamak, n^en a Fakeer, appearing to be from Hinduetan, approach-
ed the party, and said, *' What good girl among you will give me a kifis ?"
Some ran away, others hid their faces, and some abused him ; but Nazo,
throwing back her veil, and approaching, said, " Oh Fakeer, a kiss of my
fiioe is at your service."

The Fakeer, to the surprise of all, instead of availing himself of the offer,
stroked her head with a fatherly hand, and said, *' I have prayed to God
to give you three or four children ; one of whom shall be a king, (Hajee
Meer-khan, alias Meer Wais)."

The fether of Meer Wais (a Sodeen is the informant,) was in the em-
ploy of Malakhe, whose daughter Nazo falling in love with him, (true
daughter of Ghalzo'e,) an elopement to the Ataghar hills, occupied by
the Hotaks, was the result ; who, however, for fear of Malakhe's wrath,
refused them refuge ; and they had to spend their honey.moon in the
desert hills, living principally on game.

Getting tired of this, Nazo proposed to her husband that they should
go " Nanawat" (as supplicants) to her father, who was of a forgiving
deposition.

Having no other resource this plan was adopted, and with success.
Malakhe received them kindly, as well as some Hotakees who accom-
panied them. When giving them leave, Malakhe asked his daughter what
the would have, a chadar or veil ; it being the Afghan custom that the
first time a daughter visits her father after her marriage, he gives her a
veil. She replied, " The Hotaks have no land (on the Tamak river),
kindly give me a piece of land."

Malakhe gave her a piece of land below the Tabaksar hill, opposite
to Kalat, watered by and dependent on the Ajurghak canal ; and to the
giroom who led the horse she rode, he gave the land dependent on the
spring of the Jukhtaran hill close by. This Jillodar was a Kishyanee
by tribe. Others say, that Nazo got ten days and nights water right
on the canal, and her groom two. These shares are now (1841)
distinct.

Malakhe was killed in battle at Darwazye, between Inzargai ancl
Sarkh Sang, and was buried at Ab-i-Yazee.

The fether of Meer Wais is' called by the Hotaks Shah Alam. The
Tokhees contradict them, and say they only were called Shah Alam-
khels after their progenitor married a Shah Alam Tokhee's daughter.

312 An account of the early OhHjaees. QNo. 160.

This 18 absutd ; foir by the Tokhee'ft own Bh«wing. Bhah Alam wm
the son of Alee Malakhe's brother, so that Naeo wft6 not a Slnh Alam*
khel.

Jabbar, the Ibfahim chief, waa killed at Yayaa in battle wiUi the
Safeea, and buried on the road between Cabool and Jalalabad. The
place where his tomb is situated is famous for cold, wolres, and thieves,
on which account some Persian traveller has cursed the tomb. In the
course of time, Nazo gave birth to Hajee Meer-khan, alias Meer Wais,
the same who liberated his country from the Persian rule, and his
countrymen from the tyranny of Shahnawaz-khan, the Georgian
governor of Oandahar.

The reasons for Meer Wais visiting Persia are found in Malcolm's
Persia, and more in detail in the Chronicles of a Traveller. The Ghiljyei
believe that while at Mecca he demanded a sign from heaven, that he
should free his country from a foreign yoke« It was given him. On awak*
ing, his sword was found lying bare at some distance from the scabbard
in which he had secured it before going to sleep.

It was Shahnawaz's penchant for wine and women, that lost the
country for the Persians be it remembered, and he was a Faringee«

Beyond the village of Chahil Dukhtaran on the road to Cfaahil Zceoa,
there is a slippery rock called Ang-i*Sakhshak, down which the chikto
of Candahar on Fridays and other holidays slide. This was one of the
scenes of Shahnawaz's debaucheries.

The place at which he met his well*.merited death was al Bels*
i- Sultan Khudadad in Argasthan — he was following or despatching SOO
horse across the Band-i-gil,'*^ on tiic road to Maroof, to collect reveane
from the Kakers. He was not thought worthy to be killed by the head
of a man ; so Murado, a Babee eunuch and jester, was ordered to kiU
him in full durbar the day after. his seizure. The following Pashloe
Badala is still extant :

" Sh&hnawaza bujul b&za,

Da Murado da las parotiya kuna w&za."

* 1 find from a memorandum in my jou)rnai in Notremb^r 1639, that the load from Ctt*
dahar to Deh-i- Ambar was occupied by Popaltais, and that I propoesd to make tb* td»
k>wing arrangements for the protection of the road beyond Deh>i- Ambar, viz :— On th$
Candahar side of the Tagak Pass near some wells, a small fort to be built and eight
honemen to be stationed ; on the other side of the Tagak Pass, at a place called Hw

1845.] An aeeounti^ihe early OkUjdtei. 3 1 3

Shahoftwas the bugoLbaz, (player with the knuckles of legs of mut.
top. I. «• a light fellow of low habits.)

By the hand of Mnrado (there) yoa lie exposed.

Shah Ashraf was, the Ohi^aees say, killed by his cousin Shah Husen
of Candahar, (i. e, by his orders,) on his arrival at Koh»i.Mundak. Some
deny that Ashraf murdered Mahmood, belieying that he died mad.

The wan of Mahmood, and his cousin and suoeeseor Ashraf in Persia,
are detailed in the Chronicles of a Traveller, The following two anec«
dotss are still told strangers visiting Candahar, connected with the
invasions of Persia : one is, that many of the Ohiljaees who accompanied
Mahmood on his expedition to Persia were mounted on bullocks, with
tbeir ragged kosaks or felt cloaks on, and their sheep's skin of flour
stmpped to their backs, and an old iron hatchet or a sword in a broken
scsbbard their only arms, just as if they were going to the water-mill
at the bottom of their native village to bring home flour. This will be
easily believed by officers who have been in Afghanistan, and have seen
alter an engagement bodies of men with nothing but sticks in their
hands. When the city of Ispahan was taken, it is said that Shah Mahmood
gave his followers leave to take possesnon of the house that each might
«ater, with every thing in it, even the widow of its owner who £dl fight-
ing, for his home. That one of the handsomest palaces of Ispahan thus
ftU to the lot of such a " OhooUUBiyaban" as I have above described;
vho entered it in his above full dress, leading his buUoek after him into
a s|dendid saloon covered with rich carpets, at the end of which was
isatsd the lady of the mansion surrounded by her damsels ; and back-
wards and forwards over the carpets these two animals walked, the one
locking for some thing to which he could tie his fellow.

The hdy of the mansion ordered her handmaids to do all they
oouM to fdease the visitor; to take his bullock into the stable, and
divest him of his boots of sandals and tattered wooUen cloak, and take
him to the bath*

This they had some difficulty in doing, as he would not consent at
first that his bullock, sandals or cloak should be taken out of his sight,
they being his only ones ; and each article was surrendered after a little

dikK, a fort and liz honemen ; on the Oandakar sida of the Gill Paw at a water-tnillt
%fi>rt and eight hoisemen; on the other side of ditto, six horsemen; at Jaknaree and
Skamai, a fort and eight horsemen. The whole under Abdul Lateef-kh^n, Barikzai,
of Maroof.

314 Anaecount of the early Ghiljdui. [No. 160.

straggle, accompanied with Pashtoo abuse ; the handmaids setting his
mind at ease in Persian, of which he did not understand a word, and by
signs. He was finally taken to the bath, and never had the attendant
barbers operated on such a subjeet before, the cracks in his huge feet
and hands being like ravines of his native hills. After cleansing him as
much as possible, and shaving his hedge hog.looking head of hair, he
was attired in trousers and shirt of red twilled cotton, the richest under
garments a man must wear, and other suitable parts of dress ; and con-
ducted back into the saloon, where a rich entertainment was laid out,
at which the lady of the mansion presided.

The Afghan finding himself more at home^ determined to make
the most of his good fortune, and act the part of the master of the
house.

Observing that the trousers of the lady were of gold stuff, while his
were of common red, he insisted on an exchange ; and in them went he
next morning, proud of his appearance, to Mahmood's darbar, where his
appearance putting his illustrious tribesmen to shame, he got nothing
but a sound beating.

The second anecdote was told me on the scene of its occurrence,
the Achakzai hills, on the 23rd May 1838, while ascending the Kojak
Pass. An Achakzai who had accompanied Shah Mahmood on his
expedition to Persia, had married a rich lady of Ispahan. In the midst
of the rich repasts she provided for him, and the beautiful garden of a
hundred fountains and thousand parterres that he found himself master
of, he would sigh (between a grunt, a groan and a growl,) "Oh!
for my country of the thousand-holed cakes, and alas ! for its Makhai
gardens."

The lady, fancying rightly that the country that could surpass the
capital of Persia in its luxuries, must be heaven itself, determined to
return with her new husband to Afghanistan. Whatever might have
been her misgivings on the road, seeing that as they advanced the
fertility of the country decreased, her despair was at its height on
arriving at home — a khel or encampment of ghijdee, (black hair tent)
in one of the wildest parts of the Achakzai hills. But her heart broke
when she found that the thousand-holed bread was made of the vetch
called gil, which becomes honey-combed in baking (food that her slaves
would reject in Persia,} and that the Makhai gardens were nothing

1945,"] An accaurU of th€ early GhHjdee$. 315

but the stony hills covered with the thorn, known by that name in
Pushtoo.

It was sttch uncivilized acts as the above, no doubt, that made the Per.
aans stigmatize the Afghans with the following :

OughS,n i khar, Tobra ba sar;
BS,kalee ba khar, Dingla ba zan :

Which the Afghans retort in the clumsy " Tuguogue" of Parseeban,

Da khira kurbin.

Leaving the period of the GhUjye (not Afghan) wars in Persia to the
above-mentioned authorities, I return to the seat of the tribes.

On Hajee Meer-khan (who seems to have set the fashion of perform-
ing the Haj to Mecca, as we find many Hajees among the chiefs both
Afghans and Ghiljyes about his time,) gaining possession of Candahar,
he called on the Tokhees to pay him revenue for their lands, and furnish
him with recruits for his wars, as they had not assisted him in the late
struggle • In reply, they asked how they could be expected to give up
rights that they had acquired with so much trouble, and after so many
battles.

The chiefs of the Tokhees at this time were Shah Alam, the son of
Alee, the brother of Malakhe, and the son of Shah Alam, Khushal*
khan, and they would not acknowledge the supremacy of the Hotakees ;
war therefore broke out between the tribes, and the Tokhees were
obliged at last to quit the Tamak valley and take refuge, that is, to
retire to the Arghandah.* Others formed into two Toraks or gatherings.
The Shah Husen-khel, and other tribes about Ab.i.Tazee had their ga-
thering at Yakhav, and the Peerak-khels and other tribes around them
had their gathering at Omakai-kalat, at this time was held by the
Tokhees under Hajee Edil, the son of Malakhe, to whom are attributed
some supernatural powers.

He had a son called Bayai, a very brave and daring man ; who built
a small fort on the river Tamak, a little way from Kalat up the road ;
and the Hotakees had a fort on the other side of the river at Jukh-
taran, the Hotak gathering being at Choudai.

* I found in 1841, that a threat to burn the crops they had left standing, and to fill
in their karez (irrigation tunnelsj brought them back to the Tarnak, (month of July*)

316 An account of the early Ghiijdeee, [No. 160i

Although Bayai had 100 men in his fort, he always went out fdoae
on his expeditions, which were directed against the opposite Hotak fort«
It was his habit at dawn to attack the people of the fort as soon as tbey
came out, and he sometimes brought three aud four heads, and no
one dared to meet him hand to hand ; at last the drinking-water of the
Hotaks became bitter, (i. e. they were hard prest) and they laid in am-
bush for him one morning ; and, hamstringing his horse first, succeeded
in kiUing him. On the death of Bayai, Kalat was taken possession of
by the Hotaks, and now Mahammad-khan, alias Hajee Angoo, the son
of Y&ya, and nephew of Meer Wais» became governor.

About this time the report of Nadir Shah's marching on Candshir
reached the country, and the Hotakeea assembled and came to the deci*
sion that they had a new and powerful enemy in front, (Nadir Shah)
and an ohi one in their rear (the Tokhees,) and that it was prudent to
get rid of the enemy in the rear, and then meet the enemy in front ; there*
fore they collected their whole tribe, besides procuring 4,000 horse from
Candahar and from Puli Sangee, made a sudden attack on the Peerak-
khel Tarakut Umakai, which might be said to be empty, as the obiefi
Ashraf-khan and AUaiyar.khan, sons of Khushal, were absent on the
Arghandah to collect troops. The whole Torak was massaered, women
with child not being spared. On Ashraf-kban and Allaiyar»khan bearing
of this disaster, they took the most solemn oath an Afghan can, Tiii
Zam~talak, that they would not spend a night at home before they had
revenged themselves on the Hotakees. Zan^talak is divorcement of a
wife.

Proceeding vii Mezan and Teereen, they joined Nadir Shah's camp at
Cheenaran, and tendered their allegiance. That monarch appointed Allai-
yar-khan his deputy at Ispahan, and was led by Ashraf-khan to Ganda^
bar, (Herat being taken after a siege,) which place it is said held out for
fourteen months. The heroic defence of the buij or tower of Mulla AleSi
a Ghiljye, after the fall of Candahar* deserves to be recorded. The rains
of it are incredibly small in ei^tent.

When Nadir was besieging Candahar, Abdul Ghafoor was governor
of Kalat-i. Ghiljye ; he with Abdul Kasool, were sons of Hajee Angoo, bj
a Peerak-khel Tokhee mother. Abdul Rusool had gone to Sarobai of
the Kharotees, to collect the Ghiljyes of that neighbourhood to raise the
siege of Candahar. Nadir heard of it, and made a Chapao on the levies at

J845.] An aceauHi of ike early Gkiljdees. 817

Sliibar» of whom lie made a great slaughter. Here Jan Tarakee came in ;
Nadir then retamtd to Candahar, leaving 4,000 men to betiege Kalat ;
when it fell, Jan Tarakee was left in command.

Moosa-khan, father of Maddut-khan Isakzai Duranee. (tumamed
DoDgee) conducted the Chapao on Shibar. The grare of Jan Tarakee
k on the top of Kakt, over the spring close to that of the Fakeer. He
hid such power over the tribe as to have left the proverb behind him of

« Wak da Khadi dai da J&n Tarakee."

"It rests with (or depends on) Ood;'' and Jan Tarakee, one of the
present Tarakee chiefs, Arzhegee, (Ist July 1841,) is the son of Ala
Verdee, the son of Suleman, the son of Jan, the son of Meer-khan, the
ion of Kasam, the son of Doulat, the son of Madoo, the son of Peros,
the son of Nassoo, the son of Mummye, the son of Ahmed, the son of
Taiak.

Nadir Shah conferred on Ashraf-khan the chiefship of all the Ghnr-
ghashtees, and avenged him on the Hotaks by leading away captive
1,500 of tfieir families to Hindustan, Turkistan and Persia.

During the first part of the reign of Ahmed Shah, Ashraf-khan was
governor of both Kalat and Ohuznee, and he accompanied the Shah on
his first campaign to Hindustan. On his return Uie Duranee chiefr
persuaded the Shah, that Ashraf-khui was far too powerful for a sub-
ject. He with his son Haleem-khan were therefore invited to Candahar
and thrown into prison, and their seals were made use of to entice Allai-
yar firom Ispahan, the Shah proposmg to share hie conquests with him.

AIliuyar»khan on his arrival was also thrown into prison, and nothing
is known how these three met their fate ; the wall of their prison by
some IB eaid to have fallen on them.

Although the above bdongs to the history of Ahmed Shah, I men-
tbn it, aa of course his historian would neglect to do so.

I met in the Ohiljye country, which I had fiailed to do at Candahar,
Iraoes of Zamroot Shah of Candahar, on the 28rd August 1841. At
Dab-i-Pighai, not far from the shrine of Taroo Nika, on the brink of the
hill, the temains of a small fort are pointed out. Here it is said that
Zamroot Shah banished a mietress, by name Lolee, to employ herself in
agriculture and gardening, and that in her ignorance she planted parch-
ed wheat. A more bewatifttl view than from this position on a fine

318 An account of the early Ghiljdees. [No. 160.

day cannot be imagined. Near the above-mentioned shrine is a spring,
which it is said cannot be fathomed. Its water is efficaciously used in
cases of Sujah-Sulfa (black cough) in children, which either lasts two
months or forty days, from which no child is exempt.

I have mentioned before, that the Khaleels and Momands held the
country before the Hazarahs. I remember one day on the Arghandah
asking a Tokhee chief, what a stone and mud pillar on a neighbburiiig
eminence was for ? It was built, said he, long before our time ; it is some
boundary mark of the Khaleels and Momands. In my journal under
date 22nd January 1842, I find the following memorandum :

Shekh Mate-khaleel had (the Khalak people say) four sons and one
daughter ; Shah>i-Mardan, Kalat, Garmam, Hasan, and a daughter Jukh-
taran, who all on being buried sent forth springs of water from their
respective graves of the same quality, which retains its temperature
during winter, (it may then be seen running smoking down the hill.)
The graves are all in the neighbourhood; — Jukhtaran, a small mound
east of Kalat, just across the Tarnak Hasan-i-Mate, above the village of
Khalak ; Garmam, (they deny the wordiieing Garmah) west of Kalat ; and
Shah-i-Mardan, south of Kalat, a small flat-topped hill like the one over
Khalak called Tabaksar. They say that Shah-i-Mardan outlived lus
brothers and sister, and boasted that as they had made streams of wat^f,
he on his death would make a river. On account of this vanity and
presumption, the stream from his grave is the smallest of all, only sup-
plying drinking water.

In Dara's translation of NyamatuUah's history of the Afghans, Part 11,
page 19, Chapter XX., Shekh Mati.khaleel is mentioned as chief of twelve
Sarbanni clans. Hasan-i- Mate lived, we may suppose, in the time of
Zeerak, the great grandson of Abdul, and in the time of Nahmand the
great grandson of Ghiljye, and the fort of Kalat was of course never
fortified before the spring on the top of the hill burst out ; and it may be
assumed, that it was first fortified by some royal hand, as the surround,
ing tribes would never have allowed one branch to occupy such a
commanding position.

I never succeeded in satisfactorily ascertaining whether Shah-i-Safa
or Kalat was the oldest. The former is sidd to have got its name from
some sick monarch, who then experienced " Shafa" (recovery) from bu
disease. I have heard it called by some the capital of the country once

1945.2 An aecauni of the early Ghiijdees. 8 1 9

called Bakhtar ; aad hy otben, that of Zamoen-i-Khawar, who is said to
have been a brother of Dawar» (Zaiaundawar). I hanre no doubt Au-
rugzeb fortiied Kakt-i'Ohiljye ior Sultan Malakhe, and Shah-i-Safa
for Sultan Khudakye, if he found them dilapidated. Sher«khan, we find
from the account of die eariy Abdalees, brother of Sultan Khudakye,
GOBiDanded at Shah-i-Safa on the part of the kiog of Delhi.

I had almost forgot to mention, that the Moosa-khel Tokhees are
divided into Buran<>khel8, Nazar»khek and Khwaidad>-khels ; and that
the latter are divided into Shakee-khels and Mamee«>khelB.

Although the account of the em-ly Crhilzyes ought to end here, I can-
not for^o giyiDg an abatract translation of Mullfi Pairo's whole ac-
count.

Mahammad Ameen-ldian, the son of Ashruf* and Rahmatullah-khan
the son of AUaiyar, on hearing of the fate of their fathers fled to the
Sttleman-khel country to Zarmut and Kalawaz. ^zam-khan, the son
of Ashnif, and some other children were led captive from Kalat to Za-
meen-dawar. From this place effecting their escape, they fled to the
Persian courts and from it received the countries of Khukees and Ner-
mssher. AJhmed Shah conferred the chiefship of the Tokhees and Kalat
Qu Soorkai-khan Babakarzai, who was shortly after murdered by the
Mahammad- zai Takbees.

Soorkai-khan had two sons, Sayud Rahmat-khan and liasbkaree-
khan ; the former accompanied the Shah on his campaigns, and the lat-
ter was stationed at Kalat.

On the 2.6th August 1841, 1 saw a descendant of his, Kbaleel-khan,
sou of Rahmat, son of Hajee Munsoor, son of Usman Ghane^, (call,
ed Snrkai Sultan by Nadir, and Kboja-khan by Ahmed Shah), son
of Joga, son of Meer Hazar, son of Taooz, son of Kasura, son of
Utman, son of Suleman, son of Babakar, son of Shamal, son of Yoonus,
sou of Rahmand, son of Tokh, son of Baroo, son of Tolad, son of
Ghiljye.

Sometime after the accession of Timoor Shab> Mahammad Ameer,
khan was invited from the Suleman-khel by that monarch, and made
chief of Kalat and of the Tokhees and Hazarahs ; and on Timoor Shah
inarching from Gandahar to Cabool, Mahammad Ameen (Amo) Khan
paid his respects with lOOSuleman-khel swars at Pali Sangee, and re-
ceiTeda dress of honor, and other marks of the royal favor : at the same

320 An account of the early Ghiljdus. [|No. 160.

time NooruUa-khaD, son of Hajee Angoo^ was created chief of the Hota-
kees, with the flattering title of Ikhlas Knlee-khan, and the revenue of
the countries of Dera Ismail-khan, Daman, Banoo and Urgoon. He
was on his death succeeded by his son, Abdu Raheem-khan.

On Azad-khan declaring independence in Cashmeer, Amo-khan was
at Herat, from which place the Shah sent for him and despatched him
with Sardar Maddut-khan Durance at the head of a force to that pro-
vince. In the battle that was fought with Azad-khan, Amo-khan was
shot by some one of his own party at the back of the head^ the ball
coming out at one of his eyes : his corps was brought to Kalat to be
buried. He left three sons, Nealee Nyamut-khan, Futteh-khan and
Meer Alam-khan.

On the accession of Zaman Shah, Walee Mahammad-khan (with the
title of Walee Nyamut-khan) succeeded his father, being very young,
and Moladad-khan Moosa-khel was his naib, or deputy.

On Shahabudeen-khan, the son of Ramatullah-khan, coming into
notice, a feud broke out in the tribe of Tokhees. The rise of Shahabu-
deen is thus accounted for. The Ameen-ul-mulk was by tribe a Babee, and
having once in darbar spoken rather sharply to Walee Nyamut-khan,
the latter foolishly allowed himself to retort with an old Pushtoo pro-
verb. ^From that day Shahabudeen was taken by the hand, the Ameen-
ul-mulk 8uppl3ring him from his own private funds. The tribe arrang-
ed themselves in two parties, and Kalat was sometimes in the possession
of one, and sometimes in that of the other. In one of the many
skirmishes that took place, Moladad-khan, the Tokhee deputy was killed.

On one occasion some horses of Shah Zaman's coming with a caravan
from Cabool, were plundered by some Tokhee robbers of the clan of
Koortah-khel. Immediately on hearing of it, Walee Nyamat-khan with a
few of his Yassawals pursued them. The robbers took to the hills, and
Walee Nyamat-khan was killed by them while storming them. Htf
corpse was conveyed to Kalat, and buried with his father's.

Fatteh-khan soon after avenged his brother's death, by decapitating
several of the robbers, and making the rest take refuge in India ; he
hung up the heads below Kalat.

Shahabudeen-khan and Fatteh-khan were engaged in their quarrels
until the war between the Ghilzyes and Durances broke out, which
occurred in the following manner.

1845,2 An aecouni of the earfy Okiljdees. 32 1

Shah Mahmood from Gandahar had made one march beyond Kalat,
and Shah Zaman from Cabool had arrived at Aghojan ; his chief Sardar
Ahmed-khan Nooneye being with the advanced guard one stage ahead,
(atTazu) his defection from which place to Mahmood Shah caused the
overthrow of Zaman Shah's power.

This pad^skah gardush, or revolution among the Doranees, occarring
ia the heart of the Ohilzye country, suggested to that tribe the present
u a favourable opportunity to declare their independence, and make an
attempt to establish a Ohilzye kingdom.

Abdu Raheem-khan Hotakee was declared king, and Shahabudeen
his Vazeer ; his hearty co-operation being secured by the former giving
him his daughter Sahab Jan, (with whom when in her father's house he
had been in love,) the wife of the defeated Shah Zaman, and mother of
the princes Nasar, Kaisar and Mansoor, with all her jewels, and hand-
some carpets, and numerous cooking utensils. Shahabudeen-khan was
left to stop communication on the high roads, and Abdu Raheem-khan
went towards Cabool to raise the Suleman-khel. Troops were detached
from Cabool, and the Ghilzyes were defeated; the Ibrahim Ghilzyes
losing 5 or 6,000 men. Abdu Raheem-khan retired on Kalat ; and a
Duranee force having marched from Candahar, the Ghilzyes left their
strong position on the hill to meet them, (Fatteh-khan had already gone
over to the Durances). The battle was fought between Jaldak and Umakai
on the ridge called in Persian " Tappah.i.Surkh," and in Pushtoo " Sirah
ffliah." The Ghilzyes were defeated ; die Tokhees losing 7 or 800 men.
The Hotakees being chiefly horsemen, escaped comparatively unscathed.
Winter put an end to further hostilities. This year 1802 a. d„ is still
remembered by the Ghilzyes as the Sal-i.Katul, or year of massacre.
The chiefs on the Ghiljye side were Abdu Raheem-khan Hotakee and
Shahabudeen>khan Tokhee; those on the Duranee side were Abdul
Majud-khan Barik-zai, Saidal-khan Alako-zai, Azam*khan Popal-zai,
Shadee-khan Achak.zai, (Arzbegee) and Samandar-khan Bame-zai.

In the ensuing spring Ahmed-khan Noorzye marched with a force
from Cabool. On his arrival at Hulan Rabak, the Jalal-zai Tokhees under
Mnlla Zafran, a grandson of Malakhi, opposed him ; but were defeated
with a loss of 600 men. Ahmed- khan continued his march to Candahar,
and brought out a large Duranee force with guns and shaheens. This
time the Tokhees under Shahabudeen-khan and Fatteh.khan, kept to

322 An aeeourU cfihe early Ghiijdees. [No. 160.

the hill of Kalat, out of which rery strong position every attempt of the
Doranees to dislodge them failed, with loss ci men.

The Durances failing at Kalat, determined to carry away the Oh^^
families which had been left for security on the Arghandah ; and they
boasted of this intention, calling to the Ghiljyes on tke faiU to ask
Dara*khan if he had any message to send by them to his women and
children. After the Duraniees had started for theArgha&dah, DanuUtaa
taking his swars by a short road arrived at the Tarak or encampment, is
time enough, during the night to throw up a sangttr or efitreikdmieat
of loose stones.

The Durance detachment arrived in the morning, and were thnct it-
pulsed from the sangar ; but being disciplkied troops, they were nol
easily to be defeated. At this time some of the occupants of the san-
gar who were not fighting for their honor (wives,) lefit the sangar and
fled. The Durances under cover of their laden ponies and muleSi made
another attack^ which proved successful, and eight members of one fami"
ly were cut down on the one carpet on which they were sitting. The
Durances lost 100 men^

This was the last battld between the Duranees, Tokhees and Hota-
kees. After this Abdu Raheem-khan and Shahabudeen-khan retired
to the Mammye hiUs. Shahzadah Shuja-ul-Mulk had also taken re-
fuge in the Kaker country, where he organized a powerful faction^ whidi
Shahabudeen-khan aUd Fatteh-khan Babakar-zai joined, as did Shakar-
ulla.khan, the son of Abdu Kaheem^khan Hotakee. On Sbuja-ul-Malk
becoming Shah, Fatteh^khan and Shakarulla-khan attended on him;
but Shahabudeen-khan never did as long as he lived, for whieh tbe
Shah never forgave him ; and hearing of his having built a fort in Nawak,
Gulistan-khau Aohak-zai, governor of Peshawar^ was despatched to
destroy it ; Fatteh-khan Babakar-zai accompan3ring him. On enter,
ing the district of Nawak, so secure was the Achak-zai chief that Sha-
habudeen-khan would shut himself up in his fort, that he accepted
Fatteh-khan's invitation to dinner at his place, Jameeyat,

Shahabudeen-khan getting intelligence of this, sallied oat "vnth bis
cavalry and fell upon the Durances as they were carelessly straggliog
on to their stage, and routed the cavalry, killed the artillery men, burnt
the gun carriagesi and spiked the guns, which remained there all tbe
winter. Next spring Sohbat-khan Popal-zai, being detached from Cabool

1845.'} An aeeauniiffihe early Ghiljdeei. 328

wiUi a foroe» reeovered and mounted the guni, and made use of them for
sereral days without effect against the fort walls, which remained entire
until destroyed by British Sappers in the autumn of 1839.

Shahabudeen-khan and Fatteh-khan for a long time were played
off against each other by the tribe, and the enmity existing between
them was considerably increased by Shahabudeen-khan's brother Meer
Mahammad (whose praises as a bold soldier are still sung,) being killed
by Fatteh-khan, in the district of Khakah. This enmity continued un«
abated until the death of Fatteh-khan, and the two rival chiefs had ge-
nerally two or three fights every season, (harvest.) On the death of
Fatteh-khan, Shahabudeen*khan made the usual mourning visit to his
son, (the present) Samad*khan, and this long-standing quarrel was then
made up.

Samad-khan married a daughter of his, giving a daughter in return to
his grandson, Mansoor-khan.

This brings the Toran Ghiljye history down to a tolerable modem pe«
riod, and nothing remains to be noticed, but a few particulars regarding
the forces furnished to the Durance kings by the Ghiljyes.

The Andadees furnished 600 horse as did the Tarakees in the follow-
ing proportion.

Babadeen-khels 120, Sak-khds 120, Peroz-khels 60, Tsoil-khels 60,
(hrbuz-khels 120, and Na-khels 120.

The Hotakees furnished 500 as did the Shamal-zais, including the
fiabekar.zais 500, and the Tokhees furnished 1,000.

The Tokhees received 1,60,000 Tabrezee rupees (10 annas each) per
annum thus : —

1064 S wars at 100, 1,06,400

Mausabdars, (officers,) . . • . . . . . 35,600

Hakim, (chief,) •• .. .. .. 18,000

1,60,000

The distribution of the Tokhees, as follows :

ABhoor-khan Bays, Meena Pairo saya,

Riahyanees, . . . . • . 50 . . . . . . 66

Bata-khel, • • . . 30 . . . • . . 36

Jalal.zai, .. .. .. 180 .. .. .. 164

Pero-zai, .. .. .. 144 .. •• .. 140

324

An account of the early Ghiljdeei.

[No. 160.

Aflboor-khan says, Meerza Pairo says,

Ba80-khel»

.. 33 ..

.. 33

Aiyoob-zai, • •

.. 23 ..

.. 23

Meeran.zai,

.. 104 ..

.. 104

Noor-khel«

.. 81 ..

.. 81

Mahammad-zai, ..

.. 330 ..

.. 330

Aka.zai«

heiM

,. 31 ..
1,006

.. 31

998

The distribution of t

ahamo

[lad-zais is as follows :

Feerak-khel,

Shah Husen-khel,

.. 16

KaUoo-khel,

Umur-khel,

Isse-zai, . .

Seekak, . .

Fakeer.zai,

Hasan-khel,

Babree, . «

Adam-zai,

Barhan-khel«

•

Hotak-zai,

.. 30

Fato.zai, . .

Akrabe-zai,

Moosa-zai,

Moosa*khel,

.. 16

Karmoo-khel,

Saee.zai, . .

Buhlol.zai,

Bazik.zai,

Nato-zai, ••

Khan-khel,

.. 18

Peerwalee-khel, . .

The Jalal-zai horsemen were thus divided :
Peroz-khel, .. -. 25 Nano-khel,

Bahram-khel, . . • . 43 Siya-zai, . .

Dawut-khel, .. .. 15 Bahlol-khel,

Najo-khel,. . .. .« 9

The Fero-zai horsemen were thus divided :
Sayud-khel, .. .. 57 Irakee,

Asho-zai,.. .. .. 24 Sure-zai, ..

IS
28
44

31
29

The Meeran-zais say that in the time of Sayud Kahmat-khan they
furnished 133 men in the following proportion :

Nuhradeen, . . • . 14 Sen-khel, 39

Akhe-zai, 30 Moghal-zai, .. .. 28

Uhwa-zai and Kute-zai, . . 22

J845.3

An account of the early GhUjdeeM,

325

The distribution of the Hotakees was as follows :
Malee-zai,

Khade-zai, . • . •

Tadzak, . . . • . •

fiarat-zai, . . . • • •

Ramee-zax, . • • •

Umar-zai,

Toon-zai, . . . • • •

xsoireey • • • • • •

Saut-kh^,
Eesaf-khel,
l88ozai«

Again the distribution of the Isak*zai Hotakee's 69 men is as follows :
Kutte-zai, - . . . . 14 Hade-zai, . . . . . . 25

Eudeen-zai, . . . . 7 Umar-zai,. . . . . . 7

Kundle-zai, . . .. •• 14 Mandeen<khel, .. .. 2

Maroof-zai,

Utman-khel,

.. 12

Isak*zai, ..

.. 70

Aka-zai, ..

Baee-zai, . .

.. 25

Baba-zai, . .

Saghad-zai,

.. 32

Alee-zai, . .

Polad, . .

Tahiree, ..

.. 6

The Sursat, or provisions for the royal army in its march through the
Gfailjye country was thus collected :

Kakui-Ghiljye, 4.5 Hotaks, 0.5 Tokhees.

Sar-i-Asp, Babakar-zais.

Tazee, Mahammad-zais, Moosaka, Pero-zais and Jalal-zais.

Nothing now remains but to note the locations of the different tribes.

The Tokhees are to be found in the Arghandah valley, the Tarnak
valley, the Khakak valley and in Nawak.

The Hotakees are, generally speaking, found in Marghah, and in the
Syorye, (shady side) and Peetao, (sunny side) of the Barcghar and
Surkh.koh hills, and more particularly speaking, the Isak-zais are
found in Marghak and Ataghar.

The Malee-zais in Girdezangal and Gha Bolan.

The Barat-zais in Roghanai.

The Aka-zais in Kharnai and Dumandia.

The Tun-zais in Syorye.

The Umarzais at Mandav.

The Sagharees (Saghadais) at Mandah.

The Ramee-zais at Ataghar, and the Baee-zais at Sorah and Kingar.

326 Am account of the earip GhUjdaes, [No. 160.

The Surkh-koh is called in Poshtoo SSrah-ghar.

The Babakar*zais are found at Swad-zai, Jungeer, Sar.i-As (asp,)
Shah Mardan and Nawah.

The Shamal^zais are found at Shibar, Halatagh^ Jetz and Mundan.

Other information of a geographical and. minute statistical nature
regarding the Toran Ghiljyes is in my possession, as are the original
Daftars which could not be generally interesting. The following ^ae
fact may be.

The scarped hill and baxrctck walls Against which tiie Ghiljyes tm
their heads, on the 21st May 1842, losing 400 killed, were their own
handy work chiefly, (the gaoonison having merely finished them,) of ^
preceding autumn.

It being impossible to procure labourers from Candahar, I had oc^
casion to call on the tribes to funush labourers in the lexact proportion
they had formerly furnished soldiers to the Duranee kings, asd diey
were mustered every morning by their respective chiefs, rod in hand.
Being highly paid, (one rupee to every three,) they continued to wori
long after the winter set in, sleeping in the plain below the hill in open
graves I two feet deep for warmth. Her gracious Majesty's head cm the
new Company's Rupees made a few demur taking them at &at ; but
finding out their value they soon got over this prejudice against *' the
image ;" and after spitting on the rupees and treading on them, took the
" Buttars" as they called them home as lawful gain, without a self-ac-
cusation, it is to be hoped, of their ^having encomraged idolatry.

That money was little valued by the Afghans of the wilds (Sahra)
before the British forces entered Afghanistan, the following will prove.

On my way from Gabod to Candahar in the winter of 1837-38, I
several times failed in .getting milk and butter, while my attendants
who had travelled before in the country were plentifully supplied* I
found the reason to be that I offered money, while they gave needles,
and odds and ends of coarse Cabool chintz.

On one occasion after marching all day, I lost my way and got
benighted, and separated from my baggage. On arriving at one of these
Ghiljaee.khels or wUd encampments, they allowed me to enter their
tents, but nothing would induce them to kill a sheep for money, (they
even refused to take a gold ducat,) insisting on having cloth ; and the
sheep was finally purchased by one of my attendants giving an old Ca-

1640.]

An account of the early Ghiljaees.

327

bool choghak. On leaving Candahar for Quetta, I laid in a stock of
needles, little looking-glasses, pewter rings and wooden combs ; and again
on leaving Kalat-UNaseer for 8hikarpoor« I was obliged to lay in a stock
of pieces of coarse native white cotton doth. For a whole piece I
und to get a sheep ; and eggs, fowls, milk, batter, &c. were only purchas-
thle by the yard of cloth. In the autumn of 1841, even in the Ghiljaee
country, melons were sold for equal weight of wheat, and grapes for
three times their weight in wheat.

On the army first arriving at Candahar, the wild hill A%hans who
got paid for the supplies they sold in Company's rupees, took them to
the town shroffs, and paid one and two annas batta to get them changed
for the " Kalamah-dar" or Candaharee rupee, thus giving eighteen
annas for eleven or twelve ; not being able to count, they talked of having
a " Idd-skin" of rupees.

List of Places on a portion (upper) of the Arghandeh River.

Left bank.

Right bank.

L^bank.

Right bank.

Arghasoo.

Parsang,

Takhoon.

Mamachakh.

Salem.

Sangeesar,

Meezan,

Surkhakai.

Shekhan.

Tarkhuloon,

M Dolanna.

Chaghbad.

(» Shadee.

Barakee,

<» Totee.

Nangyan.

•* Dohlah.

Saigaz,

Q Kondilan.

Kailatoo,

<5 Jadang.

Jijgah,

Narrai.

ft Jakhtoo.

Bargah,

Sardarrah.

Chalakoor.

Girdai,

Biland warkh.

Maidan.

Shukushta,

Ulachee.

Takhoonak,

Badar,

Shaigan.

Surkhsang.

Nalee,

Thakr.

Taj Mahammad,

Kadalak,

Sapitao.

Walagai,

•

Pumbazar,

Duberak.

Molai. 13

Tanghutai,

Pezgul.

Madat,

Karulghan,

Chaghmagh.

Bagh. d

Oman, or

Mossai,

0
S

Jirghanai.

Gazah,

Kaftalak.

Beetab.

Solan.

Ghimbat.

Khamai,

Bareezar.

328 An account of the early Ghiljaees, [No. 160.

The Arghandah river rises in Malistan, then comes to Fort Alee Gk)a-
har, then to the Fort of Bakar Sultan, called Sangi Mashak, west bank ;
thence Targan« west bank ; thence Oazah, west bank ; thence Bal ha.
sarr, west bank ; thence Mughaitoo, west bank, (near Kharnai.)

The Attah Hazarahs (uppermost) join into the Kalandar Hazarahs
(who are next below them on the river) at Kharnai. The boundary of
the latter and the Peroz-khel Tokhees is at Avkol, the boundary of the
latter and the BahloLkhel is at Fort Husen, the boundary of the latter
and the Ferozais is at Aldai (Nulla Zardad,) the boundary of the latter
and the Khan-khel is at Beetab.

Route from Kalat-uGhilzyze to

Dera IsmaiLkhan, Kalat-i-Ghiljaee, Urgakoo, Dab.i.Pishai, crossing
the Pass ; Fort Konah in Marghah, Fort Maiyar in Halatagh, Wuch
Marghah, (or Kaimkhelee,) Darwaze, beyond Jetz; Sargadee, Ismail-
khan, Kanokee, Gul Wanah, Kurman-i-Sar, Ashewat, Kashkalwee,
HandeerahKalan>i-Kakeree, Chukhah, Jyob, Shagee, Sarmaghah, pass-
ing Gholaree Pass ; Neelye, Tormyumah (Gbmal,) Kats-speenkee, Man-
jigarah in Daman, Kulachee, Gada-i-Oandipoora, Dera IsmaO-khan,
Sakaree, Jetz, Yaiyak-beree, Shaheedan, Turwoh, Kasakuk, Dakha
(deserts,) Taraghaz, Dochnah, Lakatijah, Goostoee, Se-nika, Tsa
tsandai, Doo-mandee (Ghuznee road falls in here,) Kotkee, Kanzoor,
Sarmaghah.

The Nasarees (Daoot-khel) having bullocks, first move to Hindustan
by the Gholaree or Zawah Pass ; then the other Nasarees, then the
Kharotees, then the Myan-khels.

JOURNAL

OP THR

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

Report, ^e./rom Captain 6. B. Tbbmbnhbbbb, Executive Engineer,
Tenasserim Division, to the Officer in charge of the office of Super^
intending Engineer, South Eastern Provinces ; teith information
concerning the price of Tin ore of Mergui, in reference to Extract
from a Despatch from the Honorable Court of Directors, dated
25th October 1843^ No. 20. Communicated by the Government of
India,

Sir,— Agreeably to instructions conveyed in your letter, No. 3018,
of the 7th of February last, I have the honor to subjoin such informa-
tion as I have been able to obtain^ concerning the probable cost of the
tin ore of Mergui.

2. With the view of ascertaining its value in the home market,
I transmitted, about the period of my first report on the tin of this
province, a box of average samples of the ore, to a smelting establish*
ment in Cornwall, (Messrs. Bolitho & Co.) having extensive connection
with the tin mines of that country. In April 1843, Mr. Thomas
Bolitho informed me, that — '^ The samples of once- washed ore pro*
duces about 70 per cent, of tin, and the twice- washed yields nearly
75 per cent. The metal is very good, being almost free from alloy ;
^nie of the samples which have been sent to me from the Malayan
peninsula contain titanium.

'' The ore appears to separate from the matrix very easily,

No. 161. No. 77, Nbw Sbbiks. 3 a

330 Tin Ore of Mergui. [No. 161.

'^ The consumption of tin throughout the world increases so slowly,
and the supply at present being more than equal to the demand, there
is little inducement to speculate in tin mines.

" The produce of Cornwall is 6>000 tons per annum> and we cal-
culate that the quantity produced at Java together with what is
raised in the Malayan peninsula, will rather exceed the produce of
Cornwall. The average price of tin in Cornwall has been about ^28.
per cwt, but it is now as low as 56^., which is the present price of the
best Straits tin, and tin mines are suffering greatly from the deprecia-
tion in the value of their metal.

** It may serve for your guidance to know^ that at this moment tin
ore of the description of the sample twice* washed, would fetch in Eng-
land about £ 46 per ton."

3. The following calculations of the probable result of a shipment
of tin ore, and of the metal, have been obligingly made for me by
two mercantile gentlemen of Maul main. They are based on the
lowest prices which, according to Mr. Bolitho, were obtainable in the
market in April 1843, and show a probable profit on tin ore of ^s. Qd.
per cwt. ; but a loss on the shipment of the metal of 12«. 4cf. per cwt« in
one case, and 4#. 9d. per cwt. in the other.

July 1843. Tin ore from Maulmain purchased at 45 rupees per
hundred viss, equal to 365 lbs.

45 Rs, per 7o viss = per cwt. 1 4 rupees, or

Charges.
Duty,

Stout boxes and shipping charges in Maul-
main, •• •

Freight home £ 2 per ton,

Insurance 2^ 7o on iQs

Commission and London charges 5^ ^o * *

Interest commission 5 7o on purchase.

Sale price per Mr. Bolitho^ « .

Leaves a profit per cwt. . . . • • • 0 7 ^

£. s.

0 28

£.

0 10

0 38

0 46

1845] Tin Ore of Mergui. 331

Jaly 1843. Tin from Maulmain purchased at 77 rapees per hun-
dred visa.

£» 8, d.
77 R<* per 7o ^^ = 33 Ra. 14 annas^ or
per cwt. • . . . . . • • . 0 47 9

Charges. <S. s. d*

Daty> .. .., •• •• .. 0 10 0

In Maolmain shipping, dec. per cwt. . . 0 0 6

Insarance 2^ 7o or 6 7^ . . . . 0 J 6

London charges, viz. commission 2^ 7o ) -^ (
Warehouse and Dock dues 1^ 7^ other > ^ \ 0 3 3
incidental expeoces 1^ 7o •• •• / '^ i

Interest an Purchase.

Six months @ 5 per cent

Freight @ £ 3 per ton,

Sale price per Mr. Bolitho,

0 2 4

0 3 0 0 20

0 68

0 b^

Leaves a loss of per cwt 0 12 4

Another calculation of November 1844.

R» A* Pm

Usual cost of tin ih Maulmain^ Rs. 77-8 1 oo e n

per 365 lbs , on Rs. .. .. ..f ^3 5 2 per cwt.

Freight to England @ £ 1-10 per ton, 0 12 0

Duty, @ 10* -. 5 0 0

Shipping charges here and in London, • • 0 8 0

Commission in London @ £ 2^ per cent. • • 0 13 0

30 6 2

£» s. d.
Or, 0 60 9

Assumed price in London^ • • • • 0 56 0

Leaves a loss per cwt. of . . ..049

4. The assumed rate for the ore at Maulmain, 45 rupees per 365
lbs., would be I think subject to a reduction ; but that for the metal.

332 Tin Ore of Mergui. [No. 161.

is probably the lowest average. It will be observed also^ that the
London price of 56«. per cwt. is taken at a period of great depression
in the value of the article which had averaged *]28. per cwt. ; bat it
would nevertheless appear, that to send it to England in the state of
clean ore would be by far the safest investment*

5. Many localities in the Mergui province in which the ore exists
abundantly, have been already described and publicly made known;
but little or no attention has been given to the subject by merchants
of Maulmain. Their business consists principally in timber, piece
goods and hardware, and they have no inclination to embark in
mining speculations. A small shipment of ore, being part of about 2|
tons collected by convicts and others at the Government expense,
was made to England by Messrs. fiilton and Co. of Maulmain ; bat
the quantity was so small, that no result has been made known by
their home correspondent* At Malewan in the Pak.ehan river at
the southern extremity of Tenasserim, between one and two hundred
active Chinamen are engaged in collecting the ore in ^e streams
described in my third report of 8th April 1843, Journal As. Soc.
Vol. XII. p. 523. They have been very successful, but there is so lit-
tle communication with that part of the coast that no accurate statement
of the result of their annual labours can be obtained. They convert it
into metal, which comes with Tacopah and other tin into the Maul-
main market.

6. Other localities equally productive and avdlable to the private
speculator have been indicated in former reports, and more are becom-
ing known. A specimen recently obtained by E. O'Riley, Esq. from
Henzai, north of Tavoy, is forwarded. It is said to be plentiful there;
but, without multiplying instances, sufficient evidence has been re-
corded of the existence in the Tenasserim provinces of rich stores of
the ore of this useful metal, and it has been also shown that there ib
no obstacle to its profitable production.

Mining or other operations of this nature supported by the Govern-
ment, have generally proved unsuccessful in India ; but the time may
perhaps arrive, when the attention of private capitalists may be turned

in this direction.

G. B. Trbmrnhbbbe,

Ex. Engineer, Tenasserim Provinces*

333

A Supplementary Account of the Hazarahs. By Major R. Lkbch, C. B.

Late Political Agent, Candahar,
[Drawn up under circumstances of peculiar difficulty.]

A fonner account of the tribes inhabiting the Hazarajat, was furnished
to Lord Auckland's government^ and printed with the other papers of
the late Mission to Cabool, (Captain Bumes's).

I had hopes of procuring a written history of this tribe which I
have reason to suppose exists, when I was obliged to quit Candahar
with General Nott's force in August, 1842. It was, if I remember, said to
be in the possession of the Chief of the Dai Kundee Hazarahs, whose
son was at that time a hostage in Candahar.

The Hazarahs claim brotherhood with Europeans, saying that both
are descendants of Japheth, the son of Noah.

The Hazarahs are called Moghuls by the Ghiljyes.

I believe that the Hazarahs in former times were like the Afghans
of a subsequent period, planted on the confines of India.

They, I believe, held the high road from Cabool to Candahar and
Herat up to comparatively speaking a recent period.

Many of the names of villages in the immediate neighbourhood of
Candahar prove a Hazarah founder ; and the tomb of one of their pro.
genitors, Choupan, is on the high road between Candahar and Herat
aear Greeskh : the place is now called Khah-i-Choupan.

In a paper on the history of Kalat-i-Naseer, I mentioned my opinion
that the Hazarahs extended as fu as Shawl Quetta, from the name
Takatoo of the mountain bounding that valley towards Pishing and
Candahar; and from Kuchlah (which means caves in the Hazarah
<iialect), being the first stage from Quetta towards Candahar.

The word '* Shev" both in tiie Hazarah and Brahavee dialects
(Koodd-gal) means bdow, lower ; for we find the Shev Hassarrs or
lower Hassarrs, distinguished from the fial Hassarrs or upper Hassarrs*

There ia in the neighbourhood of Candahar the shrine of an Hazarah
saint, who has the title of Hai-taz, (the rush rider). I have mislaid the
detailed account of the miracle that got the saint this tide.

The Hazarahs' simplicity is proverbial, and it is probable that they
were cheated by the Afghans and Ghiljyes out of quite as much land as
they were beaten off.

334 Supplementary account of the Hazarahs* [No. 161.

They hold fire-arms in greater esteem than their rivals, and do not, as
they do, trust to the vaunted Toora (sword) entirely. They make ex.
cellent powder, and are capital shots ; and, strange for a people inhahiting
a hilly country, are good riders.

They feel ashamed of their Tartar cast of countenance and want of
beards ; and I invariably observed that the higher in rank a Hazarah
chief was, the less he resembled his race.

They call the Afghans, " Avghoons." Such is their aversion to the
Tartar cast of countenance, that it is reported they ask no question of
their wives for presenting them with children, the images of some of
their Afghan handsome neighbours ; and the opportunities afforded a
passing stranger, even, by some tribes are said to be most shameless.*

As an instance of their want of polish, I instance the case of a Haza-
rah chief who visited me in the end of 1841 at Kalat i-Ghiljye. This
man resided at so small a distance from town (Candahar), that had he
been inclined he might have visited it once a week at least. As his
services were required for our garrison, I made him a present of a shawl,
and sent him round the fort to see the buildings and the commencement
of our fortification. On his return, after signs of great uneasiness in his
chair and sundry whisperings with his confidential attendant standing
behind him, he at last confessed that he had a request to make before
taking leave, if 1 would not be offended. This was, that in his tour round
the fort he had been struck with wonder at a large copper deg (caul-
dron) used by the executive engineer to mix lime (the weather requir-
ing warm water to be used), and that he hoped I would give it him in-
stead (if I liked) of the shawl. It was of the common size used at
cooks' shops at Candahar.

The vessel was accordingly purchased for him, and presented after
being scrubbed as well as time permitted ; and he left with it highly de-
lighted, vowing he would make soup of a whole sheep in it and feast
all the tribes. I never heard that the lime had any bad effect .on the
soup eaters. I have no doubt that this deg will after a generation or
two have wonderful tales told of it in connection with the Faringee9>
who built Kalat in the autumn to destroy it in the spring.

* The Afghans give their Dutch build in the following couplet:

*' Pushti koonash naghara darad,
Hazarah dumba darad."

1845.] Stqfplemeniary account of the ffazarahs, 335

I propose that this account should consist of the different memoranda
found in my journal connected with the Hazarahs, according to the or-
der of dates.

Memorandum, 19th July 1839, Candahar. — To the north of the Arif-
khanee fialoche of Kejran, (to the north of Teereen) are the Bahalee
Hazaraha under Husenee-khan, and his nephew Mahmood-khan ; and to
the north of the Babalee are the Chora Hazarahs ; 2000 families under
AUee Husen-khan and Mahammad Husen. They are taxed one sheep
each house.

Mahmood and his uncle Husenee both live at Zarafshan. Mehdee-
khan was the father of Mahmood. The Babalee Hazarahs are reckoned
at 5000 houses, and they are said to be able to furnish 200 horse and
300 foot. The Sardars of Candahar collected yearly about 2 or 3000
aheep. The sister of Mahammad Husen-beg Dai.koondee is Mahmood-
khan's wife, and Mahmood-khan's sister is the mother of Khairulla-
beg Dai.koondee. Oizon, called the Cashmeer of Western Afghan-
istan, was originaUy a government post. It is now enjoyed by Ma-
hammad Takee Beg, a Dai-kundee Hazarah. It was through the
Hazarahs that the revenue called Sang-o-baz (the goat and stone)
became known. When a tribe is next to independent, it is said to
pay a stone-and-goat revenue ; that is, the collectors of revenue are met
with an old lean goat in one hand, and a stone in the other, as much as
to say, if you do not put up with this shadow of tribute you shall have
this (the stone) on your head.

Memorandum, Chapa'khanna Karahagh, 2ith June 1841, and Ut Sep-
tmber 1 842. — The four Dastaks of Omee are Tamakee Taltamoor, Doka,
and Sagadee. These, with Aldye, Mahammad Khoja, and Meer Maham-
mad, are sons of Hajee. Their chiefs are Husen-khan, Hasan- khan,
and Mahammad Takee-khan, sons of Meer Alee«khan, son of Zakee-
khan. The Mahammad Khoja Hazarahs are under Mahammad Husen.
khan the son of Gulisthan-khan, the son of Abdul Masam-khan. These
are the Hazarahs of Karabagh ; they are at enmity with the Tarakees,
which was amply verified on the approach of General Nott's force to
Karabagh in 1842. The Ghiljyes had forsaken their forts from fear of
the force, and on coming up to Karabagh the Hazarahs were seen hur-
rying across the plain on their beasts of burden with empty bags to sack
their neighbours' forts. Some of the Hazarahs accompanied the force

336 Supplementary account of the Hazarahs, [No. 161.

one or two marches further, in hopes of getting the contents of the other
Ohiljaee forts in advance.

Memorandum, 2Sih June 1841. — ^There are four Dastake of Jagharee
Hazarahs ; Garai'ee, Baghochury, Izdaree, and Attak.

The three other Dastaks are Kalandars^ Pashahee and Sherdagh. The
seven are called Mama. Sultan Bakar is by tribe an Attak ; his father
was Augoobeg, son of Sufee Sultan : he has four sons, Sharhat-i-Alee,
Jamshed, Bijan, and Ismail.

The Arghandah river rises in Malisthan, then comes to Fort Alee
Gouhar-khan, then to the Fort of Bakar Sultan, called Sang-i-Mashak,
west bank ; thence Turgan, west bank ; thence Oazah, west bank ; thence
Bal hassarr, west bank ; thence Kunghaitoo, west bank ; Shev hasarr,
west bank ; thence the Tokhees to Siya Sang of the Khan-khels, east
bank ; thence Mezan, east bank, to Dahlak«

Memorandum, 18M August 1841.-'-Karez-i.Salai is a Supzee, among
the Dai Ghoupan Hazarahs, his residence is Shaee : to the west he
has Meerza Sultan Sohbat-khanee Hazarah of Karez and Chalakoor;
to the east Unizghan Gundah Hazarahs ; to the north the Khojakais
under Tamas-khan ; and to the south the Khan.khel Tokhees of Bagh.

The Dai Choupans, in all 2,500 families, are divided into three dans.
Wachak, under Murtuza-khan.
Orasee, ditto, Murza Sultan.
Baintan, ditto, Zardad Sultan.

The Wachaks are divided into four.

Paindah Mahammad, Bubash, Daoozai and Sheerah.

The Orasee are divided into three : Isfandyar, Ghulam.i. Wakee, and
Baitamoor.

Baintan had five divisions : Wuttee Murghans, Sherak, Malik Maham.
mad, and Mahammad Beg, of which are Suit Alee and Zardad
Sultan.

The Dai Choupans are originally from Greeshk ; the tomb of their
progenitor is still in existence, (Khak-i-Choupan.)

Sadelchee was the first chief of Kalat-i-Ghiljye.

Paindah Mahammad, Daoozai, Sohbat-khanee, and Mahammad*iais
of Shoee are all Akkahs.

The river of the Paindah Mahammad is Seran, of Meerza Sultan
Baghoochar, and of Zardad Sultan Sousah.

1846.] Supplemehtarp account of the Hazarahs, 337

Besides the revenue of the Dai Choupans (3,000 sheep, goats and
lambs,) that of Chalakoa (a desirable place by all accounts to spend the
winter, in preference to Kalat.i.Ghiljye) under Kongharee was 600
sheep, goats and lambs, and 12 Kharwars (120 maunds) of grain.

Memorandum, \5th October 1841 ; KaiaUL Ghiljye. The boundary
between the Kalandar and Jaghuree Hazarahs is at Oloom of the Salai
Kalandar Hazarahs ; the place is not on the river Arghandah, it is near,
and almost the same as Ghurdoon.i-Nungoo.

The boundary of the Kalandar Hazarahs and the Tokhees is at Av.
khol on the Arghandah, which belongs to the Kalandar Hazarahs.

The places of the Kalandars are Mughailoo, Gardoni Kotal, Oioom,
Oardoon.i.Murgo, Doom-i-Sago, Surkh Kol Ablecto, Gardo, Bayh, and
Moklai. The chiefs, their titles and residences are /llee Bakheh, son of
Ghttlam Husen Khan, at Ableeto.

The Kalandar revenue is payable at Ghuznee in hair carpets (palas)
and sheep.

Korghushtoo is a place of the Myanishees of the divisions Shekho
and Ghulam.

They may be 100 families ; they never regularly paid revenue to the
Sardars of Candahar, but are assessable by the king.

The Shekhos are ryots of Zardad, who takes one lamb from each
house.

Sheep won't live in their country, but goats will ; they die of rot in the
livers immediately it reaches the gall. The cure is the gambelahs.

Memorandum, 6th November 1841. — Kalat-i-Ghiljye ; the following is
road to Mughaitoo Halan Rabat. Sebandee, Jijgah Gorgaran, Kasalghan
on the Arghandah, Mughaitoo.

From Gorgaran Mughaitoo bears west, Hingai east, Bakhtoo north,
and Karatash south.

The titles of the Hazarahs are Khan, Sultan, Ikhtyars, Wakee, Meh-
tar and Turkhan.

The Kalandars have to their west Ghulam-i. Wakee and Bubash Ha.
zarahs, to the north Uruzghan under Zoulee and Suit Alee, to the east
Attah, and to the south the Jalalzai Tokhees.

The Hazarahs of Candahar are on excellent terms with the Parseewans,

(1 have also heard them called Parsus) those at Candahar were origi-

338 Supplementary account of the Hazarahs. [No. 161.

nally brought from Persia by Shah Abbas the Great; they are of the
divisions Ruzbyanee, Zanganah, Borbur and Siah Mansoor.

During the early wars of the Hazarahs and Ghiljyes, the latter burnt
the dead bodies of the former that came in their possession, and only
discontinued the practice (disgraceful to both parties as men and Mosul-
mans) on the former retaliating* The system of offering indignity to
dead bodies is a favorite one with the Afghans.*

The Hazarahs as well as Ghiljyes do not eat fish, although they agree
it was made lawful food by their prophet.

In going down the river Arghandah we were struck with the fine fish
in that clean part of the stream, and desired to have some ; no one in
the whole tribe could be found who knew how to catch them : at last a
dyer who poached for his own use, (he was an inhabitant of Candafaar,
not an Afghan) volunteered his services with small pea-like balls of

* On th« very first day that I entered Afghanistan (the Khyber Pass in the autamn
of 1837,) I observed that all the bodies of the Sikhs who had been killed near the Pass,
(in the battle of Jamrood between Mahammad Akbar-khan and Huree Sing) had
been heaped together.

On the breast of the corpse of Goda-khan Momaod Afghan, they lit a fire ; he having
been killed in our service.

The grave of the first officer who was buried after the army reached Candahar (he
was murdered) was being dug into, when the resurrectionists were disturbed by my
gardener going to turn water off into the garden, and a repetition of the attempt was
alone prevented by my making the owner of the field responsible for the preservation
of the tomb.

During the siege of Kalat-i-Ghiljye, the fire that had been kindled to consume the
corpse of a Hindoo native officer was extinguished by the besiegers, and the bodies of
the camp followers they had cut up were the next day hacked with their spades by the
cultivators who came to the spot to turn water into their fields.

The graves of those who were killed in 1839 at Ghuznee were in 1842 found defiled.
It became at last necessary on the march to bury under cover of tents, and to use
every ingenuity to conceal the spot which in many cases was of no avail, and no pre-
ventative against exhumation. I have lately heard that all the graves at Candahar
have been opened by Umar-khan, the son of Sardar Kobudil-khan, who intended to
burn the mouldering bones with horse litter; but the MuUas obliged him to content
himself with scattering them about the plain.

Graves of Mohammadans in Afghanistan are opened for the sake of the shrouds, by
a set who are thence called Cafan Kash, and great excitement was occasioned in the
winter of 1837 in Cabool, by a young married woman of rank having opened a newly
made grave. She had been persuaded that, if she succeeded in giving to her rival (hus-
band's second wife) to eat halwah cooked on the breast of a corpse, she would become
the sufed-bakht (white-fortuned) or favorite. Hog*s lard rubbed in the hair is considered
a specific for estranging affection*

1845.'} Suppltmeniary account of the Hazarahs. 339

iaai mixed with gall and Marg.i.Mahee, (the fiah-bone nut) which he
threw into the stream, the surface of which was soon covered with
looting fishes in a state of intoxication, (not dead). Bringing them to
land was good fun for the boys who had assembled.

Observing in the crowd of spectators the village Mulla (who are gene-
rally half-read) who evidently regarded us as cannibals, I enquired why
they did not eat fish ; he replied, he could not tell me, but it was un.
doubtedly lawful food. A good stock of fine large fish being now
laid before us, I begged the Mulla to make them lawful eating ; this, he
ought to have known, could be done by merely dashing the live ones
thrice to the ground. He however looked disconcerted at my request,
and hesitated. After a short time, during which we all kept our coun.
tenances, he called for a knife and was about to cut their throats, when
I suggested that the bellies were the proper places ; and he actually,
after pronouncing his solemn " Bismillah AXL&h Akbar," went through
this first part of the cook's duty : and, as he looked after us as we de-
parted to breakfast, I have no doubt he said to himself, " These Faringees
are after all not such a dirty feeding set of Kafars as they are said
to be."

The Hazarahs, notwithstanding the general enmity between the tribe
and the Ghiljyes and Afghans, have their friends and allies among
them ; three Maliks of the Alee-khel Ghiljyes have gone over to Sultan
Bakar, the deadly enemy of their tribe, having quarrelled with their
brother Malik : their names are Mato, Natho, and Shahabudeen.

The Hazarahs have been driven out of part of their country by the
Wardaks (from the stages of Haft Asya, Hyder.khel, Shashgou, &c.)
These Wardaks are said to amount to 9,000.

The Hooree Wardaks, who now occupy this part of the road from
Ghuznee to Cabool, are divided into three clans ; Malee.khel, Badud
(Bahadur) khel, and Hyder-khel.

The Malee.khels are divided into Hasan-khel, Hasrah, Muradee.khel,
and Shadee-khel.

The Badud.khels into Pancbpaee Zeerak and Khaja Khidr, and the
Hyder-khels into Tokur-khel and Eesa-khel.

The Hoorees are reckoned at 2,000 snookes, or houses.

In their hills there is a grass called Tabarghan that sheep feed on,
which imparts a fine flavour to the ghee, milk, and its other preparations.

340 Suppkmenlary account of the Hazarahs. [No. 161.

There is also a red flower, called Sursan, which is hoiied, and liie
strained water used as a cooling drink.

The slaves in Afghanistan are chiefly Hazarahs, and the Afghans say
it is as lawful to huy and sell them as negroes.

N. B. — I have, I think, a good account of the Hazarahs dependent on
Gabool in my " Vicovitch's Gabool/' a work which I hope some day
to have time to translate. It is composed of accounts of the different
districts of Gabool, drawn up at the request of that Russian agent, during
his residence at Gabool in the latter end of 1837 and beginning of 1838.

Rough Notes on the Zoology of Candahar and the Neighbouring
Districts. By Capt. Thos. Hutton, of the Invalids, Mussoorie.
With notes by Ed. Blyth, Curator of the Asiatic Societ^s Museum-

No. 1. Vesper tilionidcB. Two species of Bats are common at Gan-
dahar, a large and a small kind ; the latter I preserved in spirits and
have sent you, though I fear they are spoiled.^ This species is very
common^ and may be seen from February till towards the end of

1« They arrived in excellent condition, and may be thus characterized :

Pipisirellus lepidus, Blyth. Length three inches and one-eighth to three and a quar-
ter, of which the tail measures one and a half; alar expanse eight and a half to nine
inches : fore-arm an inch and three-eighths, or a trifle less ; longest finger two inches
and a quarter ; tibia half an inch ; foot and claws five-sixteenths of an inch. Ears
smaller than usual among the Pipistrelles, measuring from lowermost anteal base
half an inch, and their tips spreading to an inch asunder; tragus subovate, and curved
as usual. Sides of the face very tumid. General colour a light yellowish-clay, pale
sandy or isabella-brown ; underneath paler : the volar membrane light dusky, and the
inter-digital at base towards the wrist, also the tip of the wing, and a broad border be-
tween the leg and proximate finger, with the fingers themselves, of the same light hue
as the fur of the body.

Captain Hutton*s large species is not improbably the Noctuiinia noctula^ v. N. aUi-
volanSy (White) Gray, common in Europe; for 1 doubt much the distinction of Mr.
Hodgson's Vesp. labiata from the nodular and a very closely allied species, if not the
same, has been described by Mons. F. Cuvier from Sumatra.

The description of habitat resorted to by the third species is that of Rhinolopluts
perniger, Hodgson, v. luctus (?), Temminck, further to the eastward.

It may be remarked here that £lphinstone mentions Monkeys, as found only OQ
the north-east parts of Afghanistan ; a statement whidh does not appear to have been
since verified.^ Cur* As* Soc.

1845.] Rough Notes on the Zoology of Candahar. 841

Oetober, flitting about in crowds in the twilight honn of evening ;
they shelter daring the day in holes of houses, walls, and rocks.

The larger kind I have only seen occasionally on the wing, and
sever poesessed a specimen. There is said to be another large kind
foond in the limestone caverns which occur in the mountains, but I
suspect it to be the same.

No. 2. Feiis iigri$. Is said to occur in the jungles of Bhawulpore
iloDg the banks of the Sutledge, but I saw no traces of it. In the
lower parts of the country, towards Scindh, I do not think it occurs.
It is not in Afghanistan.*

No. 3. Felt* leo. Is said to occur in some parts of Afghanistan ; but

2. According to Blphinstone, Tigen are to be met with in most of the woody parti
of Afghanistan : and Mr. Vigne remarks that the Tiger is "said to be well known" upon
the Safyd koh mountain. Sir John McNeill saw one killed in Persia, at the foot of the
Elboorz mountains, near the Caspian ; and Morier states that it occurs in the vicinity
of Tabreez, mentioning that he saw the skin of one that had been killed there a short
time previously. Old Tournefort relates that the middle region, and even the borders
of the snow limit, of Ararat, are inhabited by Tiger8(?). He says that he saw them
within lOU yards of him, and that the young are caught in traps by the people round the
mountain, to be exhibited in shows of wild beasts throughout Persia. At Grusia, at
the foot of Caucasus, a large one is mentioned by Kotzebue, and supposed by him to
have been driven by huoger from the plain of Baghdad. Mons. Menetries (1 think, for
I have neglected to cite the authority in my note- book,) relates that—** During our stay
at Lenkowa, I had the good fortune to obtain a Tiger that had been killed only fifteen
vents off. It did not appear to differ from the Bengal Tiger, even in the skull. It
appears, as I subsequently learned, that one at least is killed every year in the vicinity,
having been pursued perhaps by hunters, till it sought refuge in the neighbouring forests
of the Kour. It is not, I believe, found in Caucasus, the skins sent thence to Europe
having probably been brought from Georgia, whence those of Leopards are also sent." Lt.
Irwin states, that the Tiger is found as far as Tashkund, but in that temperate climate
he falls much short of the Bengal Tiger in strength and ferocity. Burnes also speaks
of "Tigers of a diminutive species," found in the valley of the Oxus; and Humboldt
and Ehrenberg observed them so high as the latitude of Berlin : they are said to occur
even on the banks of the Oby : and Du Halde speaks of them as common in Tartary and
China. In Japan they are stated to be covered with a thick coat of long soft fur. In
the Himalaya they reach to an elevation of 8,000 feet, but are rare as far north as
Simla, and they are said to be smaller in the N. W. provinces than in Bengal. Dr.
McClelland affirms that they are a great scourge to the inhabitants of Kemaon. Re-
ferring, however, to the more western portion of the range of this animal, and even to
the northern, it is necessary to be on guard against the frequent misapplication of the
name 21r^er, which, in South Africa, for instance, invariably applies to the Leopard,
uid in S. America to the Jaguar; in Van Dieman's Land even to the marsupial Thyla-
Gin : and with respect to a remark above cited, referring to Leopard skins being brought
from Georgia to the Caucasus, it may be noticed that Guldenstadt describes the Leopard
to inhabit the rocky parts of Caucasus, chiefly to the south, about Tiflis ; being of rare
occurrence to the northward.— Cur. As> Soc,

342 Rough Notes on the S^hgy of Candahar, QNo. 161.

I doubt it, as I never saw a skin nor any spoils of the animal, nor
could I find any one who had seen it.^

No. 4. Felts leopardus. This animal is common in the mountain-
ous parts of Afghanistan, and is destructive to flocks and cattle ; it
seldom attacks man, though the Afghans have a great dread of it.
The skins are prized as saddle-cloths, and are thrown over the saddle,
with the tail fastened behind to that of the horse.^

No. 5. Felis chaus, (vel erythrotis, Hodgson). This is not an un-
common species on the hills of Quettah and other partsof the country.

N. B. — '^Seeah Gosh" is the name of a Lynx inPersia^t. e. *' Black
Ears."*

No. 6. Felis ? A spotted skin of a small Lynx, the only one

I saw : it was brought in its present state from the Huzarrah hills.^

No. T. Felis catus. The domestic Cat of the Afghans is very similar
to that of the hill people in the Himalayan districts, running into all
sorts of varieties as to colour, as they do with us, although the most
general is a dark grey with black spots and stripes.'

No. 8. Canis • The domestic Dogs of the Afghans vary ac-
cording to the climate. In the hilly tracts they are large and fierce;

3. Elphinstone remarks, that the only part of Afghanistan where he had heard of the
existence of Lions, was in the hilly country about Cabool, and there they are small
and weak as compared with the African Lion. '* 1 even doubt," he adds, '* whether
they are Lions." The Lion is well known to occur, however, both in Persia and io
Western India ; and, according to Lieut. Irwin, some are found as far as Tashkund,
in a northerly direction and an easterly. J, A* S, viii, 1007. — Cur, As. Soc.

4. A Candahar specimen forwarded by Captain Button is of moderate dimensions, witJi
rather long fur, very pale in colour, and the spots a good deal ringed, including those
along the back line. — Cur. As* Soc.

5. This is the Felis caracalt Schreber, of which the Society has lately received a
specimen, killed at Jeypoor, from Captain Boys. It extends sparingly over the Upper
Provinces, but appears not to occur in the peninsula of India : westward it inba'
bits Syria, and the whole of Africa from Barbary to the Cape of Good Hope.
F, chaus is common throughout India, from the Himalaya southward; and extends
even to Arracan.— Cur. As. Soc.

6. This seems to me to be the British Wild Cat f Felis syhestriSt Aldrovand, com-
monly referred, but very doubtfully, to F* catus^ Lin. ; the former not occurring in
Scandinavia). Its tail, however, would appear to taper, so far as can be^Judged froi&
the open skin ; whereas the tail of the British Wild Cat does not taper. Judging fr<HB
memory, of the figure published by Mons. F. Cuvier, I much suspect it to be his ^'
torquata : but the colour and markings are quite those of F* sylvestris* — Cur. As. Soe.

7. The domestic Cats of India are smaller than those of Europe, and are very com'
monly of a grey colour without markings, except on the limbs, and some more or lest
confluent black dorsal lines ; the feet and tail being also black, to a greater or less extent
This is a style of colouring never seen in those of Europe (of unmixed breed) ; and the

1845.] Bough Notes an the Zoology of Candahar, 343

md approach somewhat in appearance to the degenerate breed of
Bbotan dogs, such as is found in the lower hilU of the Cis-Hima.
hya. Others are not very different from the common village dog of
India, except perhaps that the bark is more decided in its tones, and
the hair longer. These appear to be the mere effects of climate.
There are likewise Turnspits and Qreyhounds : some of the latter
are good and fleet, with smooth short hair ; others are large and cloth,
ed with long silky hair* At Cabool, Pointers are said to occur ; but in
the more southern parts I saw none.^

true tabby t so common in Europe, is never seen in India : I mean the tabby with black
gronnd and broad pale streaks peculiarly disposed ; for the grey with black tiger-streaks is
foood in both regions, only that the Indian are of a purer grey than the European.
The long-haired Kashmir Cats, when dark, are often of the same unstriped grey with
black dorsal streaks, feet, and tip of tail, as the Indian ; and, I think, I may add that
the Indian are more generally partially or almost wholly white, than is the case in
Europe. Wholly black Cats are certainly less common than in England. By the way,
Elphinstone states that Cats of the long-haired variety, called Boraukt are exported in
a great number from Afghanistan, but are not numerous in Persia, where they are
seldom or never exported. — Cur* As. Soc.

8 Lieut. Wood, in his * Journey to the source of the Oxus,' p. 396, mentions a breed
of Dogs, at Kunduz, called Tazi^ ** which could not but have found favour in the eyes
of an English sportsman: it is a breed which, for strength and symmetry, vie with our
Greyhound, and in beauty surpass it." Also, he speaks of the ** Spaniel, from Kutch,
and others of mixed breed, but possessing keen scent, and some of the qualities of our
pointers." Lieut. Wood also informs us (p. 874), that *Uhe Wakhun Dogs differ much
from those of India, and bear a general resemblance to the Scotch Colly. They have
long ears, a bushy tail, and a frame somewhat slender, being better adapted for
swiftness than strength. They are very fierce, make excellent watchers, and will
fight dogs twice their own weight. Their prevailing colours are black or a reddish-
brown ; the latter often mottled. The breed is from Chittrah, and so highly are their
game qualities valued, that the Scinde Ameers have their packs improved by
importations from this country." To my friend Mr. Vigne, we are indebted for a
description of '* the Scinde hound, as it is usually termed, which," he remarks, ** is a
nee peculiar to the country, and considerable care, I believe, is bestowed upon the
breed. It is a large and fierce animal, smooth-haired and usually white, and with sharp
ears : a cross between a thorough-bred mastiff and a greyhound, would much resemble
it In general figure, but with a more savage expression, it is not unlike a large Eng-
lish coach dog : an animal which, somehow or other, in the older books of Natural His-
tory, has obtained the name of the Harrier of Bengal. Although not probable, yet it
ii not actually impossible, that the original breed may have been brought home by the
early European traders from the mouth of the Indus, and that the name may thus have
originated in a not unlikely confusion of localities." * Travels in Kashmir,' &c. II.
411. The same gentleman giv^s a description of the magnificent sheep dogs of Kashmir,
(ibid, II. 149), which however would appear to be identical with the ordinary Tibe-
tan mastiff. Of this race, many are annually brought to Calcutta; and with them I
bave seen a dog very nearly resembling the Exquimaux dog, which is found likewise in
BOTthem Siberia, where, for purposes of draught, it is fast superseding the Rein-deeT*~-
Cur, As. Soc*

344 Bough Notes on the Zoology of Candahar. [No. 161.

No. d. Cants aureus ?, var: I have no specimen. It is abundant
along the coarse of the Helmund and Argandab rivers, at Girishk
and Candahar^ as also in the Bolan Pass, and appears to be identical
with the variety found in the Himalaya. It may perhaps be the
" Ozygous indicus,'* of Mr. Hodgson. It is found in packs, and
cries at night like those of the plains of India, and in this it seems to
differ from the Himalayan variety, for although I have often seen
many of the latter together at Simla, I never heard them cry. May
not a dread of the Leopard keep them silent in the hills ?^

No. 10. Vulpes \Jlavescens, 6ray.|] The Fox of Afghanistan, or
at least of the southern and western parts, is apparently the same as
our Himalayan species, though somewhat less in size.^^ My specimens
are all females, and the measurements are as follow, namely: —
Length from nose to insertion of tail two feet ; tail seventeen inches,
equalling three feet seven inches. Height at the shoulder fourteen
inches. Another: — Length to insertion of tail two feet ; tail seventeen
inches and a half, equalling three feet five inches and a half. Height
nearly fifteen inches at the shoulder. Farther description I omit, as
you can supply it from the specimen sent. The species is numerous in
the valleys around Candahar, hiding in burrows and holes in the
rocks. The skins are soft, and are made into reemchahs and posh-
teens. The price is usually six annas a skin. Called '* Robur,'*^^

9. Wild Dogs, in addition to Wolves, Jackals, and Foxes, are stated by Elphin-
stone to occur in Afghanistan. A Nepalese Jackal skin presented to the Society by
Mr. Hodgson, appears to differ in no respect whatever from the Jackal of Lower
Bengal*— Cur. As. Soc,

10. Since writing the above, I have compared the specimens with the Hill Fox, and
there appears to be a deficiency in the white tip to the tail in Afghan specimens ? T. H.

11. In Afghanistan, according to the late Dr. Griffith, ** a large and a small species
of Fox appear to exist The former, which is perhaps identical with the large Hima*
layan Fox, 1 procured from Quetta and at Olipore, at which place it is not uncommon*
The small kind seems to resemble the Fox of the plains of N. W. India." Capt Hut-
ton's specimen is evidently of the small Afghan species, which is Fulpes/tavescens,
Gray, An* and Mag* N, H. 1843, p. 118, and thus described :— *< Pale yellowish, back
rather darker ; face, outer side of fore-legs, and base of tail, pale fulvous ; spot on side
of face, just before the eyes, the chin, the front of fore-legs, a round spot on the upper
part of hind-feet [or rather legs], and the tips of the hairs of the tail, blackish; end of
tail white. Hab. Persia." The winter fur is long and soft, and is of two sorts ; a
shorter and delicate under-fur, which on the back is darkish, passing to white on the
sides and under parts, and pure white on the sides of the neck and shoulders in some»
in others but partially so ; and longer straight hairs, black-tipped, and yellowish-white
along the back, whiter on the sides : the breast and under parts, with the exterior of
the limbs above the mid-joint, dusky : ears brown -black to near their base : face fni-

1845.3 Rough Notes on the Zoology cf Candahar, 345

No. 11. Fulpes bengaleneis. Is common in Cutchee, where, pre-
yioos to the advance of our army from Shikarpore, I have coursed
them with my friend Major Leech, late Political Agent at Candahar.
It does not appear to pass the mountains into Afghanistan, or at least
I neither saw nor heard of it. ** Loomree" of India.^*

No. 12. Canis /t«j9tf«.— Wolves are common in the lower part of
the Bhawulpore country, and likewise around Candahar. The dimen.
sions of one from the lattier place are thus: — Length, over all, four feet
eight inches; height at the shoulder two feet three inches. The female
is still larger. It appears to be the common Wolf of India. A pair
of these animals crossed my path one morning in Scindh : they were
going along at a smart hand.gallop, the largest, or female, leading.

" Bheyriah'' of India.^^

No. 13. Hyeena vulgaris. — This animal is common in Afghanistan.
Length to insertion of tail three feet three inches and a half ; tail iif.
teen inches, equalling four feet eight inches and a half. This was a
female, and apparently not full grown. I had an opportunity of com-
paring this spedmen with a male from Neemuch, which my friend
Dr. Baddeley reared from a cub, and took with him to Candahar.
There was no perceptible difference except in size, the Neemuch spe.
eimen being the largest. Dr. Baddeley and one native servant were

vescent, with dark patch before each eye : and the tail very bushy, a little fulves-
ceot, and white-tipped. In summer dress, the long hairs have more or less disappear*
ed ; and, in a male before me, the inner fur is considerably deeper-coloured than in
CapL Button's female. A third specimen was received from Almorah, but the skin
had doubtless been carried to the great Hurdwar fair. As a species, it is very distinct
from the Himalayan Fox, and also from another, nearly allied to the latter, from Chi-
nese Tartary, described in J, A. S. XI, 589.— Our. As. Soc.

12. Mr. BUiot remarks of the Foxes of the Southern Mahratta country, that— «*' It is
remarkable that though the brush is generally tipt with black, a white one is occa-
sionally found, while in other parts of India, as in Cutch, the tip is always white." In
Bengal it is invariably black. This animal is identified by Mr. Ogilby with the Canis
coriae, Pallas, and certainly it agrees with the description of the latter, despite the
great difference of habitat.— Qir. As, Soe,

IS. I believe Mr. BUiot to be right in identifying the Indian Wolf, Canis pallipes
of Sykes, with the true C. htpuSt which certainly runs into varieties in the wild state,
aot only according to climate, but even in the same locality. Those of Chinese Tartary
are very pale fulvescent, and are densely clad with matted wool during the winter: —
absolutely Wolves in Sheep's clothing. Two specimens of the latter are in the So-
ciety's collection.—- C^r. As* Soc,

346 Rough Notes en the Zoology of Candahar. [No. 161.

the only persons who coald approach the brute with impunity. It
was chained like a dog. I believe it effected its escape during Dr.
Baddeley's return to Quetta on his way to Bombay. " Laggerbagher"
of India.<«

No. 14. Herpestes grtseus 9 — Is this our Indian friend ? It is
very common at Candahar, with precisely the habits of H. griseui.
The Afghans occasionally tame them, as do the natives of this coun-
try. It is called ** Mooeh-khoorma," by the' Afghans. ^' NgooV* of
India.^

No. 15. Mustela {sarmatiea, Pallas.^ — This occurs plentifully at
Quetta and Candahar, where it burrows in the ground, and produces
three or four young at a birth. I had three pairs of these beautiful
little creatures living in the same box, and although occasionally
a little bickering occurred, yet on the whole they were arnica,
ble enough. A few days before I left Candahar (February 1841),
I killed and stuffed one of these animals, and the following morning,
when a young friend of mine opened the cage for the purpose of tak-
ing out another, we discovered that the two remaining pairs had
waged war during the night with the odd one, whose mate we had
stuffed, and had killed and partly devoured it. This is a curious &ct,
for the three pairs had lived together nearly from their birth, without
farther quarrelling than an occasional wrangle over their food ; yet
no sooner was one pair broken, than the others set upon and killed the
odd one. The Afghans call it '^ Gorkhtis/' or grave-digger, from an
idea that it frequents burial grounds for the purpose of feeding on
dead bodies. They even suppose that it lives entirely upon human
bodies, and that it digs down into the graves where it banquets in
undisturbed solitude. This notion^ as may readily be supposed^ is an

14. According to Vigne, this animal is very rare, if found at all, in Kashmir.
Very rarely, also, it occurs in the vicinity of Calcutta.^ CVcr. As, Soc*

15. Mangusta pallipes, Blyth. This species is quite distinct from M. grisea of
India generally, (including Scindh,) having much shorter fur, and approaching nearly
to M. Edwardsii, v. auropunctata of Hodgson, if it be not a mere variety of the latter.
It is most probably, however, distinct,v and may be known from M. BdwardsU by iU
paler colour, its white throat, breast, and under-parts, which are but faintly tinged with
the hue of the upper parts, and also by the light colour of its feet. In form and diioeo*
sions, it appears altogether to resemble Hi, Bdwardtii,^Cur. As* Soc,

1845.] Paugh Notes an the Zoology of Candahar. 347

abBurdity^ the animal possessing in every respect the same propensities
as its European congeners. Its food consists of birds^ rats, mice,
lisards, beetles, and even snails, all of which it finds in abundance in
the gardens around Candahar. The first I saw was brought to me
by a gardener who had dug it out of a hole ; and a pair of these little
savages was also found in another garden, where they had brought
forth their young in a hole in the earth. The propensity to destroy
life, and the thirst for blood, was soon manifested in those which I
kept confined.

One of these animals refused to feed during a day and a night, al-
though his cage was plentifully supplied with raw meat and beetles;
bat on introducing four Wagtails (Motacillce), he was instantly arous-
ed by their fluttering, seizing and destroying them one after the other
as quickly as possible^ and then retiring with them into an inner part
of the cage, where he regaled himself on the blood of his victims, and
indemnified himself for his long fast*

He ate little of the flesh, however, but greedily licked up the drops
of blood as they trickled from the wounds of his slaughtered prey.
He also destroyed a couple of large Rats (Arvieoke) in a similar
manner, showing great skill in seizing them so as to preclude all
chance of their either injuring him or escaping from his fierce attack.
When the rats were introduced into his cage, he was coiled up asleep
in one comer of the inner part, but hearing them bustling about he
was soon on the alert, and, cautiously advancing to the small round
hole which formed the entrance to his sleeping apartment, took a sur.
vey of his unsuspecting visitors. He then drew back as if to avoid
observation, until one of the rats approaching his retreat, he suddenly
darted upon him and pulled him, in spite of his squeaks and struggles,
into his sanctum, where he soon despatched his victim.

After a short pause, he again placed himself so as to obtain a view
of the remaining rat, which shortly fared a similar fate to its compa-
nion. With the latter, however, there was a severe struggle, and the
ferret was obliged to leave his inner apartment ; yet although he rolled
over and over in the scuffle, he never quitted his hold, and so dexte.
roQsly had he seized his prey, that to bite or shake him off was equally
impossible. He seized both rats precisely in the same place, namely.

348 Rough Notes on the Zoology of Candahar. [No. 161.

immediately behind the ear, which at ODce secared himself from in-
jury and soon rendered his foe helpless. When the rat ceased to
straggle, he bit him once or twice sharply through the back of the skull,
and as the blood flowed from the wounds the ferret lapped it up with
his tongue. There was never any attempt to suck the blood of his
prey, as is commonly but erroneously asserted of his tribe, though he
continued both with birds and beasts to lick up the warm stream as
long as it flowed from the wounds he had inflicted. One would have
thought that the slaughter and the blood of the three birds and two
large rats would have satiated his ferocity for a time, but although he
made no attempt to devour the prey he had slain, his appetite for blood
and murder was still as keen as ever, and scarcely had he finished his
second draught ere he sallied forth to slaughter two young rats which
had been introduced along with the old ones. These, being as yet blind,
he seissed by the nape of the neck, and having killed them with one
bite, carried them also into his den, where he stored them up in a cor-
ner with their murdered parents, and the remains of the wagtails.
In the evening, after nightfall, when all was getting hushed and dark,
he came forth, and then regaled himself on the store of provisions he
had laid up.

I was amused one day at the successful defence of a Shrike (Lawm
lahtora). On introducing the bird into the box, it kept for some time
twisting and turning itself about, and flitting its tail from side to side,
watching the ferret with evident alarm. At last it flew so near that
the ferret sprung at and caught it by the wing, and then lay with his
fore-feet upon the bird, and began to peer sharply round to see that no
intruder was near to interrupt his meal. As he turned his head back
to begin the feast, the Shrike who had watched his movements, ma^
him so suddenly by the nose, that the ferret in astonishment and pain
shook his head and jumped up, thus releasing the bird which I per-
mitted to escape as a reward for his valour, and he flew away chatter-
ing, as if laughing in his sleeve at the trick he had played his enemy*

These animals are, strictly speaking, nocturnal, though not unfre-
quently on the move during the day ; this however may probably ^
owing to bad success during the night in finding food, so that hunger
may compel them sometimes to wander forth during the day time. Thcwe

1846.] Eough Noies on the Zoology of Candahar. 349

whieh I kept^ having plenty of food to eat, slept almost throughout
the day, seldom venturing abroad until night£iJl> when they became
very restless. They produce young about the end of March or be-
ginning of April, when the winter has passed away and the warm wea-
ther is setting in, bringing in its train numbers of quail and other
small birds on which the animal preys*

The Afghans assert that they are never seen during winter, and that
although the summer is the season when they appear, they are never
abundant. This latter assertion I can take upon myself to contradict,
as they are far from scarce, for I have had during the summer
months more than a dozen specimens brought to me.

If true that they are only found in summer, it is probably because
they remiun in a state of somnolency during the winter. The Af.
ghans, however, are so little skilled in Natural History, and so addicted
to lying, that it is a matter of much difficulty at any time to gather
the truth from them. Some informed me that though the animal
was not seen around Candahar during winter, yet that they were
plentiful in the hills wherever there was good jungle cover, and that
in summer they wandered down to the ptains.

Now this assertion carries an error on the face of it, for an ani-
mal delighting in cold climates would not resort to the warm plains
in summer, nor would the inhabitant of a warm climate seek the hills
in winter. As therefore they only appear in the plains and valleys
during the summer^ the probability is (if they do not migrate to the
south) that they remain dormant during the winter in holes and bur-
rows. The latter is indeed the most probable, for to the southward
the Candahar valley is bounded by the sandy desert which stretches
away fh>m the Kojah Amram range of hills to beyond Herat, into
Persia."

These animals emit the same disagreeable fetid odour which charac-
terises the genus. The body is long, slender^ and extremely supple ;
the loins appearing, as in the feline tribe, to be so loosely articulated, that
the hinder parts actually shake and totter whenever the animal puts itself

16. The truth, I suspect, will prove to be that the Mustela aarmatica occurs at all
seasons, like its various congeners. Among the true Carniwrat I know only of the
genus Ursus which fairly hybernates.— Cur. As. Soc,

350 Rough Notes on ike jHoology of Candahar. [No. 161.

in motion. The tail is capable of being expanded into a good sized
brash, and in this state forms an excellent defence for the back.

I once pat a large snake into a box with one of these ferrets ; the
snake at once withdrew to one corner and sought for a hole to escape
by ; while the ferret arched its back, kept the head erect, and spread the
tail out like a thick brush, which it turned over its back. In this
manner he approached and retreated from the snake several times,
watching its movements in some alarm. The ferret often tried to
seize the snake by the back of the head, and as often received a bite
in return, until the little beast became quite terrified. The snake
was harmless, but too powerful for the ferret to attack success,
fully.

The markings of this beautiful species are as follow, namely^
through or across the face are three distinct and well defined bands ;
the lowest one runs across embracing the eyes, and is of a brown co-
lour ; above this is a second narrower band of a pure white ; and a
third of black passes across the forehead, along the anterior base of
the ears, descending to join the same colour on the throat. The
chin and muzzle are white, the nose brown. The fore part of the throat,
neck, breast^ fore and hind legs, are glossy black. The upper half of
the ears is white, with long hairs like a fringe ; the crown and nape
are also white with brown spots ; the hinder neck and all the upper
parts of the back and sides, are yellowish- white with numerous brown
or liver-colour^d spots of indeterminate shape. The tail is greyish-
yellow for two-thirds from the base, and the remainder to the tip black.
£ars ovate, or rounded and open ; eyes pale bluish or grey, by day.
light. The head is broad, muzzle short, rounded and obtuse. Body
long and remarkably slender, very supple, like the common ferret
The cry it makes when irritated resembles that of the mungoose
(Mangusta lpallipes]J.

No. 16. Mustela 9 This is a skin which was given me by a

Candahari, and came he said from the neighbourhood of Cabool. I
suspect it to be the *' Dil-kuffub" of Burnes*s Bokhara.^'

17. This is lost ; it was ** sooty black with a white crescent or gorget on the throat."
T. H.

1845.] Rough Notes on the SHoology of Candahar. 351

No. 17- Luira [monticola, Hodgson, J. A. S. VIII, 320; appa.
rently^^3- '^^^se animals are abundant in the larger rivers, such as the
Helmund and Argandab. I could never obtain more than the dried
skins, wfaieh are prepared for the Bokhara market, and sell for eight
Candahar or six Company's Rupees each. They are made into
dresses, and are so durable as to be handed down from father to son !
So at least runs the fable !

No. 18. Erinaceui collaris ? This species I found in the sandy
tracts of Bhawulpore, but as I have only the description of it left, I
am uncertain as to its identity with the above named species.

The animal was clothed with stiff quills on the upper parts of the
body ; these were white on the basal half and jet black on the up-
per half: the face and under parts of the body were clothed with
sooty-black hairs : ears large, ovate, and ashy-gray : snout long and
projecting over the under jaw: eyes round, black, and of medium
size : tail short and obtuse, nearly naked : chin white.

Another, in all respects like the last, except that the quills on the
sides have pale brown tips. This may be the effect of age or sex, as
the specimen was a female.

These were found in separate boles beneath a thorny bush called
" Jhund," in the desert tracts of shifting sand between Sundah Ba«
dairah and HasiJpoor, on the left bank of the Garra, where they are
numerous.

A third specimen seems to be distinct : all the under parts except
the legs and tail are clothed with soft hair of a pure white, which passes
also in a broad band across the forehead ; immediately below this is a
band of blackish hue across the face, embracing the eyes ; and the
rest of the face to the nose is greyish : nose naked : eyes round and
black: ears large and ovate, ashy- grey: head rat-shaped: body and
sides above armed with quills which are of a dirty white, or very pale
shade of brown, for nearly two-thirds from the base ; then a dark brown
band, and the tips pale brown. This colouring gives the animal a
pale brown appearance. The legs and tail are sooty or blackish, as in

18. L, monticola would seem to be the most common species of the Himalaya, and
the Society has a specimen procured so low as near Moorshedabad, on the Hoogly.
It is readily known by the comparative harshness of its fur.~ Cur. As, Soc*

352 Rough Notes on the Zoology of Candahar, [No. 161.

the foregoing : claws of moderate length, sharp and whitish. This
specimen was smaller than the other two, and appeared to carry the
back more arched than they did. It was found in the neighbour,
hood of '* Shah Fareed/' on the left bank of the Oarrah. It is not
unlike the European Hedgehog.^^

The habits of all three were the same. They are nocturnal, and
during the day conceal themselves in holes or in the tufts of high
jungle grass. Their food consists of insects^ chiefly of a small beetle
which is abundant on the sandy tracts of Bhawulpore, and belongs to
the genus Blaps. They also feed on lizards and snails. When
touched, they have the habit of suddenly jerking up the back with
some force, so as to prick the fingers or mouth of the assailant^ and at
the same time emitting a blowing sound, not unlike the noise pro.
duced when blowing upon a flame with a pair of bellows. When
alarmed they have the power of rolling themselves up into a com.
plete ball, concealing the head and limbs as does the European
Hedgehog. On hearing any noise, it jerks the skin and quills of (he
neck completely over its head, leaving only the tip of the nose free,
which is turned quickly in every direction to ascertain the nature of
the approaching danger. If a foe in reality come nigh it, the head is
instantly doubled under the belly towards the tail, and the legs being
withdrawn at the same time, it presents nothing but a prickly ball
to its assailant, and which is in most cases a sufficient protection.
In this state it remains for some time perfectly motionless, until all
being quiet and the danger past, it ventures first slowly, and almost
imperceptibly, to exsert the nose, the nostrils working quickly as if to
ascertain that all is safe again. It then gradually uncoils until the
eyes are left free, and if satisfied that its foe has passed on, it opens op
and walks off with a quick but unsteady gait; or if again startled by
the slightest noise near it, it is instantly entrenched within its thorny
armour. They use the snout much in the same manner as the hog
does, turning up the leaves and grasses in search of food, and shoving
each other out of the way with it when angry. They make a grant-
ing sort of noise when irritated. They are remarkably tenacious of

19. The detcription of thU third specimen applies very well to other specimeDS, wiiic^
I have referred to E, eoUaris^ Gray .^C«r. As* Soc,

1845.3 Rough NoUs on the Zoology of Candahar, 353

life, bearing long abstinence with apparent ea8e,*-a provision of
oatnre highly useful and essential in the desert tracts they inhabit.
It is probable, too, that they remain during the cold season in a semi,
torpid state, as the species which occurs in Afghanistan hybernates.

M. B. — From the forehead proceeds a powerful muscle, passing
round the body along the medial line at the junction of the quills
and hair ; this enables the animal to protect itself in the following
manner :— the head being bent downwards to the belly, and the legs
tightly doubled under, the contraction of this muscle causes the edges
of the skin, where the quills and hairs unite, (which is along the sides^)
to be drawn together, by which means the limbs are shut in^ and en-
closed as if in a purse with sliding strings.

No. 19. Erinaeeug ^auriius, Pallas, (nee Oeoffroy), or a closely
allied species^. This species is common from Quetta to Candahar.
Length from tip of snout to base of tail about a foot ; tail an inch and
a half. Ears very large and rounded, cinereous ; face, inside of ears
and chin as far as the base of the ears, very pale cinereous, or nearly
white ; from thence all the under parts are sooty or rusty-black ; head,
limbs and under parts, clothed with soft hairs of a sooty black Qor
faliginous-brown]] ; feet darkest ; tail black, obtuse and nearly naked ;
toes five on all the feet ; claws whitish. Quills banded with dirty
straw colour and black. This is the description of an adult male
taken at Candahar. They feed on slugs, and helices with which the
fields at Candahar are overstocked; they also prey on worms, insects, and

20. The Siberian B. aurUus is described, in Pennant's Quadrupeds, to have the ** up-
per Jaw long and slender ; with very large open ears, naked, brown round the edges,
with soft whitish hairs within ; taU shorter than that of the European Hedgehog :
upper part of the body covered with slender brown spines, encompassed at the base, and
near the ends, with a ring of white : the belly and limbs clothed with a most elegant
toft whUefur** The statements here italicized do not apply to the great-eared
Afghan Hedgehog, the ears of which measure an inch and a quarter long posteriorly,
and seven-eighths of an inch broad ; their colour white : the dorsal spines are a little
grizzled at the surface, and radiate from the middle of the back, meeting those from
the sides, which are disposed irregularly as in the British Hedgehog.

The muzzle is rather short and broad : the dentition presenting three subequal
pre^molars above, anterior to the scissor-tooth ; the first being largest, and the third
Karcely inferior to the second, but having a basal inner lobe ; the small hindmost
molar is also well developed, and is placed much less obliquely than in the European
Hedgehog. Should it prove new, I propose that it be termed E, megalotis*

354 Rough Notes on the Zoology of Candahar, [No. 161.

lizards. They hide during the day in holes, and come oat in the
evening to feed. They retire to hybemate in deep holes in the earth
in the end of October or beginning of November, according to the sea-
son, and remain in a semi- torpid condition till February, when they

again appear.^^

(To be continued.)

On the Course of the River Nerhudda, By Lieut, ^Colonel Ouselbt, Agent
G, G, S. W, Frontier; with a coloured Map of the River from
Hoshungabad to Jubbulpoor*

The leading article of No. 151, of the Journal Asiatic Society for
1844, is headed "Note on the Navigation of the Piver Nerbudda/'
compiled from information afforded by a number of officers. The map
that is given with it» is part of the one that accompanied my report,
forwarded to Qovemment, (Lord Wm. Bentinck,) 13th June, 1834.

I find that I have not a copy of that report, and have requested Capt.
Spence, the Deputy Commissioner at Hoshungabad, to favor me with
one ; but from private memoranda, I am enabled to state that the ex-
pense would be too great to calculate on an uninterrupted navigation,
or admit of such water carriage as would be safe, and profitable. The
nature of the rocks, compact basalt, or granite, renders it almost impossi-
ble to employ the agency of gunpowder to clear away the obstructions,
it would be too slow a process for the extent to be undertaken. Again,
supposing the whole distance cleared, including all the greater obstacles
near Hindia, Mundhar, Dhardree, the Suhashurdhara Burkhery, He-
runphal, &c. the elevation of the country at Hoshungabad being about
14 or 150U feet above the sea, the rapidity and shallow body of the
current would consequently be totally inadequate for boats of any size ;
and would be followed by the continued cutting away of the earth, and

21. Hedgehogs are found in the very hottest parts of peninsular India, and I have
been assured, on good authority, of the existence of a species in the Bengal Soonder-
buns. Four species from this country have been named already ; but 1 have great
reason to suspect the existence of others, and recommend that all collectors should
preserve as many species of these animals, as they may be able to obtain.— Ctir. As>
Soc,

* See Proceedings for February, 1845.

1845.] On the Course <rfthe River Nerhudda, 865

a renewal of obstractions. For the river is too large to be retained for
any distance by banks or walls across it, so that if the inclination
should here and there be moderate, as from Norsingpoor to Hoshunga-
bad, Hoshungabad to Hindia, at Mandlaiser, &c., the descents would
be still more precipitous at other places, between hills and rocks
towering above one thousand feet on either side.

The country where these obstacles present themselves is mountainous,
so that canals could not be cut from any given point above, so as to lead
back into the river to a navigable part below, for the descent to the sea
is, as it were, in steps. The possibility of making the river navigable of
course exists, but the expense would be such as to prevent any attempt
being made by the Government ; nor do I think that the outlay could
ever be made good. At Hoshungabad, the river is from 700 to 900
yards (and even more) wide ; it often in the rains overflows its banks,
which are at that place from 50 to 70 feet in height. What command
could be hoped for, over such a body of water, running at the rate of
six or seven miles an hour, only, increasing in size as it flows to the
west, where the chief obstacles exist ; at Dhardree vast trees are preci-
pitated into the depths below, often coming up shattered into many
pieces.

The native Surveyor in speaking of the rocks, said they were iron- '
stone, alluding merely to their hardness. He mentioned the kindness of
the Bheels who attended his party along the river, in carrying some of
die sepoys and others taken ill, procuring supplies and game, but seem-
ed to think the river could not be rendered available for navigation.
His map was written in Nagree on a large scale, and from that I reduc-
ed it, and sent it in the rough, as I had not time from my other duties
to do it more carefully. The chief coal discoveries were subsequently
made in the tours of the Division that I undertook annually, and dis-
closed mineral resources that are unbounded.

The coal found at Bdnar, in my opinion, must be that used for rail-
way communication ; it cokes, as the Welch coal does when piled in heaps
of any length, about five or six feet in height, and nine or ten feet base,
forming an angle, covering it with dust, and allowing it to bum slow-
ly from end to end. The coal was tried on the Indus Steamer at Bom-
bay, 100 maunds did what 183 of the best Glasgow coal was required

356 On the Course of the River Nerbudda, [No. 161.

to perforin, heating one of the boilers of the steam engine fifteen
minutes sooner than the Scotch coal.

The iron found at the same place has already been proved to be of
the very best kind. The late Col. Presgrave constructed an iron sus-
pension bridge of similar iron (found at Tendoo Khera on the north
bank of the Nerbudda; at Saugor, which is at this present moment in
as good order as the day it was made, 10 or 15 years ago. Having such
coal, iron, and lime (whjich abounds), furnaces and founderies should
be erected at B^nar, rails made, and the whole of the material supplied
for the rail communication of India.

The produce of the richest country in India, the Nerbudda valley*
would then find its way into the market ; the wheats and white linseed
now so much admired, and justly appreciated, would be attainable every
where for seed, or consumption, and a country paying about 10 or 15
lakhs of land revenue (I do not include more than the Nerbudda
valley and Baitool) would give triple that amount without being felt. So
long as the present inefficient mode of carrying away the produce of an
extensive agricultural district remains in use, the value of the land
must be low ; but on the abandonment of Bunjarra bullock-carriage and
the adoption of rail lines, the prices of wheat, boot gram, linseed, &c.,
' would more than triple themselves. It often happens that wheat sells
for from 90 to 1 10 seers (90 Sicca weight) for a rupee ; gram, 1 10
to 1 20 seers ; linseed, 80 to 90 seers for one rupee ; all of which grains
are of the most superior description, and unequalled in Inctia. Cotton,
sugar, &C; are also produced, of the best description.

The part of the map I have now the pleasure to send, completes the
course of the River jfrom Jubulpoor to Hoshungabad ; I have added the
coal and iron sites, and trust that the information may be acceptable.

J. H. OlTSBLBT,

Agent Govr. GenL S. W. F.
2nd August, 1845.

idk^nwrita

367

A TwsLFTH Mbmoib ON THB Law OF Stobmb IN Inoia ; beifi^
the Storms of the Andaman Sea and Bay of Bengal, 9th to \Ath
November, 18*44. By Hbnbt Fiddinoton.

The present memoir will scarcely needi at least for readers in India,
any introduction ; for the intense interest excited by the wrecks, and
wonderfully providential escape of the troops and crew, of the True
Briton and Runnymede, must yet be fresh in their minds. For those
however in other countries who may honour it with a perusal, I may
say that on the 9th November 1844, the barque Dido was dismasted
in a hurricane in the Andaman sea, into which also the transport ships
Briton from New South Wales, and Runnymede from England, both
bound to Calcutta, the two together having in European troops and crews
nearly 700 souls on board, were then running ; and that being caught
in it they were partially dismasted, and finally at about one in the
morning of the 12th both ships were — wonderful to relate — thrown high
and dry on the shore of the small or inner Andamans, the provisions of
the one serving most opportunely for the support of the people of the
other, and the whole being well able, by the troops, to defend themselves
against the savages : They were taken off by assistance obtained from the
British settlements on the Tenasserim Coast. I refer to the Summary
at the conclusion for details, as to the highly instructive lesson in our
sdenoe to be drawn from those storms ; which in brief words amount
to this— that the lives of a whole European Regiment were perilled to
the utmost possible extent, short of destruction, by the ships not heav.
ing to for six hours I As far as loss of life can be weighed or counted,
the loss of a European Regiment in India would be equal to the loss of
an average, or a first.rate, battle !

Abridged Log of the Steamer Rotal Sovbbbion, Capt, Mabshajll,

from Penang to Calcutta.

On 9th Novetnber, 1844. — p.m. Light breeze SSE. and clear wea-
ther. 8 p.m. abreast of Seyer Island, altered course to North. Midnight
** fine steady breeze with drizzling rain."

lOth November. — a.m. At 1 breeze increasing; at 2 heavy gale
WNW. Ship hove to under balanced main-trysail. 4 a.m. gale in-

358 Twelfth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, QNo. 16 i.

creasing, ship hove on her beam ends, stowed the trysail ; 10 sqaally
with heavy rain ; 1 1 a.m. began to clear up. Noon, strong gale and
clear weather. Distance run from noon 9th, 138 miles. At noon
centre of St. Matthew's Island East i N., distant 20 miles, Lat Obs-
9^50' N.

PM. Stopped steaming for repairs; course having been always
NN W. At 2.30 heavy gale NN W. ; by 8, wind SSW. hard gale and
heavy squalls; all hands at the pumps. At midnight gale moderaU
ing, and the wind shifting to the SE. made all sail to get off the lee
shore, course NNW.

1 Uh Novefnber,^^2 a.m. Squally with heavy rain. 4 a.m. clearing
up, and fine breeze from the SE. noon Lat. Obs. IP 6' N. centre
of Clara Island EbN. ^ N. distant 28 miles. Distance run from noon
lOth to noon 11th, 58 miles.

Abridged Log of the Dutch Barque Pattbl Hair. Capt, ■

from Batavia bound to Calcutta, reduced to civil time.

yth November, 1844 — Lat noon &" 48' N., Long. 96'' 48^ £. p.m.
to midnight, light and variable winds from the NNE. and NE.

Sth November,^^AM» to noon^ the same; wind NNE. and with light
squalls. Noon Lat. 10'' 3' N. Long. 95'' 56' £. p.m. wind NbE.
squally. By 7 p-^« ship had stood 14^' to the EbN. and had then
the wind NW. with squalls^ increasing to midnight, up to which time
she stood 16' to the NNE.

9th November. — To 8 a.m. wind marked NW. and squally, 9
A.M. wind NNW. Noon increasing, preparing for bad weather.
Lat. 10" 50' N. Long, d^" 25'. Barometer marked as y still standing
at 29.6. P.M.* blowing fresh, increasing squalls and sea rising fast.
Wind WNW. At 2 wind shifted to 8W., kept away under the
main top-sail and ran to 6 p.m. about 32 miles." Sea rising fast At
6 pm. wind SSW. increasing to a heavy gale, hove to. At midnight
blowing furiously.

lOM November. ^kM. Increasing, boats blown and washed away.
Wind SE. and to noon the same ; *' wind coming round from East to
* From thii time tke Log is in the fona of a narrative.

1845.] Twe^ Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 359

doe North. Barometer as before, p.m. wind increaslDgy Barometer
beginning to fall at 1 o'clock." At 6 p.m. wind NNE. Barometer
down to 28.5. At 9h. Barometer beginning to rise fast, a heavy squall,
wind NW. At 9-30 gale beginning to moderate. Midnight, gale
had moderated considerably.

Uth Novemder.-^AM, Wind SW. coming gradually round to the
Southward, squalls continuing, but on the whole moderating. At 1 1
A.M. Barometer ** up to &ir again (about 30.00 in the usual Baro.-
meters), as usual." Noon, sea going down, Lat. 13** 6' N. *' N. B.
this gale went round from North to SW. 8E., East and North again
twice."* P.M. wind SSE. run from midnight to noon being 27 miles
North.

On the two following days wind moderate from the SSE.

Abridged Lop of the Schooner Clown. Capt. J. Talbetlt, from
Penang towards Calcutta, reduced to civil time.

Sth November, 1844. — 2 a.m. a heavy squall from the North, and
at noon squally appearances with winds variable from the North. Noon
Lat. account 9"* 5& N. Long. 96^ 26' £. f.m. winds N. Easterly and
Northerly with a heavy rising sea.

9th November.-r-Winda variable from the Northward and towards
noon veering to the Westward. Noon *' fresh gales with a tremendous
heavy sea," Lat. account lO"* 41' N. Long. 95"* 56' E. p.m. wind
westerly, hauling to the South with heavy sea throughout. 10 p.m.
hove to; when up West and off N W. Wind therefore about 8SW.

10^ November.'-A.M. increasing gale. 9 a.m. wind marked SSW.
Noon strong gales, no position given, p.m. Strong gales S Westerly
to midnight, wjien more moderate.t

11/A November, — a.m. Wind Southerly, daylight out all reefs and
fine. Noon, no position given. Wind S. Easterly ; a 6.knot breeze.
P.M. fine weather, wind S. Easterly 6 knots.

\2th November. — Daylight saw Narcondam, bearing NbW. Noon
Narcondam SWbS. 6 or 7 leagues. Winds SE. and ESE. 6 and 7
knots throughout.

* The paragraphs marked by commas, are literal extracts.

t Vessel drifting to the N. Eastward, and storm moving to the Westward ?

360 Twelfth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 161.

13th November. — Winds steady 8. Easterly throughout. Noon Lat.
account 15® 27' N., Long. 92** 37' E. Noon and p.m. squally with a
heavy eea, 6 to 8 knots.

14M Abt?.— S. Easterly breeze of 7 and 8 knots throughout. Noon
Lat. account 17'' 53' ,N., Long, gi"* 00' E. p.h. to midnight wind
N. Easterly.

15M Nov.--^\ A.M. Lat. by star Rigel 19" 12' Wind NNE. Noon
Lat. 19" 33', Long. 89^ 45' E.

Extract from the private Journal of Commander Vynbb, R. N, late
of H. M. S. ^QiAVy pauenger in the Brig Dido of Cahuiia^ from
the Straits of Malacca to the Sandheads.

6th November, 1844. — a.m. Fine weather^ light winds from the
Northward, p.m. towards midnight, fresh breezes and rainy.

7/A November.'^ a.m. More moderate ; noon, light winds from the
Northward and Eastward, sunset fresh breezes and hazy.
^ 8th November. — 2 a.m. Squalls, with strong breezes and drizzling
rain, which lasted throughout the day.

9th November. — a.m. Light breezes from the NNE.> jit 4 squally
dirty weather, barometer going down fast, commenced reducing sail ;
at 8 wind increasing furled the courses, and close, reefed the top. sails,
split the main top-sail in a squall, down royal yards ; 9 a heavy
squall, put before the wind, and unbent main top-sail ; it was now
blowing very hard, and a heavy turbulent sea running; at 9-20 the
mainmast went close under the hounds, and fell forward in an ob-
lique direction over the larboard bow, gale still increasing ; at 9-30 the
fore- topmast went by the board, and fell over the larboard bow. The
ship was now in so lumbered a state from the wreck, that it was dif-
ficult to move without being hurt by some or other of the geer fetch-
ing way. From 9 to 11 the hurricane was at its height, and blew
the whole time with unceasing violence : at 1 1 it suddenly fell calm,
and in about f of an hour the gale again commenced from SW. and
W. and blew as hard as before. Lat. at noon 11" 6' N., Long. 96^ 12'
E., at 1 P.M. the weather began to assume a better appearance ; but
the sea was running immensely high.

1845.] Twelfth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 361

The wind at 3 p.m. began to veer to the Southward, and blew
moderately. The Barometer did not fall below 29^ 30' during the
hurricane.

The wind from SB. continued until the 15th, when it ended in a
Tery heavy gale, drawing round to SW. the violence of which lasted
from 10 A.M. until 3-30 p.m. and here ended our disasters.

Arthur Vtnbr.

Abridged Log of the Brig Dioo, Capt, Saunders, from Penang to

Calcutta^ civil time.

The Dido left Penang on the 4th November, 1844, and had varia-
ble, baffling, light winds from the North and between NE. and NW.
80 that by the 7th, at 8 a.m. she had the great Seyer Island bear-
ing ENE., distance 24 miles, which would place her at the time in Lat.
8^ 30' N., Long. 97'' 23' E.

On the Sth November, — The same winds and weather a.m. At
noon, no observation ; p.m. light winds from NNE. to NW. with driz-
zling rain.

9M November.^Winds from NW., NNW., and at 8 a.m. North,
with very dirty appearance. At 9, hard gales^ obliging her to run
to the South, the wind not marked but, as by Commander Vyner's
note, NE. At 10, carried away mainmast head, and by noon when
Lat. by account is 11® 6' N., Long. 96® 12' E. nothing but foremast and
bowsprit standing. Shortly afterwards the wind is marked South.

lOth November, — a.m. hard gales South to SSE. noon gale still
keeping up and drawing to the SE. p.m. wind SE. 8 p.m. E.
terrific gales and increasing, ship labouring dangerously, losing boats
ice. &c., and in distress. No position given at noon ; 10 p.m. gale de-
creasing a little ; midnight wind SE.

UM November — Gale moderating, wind SE. throughout, no obser-
vation. Clearing the wreck.

\2th November. — a.m. moderate SE. breezes, at noon Lat. 13® 39'
N. wind marked S. Easterly throughout.

\Sth November.'^Wmd marked SE. throughout, light breezes and

fine. Noon Narcondam SbW. 30*, Lat. 14® 04'.

^62 Twelfth Memoir on tite Law of Storms in India. [No. 161.

14/A November, — Wind SE.> 5 and 6-knot breeze throughoat.
Noon Lat. 15^ 07 ; p.m. squally and heavy rain.

15/A November. — a.m. ivind SE. fresh breezes with heavy rain
and cross confused sea. 8 a.m. to noon, wind marked South to SSW.
and SW« 8 fresh gale and dirty weather. 1 to 8 p.m. wind marked
West to NW. and West ; at 8 gale increasing ; hove to at 4 p.m.;
8 P.M. wind failing light, and sea with it ; at midnight fine.

\6th November. — Wind marked W. 4. a.m., when NW. weather
marked fine ; noon Lat. 17° 50' N. from which to midnight 19M calms ;
noon 19/A Lat. 18'' 58', Long. 89'' 50' E.

Extract /rom the Log and Chart of the Ship Briton, Capt. Hall,
from Sydney to Calcutta^ with Troops on board, reduced to dvU
time.

Capt. Hall having favoured me both with his log-book and chart,
I note here the position laid down upon the chart, as presenting a
summary view of her track into the storm^ and her drift in it accord-
ing to Capt. Hall's estimate at the time.

Lat. N. Long. E.
8th November S'' 26' . . 96** 55'

9th „ Noon,

„ f, O p. M.

lOth „

nth

9° 10' . . 96« 30'

9M3' .. 96*12'

IP 00' .. 95M2'

IP 33' .. 94° 55'

I2th „ Would have been in, 12* 04' . . 93° 56'

On the 8th November.^The Briton was at noon in Lat. 8? 25' N.
Long. 96"^ 55' E. or about abreast of the Seyer Islands, with very light
baffling winds from the N* Eastward: and cloudy weather, which
to midnight freshened gradually to a 4.knot breeze. Wind at 1 f.m.
marked North, and for the rest of the Log, ** variable from SW. to
NW.

9th November. — 1 a.m. course is marked WbN. to noon> the wind
being from the NbW. ; at 3-30, strong breezes. At noon, light and
fine, Lat. Obs. 9° 10' N., Long* 96° 30' E. p.m. wind freshening fast
from SW. and becoming SSW. at midnight, an 8-knot breese;
run 83' NWbN. from noon. At 6 p.m. dark gloomy weather,

1846.] Twelfth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, 363

and Simpiesoroeter 29.30. At midnight strong gale and squally, mak-
ing preparations for bad weather.

10/A November.^4 a.m. Simpiesometer 29.20. To 6 a.m. ran 38'
NWbN. when '' blowing terrifically with awful squalls/' hove to
with head to the NNW. 9 a.m. gale still increasing, took in the
main top-sail and lashed a tarpaulin in the mizen rigging; 9-30 a.m.
top-masts blown over the side, and all the sails from the yards.
Simpiesometer fell from 4 a.m. when at 29.20, to 28.10. At noon
gale lulled off with showers of rain, and dark gloomy weather. Lat.
by account IT V N., Long. 95"* 12^ E. Simpiesometer not rising.
PM. ship lying to with head to the WN. Westward, the gale hav-
ing again come on from the SW. at 0.30 p.m., and blowing with
more violence than ever. 2 p.m. terrific hurricane, boats blown to
pieces. In the log, wind marked *' variable from NE. to £SE.,"
at 1 1 p.m. head *' up North off N.W." Midnight hurricane still
increasing.

IIM November,'^ A.M. Head as before to noon, the same. wind from
1-30 A.M. P.M. terrific hurricane. 2 p.m. saw a Barque about \ of
a mile to the Eastward with only her lower main and mizen masU
standing.*

At 10 P.M. hurricane lulled off with an awful swell, and dark
gloomy weather. Simpiesometer at 27.2. At 10-30 p.m. wind veered
round to the NE. blowing with more violence than before, and start,
ing the front of the poop. Throughout this sea log (from noon) ship is
marked ''Heading from SE. to North," and ''Wind blowing all
round the compass."

Fearful of the poop being blown away altogether, took the chrono-
meters, sextants, charts, dec. below. Midnight hurricane still blowing
terrifically.

I2M November Ih. 15m. a.m. struck, and at daylight the ship

ivas found high and dry in a mangrove swamp; the Runny mede being
close to them. Their Lat. was 12"" 2' N., Long. OS*" 12' 40" East.
They were taken from the Islands by ships sent from Moulmein.

After the ship was on shore the remainder of the gale was from
ENE., at which point it fell to fine weather. Capt. Hall estimates the
rise of the sea, (the storm wave) on the shore as at least thirty feet t
He, farther, does not estimate the ship's apparent average, drift (such

* This was the Runnymede'

364 TwelftJi Memoir an the Law of Storms in India. [No. 161.

as aeamen usually allow for in a gale) at more than four miles per
hour, having once hove the log to ascertain it.

Abstraels of the hog and Chart of the Ship Runnyhbdb, Captain
DovTTY,/rom England to Calcutta, with Troops on board y reduc-
ed to civil time.

As vtrith the Briton's Log, I have thought it also hest here to set
down the Latitudes and Longitudes from the chart at first.

Lat. N. Long. E.

Jth November 8** 36' . . 96» 6 1'

Sth „ 9''32' .. 96*35'

9ih „ 9** 52' .. 96*27'

10th „ 11* 6' .. 96* 0'

Friday, Hth November, -^UeKvy squalls with unsettled weather
nearly through the whole 24 hours ; winds variable N£. and N. Wes-
terly ; Lat^ noon 9* 32' N., 96* 35' E. At 7 a*m. more moderate, son
obscure.

^StUurday, 9th November. -^Winds variable, at 5-30 wind NNW.
squally, in 2nd reefs of the toi)sails ; at 9-30 a.m. wind backing to the
Westward, tacked to the Northward. Noon, sun obscure, Lat 9* 52'
N., Long. 96* 27' £• wind WSW. strong breeze ; rainy and squally ;
P.M. increasing, making preparations for bad weather.

Sunday, lOM November. — Barometer falling, strong gale WSW.
with heavy squalls; at 5 a.m. in courses and close- reefed the topsails.
At 6 A.M. wind SW. blowing very heavily, in fore topsail and brought
ship to the wind under close reefed main topsail and main trysail.

Noon no observation, Lat. by account 11* 6' N., Long. 96* 0' E.
Hurricane of wind. Bar. 29.00, and falling. At 1 p.m., ship under main
trysail only. At 1.30 p.m. the fore and main top-gallant masta were
blown away. Wind South blowing very severely, the main trysail
blown to atoms, ship under bare poles, and laying beautifully to the
wind> with helm amidships and perfectly tight. The hurricane accom-
panied with a deluge of rain. At 4 p.m. wind SE. blowing terrifi-
cally, hatches all fastened down, starboard quarter boat washed away.
At 6-30 P.M. nearly calm, wind backing to the SW. Sea went down.
Bar. 28.45, kept ship away NbE. and got the top sails re- secured,
portions of them having blown adrift. At 8 p.m. Wind SW. hollow

1840. J Twelfth Memoir ofi the Law of Storms in India. 365

gusts; brought ship to wind on larboard tack. At 8-15 harricane as
heavy as before. At 8-30 the larboard quarter boat was torn from
the davits and blown across the poop, carrying away the binnacle, and
crashing the hen-coops on its passage. At 9 r.ii . wind if possible in-
creasing, the foremast broke into three pieces carrying away with it
the jiboom, main and mizen top-masts, starboard cathead, and main
yard, the main and mizen masts alone standing. At 10 p.m. the wind
and rain so severe that the men could not hold on the poop, bail.
iDg the water from between decks which is forced down the hatches,
bat the ship is quite tight, and proving herself to be a fine sea boat.
The pumps attended to, drawing out the water forced down hatches,
mast coats, and top-sides forwards.

Monday, llth Novefnber.^^UximcB.ne equally severe ; wind SE.
Bar. 28.0; the gusts so terrific mixed with drift and rain, that no
one could stand on deck ; advantage was therefore taken of the lulls to
drain the ship out and clear the wreck. The starboard bower anchor
banging only by the shank painter and the stock (iron) \yorking into
the ship's side, the chain was unshackled and the anchor cut away.
Noon Lat. account 1 T 6' N., Long. 95'' 20' £. No observations since
the 7th. Bar. apparently rose a little. Hurricane equally severe in the
gusts, the ship perfectly unmanageable from her crippled state, but
riding like a sea bird over a confused sea running apparently from
every point of the compass. A large Barque with loss of top- masts
and main yard drifted ahead of us, and a Brig was seen to leeward
totally dismasted. At 4 p.m. Bar. fell to 27*70, and Cummin's mine-
ral Simpiesometer left the index tube. Hurricane blowing terrifically,
the front of the poop to leeward, cabin door and sky-lights torn away,
and expecting every moment the poop to be torn off her. The severity
of the wind is beyond description, there is nothing to compare it to, for,
unless present, no one could conceive the destructive ponser and tveight
of wind crushing every thing before it as if it were a metallic body.*
At 1 P.M. no abatement, every one, sailor and soldier, doing all in their
power to keep the ship free of water, could not stand at the pumps ; the
water being principally in the *tween decks it was bailed out by the
soldiers as much as possible.

Tuesday, I2th November.^-^Midnighi, hurricane equally severe, the

* This 18 a very remarkable passage, which I have put in italics, as conveying an ex-
cellent idea of what the force of these terrific hurricanes is.

366 Twelfth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, [[No. 16 L

gufltfl most awful^ and rudder gone. At 1-30 a.m. felt the ship strike,
and considered the destruction of our lives, as well as ship, sealed ; but
it pleased Almighty God to decree otherwise, for although the ship fill-
ed up to the lower beams with water, she was thrown so high on the
reef that the water became smooth, and the bilge pieces keeping her
upright, she lay comparatively quiet. Not knowing our position, the
ship being bilged, and fearful of her beating over the reef into deep
water let go the larboard bower anchor and found the water leaving
her. All hands fell asleep.

Day-breaky hurricane breaking, much rain, wind ESE. Bar. rising
rapidly until it stood at 29.45 ; we then, thank God, saw the loom of
the shore to leeward, the ship being nearly dry abaft ; on its clearing
away we saw inside of us, up among the trees, a large barqae with
troops on board ; one officer and twelve men were sent over the stern
to communicate with her. At 7 A.M.the tide now rising, orders were
given for the men to land at next low water, and if possible to get
something cooked, as no fires could be kept in during the hurricane
the crew and troops merely having biscuit and a glass of spirits dur-
ing the time it lasted. 3-30 p.m. the tide having fallen sufficiently
to wade on shore, ensign Dabernt returned on board, and stated the
vessel in shore of us to be the " Briton,^* from Sydney, with three
hundred and eleven men, thirty-four women, and fifty-one children,
of H. M. 80th Regt. under the command of Major Bunbury, with a
crew of thirty-six men, bound for Calcutta, and short of every thing.

N. B — Captain Doutty informs me that the Thermometer at the
lowest of the Barometer was at 84°, and that he considers the average
drift of the vessel not to have exceeded three miles per hour. On shore
nearly all the trees had fallen to the S. Westward, shewing that there
the gale had been about NE. at its greatest height.

Ships Blundbll and Afpolline. Between 9th and \8th

November.

The Blundell was between the parallels of 2^ and 12® North, and
the meridians of 90"* 32' and 92<> East, with nothing but calms and
light airs.

Between the 9th and 19M.— The Appolline was in from Lat. 4? 48*
to Lat. 15*" r with light winds and fine weather. On the 12th only

J845.3 Twelfth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 367

in Lat. S"" 21' N. the Bar. fell from 29.2 to 29.00. Long, on that day
not obtained.

Abeiraei translated from Log of the French Ship La Pbtitb Nano7>
Captain Dufoubo, from Bot/irdeaux to Calcutta, reduced to civil

time*

On the 10/A November, 1844.— La Petite Nane^ was in Lat. ff 2'
N.; Long, by Chro. East of Paris 89'' 52' or of Greenwich 92« J2' Bar.
F. 2800 or 29^5 English* Wind West, course NNE. 4' per hour;
•light squalls and rain at times, p.m. fine^ a slight swell from the
North ; at 9 p.m. wind SW. to SSW. to midnight.

Wth November .-^A.M, cloudy, and a swell from NE. and to noon
variable winds SSW. to West and fine; ship running 7 to 9 knots to the
NbW. At noon a heavy squall Lat. 9'' 53' N., Long. P. 89° 49' 6»
9^ 09' Bar. F. 27.10 or 28.29 £. p.m. to midnight run 77' to the
NNWrd. ; winds West to SW. squally, and wind rising and falling
(brise inhale et variable J at 6 sharp lightning with thunder; mid*
night finer weather and atrong head sea.

12/A November.^A.M, to noon run 66 miles to NbW. and NNW.
Wind WSW. to SSW. heavy sea. 9 a,m» heavy squall ; noon Lat.
12<' 254', Long. 88* 55' P. or 91'» 15' E. Gr., Bar. 27-8 P. or 29.64 E*
wind SSW. p.m. cloudy, wind WNW. to WSW. to 8 p.m. and SW.
to SSW. to midnight, p.m. ship's run 41' North a little Easterly ; at
midnight finer weather, carrying a top. mast studding sail.

\3th November.^A.M. to nodn run 102' to the NNW. Winds
from WSW. to SSW. 9 am. heavy squalls and head sea ; noon Lat.
account 14*» 25^' Long. 88^ 8i' P. 90'' 28^' G. Bar, 27-8 P. ; 29.63 E.
P.M. Run 107i' North a little Westerly. Winds SSW. to SW. and
at midnight South. 9 p.m. sharp lightning, high irregular sea.

14/A November.^A,u. to noon, made 104^', North to NNW. up to 10
A.M. when she broached to ; winds to 4 a.m. South to SW,, from 4 to
8 SSW. to South ; 8 to 12 South, SSE. and a shift to SW. From 5 a.m.
blowing heavily, preparing for bad weather. 10 a.m. Bar. 27.6. F.
2941 E. ; at 4 past 10 wind shiftedf to SW. heavy gale and sea, ship

* i give the French Longitudes and Bar. heights with the reductions, to avoid over-
sights. The correction used is -|-2^ 20' to bring the Long, to the ine):idian of Green-
wich, and for the proportional scales of the Bars. 1000 E. : 1066 Fr.

t The word is sauU* which is our ** shifted."

368 Tw$lfih Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 161.

broached to» (the rudder head it was found afterwards had split) and
was laid on her beam-ends, mainsail main top-sail, boats, &c.^ blown
or being swept away, the sea being up to the hatchways. At 10-45
hurricane increasing, and vessel always on her beam-ends, cut away
the mizen-mast. Bar. falling to 26.7 F. 28.46 E. At 11 am. cut
away top.masts> when the ship righted a little ; Bar. having been
at 10 A.M. 276 F. 29.41 E. ; at lOh. 40m. 27.00 F. 28.78 E.; and
at lOh. 50m. 26.7 F. 2846 E. (a fall of nearly an inch in two hours!
and this note is from Captain Dufourg's private memorandum), Lat.
by account at noon was lb"* 47' N., Long. 88"* 12' P. W 32^ 6. At 3
P.M. the wind shifted in a heavy gust with torrents of rain to the SE.
with the same violence,* and being then to starboard, righted the vessel
completely; but she did not lie over to port, which confirmed the
opinion of the Captain and officers that the cargo had shifted.

At half- past 3 the wind suddenly fell, but the Barometer always
remaining at 26.7 F. (28.46 E.) a renewal of the storm was expected.
At 5 P.M. the hurricane began again more violent than before, from the
SW. and continued till 9 fm. the ship always heeling to starboard.
From 9 p.m. it was moderating.

Ibth November, — p.m. Weather moderating fast; at day-light saT-
ing and clearing the wreck, Lat. noon by account 16^ 40' N. Long. P*
88** 37' E., G. 90.57 E. ; Bar. 27-00 F. 28.78 E. p.m. moderating to
light airs SW. and S. and heavy sea continuing.

16/A Not'^md^r. —Daylight calm with a heavy sea, saving and clear-
ing wreck. Noon Lat. Obs. 17^ 00' N., Long. Obs. 88* 49' E. P.
Ol"* 09' E. Bar. 27.8 F. 29.63 E. to midnight calm.

\^th November. — Calms which continued to 5 a.m. on the 19th
November. Noon Lat. Obs. 17° e' N. Lon. Obs. 88** 58' F. 9P 18* G.
P.M. Bar. 28.00 E. or 29.85 E.

The ship made no water, and arrived safely at the Pilot station on
the 25th. November.

I now give a tabular view of the positions of the ships on different
days beginning with the 9th, as on the 8th we may say that there wss
no bad weather, the Clown having it only a little squally, all the others
with light baffling winds and slight squalls from the North.

* The ship having drifted to the N£. and the hurricane passed on to the WNWest-
ward.

ISiS."} Ttoelfth Memoir on the Law of Siormi in India.

n % 1 ^1

r- 11* :i| ^»
:li m =11 if

ill

ail

a.
5

: J|:

■■ p

i : : : :

S S S sSZE;
% S 9! »»!£

• a

S 5 » S3S
2 5= "*»

: :

Mi It te \l

.. J.

■■ ■ 2 •

a 2

L
f

r 1 '. ■

f £ ? 4 i

lU 1 1 It

1 1

370 I\eelftk Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [No. 161.

k s • • •

e
06

M
GO

•5

«■§

• mm

a
.a

'is

^ " <

Mm*

» •

a C CI »«

a> o

•

»r

a
«0

• mm

• •
Off*

0(0

a
o

^Ift

•
•

6 P.M

28.

•
•

^§

ff«

•

2 s

.2 *•'

"^ • (*
_± >

— o
u

d
d
o
o

-o
d

o
jd

a
»■

hi
M

a
ed

tf)

2^ g

i-c =

.25
g.2P

<o'C

b: -5

COXiA

O •

a ^00

• «4 CU P

•S.2
^5

««bc^.o

< « o «

■ 2 he

CO I •

■o •

ja a

HZ 5

GO .M

a Gk 0

a * -r

a> ^ ffi
a S 2

■>^
&*|

CO 0:5

— 0>

« .a

• OS

a
. .5

a GO

I ^

4) a B

o
Oil O.

• mm

«
«

a
a
0

• • •

►; en

'S S 0*

• a.y

n4 go

o
o

.0
GO

>
_ o

d
o 2

81°

I s

a .ti

d a*

d 01

1845.] Twe^th Memoir tm the Law of Storms in India. 87 1

a
§

•

•
•

•

••«

CO
GO

e •

-a •

J, •

M •

a •

3 :

^-.t

W g

o
^

•

« M

« 8

■5 2

t3 S

•o

S *•

CO 3

CIS •
"I CO

cdGQ

si^

.5--^:

§^

§S

« .

•

-3 :

•
•

04 0.

>»^

«k

• o

'3
X

teame
reign

1 GO

•

§2;

S5-

372 Tweifih Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, [No. 161.

Summary.

I have already remarked that on the 8th of Novembei^ the weather
was fine for all the ships, none of which were to the North of Lat. 10^,
and we find on the 9th that the Dido was dismasted about the centre
of the hurricane, at 11 a.m. on that day^ and by noon the calm centre
had passed her, and she was again in a hurricane at SW. This vessel's
position therefore, and we have it most accurately fixed, (having for-
tunately in Commander Vyner, R. N. who was passenger on board of
her, an independent observer, who would make every allowance in his
notes for what might escape the Captain and officers,) gives us the place
of the centre of the storm on that day as being a little to the N. West
of her. The storm circle at this time must have been of extremely small
extent, for it had but just reached the Clown, which vessel was
only twenty miles distant from the Dido, which would make the circle
less than 40 miles in diameter; but the Clown had the usual warning
of a rapidly veering wind, and a tremendous heavy sea, and the tornado,
for so we might almost call it for its size, was fortunately moving ra-
pidly on, so that by her heaving to at night with the SSW. gale she
fortunately escaped running into the worst part of the tempest. I have
thus given the circle for this day a diameter of sixty miles only, which
will just include the Clown, The hurricane for this day indeed re-
markably resembles that of the Cashmere Merchant, described in my
Second Memoir, Journal Asiatic Society, Vol. IX, p. 433, which also
occurred near the Preparis, and some of those which (see Tenth Memoir,
Journal Asiatic Society, Vol. XIII, page 1 13,) also arise off the coast
of Ceylon. For the centre of the storm circle on the 10th, we have
the estimated position of the Briton, which ship after running up 121
miles to the NWbN. the exact course upon which she should have
OBASEBthe hurricane if she had meant to do so, found herself obliged,
at 6 A.M. to heave to close to the centre, into which she had drifted
at noon ; having sunk her Simpiesometer from 29.20 at 4 a.m. to 28.30
at 6, her estimated position at noon being 11° 1' N. 95"* I2'E. and the
lull occurring just at this time. The Runny mede, which vessel had also
been tempted by the treacherous fair wind, and run up 80 miles to the
NWbN. though with a falling Barometer, was about fifty miles to the

1846.3 Twelfth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 373

Eastward of her> and had it also blowing a hurricane from about Souths
judging from the log abstract, in which it is made to be SW. at 1. a.m. or
after midnight up to Noon, and South at 2h. 3Qf p.m. The Dido whose
exact position this day I could not obtain^ has a hurricane at S£. being
in the NE. quadrant. The hurricane had thus no doubt extended on
this day from a circle of 60 miles to one of 130, and apparently was
still doing so, for the Faiiel Hair, farther to the Eastward than
the Runnymede, seems to have ran up skirting the SE. quadrant of
the storm and to have had the true storm wind at SW. when it
" shifted at 2 p.m." to that point. The Royal Sovereign, close in with
the land, appears to have also had a separate small storm veering
with her in a few hours^ but not of any very great consequence^ or at
all connected with the Briton's and Runnymede's ; though, as I
shall subsequently shew^ it may probably have been so with the
remarkable double veering of the Fattel Hair's winds. On the
11th we have the above two ships always lying to and drift-
iDg> as well as they could estimate in the hurricane, to the points
marked on the charts^ which are about forty miles NNW. and
SSE. of each other, but there is no doubt that the ships saw
each other at 2 p.m. on this day ; the Runnymede also saw a brig,
bat this was not the Dido, which vessel had her foremast standing,
and was not at this time in the heart of the hurricane.* We shall
also find that the two ships Briton and Runnymede struck just after
midnight of the llth.l2th, (or between 1 and 2 in the morning
of the 12th) so that they must have been now much farther to the
Eastward than they supposed themselves. We have no fixed positions
of any other ships also from which to guide us as to the extent of the
hurricane circle on this day, and in short our only datum is that both
ships having the wind to the Eastward, t. e. the Briton between NE.
and ESE. and the Runnymede about SE., both must have finally
drifted over to the Northern quadrants of the hurricane, though al-
ways close to its centre.

We must then therefore consider that (throwing away the odd hour
or two after midnight of the llth.l2th) the hurricane travelled, and
carried the ships with it from the place of our centre on the 10th, to

* Probably one of th€ native coasting craft which run across the Bay to the ports of
the Straits.

374 Twelfth Memoir on tlie Law of Storms in India. [No. 161.

near that at which the ships were wrecked on the inner Andamans as
marked ; which is a distance of aboat 140 miles in 36 hoars> or from
noon of 10th to midnight 11th- 12th, and we can only estimate this
also on a direct line. Hence by noon of the 1 1 th then, or in 24 hours,
it would then have travelled two-thirds of this distance^ at which
point I have placed its centre for the lith, which the reader will
observe is wholly irrespective of the supposed positions of the ships as
marked on their charts. I have made a dotted line to shew what may
have been their drift, if we have^ as I presume, approached the true
place of the centre of the storm at noon on the 11th.

The Pe(Ue Nancy, which on this day was opposite to the opening
between the Little Andaman and Nicobars, appears, though at 150
miles from the centre, as we have laid it down, to have felt some of
the effects of the storm^for we observe that with a N£. sea and squally
weather, her Barometer had fallen nearly an inch ! (0.96) in the 24
hours from the 10th. And that she had the rising and falling wind
which I have so often pointed out as indicating the approach or vicinity
of a storm. 1 defer the consideration of the storm which dismasted her
to its proper place in the order of time. Between 1 and 2 a.m. on the
12th9 the Runnymede and Briton were both thrown high and dry
on shore on the inner Andamans, by a gale between ENE. and East;
and Captain Doutty of the Runnymede informs me that most of the
trees had fallen to the S. Westward, showing clearly that the centre
of the Hurricane had passed to the South of this spot. The storm
wave I shall presently consider ; but return now to the Royal Sovereign
on the opposite Coast.

We find that within a short distance of the Islands fronting the coast,

on the 10th November, the Royal Sovereign had at 2 a.m. a heavy

gale at WNW. when the vessel was hove to, and at 4 a.m. she was

on her beam ends. At 1 1 it began to clear up, and noon was but a

^strong gale and clear weather.

Now from 2 a m. to noon are 10 hours, and in this time a Steamer
in such weather, when hove to, might drift at least fifteen or twenty
miles to leeward, though keeping to with her steam; and the wind
being to the Northward of West she might drift out of the edge of the
storm circle, or as she seems afterwards to have steamed on to the NN W.
have again ran into the vortex on its western side if it was one;

1845.^ T^oe^ Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. 875

so that the gale was renewed with her at NNW. veering, as she was
close to the centre,* hy 8 p.m. to SSW. and moderating at midnight
of this day, when she was aboot in Lat. ]0^ ^O' N. and at noon on the
11th it was fine.

We see, first, by the chart that on the 9th, the Sovereign was only
abreast of the Seyers in 8^ 80' N., and on the 10th the whole of
the ships, except the FaUel Hair, were at nearly two degrees distant
from her; the Runnytnede, the nearest of them, being at 110 miles
off, and both the Runnymede and the Briton close to the centre of
l^> storms, with which therefore the Royal Sovereign's has no sort of
connection ; for if it had, it mast have been a steady gale from WSW.

It was then an independent (and perhaps an imperfectly formed)
?ortex, and we have now to see whether it had any connection with
the double veering of the Fattel Hair's storm.

This vessel, we have seen, hove to at 6 p.m. on the 9th, being then
about in Lat. 11'' 20' N., Long. 96^ 87' E.t with a gale at SSW., and
this, by the way, proves that up to that time the centre of the principal,
or great storm, had really travelled about West, as we formerly de-
duced. The storm was also probably expanding at this time.

The FaiUl Hairy gradually drifted up with the SSW. gale and sea,
80 as at 1 A.M. or in 7 hours, when her drift might have been about
twenty-five miles North, to have the wind SE. and at noon on the
lOtb the wind was *' coming round from East to due North !" with her
90 that, as she could not be now near the centre of the principal {Briton
Dido and Runnymede's Hurricane,) she had been overtaken by
another one, or another one had formed with her, for we can easily
conceive how a S. Easterly gale may by the effect of a new vortex
come round, as is here described. Her position on this day at
noon is not given, but I take it to have been — as she must have drifted
to the NW. West, and even WSW. with the winds given—about Lat.
12" 03' N. Long. 96^ 19' E. and as she had the wind North or Nor-
therly at noon, she was moreover now to the Westward of the centre

* Or it may be that it was only just /ormin^, and interrupted on one side by the
neighbouring land ? The log extract sent me is not very clearly detailed.

t This is deduced from her Latitude and Longitude at Noon, and her ** keeping
away (which 1 take to have been about NNB.) 32 miles," before she hove to.

S76 Twelfth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, [No. 161.

of this new vortex, which seems I think to be evidently one thrown
off from the great one, of which the centre as we have placed it for this
day was now at ninety miles to the S W. of the FcUtel Hair, and we
cannot be very far wrong in her position or in its place also. If she had
had any part of the great storm^ she must have had a steady gale from
the S. Eastward.

This is an instance then of a smaller and less intense vortex follow-
ing, or being thrown off from^ a Urge one, and it was certainly much
smaller, for we find that with the wind North at Noon on the lOtb,
the Fattel Hair had it at a little past midnight at SW. or it had veer.
ed 12 points in, say, 18 hours, and was then moderating. I have
thus marked it as a small circle, only to shew its independence of the
main storm. I need not add that it had no connection with the
Royal Sovereign's storms.

We have no farther data for tracing this storm within the IslaDds,
and we have now to consider if t/ could have been the storm which
dismasted the Petite Nancy.

I think decidedly not. We see that, presuming that it was travel-
ling on from the 10th, and not breaking up of itself there, it must,
to have reached the Petite Nancy, on the 1 1 th first, have run faster
than the Fattel Hair, which it did, since it left her with the winds
from SW. at midnight lOth-llth, to SSE. at noon of the 11th, and
then have overtaken the Dido again with another storm, from NE. or
N W. striking her with its Western quadrants. The Dido had her second
storm only on the \5ih from the SE. and SW. so that she was skirting
the Eastern edge of a storm already to the Westward of her. All
this makes it probable that the Petite Nancy*s storm was rather,
if not a separate storm also, the Briton and Runnymed^s, which
must have been upon the Great Andaman, on the 12th, and pro-
bably between that day, and the Nth, forced its way over the
mountain chains of that island, and travelled up or re-formed itself
in the Bay."" The winds which the Petite Nancy had on the 13th
when she was at 90 miles only from the body of the Great An-
daman, and but a little to the Northward of the wrecked ships, were

^ For an example of a storm forcing its way over high land and re-forming ag>ini
see Journal, Vol. XII. Eighth Memoir.

1845.] Twelfth Memoir on ike Law ^ Storme in India. 877

from the WSW. to SSW. and fine enough to allow her to carry a top.
mast stadding sail at midnight, while, had any effect of the storm been
felt by her at this time, it mast have been in Northerly or N. Westerly
winds. On the 13th she had the winds from WSW. to 8SW. and
finally at midnight Soath, with sharp lightning at 9 p.m. and irregu«
Itr sea, with a falling barometer aboot this time, showing that she was
now jost running into the vortex.

Her hurricane appears to have been of small extent, or to have been
moving rapidly to the WNW. for it lasted with her not more than
from 5 AM. to about 10 p.ir., or 17 hours, during five of whieh, from
5 to 10 A.M. when she broached to, she was running into, and with it,
and we have no data for tracing it any farther. The circumstance
of its being followed by so many days of dead calm is very remark-
able, and has not hitherto occurred in any of the storms which we have
traced in the Bay of Bengal. We must now go back to the Runny*
mede and Briton to trace from their logs and positions so far as we can
do so the effect of the storm wave.

We find that on the 18th, when the ships, though then in the bur.
ricane, had not been so long enough to make their positions very uncer-
tain they were at 70 miles distance, and about East and West of each
other. Taking the mean of this to be an average position, and the two
ships as one, since they were both cast on shore at the same place, they
will then be at this time,-*-noon of the 10th,^in Lat. 11^ 4! N. Long.
95" 3^; and the spot on which they were wrecked bearing from
them about WNW. 160 miles, which represents their drift made good,
from noon of the 10th to about Ih. 30m. a.m. on the 12th, or in 374
hours.

Now Capt. Hall of the Briton estimates his drift at not more than
four miles per hour, and Capt. Doutty of the Runnymede his at three
miles. Their mean drift (as we have taken the mean positions)
would then be 3^ miles per hour, whieh for the 37^ hours gives a
distance of 130 miles, and leaves only 20 miles to be accounted for as
the effect of the storm wave, which is therefore quite trifling.

Its rise on the shore, which must have been immense to throw the
ships so high, has already been noted. It would appear that all ships
when blown over so far as to lay with their lee gunwales in the water

)|5

378 Twelfth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India. [^No. .t

drift much more rapidly to leeward than is sapposed, and seamed
these extreme cases would do well to make large allowances, w]
will at least place them on their guard.*

The fact that in so narrow a sea as that between the Andamana i|
the JVIergui Coasts which is only five degrees, or 300 miles across firl
Islands to Islands, a true rotatory storm of such terrific violence «
yet of such small extent may arise, is also new and most insti
tive, and it is equally remarkable to find it making about the avertl
track from £S£. to WNW. and travelling at about the average nk
of the slow classes of our hurricanes in the Bay. It would ha«
been of high interest to have ascertained if the storm was formed i|
the China sea, and crossed over the Peninsula, which . is here onlf
sixty miles broad, and so low that there is almost a water ooinmunica«
tion,t or if any signs of its formation were noted on shore ; bat unfor«!
tunately the British territory terminates at the mouth of the Pak«
Chan river^ in Lat. lO'' CO' North, and the first European residents oa
the coast are to be found only at Mergui, two and a half degrees to the
North of that point.

Conclusion.

If we had endeavoured to invent the most instructive lesson wq.
could have devised for shewing the truth and utility of the Law of
Storms, we could scarcely have imagined one better calculated for that
purpose than this. The reader has only first to satisfy himself that
the two storm circles of the 9th and 10th must have been, nearly what
they appear in the chart, and then to follow with his eye the tracks of
the Petite Nancy y Runnymede and Briton, noticing what is said at

* As to the average rate of motion and track of the storm, we have its centre weU
marked at noon on the 9th, from which to midnij^htof the llth-12th are 48 houiv, and
the distance from the centre of the 9th to the place of the wrecks, is about 184 miles - or
not quite 4 miles per hour, on a course of, from point to point, N. IV West It however
travelled from the 9th to the 10th not more than 60 miles, and thus did not make three
miles per hour on that day.

t It has been roughly surveyed by Capt Tremenheere, B.B. who found the greatest
elevation to be about 450 feet; Journal Asiatic Society, Vol.'XlI, p. 530.

1845.] Twelfth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, 379

pp. 363 and 364 of their falling Barometers and increasing bad weather,
to be clearly satisfied that this was clearly a case in which the last two
ships in a narrow sea, with a hurricane crossing their track, and in the
face of every indication ran headlong into it ; being tempted no doubt
by the fair Westerly and S. Westerly winds, heaving or broaching to
only when they could run no longer. Both commanders, indeed, when I
had, by means of the transparent horn cards in my little publication,
'' The Horn Book of Storms,*' shewn them upon their own charts that
they did so, fully agreed with me that had they better understood
their position between the 9th and 10th they should not have run on as
they did^ but have hove to.

Now when we recollect what the value of the two wrecked ships
with two-thirds of a European regiment on board mi^ht have been in
India, had they been totally lost in time of war, — ^if there is any money
value to be set on human life-~it is impossible I think to rate too
highly the lesson it conveys, severe as it must have been to the
sufferers.

And finally when we bear in mind that this same predicament may
yet occur to a whole fleet, either in the East or the West Indies,* or
in any part of the world, and that a defeat from the elements may
be as disastrous as one from the enemy, and by the failure of suc-
cours^ involve even farther losses, I shall not I trust be thought over-
earnest when I urge again on every man the intense importance of this
science to Englishmen, above all other nations of the globe ; and this
storm is also in another light an undoubted proof of it ; occurring as
it has done in a sea where such hurricanes were before unknown !

• It did occur in the West Indies to the fleet under Admiral Rowley, and to that
und«r the Spanish Admiral, Solano, in 1788. See Col. iieid't Work, 2nd Edition.

380

Some account of the Hill Tribes in the interior of the Distriei of
Chitlagong^ in a letter to the Secretary oj the Asiatic Society. By
the Rev. M. Barbb, Missionary,

Mt dbak Sir,— >DariDg my late trip to Ghittagong I took advan-
tage of the favoarable state of the weather to visit the Hill tribes of that
district, as a few months before I was amoogst the Kookies I visited
ID my last trip the Budzoo tribe. Having in my account of the Roo-
kies described the banks of Chittagong river, I will not repeat here
what has been mentioned before* I stopped one night at Raogaoia,
which is about 25 miles from Chittagong ; and when there, I engsg*
ed the services of my old guide ; this man had been of great use to me
when I visited the Kookies. Having spent part of his life amongst
the hill tribes, he is well acquainted with their habits ; and I think that
a person who is not a Government officer accompanied by him, might
go with security to any of their villages. This Burman is a sportsman
by profession, and consequently he can give correct information res-
pecting the different species of animals which are found on those hills ;
but the characteristic custom of his nation being not to contradict
persons whom they consider superior to them, when any question is
put, the answer is not to be anticipated, because in every circumstance
he will approve of it ; so the only way to get the truth is to let him
answer by himself, deducting of course something on account of exag-
gerations to which they are very much inclined. On the evening of
my departure from Rangunia, I reached the east part of Sitacra hill,
which is at two tides from Chittagong, and slept in a small village
situated on the top of a hill, elevated from three to four hundred feet
above the level of the river. The house in which I took up my abode
belonged to an Arracanese who, having spent some years at Rangoon,
spoke Burmese passably. The entrance to the house, which was ele-
vated nine feet from the ground, was a spacious uncovered verandah ; the
building had several rooms : the hill being very steep on one side, the
house was raised about fifteen feet on that side, and supported only by
bamboos of small size. The old man received me with great kindness.
He had with him eight children, one only being married. He said he was
very anxious to see all his boys established ; but as it was the cos-
tom to expend about 100 rupees for a bride, his means did not alloir

1846.] Hill Tribes in the Chitiagang Distriei. 381

him to marry tbem. Seeing the respect paid to the venerable old
man and to his consort, reminded me of the life of the patriarchs.

On the morning we had a storm and heavy rain till 8 o'clock, so I
could not begin the ascent of Sitacra hill before 10 o'clock ; at that
time the thermometer was 82**. Ascending the bill I was scorched
by the rays of the sun, bat the effect of the elevation was marked on
the temperature ; when I reached the top of the hill it was past 1 1
o*clock* I had the pleasure to enjoy a refreshing breeze ; and at 12
o'clock, the thermometer was only 78^ Sitacra is one of the highest
hills of the chain, which extends from the east to the north*east ; its eie-
▼ation is from twelve to fifteen hundred feet above the level of the
river, and it a£Ebrda the most magnificent sight I have ever witnessed.
The view was extensive and charming — the sea to the S.W. ; to the
W., Chittagong and Sitacoond \ to the N. W. the Ranee house, situated
in a vast plain covered with water ; Chittagong river flowing in serpen-
tine lines, and to the E. and N. £. a succession of peaks more or less
elevated, clothed with vegetation, and appearing to draw closer to*
gether as they disappeared. The horizon was an immense circle ;
and although the scenery was diversified, a single place could not
be 9e&k stripped of vegetation ; the most elevated spots were covered
with shrubs, the hills have been crowned with Jarool and Toon trees, but
they have been cut down by the different tribes, when they have
cleared the ground ; all those places have been cultivated, with the ex-
ception of the narrow valleys which lie between the ridges of the hills.
The humidity occasioned by five or six months of rain produces a ve-
getation full of vigour ; from the edge of the water to the top of the
highest hill, the flourishing aspect of nature is a proof of the fertility
of the land. Few of those hills are without springs. The air appears
to be very good.

People living on those hills appear to be healthy and strong.
I saw some persons above 70 years old ; and I was told that there
W2M a woman whose age was 100 years. Last year many persons
died of cholera. This disease was unknown to them fifteen years ago.
Fever is the general complaint. I admired the idea of the Kookies,
who believe that the greatest happiness of man after his death,
coDsists in being placed on the summit of the highest hill to enjoy
the pleasure of seeing the beauties of nature* The existence of a

382 Bill Tribes in ike CkUtagang District. [No. 161.

Sapreme Being who is to give a spiritual reward being above their
conception, how can they imagine a greater happiness than the view
of the most beaatiful scenery ?

Following the edge of the hill to the S« E., I passed through a
village situated on the top of another hill, about 200 feet lower than
Sitacra, whose inhabitants were Arracanese. I saw some Oolock and
other monkeys on a high jungly jack tree, whose fruits are smaller
than the common jack ; they are good to eat, but have an acid taste :
this tree grows very large ; the wood is of a beautiful yellow color ; the
Burmese use it in building their boats.

When I reached the banks of the river it was four o'clock, the
thermometer being at that time 88^ ; there I met several persons, who
were waiting for me to get medicine : they begged of me to go to their
village; but as it was too much out of my way, I declined their invi-
tation* Some of them wished to accompany me ; but as I knew that
they were busy in sowing their crops, I would not accept their offer.
These Arracanese are very hospitable, kind, and disinterested ; I have
been several times in their villages. They have accompanied me
in my excursions, and I could never prevail on them to accept any re*
ward for their trouble, nor for the different articles furnished during
my stay amongst them. On the following morning I started from my
boat, and crossed a plain for one hour in a southerly direction following
a small path, and crossing several times a small stream and then as-
cended a hill elevated from three to four hundred feet above the level
of the river, following the edge of that hill in an easterly direction. I
saw at the distance of tl|ree or four miles the Bunzoo houses, situated
on top of another hill called the Diamond mine ; on another hill thirty
or forty persons were busy in sowing paddy and cotton. It is the
custom that all the people of the same village join in assisting one
another for that purpose. When I reached the village it was past
10 o'clock, and the sun at that time began to be very powerful ; the
houses nearest to the creek were inhabited by Arracanese. The Bun-
zoo dwellings were on the summit of the hill ; and hearing that no Bun-
zoo was at home, I went to the house of an Arracanese whose wife was
from Tippera ; she dressed like the Burmese women do^ spoke a little
of that language, and her features so much resembled those of the Bur-
mese, that I took her for one of that nation. She offered me some

1845.] Hill Tribes in the ChiUagong District. 883

fraity and a bottle of liqaor distilled from rice ; some time after, the
house was filled with women and children : being the first Eu-
ropean they had ever seen, their curiosity did not surprise me. In
the evening the men came from their work, and the most respectable
Bunzoo of the village asked me to take up my abode in his house.
Hia dwelling beiog in a higher situation, I accepted with pleasure his
c^er ; the house was elevated three or four feet from the ground, being
twenty feet broad and eighty or ninety feet long, without any partition ;
to one side was a small room which he offered me. At the entrance of
the house the heads of hogs, deer, and other animals killed in his hunt-
ing excarsions were kept ; a large fire-place was in the centre of the
dwelling. Conical baskets, earthenware, and mats were all the furniture.
The principal post of the house is considered by them sacred, and the
head of the family is the only person who can touch it ; should any other
person do the same he becomes the slave of the master of the house.
This Banzoo was fifty-six years old, he stood five feet ten inches, and
was well built ; his hair was long, and tied after the fashion of the Bur-
mese ; he had projecting cheek bones, flat visage, scanty beard, and was
of dark yellow complexion ; his dress was a piece of cloth, one foot
broad, round his loins. His wife and daughters were of middle size, but
very stout ; they had the Burmese dress, but the cloth was red and
black ; their breast was covered with another piece of cloth of the
same color, one cubit broad and four feet long. His family consisted of
four boys and three girls ; he had two children from eight to ten years
old, with black eyes, small lips, and displaying great intelligence. The
other Bunzoos which I saw were not so taU as the men before men-
tioned, and the average is, I believe, from five feet two inches, to
six inches. The women are, generally speaking, much stouter than
the men. This tribe appeared to be grave and silent ; this is remark-
able in children, they shew no petulance, and partake of the character
of their parents ; six or seven of them were with me a part of the even-
ing, and to my great surprise they paid as much attention to the
conversation, as if the subject had been adapted to their intelligence.
I ^ was particularly struck with their civility, no one took a thing offer-
ed to him without previously saluting by joining his hands towards
the person who gave, and the same ceremony was repeated by the do-
nor: men, women, and children do. the. same; when spirits is offered,

384 HiU Tribes in the ChiUagong District. [No. 161.

the women dip their finger in the liquor, and then salnte as before

stated.

The Banxoo food consists of rice, fruit, roots, vegetables, young leaves
of trees, blochein, (which is prepared by the Mugs of RaDguoia of
shrimps salted and pounded,) and deer, hogs, fowls and goats. The
BuDzoos admit the existence of a Supreme Being whom they do not
worship, the reason being that " they have never heard aboat him nor
seen him ;" but it is not the same with the devil, whom they consider as
the cause of all eviK— -to him they attribute their diseases, the failure of
their crops, &o., and to gain his favour they offer him pigs, goats,
fowlsi &c. ; they believe in a place of torment, but what are the
offences that deserve such punishment they don't Isnow; they think
that the greatest part of the dead come again into the world to
animate other bodies, and persons who have been fortunate enough
to secure the head of many wild animals are entitled to be re-
warded in their future life: this is the reason for which they keep
with the greatest care the heads of animals slain by them. The
Kookies burn the dead, the Bonzoos do not They hollow a piece
of wood, deposit the dead in it, and bury it in the summit of some
hill, putting in the same grave the heads of animals killed by them,
spears, cloth, and money belonging to the deceased. On the Tenasse-
rim coast the Kareans burn the dead, and keep one of the bones
of the head for one year, and after feasting for some days, they
take it with all the articles belonging to the deceased, on a hill
where all articles are deposited which belonged to persons of the
same caste. The Bunzoos never marry to persons of another tribe,
and a wedding never takes place without spending much money. The
father and mother of the yotfbg man apply for the bride, which is
never promised unless she give her consent ; should the young man be
without parents the head of the village is to ask the bride's hand» the
relations of the lady ask then a sum of money, from one hundred to
one hundred and fifty rupees ; if the young man has that money he pays
it immediately ; but if he has not, the bride's relations agree to receive
it by instalments. The day of marriage being fixed, a feast is given to
the relations and friends, and the young woman is taken by them to
the house of the bridegroom, and without any further ceremony, the
maid becomes wife. They have but one wife, and if she leaves her

2846.] Hili Tribes m tke Chiiiagong Disiriet. 385

lord's boose without a just cause, -her rdations are obliged to give back
the moaey received, but should the httsband send her away he has no
more claim. Should the Bunxoo, in his warlike excursions, capture
any young women he generally sells them, but if he cannot he has
them under his keeping without being conndered his wives ; their con-
sorts are generally well treated, but they are far from paying them the
same attention as the civilised people do. One of them asked me in
the most serious manner if it was true, '^ that Europeans worshipped
thetff wires.'* The chain of hills which separates Chittagong and the
Tippera district from the Birman Empire is inhabited by a number of
tribes diflbring little in appearance, but partly in habits and language ;
but the features of tlKMe tribes, particularly the flatness of the occipital
bone, resemble the Burmese so much that I am not far from believing
they \uLre a common origin, and if the Buncoes are not so strongly built,
and so weli made as the Burmese, it might be in consequence of their
mode of living, which, as it has been observed l^ Cuvier, in few gene*
rations wiil deteriorate the physical character of the highest races of man-
kind. The Koekies appear to be the most numerous of all tribes $ to the
N. fi. of Cblttagieng, not far frmn Coioian which is a branch of the Chit*
tagong river is one of their kings, who rules over six or seven thousand
houaes ; he has en his bill ponies^oows, Ike How Car be takes advantage
of his authority, 1 have not been able to ascertain. The Bunsoo tribe
i8 chiefly centered towards the S. £. ; having no annals of their own it
is impossible to trace their origin, and to warrant an opinion on the
flobjeet, requiies more information than 1 could get According to them,
formerly they were more poweHul and numerous than they are now.
The Rookies taking advantage of their number, subjected them to their
yi4e. Their language appears very poor, they have no word to express
the days of the week, but borrow them from the Burmese. Their dialect
contains many Rookie and Burmese words. They compute their years
as the Rookies do by the number of their crops. Persons who build tbeo*
ries on the analogies of language, will find at the end of this letter a
mall Toeabulary which will assist them. The Bonzoos distil from rice
a fermented liquor, the drinking of which seems to afford them great
luxury. They pour into a cup the spirit ; which goes round the com-
fNiny, every person, not excepting the women and children, taking a
draught, and they never separate till the liquor is finished ; but how fat

3 H

386 Sill Tribes in the ChiUagong Disirid. CNo. 161.

drankenness prevails^ or if they are addicted to iDtoxication, is more
than I can tell. The Arracanese who live on the hills pay from three
to foar rupees of land-tax a year, but the Rookies and Bunzoo are rent-
free ; and should they be compelled to pay, being a wandering tribe free
as birds, they would immediately leave their residence, and retire to
the interior of mountains where no person could molest them. They are
certainly the most independent people that can be seen : a no- made life
is for them the greatest happiness, and, as children of nature, their wants
are few ; and these wants they can supply in any place. They venture on
hunting excursions when their agricultural labors are finished ; spears and
bows are their principal arms, and their dogs are always their faithM
companions. Their exertions and agricultural labors are directed only
to the growth of articles necessary for their subsistence, as paddy, yanu^
plantains, melons, tobacco, cotton, &c. They manufacture their own
cloth, and exchange the cotton they do not require for salt, earthenware^
Ike. They plant a species of indigo growing about two feet high, the
leaves which are large are employed to dye their clothes, which is done
in the following way : — Taking a certain quantity of leaves, they put then
in an earthenware vessel ; when the water boils they dip in it the thread,
mixing with it an extract of an astringent bark ; they dry then the
thread, and they repeat twice again* the same process. The jungle
affords them roots of trees or shrubs to dye green, yellow, &c. : salt is
the only thing which they procure with some difficulty, but the hills
contain several springs of salt water ; two of those are found at Sitacoond,
tfnd there is another one in a creek on the opposite side of Sitacra.
The greatest part of salt used by people living on the banks of the river
was manufactured formerly there, and the spring is so impregnated with
salt that it gives in weight half the quantity of the salted water ; some
of the tribes by burning trees procure an alkali, which supplies the use
of salt.

The Guayal, Bos frontalis, is found amongst the hills, particularly to
the south of Sitacra : there are two ispecies, differing in size and little in
color ; the large one is of dark brown, and the male is nearly as high a>
a female elephant ; the small one is of a reddish brown, it is the Tenas-
serim Bison, and the Arracanese call them by the same name as the
Burmese do. Those Guayals are perfectly distinct from the Shio of the
Rookies, which are smaller, have a projecting skin to their neck, and

1845.] Hill Tribes in the ChiUagtmg Ditirici. 387

differ also by the form and direction of the horns. Three species of
wild dogs are found on those hills : the first species is known by the
BurmeBe by the name Oobe^looe, and by the Bunzoos lzenia$ this dog
has pendant ears, from five or six inches long, mazzle from eight to
ten inches, straight bushy tail fifteen inches long, length of the body
three feet six incbesi height from the ground two feet six inches ; they
are seen going alone or in pairs, and they never feed on animals killed the
day before. The second species is called Mungui ; they have the ears
semi-pendant, going in packs from four to five ; their color is white bay
or spotted. The third species is Tokooi^ they are small with straight
ears, and go in packs from fifteen to twenty. The description of these
dogs was given to me by my guide, and it was confirmed by the
Bunzoos ; I have no doubt of its being correct

Returning from the Bunzoo villages, instead of following the same
road by which I went there, I followed the course of a small stream
protected from the rays of the sun by bamboos and other trees ; another
reason which made me choose this way was, that I had been informed
that limestone was found in that creek ; till now rocks of that nature
are unknown at Chittagong, lime used in the district is carried from
Sylhet, and purchased at the rate of thirty-five to forty rupees the hun*
dred maunds.

It took me about three hours to get to Chittagong river ; both banks
of the creek were bordered either by rocks or by hills of various heights,
presenting steep sides covered in some places with shrubs, the spring
was not considerable, the water was fresh and clear as crystal ; in some
places the stream rolled gently down, and in others the water
descended with impetuosity, forming basins of different dimensions
according to the size of the defile : the place where the rock was men*
tioned is about a mile from the large river, it is from thirty to twenty-
fi7e feet high, and in a large cavity is deposited stalagmite, so I have
very little doubt that the rock is a limestone; but as I expect a
specimen of it, all doubts will be removed on the subject. At some
distance from that rock was a bank of black clay, which the Burmese

doctor recommends as a medicine to women who are in the family-way

to strengthen them. I took some with me, the clay was then very soft,
, bat the next day it was as hard as a brick.

388

HiU Tribes in the ChUiagimg Disinet [No. 161.

This it, my dear Sir, all the information I could get about the Bobzoo
tribe ; had I remained longer amongst them, as I intended to do^ this
people would have given me other details which are desideratum in
this imperfect sketch of their manners and customs, but my guide hav-
ing taken ill with fever, I thought it was useless to prolong my stay
amongst them, being imperfectly acquainted with the corrupted Bur-
mese language spoken in the district.

y. Barbb.

CaieuUa, \5ih Jufy, 1845.

MnffHsh,

Bunzoo,

Kookies.

God,

Devil,

Worship,

Person,

Man,

Woman,

Children,

Son,

Daughter,

Maiden,

Husband,

Wife,

Head,

Forehead,

Hair,

Eyes,

Nose,

Ear,

Lips,

Teeth,

Beard,

Neck,

Lookar,

Ngion mse.

Krec,

Khasin.

Mai-moo-roon,

Maimeck*

Mreiur,

Meiaur.

Mepa,

Mepa.

Loo-now,

Noonoo.

Now-pow,

Mepanow,

Kemenow,

Loogua,

Ar.

Noo-pa,

Kamadoon,

Loo,

Loo.

Mare,

Ssom,

Ssam.

Mhe,

Mut,

Nhar,

Naar.

Na,

Na.

Mekka,

Noor.

Ah,

jneKKamoor,
Rhin,

King.

1845.]

Hill Tribei in the Ckitlagong DiMtriet

389

BnsfUth.

Bufufoo.

Kookies.

Breast,

Atok,

Fsan.

Amii

Keeb-an,

Hand,

Coot,

Finger,

Nail,

Cootmetee,

Coot.

Belly.

Madeer,

Madil.

Thigh,

Racoot,

Eil.

I^»

Pai-ma-rai.

Foot,

Pai,

Phai.

Earopean,

Lhen,

Mengeaco.

BUDZOO^

Bom.

Khookies,

Panguai,

Langet.

Shiamda.

Koosak,

BarmaD,

Ouksah,

Arracanese,

Mareim.

Hoase^

Cur,

Teug.

Boof,

Corchun,

Thatch with grass,

Phar,

Bamboo,

Rhooar,

Kooe.

Hatan,

Kotoi,

Posts,

Jortoom,

Door,

Makott,

Window,

Wham kott,

Dog,

Woee,

Hooee.

Cow,

Fswepai,

Bufialo,

Fseloi,

Gnyal,

Tsar,

Ditto Kooka,

Haesha,

Shio.

Rg.

Wai.

Wet

Bird.

Wha,

Peacock,

Oohdong,

Snake,

Marooi,

Hill,

Ramoor,

Toung.

Tree,

Teiu,

Thinn.

Ditto leaves,

Teiana,

Flower,

Par,

Paar.

390

BiU Tribes in the CkUtagang Distrust. [No. 161.

Snglith.

Bunzoo*

Kookies,

G^rase,

Bair,

Good,

Hatsar,

Bad,

HatB-aloo,

HeaveDy

Van,

Hell,

Hatsoopatee,

Black,

Neekna,

White,

Pooahklan,

Red,

Pooahtsin,

Green,

Pooahrin,

yeUow,

Pooahapaal,

Water,

Tooe,

Tooe.

Paddy,

Ta-am,

Tsan.

Rice,

Tsaksai,

Thathin.

Ditto boiled,

Boo,

Boo.

Oil,

Rersee,

Brandy,

Arahoni,

Sick,

Hatchong,

Fever,

Damloo,

Vomit,

Mailoo,

Evacuate,

Sun-yate,

Fool,

Maremklob,

Cool,

•

Atakdye,

Knife (table,)

Tsenzoon,

Tsar.

Fire,

Men,

Silver,

Tongkha,

Gold,

Guoon,

Gnoon.

Copper,

Dhar,

Necklace,

Maieee,

Sbal.

Bracelet,

Arkhoil,

Ilandkerchief,

Beaar,

Governor,

Kophoo,

Bengalee,

Koar,

Lowoon.

Death,

Meetec,

River,

Whaa,

Boo.

Firelock,

Tflelei,

Thali.

Powder,

Tseleitsec,

Talaitse.

1845.]

Bill Tribes in the Chittagmg Disiriei.

391

BngHsh.

Bunzoo,

Kookies.

Shot,

Tseleimoo,

Bottle,

Pelan,

Year,

KooDDnee,

Month,

Tsakkar,

Day.

Neekar,

Night,

Zytye,

One,

Kakar,

Keaka.

Two^

Penakar,

Panlka.

Throe,

Toomkar,

Toomka

Fonr,

Leckar,

Ta.

Five,

Raignakar,

Nga.

Six,

Rhookar,

Koo.

Seven,

Sreckar,

Sree.

Eight,

Raikar,

Rae.

Nine,

Rhooakar,

Ko.

Ten,

Tswurkar,

Sunka.

Eleven,

Tswinlakakar,

Twelve,

Tswinlanekar,

Twenty,

Roobookar,

One hundred,

Raizaaker,

Rasa.

One thousand,

Tsankar,

Sunka.

Man's dress,

Ram,

Woman's dress,

Kyer,

J OURNAL

or THB

ASIATIC SOCIETY. .

Notes on the Religion of the Sikhs, being a Notice of their Prayers,
Holidays, and Shrines, By Major R. Leech, G.B., Political Agent,
N, W. F. From the Political Secretariat of the Government of India,

The works of " Guroo Sobha" and " Bichitar Natak" have been con-
sulted, and extracts made.

It will appear extraordinary that the Sikhs, who are forbid to worship
at a Hindoo M^dar, should frequent Hindoo places of pilgrimage ; but
such is the case. Sikh pilgrims to the Ganges at Hurdwar have for
many years past been increasing, and nothing is more probable than the
Sikhs gradually re-adopting many more Hindoo observances.

Govind Singh prophesied that the Sikh's Derahs, or Shrines, would
amount to 56,00,00,000.

Prayers.

The Sikh Japjee, composed by Guroo Nanak, answers to the Hindoo
Gaitree repeated in the morning.

The Sikh Japjee, composed by Guroo Govind Singh, answers to the
Hindoo Bisan Sahansar, (a morning prayer).

The Sikh Sukhmanee, composed by Guroo Nanak, answers to the
Hindoo Geeta, (a morning prayer after ablution).

The Sikh Rouras, composed by Guroos Nanak and Govind, answers
to the Hindoo Sandhija Tarpan, (a sunset prayer).

No. 162. No. 78, Nbw Seriks. 3 i

394 Notes on the Religion of the SiMis. [No. 162.

The sixteen Arthees* composed by Ouroo Nanak, are repeated the
last thing before going to sleep, and it is the lock on the tongue ; the
key being next morning's Japjee.

The Sikh women repeat " Asd kee wfir/' (composed by Ouroo Na-
nak,) by which they are absolved from again being bom in the likeness
of woman.

Holidays.

The Daserah, the Suddee, 10th of the month Asoo, the commencement
of the Hindoo military year, the opening of the season for the military
operations.

fiasakee, the spring festival on the Ist of Besak.

The anniversary of Guroo Nanak's death on the Wuddee, 5tili of Asoo,
(called Our-parb).

The anniversary of Ouroo Govind Singh's departure on the Buddee,
5th of Besak.

The Dewalee ; a feast of lamps, the last day of the Buddee, half of the
month Katick.

Maghee ; the last day of the Buddee, half of the month Magh.

Basant Paunchmee ; the Buddee, 5th of the month Magh.

The Hola, (Holee) ; the last day of Phagan.

Shrines^ 0/ the Ut Guroo, (NanahJ

1. Nankane-a-Derah, the village of his maternal grandfather, where
he played as a child, 30 kos from Lahore.

2. Derah (par excellenoe,) on the river Ravee, his birth-place. (He ia
said to have been bom ready dressed in green.)

3. Sultanpoor, where he kept a shop for his brother-in-law. The
weights used by him are worshipped.

4. Nanak Malak, an impression of his hand on the leaves of a Pee-
pul tree ; the leaves are brought away as relics, and the tree is worship-
ped. There is now a flourishing village.

5. Panjah Sahah ; the impression of his hand on a rock that he pre-
vented falling on him at Hasan Abdal.

Of the 2nd Padshah, (King) Angad.
1. Khadoor Derah ; the place of his death, near Taran Tton.

1843.] Notes on the Religion of the Sihhs. 395

0/ the Zrd Gureo, (Amardae.)
Gondwal Deimh ; a well of 101 steps to descend, on each of which the
Japjee is repeated. He also dkd at this town. Theie are two Grunths
at the spot whence he departed.

Of the Ath Guroo, (RamdasO

Sree Amritsar, (the Nectar tank) ; was brought into notice by him,
though the Sikhs deny that it is modem. It was first called by him
" Ramdas dee puree." There are five Teeruths.

1. Amratsaijee ; in the centre of which is the Darbar Sahab's building.
containing the Oninth in Ouroo Nanak's own hand- writing. It was
built by Runjeet Sin^, or rather superbly repured. The steps of
this building are looked upon as the Hurdwar ones. The rank Sikhs
of the present day therefore do not go to the Ghmges Hurdwar, and
even speak lightly of that sacred stream as the " bone-devouring."

2. Koulsar, (the Lotus tank) ; people wash their feet here before pre-
suming to bathe in the holy of holies.

3. Babegsar ; round which the Nahangs reside, and bathe in it before
going to the Amratsar.

4. Mukatsar ; from batMng constantly in faith, in which exemption
from further birth in the flesh is obtained.

5. Ramsar; the tank in which Hindoos and others, not Sikhs, bathe
before going into the water of Amratsar.

On the brink of the tank opposite Darbar Sahab's Darsanee entrance
is the Akal Bangah, and two jfaandahs or standards, (rather giant spears
covered with gold, and having a khinkab cover.)

The golak (collections 1 j- rupee from each convert,) of Ouroo Oovind
Singh, is deposited in the Akal Bangah. Chiefs sometimes pay 1 j- hun-
dred rupees on the Pahul being administered there to a child.

The Deewalee festival is the season for performing pilgrimage to
Amratsar. Pilgrims also assemble in Basakee, Dassera, Horee and
Niaghee. These five festivals are called the five Dhams or Tihars.

Of the 5th Guroo, (ArjanJ

1 . Lahore ; his residence for many years.

2. Derah-Kartarpoor.

3. Taran and T&ran ; two shrines, five or six kos apart ; the latter
being the place of his death.

396 NoUs an ike Religion tyihe Sikhs. [No. 162.

Lepers are cured by bathing in faith in the tank. A great number
of lepers reside round the tank, and two or three are cured every year.
If any one on going there fears to approach or touch these lepers, he
becomes himself a leper. Many of them are rich, and trade ; no cus-
toms or duties are levied on their goods.

0/ the 6th Guroo, (Har GovindJ
Sree Govindpura ; his Derah, the place of his death.

0/ the 7th Guroo, (Har Roe.)

1. Keertpur ; his Derah, the place of his death, and abo of his Mahal
(wife). The tank in which he washed his feet is called, by the Sikhs,
Charan Koulsar.

2. Bangah, in the Singpooria state ; at Keertpur is the Derah of Baba
Gurditta.

Of the 8M Guroo, (Har KrisenJ

1. Delhi ; the place of his death, (by small-pox.)

0/ the 9th Guroo, (Tegh Bahadur J

1. Dehra, at Anandpoor ; where his head was burnt on being brought
by his Rangretas from Delhi.

2. Saifabad, in the Pateala territory ; where the Raja has lately built a

fort.

3. At Delhi, called Bangala ; where he was killed.

4. Ditto ; where his body was burnt. There is also at Delhi a shrine
of Mata Sundaree, and another called Rakabganj.

5. At Benares.

0/the lOth Guroo, (Govind.J

1 . Anandpoor ; where there are seven Jhandas and Dehras.

1 . Guroo Tegh Bahadur.

2. Kesgurh ; where he converted five Sikhs, or rather initiated them
and made them initiate him, and let their hair (kes) grow.

3. Mata Jeeto; the wife (Mahal) of Guroo Govind : she died here.

4. Damdama ; the breathing-place, where he took breath and turned
on his Musalman pursuers.

5. Holgurh ; where he played the Holee.

iB45.] Naie$ on the Religum of ike Sikh$. 897

-6. Agampura ; from a vision revelatioQ to Mata Jeeto there.
7. Manjee Sahat ; the cot on which she sat to receive saluta*
tion8«

There is a melah or collection of pilgrims in the Holee.

2. Dehra of Ouroo Oovind at Bangah.

3. Jandpoor ; where he halted in his flight from Anandpoor.

4. Macheewara; where his Musalman friends, Nubee and Ohunee
Khans, saved his life, by disguising him.

5. Naknour ; five kos from Ambalah, where he fled from Macheewara.

6. Muktsar, in Malwah ; where he bathed and promised exemption
from transmigraticm to all his followers who did the like in faith.

7. Damdama ; where he again took breath, and blest the place as
learning-inspiring, calling it his Benares, where the greatest dunces
should become scholars.

At the present day the best writers of the Ourmukhee character are
at Damdama, which belongs to the Shaheed family.

8. Kapal Mochan, near Belaspoor. This is a great place of Hindoo
pilgrimage.

9. Nanheree, near Ambalah.

10. Pa'unte Sahat, across the Ganges.
1 h Patna ; where he was bom.

12. Abjal Nagar; where he died, (in the Deccan). There is a melah
on the Buddee, 5th of Besak.

There is a Derah of Jeet Sing and Jazar Singh at Chamkour, where
these sons of Guroo Govind were killed by the Musalmans.

The Derah of his two other sons, Fatteh Singh and Zorawar, is at
Sarhind, where they were built alive into a wall by the Musalmans.

Sarhind is called by the Sikhs, Fattehgurh ; from Fatteh Singh being
killed there. They also call it Phit moonhe (spit in the face,) and some-
times Ujar shahr, " the desolate city."

The Derah of Mata Guzaree is near that of her Shahzada, grandsons ;
she fell down dead at the sight of the living wall. There is a melah
during the Holee.

There is a shrine or Derah of Baba Sahat Singh, at Ambalah, who
was a Bedee Sikh ; who is called by some the 1 1th Guroo, and is said
to have caused the elevation of Ranjeet Singh by his blessing, and by
giving him his sword : he died eleven or twelve years ago, from grief at

398 Notes an ike Beiigum 4^ ike SikKs. [No. 162.

the death of his son, Baba Tegh Singh, which took place at his len-
deuce at Unnah.

At Daoon, there is the shrine of Baba Jwahar Singh Sodee.

At Oadgunga, there is the shrine of Uhadah Singh Sodee.

At Oadwal is the shrine of Ouroo Ram Race, where he died.

The offerings of these shrines are taken by the people who read the
Orunth there, and offer prayers f<Hr the donors.

Noiea, principally Geological, across the Peninsula of Southern In-
dia from Kistapatam, Lot, 14^ 17' at the Embouchure of the
Coileyroo River, on the Eastern Coast, to Honaroer, Lot. 14** 16'
on the Western Coast, comprising a visit to the Falls o/Gairsuppa.
By Captain Nbwbold> FM,S», M. N, /. Assistant Commissioner
Kurnool, Madras Territory.

Kistapatam. Kistapatam is the port of Nellore, from which it lies
about 15 miles S. E. It is situated on the Goromandel Coast a short
distance from the sea, and at little more than two miles North of the
mouth of the Coileyroo or Condaleyroo nver, in vbout Lat. 14^ 17'. N.
It stands at the edge of a low sandy flat which, though now dry and
exposed, appears during the monsoon to be overflowed by the river
freshes, and probably once formed a back-water or lagoon com-
municating with the sea to theN. near Toolypaiiamy and with the em-
bouchure of the river near uiotfaer Toolypaliam to the South. Sea salt
is here manufactured. The physical aspect of the adjacent country is
that of a flat, sandy, maritime plain, broken near the sea by an irregn*
lar line, following the indentations of the Coast, of low dunes of fine
sand, by which the travellers' bungalow on the S. bank of the riTcr
IS surrounded. The sand a little N. of this abounds in granules oi
magnetic iron, some of which appear to be titaniferous. The under-
stratum of the sand observed here, and in some wells a few miles to
the South of the river proved to be greenish or bluish Mack clay, or
tertiary clay of Goromandel, with pelagic shells similar to that under-
lying Madras, Pondicherry, and the alluvial plain of Masulipatam.

Marine Sand Dunes* The sand dunes near the river had a S. W.
direction, and rose about 50 feet above its bed. The ripple marks

1845.] Geqloffieal NcU$ ^ SwiOwm India. 399

earned by the currents of air on their sarfaoe resemble those caused
by carrents of water, and the N. and S. direction of their major
axis shows the Easterly and Westerly course of the late or existing
prevalent winds. Their Eastern sides have a sloping direction ; fall,
ing off rather abruptly to the West at about an angle of 45®, indica-
ting that the wind which raised them blew/rmis the E. On the surface
were scattered here and there shells and fragments of shells blown
up from the beach. The footsteps of waders, and other aquatic birds
could be occasionally tracked where the wind had not again covered
them up with loose sand.

These, fogether with the ripple marks, marine shells, and the
elevation of these moving sands, form an interesting example of the
manner in which strata of aqueous 8ub.marine origin may be imitat-
ed by the simple action of the wind on loose sand. Consolidation,
and a more distinct stratification alone are wanting to convert these
heaps into a fossiliferous ridge. The sand is often bound together by
the long interlaced roots of grasses, &c

Calorific acHon of butCb rays on tur/ace of Sand Dunes. At 5
P.M. sky clear, slight breeze just perceptible; the thermometer placed
on the sand and freely exposed to the sun's rays indicated a heat of
100^ 2f, Simply suspended in the air, about 12 feet above the surface
of the sand, equally exposed to the sun's rays, it stood at 78^ 5'.

Noeiumal Radiaiion from surface of Sand Dunes. The radiating
powers of the sand dunes are considerable. At 3 a, m., night nearly
calm, sky clear, the thermometer shaded from radiation, and placed
on a table about four feet from the ground, stood at 67**. Placed on the
grass and freely exposed bulb thinly covered with a little white wool,
it fell to 65.5^ But on the sur&ce of the sand dunes it fell to 62^
The sand is fine and quartzy.

As arial stillness is one of the conditions necessary to the full re-
frigerating effects of radiation, it is likely that on the coast, which is
hardly ever free from currents, however slight, resulting from the
regular alternations of the land and sea breezes, the differences of
temperature obtained by radiation will hardly ever be so great as the
table-lands of India* The lulls between the land and sea breezes
perhaps present the most eligible times for such experiments.

The temperature of the water of the wells is not far from what may
be the mean average temperature of the place, viz., from 80® 2^ to 81^

400 NoUt. priHcipaUy Geological, [No. 162.

The bed of the river near Kistapatam ii apparently about 500 yardi
broad, and sandy. A bar of sand obfltructt the month, against which
the lurf beaU in white breakers. The Collector's bungalow stands oa
the N. bank of the river.

Hellore. Circumstances prevented my examining the tract between
the sea at KistapaUm and Nellore ; but as far as could be judged from
rapidly passing over iti it resembles in flatness (sloping gently aea.
wards) the rest of the maritime plains of the CorMuandel Coast, and
abounds with small tanks. At Nellore the usual granitic and hypo-
gene rocks of this coast are covered by beds of laterile, whieh are seen
in cliffs about 16 feet high fringing the Pennaur river. About three or
four miles from Nellore, on the Northern bank of (he river, qnarries of
the laterite occur at the village of Kohor, in a deposit of this rock about
20 feet thick near the tank. Both at Nellore and the snrroanding
villages, i( is extensively employed as a building stone, and in other
repairs of the roads. Blocks, about one foot thick and two long, are sold
at the rale of 12 for the rupee. Small springs are seen oozing out at
(he bases of the laterite clifi^ on the S. bank of the river at Nellore.
These clifls are divided by perpendicular and horizontal seams ; the
rock composing them is less qnartzy than the Kohor laterite. Id the
vertical fissures I observed fragments of earthenware broken by the
natives in coming for water. These bits of pottery often become
impacted in a lateritic alluvial cement, which must not be mistaken,
as has been the case, for the true laterite, and hence its origin
ascribed to the recent or historic period. Some of the oldest pagodas
and structures in South India are built on this rock. Both the
laterites of Nellore and Kohor consist of a rock resembling the
Malabar laterite, but containing more angular fragments of quartz.
The surface of the laterile is often covered by a modern lateritie
debris, more or less consolidated, which most not, as said before, be
confounded with the true laterite.

As in the Beder laterile the water often passes from the snr&ce of
these cli^ by the tubular cavities in its structure which are' enlarged,
emptied of their clay and lithomarge, and modified by ita passage
downwards, until slopped in port by the clayey barrier it has assisted
to accumulate. The water here forma reservoirs, and in overfiowiog
finds its way out by fissures in springs. The bed of the Pennaur near
Nellore is sandy, and apparently about 800 yards broad.

1846.^ across the Peninsula of Southern India. 401

From NeUore by the North bank of the Pennaur to the base of the

Eaetem Ghauts.

Sungum. From NeUore by Kohor the laterite may be traced
westerly to the vicinity of Dovoor, resting on the granitic and
hjrpogene rocks about nineteen miles W.N.W. from NeUore. At the
Sungum, or confluence of the Pennaur with the two smaU streams of
the Bogheyroo and Berapeyroo, the first rocky elevation is seen since
quitting the coast about twenty-nine miles distant^ and nearly mid.
way between the sea and the Eastern Qhauts. It appears as a short
range abutting on the Pennaur river, and running N. by E. to about
the distance of two miles. It is composed, at the village of the Sun.
gum/ of a massive quartz rock in indistinct stratification, cleft occasion,
ally, like the laterite, by intersecting partings and vertical fissures
which divide the rock into parallelograms. The planes of the former
have a dip of about 5° towards the East : the vertical fissures run
irregularly, but the greater part have a direction of N. by W. This
quartzy rock passes from opaque and granular, to compact, translucent
chert, of various shades of red, brown, green, and white. It contains
disseminated scales of mica of a golden colour, which glitter like
those in avanturine, and nests of brown iron ore.

If the marly horizontal partings are really the planes of stratifi.
cation, it may be inferred from its conformability that this quariz
rock does not belong to the hypogene series which is seen in highly
inclined beds near its base, penetrated by veins of granite (as seen at
Pollium, a village between Dovoor and Sungum,) but that it is an
altered outlier of the sandstone mural crests which are seen from this
on the Western horizon capping the granite and hypogene schists of
the Eastern Ohauts.

A glimmering hornblende schist, and gneiss veined with granite,
with a white mica replaced here and there by schorl, are found at the
bases of the quartz hills of Sungum.

A cluster of Hindu temples, the principal of which is dedicated to
Iswara, as at the holy Sungums (or confluences) of the Kistnah, Bhima,
&c., surrounded by a lofty wall, crowns a rugged mass of this rock
that projects from the main ridge into the sandy bed of the river,
which at this season of the year presents a dreary waste of sand,

403 Notes, pfincipaify Geologiealf [No. 162.

apparently marly^ a mile in width, through which a slender crys-
tal stream of water threads its way towards the sea. In front
of the temple gates stands a granite slab, bearing a Sassanam, or in-
scription! in Nagri and Teliigoo, almost buried in drifted sand. The
emblems of eternity, (or rather durability) — the sun and moou'^weie
engraven on the comers above the inscription. The priests of the
temple are brahmans of the Smartal sect, whose Suatni or bishop is the
powerful Sencra Bharti. The remains of an old aqueduct are seen
at a little distance from the Sungum. The village itself oontains
about 400 houses, though it appears formerly to have been a place of
greater wealth : a few cotton cloths lUre manufactured here. The staple
articles of cultivation are rioe, baggi, or juari, and a little indigo.

Temperature efihe Pennaut river* The temperature of the water
in the Pennaur was 77*3^ of the springs 78-2'' at 4 f. m^ Tanpenu
ture in open air at the time 82°.

From the Pennaur to JumiHaperam and Copper diHrid ^ Gamjf^
penta. Leaving the Ndrth bank of the Pennaur at Sungum^ the rosd
lay in a N. by W. direction to Jummawdram, or Jummaveram^
distant about ten miles from Sungum. The rocks here are still the
hypogene schists, chiefly gametiferous hornblende schist, and gneiss,
with large veins of whitish quartz, the fragments of which are scattered
over the uncultivated surface of the plain. The soil is reddishi both
sandy and clayey, and rests either on a substratum of kunker and
detritus of rock, ot oh the reck itself^ Two out of the four welk at
Jummaverani are saline^

The hypogene schists penetrated by tra|> and granite, extend tnm
Jummaveram to Ganypenta or Gurumanipenta, a village aboit
twenty-three miles N. N. W. froiki Jummaveram, about thirty-three
miles North of the Pennaur about the same distance from the sea, and
about twenty.eight miles froih the biBtse of the Eastern Ghauts.

This village is sitiiated in the midst of the copper mining localities
described in a paper published by the Royal Asiatic Society in their
Journal.

From Ganypenta to the E. Ghaufa. Proceeding from Gurumani-
penta in a S. W. direction towards tShe entlnnoe of the Dorenal Psff
over the Eastern Ghauts, the surface of the great plain hitherto travel-
led over becomes more rugged and broken Up by reeky elevation^

1845.] across ike Pemmuia of Southern India, 403

till at length the baae of the Ghauts is reaehed near Udtgherry. The
hypogene schists, penetrated by granite and dykes of basaitte green^
atone and overlaid by patches of kunker, continue up to the base of
the Ghauts. Mica schist is seen at Samulraygudda, about four and a
half miles B. S. E. from the town of Udigherry, and also about sevea
miles farther lo the S. W. at Timmapolliam with quartz rock, fie-
▼itel of Ihe hypogene spurs in the plain are capped with this quartz
rock, which is usually of a light reddish colour passing into greenish
gt^Yt and white cherts. It is evidently altered sandstone. The hy.
pogene schists are in great confusion at the base of the Ghauts* and in
one place I observed the mica schist dipping at an angle of 41° to the
W. i e. towards the great line of dislocation. In some places they are
but little inclined ; in some vertical ; while in others they appear to
have been reversed^ and folded back upon themselves^ the upper parta
of the flexures having disappeared in weathering or by denudation*
Hence they have the appearance of alternating in a reversed mrder to
that in whidi they usually occur, viz., the gneiss lowermost in the se^
riee. This occurs in most other hypogene areas of South India, and
care should be taken to ascertain in such disturbed regions the true
order of superposition from the horizontal or less inclined beds in the
neighbouring districts less disturbed, and where there is no likelihood
ef inversion or folding back of the strata. These phenomena, though,
written in plainly legible characters on the faces of the gigantic es.
carpments of the Alps, must in Southern India generally be patiently,
traced out, letter by letter, amid the jungle and debris which usu-
ally obscure their features.

Eastern GhauU. The Eastern Ghauts, in the vicinity of Udigher-
ry, and the Docenal Pass, have an altitude, approximatively obtained
by a rough trigonometrical measurement, of about 700 feet from the
maritime plain at their base, which is from 60 to 70 miles broad, its
surface roughened by spurs from ihe Ghauts, and a few occasional
rocky clusters and detached hills.

The Ghauts here have usually their esearpments^ or steepest acclivi-
ties fadog towards the East. The lower portions of the hills, which
sue eomposed of mica slate or gneiss^ have usually a much less abrupt
and steep descent than the sandstone, which often caps them in mural
clil& and hog.backed ridges. The line of junction of the two rocks

404 Notes, principally Geological, [No. 162.

18 thus often plainly visible in mountains many miles distant. The
hypogene schists seldom attain a height of abore 400 feet ; the higher
portions are sandstone. The sandstone, in the localities where I ex-
amined it on the heights overlooking the Dorenal Pass, had much the
appearance of qaartz rock passing into chert or hornstone, of various
light shades of red, brown, green, blue, black and white.

Pass of Dorenal, This break in the Easternmost chain of the
Eastern Qhauts is about four miles in length, general direction W. by
N., and iis evidently a transverse valley of fracture, passing nearly at right
angles with the direction of the strata, and with that of the longitudi-
nal vallies. The Northern side is abrupt and craggy, while the ab-
rupt features of the Southern flank iare more rounded and softened
down. Its bottom has ah irregular surfiioe, occupied by angular rocky
debris, the wreck of strata once continuous, and is now partially oo-
vered with both arboreous and shrubby vegetation. The ascent from the
East, partaking of the general character of the Ghaut elevation, is steeper
than the descent to the West; but it is every where passable for loaded
carts, and is one of the best channels of commerce from the maritime
plains of Nellore and Ongole to the more elevated districts of God-
dapah, Bellary and Kurnool. The best isort of cart adapted for this
hill transit is that with the narrow sharp wooden wheels girt with
strong iron fellies, and having axles revolving with the wheel. I
saw about fifty return carts, laden with empty indigo boxes, returning
from the town of Nellore to the indigo factory at Bud wail in the
Cuddapah district. Five hundred Lumbari bullocks, laden with salt*
the manufacture of the coast, were jogging merrily on, to the music of
their own bells, with this high- taxed necessary of life, into the interior.

Falley of Budfvail. From the Pass of Dorenal the traveller de-
scends by an easy slope into the longitudinal valley of Budwiail, which
18 crossed in a W. N. W. direction to the Western and principal chaio
of the £. Ghauts. This fine valley has an almost S. direction indio-
ing slightly to the E., and extends from the Kistnah beyond Cumbum
on the N. to Tripety on the S. with some interruption from occasional
cross lines of elevation and fracture, passing a little East of Sidhout to
the cross fracture forming the valley of the Pennaur ; whence its
course niay be traced southerly by the channels of Cheyeyrooand
Goonjna streams, by Chitwail, Godoor, Baulpilly and Gurcumbady.

1845.3 across the Peninsula of Southern India, 403

On the line of the cross valley of the Pennaur near Sidhout a con.
siderable subeidenoe, or sinking down of the sarfsce* appears to have
taken place ; as near this point we see both the Northern and Southern
lines of drainage of the longitudinal vallies of the £. Ghauts^ viz. the
Cheyeyroo, the Toomall and Sagglair, converge and empty themselves
into the Pennaur, easterly through the cross fracture of Sidhout to
the sea* The general breadth of the valley of Budwail North of the
Pennaur, is about eleven miles. From Poormaumla on the N. to the
Pennaur it is sub.divided into two vallies by a central range of hills>
which passes by the town of Budwail; the lowest parts of these
vallies are marked by the S. courses of the Toomall in that to the
East, and by that of Sagglair in the valley to the W.

In the valley of Budwail the Cuddapah limestone with its associ-
ated argillaceous shales of different shades of red, chocolate, white^
yellow and green, are first seen, the latter predominating. The central
range consists chiefly of sandstone based on these shales, which are
often denuded, and appear in the vallies between ridges capped with
insulated massive layers of sandstone and quartz rock several miles
asunder.

Westernmost ridge of the Eastern Ghauts, The Western, or principal
ridge of the £. Qhauts is crossed by the Oothoomnagoo and Jungumraz-
pilly Passes. The latter is perfectly practicable for bandies. Leaving
my baggage to go round by the Pass, I ascended the Ghauts by a sheep
track, to the lead mines of Jungumanipenta, and descended to those
of Buswapoor on the Western flank of the Ghauts. These mines have
been previously described in a paper published by the Royal Asiatic
Society. SufiSce it here to observe, that the lower and modern eleva-
tions of the Ghauts are composed of slates and shales associated
with the limestone; the highest ridges and peaks are capped and
crested with sandstone passing into quartz rock. The limestone
abounds with chert and horns tone; its shales are usually reddish,
chocolate, green, white and ochreous, and interstratified with arenace-
ous, ferruginous, and calcareous bands passing in to. dark quartzose
slates ; petrographically speaking these resemble those of our Devonian
series, but no traces of fossils are observed in any of these rocks.

Nundialempett. This village is situated about one and a quarter koss
Westerly from the lead mines of Baswapur, and stands on the right bank

406 No^, principally Geoiagicai, [^No. 162.

of a stream that flows from the neighbouring Qhauts sontlied^y along
their base into the Pennaur, called the Conda Nulla. On a ridge o?er.
looking the tank stands the trigonometrical survey station of Mookan-
doo. The soil is alhtrial and reddish, with calcareous matter inter-
mixed^ resting usually on a thick substratum of kunker imbedding
nodular brown iron ore and fragments of the subjacent and adjaeent
rocks, viz. slaty argillaceous limestone and sandstone. The cultivation
is solely of that description termed Moongari and garden. The aspect
of the country at this western base of the Ohauts is at first andoiating
and picturesque^ the undulations merging to the westward in the
great r€^ur plains of Dhoor and Guddapah. The clamps and
groves of shady tamarind trees, with which its surface is studded in
the sub-ghaut plains, give it a park-like aspect. The ruins of a small
fort, with the remains of a large cavalier in the centre, stand dose to
the village, and are said to have been built by one of the Guddapah
Nawabs.

JummtUmud^oo, Crossing the great plain of Dhoor, which is based
on the diamond limestone, and divided by the Koond river, which
runs Southerly down its centre to the Pennaur at Camlapoor, the
large village of Jummulmudgoo is reached. It stands on the left
bank of the Pennaur a little to the East of the emergence of this river
from the gorge of the Gundicotta hills, which form the Western lip
to the Pennaur basin, girt in on the South by the Wontimetta and
Poolvaimla ranges, and to the East by the Eastern Ghauts, through
which it escapes to the sea by the transverse break of Sidhout. The
approximate height of this basin above the sea towards its centre, as
indicated by the boiling point, is HOO feet.

The rock in the bed of the Pennaur and on which the village standi,
is the blue variety of limestone above mentioned, often apjHPoacfaing
French grey in lightness of colour ; it dips slightly towards the E. or
N. of E. The village is rather noted for the brilliancy and perma^
nency of its dyes, which are fixed by washing and steeping the cotten
printed cloths in a saline well, the water of which rises up from the
limestone in the heart of the village* The surface of the waler was
thirty, two and a half feet below that of the ground, owing to the dry
season ; its temperature three feet below the surface 7^^, a lowness
ascribabie to the constant evaporation caused on the surface and sides

1845.3 across the Peninsula of Southern India. 407

by the washing and the drying of cloths. Temperatare of air in the
shade mt 5 p. m. 85^. The principal saline ingredient, if I may judge
fiooi the incrustations in the fissures and seams from which the water
springs, is muriate of soda. Many of the seams are occupied by a greyish
friable earth consisting of disintegrated limestone mingled with this
saline residue left after evaporation of the water.

There is another brackish well in the town, but it does not answer
the purpose of the native dyers so well as this. The water of the
other well is perfectly sweet. One which I visited between the saline
spring and the river, lies at the depth of twenty-three feet from the
surfiice, with a temperature of 75'', six and a half feet below the surface.
The time has now passed when the occurrence of common salt, the
mineral chloride of sodium of chemists, in distant regions was held to
be sufficient evidence of the existence there of the new red aaUdstone.
It occurs in the oldest stratified rocks of America, in the coal meissureB
of England, the lias of Switserland, and all over the hypogene and
granitic area of South India.

Jummulmudgoo contains about 3,000 inhabitants, the greater por-
tion of whom are Kunbis speaking TeHnghi, a language which con.
tinues from Nellore to about the vicinity of Gooty and Kulmool,
where it meets the Canarese of the Western provinces, and near Beder
on the N. W. with the Mahratta. I found that it m^td with the
Tamol of Madras and the Southern provinces at Sriharicotta, a vii.
hge about fifty miles North of Madras, near the o}d limits of the
Andra-des, or Telinghi country, and the Dravidame-des. Jutnmul-
mudgoo was formerly a place of some importance under the Anna*
gandi or Bijanugger princes, and the Chctvmil rajahs. It subsequent,
ly shared the same &te as tSke rest of their dominion^ South of the
Tumbuddnu It is Uie burial place of Sidi Miyan, brother of Halim
Khan, Nuwab of Cnddapah in Hyder's time. Fnnerai rites in
memory of him were performed during my encampment here. The
remains of the Dtwan^-khanak and palace of the Cuddapah rulers,
and a small fhrt without a ditoh, still exist

Pass of Gundicotta. Previous to describing the defile through
whidi the Pennaur flows Easterly from the plain of Tarputri into that
of Cuddapah, it will be right to mention ^at the ridge, through

408 NoieSy prineipatfy Geologieai, [^No. 162.

which this transverse fissure occurs, commences a few miles Soath of
Kurnool, on the S. bank of the Tambuddra on the N; W., and rons
Soatherly through Dhone, and the Eastern borders of Banganpilly
and Gooty by Munimudgoo, whence the direction is S. Easterly by
Owk, W. of Ollavaconda, Juggernatgooda, the Timnainpetta tank,
and Jummulmudgoo, to the hamlet of CuUamulla, about thirteen miles
S. E. from Jummulmudgoo, and about fifteen miles from the fissure
of Oundiootta.

The direct breadth of the range where intersected by the fissure is
about five miles, and its extreme height apparently not more than
600 feet ; the extreme height of the precipices on either side, ascertain,
ed trigonometrically, is not more than 250 feet, and often not more
than 80 feet. The general direction is E. by N., though in its course
through the hills it describes two salient and two re-entering angles.
The bottom of the fissure is flattish, and occupied completely by
the sandy bed of the Pennaur. The breadth is usually firom 100 to
300 paces.

In Hamilton's account, taken from Heyne, Rennell, &c, the Pass
of Gundicotta is described as a break or chasm in the mountains,
which *' appears to have resulted from some violent concussion of na-
ture, as it is very narrow, and the opposite sides almost perpendi-
cular." Induced by this description to suppose that some interesting
dislocation of the strata on a large scale had taken place, I examined
narrowly the sides of the Pass. Entering it with the Pennaur from
the West, from the wide sandy waste caused by the confluence of the
Chittravutty river with the former stream, the sides of the opening
present steep slopes of sandstones thinly covered with a sandy soil
and scattered bushes, among which frolicked troops of gay monkies.
About the middle of the Pass, under the walls of the fortress of
Gundicotta, which crown the Southern cliflfs, the sides are precipitous
masses of sandstone divided by fissures into vertical pinnacles, assi-
milating ruins, and which are occasionally undermined by the
force of the monsoon freshes and precipitated into the bed of the
river.

The sandstone strata forming the precipices on each side exhibit no
marks of dislocation or violent disturbance. They dip at an angle

1845.] across the Peninsula cf S&uihem India. 409

rarely above 10'' towards the East and N. of E., and the undisturbed
dip of the beds can be traced from one side to the other.

No ledges supporting beds of rolled pebbles could be found on the
faces of the cliflb, or other marks of the rocks having been worn by
watery erosion down to the present channel.

It is therefore reasonable to infer that this singular fissure has been
mainly occasioned by contraction of the mass during consolidation^ and
not by *' a violent convulsion of nature or erosion ;" although there is
little doubt that its width has been since increased and shape modified
by the washing of the river floods^ as is evident from the precipitated
debris /rom the sides which occasionally strew the bed. Smaller pa-
rallel fissures are observable in the difb on each side, one of which has
formed the cave called by the native guides, *'Pan4i GawV*

The bed of the river is filled with sand and fragments of sandstone,
and occasionally of its associated blue limestone, to so great a depth as to
lender an examination of the downward continuation of the fissure
impracticable.

The great depression of the bottom of the fissure is clearly shown
by the sudden manner in which the waters of the Pennaur are de«
fleeted into it from the -S. E. course they were pursuing along the
Western flank of the hills, and by the confluence of the Chittravutty
at this point.

The river during the rains is said to rise to the height of seven or
eight feet in the centre of the Pass.

The rock composing the cliffs is for the most part of a faint reddish,
compact sandstone approaching quartz rock, in tabular masses of great
thickness, though sometimes interstratified with argillaceous seams
like the sandstones of Gokauk on the Gutpurba, which are usually of
a reddish white and huffy colour.

The faces of the sandstone cliffs exhibit bands of a pale, green, red
and white, which conform to the stratification.

The cliffs sustain a rocky table-land, the surface of which is fre-
quently covered with a crust of laterite varying from a few inches to
several feet in thickness, and which is also deposited in the fissures
and seams of the subjacent sandstone.

The tabular sur&ce of the latter rock, where denuded of this late-
Htic crust, is often divided into parallelograms by intersecting fissures
and joints.

3 L

410 NoteM, principally Geohgical, [No. 162.

In some places nodalar spheroidal concretions, about the size of a
nutmeg, of quartz rock are seen imbedded in a mass of sandstone,
around which the arenaceous particles of the rock are arranged in con-
centric bands of different shades, like those in agates. This concentric
segregative structure is particularly observable in the more ferruginous
portions of the rock.

Ripple marks are very common on the larger exposed surfaces of the
sandstone strata. The table-land on the summit of the hills is a wild
looking tract, covered with long grass and bush, which is burnt every
year and produces good crops of turmeric.

Fortress of Gundicotta- The cliffs on the South of the Pass, and
near its middle, are ascended at the ruins and tombs of Allahabad by
a steep zigzag path to the once celebrated fortress begun by the Hindu
sovereigns of Bijanugger, greatly enlarged by Aurungzebe's and Knt-
tub Shali's fietmous General, Mir Jumlah, and added to by Hyder and
Tippoo.

After the fall of Bijanugger in 1564, the fort was still retained by
Nursing Raj, nephew of the slain Hindu monarch Ram Raj, from
whom it was taken after a severe siege by Mahomed Kuli Kuttub
Shah, king of Golconda, or rather by his General Mir Jumlah. It
was subsequently annexed to the Patau government of Cuddapah by
Neknam Khan, and afterwards given up to Hyder when he reduced
this part of the Balaghat. It was ceded to the British by the treaty
with the Nizam in 1800. The fortifications are extensive, and coo-
tain a handsome Chuhar Minar, military magazine^ and mosque, a
small town, and the ruins of a temple to Mahadeo ; to whose shrioe
Ferishta tells us 100^000 Hindus of Bijanugger used to make an an-
nual pilgrimage and offer gifts of great value. Besides the two patiis
-by Allahabad are the other approaches to the fort, viz. one by an easy
ascent from Jummulmudgoo on the East, and the other from Chitty-
wanripilly by a steep and rugged ascent just practicable for horses.

Figure^stone quarries of Reddadoor. Proceeding Westerly from the
Pass of Gundicotta, I passed along the plain on the left bank of the Chit-
travutty river to the hill pagoda of Reddadoor, nearly eight miles W. by
S. from the base of the Gundicotta hills. Limestone, passing into argil-
laceous shales and schists, constitutes the rock in the plain. The ridge
of Reddadoor is about a mile in length, running in an £. by,S. direc-
tion : it consists of argillaceous slates alternating with a finely Ismi-

1846. ] acrosi the Peninsula of Southern India. 4 1 1

nated fissile shale of various shades of brown, chocolate, red, and yel-
low passing into a pure white. These rocks have a distinctly jointed
structure : the joints are nearly vertical running in a S. W. direction.
The planes of stratification are inclined at an angle of from 10** to 15''
dipping towards E. 10° N. ; they are easily distinguishable here from
the smooth surfaces of cleavage by their dimpled and rippled super,
ficies. The cleavage planes are also marked by dendritic delineations.

This ridge has been penetrated by a large dyke of basaltic green,
stone, running nearly £. and W., and branching in a N. and S.
direction. It is seen outcropping along the whole extent of the S. W»
base. At the N. E. base both branches disappear in the plain. The
basalt is also seen bursting through the strata at the saddlcshaped
depression on the summit of the ridge, where it has both a globular and
prismatic structure/ the prisms pass into the globular form by the ex.
foliation of their angles, and I have even observed small spheroidal
nuclei in the exfoliated coats, which are in turn subjected to concen-
tric exfoliation. The dyke, like all others in this formation, does not
overspread or cap the rocks on its sides, but ends abruptly at the jrar.
face. Towards the centre, like most volcanic dykes, it becomes crystal-
line and porpbyritic, imbedding crystals of both whitish i^nd pale
green felspar with a few of hypersthene and foliated hornblende. Aci-
cular augite is seen glistening in the more compact and quickest cool-
ed parts of the dyke, and occasionally cubes of iron pyrites. The ba*
salt melts easily into a greyish black glass.

The shale in contact, both in the plain and on the saddle of the
ridge, is either hardened and rendered massive, compact or ferrugi.
nous, or is broken up, by crystalline forces apparently, into a number
of lamins^ often distinctly prismatic, and exhibiting dendritic marka
on the planes into which they readily split. At the base of the hill
the basalt and indurated shales assimilate so much at the junction
line that it is difficult to distinguish them ; the shale has become dark
and hornblendic, and the basalt has acquired something of the fissile
structure of the shale. A similar phenomenon is observed in the me.
tamorphism of the hypogene rocks of Southern India, where the granite
near the point of contact acquires the structure of gneiss, and the gneiss
becomes in turn more granular, massive or granitoidal. The pheno-
mena presented by granite and basaltic greenstone at their contact
with metamorphic or other stratified rocks are extremely interesting ;

412 Noies^prindpaiiy Geahgioai, [No. 162.

and 00 country in the worlds perhaps, affords better opportunities for
their study than S. India* Some of the 'fissures of the dyke on the
ridge of the hill are filled with cale spar, and many of the loose Uoeks
encrusted with the same mineral and compact reddish konker.
Thin seams of nephrite occasionally intervene between the basalt and
its walls; and the limestone associated with the slates has in some
instances been converted into chert after assimilating calcedony in tex-
ture and colour.

Where basaltic greenstone and granite^ or other plutdnic rocks have
extended on a great scale, we generally find not only a great tendency
to crystalline and mineral development, but a segregation of the ordi-
nary components of the rocks of the heated area, of such magnitude as
to be at once apparent in the physical aspect of the country in large
beds and ridges of quartz, iron ore, or quartz strongly impregnated
with iron, felspathic clays, &c.

But to return. At the Southern base of the ridge the shales acquire
a massive structure, and form a soft lilac tinted rock speckled with
green, with a slightly soapy feel and easily sectile, which melts before
the blow-pipe per se into a pearly glass. It is here quarried and carved
into images, figures of deities, &c*, which are exported.

I had a very neat representation of the Avatars of Vishnu, executed
on a large slab of this material which, though I have given it the
name of figure-stone, by no means resembles the agalmatoliteof China,
used for similar purposes.* Much of the water rising through the
fissures of the rock around the base of the ridge is impregnated with
muriate of soda ; and further West to Ganlapaud the plain is inter,
sccted with trap dykes penetrating the grey limestone and its asso-
ciated shales, which are often greatly altered and silicified. The
general direction of the strata observed was E. S, E. and S. E. and dip
N. of E. Hence, the plain to the base of the Rayelcherroo hills is
chiefly limestone and associated shales and schists covered with regur.
South of Rayelcherroo the limestone becomes of a waxy texture,
compact, of a conchoidal fracture, veined and dotted with delicate
shades of green, yellow, red, and imbeds pyrites. It rises into inegu-
lar hills and ridges, alternates with sandstone, and sandstone conglo-
merate. The hills become still more confused and jumbled, as the

* The Agalmatolite is wholly infusible. This is probably one of the many varieties
of steatite<^£Ds.

1845.3 acrosi the Peninsuia of Southern India, 4 1 3

janctioii line with the granite is approached about six miles £. of
Gooly, and the development of quartz is seen on the strange shaped
peaks and mural ridges near the granite line. These hills, which form
a most rugged and picturesque country, constitute the main and wes.
ternmost ridge of which the Oundicotta range just passed is a spur
running down into the great plains of Tarputtri and Dhoor, and termi*
nating abruptly as we have seen at CuUamuUa, a few miles N. of the
Travellers' bungalow at Chillumcoor.

These westernmost ridges instead of following the S. E. direction
of the Gundicotta spur at the point of bifurcation between Banganpilly,
Owk, Munimudgoo, and PiapuUy, continue their nearly N. and S,
course from the banks of the Tumbuddra near Kurnool by Gooty to the
vicinity of Anantapore in the Bellary district, whence they turn Easterly
to the S. of Cuddapah^ where they join the Eastern Ghauts; thus
forming with the " impenetrable unsurveyed" spurs projecting westerly
from the Eastern Ghauts along the S. bank of- the Tumbuddra, to the
North, the most complete basin perhaps in Southern India, embracing
the great Regur plains of Cuddapah and Kurnool, and the beds of the
Pennaur and its tributaries the Khoond and Chittravati. The Pennaur,
which rises near Nundidroog, flowing Southerly 'from these water-
sheds of the elevated plateau of Mysore, is deflected suddenly by the
great granitic outburst near Gooty from its farther course Northerly
towards the Tumbuddra, which it would have certainly joined had not
this rocky barrier compelled its stream to seek an Easterly course through
the hilly edges and fertile plains of this sandstone. girt basin^ to the
Bay of Bengal. This basin and its rocky mountainous fringe, which
consists chiefly of the diamond sandstone and limestone, comprehend
the richest diamond mines of the former kingdom of Golconda, iron
in great abundance, and the richest and almost only mines of galena
in Southern India. It is composed for the most part of sandstone con-
glomerate, sandstone, arenaceous schists, limestone passing into silici-
ous schists and into argillaceous schists, and shales of various shades,
reddish brown, chocolate, and pale green prevailing. It was thought
by Malcolmson, Heyne and others, that the formation consisted of the
limestone underlying a sandstone and conglomerate imbeciding the
diamond. So far this is the case, but I have discovered on the Eastern
limits from Juggernath S. of Kurnool to Gooty, and at Mudelaity

414 Notes^ principaliy Geological^ QNo. 162.

near Banganpiily, that beds of sandstone and sandstone conglomerate,
reposing immediately on granite, underlie the limestone ; and that the
limestone mast have been consolidated prior to the deposition upon it
of the upper sandstone and its conglomerates, since in the latter I have
found imbedded pebbles from the subjacent limestone. The formation,
then, consists of an upper and lower sandstone and conglomerates, and
the intervening limestone and associated shales.

Leaving this granite based chain, the great frontier plains of the
Ceded Districts and Mysore are crossed to the hill fortresses of Rai-
droog, and Chittiedroog, where we find magnificent outbursts of gra-
nite and other plutonic rocks, rising abruptly and irregularly from
the nearly vertical hypogene schists which have suffered every variety
of flexure and disturbance.

Chundergooty Droog, The granite, on which stands the Droog or
hill fort of Chundergooty, rises into two lofty peaks, the steepest sides
of which are nearly parallel to those of the Western Ghauts, sloping
off towards the East and South. The joints in the lower ranges of
laminar granite, or granitoidai gneiss, are divided by vertical fissures
giving them much the appearance of vertical strata, as remarked by
Christie in his paper on the Geology of the South Mahratta country.
The Droog, it is said, was built in the time of the Pandion kings, and
strengthened by Hyder. The village in the base consists of about fifty
houses under a Kiliadar, with twenty men. Coffee is cultivated at
Sindli, a village about a koss distance, and iron, obtained from mines
at a short distance, is exported hence to the West coast.

From Chundergooty to Siddapore, the road for the latter part lies over
the undulating and hilly tracts on the slopes of the Western Ghauts,
which gradually become more and more covered with wood. Granite,
and the hypogene rocks, intersected by dykes of basaltic greenstone
and overlaid occasionally by patches of laterite, are the only rocks
observed. About three koss distance from Siddapore lies the ancient
and decayed town of Bilghy, formerly the capital of the Santavi-raya
Rajahs. Siddapore is now the Kusbah town of the talook. It contains
between 200 and 300 houses, inhabited chiefly by Lingayats speaking
Canarese, Concanis, Haiga Brahmins and Mussulmans. The staple
articles of cultivation are rice, betel-nut, cardamoms, and black pep-
per. The three last are exported chiefly to Mysore, the Ceded Dis-

1845.3 across the Peninsula ijf Southern India, 415

triet8> and other parts of the interior; and to the natire port f4
Kompta on the Western coast, passing down the Gairsappa or Hos.
salmacki Ghaut and the Hobs Ghaut, on bullocks. Iron is procured
in the neighbouring hills.

Ridge of the Western Ghauts. Between Siddapore and the Falls of
Gairsappa, the highest edge of the Ghaut ridge is crossed ; the water*
sheds of the table-lands to the Eastward, and of the mountain-streams
that rush in the monsoon with great violence down their precipitous
sides and across the narrow strip at their base into the Indian
sea.

The Warda was the last stream of any size observed flowing £as.
terly. The Ghauts descend to the Westward from this anticlinal axis
by short and steepish declivities and irregular terraces. The surface
rock is principally a quartzy lateritic conglomerate, overlying the
hypogene schist, principally hornblende schist, gneiss, mica, chioritic,
talcoae, and actynolitic schists, which are occasionally seen basseting
out. The more ferruginous of these schists disintegrate into a compact
red clay, in which are seen veins of quartz continued from the subja-
cent rocks, still maintaining their slope and direction.

The soil is red and clayey, and in the rains greasy and slippery
in the extreme, owing probably to the decayed talc and mica ; garnets
abound in it.

Physical aspect TV. Ohauts. As the Ghauts are approached from
the plateau of Mysore, the flat plains begin to undulate, rising all
the time to the Westward, and as the traveller progresses the undu-
lations become shorter and more perceptible, till the highest ridge
of the Pass is attained. The height of the rocks on either side of the
path is generally concealed by forest.

The nature of the vegetation that clothes the surface too suffers a
manifest change, and becomes more profuse. In place of the clumps
of mangoes and tamarind, which diversify the plains with their hedges
and thickets of Aloe, Euphorbia, Cacti, Acacia, Cassia, Parkinsonia?
we see graceful clumps of bamboo, the broad-leafed Bilami, Marsea
Chinensis, the leaves and root of which are supposed to be specifics
for snake-bites, a^d the Dudol yielding excellent timber. The
Pulas (Butea Frondosa) with its brilliant orange-red flowers yield,
ing a beautiful yellow dye known to the preparers of the coloured

416 NaUSt principally Geological^ QNo. 162^

balls used in the festival of the Hooli^ and its broad thick leaves
which serve the Hindu as plates and dishes, the laniel.leaved Oonii
(Ixora parviflora) which furnishes torches for the traveller. The
Mutti tree (Chuncoa Muttia) the ashes of which, particularly thebark,
containing much potash, are used instead of chunam, by betel-chew-
ers : the tree also affords good timber. Here and there a magnificent
banyan throws down its hundred arms, and the sacred Peepal rears
its verdant head; while further in the jungle grows the sandal, supply-
ing the fragrant oil and wood for which this part of the Ghauts is h~
mous. The Sissoo (Dalbergia,) and Terminaliaalaia, excellent timber
trees ; the hard and lofty teak itself, and the Hopea decandria, the
wood of which is harder and more durable even than that of the teak;
the sago and areca palms, the jack, and the cashew nut. The wild cin.
namon (Cassia lignea) grows in great abundance near the Falls, and the
underwood glowed with the beautiful blossoms of the scarlet Ixora,
sacred to Siva and Krishnu, while the air was redolent with the fira-
grance of the wild jasmine.

The vegetation of the Ghauts strongly reminded me, in its regular
and smooth bust-Iike outline, of that which clothes the lovely and ever
verdant Malayan Islands to the water's edge, similar loranthaceous
parasites festoon the loftier trees of the forest, and the jungles abound
with Myrtaceee and Laurineee. The Ixoras and Eugenias are common
to both, and the cultivated foresC clearings yield abundant supplies of
black pepper, cardamoms, areca, coffee, plantains, &c

Falls of Gairsuppa. Accompanied by my friend, Lieut. White,
47th Regt., I arrived from Siddapore at the thatched bungalow of
Korkunni, early in August, a little after midday. The bungalow
stands in an open part of the forest, about one and a half mile from
the Falls, the sound of which however did not yet reach us. Dripping
with rain, our shoes full of blood from the jungle leeches that had fast-
ened on our legs, and tolerably well fagged from a muddy march chiefly
on foot over clayey and rocky ascents and descents, covered with
dense thicket, we could not restrain our curiosity ; but leaving our
servants to prepare breakfast, with a guide trotting in front, we has-
tened towards the Falls along a narrow path winding through bush
mixed with tall forest which clothes the banks of the Sarawati, tot
such is the name of the river that performs this stupendous lover's-Ieap

1845.3 across the Petiinsula of 'Southern India. 417

from the chains of the giant Ghauts into the arms of bis oeean.rescued*
Mistress — prolific Canara.

As we threaded the tortaous path, the rushing sounds of the
rapids became clearly distinguishable from the shriller whistling of
the wind^ and the pattering of the rain among the leaves and branches
of the trees.

On a nearer approach this rushing sound was suddenly drowned
by the deep thunder, evidently of the Fall itself, which appeared to
proceed from a great depth beneath the ground on which we walked,
and which now was fairly felt to vibrate from the weighty shock. The
air too became palpably colder, a phenomenon doubtless caused by the
evaporation from the clouds of spray which canopy the Falls and ad*
jacent banks.

Deceived by this sound, which still seemed afar off, into the ima-
gination that the river was yet at a considerable distance, we unex-
pectedly emerged from the thicket upon the rapid immediately above
the brink of the Falls, when the cause of this deception became evident ;
the din of the waters had been deadened by the peculiar shape, the
immense depth, and confined dimensions of the chasm into which
they were precipitated. Hence the ventrioloquism of the cataract.

We now stood silent and astounded by the roar and rush :— amid
the grey clouds of mist and spray the arrowy waters of the rapid
were visible, divided into a multitude of currents by the rock masses
against which they tumultuously dashed in their impetuous progress
to the edge of the precipice.

Here, as the eye and ear follow its course to the main Fall, the ra.
pid literally dies a sudden death; its clamorous voice is abruptly si-
lenced, and it bodily disappears, as if by magic, in the bowels of the
earth, or into the region of moving mist which curtained the chasm
from the place we were standing on.

After indulging a short time in this magnificent spectacle— a gem
set in lovely mountain and forest scenery — we scrambled over the
muddy and slippery shelves of rock towards the edge of the principal
Fall. The river was much swollen by the monsoon, but had been still
foUer, as shown by the bruised and shattered forest trees which had

* The Brahmins have a tradition, that the sub-ghautine maritime tracts of the
Western Coast were raised from the ocean for their especial use.

3 M

418 NoteSf principally Geological, [No. 162.

been uprooted, borne down, and thrown in confusion with other ve-
getable debris on the rocks we had to cross.

Crawling on hands and knees — an operation rendered eligible by the
then slimy surface of the rock and the painful effects of a score of turn-
bles — we contrived to reach the shelf of rock which completely projects
over the margin of the chasm, and forms an admirable point of view.
We lay down flat on the surface of this shelf, which slopes gently from
the chasm, and drew ourselves up to its edge over which, as I stretch,
ed my head, a sight burst on the view, which I shall never forget, and
can never hope to describe. I have since looked down the fuming
and sulphurous craters of Etna and Vesuvius, but have never expert-
enced the sensations which overwhelmed me in the first downward
gaze into this (Hibernice,) volcano of waters : — for so it looks.

All thoughts of the picturesque, all pre-formed resolutions of sub-
duing the exaggerated impressions likely to be produced on the iouu
gination by such a scene, and reducing them by the sober checks of
calculation of height, depth, velocity, bulk, dec. — at once vanished, and
left the mind partaking in the tumultuous confusion and agitation
going on. But it is the chaotic scene beneath that rivets with basi-
lisk fascination the gaze of the spectator, and produces in some minds
the dangerous impulse or desire of self- precipitation.

This impulse originates possibly in a sympathy existing between
the hufnan Mind and what is termed, perhaps inaccurately, " Inani-
mate Nature," which in its calm and beauteous state exercises so great
a tranquilizing effect on certain minds.

Passive amid this activity, the spectator looks downwards into an
apparently fathomless gulf of plunging waters,, spray, uproar, and
mist ; first perhaps with a feeling of fear and giddiness, which rapidly
vanishes, and the mind becomes not only reconciled to the ineesaancy
and unvarying nature of these phenomena, but fascinated more or
less by them. It was with great reluctance, and with an intense
feeling of depression, that I withdrew my head drenched in spray
from the brink of the precipice, to examine in detail other parts of the
Falls. One might almost gaze for ever on this abyss in which a mighty
mass of water appears eternally burying itself in a mist-shrouded
grave. The clouds of spray which continually ascend heavenwards in
slow and majestic wreaths, appear to typify the shade wy.ghoets of the

i 845.] across the Peninsula of Southern India. 4 1 9

entombed waters. The principal or Horse-shoe f*all is deeply located
at the right bend of the ellipse formed by the entire chasm. Over it
is precipitated the great bulk of the river, which fell over the edge
with a smooth and graceful curve in one huge muddy mass, and de.
seended in an unbroken sheet until lost to the eye in the volumes of
spray below.

The Rocket Fall is on the left of the Horscshoe^and^ though insig-
nificant in volume, is a cascade of extreme beauty^ excelling those
of Tivoli. This Fall after descending perpendicularly a great depth,
encounters a projecting ledge of rock from which it glances with great
velocity y^ whiteness, and brilliancy, forming in its descent the parabolic
curve of a rocket, and sending off brilliant white jets resembling foil-
ing stars and tailed meteors.

The Roarer^ so named from its noise, is nearer the Horse-shoe than
the Rocket, and larger in volume ; it descends in two streams upon a
shelf of rocky down the highly inclined surface of which they rush
with much noise and rapidity in one mingled mass of foam. In the
dry weather no less than six or seven other Falls are distinguishable.
I observed a number of small rills which^ after descending some dis^
tance, separated into threads: these, in descending, became gradually
divided into drops and spray, and mingled with the ascending wreaths
of mist, apparently never reaching the bottom of the cataract.

In order to asoertain the height of the principal Fall, we let down a
plummet attached to about 1000 feet of rope ; but it got entangled
near the bottom of the precipice, and broke in our exertions to draw it
up. Mr. T. Lnshington, of the Madras Civil Service, informs me, that
he had successfully measured it in the dry season, and the result oT
these measurements were as follow i^—

Feet.

From the top of the Falls to the surface of 1 nog
the water in the basin below, . • j

Depth of water in the basin, . . • • 300

Total, •« .. 1188 feet.
The sheet of water above the Falls was about 300 yards broad, (Mr.
E). Mai thy, of the Civil Service, informs me it is sometimes nearly 600
yards broad), and at least on average eight feet deep,* current about six

420 NoU8, principally Geological^ [No. 162.

or seven miles per hoar. In the dry season it is scarcely knee.deep,
and can be forded immediately above the Falis^ with perfect safety, to
the opposite bank, whence a path, partly hewn in the rock, leads to the
basin and bed of the river below, impracticable or nearly so in the
depth of the monsoon. There are many other cascades in Upper Canara
seen glancing among the forest-dad heights of the Ghauts^ but which
are approachable with difficulty during the monsoon, for instance, those
near Yellapoor, and Honeycoom, about three koss from AllawuUy.

To have a true estimate of the beauty of the Falls of Gairsuppa,
they should be visited both during the monsoon, and when the water
in the river is so low as to admit of their being viewed from below.

The rocks immediately beneath must present one of the n|ost strik-
ing illustrations in the world of the eroding action of falling water, as
proved by the immense depth of the basin. To these must be added
the abrading effects of precipitated masses of rock. At the time of my
visit not less than 43,000 cubic feet of water, by rough calcolation,
were falling per second into this vast rock basin.

The precipice, over which the water falls, affords a fine section of
the gneiss and its associated hypogene schists, which dip Easterly and
Northerly away from the Falls at an angle of about 35^. The gneiss
is composed of quartz and felspar, with both mica and hornblende,
and alternates with micaceous, talcose, actynolitic, chloritic and horn-
blende schists, imbedding (especially the latter) iron pyrites. These
rocks are penetrated by veins of quarts and felspar, and also of a fine-
grained granite composed of small grains of white felspar, quartz, and
mica. Christie is of opinion, that this rock is not so old a granite as
the ordinary granites of India, and that this is the only locality in
India where he has met with primitive gneiss. No sound geological
proof, however, is assigned for this opinion. All the granites of India
are of posterior origin to the hypogene rocks, which they have invaded
and altered. Regarding the age of the hypogene rocks themselves —
always a most difficult problem to solve — we are still in the dark;
nor does the fact of this granite being associated with the so-called
" primitive gneiss," lead us to infer an origin more recent than the or-
dinary granites of South India.

The mass of hypogene rocks has evidently been worn back several
hundred feet by the erosion and abrasion of the cataract ; the softer

1845.] across the Peninsula af SouUisrn India. 421

talcose and micaceous Bchists have suffered most. Mr. £• Maltby tells
me, that an instance lately occurred of the manner in which the great
Fall has receded. One of the crags composing the edge of the precipice
gave way, and in its descent struck a projecting ledge of rock with so
▼iolent a concussion as to carry away a large extent of the face of the
precipice. The whole mass fell into the basin below with a noise that
startled the country for some miles around.

Rock basins are frequent in the bed of the river^ which is worn in
the rocky and rugged with water. worn rocky masses. The Falls of
Gairsuppa may be justly ranked amongst the most magnificent
cataracts of the globe. While excelled in height by the Cerosoli
and Evanson cascades in the Alps/ and the Falls of the Arve in
SaToy^ the Gairsuppa cataract surpasses them in volume of water
precipitated; and while much iDferior to Niagara in volume, it far
excels these celebrated Falls of the New World in height.

There are other picturesque falls and cascades in this part of the
Ghauts : those most worth seeing are the cascades of Honeycoom, about
three koss from Allawully, and those of Yellapoor. Farther North
are the splendid Falls of the Yenna in the Mahabuleshwar hills, 600
feet high ; and to the South those of the Cauvery, 300^ viz., the Gunga
Cbakki 300 feet high, and the fiurra Chakki, or Southern Fall, about
200 feet. Then come the Cascades of the Neilgherris, viz. those of Py.
kari, Kaiteeor Kulhattee, and the Elk cataract. The Falls of Courtai-
Inm in Tinnevelly are about 220 feet high, and the sacred cataract of
Pupanassum among the Ghauts of Travancore 160 feet high, and
lastly, of the Falls of Komari near Cape Comorin. The mass of water
precipitated over these Falls in the monsoon, and the amount of erosion
and minor details are still desiderata. Many other Cascades exist in
the Western Ghauts, of which there are no published accounts at all.
Those of Gokauk I have already attempted to describe.

* The height of the Cerosoli Cascade is 2400 feet; that of Evanson, 1200 feet; and
the Falls of the Arve, 1 100 feet.

At Niagara a sheet of water, two miles across, is contracted to less than half its former
breadth, and in the state of an impetuous rapid, running at the rate of seven or eight
miles an hour, and about 25 feet in depth, is hurled over a projecting mass of horizon-
tal limestone strata down a precipice 164 feet high, over which it falls in two great
sheets into the basin below.

422 NoUSi principally 'Geohgiealy QNo. 162.

Western facade of the Ghaute. We now descended the Ghaats
by the Hossulmakki Pass. Qneiu and its associated schists are seen as
at Oairsuppa ; but the gneiss is not so abundant.

These rocks are for the most part covered by a bed of red clay, some*
times fifteen feet thick ; and on the summit of the Ghaut by laterite,
in insulated beds and large dark coloured blocks. The laterite is al-
most wanting on the steepest descents^ but is seen on the temces
which break the declivity, and again at a short distance from the base
covering for the most part the lowlands of Canara to the sea at Honore.

Not far from the summit of the Ghauts two dykes of basaltic green,
stone were crossed^ running in a S. E. direction. The dip of the hy-
pogene schists^ which compose the great mass of the mountain chain, is
irregular and confused, both on the descent and at the base.

The amount of dip varies from nearly vertical to horizontal, and
the strata in many situations have suffered irregular flexures and con*
tortious. One great mass of schists at the base dipped Westerly at an
angle of dO^*.

Baee of the Western Ghauts. The gneiss and mica schists at the base
of the Ghauts are veined with a pegmatite composed of white quarts,
and flesh-coloured felspar^ which is rather massive than schistose, and
occasionally exhibits a tendency to assume the doubly oblique prisma-
tic structure, or primary form of the latter mineral. Sometimes siU
very white mica is seen segregated in this rock in very large rhombie
prisms, capable of being divided, like the hemi. prismatic talc mica of
Russia, called Muscovy glass, into extremely thin lamellae.

The mica schist passes distinctly into a chloritic clay slate, and
into reddish and variegated slate clays resembling those around
Darwar in the South Mahratta country. The white and purplish
varieties have the same soft, and obscurely slaty structure. These
again, where exposed, rapidly assume the state of clay, under the
heavy monsoon rains.

I observed several groupes of pinnacled columns, a foot or more in
height, formed in these clays by the action of the heavy drops of rain
falling from the high forest trees which shade them. On the top
of each pinnacle was a small pebble, which explained the modus
operandi

1845.^ across the Peninsula of Southern India, 423

These pebbles had been scattered over the surface of the clay, and
had protected like a cap the portion of clay immediately under it from
the downward washing action of these heavy drops, which had evi.
dently worn away the intervening portions not similarly capped and
protected. On removing the stone from the top of one of these
columns, it was soon washed down by the heavy rain then fiiilling.

Large veins of white, blackish and faint rose-coloured quartz asso.
dated with felspar, and imbedding large plates of silvery mica, are
seen in the schists which in disintegration form a white earth with
crimson dots and patches.

Tofvn of Gairsuppa. A short distance Westerly from the base of
the Ghauts, and about sixteen miles direct distance from the sea at
Honore, stands the modern village or town of Gairsuppa. pleasantly
situated on the left bank of the river to whose Fails it has given its name.
It is shaded by a grove of tall cocoa-nut trees.

A little to the South of the present village lie the ruins of the an.
cient town which, under the rule of the Jaina Rajas of Ikery and
Bednore, and the female dynasty of Baira-devi, is said to have con-
taindd a lac of habitations, and seventy.fbur Bastis or Jaina temples.

Although these traditions are not to be relied on implicitly, still there
are marks of *' Gairsuppa" having once been a place of considerable
importance, as evident by the extent of the mounds and remains of walls
enclosures, wells, &c. The remnants of five or six Jaina temples are
still visible, in one of which stood the Chatur Muki, or four-foced idol
of this sect.

It now comprises about fifty houses^ inhabited principally by Sirigarras,
a few Mahomedans, Conany Brahmins, and the low caste Halipaiks.

The Haiga Brahmins live chiefly on their own estates in houses scat,
tered over the surface of the tract from which they derive their appel-
lation of " Haiga," extending from Honore to Gokem.

From Gairsuppa to Honore, The face of the country from the
town of Gairsuppa to Honore is diversified by hill and dale, well
clothed with wood and thicket. The formation is chiefly laterite co.
vering the hypogene schists, and forming long low ranges skirting the
vallies, through which the Ghaut drainage finds its way to the sea,
and flat- topped conical hills. Although the highest present freshes
do not reach the base of the laterite clifis which flank their banks, it is

424 Notes, principally Geological^ [No. 162.

evident that they must have done so at some more ancient epoch dar-
ing the elevation of the Ghauts from the bed of the ocean. They pre-
sent alternately salient and re-entering angles^ precisely similar to
those seen in the banks of a large river.

Honore. The fort of Honore, or more correctly Honawar, stands
on high, fiat, topped cliffs of laterite^ the base of which is washed by the
embouchure of the Sarawati or Gairsuppa river, which here forms an
extensive back-water or lagoon, owing to its mouth being obstructed
by a bar of sand. The channel is said to have shifted within the IssC
fourteen years.

The embouchure to the N. E. is protected by a small projecting
island. The river during the rains is navigable for native craft as fiur
as Chendawar.

The remains of Tippoo's lines are still to be seen on the laterite
cliffs to the E. N. E. The public buildings, bungalows of the civilians
and military, occupy the top of the cliff on which the old fort stpod,
and of which nothing but the foundations are now visible.

The native town lies at the base of the cliflb, and contains between
five and six hundred houses, inhabited principally by Concany Bnh-
mins> Haiga Brahmins, Mussulmans, native Christians, Haiipaiks,
Gouras, and a few Jains.

The staple produce is rice, cocoa-nut, and betel-nut. Salt fish is
exported in considerable quantity, and the Gurugars here are cele-
brated for their skill in carving the sandal-wood of the Ghauts into
work-boxes, card-cases, desks, &c.

Honore was early a place of considerable traffic The Portuguese
erected a fort here in 1505 a. d., and Hyder a dockyard, for the par-
pose of building a navy.

It is now a small civil and military station, subordinate to Manga-
lore, the head-quarters of the Collectorate of Ganara. 'The tem-
perature of the river freshes here in the month of August, was 78^*
Temperature of sea 76^ Of wells from 84 to 87''. The last, which
is that of. a spring called Ram Thert, is possibly thermal? Tem-
perature of air in the shade at the time 81 °. Off the mouth of the river
is a bold picturesque islet, said to abound in iron ore.

On the bank of the river near its mouth and close to the water's
edge, I found some rounded fragments of a cream-coloured fossil lime-

1846.] across the Peninsula of Southern India, 425

stone, which at first from their situation and rolled appearance^ I
thought had been transported from the Ghauts by the river freshes ;
but which, on &rther enquiry, I found had been discharged as ballast
by boatmen from the N. of Bombay, probably from Cutch.

Some of these foteils are evidently a species of nummulite; others
have a singular spiral structure, and spherical globular form, of which
my friend Captain AUardyce has favoured me with the following mag.
nified drawings. (See Fig., Diagrams \ and 2. J

Of these singular fossils, I shall give Captain Allardyce's description,
instead of my own.

Description of Fig. 1.

This is a section of the fossil as it is most frequently seen : it shews
little of the structure, except that it is convolute in this direction, which
leads to the idea of its being a shell, and this a section across its axis
or column.

Description of Fig. 2.

This is a section of the same shell in the direction of its column :
the outer portion is an even fracture towards the centre tending to
divide the shell equally ; but the interior portion must be supposed
raised and hemispherical, part of the crust having been removed to
shew the structure.

The striae are minute grooves, being the longitudinal sections of a
set of capillary tubes that run spirally round the column in number
amounting to 50 or 100 all abreast.

The transverse section of these tubes is seen in the last whorl near
the circumference, where they are cut across, and appear in the
shape of pores or holes. During each revolution the tubes terminate
six or eight times in a general partition, which runs from one end of
the column to the other ; so that these partitions resemble the divisions
of an orange or the valves of a capsule. The tubes can be nothing else
than spiral cells, while instead of one as in other shells, there is a great
number combined, and it appears as if the animal had been divided
into many parts like the corals. The thickness of the crust, as com.
pared with the diameter of the cells, is extraordinary ; and in this res-
pect also there is a resemblance to the corals and encrinites.

The exterior shape of the fossil is subglobose.

3 N

426 Geologieal Noiet ef Souih$m India. [No. 162.

There is another organic form contained in this limestone^ of which
the following figure No. 3, will give an idea^ and which I think may
be the true transverse section of No. 2. It exhibits concentric lines of
holes or pores, slightly depressed at the extremities, and generally three
in number. fSee Fi^,, Diagram S.J

These fossils do not appear in the Gutch catalogue, or in other figured
fossils of India that have fallen under my notice.

On the Mbris and Abors of Assam. By Lieut, J. T. E. Dalton, Assis-
tant Commissioner, Assam. In a letter to Major Jbnkins. Commwut-
cated by the Government of India.

Mt dbab Major, — I have this moment received yours of the 8th, for
which many thanks. I fully intended sending you a supplemental paper,
giving' such information as I was able to collect regarding the Abors,
their trade with the Meris, and communication with Thibet. The account
I sent you was hurriedly written, and is, I know, very incomplete in
many material points ; but as a mere programme for the more ample
narrative we may next year be, I hope, enabled to compile, it may not
be necessary to add much to it at present.

The Customs, Language, Religion, SfC. There is no very material differ-
ence between the Abors and Meris. They are evidently of common ori-
gin, and the Duphlas are of the same race. The Meris from their inter-
course with the plains are, in some respects, more civilized, but almost
all I have said concerning them applies equally to th# tribes more remote.
They intermarry with them, exchange slaves, and are generally in the
habit of constant intercourse. The Meris, many of whom have become
rich in cattle and goods, appreciate the value of combining for mntosl
support, and dwell in villages. The Abors, as they themselves say,
are like tigers, two cannot dwell in one den; and I understand their
houses are scattered singly or in groups of two and three over the im-
mense extent of mountainous country occupied by them.

The Meris say, that whenever a few families of Abors have united into
a society, fierce Tends about women and summary vengeance, or the

'•••.•.•.«••

.«•:

Fossil ^dits (ma^jufitd)
oCllasfraie CnpioUa, Murtcidi ht.

1 845 .] On ike Meri$ and Abort of Assam. 4 27

dread of it. Boon breakB up or scatters the community. They therefore
prefer building apart, and depending upon their own resources for main-
taining themselves in their isolated positions. They are compelled to be
more industrious than the Meris, and can fuhion themselves daos and
weave coarse cloth, arts of which the Mens are ignorant, or more
correctly speaking, which they have lost. The iron for the former is, I
believe, obtained from the other side, for I have not learnt that they un-
derstand the art of working the ore, and that which the Mens import
from the plains they purchase ready made into daos for their own use.

The cotton used in the coarse cloths they weave is grown by them-
selves, very little of it ever finds its way down here ; but I saw one load
of it this year, and it appeared of excellent quality. Between the Abors
and Meris there is a considerable trade. The Meris import from the
Abor country munjeet, beads, daos, " Deo guntas*' the little bells I
have described in my former account, and cooking utensils of metal,
Myttons, slaves, and I may say wives, their marriages being so entirely
a matter of barter. In return for which the Abors take cloths of
Assamese manufacture, salt or any articles imported by the Meris from
Assam. Of the mode in which their intercourse with Thibet is carried on*
1 have as yet obtained very little information. I have never yet met
with an Abor who had been across, and the Meris I have questioned on
the subject assert they had not seen the tribes who are in direct com-
munication ; but from those who had seen them they had heard of a
fine rich country inhabited by people who wore fine clothes, dwelt in
stone houses, and rode on horses, which was watered by a mighty river.
How ever they manage it, the Abors import from this country every
thing above enumerated, save the munjeet, slaves, and wives that they
interchange with the Meris. The large metal dishes thus imported
are of superior manufacture, and ^ fetch high prices when brought in
here by the Meris. The Meris possess cooking vessels of great size so
obtained, which they use at their feasts, but are very jealous of produc-
ing before strangers. The daos are of superior temper, but of rude
finish, and of the workmanship, as I believe, of Thibetan blacksmiths ;
they are probably made in the rough for the express purpose of barter
with these people, as they are made in Luckimpore for the Meris, In
addition to the articles I have enumerated, the Abors import salt (from-
the description given of it rock salt) from the north, for it appears they

428 Oa the Meris and Abors of Assam, |^No. 162.

have a very scanty supply of it, and gladly take our salt from the Mens
when they can get it. I presume it to be an importation : what they ex-
port in return I know not, but most likely cotton and munjeet. Be-
tween the Duphla and Mens countries there is a tribe called " Auks"
and ** Auka Meris" by the Assamese, who never visit the plains, but yet
appear, from all I have been able to glean regarding them, very superior
to the tribes of this family we are acquainted with. Surrounded by lofty
mountains, the country they inhabit is an extensive valley, represented
as being perfectly level, and watered by a branch or perhaps the principal
stream of the Soondree, and richly cultivated. They are said to possess
fifteen large villages, the cultivation of one adjoining that of the other,
so that there is no waste land between. Their chief cultivation and sole
staple appears to be rice, to rear which they irrigate the land, and are
said to have magnificent crops in return. Their lands are not, I am told,
adapted to the cultivation of cotton, but they procure as much of it as
they require from the Abors in exchange for rice. In industry and art
they are acknowledged by the Meiis to be very much their superiors,
who however, perhaps for this very reason; look upon the Aukas as their
inferiors in the scale of creation. The Auka ladies wear blue or black
petticoats, and jackets of white cotton of their own manufacture : their
faces are tatooed " unde nomen" Auka, which is given to them by the
Assamese. They call themselves " Tenae." The males do not rejoice
in much drapery ; they wear a girdle of cane-work painted red, which
hangs down behind in a long bushy tail I am told, and must have a
comical effect. Of their religion all I have heard is, that every fourth
year there is a kind of religious jubilee devoted to sacrificing and feast-
ing at the different villages by turns ; and on these occasions, some one
officiates as priest : other particulars in which they differ from the Mens
have been related to me. The Meris, however extensive the family
and the number of married couples it includes, all occupy one house.
The young men of the Tenae tribe when they marry leave their
fathers' house, and set up for themselves. During the Moamorya troubles
many of the Assamese of this division are said to have sought and
found in the Tenae valley a refuge from the persecutions of that sect,
the refugees appear to have been generously treated, and no obstacles
were opposed to their return to their own country when the dangers .that
threatened them were removed ; but I have sometimes heard that a few

1845.] Oh the MtrU and Abars of Assam. 429

remained of their own free-will, who settled in the valley, and are still
to be found there.

The Tenae appear to be a very peaceably disposed people, but they
occasionally are compelled to take up arms to punish marauding
Abors, and they are said to do the business at once effectually and
honorably, whilst the Mens and Abors confine their warfare to noc-
turnal and secret attacks, and, if successful in effecting a surprise, in-
diBcriminately massacre men, women, and children. The Tenae declare
hostilities, march openly to attack their enemy, and make war only
on men, and their revenge does not extend beyond the simple attain-
ment of their object in taking up arms. If this be true, it places them ia>
a high rank, as a hum^e people, amongst our Mountain tribes. Tema
is my authority for both assertions, humiliating as it should have been
to him, and honorable to them ; but he made the confession of the Men
mode of waging war without any remorse of conscience.

Assured that a more particular and better authenticated account of
a people so sequestered and peculiar, would be interesting, I would, if
permitted, next cold season make every effort to visit them, in the
manner least calculated to excite jealousy or alarm. Their country
is most easily accessible from the Duphla Door ; but I am not yet well
acquainted with this tribe, and am not prepared to say that it would
be safe to attempt a passage through their country without a strong
guard, which would defeat my object entirely ; and having, I think,
secured the good- will of the Meris, I would prefer, their route, though
said to possess more natural difficulties ; ascending the Soobanshiri as be-
fore to Siploo Ghaut, I propose, after having paid Tema's country a
second visit and explored such of the Sowrock country as lies on this
side of the Soobanshiri, to proceed to the Turbotheah villages. The
Turbotheah have promised to assist me in every way from Tema's
village to their own, and as the Aukas or Tenae are only two good
marches from the Turbotheah Meris, I should hope to be able to make
amicable arrangements with them and the intervening Abors to permit
me to proceed in safety to their valley.

I cannot hold out any very sanguine expectations of being able to
penetrate so far as to behold Thibet from the mountain tops, or to gain
much knowledge of that country ; but without crossing the snowy range
there is a vast extent of interesting country to explore, and if Mr.

430 On the Mens an^ Abors of Assam. [No. 162.

M BStera agrees to accompany me, we may pick up much worth know-
ing. I am sorry I was unable to send you a sketch of my late route.
I wrote to Mr. Homton, for a surveyor and the loan of a compass for
myself, but unfortunately my letter did not find him at home, and I did
not receive his answer till after my return. 1 had made my arrange-
ments, and could not wait. I send you herewith a very rough ideal
sketch, (published at p. 226) the ill execution of which I hope you will
excuse, as I am very much hurried.

lliis time next year I hope to be able to propose an excursion to ex-
plore the Duphlas country. I had an interview yesterday with a con-
siderable number of them, those for whom the salt has been sanctioned ;
and having concluded the business of the day, 1 had an amicable
talk with them, and, on the question of a visit being started, they made
no demur.

Luckimpore, the 23rd March, 1845.

Notice of some Unpublished Coins of the Indo- Scythians, By Lieutenant

Alexander Cunningham, Engineers,

In the accompanying plate are exhibited the small silver disc which
was extracted from the Manikyala Tope by General Ventura, and seve-
ral new coins of the Indo- Scythians, some of which are highly interest-
ing from their undoubted Bauddha figures, emblems, and inscriptions.
These coins afford the last links in the chain of evidence to prove the
identity of the Indo- Scythian Kanbrki, with the Buddhist prince Ka-
NisHKA of Kashmir, as was conjectured by Mr. James Prinsep, so hx
back as 1833.

No. 1 . — A thin piece of silver inscribed with an Ariano-Pali legend
in two lines. In this short inscription, as in all the Tope inscriptions
yet found, the letters are of a cursive and less decided form than those
of the coins. Many of them are of course easily distinguishable ; bat
there are others which bear no resemblance whatever to any of the let-
ters found on the coins ; and yet they can scarcely be new characters,
as I believe that I have found the Ariano-Pali equivalent for every let-
ter of the Sanskrit alphabet. Some of them may be new forms of
known characters, and others are no doubt compound letters which may

1845.] Unpublished Coins ol the IndO' Scythians, 431

possibly baffle us for a long time. The chief difficulty, howe7er» lies in
the loose and cursive manner of the writing, in which many letters of
similar forms are represented by characters of the same shape.

In the present short inscription the only douhtful letters are in the
lower line. The upper line reads simply Gamangasa, " of the anointed
body (or limb)/' from ^fptf gom* to anoint, and ^^ angga, the body
(or a member of it). In the lower line the first letter on the right is cer-
tainly k, (I write with two electro- type facsimiles of the original lying
before me) ; the second looks more like n than any other letter ; the
third is / ; the fourth is tu or fo, according to my alphabet ; and the
last is clearly s : thus forming kanatatusa, which is the Pali form of
the Sanskrit kangatrairasa, " the supporter or cherisher of maidens."
The whole inscription is therefore Gowumgasa kanatatusa, " (Stupa or
Tope) of the anointed body of Kanyatratra."

The gold coins extracted from this Tope by General Ventura declare,
in my opinion, most unquestionably, the age of the monument. They
belong to OHPKI or Hoerki, whom I identify with Hushka, a Tartar
sovereign of Kashmir just before the beginning of the Christian era.
In General Court's inscription the Tartar prince Kanishka is mentioned
with the title of Maharaja ; and this title is also found in a second
cylinder inscription. From these instances I infer, that when a tope
was erected over a royal personage, his royal titles were inserted ; and
that in the absence of any title, we may judge that the tope was built
over either a relic of Buddha; or the ashes of some eminent follower.
Bhagawa himself particularly mentions the merits to be acquired from
building tkupa (topes) over relics of Sawaka or Chakkawati Rajas. In the
present instance therefore 1 believe that the great Manikyala tope was
built over a Sawaka (Sanskrit Srawaka) or lay votary of Buddha, named
Kanyatratra ; and that General Court's smaller tope was built over the
relics of Kanishka himself.

I can find no authority for the erection of topes over the relics of the
Buddhist priesthood, although we possess the names of no less than
twenty, seven of the chief priests or patriarchs of the Buddhists, from the
death of Sakya Sinha to a. d. 499. I find that in b. c. 62 to 28, the
patriarch of Western India was named Kia-na-shi-pho, probably Kanya^
sihha, " the praiser of maidens." There is some similarity between this
name and that of Kanyatratra, *' thfe cherisher of maidens ;" but in the

432 Notice of $ofM J/npublished Coins [No. 162.

absence of all authority showing that stupas were erected over the piieat-
hood, it is impossible to insist upon the identity of the two persons.

In support of the values which 1 have given to two of the letters in
this inscription, I must refer to other inscriptions in which these letters
are found. The first of them, which I have read as ^ ii^, in Goman-
gasa, occurs in Ventura's Manikyala cylinder inscription, in what is
most likely the name of the father of Kanyatratra. That inscription I
read as follows :

Swati' Siri' Munipasa- Gangaphuka' Munipa-putasa,

Swati Siri is the Sanskrit Swasti Sri, an auspicious invocation of very
common occurrence in the beginning of inscriptions even at the present
day. Muni is a holy personage, with the affix of, pa, usually given to
holy men ; for instance Gwali, after whom Gwali awara (Gwalior) is
named, is invariably called Gwalipa. Gangaphuka means " the bird of
the Ganges ;'* and the whole legend is " All hail ! (Tope) of the Muoi,
the son of Gangaphuka Muni." This of course refers to Kanyatratra
Muni ; and indeed the very name of Manikiyala points to the same
conclusion ; Muni-ka^alaya being " the place of the Muni."* Another
Muni is mentioned in Court's Manikyala inscription as well as the Ma-
haraja Kanishka.

The same letter occurs again in the legends of the Kozola-Kadaphes,
and Kozonlo-Kadphizes coins. The native legends of these coins are,
with one or two slight variations, identical. That of Kozola-Kadaphes
which has on the Greek side ZAGOY KOZOAA KAAA4>EC
XOPANCY, reads

Kkushangasa Yatugasa Kujula Kasasa, SfC,
that of Kozonlo-Kadphizes, which has on the Greek side KOZOYAO
KAA<I>IZOY KOPC or KOP CO, reads

Kushangasa Yatugasa Kujula Kasasa, SfC.

which I interpret as " (Coin) of the king of the Kuei-shang, Kozola-Kada-
phes." We know that the Kuei-shang were one of the five tribes of the
Great Yu-chi, which tribe I identify with the Asiani, .one of the people

* Another derivation may be from il/ant, a gem ; Mani-ki-alaya, " the place or re*
ceptacle of the gem or relic."

1845.] of the Indo^ Scythians. 433

tbat overthrew the Bactmn Greek kingdom. ZAOOC^ I suppose to be
only the Greek rendering of the Zend khshathra, king, of whieh we pos-
sess no less than fonr other readings, namely : Hvarpi|c» fivapniCy
3«prYiC9 and Badpnc * the last of which is almost the same as the
Z A602 of our coins. The Kiiei«shang tribe occnpied a city to the sonth
of So»mo-ki-an, or Samarkand, called Kuei-shwangjta, winch name is
still preserved in the modem Kesh, the birth-place of Timur. It is
called Ka«h6niyah by Abutfeda.

Another tribe of the Ghreat Vuobi were tibe Shwang*mi, who oeeupied
the country called Sbang*mi to the south of Wakhan and of the Great
Movmtains, which muat be the modem Cbitral and Mastnj.

A third tnbe« the Hieu-mi, occupied the country on tlse Upper Oxus,
or .Wakhan. They gave their name to their capital* which was called
Ho-m^; and from them, I believe, the river Oxus to have taken its name
of Amid, because it rose in the oountry of the men-mi. The Shakh
river gave its name to Shakhnan, and the Waksh or Wakh river gave
its name to Wakhan. Waksh, or Oksh (ji^^ must have been the name
from which the Greeks made Qxmm.

The Hieu-mi tribe had at least one powerful monarch in the second
Kadphises, who is called OOHMO on all his coins ; a name which the
French Savana MM, R. Rochette and Jacquet curiously divided, giving
one-half to Kadphises, whom they called Mokadphiees, and leaving the
other half to stand upon its own responaibitity.

The isharacter which I have read as tu or tp ocenrs in the legend of the
coins of this Kadphises, which I read somewhat differently from Mr.
Prinsep, he having been misled by giving an erroneous vahie to the letter
g^ which he read as ph. The whole legend, acoording to my alphabet,
isjp ' Maharqfasa Safadirajusa Sabafytfuhi-Surasa MahuSurasa HautKa-^

* It is now searly ibur yesM since I corrected this errof frem eke iefgenAg of die
coins of Gondophares, and his nephew Abdagasee. On tke coins of the latter the Greek

legend is BA2IA YA2IA YNAIOEPUJ AAEA<i>IAElUS, and the
natlTO legend is ^* Maharc^asa tadarasa Ahdagasasa Oondophara bhata'putasa,*'
** (Coin) 4f the gtedt King, the preserver, Abdagases, Gondophara's-brother's-son."
Here wo haye khata^pukt. ihe Hieral transUtioa of the Greek A AE A4>I AELLIS.
This Kashmiris still say Bhai-putr, The letter g occars abo in the native transcript
of the Greek ^^ partly oq which is rendered in Pali Thategasaf The whole legend

is ** Aspatdtita Thategasa jayatasa IndatcUiputasa^** '* (Coin) of the General Aspa-
hates, the yictorious, the son of Indrabates." Aspabates was the General of Azas. His
coins are found in the Western Panjab.

434 Notice of same Unpublished Coins [Na 162.

phisasa Taiasa,' '* (Coin) of the great King, the '* King of kings, tbe
every-wheiie-destroying-hero, the hero.of-the.world, (of the tribe of)
Hieu-mi, Kaophisbb, the preserver." On one well preserved cdn the
letter hi is omitted in the middle of the inscription, which, if intentional,
simplifies the third title to ' Sabatoga^Swasa,' " the all-pervading hero."
Sabatu is the regular Pali-form of the Sanscrit Sarwatra, everywhere,
in all places.

The coins which I am now about to describe, with the single ezcep-
tion of No. 4, have all been in my own possession. My gold coins have
passed into the hands of Sir Herbert Maddock ; but I. still retain perfect
impressions of them both in lead and sealing-wax. Figs. 2, 3 and 4
are unique : fig. 5 is not uncommon ; but finely preserved spedmena,
such as the one now published, are extremely rare. Fig. 6 is unique.
Of Fig. 7, I have seen only three specimene ; one of smaller size in Mr.
James Prinsep's cabinet ; a specimen in my own possession from tbe
Kabul valley ; and the coin now published, which was amongst those ex-
tracted by Qeneral Ventura from the Manikyala Tope, and is now in my
cabinet. Fig. 8, is common ; but good specimens are very rare. Figs.
9, 10 and 1 1 are all rare : the last is the rarest, and the first the least rare.

No. 2. — A round gold coin, weighing 122 grains, of very good make,
and in excellent order.

Obverse. Half length figure of the king inclined to the left ; tbe head
encircled by a halo, and dressed in a highly ornamented tiara : flames issue
from his shoulders ; his left hand grasps a sceptre, and in his upraised
right hand he holds before him a cylindrical object by a handle below.
His dress consists of an under robe fastened down the middle, and an
upper garment open in front, with loose sleeves, and adorned with
necklaces and armlets. Inscription around the piece in barbarous

Greek characters PAO NANO PAO O {tipKi) KOPANO, "The
King of kings, Hobrki, Koran."

Reverse, A full length winged female figure, dressed in an upper gar-
ment with short sleeves, and in a long under robe reaching to her feet :
she carries a trident, or perhaps an elongated cornucopia in her left
hand, and in her right she holds out a chaplet. In the field to the
right is the usual monograph of the Indo- Scythian coins ; and to the
left in bad Greek characters the legend CAMI (or OANI) MAO;
the whole ornamented by a dotted circle.

1845.] of the Indo- Scyihians. 435

The figure on the reverse of this piece is very like that of Victory on
the coins of Menander, Azas, and Undopherras ; and it has also a strik-
ing resemblance to the Ardokro, depicted in No. 10 of the accompany-
ing plate. But the legend appears to be Vami Mao, which, if intended
for the Sanscrit WTTTf Varna, a woman, may be translated as " the
female Moon/' or Chandri, the consort of Surya or the Sun. For the
Moon is an Androgyal deity ; being male or the god Chandra, when in
opposition to the Sun, and becoming female or the goddess Chandri,
when in conjunction with the Sun. If the legend should be Vani Mao,
the interpretation will then perhaps denote some identification of the
Moon with the goddess Saraswaii, who as TRft* Vani, was the goddess
of Science and Learning, and who, as the consort of the Suti, became the
mother of the river Jumna, q*^* Vahni, fire, can scarcely be couj^ed
with Mao, the Moon.

No. 3. — A round gold coin, weighing 125 grains, of good make, and
in fair order.

Obverse. Essentially the same as that of the coin just described, ex-
cepting that the left hand of the king is apparently empty, and that the
ends of a diadem are seen floating behind his head. Legend in bad
Grreek characters, almost illegible from faulty striking, but probably the
same as the last.

Reverse, A full length male figure to the left, clothed in a long sleev-
ed dress, with a loose robe flowing behind ; the head surrounded by a
radiated halo ; the right arm extended to the right, and the left hand
resting on the hip. In the field to the left the common Indo- Scythian
monograph ; and to the right in bad Greek letters the legend OM
BOA, or perhaps OZ!iI BOA ; either Aum Buddha, or Adi Buddha ;
the BOA being most probably a contraction of B0AYA2, which
was one of the several Greek renderings of the name of Buddha.

On both of these coins, the instrument, which the prince holds in his
right hand, resembles exactly the praying cylinder which is used by all
Lamas of the present day. It is called Muni by the Bhotias, and Skoru
by the Tibetans.. I have one now lying before me, which I procured
from a Lama near Triloknath on the Chandrabhaga river. It is a thin
cylinder of brass, three inches long, and two inches and a half in diame.
ter, filled with along paper roll of writing, which, I was told, contained
only prayers. By a gentle motion of the hand it is kept continuaUy re-

436 Notice afiomt UtqnAlisfied Coitu C^o. 162.

Tolving upon its axis, which» being prolonged below, fomu the handle of
the instnunent. The motkm is asaitted and r^ulated by a small octa>
gonal piece of iron fastened by a short chain to the side of the cylinder.

Moorcroft saw one of these mechanical prayer-mills, of a lai^ size,
turned by water, which probably performed the prayers of a whole
village, while the inhabitants were at work in their fields. Every Lama
carries a Skoru or Mnni ; and if these Indo-6cythian kings had spiri-
tnal as well as temporal authority, as the flames issuing from their
shoulders would seem to show, (Mahawanso, p. 27,) no instrument could
be more appropriately put in their hands than the praying cylinder.

A common expression in Buddhist writings is ** turning the wheel
of the law ;" and in the 7th volume of the Asiatic Society's Journal,
p. 147, M. Gsoma states, on Buddhistical authority, that the 8th general
principle for the conduct of a zealous Buddhist is ** to exhort all
Buddhas to turn the ' wheel of religion.' ** Now I would suggest that
this <* wheel of the law," or "wheel of religion," (dharmma-chakra)
may be only the praying cylinder ; and that to turn the wheel of the
law meant Hterallf to turn the prayer cylinder ; and figurativelf to
make religion advance. This interpretation, which would prove, be-
yond, all doubt, that these princes were of the Buddhist religion, is I
think fully borne out by the Buddhistical version which I have given to
the reverse legend of No. 3, and by the Buddhistical figures and legends
on the reverses of Nos. 6 and 7.

No. 4.— Around gold coin, of beautiful make, and in excellent pre-
servation. This piece belonged to the collection of my much lamented
friend, the late Dr. Lord ; and it is now, I believe, in the museum of the
East India House.

Ohveree. A full length male figure to the left, apparently dressed
in a complete suit [of chain armor ; the head encircled by a halo, and
covered by a helmet, having long flaps which protect the ears ; — the
left hand raised and holding a trident, and the right hand pointing
downwards to an undecided object, which may probably be only a cy-
linder similar to those found in the Topes ; or it may be a small Stupa
itself, as it is surmounted by a trident. In either case it would be an
object held sacred as containing a relic of Baddha. Legend in bad Greek
characters around the piece PAO NANO PAO BAAANO KO-
PANO, «* The King of kings, Balanus (or Bala,) Koran.

1 845 .] €fth^ IndO' Scythians. 437

Reverie. A three-headed full length figure to the right, standiDg
before a bull, which has a bell hanging from its neck ; the figure clad in
the Indian dkoti, and wearing the sacred string of the superior castes ;
and liolding out in his three hands, three different objects, one of which
looks like a noose. The Indo-Scythian monograph over the bull's
head; and to the left in bad Greek letters the word OKrO, which
Professor Lassen has -happily explained by Ugrat one of the many
names of Siva : the whole surrounded by a dotted circle.

This figure is, I believe, the personification of Siva, under his triple
form ; the same in which he is sculptured in the caves of Elephanta and
EUora ; one head representing the destroying power, and the other heads
the iwo creative powers, male and female, or Siva and Parvati, behind
whom stands the sacred bull Nandi. On the coin before us there are
but three arms ; although the triple headed busts of Siva have six arms :
the other three arms have been omitted merely from want of space.

On this coin we have an entirely new name added to our Indo- Scy-
thian list. In the annexed sketch it is but faintly traceable, as the
lithographer has fculed in faithfully representing my sketch : but I may
mention that the first two letters are distinctly BA ; the third is A
or A, and the last three are ANO or perhaps AMO I thus forming
either BAAANO or BAAANO. That the former is the true read-
ing is, I think, almost confirmed by the following fact. The author of
the Raja Tarangini in mentioning the cause of quarrel between the Raja
Hiranya, and his younger brother Toramana, the Yuva Raja, states that
Toramana, having melted down the ancient coin of the country called
Balahats, framed Dinars in his own name. Now Bala-hat means
simply " the mintage of Bala/' who must therefore have been a former
ruler of Kashmir ; and was most probably this very Balan, whose name
we have just discovered for the first time upon a coin. For I contend that
Balan or Balano or Balanus, who is clearly from the make of his coin of
the same family as Kanerki, was equally with him a king of Kashmir, and
perhaps prior even to Kanerki ; as this single coin is decidedly superior
in'exectttion to that of many of the Kanerki coins which I have seen. But
Mr. Prinsep's engravings of the Kanerki gold coins exhibit several pieces
of apparently the same beauty of workmanship ; and therefore 1 shall
be content for the present with ranging Balan in the series of Indo.Scy-
thian princes immediately following Kanerki.

488 Noiiee ofsomie Unpublished Coins QNo. 162.

No. 5. — A round copper coin, of large size, of beautiful make, and in
more perfect preservation than any other Indo^Scythian copper coia
that I have seen.

Obverse, Full length figure of the king to the left, bearded ; his
head covered with a curious cap having a brim or peak to the front ;
and the ends of a diadem floating behind. He is dressed in a long coat,
under which his trousers appear, and over which a loose robe falls be-
hind in circular folds. HLs left hand grasps a spear or trident, and lus
right hand is pointed downwards over the same object which is seen
on the obverse of No. 4. Legend in corrupted Greek characters:

PAO KANHPKI, -king Kanerki."

Reverse, A radiated and bearded figure, running quickly to the left ;
dressed only in a pair of very short tight drawers, and holding up with
both hands a large loose robe or cloak, which falls in circular folds
behind him. To the left is the Indo- Scythian monograph ; and to the
right in bad Greek characters the word OAAO ; which Professor
Lassen was the first to explain very happily by Vado ; Sanskrit Vata,
Zend Vato, and modern Persian Bdd^ or " the wind ;" which is repre-
sented running more or less quickly on different coins. The coins of
this type in copper are of three sizes ; large, middle, and small.

No. 6. — A round copj^r coin, of large size, and uncommon thickness;
of very good make, and in tolerable preservation.

Obverse. Exactly the same as the preceding.

Reverse, A figure seated in the Oriental fashion ; the hair dressed
in a knot on the top of the head, which is encircled by a halo formed
of dots ; the ears either elongated after the manner of Buddhist scalp«
tures, or adorned with jewels ; the left hand resting upon the feet, and
the right hand, with fingers extended, placed opposite the breast, in a
manner peculiar to Buddhist figures, and more particularly to Amogha
Siddha, one of the five celestial Buddhas. Amogha Siddha is also a
title of Adi Buddha himself. Monograph to the left: and legend
around the piece in corrupted Greek characters, O BO A A CAM;

whfch I think may be intended for (>M BOAA C AMANA or Am
Buddha Sramana. I do not by any iheans insist upon the correctness of
this reading ; but it is a highly probable one, from its being placed
around an eminently characteristic Bauddha figure.

1845.3 of the Indo' Scythians. 439

No. 7.— -A round copper coin, of large size, thickly coated with indu-
rated verdigris. This piece is one of those extracted by General Ven-
tura from the Manikyala Tope, and which I obtained in exchange from
Mr. Prinsep.

Obverse. Similar to Nos. 5 and 6.

Reverse. A full length figure standing to the front, and clad in
a long dress : the head surrounded by a circular halo ; and the hands
raised together before the breast in an attitude, which is peculiar to the
figures of Samant Bhadra, the first of the celestial Bodhisatwas. Samant
Bhadra is also one of the names of Adi Buddha, (see Hodgson's Trans.
R. A. Soc. 2, p. 239.) The monograph to the left : and legend in cor-
rupted Greek characters, ^j O AAO BOA CAMA A

similar copper coin, of middle size, is figured in the Asiatic Society's Jour-
nal, (vol. 3, pi. 25, fig. 1 1,) on which the legend, as given by Mr. Prinsep,

is OAYO BOY CAKANA. By a comparison of the two legends,
I am inclined to read them either as Aum Adi Buddha Sramana, or sim-
ply as Adi Buddha Sramana, The first letter, which Prinsep read as O,
has on this coin a turn to the left, which identifies it with the peculiar
flourish, which is found at the commencement of many ancient inscrip-
tions, and which is generally allowed to stand for the sacred unuttera-
ble syllable Aum. Of the letters to the left, the first four only are pre-
served upon the present coin : but they agree generally with those on
Mr. Prinsep's engraved specimen. ' The first letter on both is C, and
not A, as Professor Lassen has made it with some hesitation, and the
last two letters on Mr. Prinsep's coin are NA I consequently we have
altogether CAM AN A for Sramana, * an ascetic,' which is a common
appellation of Buddha, and was well known to the Greeks as ZAP-

MAN02or2EMN02.

No. 8. — A round copper coin, of large size, of good make, and in good
order.

Obverse. A male figure mounted on an elephant, moving to the right.
Legend in corrupt Greek characters around the piece, PAO {yavo) PAO

KENOPANO " the King of kings. Kenobano."

Reverse. A full length male figure, dressed in flowing garments ; with
the right hand raised, and the left hand resting on the hip. Behind his
shoulders a large lunar crescent. Legend to the right, MAO ' the
Moon'; and to the left the usual Indo. Scythian monograph.

440 NoHcB (^tame Uiifpubliihed Coins [No. 162.

No. 9.*- A round copper com, of middle aize, of good make, and in
good order.

Obverse. The same as No. 8.

Reverse. A full length female figure to the right, clad in a long iobe» widi
a short tunic reaching to the waist ; the left hand supporting a oomnooina,
and the right resting on the hip ; the head covered, and surroimded by
a halo. Corrupt Greek legend to the left, APAOXPO ; to the right,
the usual Indo-Scythian monograph.

No. 10. — Essentially the same as the precedmg; but the figure is
looking to the left, and holding out a wreath in the out*stretdied right
hand.

No. 11. — Precisely the same as No. 9: but the figure laces to the left.

The title of KOPANO on these Indo-Scythian coins, which follows
the names of Kadaphbs, Oiuiki and Kanbrki, has not yet been satisfac-
torily explained. It certainly cannot mean king, as we have Zatlos on
the coins of Kadaphes, and Rao-Nano-Rao on the. coins of his successors.
In a paper on the coinage of Kashmir published in the Numismatic Chro«
nide of London in 1843, 1 suggested that it was derived from the Greek
K0PQNI2, with curling horns; and that the Arabic Zul-kamm
pointed to that derivation. In this sense Koran would mean Alexander
the Gh'eat ; and the Princes who take that title would claim descent
from Zul-kamain. XOPAN CV and KOPCO might then stand for
KOPANov 2y yyevovcy '' the kinsman of Koran ;" and this interpre-
tation offers a plausible reading for the Greek legend of th^ earlier coins
of Kozonlo Kadphizes^ on which we find BA2IAEQ2 2THP02
:SY EPM AIOY, which I interpret as " (Coin) of the king, th^ preser-
ver (Kadphizes) the kinsman of Hermseus." I hove since found that the
Mogul author Sanangsetzen declares, that the Tartar prince Kamkia
bore the title of Prince of Mercy. It is probable therefore that Kaniahka's
title of Korano is derived from the Sanscrit karunai mercy. This
however still leaves unexplained the letters following Koran on the eoins
of Kadaphes and Kadphizes. On the former the title is XOPAN CY

(and not XOPANOY as usualfy given). On the latter, it is KOPCO.
The happy conjecture made by Mr. James Prinsep in 1833, that the
Kanbbki of the coins was the great Buddhist Prince Kakisbxa of
Kashmir, has been amply confirmed by the Bauddha figures, embkaiB,
and legends on the coins which I have just described. The Honorable

In^Seytkie. Coins,

^laitZ

1845.3 of the Indo' Scythians. 441

Mr. Turnour also identified them in 1836. In 1888, Professor Lassen
did not object to the identification of the names of Kanerki and Ka-
nisbka ; nor even to that of Oerki (or Huirki) and Hashka : but he added
** besides the difikulties in chronology another reason from the coinis
themselves is opposed to onr recognizing Hashka and Kanishka in
Oerki and Kanerki. Both of them are described as Boddhists ; upon
the coins of the latter however a worship, entirely deviating from that
of the Buddhists, is distinctly obvious."

The difi&cultiecr in chronology have, I think, been satisfactorily accom-
modated in my paper on the coinage of Kashmir already mentioned,
in which I showed that the Tartar prince Kanishka, according to both
Brahmanical and Buddhistical authorities, flourished at the beginning of
the Christian era ; agreeing with the age of the smaller Manikyala Tope
opened by General Court. In that Tope there was found a long inscrip-
tion of Maharaja Kanishka, accompanied with four gold coins of Ka-
vxRKi, and seven Roman silver coins ranging in date firom b. c 73 to 33.
The copper coins belonged to Kanerki himself, and to his inunediate
predecessors Kadaphes of the Kuei-shang tribe, and Kadphises of the
Hieu-mi tribe. The Tope must have been erected posterior to b. g. 33,
and most probably after the death of Kanishka in about ▲. d. 25,

The other difficulty has been successfully removed by the discovery
of the coins now published, which bear eminently characteristic Baud-
dha figures, emblems, and inscriptions. On the golden bust coins we
see the Prince himself represented with a halo' round his head ; with
flames issuing from his shoulders, as sculptured on the figure of Buddha
discovered by Dr. Oerard, (J. A. S. Bengal, vol. 3, pL 26, fig. 1,) and
with the prayer*cylinder (or dharmma'Chakra) in his right hand ; the
identical instrument which is in the hand of every Lama of the present
day.

The knowledge of this fact, of the identity of the religion of these
two princes, we owe chiefly to the science of Numismatology ; and the
numismatist may proudly point to it as one of the many useful rays
which the beacon of his fiavorite study has thrown over the treacherous
quicksands of history. So true are the words of the poet.

The medal, faithful to its charge of fame,
Through climei and ages bean each Priace's name.

3 p

442

. On Kunker formations, with Specimens, By Captain J. Abbott, B.A.

I have the pleasure to send you a few specimens of Kunker, collected
hy me in my late journey down' the Gtoges. I had purposed bringing
away a small section of a Kunker formation, showing the substance
in which it is imbedded and the strata immediately above and beneath ; *
but I was travelling in too great haste for this. The accompanytng
specimens, however, exhibit nearly every species of Kunker the matrix
of one, and its calx after the extraction of the lime by fire.

I have been so separated from scientific literature for many years
past, thiat I know not what may be the existing theories of the forma-
tion of this mineral ; and in offering the following am prepared to find
myself forestalled if, indeed, the theory is well founded.

The word Kunker, in its general application, like our own term gravel,
is applied by the natives to any small or rounded masses of stone,
whatever their substance, but it includes especially every variety of the
limestone under consideration. This is fou^d in several forms in the
wide plains of Upper and Central India. Not I think in Afghanistan
nor Persia, nor any where beyond the influence of the periodical rains. It
occurs only in mixed strata of sand and clay, which on analysis prove
to be impregnated with lime, and its presence is generally denoted by
the sterility of the soil above it.

Its position from the surface of the soil varies from ten to fifty feet
or more. But although, through the erosion of the upper stratum (as
for instance in the neighbourhood of large rivers) it may sometimes be
found at the surface, it is never there formed or deposited originally.

Its forms are, —

Xsi, Small rounded drops, from the size of a pea to that of a bullet,
in a matrix of clay and sand often of great depth, but seldom separat-
ed into distinct homogeneous strata.

2ndly, In distinct strata of larger masses, from the size of a small
potato to that of a mdki*s foot ; with a matrix of clay, or of clay and
sand mixed. In such cases the clay and sand strata are generally distinct.

Zrdly, In what is improperly termed stratified Kunker, but which I
tajce the liberty to name confluent Kunker, (almost all Kunker occurring
in strata.) In this form it presents extensive fields, from one to five
feet in thickness, generally very rugged and porous, but occasionally se-
parable into compact masses of a hundred solid feet or more.

1845.] . On Kunker formaiiaru, unih Specimens. 443

On considering the shapes of the granulated masses, they will be
found to resemble the figures assumed by molten lead when plunged into
water. The substance appears to be generally clay and carbonate of
lime : the latter falling away freely under the action of the furnace, and
leaving the clay in the form of a hardened mass more or less vitrified.*

The formation of *Kunker appears to me to be affected by the infiltra*
tion of rain water impregnated with lime through a bed of clay ; to be
in fact Tufa deposited in clay, or a sponge of clay saturated with the
carbonate of lime.

When the heavy rains of the monsoon fall upon a soil of alternate
sand and clay strata impregnated with lime, the water easily soaks
through the loose texture of the gneiss sand, taking up with it a cer-
tain proportion of the lime in its passage. But on meeting the closer
substance of the day stratum it there stagnates for a while, and each of
these clay strata becomes as it were the bottom of a subterranean lake,
the absorption here being very gradual and difiicult, and the water
parting with its lime to the clay, ere it can be effected.

When the lime is contained by the soil in large quantity, and the
clay stratum is dense or the duration of the deposit very long, conflu-
ent Kunker will be formed ; chiefly in the sandy stratum, but upon that
of the clay : and should (if this surmise be just,) contain a larger pro-
portion of sand than the granulated varieties.

When lime prevails in mixed soils of clay and sand, not distinctly
stratified, the Kunker is found in very small grains dispersed confusedly
through the mass. These seem to be formed by isolated drops of water
impregnated with lime, which gradually filtering have deposited each a
nucleus of lime, that yearly enlarges by firesh incrustations ; but very
gradually, owing to there being no general arrest of the impre^iated
water. This minute Kunker forms the sand (so to speak,) of many of
the streams of Central India.

Kunker yields almost the only lime used in Upper India by builders.
The quality yielded by various strata is very various : often it is ex-
cellent, but never perhaps equal to that of ' the more solid limestones,
or of the superficial Tufa deposited by streams.

It may appear improbable to some, that rain water should so readily
absorb lime, or so easily part with it ; but it is perfectly consistent with
observed phenomena. In Malwa where the substratum for 1500 feet is

444 On Kunker formations^ with Specimens. QNo. 162.

trap, and no limestonea are known, the eprings are so impregnated ^th
lime, taken up in their passage through the day stratum, as to frost
the glass of the windows splashed in moistening tatties. This irost
work is as complete as that produced by fluoric acid. The smaller
streams exhibit the same impregnation ; and wherever they foil over a
precipice, huge masses of Tufa are deposited by them on the yeariy
growth of lichens upon the brink.

I have seen many such masses of several hundred tons weight, and
one of these, torn from the precipice apparently by its own gravity,
was quarried for many years for the supply of the ^er lime used at
Mhow iii Malwa, and is yet I believe unexhausted.

The obstructions of the human viscera so conunon in Malwa and
Nimaur, I attribute to the action of the lime thus held in sohition
by the water. Tufa water is a well known poison in Italy. It eaps the
digestion, and causes gradual decay without any perceptible violence.
The Italians observing thu, fancy that it petrifies the vitals.

But one of the most remarkable examples of the action of water upon
lime is observable in the mausoleum of Hoshungh Shah Ghorie, in
Maandoo, Malwa. This building is feM^d within and without with a
coarse granulated limestone from the Nerbudda, passing current in those
parts for marble. From long neglect, Peepul and Dhamun trees have
penetrated with their finer roots the substance of the dome, ao that
water filters through copiously during the monsoon, and, being preserved
io small cavities, continues to drop do¥m, long afterwards. This water
in its passage through the mortar of the roof, takes up a certain quantity
of lime, which it again deposits in the interior lining of the dome in long
stalactitic pendants.

This fact was observed in the days of Ferishta the historian, for he says
reading it, (I quote from memory) — " People who are rather devout
than learned, think that the very marble weeps above the tomb of Ho-
shungh Shah. But we, who are above such puerilities, easily compre-
hend, how wind penetrating into the substance of the stone becomes
there condensed into water."

4, Harrington Street, idth March, 1845. J. Abbott.

NoTB.~The large masses are from conflaent strata, below Allahabad. These strata
from three to five feet thick are encrusted above with such large loose masses as these.
One, however, is part of a siab of confluent KLunker, broken by me»— J. A.

445

An account of the Early Abdaleei. By Major R. Lkbcb, C.B., Laie

Political Agent, Candahar,

Pbbfacb.

" in Nyamatulia'8 History of the Afghans, by Dorn, Avdal the son of
Tareen, the son of 6harkhbun« the son of Sarbanni, the son of Pathan,
is said to have had two brothers, Toor and Aspin ; and three sons, Barik,
Popal and Aii. Dom in a note (38) on the authority of the Khulassat
Ulansat, however, gives Abdal two sons, Firak'*' and Isa. Firak had three
sons, Popal, Barek and Alekko ;t and Isa had five sons, Alizye,} Tnrzye,
(Noorzye of £lphinstone,) Ishakzye, Makoo and Khogani, which latter
are called collectively Panjpai.§

Again Malcolm, in his History of Persia, on the authority of a native
historian of no note, apparently a Barikzye writing for Persian readers,
attributes the rise of Sado,|| the progenitor of the royal house of the
Sadozyes, to the favor of a king of Persia, Shah Abbas the Greats
(entitled by the Persiluis the Beatified^) obtained on a nviX to the
Persian court to complain of the tyranny and extortions exercised and
committed by a Persian Governor of Western Afghanistan. When
about to return to his native land, the king conferred on him the title
and privileges of a " Speen Jeerak" (white beard,) over the Afghans,.
including the power of life and death over them all, with the exception
of the Barikzyes, and declared his person and the persons of his de-
scendants sacred.**

It is even related by the Persians how Sado served for some time in
the disguise of a groom in the royal stables ; and having been promoted
to the charge of one of the king's favorite horses, how he attracted the

* Known to the Afghani as Zeerak, u are Uie descendants of his three sons.

f His tomb is said to be at Neecbarah in Beelochistan.

X Alizye is not the name of the son, which is AH, but of his descendants ; Zye
being the Persian corruption of Zo'e, which in Pushtoo means a son.

§ Panjpai, though literally meaning five feet or five supports, is often applied to more
than five subdivisions of a tribe.

II Sado is still a common name among the Afghans.

H Jannat Makan.

** Which they continued to be until the murder of Shah Shnja-uUMulk at Cabool,
in April 1842.

446 An account of the Early Abdalees. [No. 162.

notice of Majesty by the striking effects of his assidnity in groom-
ing.
Finally, in the History of India, Shah^ an Abdalee Governor of Herat,

is mentioned; and as these three items compose all the information
which to my knowledge is possessed at the present day of the Early Ab-
dalees, the following few pages have been compiled to supply much
that is deficient, chiefly from a manuscript procured in Afghanistan, a
second copy of which I never met with, and partly from accounts writ-
ten at my request, and from enquiries made from time to time during a
continued residence of five years in Afghanistan.

As the information now furnished was not possessed by the late Shah
Shuja, I am in hopes it may not elsewhere be considered stale.

The following few prefatory " Remarks on the Origin of the Afghans/'
will not perhaps be thought misplaced, coming next apd before treating
of the Abdalees.

Much has been written on the descent of the Afghans. They believe
themselves to be descended from king Saul. There are some circum-
stances against, and some in favour, of this belief.

Those against, are^

Ist. They have among their predecessors no Jewish names except
that of Kais, the Kish of Scripture (1 Samuel, chap. ix. verse ],) who
was according to some the first Afghan who believed in Mahommed,
and in consequence received the title of Abdu Rasheed ; the Jewish
names now common among them being gleaned from the Kuran.

2nd. lliey have no vestige of the festival of Purim instituted by
Esther, (chap. ix. verse 28.)

Those in favour, are —

1st. Contrary to the precepts of the Kuran, they do not permit a
wj^ow to marry any but the heirs of her husband, and the Jews did not
allow a virgin to marry out of the tribe, (Numbers, chap, xxxvi.
verse 8,) or a widow any but first her brother-in-law* (Deuteronomy,
chap. XXV. verse 5). The heir however among the Afghans, in case
of his not proposing for the widow, is not reduced to the alternative
described in the 9th verse of the same chapter.

2nd. They, do not allow daughters a portion of inheritance with the
sons. Likewise did not the Jews at one time, if we judge by inference
from Numbers, chap, xxvii. verse 8.

1845.] An account of ihe Early Aldaiees. 447

They have a custom alike repugnant to the Jewish as well as to the
Mahommedan creed, common in Wales, where it is called " bundling."
The Afghans call it " Namzad-bazee/'* or " betrothal game."

Khaja Nyamatulla, in his History of the Afghans, says that David
swore to Saul, (1 Samuel, chap. xxiv. verses 21 and 22) that on haul's
death two of his wives were with child, one bare Berkia, and the
other Irmia. The son of Irmia was Afkana, and the son of Berkia,
Asif.

Sir W. Jones says, Saul had two sons, one called Berkia and the
other Irmia, who served David faithfully, and were beloved by him. The
son of Berkia was called Afghan, and the son of Irmia, Usbee. ,

Neither of these accounts agrees with the Scripture. The name of
" Elkanah" is the only one occurring in the Books of Samuel, Kings,
or Chronicles, .in the least resembling Afghanah or Afkanah; and
although it cannot by any Persian rule be corrupted from Elkanah, yet
we find the name Hul, (Genesis, chap. x. verse 32,) corrupted into the
Persian Hood.

Asaph (Asif,) the son of Berechiah (Berkia,) is mentioned; 1 Chroni-
cles, chap. iv. verse 1 7 ; and Berechiah and Elkanah in the 23rd verse
of the same chapter.

Berachah, Irmia (Jeremiah,) and Elkanah as connected with Saul, are
mentioned, 1 Chronicles, chap. xii. verses 3, 4 and 8.

If we look upon Kais as a progenitor of the Afghans, and suppose
that they increased in the same manner that the children of Israel did,
(viz. at the rate of 2,100 for every year,) and also allow Kais to have
lived in the time of Mahommed, then at the time that Elphinstone wrote,
the Afghans should have amoutited to 2,500,000. Elphinstone esti*
mates them at 4,300,000. This would by the same calculation refer
the progenitor of the Afghans back to about the time of Alexander.
' If again Afghan, a grandson of Saul, was their progenitor in Elphin-
stone's time, by the same calculation they should have amounted to about
5,700,000, including the Afghans of Hindustan.

* This is allowed after the <* Ijab kabool," fonnerly asking in marriage and ac*
cepting before witnesses, but before the niMa or marriage ceremony, being the blessing
of the Malla. A settlement also being first fixed before the Mulla of the parish.

Sheer-bha or *' price of milk," is sometimes given to the mother of the daughter if a
widow.

44B An account of the Early Ahdalees. [No. 162.

Among the descendants of Saul mentioned in the Sciipture, as mil
he seen from the following, no name occurs approaching Blkanah or
Afghanah.

Aphiab

Bechorath

Zeror

I
Abiel

t * »

Kiflh N«r

Saul, Abner.

^■w^tMm^MMMw^H^iH^^^v^BM^B^ ^mmmmm^'i'^'^^'^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^m^aim^^^^m^mm^^m^t^^m^mmmmmmmm^^^^^i^^^

Wife Abinoam, dauf^btor of Ahimaaz.

Concubine Rizpab, daugbter of Aiab, Sons

r- ' " \ r" * ' ^

Daughter Micbal, David'i wife, given to Melcbisua,

Pbalti tbe son of Laisb. Isbui, Abinadab,

Oauebter BAerab, (busband Adriel Me- Jonathan, Mepbiboafaetb, Micha,

boTatbite.) IsbDosbetb.

Elopement also takes place among the Afghans, and the clan in
which the couple take refuge consider it a point of honor not to give
them up to the trihe of the father. Arbitrators adjudge seven girls to
be given in exchange, one actually mounted on horseback, and two othen
are valued at 100 Candahar rupees each; half is paid in ready money,
and half in goods, a mat(^ockj a sword and a gonee or bag of gnin,
being each calculated at a Tuman of twenty rupees.

They (many tribes) divide their lands according to " Orbale" or
fire-sides, and bachelors get nothing but their own zarkhureed or pur-
chased lands. The tribe of Shimalzai Ohiljyes say, that their tribe was
once so numerous, that by each man subscribing a bush of brushwood
(used fcgr fire-wood,) a couple was set up in the tribe. This subscrip*
tion is called " Baspand."

On the 3rd November 1S41, a widow, the daughter of Ashraf a Ba-
eezye Hotak, complained to me as political agent at Kalat-i-Ghiljye,
that her daughter had been engaged to one Ghafoor Bahlol-khel Julal-
gai Tokhee, a khoon-kash or bleeder by profession, for the last fourteen
years ; for the last eleven of which he had not been heard of, and was
therefore to be considered dead. She therefore wanted his heir (a bro-
ther) to dissolve the contract, take her himself off her hands to what was
now become her tribe, or support her while for a further period she
waited for her intended.

1845.] An aeeaufU ofik$ Early Abdaiiu. 449

Tareeii» the son of Sharkhboon (alias Sharafadeen») the son of Sur-
l)annee, the son of Kais (Kish Abdu Rasheed, and Pathan) is said to have
had three sons ; one, whose complexion was dark, he ct^led Tor (black»)
another, whose complexion was fair, he named 'Speen (white,) and the
third, he called Abdal.

Abdal, pronounced Oudle by the Toran Ohiljyes, is the title of a
grade of Fakeers, vide Hasan Abdal, whose shrine is in Putwar (the
country between the Indus and Jhelum) in the Panjab. The other
degrees being Ghous, Kutb, and Majzoob, or Kalandar.

Tor had four sons, Malmoonee, Gundaree, Sekee and Baboo, and some
say also a daughter, Kakee. *

Malmoonee had two sons, Haroon and Alee.

'Speen, the son of Tareen, had four sons, Dur, (Duver, Dabar) Sule-.
man-lagh, Tam and Opchee, (Adhami).

Tor and 'Speen were of one mother, and Abdal of a separate one.

When Tareen was well advanced in years. Tor and 'Speen had grown
up, but Abdal was still a boy. One of Tareen's wives one day observed
to him, that he had got ^Id, and it was better that during his lifetime he
should nominate as his successor in the chiefship his most promising
son, and himself seek retirement, and pass his time in the service of God.

Of this, Tareen approved. Tor and 'Speen each hoped the lot would
fall on him, and their mother's wishes were for Tor, her first-born.
'Speen was annoyed at this prospect, expressed his annoyance, and ad-
vanced his own claims. The mother of Abdal with great humility and
modesty brought forward her son's claims, which were, that notwith-
standing his youth he possessed more noble qualities than either of his
brothers. Tor and 'Speen were both annoyed at this, and said, " Our
young brother is no more fit to rule than our old father." One day a
holy Sayad who had given up the world arrived, and Tareen referred
the choice to him, saying himself that he had a foreboding that Abdal
would be chosen. The Sayad after being some time absorbed in
thought raised his head, and' after regarding all three, said — " The
third is the appointed chief; and although Tor will do everything to
oppose him, he shall not succeed; 'Speen is no way entitled to
the chiefship." (That is, neither by primogeniture or promising
talents.)

The Sayad then told Tareen to confer the Dastar (turban) on iiu

youngest son, and the chiefship would remain for generations in his

450 An account of the Early Ahdakes* [No. ^62.

house. He also told Tor and 'Speen, that it would be for their good to
obey Abdal.

Tor made many protests and objections ; 'Speen silently took his
leave. Tareen then placed the dastar on Abdal, and called for a blessing
on him. He at last grew up, and disclosed all the qualities his mother
and the Sayad had seen in promise. Tor and 'Speen were always called
Tareens, and their descendants are now found in the district of Pishing,
in the province of Candahar. Abdal lived 105 years, and his descendants
were called after him " Abdalees" and not Tareens. He had two sons^
Kazad and Suleman. The Maghzan-ul-Afghanee says, one son called
Jeerf others say Eesa.

When Abdal was advanced in years he sent for his son Razad, and
appointed him his successor after giving him the following parting ad-
vice : " Do not forget your God, and conduct your public and private
life accordingly. Treat with respect the tribe of Sarbannees, Sayads
and learned and devout men ; support and provide for your relations,
and treat your subjects with kindness." That is to say, have a fair speech
and a fat sheep for them, the grand secret of Afghan popularity.

Razad had three sons, Elesa, Alee and Ado. The first named was the
youngest, and the two elder lived the life of Dervishes. Razad before his
death appointed Eesa his successor, and his choice was confirmed by all
the Sarbannees. Razad lived to the age of 120 years, having seen his
descendants to the third generation.

£esa had three sons, Meerak, Suleman alias Zeerak, (from his being
forward of his age), and Noor. Eesa on his death approaching, col-
lected, according to the custom of that time, the whole of his tribe
and descendants, and appointed Zeerak, although his second son, his
successor. Every one at once agreed but Meerak ; who at last also
did, after his father assured him that his choice was guided in a
dream from heaven. Eesa lived 140 years. Zeerak had four sons,
Barak, Alaho, Mase and Popal.

When Zeerak reached the age of 120, he called his descendants and
tribe together, and requested their opinion regarding who ought to be
his successor. They all pointed to Barak, and his father accordingly
confirmed him, and he carried on the chiefship fifteen years during his
father's life.

Ij; was the custom of the tribe to change their encampment -at dif-
ferent seasons, and every one was obliged to take his own baggage and

1845.] An account of the Early Abdaleei. 451

property to the new groand. It so occurred that in one of these emigra-
tions, Ze^nk who from old age had become quite decrepit, was left be-
hind.*

The four brothers, according to custom, returned to the old encamp-
ment to see that nothing was forgotten. News was brought that Zee-
xak had been left behind, being unable to move. Barak first arrived
where his father was lying. Turning his horse's head towards hira
without dismounting, he abused him, saying, " Are you not dead
yet, that I may be no longer troubled with you ?"

Alako then saw him, and said, " Oh son of Adam, would that you were
dead, and ceased to trouble us !" And then passed on, as had Barak.
Mase next came, and, seeing his father, dismounted, and ordered one of
his people to mount him on a horse and conduct him to the new en-
campment. Zeerak pleaded that he was unable to sit on a horse. Mase
in a passion gave the old man a kick, saying to his attendant, " Let
^e old brute lie there to be devoured by wild beasts and birds."

At last came Popal, who immediately dismounted, and, taking Zeerak's
head on his lap, brushed the dirt off his venerable face, and shed tears, and
said, " Would to Ood that I had never been bom, that I should live to see
you, my father, in this plight." He then lifted up his father with great
care, and, carrying him on his back, ordered his people to convey the
baggage on ahead, and he would follow with his sacred burden slowly
after. On arriving at the new encampment, he ordered suitable food to be
drest for his father. When the old man had eaten and was refreshed,
he expressed a wish to utter some prayers, to which he begged attention
should be paid.

First he said to Barak : " Your fieldsf will be many, but may you find
no favour with God."t

Regarding Alako he said : " May you never be free from cares and
tronbles.'V

To Mase he said : " May one of your houses fall as the other rises."

To Popal he said : " Be your descendants always chiefs and never
servants, and may your foot never be out of the. stirrup of wealth."

* I witnessed something similar myself in the Ghiljye country in General Nott's ad*
vance on Gbuznee and Cabool. In a village that bad been hurriedly deserted w«
found nothing but a cripple.

t '• Bar," breadth (of domain.)

X " Barkat,** luck, good fortune.

452 An account of the Early Aidaiees. QNo. 162.

He then said, " I bare already given, with the advice of the tribe, the
chiefthip to Barak, and it is no longer in my power, but theirs. But,"
(turning his eyes and stretching out his hands to heaven,) *' may the
descendants of Popal be always " Raises,' and may the descendants of
his brothers serve him." He then told Popal to be of good cheer, that
the time was near at hand when he should become- chief, and that the
Sayad who had interceded in the dispute of Tor and 'Speen had ap-
peared to him in a dream, and assured him Popal would be chief. After
blessing him, he lived five years.

Six months did not elapse after the tribe had heard this blessing before
they left Barak, and gathered round Popal who became chief, and Zeerak
saw with bis own eyes his prayers answered. Zeerak lived 89 years.

Popal became chief at 25 years of age. He was a very just and popu-
lar chief. In his time the descendants of Tareen mustered S0,000.
In a revolution among the tribe of Kakers, the chief sought refuge wiUt
Popal, who with a force espoused his cause, reinstated his guest, and
took hostages from the Kakers. From which time the Kakers never
opposed the Popalzyes. He also took hostages from the Balochea and
the Hazarahs. He ruled 65 years, and had three sons, Habeeb, Aiyioob
find Bago. When his end was approaching, he assembled his tribe and
appointed Habeeb, his eldest son, his successor, who lived 52 years.
During Aiyoob's lifetime he and his sons lived with Habeeb. On
his death, which took place before the other two, Bazo disputed with
Habeeb for his having all the descendants of Aiyoob. The tribe inter-
fered, and gave half to each.

Habeeb had four sons, Ismail, Hasan, Bame and Aboosaieed. The
two former were much older than the two latter.

The daughter of Bazo was engaged to Bame. On Habeeb feeling his
end approaching, he collected his tribe, and told them to noounate his
successor. Ismail and Hasan, both canvassed the tribe for ^otes, and
therefore both soon quarrelled. Bazo proposed Ismail, as being the
eldest. Hasan would not hear of it. Bazo then proposed Bame, and
proposed that he himself should act as regent during his minority. Ha-
beeb agreed to this ; Ismail and Aboosaieed would not agree, and sepa-
rated themselves from the tribe.

Bame was accordingly appointed chief at the age of 15. After which
Habeeb lived two years.

1845.] Am account of the Early Abdalets, 453

Bame lived to the age of 72 ; and had three sons, Nasrat, Basahma
and Kane.

On Bame beooniing aged, he neglected to nominate his successor at
was the custom ; the tribe therefore assembled, and demanded the jreason.
In reply he said, " I really do not see among my sons one worthy ; but
if I confess this to the Tor and 'Speen Tareens, they will not allow the
chiefship to remain in the house of Abdal. Indeed I have heard from
the Tareens that they had no hope in my sons. I will therefore not
appoint a successor. I have also dreamt, that none of my sons will be
chiefs, but that a grandson, a son of Kane, will be. If on my death
any one of my sons be found with anything, he will get the chiefship
without any nomination of mine. According to the dream, so it occur*
red ; the sons of Bame did not agree among themselyee, and there were
separate small chiefs called " Katkhudas,'"*' except in cases of blood or
large general tribe feuds, when they referred to Kane. He lived to the
age of 80 ; and had three sons, Bahlol, Zeenak and Bano. The tribe
was for some time much distracted in factions and petty feuds. At
last the chief men assembled, and decided, as there was no getting on
without a " Rais" or *' Sardar," they would appoint Bahlol. During
the chiefship of Bahlol, Kane lived 12 years.

Bahl(^ lived 105 years; and had two sons, Maroof and Alee-khan ;
(the first time the title of khan occurs). Bahlol appointed Maroof at the
age of 30 years, his successor. Maroof was very severe in his rule, and
had the curses of his tribe : on which account he did not reign more
than ten years, and then died of a severe complaint. His heirs in a short
time ran through with all the property he left.

Two months after his death, one of his wives bare a son, by name
Umar. His father and mother used to visit the Isakzye and Aleezye
shrines ior fortune for their son ; Umar had no property. When Umar
was about 14 years of age, the Abdalees of the hills made many sei-
zures of lands, and many disputes and feuds arose in the tribe in con-
sequence. The chiefs at last agreed to appoint Umar, who had now
grown up, to divide the lands, and apportion them fairly, and to be their
representative in all their communications with the Beglar-begee of

* In the time of the Duranee kings when the Khans received their pay from the
treasury, they deducted from every horseman ( Sahir) J rupee on account of the Kat-
khuda, who was an officer appointed to every 100 men to collect them when called for
the service of the State.

454 An account of the Early Abdalees. [No. 162.

Candahar. (This implies a Persian rule in that province). When Umar
was one year old, Ako Aleezye, a noted person for sanctity in those times,
with his son Khalo then 100 years old, and his grandson Mando, then
85 years old, came to the house of Umar's mother ; who killed a goat
and its kid, which was all she had for them. They in return prayed for
her, and told her she would soon gain her heart's desire. Ako told her
that he had seen two dreams regarding the child Umar ; one was, that
he "had seen a lion enter the house of Umar, which meant that he would
have a son, whose name should be called Asadullah, " Lion of God :'^the
second dream was, that he saw the house of Asadullah, who should also
be called Sado, covered with a hog's skin. The mother of Umar enter-
tained great apprehensions regarding the mention of the unclean beast ; but
Ako comforted her, by assuring her that the hog's skin meant wealth.

The Afghans (some) pretend to believe that Ako's dream of the hog's
skin referred to the alliance formed by a descendant of Soda, (Shah
Shuja*ul-Mulk) with the pork-eating English !! who entered Afghanis-
tan with him in the Turkish year of the hog !!! (1839.)

The chiefs in pursuance of their determinaton' waited on Umar, tak-
ing with them food for their own consun^ption as they knew the pover-
ty of Umar, and appointed him their chief. His first care was, to settle
the land disputes on a basis which ever after remained unshaken.

As chief, he held communication on the part of the tribe with the
Beglar-begee of Candahar.

During his time the Barakzyes of the hills rebelled, and maltreated
his emissaries sent to make the usual collections, saying, " The chief-
ship was given to us by our forefather, and Popal took it by force."

Umar immediately collected his force for the reduction of the Barak-
zyes, in which he succeeded taking hostages from them, as well as from
some Noorzyes who bordered on the Barakzyes, and joined in the rebel-
lion. He lived 98 years ; and had two sons, Asadullah (Sado) and
Saleh.

Another informant, an Aleezye chief says, Sado after being blessed
by Ako, who was a disciple of Sakhee Sarwar's, found a treasure, and by
means of it gained iufluence in the tribe. If this story be a fabricatioD,
it at least betrays ^ knowledge of the Afghan character.

In 1841, there was in Cabool a Salehzye, named Hajee-khan, who
said he was the last of his tribe. He and Taizulla-khan of Candahar, now

1845.] An account of the Early Abdaiees 455

dead, a brother of my Aleezye informant, were reckoned almost the only
men in Afghanistan who possessed a knowledge of Afghan history.

Some say, that Umar was told in a dream by a vision of his forefather
Eesa, to name his sons Saleh and Soda. Saleh became the disciple of a
saint, gave up the world, and passed his time in austere devotions.

When Umar reached the age of 89, Sado being 25 years old, and
Saleh 60, he collected his tribe and informed them that as his end
was approaching, he must name a successor. That, as for Saleh, he
had given up the world, and was in no way adapted for the chiefship.
That Sado had been nominated by the Aleezye Fakeers, Ako, Khalo
and Mando, and was moreover thought by him the most fit. The tribe
immediately confirmed, as did Saleh who, when doing so, spoke these
words : " I have five sons ; Durkhan, Ibrahim.khan, Bazeed-khan, Maya
and Alo, who again have children. Let Sado exempt the whole of my
descendants from taxation of every kind as long as the chiefship remains
in the house of Sado." This was agreed to by Sado before his father
and the tribe.

Umar and Saleh then girt Sado's loins. This is still a custom in
Afghanistan. On a king ascending the throne, some saintiy character
of great fame is sent for, who undoes his own " langootee," and puts
it round the waist of the king, who in return invests the saint with
a splendid dress of honor. Sado's turban was then put on by Alee, the
son of Mando Aleezye, and all the people prayed for his long life and
prosperity.

Some time after the accession of Sado, KhajaKhidr and Ismail, grand-
sons of Neknam, a Barikzye Malik, rebelled against his authority, and
refused to admit his " Mahsals," revenue collectors and bailiffs, into their
districts ; on the plea that their progenitor Barak ruled for fifteen years,
and that Popal got the chiefship unjustiy, and by boyish blandishments.
They agreed to give a sheep or two now and then, according to their
ability, but would not agree to the daily demands and constant sending
of Mahsals, some of whom they forcibly ejected from their districts.
On hearing this, Sado became furious, and collected his force. Other
Barikzyes came and begged forgiveness, entreating Sado not to attend to
what a few fools or madmen said ; and promised themselves to punish their
rebellious fellow tribesmen. By this Sado was pacified, and appointing
other chiefs, and giving them his countenance, deputed them to punish

456 An account of the Earfy Abdafees, QNo. 162.

the rebels, which they faithfully did. Khaja Khidr being slun, some
Kutezyes also evinced a rebellious spirit ; and were chastised, and security
for their future good behaviour was taken. The other tribes profited
by the example. Sado behaved liberally to all who acknowledged his
authority, and punished all severely who disobeyed him. He listened
to the petitions of the poor, dispensed justice strictly according to the
Shara, was pacific in his policy, and protected his subjects. His go-
vernment was established over the Abdalees on a basis that had never
been in a like manner secured by his forefathers.

When at leisure from the Abdalees, he subjugated, partly by con-
ciliation and partly by force, the tribes of Ghiljyes and Hazarahs, in
whose disputes he was sole arbitrator. He built several mosques and
schools, as well as many works of utility, such as bridges, wells, and
roads.

He lived in all 75 years ; and had five sons, Khaja Khidr-khan, Moa-
dood-khan, Zafran-khan, Kamran-khan, and Bahadur.khan.

Khaja Khidr-khan and Kamran-khan are said to have been of one
mother, and Zafran-khan of a slave girl.

The Bahadur- khels settled in Multan, where and at Dera Ismail- khan
and Tak-i-Sarwar-khan, there are some remains.

Muzaffar-khan, governor of Multan, was a Bahadur-khel.

The Kamran-khels were divided into Eesa-khels and Moosa-khels.

Usman-khan, who was Shah Shiga's vizier in 1841, traced his descent
as follows, from Kamran, viz. : Usman, the son of RainatuUah, Shah
Zeman's vizier, the son of Fatullab, the son of Haroon, the son of
Yoosaf, the son of Yakoob, the son of Moosa, the son of Kamran.

Walee Maham mad-khan, another Sadozye of rank at Candahar, who
also gave me some informaticHoi, traced his descent from Kamran, as fel-
lows : Walee Mahammad, the son of Abdu Salam-khan, who was a
brother of Abdul- khalik- khan, (who rebelled against Shah Zeman), tlic
son of Rahman-khan, the son of Abdullah-khan, (who, according to
some, gave his daughter in marriage to Meer Wais Ohiljye, who had
two sons by her. Shah Mahmood and Shah Husen, receiving in mar-
riage in return Meer Wais's daughter), the son of Jafar Sultan, (whose
residence and control was at Potye-i- Sadozye and Shahr-i-Safa by one
account, whose wife named Durkhee gave her daughter Khanzad to
Meer Wais's mother for her son), son of Eesa, son of Kamran.

1845.3 An account of the Early Abdalees. 457

The two first of Sado's feoxis were tEe most forward and talented, and
the other three were not much noticed either by their father or the
tribe, some of whom inclined to Khaja Khidr-khan, and some to
Moudood-khan. When Sado grew enfeebled through age, he collected
his tribe, and told them to choose among the two. Moudood-khan being
the eldest, was elected chief; but Sado remonstrated, saying, "Although
Khaja Khidr^khan is the youngest, yet he has more noble qualities than
his four brothers. I also saw a dream regarding him, as follows :

'* After midnight, an old white*bearded man with a green stick, and a
green wrapper round him, made his appearance. The eflFiilgence of his
countenance was such, that I fancied a light had been brought into the
room. Steadfastly regarding him, I hardly knew whether I was awake
or was seeing a dream.

'* I started — rawoke, and arose, as did my wife ; I then enquired from the
vision, ' why he had honcnred my humble house by entering it ?' He replied,
' Be joyful, for God will give you a son, whom you must call Khaja
Kkidr; who shall so excel in every good quality, that men shall be
unable fully to sing his deserts.' On asking the vision his name, he
evaded the question ; I jn-est him, he at last replied, ' The child is to be
called after me.' He then took his departure, and I followed him some
pates, when dismissing me be shortly vanished from my sight. On
my son's l»rth, I called him Khaja Khidr. Now although I love all my
sons equally, yet, on account of my dream, i incline to think him fittest
to be chief."

The Sarbannees however still persisted in their choice of Moudood
Khan.

Khaja Khidr-khan then proposed, that the tribe should range them*
sehrea on his or his brother's side as they chose. The Sarbannees
wtmld tfOt agree to this, saying with great truth, that a division would
be prejudicial to the general interests ei the tribe. It was finally
settled, that Moudood-khan should be chief, and Khaja Khidr-khan his
deputy.

During the lifetime of Sado their father, the former delegated all his

powers to the latter, and merely retained the name oi chief; but on the

death of Sado the tribe with one consent transferred the cfaiefship to

Khaja Khidr-khan, who became very popular, being approved of by the

saints, and being talented,, conciliatory » and liberal.

458 An account of the Early Abdalees. [No. 162.

Khaja Khidr-khan became chief at thirty-five years of age» and ruled
forty- seven years. He had two sons, Khudadad Saltan and Sher-kban.
This is the first time the title of Sultan occars. He is known among
the Afghans as Saltan Khudakye, who divided the lands of the Abdalees
and Ohiljyes at Pal-i-Sangee with Sultan Malakhe GhOjye.* This
title of Sultan, I have reason to suppose, was conferred by Aurangzeb.f
Khudadad Sultan, on the death of his father Khaja Khidr-khan, be-
came chief without any opposition from his brother.

He soon afterwards invaded the territory of Jyob, and laid it waste
while the inhabitants fled to the hills. On his return, a man of the
country and his three children were intercepted in a ravine, unable to
flee ; when brought before him he immediately ordered them to be killed,
although they appeared innocent and godly people.

Pitching his camp near the spot, at night he saw a vision. The four
murdered persons appeared, and threatened him with the death he had
so unjustly inflicted on them. Terror had taken possession of his soul,
when the same vision with the green stick and green garment that had
appeared to Sado made his appearance, and, after reproaching him with
his tyrannical act, promised to save him, provided he would immediately
abdicate in favor of his brother Sher-khan, and act as his deputy. Khu-
dadad Sultan awoke in great dread, and assembling his attendants and
followers, renounced the chiefship in favor of Sher-khan, and informed
him he had done so by an express courier or " Chapar."

During the chiefship of Khudadad Sultan a friendly communication
was sustained with the Beglar-begee />( Candahar, but soon after Sber
Khan's accession it received a sudden check in the following manner.—
The Beglar-begee of Candahar had sent a force towards Foshasj
(Pishing) to collect the taxes on land and sheep, called Maldaghees
and Sargalye. Having finished their collections, they were returning to
Candahar. On arriving at the Kojak Pass they were attacked, defeated,
and nearly all slain by the Abdalees : some fled, but were pursued, and,
being overtaken, lost their horses and clothes.

* The dispute was regarding the two districts of Omakye and Gwaharye, and is said
to have been settled by a shepherd, appealed to by both parties, on the simple principle
that Khudakye and Gwaharye sounded well together as did Malakhe and Omakye.

t 1 have seen the original Rukum of Aurangzeb to Sultan Malakhe, giving him
charge of the King's road from Kalat to Karatoo, to keep it clear of the Haxarah
robbers.

1845.] An account of the Eutly Abdaiees. 459^

On the Beglar-begee hearing of this, he wrote to Sher-khan, request-
ing him to send the culprits to Candahar. Sher-khan made excuses,
saying, that Beeloches, Kakers, and other migratory trihes inhabited the
neighbourhood of the Kojak, and the real depredators were therefore
difficult to discover. The Beglar-begee enraged at this, by way of re-
prisal, attacked and plundered the Abdaiees who inhabited the neigh-
bourhood of Candahar. Sher-khan on hearing this collected his tribe,
and both parties arranged themselves for hostilities.

At this time Pishing, Sharabak, Shawl, Harnye, and Mastnng were
all dependencies of Candahar. On this difference arising, all com-,
munication between Candahar and these places was stopt; and on
Sher-khan succeeding, which he did, in gaining possession of Shah Safa,
a post only nine farsakhs from Candahar, the communication with
Kalat-i-Ohiljye, the Ghiljyes, and Hazarahs, was also cut off.

In this dilemma the Beglar-begee wrote for instructions from his
master, the king of Persia, who in ref^y ordered him to look out for
some rival chief in the same tribe and patronize him.

The Beglar-begee sought out and found Shah Husen-khan, a cousin
of Sher.khan, on whom the king of Persia conferred the title of a
Prince-royal, viz. Meerza,

Meerza Shah Husen took up his residence atDeh-i-Shekh, and Sher-
khan at Shahr.i-Safa, and thus the first division among the Abdaiees
took place. The tribe often remonstrated with Shah Husen Meerza,
and protested against Mogul interference. As he stoutly denied being
under Persian influence, he had adherents in the tribe as well as Sher-
khan ; indeed the Abdaiees constantly said they did not care which
brother they obeyed so long as the Moguls (Persians) did not interfere.

Jaleel Aleezye was Shah Husen Meerza's right-hand man, and
was always deputed by him to Candahar to negotiate with the Beglar-
begee. Some years past in this manner. On Jaleel taking his leave
after one of his visits to Candahar, the Beglar-begee entrusted him
with the following message for his master Shah Husen Meerza:
" The king of Persia, my master, has honored you by adopting you as
his son, and has conferred on you the princely title of Meerza ; you have
30 or 40,000 men. I also have a force, and every day fresh orders
come from my master for the destruction of Sher- khan's power: believe
me, our delaying any longer can only do us harm at court."

460 An account of the ^arly Abdalees. [No. 162.

llie Ameens of the Chaghatye monarch in Eastern Afghanistan
heard of this and reported it to their master, the king of Dehli, and
pointed out that Sher*khan was a man of. great influence in his tribe
who had excited the wrath of the king of Persia by opposing his
cousin Shah Husen Meerza, who was supported by that monarch, and
was on that account disposed to reoeiye the protection of the king of
India, which they strongly recommended should be extended to him.

This recommendation brought letters of encouragement, and the
title of Shahzadak for Sher-khan from the Emperor of Delhi, who en-
joined the Soobhadar of Cabool and Hakim of Ghuznee to afford Sher-
khan assistance whenever he required it.

On receiving these honors the power of Sher-khan increased, and
Meerza Shah Husen's declined in proportion. This was to be expected,
for the Afghans would naturally prefer the Sunnee king of Delhi to the
Sheeah king of Persia: and doubtlessly Sher-khan immediately in*
dented on the Governors of Cabool and Ghuznee for dresses of honor
for his adherents, and created a rival of popularity by this meana also in

the tribe.

Jaleel Aleezye was immediately despatched with this intelligence to
the Beglar-begee of Candahar, who reported it to his master the king
of Persia. In reply, a horse and a dress of honor were sent for Shah
Husen Meerza, and dresses of honor and letters of enoouragenaent for
his adherents were despatched by the hands of Jaleel Aleezye, who was
also bearer of a message to Shah Husen Meerza from the Beglar-begee,
which was, that the Beglar-begee had much wished to come himself to
visit the Abdalee chief, but was prevented by the unquiet state of some
of his districts, and hoped that he would be able to come to Candahar.
An interview had often before been talked of, but Shah Husen Meerza
always, when invited to Candahar, excused himself, pointing out the
advantages his rival, Sher-khan, would gain in his absence from the tribe.
This time, however, flattered by the receipt of the king of Persia's pre-
sents, and burning with jealousy at the increasing power of his rival, he
consented. The tribe, hearing of his intention, assembled, and said,
*' You may go to Candahar of course, if you like ; but we warn you that
something may take place to our detriment, such as a dispute or a
quarrel with the Moguls." Shah Husen Meerza, notwithstanding the
warning, set out for Candahar ; and appeared at the Beglar-begee's durbar.

1845.3 "^^ aeeoufU cf ike Early Abdalees. 461

Jaleel Aleezye always stood with his hands joined in the presence of
Shah Hasen Meerza, his master ; but as he was Wakeel at Candahar,
the Beglar-begee allowed him always to sit, as he did on the present
occaaioQ.

Jaleel was a handsome and clever- spoken man ; Shah Husen Meerza
was alow-speaking, black, and short.

Jaleel constantly introduced his own opinions in the conversation,
and was told by signs to be quiet. These had no effect, and he more
than once interrupted what his master was saying; took the words
out of his mouth, and finished his sentence for him. Shah Husen
Meerza, unable to contain himself, at last said, *' Slave of low origin,
what does this disrespectful behaviour, and these interruptions mean ?"

Jaleel foolishly allowed himself to reply, " A slave is always known by
his color."

Quick as thought Shah Husen drew his dagger, and sheathed it in
the body of Jaleel, who expired immediately, his entrails protruding on
the carpet. On witnessing this tragedy, the Beglar-begee and whole
court rose hastily, partly in alarm and partly in rage. Shah Husen
Meerza no sooner observed this than throwing away his dagger, he
said, '*' Be not concerned ; that slave has only paid the forfeit of his im-
pertinence."

As he was the adopted son of the king of Persia, they contented
themselves with putting him in restraint; while they reported the
tragedy, and waited for instructions.

A decision arrived from the king of Persia to the effect, that Shah
Husen Meerza was quite right in killing his slave, if he offended.
Fresh dresses of honor were despatched with a letter of encouragement
to the prisoner, who was ordered to be released immediately, and sent to
his government. This favor, however, came too late ; the mischief had
been done already, for during Shah Husen's confinement the whole tribe
of Abdalees had gone over to Sher-khan, and acknowledged his authority.

Meerza Shah Husen therefore, on obtaining his release, went directto
Sher-khan, and, acknowledging his authority, expressed his determina-
tion of proceeding to Hindustan ; which he soon after carried into effect,
leaving Sher-khan in absolute undisputed possession of the chief ship.

When the Beglar-begee heard of this he wrote to the king of Persia,
who sent a letter to Sher-khan, couched in these words : " There is bro-

462 An account of the Early Abdalees. QNo. 162.

therhood between my house and that of the Koraganee ; if you have
been made a Sfaahzadah by the king of Delhi, I also adopt you as my
son, and allow you full authority over your own tribe independent of
the Beglar-begee ; but if he is attacked, or otherwise requires your assis-
tance, give it him."

Sher-khan accepted these honors, and appointed as naiks or deputies,
Badal Baneezye, and Meer, son of Mubarak, son of Jalaludeen Alakozye.

The Beglar-begee at intervals sent people to make complimentary
enquiries after Sher-khan's health, and requested that the deputies
Badal and Meer should attend on him at Candahar.

Meer Alakozye was alone sent, and directed, if enquiries were made
for Badal, to make an excuse that he was ill, and to say that he would
make his appearance on his recovery ; or if that should be retarded,
some one should be sent in his stead. Meer arrived, and had an inter-
view with the Beglar-begee, whom he found preparing a force to
collect the revenue of the districts of Shorabak, Pishing, and Huruge,
y'A the Kojak Pass.

Meer, being presented with a dress of honor and a horse, sent a small
detachment of his own men in company with the Moghul troops, who
saw them safe across the Pass, and overawed the above districts into
payment of revenue, for which assistance he received further khilats
and his leave. *

A difficulty however arose, which was, to get the Persian detachment
with their collections across the Pass on their return to Candahar,

Sher-khan was therefore again written to, who this time despatched
Badal Baneezye with an introduction, which, after the detachment had
been by him seen safe across the Kojak, procured for him a dress of
honor and two horses.

He received his leave and charge of seven horses with golden trap-
pings, and various pieces of rich Persian stuffs for his master Sher-khan,
which had been sent by the king of Persia with an encouraging letter.

Sher-khan became chief at thirty-two years of age, and lived in all
sixty-five years ; and had one son, named Sarmast-khan.

When he was twenty years of age, his father Sher-khan being moch
addicted to the chase, went one Friday out hunting, and had a fall
from his horse ; his attendants taking him home senseless. On open-
ing his eyes, and seeing Sarmast-khan, he desired Bakhtyar-khao,

1845.] An aecauni of the Early Ahdaiees, 463

grandson of Saleh, might be sent for. On his arrival, he thus made
known his wishes to the couple : " My recovery is out of the question :
therefore, as Sarmast-khan is but a boy, I appoint you, Bakhtyar-
khan, his guardian ; let him follow my example. And do you, Sarmast,
attend to the advice of Bakhtyar-khan, and appoint him your deputy
should you ever be absent from your tribe ; and, remember, be liberal.
I have spent my life as heart could desire ; I have nothing to regret not
having done. I have so behaved to the tribe, foes, and friends, that they
will never forget me. If a friend and a foe quarrelled in my presence, I
never decided so, that favor if existing should appear ; and at other pro.
per times, I have so treated my friend, that the people flocked to him ; so
that whenever a foe appeared, so many friends arose for me, that he
became powerless. If any one in the tribe belied another, or aspersed
his character, I never publicly exposed either, or lowered a friend in the
eyes of the people."

Sher.khan died three days after this. Sarmast-khan faithfully followed
the precepts his father had taught him. He lived in all 50 years. He had
three sons, Doulat.khan, and two others whose names are not known,
as they died without issue.

On the death of Sarmast-khan, as Doulat-khan was quite a boy,
Haiyat Sultan succeeded to the chiefship of the tribe. He was a cou-
sin of Sarmast- khan's. He also conducted all communications with the
Beglar-begee of Candahar.

This latter once made a feast, and invited to it all the Afghan chiefs,
Kat-khudahs and Sar-khels, to meet his own Moghul Sardars. Wine was
introduced, and ceremony thrown aside. Haiyat Sultan and the other
Afghans were induced to join in the revelry, and, as they were not so
accustomed to the juice of the grape as their entertainers, soon got in-
toxicated. From the praises of wine it was not long before the com-
pany entered upon the praises of woman ; each party, of course, becoming
the champions of its own countrywomen. At last proposals for inter-
marriages were made, and agreed to by both parties. Seven Afghan
daughters were betrothed by name to as many of the Persian officers,
and vice versft, and dresses of honor were given to their Afghan fathers-
in-law that were to be. Next morning Haiyat Sultan on getting sober,
became painfully aware how he and his companions had committed
themselves, and was at a loss how to leave Candahar. In this dilemma

464 An account of ihe Early Abdaiees. QNo. 162.

Mubarik, one of the Afghan Kat-khndahs, a man of experience and
expedients, suggested that the Persians should be told that it was their
custom that the bridegrooms should visit the houses of the brides,*
the consent of whose relations wonld also be first required*

The Afghan chiefs thus got their leare, and they returned to their
tribe, accompanied by some of their would-be sons-in-law, and serend
matrons to attend the brides, and bring themto Candahar.

On the news of these mutual engagements spreading, the whole of
the Sarbannees and Abdaiees besieged Haiyat Sultan on his return,
and a council was held.

Donlat-khan had by this time grown up, and had his seat in all the coun-
cils (f&jahs.) On the present occasion, after paying all due deference
to hia uncle, he proposed to try the Moghuls to suggest they should first
giye their daughters to the Afghans. This was proposed accordingly.
The Moghuls however replied, that their daughters were for off at Ispa-
han, while those of the Afghans were close at hand, and could be ac-
cording to agreement married, while theirs were being sent for. The
rude Afghan chiefs were led by this to believe, that the intentions of
the Moghuls were not honorable ; and they called on Haiyat Sultan,
who had brought them into this scrape, to get them out of it.

Haiyat Sultan saying, as he had been for a long time friends with
the Beglar*begee he could not give an unbiased opinion, rose from the
council and sought his private apartment, deputing Doulat-khan to
act in his stead.

Doulatrkhan's speech was a true Afghan one. " If,*' said he, '* you
take my advice, you will sacrifice four of these Sheeah Moghuls to our four
Sunnee Yars, (four first caliphs, excluding Alee the fifth, the favorite of the
Sheeahs,) as a punishment for their presumption ; and hand the ma-
trons over to Masoor Baneezye, who will provide for them.'* This
method of chitting the gordian knot of their difficulties being highly
approved of by the assembled simple, hospitable, and brave chiefs, the
throats of four of their principal guests were cut.

On this treachery reaching ibe Beglar-begee, he wrote reproaching
Haiyat Sultan, who excused himself, and laid the blame on Doulat-khan.
The Persian governor then challenged Haiyat Sultan to prove his non-

* Whea they are very btf^h in rank, they send their swords instead, to represent their
persons.

1 845.3 An acamni of ike Early Abdalees. 46o

participation in this foul maaaaore by coming to make friends with him
again at Candahar. Thia be excused himself from doing, saying be
would not be permitted to do so by the tribe.

All retribution or apology thus being withheld, the Beglar-begee col-
lected a force under one of his chiefs, named Farrukh, and despatched it
against the Afghans, and a great battle was fought at Yaggak, in which
the Persians were defeated, and their commander killed. The Beglar-begee
belicTing the old saying, that " t&e painter's second drawing is the best,"
sent another force, before the Afghans thought he would have heart or
power to collect it, and fiilly retrieved the former defeat, and effectually
punished the Afghans' perfidy. Hai3rat Sultan retired to Hindustan.
He had two sons, Abdulla-tkhan and Khan Mahammad-khan. AbduUa-
khan had four sons, Allaiyar, Sadullah, Khan Mahammad, and Alee.

Khan Mahammad^khan had two sons ; Raheem-khan, who fled to the
Deocan from Ahmad Shah, and was not after heard of, and Akbar Shah,
bUnded by Ahmad Shah, whose son waa Khan-i-khanan. During
Doulat*khan's time the Beglar*begee was recalled by the court of Per-
sia, and another govemor sent in his stead, with whom Attal and Iz-
zat Sadozyes and Meer Wais<>khan Ohilgye intrigued against Doulat-
khan, while they pretended to be his friends. Their object was to set
aside Doulat-khan. The two Sadozyes becoming chiefs of the Abda*
lees and Meer Wais-khan of the Ohi^yes ; baring at last succeeded
in imbuing the mind of Doulat-khan with suspicion of the Beglar-begee,
and in incensing the latter against him.

Doulat-khan was suddenly besieged in a small fort on the outskirts
of his tribe, taken prisoner, and with his son Nasar-khan, and favourite
and confidential .slave, Fakeer, put to death. His tomb is in the Raza-
bagh at Kobak near Candahar. He left two sons, Rustam-khan and
Mahammad Zuman*khan. Nazar-khan is said to have been Doulat's
brother by some.

On this occurrence Rustam-khan sought the tribe, and gained such

* influence there as to make the Beglar-begee anxious to secure his

friendship. He therefore wrote, proposing that the past should be buried

in oblivion, and that his two principal advisers, Sarwar-kban Baneezye,

the son of Bukhtyar-khan, and Katak Kootezye Ahikozye, should be

despatched to Candahar to arrange the terms of friendship aod alliance.

They were despatched, and, on their return with dresses of honor, gave

466 An account of the Early AhdaUes, Q No. 162.

such a fiayour^ble account of their reception as to induce their master
to accept the invitation of the Beglar-begee, of which they were the
bearers.

Rustam-khan was confirmed in the chiefship by the king of Persia;
he kept on such good terms with the governor, and was held in such
high estimation by the whole Moghul force, that many swore by his
head.

A rebellion broke out among the Beeloches, and, as was usual, Rustam-
khan was called on to despatch a small Afghan detachment with the
Moghul troops* which latter were defeated. This was taken advantage
of by Hajee Meer Wais-khan Ghiljaee, and by Attal-khan and Izzat-
khan Sadozyes, who were Rustam's rivals at court ; and the Beglar-
begee was by them persuaded that the defeat of the Moghul troops had
been arranged between the rebels and the Afghan chief. Rustam-khan
was therefore coaxed to court, and thrown in prison. He was, after
suffering great privations* released, on his three rivals promising to mur-
der him.

Hajee Meer Wais excused himself from being the executioner, on the
plea, that should his Sadozye co-adjutors commit the deed, a bloody feud
in that tribe would be the result, which would be favorable to the
Persian power.

Izzat was also found to have some spark of patriotism left, and there-
fore Attal became the murderer, some say, partly in revenge for the death
of his uncle, Jafar Sultan.

Rustam-khan only ruled four years, and. left no issue. His tomb is
also in the Razabagh, at Kohak, near Candahar. Mahammad Zaman-
khan was at this time in Kirmap.

Hajee Meer Wais-khan was the son-in-law of Jafar Sultan Sadozye
Kamran-khelee. Doulat-khan had Meer Wais' father as a hostage.
In Jafar Sultan's time his wife, by name Durkhee, gave her daughter,
Khanzad, to Meer Wais, and it is said that one of the objects of Hajee
Meer-khan's visit to Ispahan was to get the chiefship of the Abdalees
for his brother-in-law.

In the insurrection organized by Hajee Meer Wais-khan, after his
return from Persia and Mecca, in which the Beglar-begee, Shahnawaz-
khan, was murdered. The Abdalees cordially co-operated in the under-
standing that, if successful, they were to share powet, lands, treasures, &tf .

1845.] An account of the Early AbdaUes. 467

equally with the Ohiljyes. This latter party, however, played them
false, and the Abdalees took armB. A great battle was fought between
the rival tribes near Algabad in the Dasht-i-Boree, in which the Ghil*
jyes were victorious, and the Abdalees, under Sadulla*khan Sadozye, re-
tired to Herat, of which they became masters by profiting by the dissen-
sions inside. Others say, that one AUaiyar-khan was the Sadozye chief,
who got possession of the citadel of Herat by disguising some fifty
followers as merchants with a caravan.

Shah Mahmood Ghiljye, the son and successor of Meer Wais, it is
said, made an attempt to take Herat from the Abdalees, and for that
purpose advanced to Nawah on the Helmand, where he was met by the
Herat force under SaduUa. A battle ensued, in which the latter was killed,
and Shah Mahmood returned to Candahar. He next year again ad-
vanced on Herat, as far as Oiranee, on the Farrah Rod. Here he was
met by a deputation from Herat sent by Sadulla's mother, who was
a sister of his mother, * which induced him to change his plans and to
proceed vi& Seistan to Kirmam.

By the other account Allaiyar.khan is said, after getting possession of
Herat, to have put his brother Zuman.khan and all his sons to death,
and that Ahmad alone escaped, by being an infant in the cradle. His
mother, who was an Alakozye, took him to Hajee Ismail Aleezye, the
Beglar-begee of Herat, and, by promising him her daughter for his son,
got him to intercede with Allaiyar to spare the infant's life. Hajee
Ismail shewed the child to his Peer, a spiritual father, MuUa Usman, an
Alakozye Akhund, who foretold that he would be favoured of God.

On Ahmad growing up, many of the Abdalees flocked to him, which
causing Allaiyar uneasiness, he had them all put to death : and Hajee
Ismail had his proteg^ conveyed to the neighbourhood of Subzwar and
Farrah, and there kept concealed. AUaiyar-khan's wrath was thus turned
on the Hajee whom he was waiting the first favorable opportunity of kill-
ing, when Nadir Shah appeared in the field and attracted the attention of
all Khorasan.f Mulla Usman was called upon to foretell events ; which

• * Khanzad was Mahmood's mother, and SaduUa's mother must by this have been a
second daughter of Durkhee and Jafax Sultan.

. t My Aleezye informant makes Allaiyar the governor of Herat about this time,
while a descendant of Shah Husen assures me that his name was Sadalla. Again,
that Mahammad Zuman-khan was onCe governor of Herat there is no doubt, his tomb
is now there. In the History of Persia, Mahammad-khaq, the governor of Herat, is
mentioned as having been sent by the king of Persia with overtures to Meer Wais on

468 An account of the Early Abdaiees. [No. 162.

he did, by usuriag them that 6»000 Afghans would be led into captivity
by the Persian conqueror, and that this visitation of the Almighty's
wrath was caused by the cries of one poor Noonye shepherdess, who m
vain entreated her harsh mistress to give her in-door work, instesd
of the hunger and cold of the bleak mountains. In the course of time,
Nadir Shah appeared before Herat, which he besieged for fourteen
months, leading into captivity 6,000 Afghans, men and women, which he
distributed throughout the town of Persia, employing the boldest and
most able«bodied in his army.

Their chiefs at this time were Ghanee-khan Alakozye, and Noor Ma«
hammad*khan Aleezye.

Nadir Shah had been besieging Daghistan for eleven months without
success, and his temper became accordingly soured, when one day a
shot from the besieged ramparts was so admirably thrown as to fill the
dishes Nadir Shah was dining off in his tent with dust. Thb gave the
climax to his wrath ; and he ordered the chiefs of the captive Abdslees
to be summoned. Among them, besides the two above-mentioned, were
H^jee Jamal- khan Mahamifladzye, and JanooandManoo-khans Noorzyes.
Nadir Shah informed them, swearing by Sultan Alee Moosa, that they
would all be massacred should they fail in becoming masters of the for-
tress within twenty-four hours.

The Abdaiees seebg their case desperate, swore to die like men, snd
sent a communication to the besieged, desiring them to evacuate the
fortress within six hours, which, being of course laughed at, the Abdaiees
prepared for the attack. This was so sudden and so desperate— the
Abdaiees still passing on over the dead bodies of 600 of their brethren —
as to inspire the besieged with a sudden panic, which did not subside
until they had gained the outside of the fort in their retreat. Nadir
Shah was so pleased, that he ordered the Abdaiees to ask any favor of
him. " Revenge us on the Ghiljyies of Candahar, and give us their
lands," was their first request, and " release our captives/' was their
second. Bodi were granted, and orders were given to collect the Af-

his inBurrection. A^ain, it is mentioned that in the time of Shah Mahmood Ghiljje
of Candahar, the Uzbecks invaded Khorasan, and were joined by AtadaUah
(Sadulla?) Duranee chief of the Hasan^at, who had been formerly dependent on
Herat, but who had been estranged by an insult offered him by the governor of Herat,
Mahammad Zuman-khan. A Persian force of 30,000 men advanced to Herat, and
defeated the Usbecks; but was in its turn defeated by the Afghans, 15,000 in number,
under Azadulla, who retained possession of Herat and iu dependencies.

1 845*3 ^^ account of the Early Abdalees. 469

ghans from all parts of Persia $ wives were restored to their husbands,
and daughters to their fathers : only one Aleezye was left to mourn a
wife, who in his grief sought his chief, Noor Mahammad-khan, who had
the title of Meer«i»Afghan. Every diligence was made in searching for
her, and she was at last discovered to be in the harem of Nadir's own
son. Noor Mahammad, emboldened by the past favors of that monarch,
represented the case to Nadir Shah at his next interview, who thought
to keep his word, and at the same time avoid the disgrace o^a lady who
had once entered Nadir's harem leaving it, by promising that she should
accompany her former husband back to his country, if she should be so
inclined ; calculating that the delicate food and rich attire, &c. &c. that
she had been accustomed to in his harem would disgust her with her
rough and greasy husband. In this Nadir was disappointed, for in the
interview allowed the couple on the Afghan appealing to her to enable
him to hold up his head again among his " Siyal," (equals in society,)
she decided for returning home. This the king allowed her to do with
all the goods and chattels she had become possessed of.

On Nadir Shah's marching on Candahar, Allaiyar opposed him at
Sabzwar, and was killed.

Hajee Ismail was sent for by Nadir, and ordered to bring Zaman^
khan's son to the presence. This he did after Nadir had sworn that he
would not injure him.

It is said, that on Ahmad-khan first making his appearance before
Nadir Shah, the latter was so forcibly struck with a presentiment that
he would be king, as to have required an oath from him that he would
not molest his descendants.

He ordered him to be in constant attendance, and conferred on him
a golden staff set with jewels.

On Nadir Shah taking Candahar, the Afghans reminded him of his
promise regarding the Ohiljye lands. Ghanee-khan Alakozye got the
rich valley of the Arghandah for himself and tribe, while Noor Maham-
mad-khan secured the fertile valley of Zemindawer for his Aleezyes.
The Barikzyes of the present day in pointing to the high and dry lands
that fell to their lot, bitterly regret that they were at that time not
properly represented at Nadir's court.*

* Nadir Shah divided Candahar into 3000 kulbahs, which he called Arbabee : each
kulbah containing 100 tanabs, and each tanab being 60 yards square. From each
kulbah of these Tavelee lands sown by four kharwara (40 maunds) seed, he required

470 An account of the Early Ahdalees. [No 162.

Ahmad-khan accompanied Nadir Shah in all his campaigns, and was
present in camp at the time of that monarch's murder. How he sue-
ceeded in becoming Ahmad Shah hj means of one of Nadir Shah's
cash remittances from Hindustan that fell into his hands, belongs to
his own history, and nothing is left to note but the patriotism of Nadir's
old Afghan officers.

On their being summoned to the upstart court of Ahmad Shah, to
give their advice for the consolidation of the rising Durance* power,
"First," was their reply, "raise a body of 12,000 foreign Persian
troops as your ghulam-khanahs (slaves of your will,) as a check upon
your Durances ; and, secondly, have us put to death, as we are too
powerful, and stand in your way."

Their advice in both cases was taken by Ahmad Shah \

two hoTsemeD. He gave the outskirt lands in Tavel to the Duranees, and the rich
suburb lands he assessed at one-tenth of the produce, after the following unfair ex-
periment in the lands under the walls of Candahar, which had on account of preceding
anarchy lain fallow for three years, whereas the land was always deemed and termed
** doo kish," that is, two kulbahs were alternately cultivated year about. He appoint-
ed his own men to sow one kulbah with five kharwarsof seed after ploughing it seven
times ; and because the outturn was 100 kharwars, he unfairly made a fixed settle-
ment of one-tenth, being ten kharwars grain, and ten kharwars straw (bhoosah.) The
Afghan's hereditary lands are called mouroosee or kosai.

* Ahmad Shah assumed the title of Dur-i-Duran, ** pearl of pearls/' notwithstsnd-
ing his Peer, or spiritual adviser, suggested Our-i-Oouran, ** pearl of the age."

Proceedings of the Asiatic Sodelyfor the month o/Javivab.y, 1845.

{And 'at its supplementary Meeting qf 1st February 1 1845.)

The monthly meeting of the Society took place at the usual hour, at the rooms,

on Tuesday evening, the 14th January.

The Rev. Dr. Hoeherlin, in the Chair.

The following gentlemen, proposed at the last meeting, were ballotted for and

declared duly elected.

F. Boutros, £sq. Dehli College ; A. Christopher, Esq. La Martiniere -, S. B* Bow-
ring, £sq. C. S. ', John Ward, Esq. Civil Engineer -, £. Blyth, Esq. Associate Member.

And the following new members were proposed : Major Lawrence, Resident, Nepal,
proposed by H. Torrens, Esq. seconded by the Sub-Secretary ; Rev. Peter Barb6,
proposed by U. Torrens, Esq. seconded by the Sub- Secretary.

llie Society's Office-bearers for 18M were unanimously le-elected for 18*5, and
the following gentlemen were added to their number,^-

Ab Vice* President, Lieut. Col. W. N. Forbes, B. £.

As members of the Committee of Papers,

W. Seton Karr, Esq. C. S.

W. B. O'Shaughnessy, Esq. B. M. S.

On the motion of the Secretary, H. Torrens, Esq. seconded by F. G. T. Heatley,
Esq. it was resolved.

That the following gentlemen be requested to act as Corresponding Members of
the Committee of Papers, —

V. Tregear, Esq. A. Sprenger, Esq. M. D.

Captain Boileau, B. E. Gi G. Spilsbury, Esq. M. D.

Lieut. Phayre, B. N. I. Lieut. Tickell, B. N. I.

Captain Cunningham, B. N. 1.

And that the Committee of Papers be empowered from time to time to add to the
foregoing the names of such gentlemen as it may deem likely to assist in its
labours.

It was further resolved, that the hour of meeting in future be half'past seven in-
stead of half-past eight, v. m.

Read the following list of books.

Books received/or the Meeting qf the Asiatic Society, Tuesday, January 14, 1845.

Presented.

The Holy Bible in Hindustanee, by Rev. Mr. Long.

The New Testament in Bengalee and English, Matthew to JohOi by do. do.

ii Proceedings of the Asiatic Society* C<^an. 1845.

Hindustanee Pentateuch, by the Rev. J. Long.

Hindee New Testament, by do. do.

New Testament in Bengalee, by do. do.

Psalms of David in Bengalee, 2 copies, by do. do.

A number of Bengalee tracts, by do. do.

Usher's Works, Vols. II. to XIII. by the Dublin University.

Livius ed. Walker, 7 vols, by do. do.

Wall on the Antient Orthography of the Jews, 3 vols, by do. do.

H. Lloyd's Treatises on Light and Vision, 1 vol. by do. do.

Lectures on the Wave-Theory of Light, 1 vol, by do. do.

B. Lloyd's Mechanical Philosophy, by do. do.

Todd's Discourses on the Prophecies relating to Antichrist, 1 vol. by do. do.

Proceedings of the Irish Archasological Society, by the Society.

Journal of Great Britain and Ireland, No. 13, by the Society.

Proceedings of the Royal Asiatic Society for 1844, by the Society.

Bulletin de la Soci^t^ de G^ographie. Tome 20. Paris, 1843. By the Society.

Journal of the Agricultural and Horticultural Society of India, vol. iii, part iii, by

the Society.
Specimen e Litteris Orientalibus, exhibens Taalibii Syntagma. Auct. J. J. Valeton,

by the Academy of Leyden.
Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, No. 78, April to July 1844, by the Editor.
Calcutta Christian Observer, January 1845, by the Editors.
North British Review, No. 1, May 1844, by the Rev. Dr. Wilson.
Akademischer Almanach der Baierischen Akademie der Wissenschaften fiir das Jahr

1844, by Professor v. Martins.
Oriental Christian Spectator, for December 1844, by the Editor.
Documents et Observations sur le Cours du Bahr el Abiad, par M. D'Armand.
Second Voyage ditto ditto, two copies.
Collection G6ographique de la Biblioth^que Royale.
Glossarium Sanscriticum, auctP. Bopp* Fasciculus II. Berolini, 1844, by the author.

Exchanged,
Journal Asiatique, No. 13, April, 1844.
The AthensBum, Nos. 884—888, 19th Oct. to 2nd Nov. 1844.

Purchased.
Haji Khalfa Lexicon, 1 vol. printed for the Asiatic Society by the Oriental Transla-
tion Fund.
Lettre sur 1' utility des Muse^s ethnographiques, par Ph. Fr. de Siebold, Paris, 184JL
Journal des Savants, June, 1844.

Philosophical Magazine for July, No. 162. Supplement to D. D. No. 163, and for
Aug. 1844, No. 164.

Lardner's Cabinet Cyclopsdia, History of Greece, by C. Thirlwall, vol. 8.
It was resolved, that the Society subscribe to the North British Review.
Read the following letter from the Librarian of Trinity College, Dublin :—-

To the Vice Pruident qf the dwMte Society of Bengal,
SiE,— I am directed by the Provost and Senior Fellows of Trinity College, Dablin, (inparsuance
of the answer which they commissioned the Vice Chancellor of the University of Dublin to nak*

Jan. 1845.]] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. iii

to your letter to him, dated last September) to forward to you for presentation to the Asiatic So-
ciety of Bengal, the works noted on the other side.

I have the honor to be, Sir,
Your obedient servant,

Chaelss Wm. Wall,

THnUy College, Dublin, July 8, 1844. Librarian.

Archbishop Usher's works, edited by Charles B. Ebrington, D. D. Regius, Professor of Di-
vinity in the University of Dublin, Vol. II. to XIII. inclusive ^Yol. I. XIY. &c. not yet published)

An examination of the Ancient Orthography of the Jews. By Charles William Wall, Senior
Fellow of Trinity College, and Professor of Hebrew in the University of Dublin, Vols.!. II. and III.

Discourses on the Prophecies relating to Antichrist in the writings of Daniel and St. Paul. By
James Henthron Todd, M. R. I. A. Fellow of Trinity College, Dublin.

A Treatise on Light and Vision. By the Rev. Humphrey Lloyd, M. A. Fellow of Trinity College,
Dublin.

An Elementary Treatise of Mechanical Philosophy. By Bartholomew Lloyd, D. D. Provost of
Trinity College, Dublin.

Lectures on the Wave Theory of Light. By the Rev. H. Lloyd, D. D.

Livius, a John Walker, 7 Vols.

Read the following letter from the Librarian :

To H. ToRRBifs, Esq. Secretary, Asiatic Society.

SiK, — I have the honor to submit to you an alphabetical list of the books received during the
past year into the Library, together with the account sales of the Oriental publications, and an
aocoont of the publications delivered, sold and in store, from the Slst of July 1843, to the Slst of
December 1844.

From the alphabetical list it appears, that the number of works received, is nearly the same
with that of the preceding year.

I beg, however, to observe, that most of these works bear upon Natural History and Natural
Science in general, while a few only are connected with Oriental Researches. Although it is very
desirable, that the library of the Asiatic Society should contain standard works on natural sciences,
the Oriental division, which is so closely linked with the objects of the Society, should not be
neglected. I therefore beg to propose, that the Society may be pleased to fix an annual sum of some
hundred rupees to enable the Librarian to improve the collection of Oriental works in the Library.

I have the honour to be. Sir,
Your most obedient servant,
Mfh January, 1845. £, Rosa.

Abstract of the List of Books received into the Library during 1844.

Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Transactions, vol. ii. January and February 1844,
No. 1.
Ditto ditto Proceedings, Nos. 30-33.

Agricultural and Horticultural Society of India, Journal, vol. t, Nos. 1M2, vol. 3, Nos. 1-9.
Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Nos. 77-83 and Nos. 85-89.
Athenaeum, Nos. 855-858, and Nos. 861-883.

Ayeen Akbery, or the Institutes of Akber, translated by Oladwin, 2 vols.
Bombay Branch Royal Asiatic Society. Journal, No. 7, 1844.
Botanical Society of London, 1889. vol. 1.

British Association for the Advancement of Science. Report for 1843.
Calcutta Christian Observer, vol. v. 1844, from January to December, IS Nos.

iv Proceedings of the Asiatie Society . [J as. 1845.

CalenUa literwjr Gleaner, vol. iL No*. 10- 11.

ClaMical Museum of London, 18*4, Nos. 2-5.

Fonter, (C.) Hittorieal Geography of Arabia. London, 1844, 2 vols.

Oayangoe, (P. de) History of the Mahomedan Dynasties in Spain, voL ii. London, IMS.

General Report on Public Instruction in the Bengal Presidency, for 1842-48, 1 roL

Geological Society of London, List of the Members for 184S.

^— Proceedings, yol. 14, Ka 90, and Index to yol. 3, No. 9S.

Oolingham, (J.) Meteorological R^[ister at Madras.

Ooodvyn, (H.) Memoir on Iron Roofing, Calcutta, 1844.

Ditto ditto plates.

Grey, (Hamilton) History of Etruria, part 1, 1 vol.
Griffith, (W.) the Palms of British India.

Heexen, (A. H. L.) Manual of Ancient History. Third edition Oxford, 1840.
Jameson's Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, Nos. 69-72.
JefiW)y, (A.) Notes on the Marine Glue. London, 184S, Pamphlet.
Jerdon, Illustrations of Indian Ornithology, No. 1, Madras 1843.
Johnston, (K. M.) Report of the Secretary of the Navy.
Jones, (J. T.) Brief Grammatical Notices of the Siamese Language.
Lardner, (D.) and Walker Cabinet Cyclopsdi» Electricity, vol. ii. 1844.

London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosopical Magazine and Journal of Science, vol. 2C, Nos. 147,
148 ;.voI. €3, Nos. 159, 150, 153, 185; vol. 24, Nos. 106, 161.
M'Clelland (J-) and W. Griffith, Calcutta Journal of Natural History, 4 vols. Nos. 1-16, and Nos.

17, la

Madras Journal of Literature and Science, No. 80, June 1844.

Magnetic Observations from the Observatory of Bombay.

Naturalist's Library, Ichthyology, vol. 6, British Fishes, Ornithology, vol. 14, British Birds, 2 fois.

Napier, (W. F. P.) History of the Peninsular War, vols. S>5.

Niebuhr (B. G.> History of Rome, vols. 4, 5. «

Oriental Christian Spectator, vol. 4. No. It. Second Series, Nos. 1-11.

Penny Cyclopedia, vols. €5^ fl6,

Piddington, (H.) Horn-book of Storms for the Indian and China Seas, 1 vol.

Prichard, (J. C.) Natural History of Man, 1 vol.

Ditto ditto Researches into the Physical History of Mankind, vols. 1-4.

Ram Chunder Doss, General Register of the Bengal Civil Service, from 1796-1842.

Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland, 1843. Annual Report of the Council.

Royal Geographical Society of London. Journal, vol. 14, part 6, 184S.

Royal Irish Academy. Transactions, vol. 19, part ii.

Ditto Proceedings, 1841-42, part 6 ; 1842-43, part 7.

Royal Society of Edinburgh, vol. 15, part tnd, 8rd Series.

Royal Society of London, Philosophical Transactions, trom 18S8-48, 6 vols, and part i. for 1844.

Shea, (and Troyer) Dabistan, or School of Manners, translated from the Persian.

Sketeh of the Systems of Education, moral and intellectual, in practice at Bruce Cattle Sduxd,
Tottenham, London, 1839, 1 vol*

Slane, (Mac G. de) Ibn Khalikan's Biographical Dictionary, translated from the Arabic, voL ii,
Paris 1848.

Smith, (A.) Illustrations of the Zoology of South Africa, Nos. 18, 19«

Society of Arts, Transactions, vol. 54.

Society for the Encouragement of Arts, Manufactures and Commerce, premium for the sessions
1843-44.

Somerby, (B.) Thesaurus Conchyliorum, or figures and descriptions of shells. 184S-4S.

Jan. 1845.] Proceedings of the Asiaiic Society. v

Somerby, Conchologia Tconica, a Repertory of ipedes of shells, pictorial, descriptive. London,
1848, S vols.

Taylor, (O. P. G.) General Catalogue of the principal fixed stars, from observations made at
Madras in 1890- 184S.

Troyer, Vide Shea.

Vetch, Inquiry into the manner of establishing a steam-navigation between the Mediterranean
and Red Seas, London, 184S.

Wiseman, Letter on science and revealed religion.

Wood, (W.) Catalogue of a valuable collection of books in Natural History, arranged in classes
according to the Linnean system.

Zoology of the voyage of H. M. Ship " Sulphur," during the years 18S6-184C.

French.

Annuaire du Bureau des Longitudes, 184t, 1 vol.

Accroissement de la collection G^ographique de la Bibliothdque Royale, 1841.

Bureau des Longitudes. Connaissance des temps des movements celestes pour, 184S-45,
Srols.

Florival, (P. C. Y.de) Moise de Khorene, texte Armemien et introduction Franyaise. 1844, 2 vols.

Humboldt, (A. de) L'Asie Centrale. Paris, 184S, 3 vols.

Journal des Savants, Paris, April, 1043 to Aug. 1844.

Jomard, Notation Hypsom6trique, P.

Mas, (S.de) M^moire Sur I'id^ographie Macao. 1844^ P.

Ditto ditto, Yocabularie I'id^ographique, P.

Qnatremdre Histoire des Sultans Mamlouks de I'Egypte. Tom. II, Paris, 184S.

Rafii, (ChrJ M^moire sur la D6couverte de I'Amerique. Copenhagen 1843, 1 vol.

Roberts, (G.) Voyage de Delhi 4 Bombay en 1841, 1 vol*

Societ6 Asiatique, Journal 3 me. S6rie. Not. Dec 184f; Tome 4. 4 me. Serie vols. 1-3.

Soci6t£ de G6ographie. BulUtin 2 me. S^rie, Tomes 18-19. Paris, 184S-43.

Ditto ditto. Extract du Rapport Annuel, 1SS9.

Societ6 Physique et d'Histoire Naturelle de Geneve Memoires, 1841-42, 1 vol.

8ociet6 Royale d'agriculture de Lyon.

Annales des Sciences Physiques et Naturelles 18S8-1840, S vols.

Society Royale des antiquaries du Nord, section Asiatique, memoires, 184S 4S, Copenhagen.

Tassy, (G. de) Saadi Paris, 184S,— P.

Walkenaer, (Baron de) Notice Historique sur la vie et les ouvrages de Mtg'or Rennell,— P.

Italian.

Hemsd, (G. de) Ultimi progress! de la Geografia. Milano 1843.— P.
Informe Sobre el Estado de las Islas Filipinas an 1842 Madrid 1843,2 vols.

German.

KoeniglicHe Gesellschaft fiir die nordische Alterthumskunde. lahresversammlung, 1 842.
Lassen, (Ch) Zeitschrift fOr die Kunde des Morgenlands. Sechsten Bandes erstes Heft, 1844.
Leitfaden xur nordishen Alterthumskunde. Copenhagen 1887.— P.

Danish.
Annaler for nordisk old kyndighed, 1840-41, vol. I. 184C, 1843.

Latin,

Lassen, (Chr) de Taprobane Insula, veteribus cognita, dissertatio. Bonae, 1841— P.

Hindooitanee.
Rafiel Hishab, 1 vol.

vi Proceedings of the Asiaiic Society. [Jav. 1845.

Zend.

France Atpandiarjei ; The Zaina of the Parsis with Guzarati translation, paraphrase, and com-
ment, 184S.

Sanscrit .

Yatet, (W.) Nalayodaya by Kalidasa. Text and Translation. Calcutto, 1844, 1 vol.

OrierUal PublicatumSf S^c, sold from the }tt of January 1844, to the 31 tt Decem-
ber, 1844.

Mahabharata, yol. I. 6 copies, vol. II. 6 do., vol. III. 6 do., voL IV. 7 do. ...

Index to ditto, vol. I. 5 copies, vol. II. 5 do., vol. III. 5 do., vol. IV. 5 do. ... .^

Hairlwansay v copies, ... ••• .m ... .m ... ... ...

Ri^a Tarrangini, 7 copies, .^ ... ... ... .•■ ... .»

^aisDada, lo copies, ... •#« ,»» ... .m ••• ... ...

Sausrata, vols. I and II. 8 copies each. m« ... ...

Fatawe Alemgiri, voL I. C copies, vol. II. fl do., vol. III. 2 do., vol. VI. do., vol. V.

o do., vol. VI., B do. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

Inaya, vols. 2'4. t copies each, ... ... ... m. ... .m .m

Khasanat ul Ilm ul Riaxi, 6 copies, ... ... ... ...

Fawame ul Ilm ul Riaxi, 6 copies, ... ... ... ... ...

Anis ul Musharrahin, C copies, ... ... .^

Sharaya ul Islam, 4 copies, ... .« ... ... .^

Epitome of the Grammar of the Beloochee languages, 1 copy,

Essay snr le Pali, 1 copy,

Anthologia Sanscritica, t copies, .» ... ... ... ... .m

Gtographie d'Aboulfeda, S copies, ... ... ... ...

Macarius's Travels, 1 copy,

Memoir of Jehanguire, S copies.

History of the Afghans, 2 copies,

Travels of Ibn Batuta, 1 copy, ...

Lassen's Gita Govinda, 1 copy, ...

Lassen's Institutiones, I copy, ... ... ... ... ... ...

Asiatic Researches, vol. 16. 1 copy, vol. 19. p. I. 1 copy, p. II. S copies, vol. £0 p. I

and II. 1 copy each.... ... ... ... ... ... ...

Asiatic Journal, 8 Nos. ... ... ... ... ... — —

Total, Rupees, ... ». 1,076 0 0

Abstract.

Account of the Oriental Publications delivered, sold, and in store, from ^IstofJubf

1843, to December the 3U^ 1844.

Mahabharata,

VoU. I. II. III. IV.
Found, ... ... ... ... Copies, CIS 233 254 €84

Delivered and Sold, ... ... ... „ CO 20 fl6 CI

Balance, ... ... ... 198 CIS 2S8 261

Rs. At, Pt.

260

106

248

Ifi

Jan. 1845.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Index to Mahahharata,

Volg. I.

II.

III.

IV.

Found,

•••

... Copie«, 592

896

S9t

Sf3

DeliTered and Sold,

■••

•>. ... ,, /s

Balance,

•ee

•M ... 320

Harriwansa.

SCS

Z19

"S05

Foond,

•••

••• ••• •••

•«•

Copies,

169

Delivered and Sold,

—

■•« ••• ••«

•••

i»

Balance,

• va

••• ••# •«•

Raja Tarangini,

•••

4^9

Found,

•••

•
••« •»• •••

• «■

Copies,

€75

Delivered and Sold,

•••

•■• ••• »••

• ••

«i

Balance,

Found,

Delivered and Sold,

Balance,

Found, ...
Delivered and Sold,

Balance,

Found,

Delivered and Sold,

Balance,

Found, ... .«

Delivered and Sold,

Balance, ..

Found,

Delivered and Sold,

Balance,

Found,

Delivered and Sold,

Balance,

t66

Saishada,

Sausruta.

... Copies,

197

•••

«•■

167

Vols.

II.

... Copies

, f6l

808

... ,,

243

Sanscrit Catalog*ie.

Fatawe Alemgiri'

Vols. I. II. III.
... Copies, 81 91 97

»»

12 12 12

Copies, £5J
6

249

IV. V. VI.
76 118 129
24 25 fl4

Inaya.

... 69 79 85 62 93 105

Vols. II. III. IV.
... Copies, S5 €8 SO
1« 12 le

23 16

Khaaanat ul Jim.

... Copies, 385
„ 16

... VVi7

VIU

Praeeedif^s of the Asiatic Society, [Jan. 1845.

Fawane ul Jim ul Riazi.

Foon

... Copies, S9S
16

»i

S77

Anis ul Aiusharrahin.

... Copies, SI 6

.M 11 IS

so«

Sharaya ul Islam,

Delivered and Sold,
Balance,

Found, .M

Delivered and Bold, .

Balance,

Found,

Delivered and Sold,

Balance,

Found,

Delivered and Sold,

Balance,

Asiatic Researches*

Vols. S. 7. 8. 9. U. IC. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 18. 18. 19. 19. 19. «0. €0. 20.

Persian Catalogue*

•■•

Copies,

S14

•••

>»

•••

298

••■

Copies,

2S8

••■

»»

•wm

23C

Found, ... 3 I S C

Delvd. 8: Sold, 0 0 0 0

1 5 80 47 fS6 98 21S 69 1£1 46
OOlllC 1001

C6 96 CS5 12 129 141
13 11 2 1

3 13 2

Found, .„

Delivered and Sold,

Balance,

Found,

Delivered and Sold,

Balance,

1 6 €9 46 55 96 212 69 151 45

Tibetan Grammar*

Tibetan Dictionary,

25 93 234 11 127 140

... Copies, C08

M. ,, 11

197

.. Copies, t05

.. „ 11

194

Dictionarium Latino-Anamiticum,

Found,

Delivered and Sold,

Balance,

Copies, 58
11

I'he Catalogue accompanying this letter was ordered to be published in the Pro-
ceediogs, and upon the proposal of the President, seconded by the Secretary, it was
resolved, that a supplementary Catalogue, to compri8% all the works received since
the last Catalogue of the Library was printed, be also prepared and printed.

Read the following letter also from the Librarian : —

To H. ToRRBNS, Esq,^ Secretary ^ Ahatic Society.

SiR,-»l beg leave to inform you, that I can procure the second volume of Strange's
** Elements of Hindoo Law," and the first volume of Crawford's *' Indian Archi-

Jan. 1845.]] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. ix

peiago at 8 and 5 rupees reipectively. Ai the original price of Strange's ElemenU is
11 rupees per volume, and of Crawford's Indian Archipelago 8 rupees per volume,
viil you authorixe me to purchase those volumes for the Library, in order to complete
the above mentioned works.

1 take this opportunity to submit to you the following list of valuable Oriental works,
which I would suggest should be purchased for the Library :-->

1. Die Zigeuner in Buropa and Asien, von Dr. A. T. Pott. Erster Theii. Halle.

1844.

2. Kammavakya, liber de officiis sacerdotum Buddhicorum. Police, Latine. Auct.

Fr. Spiegel.

3. Chr. Lassen, Indische Alterthums-Kunde. Ersten Bandes erste Halfte.

4. Panini's Acht Biicher grammatiscber Uegeln, von Otto Bothlinck. 2 B'ande.

5. Radices LinguiB Pracriticss. Ed. N. Delius.

6- Radices lingusB Sanscriticse. Ed. N. L. Westergaard.

7. Bothlingk, (D.) Erster Versuch iiber den Accent im Sanscrit.

8. Die Declination im Sanscrit.

9. Unadi Affize.

10. 5 Upanishads aus dem Yayur, Samu and Atharba-Veda. Herausgegeben von

L. Paley.
lAth January, 1845. E. Kobr.

Resolved — That the Secretary and Librarian be authorized to purchase these
works as occasion may present. The work of Count Bijonstema, entitled Theogony,
Cosmogony, and Philosophy of the Hindoos, was also specially ordered to be obtained
for the use of the Archseological Committee.

The Secretary presented specimen copies of Abdool Ruzzak's work .on Suffee
terms, edited by Dr. Sprenger, of which those half bound were considered the best
for the presentation copies.

The following note was read : —

Mt obar SiR,'*oMy friend Colonel Stacy of the 43rd Regt having requested me to
make over to the charge of the Curator of the Asiatic Society the accompanying
ancient Hebrew MS., I have the pleasure to send it per bearer, and shall be fa-
vored by your acknowledging the receipt of it.
BaUygung$t lUh January ^ 1845. Ron. Wrouguton*

I'he MS. to which it refers was handed to the Rev. Dr. Hoeberlin, for exami-
nation and report.

Read the following letter and paper from the Secretary to the Government of Bom

bay: —

(No. 3656 of 1844.)

To the Secretary to the Asiatic Society of Calcutta.

General Department.

Sir, — I am directed by the Honorable the Governor in Council of Bombay to re-
quest the acceptance by the Asiatic Society of Calcutta, of the accompanying six

X Proceedings of the Asiatic Socidy- [Jan. 1845.

gold coins, discovered in the village of Heeolee in the Malwan Talooka of the Rat-
nagherry CoUectorate, and at the same time to forward a copy of a descriptive me-
morandam by the Secretary to the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society.
Bombay Castht llth December, 1844. M. Escombb,

Secretary to Government.
Notice by the Secretary of the Society on ten H indie gold coins, found at the village

of Hewli in the Southern Konkan, and presented by Government; also on a collectioa

of gold Zodiac coins of the Emperor Jehangir.

The ten gold coins transmitted by Government, for the acceptance of the Society,
weigh each — grains, and have generally, on one side, the figure of a lion, with an in-
scription below on Telagu letters, Bali;i Shri^ which may be translated prosperity
to the Bali, and which are oblations of food offered, at the four cardinal points, to
Indra, god of the firmament, Fama judge of the dead, Varuna the ocean, and Soma
the moon** Two of the coins are hammered, and quite plain on one side ; having
on the other, stamped symbols for the four preceding deities, indicated by letten,
among which I recognise the Telagu letter k standing for Yama, and the cave
ch for Soma. The centre symbol must therefore be intended for Vivaiwa, or
the sun. On the reverse of six of the coins we find written within a circle the
word RudrOt a name for Siva ; and on another of them, the Trisul, or emblem of Siva,
with an inscription below in Deva Nagari or Shrimanya Devaya <4}^9(|c€|e4l^
to the prosperous god ; this last is the newest of the series, and indicates the establish-
ment of the Saivite worship.

In the McKensie collection of Hindoo gold coins, two of them are enumerated as the
Sinha Mudra Fanam^ or the Fanam with the lion impression, without any farther
information being given regarding them. These, and the ones now under considera-
tion, may, with much probability, be assigned to the successors of the Andhra kings of
Tel ingana, the ^arapatt sovereigns of Warangal; who appear to have been origi-
nally feudatories of the Chalukya kings ofUCalyani. This family is known by the name
of the Kakataya princes of Warangal, who at the commencement of their career, in
the end of the eleventh century of our era, were Jains, Their original residence was
Anumakonda, from whence, sometime after Sftl 1010, A. D. 1088, these princes remov-
ed to Warangal, which became their capital, and represented the chief Hindu state
of Southern India, till destroyed by the Mahomedans during the reign of Ghias-ad-din
Toghluk of Delhi, Hejirah 721, A. D. 1321. The then reigning Prince of Warangal
is called, in Colonel Brigg's translation of Ferishiik, Sudder Dew, being an evidest
mistake for his real- name Rudra Deva ; whose possessions appear to have been
bounded on the North-west by those of Rama, Raja of Oevagiri, the modem Oaola*
tabad.

The coins now submitted for examination, having on the reverse the name o(Rudra,
may have been struck during the reign of the prince just mentioned ; but there are
good grounds for assigning them a higher antiquity, or the beginning of A. D. 1100, as
at this time the second of the Kakataya princes of Warangal, named Rudra Deva,
adopted the Saiva in place of the Jain faith, and built many temples to Siva or Ma-

» See perpetual obligations of a householder in Wilson's translation of the Vishnu Parana,
Quarto, p. SOS.

Jan. 1845.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, xi

kadeva, in order to expiate the crime of having killed his father. Only one decisively
Saivite coin appears in this collection, and is the most recent of the series ; all the
others indicating the prevalence of the Jain practice of astrology, and the worship of
the Bali or Baliah^ which are sidereal spirits.

(Signed,) Jaubs Bird,

Secretary, Bombay Branch Royal Asiatic Society.
(True Copy,)

W. ESCOMBB,

Secretary to Government.
The Sob-Secretary stated, that he bad received from Dr. Mouat the following
letter, with the pamphlets therein alluded to. The pamphlets were ordered to be
distributed to the Members of the Committee.

Mr DEAR PiDOiNGTON, — Mr. Latter, just before leaving for Arracan, requested to
present the accompanying copies of his ' Note on Budhism* to the Asiatic Society,
for the use of the Members of the Committee appointed to carry out the plans deve-
loped in the letter from the Honorable Court of Directors.

lQthJanuary» Fkbd. J. Mouat.

Read the following letters: —

(No. 3076.)
From the Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal, to H. Torrbns, Esq. Vice
President and Secretary to the Asiatic Society, dated Fort William, 1 Uh De-
. cember, 1844.

Sir, — With reference to your letter of the 7th March last, recommending on the
part of the Asiatic Society, that certain books now in the Calcutta Public Library
should be transferred to the charge of the §ociety, 1 am directed to forward, for the
information of that body, the accompanying copy of a letter, dated the 4th ultimo, from
the Curators of the Library.

At the same time, I am instructed to intimate that, though in the opinion of the
Bight Honorable the Governor, the existing arrangement cannot be fairly or properly
disturbed without the consent of both Associations, yet His Excellency is inclined to
think that, if the works in question are connected with Eastern Philology, they would
be better placed in the Library of the Asiatic Society, than in the Public Library.

A. TURNBULL,

Under Secretary to the Government of Bengal.

From the Curators qf the Calcutta Public Library, to A. Tornbull, Esq. Under

Secretary to the Government of Bengal.

Sir,— I have the honor to acknowledge, on the part of the Curators, the receipt of
your letter, dated 15th April last, enclosing copy of a letter from the Vice President
and Secretary to the Asiatic Society, and requesting us to report, for the information
of Government, our willingness or otherwise to accede to the proposition for the transfer
of the books therein alluded to, from the Calcutta Public Library to that of the
Asiatic Society.

xii Proeeedingi of the Asiatic Society. QJan. 1845.

We beg at the same time to apologise for the delay which> by some singular accident,
hat oecnrred. With regard to the proposition of a transfer of the books, we beg to
^tate, for the information of the Hon'ble the Go?emor of Bengal, that the boob
became the property of the Members of the Calcutta Public Library by a gift of the
Bengal Government, confirmed by the Hon'ble Court of Directors, under certain
engagements, which it is unnecessary at present to enter into, but which have been
always complied with. As books of reference, we beg to observe that they are far more
available to the public here than they can possibly be at the Library of the Asiatic
Society, from the number of our subscribers, and the popular form of our lastitation
generally. I am, &c.

(Signed) G. T. Marshall, Curator,
Metcai/e Halh Chairman qf the monthly meeting of Curators,

AthNov. 1844. (True copy,)

A. TURNBULL,

Under Secretary to the Oovtrnment of Bengal.

Resolved-- That the following gentlemen, viz. r-—

Dr. RoBB,

Dr. Gamthony,

S. G. T. Hbatlby, Esq.

and H. Torrbns, Esq. as Secretaiy, be requested to form a Sub-Committee for

considering what interchange might take place between the Society and the Public

Library, as to duplicate works, without reference to subsequent arrangements.

Read the following letter addressed to the Geological Society of London, and it

was agreed that it would be proper to despatch at the close of every year, one of the

same tenor to every Society or Editor, whose works are regularly receiyed by the

Society.

The Secretary, Geological Society qf London*

Sir,— I am directed to acknowledge the due and regular receipt of your Transactions
and Proceedings by the Asiatic Society of Bengal, and to express to your Society onr
best thanks for the same. Should any irregularity in the receipt of the Journal or
Transactions (Researches) of the Asiatic Society of Bengal occur, our London pnb*
lishers and Agents, Messrs. Allen and Co., will readily explain or rectify it

We have to request you will be good enough to transmit to them the numbers of
your Proceedings, noted on the other side, and your bill for them, as the most part have
probably been duly received by us, but are lost

(^gned) H.ToRRSNS,
V. P. and Sec. Asiatic Society of Bengal
Museum, 70th Jan. 1845.

Read the following extract of a letter from Captain Phayre, B. N. I. to the Se-
cretary, dated Sandoway, Cnd December 184^.

Mr obar Torrbns,— I hope, before long, that 1 shall be able to o£Eer a treatise
on Burmese Astronomy, from the pen of the Rev. Mr. Stilson, a Missionary here,

Jan. 1845.3 Proceedings of ike Asiatic Society. xiit

who i« fully competent to the task. 1 am lorry the coios (the Penian part of them)
are undecipherable ; the fact is, the inscriptions must have been out by some ignorant
peiion in Arrakan, with a few Persian letters scrawled for the name of the thing. Are
the gold coins (BUpkani t^p^J from Cheduba ?
Sandaway^ December % 1844.

The Secretary presented a paper liom J. Middleton, Esq. C. S,, being Observations
on the specific Gravity of sea-water, which was referred to the Editors of the
Journal for publication.

As it was already late, the President suggested that it might be advisable to call
a supplementary Meeting for such business as remained, and for the reports of the
CnratorK; which was agreed to, and Saturday the 1st February being considered as
he most convenient day* it was named for that purpose.

For all the foregoing communications and contributions, the best thanks of the
Society were accorded.

Proceedings of the Supplementary Meeting,

As above noted, the Supplementary Meeting of the Society was held on the 1st
February, at 7 J p. m. — J. Fulton, Esq., Member Committee of Papers, in the Chair,
when the reports of the Curators were read as follows : —

Rbportof thb Curator, Musivm of Economic Giology, and Gbolooxcal and

MiNBRALOOlCAL DbPARTMSNTS, FOR THB MONTH OF DbCBMBBR.

Oeologieal and Minerahgieal,^OvLr zealous and indefatigable contributor, Lieut.
Sherwill of the Behar Revenue Survey, has sent us a most valuable geological map of
Zillah Behar, with three chests containing upwards of 350 splendid sised 'specimens
of the various rocks and minerals, numbered to the localities marked on the map.
Lieut. Sherwill's notes to accompany the specimens have not yet arrived, but I
have deemed it right to bring forward this magnificent contribution this evening, that
we may have the pleasure of thanking him, as he so richly deserves, at the earliest pos-
sible moment. If the Society think with me, I should deem it right that it should,
in such manner as may be thought proper, bring to the special notice of Government
this meritorious instance of an officer voluntarily adding so highly and so valuably to
his particular duties ; of which we may, I think truly say, that there is no example
yet on record. It must not be forgotten, that the officers of the Revenue Survey have
no light task, and that this addition to our knowledge of his district has been made by
Lieut. Sherwill probably in the hours of relaxation and repose. 1 trust that his notes,
with what we can glean from Buchanan, will enable us to construct some good sec-
tions ; in which case, imperfect as they may, and as every thing short of a regular
geological survey, must be, it will still be the best geological notice of any separate
Zillah in India, and an invaluable example to others ; one indeed, which I feel assured
the Society will not allow to pass by without all the honour in its poWer to bestow
upon it.

I present now my detailed report on the Aerolite, presented by Captain J. Abbott,
which was exhibited at the October meeting. I have put it in the form of a paper for

xtv Proceedings of the AsiaUe Society. [Jan. 1845,

the JouTual, as these phasnomena are of special interest at home on many accounts, and
oiiT Aerolite is of a very rare kind.

I mentioned in my former report, that we had written to the Collector of Candeish,
requesting his assistance in procuring further information of the Aerolite, and more
specimens if obtainable* I have now the pleasure of submitting his reply, which is as
follows. The report will be incorporated with my paper.

H. ToBasNs, Bsq* Secretary and FicS' President, Asiatic Society.

Sir,— I have now the pleasure to comply as far as in my power lies, with the request
contained in your letter of the 23rd November last, and to send you five pieces of the
Aerolite to which you allude, with a statement from the parties who witnessed the
fall of it.

If in this or any other matter 1 can be of service by furnishing information, or other-
wise forwarding the views of your Society, 1 beg you will freely conmiand me.

Candeish, June 6, 1845. J. M. Bbll,

Collector of Candeisb*

P. S. — The fragments of the Aerolite have been sent by bangy post ; I shall be
glad to hear that you have received them, and that they are of sufficient size to be of
value.

Captain Latter, 67th B. N. I. has presented us with a very beautiful collection of mi-
nerals, being 128 good sized specimens and from first-rate dealers, (Mawe or Tennant ?)
some of which will be handsome additions to our cabinet, and others serve to replace
inferior specimens or to shew varieties. Captain Latter has added to this very hand-
some donation a considerable number of Geological and Mineralogical specimens
from Algeria ; including some of copper, from the lodes now working on the flanks of
the lesser Atlas by the French ! and fossils, &c. from the desert between Sues
and Cairo.

We should also place on record the following extract of a polite letter from Capt*
Baker, B. E., to whom I have written to say that we should be most obliged by any
thing from such a locality.

Secretary to the Asiatic Society qf Calcutta,

Dear Sir,

1 passed through Calcutta lately on my return from Scinde, and had hoped to pre-
sent to the Society some geological specimens from that country ; unfortunately, how-
ever, my baggage had not arrived before I was obliged to leave, and it may even be
sometime before I have an opportunity of sending them.

On the arrival of my baggage, you will however receive two small boxes of fossiis
from Lieut. Blagrave of the Sinde Survey.

28M December, 1844. W. E. Baker, Capt. Engineers.

Museum qf Economic Geology. — A specimen was handed to me at the meeting of
January, marked as ** a species of Asphaltum from the bed of the Namsay river near
Jeypore, Upper Assam, presented by Mr. F. C. Marshall." It is unfortunately not
Asphaltum, which will be a great treasure wherever it is discovered in any accessible
locality in India, but cannel coal, apparently of a very fine quality. Our thanks are
nevertheless equally due to Mr* Marshall for his very kind attention, and we shall be
greatly obliged by specimens of everything he can send us; particularly if pitch-like or

Jan. 1845.] Proceedings of the Aeiaiie Society, xv

earthy-looking substances of any kind, which melt and born, and if they also effervesce
with any acids, as strong vinegar or lime-juice, so much the better.

I have here also again the pleasure of referring to Lieut SherwiU's active kindness
in support of the objects of the Museum. I had written to him on the subject of the
Corundum recently found and presented by Dr. Rowe, and in reply he sends us a set
of specimens analagous to those which I had obtained from the bai ar, but accompanied
by the following very interesting account of the specimens and mines ; which last were
not known, I think, to exist in any locality north of the Nerbudda.

Mt dbar Sir,— 1 have succeeded after some trouble in getting you specimens of
Corundum, from a locale little known to Europeans ; they were obtained from a hill
in Lat 240 K/, Long. 83o SCy, about 20 miles S. W. from Vantaree, behind the
table- land of Rhotas, in a province known as Singrowlee. The mines are worked once
a year, when enough is worked out to supply the wants of the Mahajuns, who send
bullocks to convey it away. From this spot the greater part of Western India is sup-
plied. The following Nos. apply to the Nos. on the specimens.
No. 1. Goolabee, named from its rose colour, is considered the best.
No. 2. Mussooreea, named from its colour, as resembling Mussoor-dal (ervum lens)
is 2nd in quality.

No. 3. Bhakra, from being of many colours, (greyish ?) 3rd in quality.
No. 4. Teleeya, named from its resembling .in colour, the seed of the telee^ 4th in
quality.

No. 5. Considered impure, being mixed with scales of Mica.
No. 6. Very impure, being mixed with crystals of (Zeolite ?*)
In a short time I hope to be able to go to the spot myself, when you shall have a
description of the place, rocks, &c. 1 think if you look amongst my Behar specimens
you will find some corundum of the 1st or Goolabee quality, about No. 250 or 240.
Legend attached to the quarrying of the Singrowlee Mine.

** The rock, by the permission of the gods, is for one day, and one day only in the
year. Corundum ; during the remaining 364 days the rock is mere rock and of no earth-
ly use." This is rather a clever story of the owner of the quarry I I should like
very much to hear if you do find any Corundum amongst my Behar specimens.

W. S. Sbbrwill.
We received some time ago from Captain Williams the following letter and notice,
with the small fragments (of a few grains in weight only) referred to in it

H. PiDDiNGTON, Esq. Assistant Secretary to the Asiatic Society qf Calcutta*
Mt dear Sir, — 1 have had the pleasure to receive your letter regarding the Vol-
cano near this place, and I will not fail to collect specimens of the stones, earth, &c.
&c., on, and all around the hill, and send them up in the ** Amherst."

As you have kindly offered me your services, I take the liberty of sending you four
bits of stones sent out to me by a brother by the last Overland, who obtained them
from a private in H. M. 4th Dragoons. It (the stone) is celebrated for its virtues in
cleaning bridle bits, &c. and my brother wishes me to collect a quantity for him ; but
what the stone is, or where to be had, I am unable to find out, and shall feel obliged by
your informing me. It appears from the Dragoon's memorandum that the natives of
India (for he got it in this country) make idols of it I fear the Dragoon is an old

* These are Fibrolite in small radiated nests.

xvi Proeeedihgs of the Asiatic Society. [Jan. 1845.

soitUer, and older ttateUer, and U impofling on my countrymen the untravelled Welsh.
P.eue to return the stones.

Yours faithfully,
Kyook PhyoOy lAth July, 1844 D. Williams.

The followiDg Memorandum accompanied Major Williams's letter : —

Direcium for polishing Iron and Steel.

*' Take about two drams of Samy stone, put in a mortar, powder it as fine as possible,
then put it on a slabstone, or what painters do mix their paint on, then rub it dowa
with sweet oil, (N. B.--The best of oil,) until it be as fine as milk, the finest the best.
Then take a new piece of strong cloth or thick flannel, then soak it with the abo?e
mixture. Rub your irons with it; afterwards take fine shamois* leather with rotten
stone or whitening and chalk, and it will show the highest polish ever known. The
same rag will last six months without failing* Never attempt to put fresh stuff on the old
rag, for the stuff will remain on the rag as long as it may last if taken care of. Keep
it from wet and strong heat.

*' Samy stone is found in several places in the Bast Indies, but the beat we found is at
Bombay, and most plentiful ; we paid from 1-3 to 2-6 of English money per pound for
it in India. The inhabitants makes idols of it of different figures, and paints it in red.
There is none to be got in England, except what is in our troop ; you can get some
home if you know any person in India, or a sailor that trades to that country, as it may
be sent or bought without duty, &c. There is several grooms in England that had
some home after they had the receipt from us. For the above receipt I. had five
pounds, never gave it before un^er ten rupees ; I have sent you two small pieces, and
you can try one for experience, the other you may keep to prove what you may get
again : my stock is getting very short at present, else I should send you more of it
Received 5 shillings.
Newcastle, March 2Sth, 1844. H. Hall, Ath V. O, L. />."

As far as could be ascertained, from the small splinters I ventured to detach from the
minute specimens sent, there is no doubt that the stone is a variety of Pagodite, which is
almost all which can be pronounced of it now. I have carefully kept the remainder for
comparison, and indeed have deferred reporting my examination of it, in the hope thatsome
of the many persons to whom I have written would have been able to'discover what this
Samy stone— evidently Swamy (God) 8tone-<-is; but hitherto, I have heard of nothing
approaching to it. The question nevertheless is of much interest, for the art of polish-
ing metals is often one of high importance ; and the use of an intermediate sub-
stance between the coarse polish of the Corundum or emery, brick or porcelain dost
and the finishing effect of the rotten stone, as here described, is worth attention. The
use of the common steatite in polishing, and as an anti-attrition ingredient has been
long known ; but the whole phssnomena of polishing substances, and their effects on re-
flecting surfaces have yet been so little studied, that it is always proper that due weight
be given to any fact which may lead to a useful practice.

The Secretary stated, that the suggestion of the Curator, respecting Lieut. Sherwiil's
labours, had been also mentioned at the regular Meeting, and fully approved of;
it was resolved, a letter should be addressed to Government as proposed. '

ProceetRngs of the Astatic Society for the month 0/ February, 1845.

The Monthly Meeting of the Society was held at the Rooms, on Tuesday
evening, the 25th of February, at half-past seven p. m. S. G. T. Heatly,
Esq., in the chair.

The following report was read by the Secretary, being that of the preli-
minary Meeting o| the Committee of Papers for the despatch of business.

Secretary* s Memorandum for the Meeting t^'Ibth February ^ I845<

An Oordoo novel, by Mr. J. Corcoran, written to exemplify the capacity and power

of that elegant Vemacnlar language, and on which I was enabled to report favourably,

philologically speaking, is recommended by the Committee of Papers to the patronage
of the Society, by a subscription for fifteen copies, at four rupees twelve annas each.

The Committee will examine further as to whether this work is worthy, on the whole,

of being recommended as a school-book, for which its author intended it.

Resolved—That fifteen copies should be subscribed for, and the work further exa-
mined.

I have received and laid before the Committee a valuable suggestion by that eminent

Oriental scholar, Dr. A. Sprenger, for the commencement of the publication of a Biblio-
theca Asiatica, or a series of standard works in Eastern languages, edited and transla-
ted under the superintendence, and at the cost, of the Society. This useful undertaking,
projected nearly forty years ago, is now revived ; and as the Committee are in a position
to assure the Society that they can command copious and valuable material for its
commencement, they strongly recommend to the Society that the proposition be enter-
tained, and that they be empowered to direct their attention to the subject, and report
as early as they can what measure can be taken in furtherance of the undertaking*
Ordered — That the further report of the Committee be awaited, the Society acknow-

lodging the expediency of the suggestion, and thanking Or. Sprenger for it

A letter from Government having been received, with copies of communications
from Gapt. Marshall, Secretary to the Sanscrit College, and a Mussulman printer by
name AbdooUa, sometimes called Molvee AbdooUa, well known to the Society, re-
specting the printing of the Musnuvee Roomee, I have been instructed to submit a
note on the subject to the Committee, as the opinion of the Society is requested by
Government as to the proposed printing of the work which had already, as noted by me,
been suggested to us* A detailed report will be made at our next Meeting.

zviii ProeeedingB of the AHaUc Society. [Feb. 1845.

BetolTtd-^That the report be received, and diicutsed at the next Meeting.

I am directed to state to the Society, that the Committee of Papers have recorded aa
opinion as to the hour of meeting of the Society, not in consonance with the note of the
meeting before last* It was then decided, that the hour should be half-past Seven;
the large majority of the Committee incline decidedly to the old hour of half-pait
Eight p. M. The opinion of these gentlemen necessarily carries so much weight vitk
it, that the minority desire the question to be re-submitted for your consideration.

Resolved — That the next Meeting be held at ) past 8, experimentally, and the qaes-
tion then be considered open for discussion.

A letter from Mr. Ince, Superintendent of Salt Chokees, on some of the salt springi
in the Chittagong district, to my address, has been referred, with the thanks of the
Comnuttee, te our Geoloigical Curator.

A set of lithographs of some of the Cave Temples of the Dukhan, by James
Fergusson, Esq., presented by his brother, W. Fergusson, Esq., have been duly re-
ceived, and the handsome donation richly merits your thanks.

A letter from Captain Crommelin, with note of despatch of Geological specimens
from Daijeeling.

A letter from Mr. A. Campbell of Daijeeling, forwarding an interesting accoant of
a new Thibetan antelope, with remarks on the Zoology of Thibet.

Reports from Government respecting the recent supposed Sub-marine Volcano on
the coast of Arracaa, in reply to our letter, suggesting enquiry on this subject

Valuable geological notes across the Peninsula of India, by Capt. |f ewbold of the
Madras Army, have been referred to the Geological Curator, and ultimately held arsil*
able for our Journal.

Observations on the rate of evaporation in the open sea, with notice of an instrunieat
used in indicating its amount, by J. W. Laidley, Esq.

A memorandum on the old bed of the river Soane and site of Palibothra, by S. C
Ravensbaw, Esq. C. S., has been received by me, and will be held available for the
Journal, the thanks of the Society being due to its author.

For the above, the thanks of the Society were voted.

We have received a gratifying letter from the Honorable Secretary to the Royal
University of Christiana, acknowledging the receipt of some of our contributions, ad-
vising us of the proximate despatch of various objects for our Museum^ and coached
in terms expressive of the satisfaction of that learned body at finding itself in that con-
stant communication with us, which it will be not less to our credit than to our adran*
tage to foster and encourage to the best of our ability.

1 have also to submit the epitaph to be placed on the tomb of our lamented friendt
Csomo De Korosi, as approved by the Committee.

Fkb. 1845.] Proeeedingi of the Asiaik Soeiefy. xiz

H. J.

ALEXANDER CSOMA DE KOROSI,

A NATIVE OF HUNGABT,

WHO, TO FOLLOW OUT PHILOLOGICAL BB8BABCBB&»

BB80BTBD TO THB BAST,

AND AFTBB TBAB8 PA8SBD UNDSB
FBIYATIONS, 8UCH A8 HAVB BBBN 8BLD0H BNOUBBD,
AND FATIBNT LABOUB IN THB CAU8B OF 8CIBNCB,

COMFILBD
A DIOTIONABT AND GBAMMAB OF THB THIBETAN LANGUAGE,

HI8 BBBT AND BBAL MONUMENT.

ON HI8 BOAD TO H'LA88A TO BB8UMB HIS LABOURS

HB DIED AT THIS PLACE
ON THB 11th AFBIL, 1842.
AGED 44 TBAB8.

HIS FELLOW LABOUBBBS,

THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

IN8CBIBE THIS TABLET TO HIS MEMOBT.

BBQUIE8CAT IN FACE.

/. Weaver, SeulpK Calcutta,

XX Proceedings of the AsuUic Society. CF^b. 1845.

Thefslab with this inscription has been despatched to Darjeeling, to oar fellow
laboarer and associate, Dr. Campbell, Superintendent at that station.

The two following letters from Mons. Eugene Bumouf, of the Asiatic Society of Pa-
ris, and from Count Scopoli, Secretary to the Academy of Verona, have recei?ed the
attention they merit in due course; Mr; Heatly having charged himself with obtaining
the eggs of the Phalena required by the latter Society.

H. TORRBNS,

Fm P, and Secy* As, Soc»
Note.— The following letter from Lieut.-Col. Ouseley, I publish at his desire, clear-
ing up a mistake which would seem to have occurred respecting the survey of the
Nurbudda river, published ip a recent number of the Society's Joumail. I need only
add, that Lieut -Col. Ouseley, has placed the remainder of the map at the disposal of
the Society, and that it will be lithographed for speedy publication.

H. TORRBNS,

F* P. and Secy, As. Soc

Mt dear Sis,— I observe in No. CLI. of the Journal, a map of the Nerbudda,
forwarded with Mr. A. Shakespear's letter. I find that Mr. Shakespear has remarked
in a note, page 497, *' The original survey is not to be found on record, Capt Ouseley
appears only to have submitted the result of it with his opinions."

This is written without reference to the map itself, which is actually that done by
me, (from the Devnaguree original) every word of which is written in my own hand,
and certified by me in the map, which is reduced, as mentioned by the lithographer,
to one-fourth.

As 1 had a great deal of trouble in making it, it giviss me much pleasure to see it
where it is. The survey, at considerable expense to the Government, was only sanc-
tioned by Lord William Bentinck on my repeated representation.

1 have the original sketch, and the only copy I made for the Government is that
from which Mr. Smith reduced the one now presented to the public. I mean to have
it lithographed over again, as the most valuable part is left out, and the eastern coaise
of the river beyond Babye, that part on which the coal and iron mines are situated,
which minerals will I trust be the means of creating the most surprising smd beneficial
changes in the country^ in supplying material for a grand trunk rail line across
India.

May I request the favor of your giving this letter a place in the next Journal.

I am, my dear Sir,

Yours very faithfully,

Calcutta, 22nd February, 1845. J. R. Odselbt.

To the Fice President and Secretary of the Asiatic Society qf Bengal, at Calcutta,

SiR,--l have had the honor of receiving your letter, dated the 13th August, this year,
and 1 think it my duty to lose no time in answering the same. It is about a fortnight
since the Royal University of this town received two boxes of tinned iron, containing
a collection of ornithological preparations and other objects of Natural History,
some Indian coins, and a catalogue of books and manuscripts in the Indian languages,
belonging to the Asiatic Society. We have also in July last, received a parcel with-
seeds, like another which arrived about a year ago. The Senatus Academicus htf

Fkb. 1845.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Soeiety. xxi

resolved with respect to these different presents, to retam its best thanks in a letter to
the learned Society, and to accompany the same with a collection of different objects
belonging to the Natural History of these northern countries, viz. zoological prepara-
tions, plants, minerals and seeds, as also with a collection of books, being a continua*
tion of the works already sent. These things, the arrangement of which has beea
left to the care of the undersigned, are partly ready to be sent ; what is still wanting
will be collected during the next winter, and sent off with the first opportunity in
March 1845.

The University at Christiania looks upon the existing scientific intercourse with the
honored Society, as very interesting to both institutions, and will do any thing in its
power to continue the same. The University Council, or Senatus Academicus, will
also declare this in its above-mentioned letter, but I have thought it right to mention
it in this preliminary notification. Books or any other things than the above-mentioned
have not been received from your Society ; as soon as any thing arrives, I shall have
the pleasure of announcing it

Sir Charles Tottie, the Norwegian, and Swedish Consul General at London, will for-
ward any box or parcel for the University of Norway, directed to his care. Captain
Bownevie of the Norwegian Navy at Rungpore, to whom we are indebted for the exist-
ing intercourse between the two institutions, has also always shown the greatest wil-
lingness in forwarding scientific objects to this University. In conclusion I have also
to state, that your letter, dat^d 20th May last, (which arrived at the end of last month,)
has been communicated to all the professors whom it concerns.

Sir, your obedient servant,

C. HOLST,

Secretary of the Royal University at Christiania*
Christiania, the 24M October, 1844.

M, H. PiDDiNGTON, Secretaire adjoint de la Societe Askttique du Bengale,
Monsieur. — Le depart de Mr. Mohl, notre Secretaire du Conseil mk laissd le soin
de vous remercier au nom de la Soct^t^ de la peine que vous avez bien voulu prendre
de nous informer de la mort si regrettable du savant Ramcomul Sen. II sera bien
regrett^ de la Societe qui savait les services qu'il a rendus aux lettres et & la civilisa-
tion en gln^ral en composant son excellent dictionnaire Anglais et Bengali. C'est
aussi pour nous une perte, parceque nous pourrons difficilementretrouver un correspon-
dant aussi instrdit et aussi z^l^.

Mr. Mohl, k son prochain retour, doit s'entretenir avec vous de cet objet, et il vous
rendra compte de la vente des Livres de votre Soci^t^ que nous avons places a Paris.
Excnsez la forme un peu courte de cette lettre. Igorant exactement le nom et les
titres do Hurremohun Sen, que nous n' avons pu bien lires j'ai cm pouvoir inclure la
lettre que nous lui adressons dans ce court billet. Je vous serais bien reconnaissant
d'y faire mettre son adresse exacte.

Votre bien d^vou^ serviteur,
24 October, 1844. Eugl. Bdrnoup.

A la Sociiti Asiatique, Calcutta,
Les r^marques faites par M. M. Heifer et Ugon sur les phallnes, dont aux Indes on
tire la soie, ont excite I'attention de cette academic, et le plus vif desir d'avoir des
oeufs de TespSce Cynthia, puisqu' on cultive ici le Ricinus dont les feuilles nourissent ses

xxii Proceedings of the Asiaizc Society. CFbb. 1845.

vtn producteun, c'est Ymi, d'un tutu soierie qui n'ett pas fin, mais qui peut £tre utile
a certaines maaufactttKi. L'educatioD ailleun de ces ven se ferait dans notre pro?iBce
dans un tarns prwque tout & fait libra d'autres travauz agricoles. C'est pourtant & la
Soei^t< Asiatiqua qu'on oses'adrasser pour avoir les nouveaax <Bafii» et on &p^ro qn'
elle acueillera cette prf ere aYece le m£me int^ret« qu'elle donne aux progrds des sciences
dans les vastes etablissement Brittaniques, en Asia, qu'elie nous fait connoitre sous toot
le rapports. L' amonr du saYoir, et le noble plaisir des r^pandre les connoissancea
utiles, rapprochent les plus grandes distances, et font une seule famille panni ceuz qnt
sent capables de yiser & Tun et de gouter I'autre. Si jamais cette academie pouTsit
6tre honored de quelque commission par un Society dont elle reconnait la sttp^riorit£»
elle en serait non seulement reconnoissante mais orgueilleuse.

Le Secretaire perpltuel,
Je4n Comte Scopoli ; Jadis Conseiller d' etat,
Veroime, le 10 Aout^ 1838. et directeur g^n^ral de T instruction pttblique^

dans le Royaume d' Italie.

Read the following—

RlPORTOF THB CURATOR, MUBIUM OF ECONOMIC GbOLOOY, AND GEOLOGICAL AHO
MlNKRALOOICAL DbPARTMBNTS, FOR THB MONTH OP JaNUART, 1845.

Captain J. H. Low, B« N. !., has presented us with some fine specimens of lava

... ^ ^ 1 ^ « s^^ capillary obsidian, and some of sulphur from the

Mineralogical and Oeologiesl. , ^ ,,>.., *. . ,

volcano of Killauea* m the Island of Hawaii, and some

volcanic specimens from Manilla: his letter is as follows :—

H. PiDOlNOTON, Btq,

My drar Sir,— I beg to present to the Asiatic Society the following specimens
brought from the grand volcano of Killauea in the Island of Hawaii, four pieces of la-
va, six pieces of sulphur, and some capillary glass ; also two iapas or native cloths, snd
a skull of some animal which I picked up at the spot where the bones of the celebrat-
ed navigator Capt. Cook were buried, being about one mile from the spot where he wss
killed. Should you wish for it, I can send you some specimens collected by me at the
volcano, in the lake de Taal de Bonbon, in Luconia, about 50 miles from Mauilla* It
may be interesting, sending a small bit of the rock on which Cook fell at Korakamah
Bay, which I broke off. Had you not access to better information relating to the
Sandwich Islands than I could give, I should be happy to give my mite.
Ifo, 5, Gar8tin*s Bmldmgs, I6th January. J. H. Low.

Mt dbar Sib,«I have the pleisure to send yon some specimens from Manilla, or
rather the large piece 1 picked up in an extinct crater, which is at present a smsii
lake, close on the margin of the great lake in Luconia. The spot on which I picked
up this specimen, is a lake evidently filled from the great lake ; it occupies the
sunken summit of the hill, densely clothed with timber, only one mile from the hot
bath, which 1 found on keeping the Therm, for sometime in it to rise to 170'' Fabt

The smaller specimens I collected at the volcano in the Island in the lake de Taal
de Bonbon. The ignorance of the people in Manilla was such that they wanted to

• KiUauea In M 88. No doubt Kintaea of Mr. EIUs and other travellers.— H. P.

Fjsb. 1845.3 ProeeedingM of the Asiatic Society. xxiii

peiBuade me the Island had been formed within fifty yean, and was only of mud, i
picked up these specimens. Although within 60 miles of Manilla, such is the in*
formation to be obtained there. I send you also a bonnet from the Sandwich Islands,
such as worn by the native ladies there, Mid made by themt

J. H. Low.

The fclhwmg Diary accompajnes the specimens r^erred to in it, from the Hot

Springs Qf Chittagong,

Mt dbah Mr. ToRaBNs,<^ will now endeavour to give you some account of my
travels, but fear it will prove but an imperfect one. jQn the 9th of this month I reached
Seetakoond, where I began my inquiries about the springs, and the next day visited the
nearest. I left my tent a Uttle after 11a. m., and was soon obliged to leave my palkee
behind* A walk of little more than half an hour over the bed of what must be aa awful
torrent during the rains, brought me to the spring ; it is raised a little above the bed of
a small nullah, which branches off from the torrent bed : the spring is about eight feet by
six, and not more than a foot and a half deep ; in three or four places the water rises in
small bubbles : it is %uite cold and beautifully clear ; it is nearly double the strength of
common sea^water. The great drawback is the difficulty of approach. The spring has
no particular name, but is known by the Pergunnah in which it is situated — Pan-
taseelah; beyond it and in a continuation of the road I went, (if it can be so called)
is the Doburrea or Dobie Redallah or Pass, which goes direct through the hills and
is said to have been cut by a Dobie* I struck off from the main road at a village called
Yakoobnuggor. I believe, I am the first European who has ever visited this spring.

On the 1 1th I went on to near Jeygopal's hatttht and then left the main road, from which
in about half an hour I reached the famous spring called Nabboo Luckee, the distance
being about two miles, rather more. This road is generally good, but over the tor-
rent bed, which is much the same as the other ; the rush of water must however be
greater in the rains, and during that season the people who attend at the spring are
obliged to make use of a narrow foot path over the hills ; it is situated on a rising ground
of about 8 or 10 feet above the bed of the stream, a temple is erected over it, and I had
to descend about half a dozen steps. The pucka part round the spring is about three
feet square, and not more than three feet deep; on the right hand side is a small place
raised about a foot and a half above the other parts, but communicating with the
spring, and fhun the hole marked A, in my sketch, a flame issues, which is constantly
fed with ghee; conceiving that there might be some tricking I made them put the
light to the hole marked B, when a beautiful blue flame issued, such as would not
have been caused by ghee alone ; on the left hand is a spout, which goes through the
temple wall into the spring., and through which is a constant flow of the water; within
the spring is a sound resembling the growl of a dog^ repeated about every second,
when a large bubble rises to the surface, and bursts a few yards to the left ; and a
little above the bed of the torrent is another spring, called Duddee Koond, bubbling
up in the same manner as the first I saw ; the water of the three is of the same strength.
On the 14th, I set off to visit Sooijoo Koond, but there was so much uncertainty about
the distance and exact spot, that I was induced to try the strength of the water about
half a mile from the main road, and found it about one-third less in strength than the
other springs. 1 then went to the one considered by the natives as the most holy; it

%x\v Proceedings o/ihe Asiatic Society, QFbb. 1845.

is cftlled Boolooft Koond. The greater part of the road is excellent, being cut from
tlie side of the hillf ; the spot on which the spring is situated is considerably elevated
above the plain, bat the ascent is very gradual, the hills are thickly covered with
jungle, amongst which appears the wild plantain. On arriving at the foot of the
spring, I had to mount some twenty steps ; at the top were several temples, the prin-
cipal one covering the spring, which they told me was fathomless. A small place is
raised at the side, the same as at Nubboo Luckee, from which issues a flame well fed
with ghee ; through the lower hole opening from the surface of the spring, a flame is
constantly coming out and running a short distance on the water, but goes out again
immediately. 1 have no doubt the ghee has something to do with it ; the water is fresh
with a slight sulphurous smell and taste ; but to enable you to form a better idea of
it than I can give, I send by my friend Major Troup, two small boxes to your address,
one containing three bottles of water from the Nubboo Iiuckee and Boolooa Koond,
and one taken up about hsdf a mile from the main road, and which is said to come
from Sooijoo Koond, and other springs, both salt and sweet ; but 1 was afraid to re-
main out any longer, lest I might lose my travelling allowance, and 1 could m>t
afford that The other box contains large and small pebbles, a kind of unformed
slate, and some gravelly earth taken from the bed of the torrent, and a small piece
of coal which I picked up on the edge of the stream running from the Sooijoo
Koond ; a small bottle of Kurkutch from the Sooijoo Koond water, and some salt
which I can hardly venture to call pangah, it was from the Nubboo Luckee water
filtered through some salt earth 1 brought from the spring; I must leave you to decide
what it is.

Robert Inck.

P. S. I find that I have expended all the Sooijoo Koond water, so that you will find
only two quart bottles. The whole of these places are, I conceive, of volcanic origin,
for small flames are to be seen in many places, issuing from the ground. 1 regret much
now that 1 could not visit any of them, but hope to do so when 1 again go in that
direction.

Through Captain Duncan, B. E., we have received from Lieut T. C. Blagrave of
that corps, now in Scinde, two boxes containing fossils (mostly shells,) and one contain-
ing fish preserved in salt, together with a large fossil shell from Roree, by Captain W,
£. Baker, Engineers.

These fossils are of very great interest, and in connection with the geological spe-
cimens promised us by Captain Baker, will no doubt throw light on the geology of
that new country ; but we have as yet no note of the localities in which the foniJs
and shells were collected.

We received from Captain Williams, our active correspondent at Kyook Phyoo, the
following letters, giving an account of a remarkable appearance seen^t sea from that
and other of the Arracan stations.

H. PiDDiMGTON, Esq.f Sub-Secretarf/^ Asiatic Society of Bengal,

Mt dbab Sir,— Yesterday evening, at between 5 and 6 o'clock, as we were taking
our ride, we were alarmed by an extraordinary appearance far out at sea, as if a vessel
was on fire : the reflection of the flame was made on a dark bank of clouds, west of the
station, o^ the track of ships from hence to Calcutta : it flickered several times is i^

Fbb. 1845.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. xxv

the fire had been got under, and after lasting about 15 or 20 minutes (say,) suddenly
went out. Various are the coi^ectures : I thought it was the reflection of the sun from
below the horiion, but the sudden light of flame was too brilliant, and unsteady to be
the sun's light; electricity in the cloud was stated to be the cause, but this is not a
season for such cause : **• a ship is on fire," many said ; but this morning the prevailing
opinion is, that a volcanic eruption has taken place 20 miles out at sea, similar to
what I reported as having taken place near Chedooba. The argument against its
having been a ship on fire is, that the flame shewing so brilliant and so great a light
could not be so suddenly extinguished as this was, the dark bank of clouds may have
been formed of the smoke of the volcano. 1 hope some further information than what
is obtained from mere conjecture will be gained, which I will not fail to communicate
to you. The Amherst is said to have left, or was to leave Calcutta yesterday, so she
cannot be far enough out to see it.

D. Williams.

P. S.— A small comet was also seen at the same time as the fire, which soon set; it
was situated a little south of the supposed volcanic eruption.

We shall see the comet of course this evening, and 1 will write by next date.

D. W.
Kyouk PhyoOt 3rd January , 1845.

Mt dxab Sir,— As I was at a distance from the beach when the fire appeared
last evening, Ensign Hankio of the 66th N. 1. has most kindly given me a description
of what he saw and heard, and I have the pleasure to enclose it, to be laid before the
Society.

Kyouk Phyoo, 3rd January, 1845. D. Williams.

Mq;or WilliamS| Kyouk Phyoo*

Mt dbar Williams, — I have complied with your request for a description of
the extraordinary phflsnomenon witnessed here last night, but I am afraid in a very
imperfect manner.

G. Hankin.

On the night of the 2nd of January 1845, between the hours of 6 and 7^ a very in-
teresting and singular phflsnomenon was observed off the coast of Kyouk Phyoo. The
sky on the horizon was observed to brighten up as when illumined by the rays of the
setting sun, excepting that the light more resembled the flickering of a fire than the gra-
dual descent of that luminary. It continued in this way for half an hour or so, when
all of a sudden immense volumes of flame were seen to issue, as it were from the depths
of the ocean, presenting the most sublime yet awful spectacle ^ to the beholders.
The general idea entertained, was, that a ship had caught fire ; but this was soon dis«
polled by a low continuous rumbling, which seemed to sound from the bowels of the
earth, and was re-echoed by the surrounding hills. Previous to this, however, Capt*
Howe, the marine superintendent, had with the greatest promptitude set off in H. C

XX vi Proceedings of the AsiaHc Society. []F^b. 1845.

Schooner " Petrel," intending to render assistance to the supposed unfortunates of
the burning ship ; he returned without seeing any thing, and it is thought that the
whole was the result of some hidden volcanic agency ; one of the neighbouring hills
possessing that extraordinary property, and from which flames have been seen to issue
before. The weather at the time was still and serene, hardly a breath disturbed the
air : it was in fact, as some one observed, a very earthquaky day.
Kyouk Phyoo, 9rd January, 1845.

I wrote immediately to Captain Paterson of the H. C. S. Amherst, then in the
river, to enquire if he had any knowledge of this phenomenon, and his answer is as
follows :•—

Mt dbar Mb. Piddinoton,— The appearance of the eruption of a volcano took
place some days before we reached Arracan. I heard of it from several parties when I
got there. The bearings were taken by the following gentlemen : by Capt* Howe at
Kyouk Phyoo, by Capt« Siddons at Akyab, and by Capt. Watson, commanding
the Govt. Schooner '* Spy," off St. Martin's Isle to the North. As I did not receive a
very correct account, but understood that it was qfficiaUy sent up, I did not trouble
myself further than to enquire in what direction it took place. From all I can now
remember, by the bearings, it was about fifteen miles to the South of the ** Western
Balongo," near which is a Shoal patch of Coral ; the least water I ever found was ele-
ven fathoms. Lloyd and Ross in the Chart lay down seven fathoms. It seems to hare
alarmed some of the people at Kyouk Phyoo, but if you require farther information,
the whole of the officers of the 66th N. Infantry that saw it are encamped on the plain
below the Fort.

J. Patxrson.

As it was important that time should not be lost, the following letter was addressed
to Government, under the direction of our Secretary.

F. H ALL IDA Y, Esq., Seqf, to OavL qf Bengal.

SiR,--By direction of the Committee of Papers of the Asiatic Society, I have tJie
honor to submit the accompanying extracts of letters from Captain Williams, Ist As-
sistant to the Commissioner of Arracan, and from Ensign Hankin, giving details
of a curious phasnomenon seen at sea; which, by these accounts, and those collected by
Captain Paterson, H. C. S. Amherst, were probably occasioned by the eruption of a
sub-marine volcano.

As this may also have given rise to a new Island or a shoal, as was the case ofi Fake
Island in August 1843, where a new Island appeared, but sunk shortly afterward^ the
Committee respectfully suggest that orders might be given to Captain Paterson, on
the approaching voyage of the Amherst, to examine the spot ; as in a mere hydrogn-
phical point of view, as well as the geological interest of such phasnomena, the know-
ledge, even of any alteration of the soundings, must be of much public interest.

H. ToRRXiv^i
Fice President and Secretary^ Asiatic Sodeiy.

Fjbb. 1845.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. xxvii

In reply to which we have received the following with an official report.

(No. 450.)

From the Under Secretary to the Government of Bengal^ to the Vice President and
Secretary, AsiaHc Society, dated Fort WUUam, 12<A February, 1845.

Marine,

Sir, — I am directed to acknowledge the receipt of your letter, without date, submit-
ting extracts from letters, regarding the eruption of a sub-marine Volcano, seen from
Kyouk Phyoo, and conveying the suggestion of the Committee of Papers of the Asia-
tic Society, that Captain Paterson, on the approaching voyage of the ** Amherst" to
that station, may be instructed to examine the spot with a view of ascertaining the ef-
fects that may have been thereby produced.

2» The Acting Superintendent of Marine having also forwarded a correspondence
referring to the Volcanic eruption in question, I am directed, in reply, to forward copies
of these documents ; from which it will be observed that, under the orders of the Com-
missioner of Arracan, all that is necessary has been done, but that no ascertained effect
has been produced by the eruption, and that the soundings on the Arracan Coast con-
tinue as heretofore.

Cbcil Bbadon,
Under Secretary to the Government of BengaU

(No. 366.)

Prom Lieut.'Colonel A» Irvinb, C. H., Acting Superintendent of Marine, to the Right
Honorable Sir Hbnrt Hardingb, G, C. B. Governor qf Bengal, dated Fort
William, the 24lh January, 1845.

Right Hon'blb Sik,— Ihavethe honor to submit, for your honor's information, the

Copy of a Letter, No. 8, correspondence noted in the margin, referring to a grand VoU
iated the 14th January,

IMS, from the Gommisiion- canic eruption, seen from Kyouk Phyoo«
er of Arracan, with endosare.

'2nd. No ascertained effect has been produced by this Volcanic eruption, and the
soundings on the Arracan Coast remain as before ; but the occurrence seems suffi-
ciently interesting to be reported, and if it meets with your honor's approval, I
would forward copies of the correspondence to the Asiatic Society for record.

Fort William, Mar. Supdt.*s Office, (Signed) A. Irvinb,

the 24<A January, 1845. Acting SupU of Marine.

xxviii Proceedings of the Asiatic Sodety. C^J^b. 1845.

(No. 8.)

From Capt» h. Boglb, Commissioner in Arracant io Lieut,»Col. A. Iryinb, C, B*
Superintendent tf Mariney Port WilHam, dated Kyouk Phyoo^ the lAth Januaryt
1845.

8rB,— A very grand Volcanic eruption having been obeerred N* N. W. of Kyovk
Pbyoo, a little after ran-set on the evening of the 2nd instant, I directed Mr. Howe,
Marine Assistant, to proceed to the supposed spot for the purpose of ascertaining whe-
ther any rocks had been thrown up or any change had taken place in the soundings ;
I have the honor to annex copy of his report, by which it appears that he has not been
able to discover any alteration whatever.

2nd. I also annex extract from a report from Mr. H. B. Weston, commanding the
** Spy," who saw the eruption ofiF the Asseerghur Shoal ; it was also seen from Akyab,
and I would observe that the bearing taken by Mr. Weston at sea, by Mr. Howe at
Kyouk Phyoo, and by the officers at Akyab, place it in \^ 42' 15" N. latitude, and
930 4' 45'/ £, longitude, bearing S. } E. from S. end of Western Borongo.

3rd. On Mr. Weston's way down to this post, he sounded carefully for indications of
the Volcano, but without effect; and since he arrived, the ** Tenasserim" steamer
with the ** Amherst'* in tow, must have passed near to it, without obserying any change
in the soundings.

4th. Mr. Weston will, however, be directed to make further search in the course of
his cruising*

5th. I may add, that a small comet made its appearance in the S. W. on the same
evening that the eruption occurred, and has been visible every night since.
Arracan^ Comma's Ojffice, (Signed) A. Boglb,

Kyouk Pkyoo, the lith January, 1845. Commissioner in Arraean,

(True copy,)
(Signed) Jambs Suthbrlaiti}, Secretary*
Fort William^ Mar. Supdt,'s Office, the 24th January, 1845.

(No. 4.)

From H. Howb, Marine Assistant Commissioner, to Mojor A. Boglb, Comms-
sioner qf Arracan, dated Kyouk Phyoo, the Sth January, 1845.

Sir,— I have the honor to inform you, that according to your directions, I proceeded
on the 6th instant in search of any effects that might be visible of the Volcanic erap-
tion on the 2nd instant.

Having observed the eruption, and the spot where the flames appeared to rise up
out of the water, 1 set it by compass at Wt N> W. from the Flag Staff, and reckoning

Fbb. 1845.^ Proceedings of the AiiaHc Society. xxix

tke distance from the place of observation to be about 16 to 18 miles, that would
place any rock or shoal that might have been thrown up, or any discoloured water,
aboQt 5 to 8 miles to the north of the northern breakers off the Terribles.

I accordingly proceeded to this spot and cruised about, carefully sounding and keep-
ing a good look*ottt from the mast-head in a circle, firom Lat. 19® 27' to 19® 3&t Long.
930 16' to 93® 25' E.

Not the smallest appearance of an eruption having taken place was observed in
tiiis direction, nor the slightest trace of its effects ; the soundings were all regular as
laid down on the charts ; and having before had the coast, from the extreme point of
my observations up to northward, carefully surveyed, though out of the line of bear-
ing, 1 have returned in with the conclusion that no rock or shoal has been cast up by
the late action of the Volcano, nor have the soundings been at all affected, nor the
chtmnel disturbed.

From this up to the northward and westward, the ground has been repeatedly passed
over by salt brigs and vessels belonging to the Flotilla, by none of which has any
thing extraordinary been observed.

M, A, C's Office, Kyouk Phyoo, (Signed) H. Hows,

ihe 8<A JoMuary, 1845. Biar. Asst, Commissioner*

Extract from a letter from Mr. H« B. Weston, Commanding the Hon'ble Com-
pany's schooner ** Spy," dated Uth January 1845, No. 4.

*' At6 p. M. on the 2nd instant, 1 observed a large fire S. E. by S. (being then off the
Asseerghur Shoal), from which was thrown up five different times large masses of
fire. 1 supposed it to be a volcanic eruption, and in coming down the coast sounded
to see if any alteration had taken place, but found none ; 1 went into Akyab, and
having got a bearing from there, proceeded in the direction, sounding, but have no
alteration more than a fathom, and that in steep places.

** 1 also kept a look-out for burnt wood in case itqiight have been a vessel burnt, but
found none : 1 have enquired of the vessels boarded, and they give a similar description
of it ; a Chinese Junk excepted, who stated it to be a ship on fire, but had seen no
traces of her, though he went in the direction.**

(True copy and extract,)
Fort WiUiam, Mar. SuptU,*s Ofice, (Signed) A. Bools,

the 24M January, 1845* Commissioner qf Arracan,

(True copy,)

(Signed) Jas. Suthbrlamd, Secy.

(True copies,)

Cbcil Bbadon,
Under Secy» to the Oovt. (^Bengal.

It would appear from the foregoing, that there can be no doubt of the phoenomenon,
and extremely little probability of its having been a vessel on fire. As connected with
the former eruptions in that quarter, all these notices are of the greatest interest, and
we are fortunate in possessing there inthe persons of Captain Williams and his friends,
such zealous observers and reporters.

We have also received from Captain Newbold, M. N. 1., a valuable paper on the
Geology of Southern India, which, as soon as the diagrams can be lithographed, will I

XXX Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Fsb. 1845,

hope adorn our Journal ; Captain Newbold promises a continuation of his paper, and
from his seal, opportunities and talents, we may expect all which they can accomplish
under the disadvantage, common to all scientific ▼otaries in India, of being sadly cir-
cumscribed as to time. From Mr. Ince of the Salt Department, we have received
through Mr. Torrens, bottles of water, and a box of rocks and pebbles from the salt
springs in the Chittagong district, with a letter giving an account of his visit to thent
I have not yet examined them, as they arrived very late.

Lieut Baird Smith has just forwarded Part 111. of his valuable papers on Indian
Earthquakes, which will also be no doubt forthwith published.

Lieut Sherwill has referred to us a small box of specimens of limestones from the

Moseum of table-land of Rhotasghur, requesting me to select those

Eoonomic Geology. mogj ij^ely to prove useful as lithographic stones. From

minute fragments it is next to impossible to judge ; but I have returned them to him,

with the most likely specimens separated from those decidedly bad ; and, as he pro-

mises us slabs, we shall then be enabled to give them a fair trial.

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, March^ 1845.

The mbnthly meeting wa$ held at the Society's Room» on Tuesday*
the 18th March* at i past 8 p. m.
Charles Huffnagle^ Esq. in the chair.
The following list of hooks presented and purchased was read : —

Books received for the Meeting of the Asiatic Society, Tuesday, March IQth, 1845.

Books Presented.

1. Meteorological Begrister kept at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta, for the
months of December, 1844, and January, 1845.

2. Jafarbiicher Der Literatur, of 1843, vols. 4.— By the Baron Von Hammer Purgs*

tall.

3. Gescfaichte Der Ilchane, by the Baron Von Hammer Purgstall, vol. 2.— By the
Author.

4. The Sugar Planter's Companion, by L. Wray, Esq, Part H.— By the Author.

5. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, vols. 2, Nos. 2
and 3. — By the Academy.

6. The Oriental Christian Spectator, for the months of January and February, 1845,
Nos. 1 and 2.— By the Editor.

7. The Calcutta Christian Observer, for the months of February and March, 1845.^
By the Editors.

8. Journal of the Agricultural and Horticultural Society of India, Part I V.—By the
Society.

9. The London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Journal of
Science, No. 165, September, 1844.— By the Editor.

10. Proceedings of the Geological Society of London, vol. 4, No. 98. — By the Society,

11. The Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London, voL 14, Part I.
1844.— By the Society,

12. Proceedings of the Royal Society, No. 59 -, 1843-44.— By the Society.

13. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London for the year 1844,
Part II.— By the Society.

14. R^cherches Sur les Poissons Fossiles, par Lt. Agassiz, Quatorzi^me, Quinzieme
et Sizieme livraisons r^unies, 1842 and 1843.— By the Editor.

15. Ditto Ditto, Planches Quatorzieme, Quinzieme, et Seiziemea, livraisons r^unies.
1841 and 1843.— By the Author.

16. Specimens of the illustrations of the Rock-cut Temples of India.— By J. Ferguson,
through W. Ferguson, Esq.

17. Five Maps of different ptfrts of Asia, Berlin, Beimer.— By th^ Rev J. ^aeberlin.

xxxii Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, [March^ 1845.

Books Exchanged.

18. Calcutta Journal of Natural History, January, 1845, No. 2.— By John M'Clelland.

19. The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, including Zoology, Botany and
Geology, Nos, 92, 93, 94 and 95 of November, 1844, to January, 1845, vols. 14 and 15.

20. Journal Asiatique. Quatrieme Serie. Nos. 14 et 15, Mai et Juin 1844. Tome III.

21. Journal des Savants, Juillet, 1844.

22. The Atben«um for November 9 and 16,— December 7, 14, 21 and 28, 1844, and
January, 1845,-4-ll, and 18.

Books Purchased.

2d. History of the Indian Archipelagro. — By J. Crawf urd.

24. Strange's Elements of Hindu Law, vol. 2.

25. The Classical Museum, No. VI., January, 1845.

Mr. C. Joseph presented a copy of his map of the river Hooghly,
from Garden Reach to Bandel.

Read the following letter from Messrs. Allen and Co.^ the Society's
London Agents.

Henry Torrens, Esq. Secretary to the Asiatic Society of BengaL

Sir,— We beg to state you, for the information of the Society, that we have every
reason to expect the completion of the bust of Mr. Hodgson in the course of six weeks or
two months from the present date.

We have, as requested in your letter of the 30th May last, applied to the Propnetors of
the Athenaeum and Spectator respecting the non-receipt of tlieir publications by the
Society since December, 1840. . We have not been favoured with a reply from either
party, and conclude it is not their desire to make an exchange of publications with your
Society. It is not quite usual for the Proprietors of Newspapers to furnish gratuitously
their publications. They expect to receive and very seldom make any return.

The Journal of the Royal Institution has not been published for years. In our next
parcel to the Society, we shall include the Asiatic Journal from January, 1841, to the
present time, and it shall be continued as published in future. Your favor of the 5th
October last, acknowledging the receipt of our account sales, and giving us instructioiis
as to the disposal of the balance, shall have our best attention.

We have the honour to be. Sir, your faithful Servants,

London, January YUh, 1845. W. H. Allen and Co.

Read correspondence, with notes by the Secretary and Committee of
Papers, from Mr. J. Hendrie, soliciting employment as draftsman to the
Society, and claiming payment of a bill to the amomit of Co.'s Rs. 250,
which had been submitted by him for work done on trial.

Resoked that the recommendation of the Committee of Papers, that
Mr. Hendrie be paid the sum of Co.'s Rs. 150 for the works ubmitted,
be adopted, and that the Committee of Papers be requested to report
further as to the expediency of the employment of Mr. Hendrie.

Read the following note by the Secretary : —

Harch, 1845.] Troeeedinga of the Anatic Soeiety. xxxiii

At the December meetiiig Dr. Hsberlin announced througrh the Secretary his inten-
tion of publishing a Sanscrit Anthology consisting of fifty brief but choice specimens of
the best School, that of Kali Dasa, of Sanscrit poetry, didatie, elegiac and others.
This offers to the Sanscrit Scholar a description of work as yet a desidenitum in the
learned world, a book namely, which may enable him to study in brief, and at small cost,
the best and choicest classical style of eminent writers in that ancient and admirable
language. Dr. Hsberlin proposes to publish the work himself, but in communication
with him the Secretary suggested to the Society their taking a certain number of copies
of it. It will prove a most valuable book to the Society, for the purpose of distribution
to learned bodies, sad individual scholars in correspondence with it. The copies will be
delivered at trade price. He stated that he was not prepared to note at present the
number of copies to be taken, but after making a list of quarters in which they might
be distributed, and a reasonable stock of reserve copies, the Secretary said he would have
the honor of laying that list definitely numeralised, before the Society if the general pro-
position be favourably received.

The Secretary stated that it had been deemed advisable that the
Society should subscribe for 100 copies of this interesting work, which
was agreed to.

The Secretary presented on the part of S. G. T. Heatly, Esq. an
ahstract of the proceedings of the former Statistical Committee of the
Society, (December, 1836, to March, 1839,) and it was resolved —

That the records which are not at present forthcoming be searched
for, that the abstract be circulated to the Committee of Papers, that the
Committee of Papers resume the Statistical Committee's deferred pri-
vileges, and that it be recommended to them to re-agitate the right of
free postage, &c. &c.

The Secretary stated that he had receited from Captain Cunningham
and Mr. Tregear a collection of coins which they offered for sale, and
of which the package, yet unopened, was upon the table, but that he
desired, previous to submitting the proposal to the Society, to communi-
cate with Captain Cunningham.

The following coins were presented by the Sub-Secretary on the part
of Captain Marriot, B. N. I.— 2 coins of Mahmed Shah, Ben Nassir
Shah, A. H. 627-634. 1 coin of Mahmed Toghluk, A. H. 725-752,
hoth were in the Society's cabinet, and 2 Bactrian coins of Kadphises,
and on the part of Lieutenant Sherwill, B. N. I., of the Behar Revenue
Survey, two bags containing 134 old pice of various coinages.

Read the follovnng letter in reply to the Society's application for
Lieutenant Yule's report on the Cherra Poonjee coal, as noted in the
Proceedings for October last : —

xxxir Proceedings of the Anatie Society , [March, 1845.

To H. ToRBKNS, Esq. Vice Pretident and Secretaiy, Atiaiic Society,
Slit,— Under Orden from Government, communicated in Secretary lieutenant Colo-
Bel Stuart's letter No. 120, dated the 6th December last, I am directed by the Military
Board to forward copy of Lieutenant Yule's report on the coal formations of Cherra
PooDJee with Sections, &c.

J. Gaeen,

Secretory.

Fort William, Military Board Office, 4th March, 1845.

The Sub-Secretorj stated that in relation to this valuable paper he
would read the foUowiDg extract from a letter of Lieutenant Yule's to
his address of 22nd October last.

Mt dear SiRr-The Sections and Report with the Military Board will be found
quite useless for publication ; they were the work of a young officer without any experience,
just arrived in the couutry, and are almost confined to the account of different modes of
conveying the coal to the plams. There is one point in them, which, however, should have
met with attention, the coal which is found abundantly thrown up by the Fanateet river
near Landour. From want of time, the lateness of tlie season, and being unable to procure
jungle cutters I was unable to trace it to its bed, and was ordered off before I could
return, but the coal is apparently first rate, and probably abundant. The river is the same
that I have described in the last paragraph of the notes last sent.

Kumaul, October 7M, 1844^

The paper and plans« which last were much admired, were handed
to the Editors of the Journal : —

Bead the following letter to the Society : —

Mormew Torrens, Secretaire de la Society Asiatiqne i Calcutta,
Monsieur, — Madame de Storr a I'intention de publier, a la fin de chaque mois une
livraison de quatre costumes litographi^ and colons, des different peuples que V on ren-
contre a Calcutta ; Je desire beancoup, en regard de chaque costume, faire paraitre une
notice indicative des moeurs et habitudes de celui qui le porte. Mais etant depuis trop
peu de terns dans le pays,.}e n'ai pas acquis assez de connaissances pour decrire avec
verity des ooutumes dont je n'ai entendu parler que vaguement*

La Society Asiatique possede entre autres sur V Inde, un ouvrage en 4 volumes intitule
Les Indovs ou description des Mixur$ et ceremonie*, S^c et un autre en deux volumes'
ayant pour titre F Inde Frau^aise,

Je pourrais dans le& deux ouvrage&trouver des renng^emensppropres a completer celle
que je me propose de publier ;. et en vous priant. Monsieur, de vouloir bienen faire pour
moi la demande au consul, j' ose vous assurer qu' ils seront soign^s comme choses ex-
trdmement precieuses et que j'anraifr a cur de justifier la eonfiance qu' il aura bieii
voulu m' accorder.

Je vous devrai aussi des^remerciemens que je vous^prie d* accuellir, ainsi que V assur-
ance de la tres haute consideration de

Votre tres humble et obeissant Serviteur,

A. B. DE Storb.
Calcutta, 2lst Feb. 1845,

MASCHi 1845.] Pr0ceeding9 of ike A$iatie Society. xsxf

The Secretary stated that he bad allowed M. De Storr to have from
the library one volume at a time of each of the works applied for, as he
deemed it incumbent on the Society to give erery- aid in its power to
works of the kind proposed.

Bead a note from £. B. Ryan, Esq. presenting to the Society a box of
models of Ceylon boats, which were greatly admired for their beauty
and fidelity.

The Secretary presented on the part of E. C. Ravenshaw, Esq. a
memoir " On the ancient bed of the River Soane, and the scite of Pali*
bothra" with a map. This valuable paper was handed to the Editors
of the Journal for early publication.

Read the following letter from Major R. Leech, B. N. I.

To the Secretary to the AtiatU Society, Calcutta^

My i«ar Sir,— I shall be glad to hear whether the Society liBel an interot in the
aubject of this letter.

I have taken advantage of my having been last year in charge of the Keythul and
Umbalah districts to have compiled a map of the Kurukhetra, the scene of the Mah(i«
bh&rata, as well as an accompanying account to illustrate the map from that work, from
another called the Kurukhetra Mabatma, and from existing legends collected at eacb
apot from the eldest and most intelligent inhabitants.

I should be glad to know what aid the Society is di^oased to afford me in publishing
both, or the map alone, which is on a scale of two miles to the inch.

R. Lecch, 1st Ast G. G. A. N. W. F.

Umbalah, New Frontier, lAth February, 1845.

The Secretary stated that he had written to Major Leech to say that
the Society would be most happy to publish the work in question for
him in its Journal or Transactions, being a subject of the highest
Indian Classical interest.

Read the following extract from a letter by Lieutenant Baird Smith,
to the Sub-Secretary :

I intend shortly sending you a few coins obtained from the old village or town dis-
covered on the Muskurra River. These have been obtained v^thout charge to the
Society. The site of the town has hitherto been covered with large qjiantities of boul-
ders for the use of the canal work, so I have not been able as yet to make any farther
search, but as these are now, or soon will be cleared away, I hope to pick up something
more.

Read a letter from 6. Buist> Esq. in charge of the Bombay Observa-
tory, intimating that he had dispatched on the ship Sterlingshire> a
set of the Observatory Records for 1843> to replace those formerly sent
which had been damaged by oil in the dawk bangy transit.

zxxri Proeeedinffs qf the AsiaHe Soeieiy. [March, 1845.

Museum Economic Oeology.

Report op the Curator op the Mineralogical and Geological Depabtkbiit»

for the month of Februarit.

Mineralogical and GeologicaL

We have received from Major Crommelio, B. £., residing at Daijeeling, a small col-
lection of 24 specimens of the rocks danaiX by him oa a tour in the neighbourhood of
that station ; he says :—

" The specimens are not so large as might be desired ; the reason is that I proceed
generally alone on my excursions, and find it no small addition to the fatigue of ascend-
ing 5000 or GOOO feet, to carrying a pocket load of stones.

Darjeelif^f, January 21«t, 1845.

From Captain Munro, Her Majesty's 39th Regt.'we have received two very pretty
specimens of Ribbon Jasper from the neighbourhood of Gwalior, and a specimen of
Limestone with fossil remains (shells) from the Hungrung pass in the Himalaya, at
16,000 feet.

Amongst the catalogues of collectioiis which I have sedulously collected from every
comer since my connection with the Museum, I found one, at least three years
ago, of a collection of specimens by Dr. Jameson from the hills ; but the specimens
were no where to be found. I wrote to him on the subject, as also, through Mr. Torrens
to Mr. George Clark at Umballah, but the collection appeared to be lost. To our great
surprise it has re-appeared as will be seen by the following letters : —

To H. Torrens, Esq. Secretary, Asiatic Society , Calcutta,
Sir, — ^When examining some wrecked property in my godown, the enclosed letter to
your address was found, together with a quantity of stones, which I beg leave to forward
to you.

Calcutta, 26e^ February, 1845. J. Holmes,

Secretary, Union Inmrancc

H. Torrens, Esq. Secretary, Asiatic Society,

Dear Sir, — As Mr. Clarke was sending some boxes to you, I have taken the oppor-
tunity of transmiting a few Geologpical specimens, collected during my tours in the
hilb, and which I beg you will have the goodness to lay before the Society, as they are
intended to illustrate what I have written in your joumaL

Ufnballah, 4th October, 1844. Wm. Jameson.

The stones also have so far escaped injury that we have the full number of specimens
But the numbers, and consequently references, to about two thirds of them have been
lost, being on paper labels only.* Dr. Jameson, however, can easily renew them from his
Catalogrue whiclf is descriptive and I have written to him to request the favour of his
doing so for us.

From our indefatigable contributor Captain J, T. Newbold, M. N, I. we have
to announce another curious and valuable paper "On the Alpine glacier. Iceberg

* All specimens should be ink (and if possible paint) marked, with a number in India*
where damp or insects destroy paper forthwith, and a duplicate copy of the catalogue
should be made at the earliest possible moment

H. P.

March, 1^45.] Proceedings of the Anatie Society. xxxvii

Dilmiat and were transition theories with reference to the deposits of Southern India, its
furrowed and striated rocks and rock basins," which to form a valuable addition to our
knowledge on these heads, touching which so little is yet known out of Europe.

In consequence of our application to Government, at the suggestion of Colonel Forbes
for copies of Lieutenant Yule's memoir and plans relative to the carriage of coal in the
Kassia Hills, copies of them have been sent to us from the Military Board and will be
valuable as records in this department*

For all the foregoing communications and presentations the best thanks of the Society
were accorded.

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, May, 1845.

The monthly meeting of the Society was held on Tuesday evening,
the 13th May.

Charles Huifnagle, Esq. senior member of the Committee of Papers,
in the chair.

At the commencement of the meeting Mr. Houston, C. S. begged
to bring to notice what appeared to him to be an error in the proceed-
ings for October, in relation to the picture voted to Mr. Bird. A con-
versation of some length arose out of this without the result of a
vote. It was proposed by Captain Shortrede, and seconded by Captain
Marshall,

** That no report of the Proceedings of the Society at its meetings
be published till it has been verified by the next subsequent meeting,'*
— ^which was carried unanimously.

New Members Proposed.

Lieutenant Sherwill, 66th N. I., Behar Revenue Survey,— proposed
by E. C. BAvenshaw, Esq. C. S. seconded by W. H. Qmnton, Esq.

Dr. Henry, — proposed by E. Blyth, Esq. seconded by S. G. F.
Heatly, Esq.

The following list of books presented, exchanged and purchased was
read : —

Books reamed for the Meeting of the Asiatic Society, Tuesday, I3th March, 1846.

BOOKS PRESENTED.

1. Meteorologrical Regrister for February and March, 1845.— From the Surveyor
General's Office.

2. The Oriental Christian Spectator, Nos. 3 and 4, of March and April of 1845.— By
the Editor.

3. The Calcutta Christian Observer, of May, 1845.— By the Editors.

4. The Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, No. XV. Part 2, 1844.
• 6. Notes on Indian Agriculture.— By A. Gibson, Esq.

6. On the Geogrraphical limits. History, and Chronology of the Chera Kingdom of
Ancient India. — By J. Dowson, pamphlet, 2 copies.

7. Proceedings of the Zoological Sodety for 1843, Part 11, two copies, and Proceed-
ings from January to March, 1844, one copy.— By the Society.

xl Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [May> 1845.

8. Reports of the Council and Auditors of the Zoological Society of London, 1844
two copies. — By the Society.

9. Transactions of the Zoological Society of London, Vol. 3, Parts 2 and 3, Txindon,
1843.

10. Magnetic Reports of the Observatory at Bombay, May to December, 1843.— By
Government

11. Magnetic Obflervations for 1842 and 1843, by G. Buist.— Presented by ditto.

12. Report on the Meteorological Observations made at Colaba, Bombay, from the 1st
September to 31st December, 1842, by G. Buist— Presented by ditto.

13. Meteorological Observations for 1843, by G. Buist. — Presented by ditto.

14. Tracings of the Wind-Guage for 1842, 1843, by G. Buist— Presented by ditto.

15. Barometrical Observations, by G. BuisL — Presented by ditto.

16. Verhandelingen van het Bataviaasch genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschap
pen. Vols. 18, 19, 1842, 1843.— By the Society.

17. Natur en Geneeskundig archief voor Neerland's indie— Eerste Jaargang Batavia.
1844.— By ditto.

18. CataloguB Plantarum in Horto Botanico Bogoriensi cultarum alter auctore, J. C.
Hasskarl, Bataviae, 1844.

Books Exchanged,

19. The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Nos. 96 and 97, Vol. 15, February
and March, 1845.

20. The Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal by Jameson, No. 74, July to October,
1844.

21. The London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Magazine, third series. Vol.
25, Nos. 166, 167, 168, 169, of October, November and December, 1844. ^

22. Journal Asiatique, Quatrieme S6rie, Nos. 16 and 17, Juillet et Aout 1844.
2a The Athenaeum, Nos. 900 to 907.

Books Purchased,

24. Introductory Lectures on Modem History, delivered in 1841, by T. Arnold, se-
cond edition, London, 1843.

25. Theogony of the Hindoos, by Count M. Bjomstjema, London, 1844.

26. Political Philosophy, by H. Brougham, London, 1843 and 1844, 3 vols.

27. System of Logic, by J. S. Mill, London, 1843, 2 vols.

28. Journal des Savans, Septembre and Octobre, 1844.

Read the following letters, from Messrs. Allen and Co. the Society's
London Agents, and W. W. Bird, Esq. : —

To Henry Torrens, Esq. Secretary to the Asiatic Society, Calcutta,
Sir, — We have been requested by W. W. Bird, Esq. to forward you the enclosed
letter. We beg to acquaint you that the map referred to by Mr. Bird was forwarded
on the 26th February last by the ship Princess Royal from Liverpool, and will be handed
over to the Asiatic Society by our agents as soon as it reaches Calcutta.

W. H. Allsn and Co.
London, March 19, 1845.

To Henry Torrens Esq. Secretary to the Asiatic Society, Calcutta.
Sir, — With reference to the inthnation made by me to the Meeting held on the 5th of
July, 1843, I have directed to be transmitted to you the newly constructed Map of

May^ 1845.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, xli

India by Measn. W. H. Allen and Co. from surveys executed under the orders of the
Hon'ble East India Company, which Map is the most complete at present procurable,
and to request that you will have the goodness to present it to the Society on my behalf.

I have the honor to be. Sir,
Your obedt. Servant,

W. W. Bird.
lAmdon, Febnutry 18, 1845.

Bead the following letter from Mr. H. B. Konig at Bonn : —

To H. PiDDiNOTON, Esq. Suh-Secretary of the Asiatic Society, BengaL
Sir, — I have the honour to inform you that I have duly received, through the agents
of the Asiatic Society, Messrs. Allen and Co., the books directed to me, and offer now my
best thanks for this valuable communication.

Messrs. Allen and Co. will direct to you the following of my publications :

6 Script. Arabum
12 Radices Ling. Pracritiana
12 Panini, eight books

3 Malawica, Agrnimitre
12 Radices Ling. Sanscrita
12 Meghaduta
12 Sacuntala

3 Lassen's Zeitschrift, part IV. V. VI. 16

6 Lassen's Indien 1. 1.

I hope the Society may accept these works as a sign of my highest respect As
Sanscrit Literature is much cultivated in Germany, and many works published in India
are not to be procured, even in London, I should be particularly obliged, if the
Society would have the goodness, to cause about 10 or 15 copies of all works, formerly
or lately published in India, to be forwarded to me, for immediate prompt payment, or
instruct its agents to let the works be delivered to me at the prices fixed by the Society.

H.B. Konig.

Bonn, 5th December, 1844.

With reference to Mr. Konig' s request to be supplied with a number of
copies of all the Sanscrit works published in Calcutta, the Secretary
stated that Dr. Roer had prepared a list of Sanscrit works published
in Calcutta, which he now presented, from which it appeared that 10
or 15 copies of each would amount to a very considerable sum. He
further suggested that as a part of these works had been published by
the School Book Society it was possible that body might be willing to
send Mr. Konig their publications through the Society. He was here-
upon authorized to refer to the School Book Society in the first instance,
and for the details of this application to the Committee of Papers, when
a scheme of returns could be finally made up and determined upon by
the Society^

xlii Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. - [May; 1845;

The Secretary in laying on the table the papers relative to Mr. Heat-
ly's proposal for the reformation of the Statistical Committee, which
had been circulated to the Committee of Papers, stated that the opini-
on expressed by that body was strongly in favour of the proposition^
whereupon the following resolution was moved by Mr. HufPnagle,
and seconded by Mr. Torrens.

''Resolved, — ^that the re-institution of Statistical Researches on a
systematic plan by this Society appears a desirable object, and that a
Committee be appointed for the purpose of considering and reporting
on the specific measures through which this object may be obtained.
The Committee to consist of Mr. Heatly and Mr. Alexander," — ^wbich
was carried unanimously.

Read a letter transmitted to the Secretary by order of Government
from Capt. Nevile H. M. S. Serpent forwarding copies of the Logs of
H. M. S. Magidenne in the hurricane of 1818 and 1819 at Port
Louis, Mauritius.

The Sub-Secretary pointed out that these logs were printed both in
the first and second edition of Col. Reid's work, 1838 and 1841.

Read the following letter from Government : —

No. 1289 of 1845.
From F. Currie, Esq. Secretary to the Government of India,

To the Secretary to the Anatie Society of Fort William, the 2nd May, 1845.
Foreign Department.

Sir, — I am directed by the Governor General in Council, to transmit to you, for such
notice as the Society may deem it to merit, the enclosed copy of a Report by Lieutenant
Dalton of his visit to the hills on the banks of the Soobanshiri River.

F. Currie,
Fort WilUam, the 2nd May, 1845. Secretary to the Government of India.

Referred to the Editors of the Journal for publication. ,

The Secretary presented on the part of W. Seton Ker, Esq. C. S.
a Note of the course of study of students in the Sanscrit language.

This interesting note was handed to the Editors of the Journals for
early publication.

The Secretary reported that during his absence Dr. Sprenger, now
Principal of the Delhi College, had addressed the Sub-Secretary as fol-
lows : —

** I have to ask you half a dozen other favors : I send this note to you through Messrs.
Ostell and Co. who will pay you for the " Geographie d' Abulfeda en Arabe, 2 vols."
which is on sale at the Society for 5 rupees. You have once expressed that you^ would

May, 1845.1 Proceedings of the Aeiatie Society. xliii

sell duplicates of your library if so pray let me have ** Asiri Bibliotheca, AMibo-Hispa-
nica, in two volumes," of which you have two copies, you must not charge it too high.

I have written to Messrs. Ostell for De Sacy's Grammaire Arabe, and Hammer's Ges-
chichte der schonenRedekunste, in Persian. If they should not be available at Calcutta,
you would oblige me by lending me for a short time the copy of the Asiatic Society ; I
intend to have the History of Persian Poetry lithographed, and to compile an Arabic
Grammar in Urdoo, and want for a few days De Sacy's book.

and tbat officer having requested Dr. Boer to report on the apphcation,
received from him the following : —

To H. PiDDiNGTON, £sQ. Svh-Secretary Asiatic Society,
Sir, — With regard to Dr. Sprenger's appUcation I have the honor to report, as fol-
lows : —

As Dr. Sprenger vrants Hammer's " Geschichte der schonen Bedekunste in Fenian,"
and de Sac/s Arabic Granmiar, for the purpose of publishing an Arabic Grammar for
the use of the native students in this country, I would recommend to the Committee of
Papers to assist him in his useful undertaking, and to allow him the use of those works
for a limited period of two or three months. It would, however, not be advisable to
accede to Dr. Sprenger's second request of selling him the duplicate copy of Asiri's
** Bibliotheca Hispano-Arabico,** a work very rare and valuable, and I take this opportu-
nity of proposing to the Committee to establish it as a rule not to sell duplicates of valu-
able works, as it is of unportance to keep always one copy in the library, while the other
may be circulated among the members of the Society.

29tfc April, 1845. E. Roer,

Librarian,
I quite agree in, and indeed suggested this arrangement

H. PiDDINGTON,

Sub-Secretary,

which heing circulated to the Committee of Papers for their sanction.
Dr. Roer's recommendation was adopted, and the books have heen
forwarded to him hy the steamer vi^ Allahahad.

Read the following letter from the Royal Bavarian Academy of
Munich : —

Henry Torrens, Esq., Vice-President and Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Sir,— Having been favoured, by the intervention of Dr. William Griffith, with your
kind declaration dated 23rd May 1844, that you would vidlUngly order an exchange of
publications between the Asiatic Society of Bengal and the Royal Academy of Sciences
at Munich, I am directed to explain to you how much the Royal Bavarian Academy is
gratified by such a literary intercourse. Supposing that the Asiatic Society of Bengal
does not possess the series of Memoirs published in earlier times by the Bavarian Academy ,
a complete set of them shall be sent over to the care of Messrs. W. H. Allen and
Company, Leadenhall Street, London. In return we take the liberty of announcing to
you,.what we are wanting in our library from your most precious publications.

1. Index to the 4th vol. of the Mahabharut complete.

2. Inaya, 2nd vol. 690 p. 3rd vol. 682 p. 4th vol. 937 p. in 4to,

3. Jawame-ool-Ilm-ul-Ri6.M,168.p.j withl7plate^4to.

xlif Proceeding$ of the Aiiatie Society, [May, 1845.

4. Aiii8»iil-Mii8haiiBhm, 641 p. 4to.

5. Sharaya-ool-Ialam, 631 p. 4to.

6. TibeUa Dictioiuury, 373 p. 4to.

7. Vocabulary of Scinde language, by Capt Eastwick.

8. Grammar and Vocabulary of the Baloochi and Punjabee languages. Leach.

9. Harriwanfia, 663 p.« royal 4to.

The other books are in our possession, and also partly the most interestmg Journal of
the Asiatic Society of Bengal, the completion of which by your kindness, I tdie the
liberty to ask for. Thereiswantingof this most precious Journal, vols. I. II. III.; From
the year 1839, are wanting the months of August, September, October and November ;
from 1841 is wanting No. CXIIL, and from No. CXVIII. all is wanting published till
to the piesent day. We should conader as a particular favour your friendly intervention
for the completion of this work.

In the box containing the new^ publications of our Academy, you will also find the
Almanacksof the last yean, which give a general catalogue of all our publications, and of
which I beg you to select any more you may believe interesting for the purpoee of the
Asiatic Society. Also you will find there two little books of my own : Systema Mat.
Med. Veget Brasiliensis,and on the Constitution, Sicknesses and Physics of the American
tribes, which I beseech you to present in my name to the Aaatic Society.

Regarding the Society's wish of possessing specimens of German geolofiry, we have
treated on this matter in the physical class of our Academy, and the members concerned
in similar studies have been directed to get together a convenient collection for the Tech-
nic Geological Institute of your Society. But it is understood that such a collection
cannot be ready immediately. After its completion it shall be committed into the hands
of your agent at London. Every communication in any branch of natural history the
Asiatic Society may think convenient for us, shall be highly acceptable. I beg you to send
the Society's communications either by London, where your agent may take care of
them, or to Hamburgh directiy, where Mr. G. T. £. Roeding is the Academy's agent.

Allow me. Sir, to present you the assurance of the high consideration with which I
have the honour to be,

Db. Martius,
Secretary of t^ Afiat^ and Fhys* CUus of the Roy, Academy of ScienceSm

Munich, Gth of January, 1845.

The Secretary was authorized to dispatch to the Boyal Bavarian
Academy the books required^ and to express the gratification of the
Society at the opening of an intercourse with this learned body.

Read the following note from Major Wroughton pointing out a mis'-
conception as to Colonel Stacy's Hebrew MSS. (Proceedings of
January).

My DEAit Sib, — I have just received a letter from my friend Colonel Stacy, in which
he mentions that the Hebrew MS. sent by me, in his name, to the Asiatic Society's Muse-
um, has by some misapprehension been considered as a donation. I have no recollection
of the exact purport of my note, which accompanied the MS. but feel confident, i£ you

May> 1845.] Proeeedinffi of the Atiatic Society^ xIt

will kindly refer to it, that " I merely sent the MS* at Colonel Stacy's desire, to be
iodged in the museum of the Asiatic Society."

Ballygunge, April 16th, 1845. Robert Wrouohton.

The Secretary stated that a note had been duly appended to the
MSS. for which a tin case had been made, so as to preserve it as mnch
as possible from all chance of injury.

Bead a letter with Prospectus of his work forwarded by Dr. Fal-
coner :* —

Prospectui preparing for publication, under the avspices of Her Majesty* s Government, and
of the Honourable the Court of Directors of the Etist India Company :

A work to be entitled.
Fauna Antiqua Sivalensis,

Being the Fossil Zoology oftheSewalik Hills, in the north of India, by Hugh Falconer,
M.D., F.R.S., F.L.S,, F.G.S., Member of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, and of the
Royal Asiatic Society; of the Bengal Medical Service, and late superintendent of the
H.E. I. C. Botanic Garden at Saharunpoor, and Proby T. Cautley, F.G.S., Captain
in the Bengal Artillery, Member of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, &c.

The object of this publication is to make known, in a connected and complete series,
the numerous fossil animals which have been discovered in the North of India, by the
Authors and other inquirers, during the last twelve years ; and to develope the bearings
of these discoveries on the physical and geological history of India during a great part of

the tertiary period.

The fossil Fauna of the Sewalik range of hills, skirting the southern base of the Hima*
iayahs, has proved more abundant in genera and species than that of any other region
yet explored. As a general expression of the leading features, it may be stated, that it
appears to have been composed of representative forms of all ages, from the oldest of the
tertiary pAiod down to the modern, and of all the geographical divisions of the Old
Continent, grouped together into one comprehensive Fauna in India. Of the forms con-
tamed in it may be enumerated, in the Pachydermata, several species of Mastodon and
Elephant, the Hexaprotodon Hippopotami, Merycopotamus, Rhinoceros, Anoplotheri-
um, Sus, and three speoies of Equus ; in the Ruminantia, the colossal genus Sivatherium,
peculiar to India, with species of Camelus, Camelopardalis, Bos, Cervus, and Antilope ;
in the Camivora, species of most of the great types, together with several remarkable un-
described genera ; in the Rodmtiu, several species ; in the Quadrumana, several species j
in the ReptUia, the Gigantic Tortoise (Colossochelys) with species of Emys and Trionyx^
and several fonns4>f Crocodile. To these may be added the fossil remains of Birds,
Fishes, Crustacea, and MoUusca.

The materials in the possession of, or accessible to, the Authors, are singularly rich and
abundant. They consist of vast collections made by themselves during the last twelve

* We re-priiU here the prospectus which will also re-appear for some time in an
•bridged form on Ae cover of the Journal as an advertisement, and we trust that the
work will find in India the support it so richly merit8.--ED8,

xlvi Proeeedinffs of the Anatie Society, [May> 1 843 .

ytttn along Bereral hundred miles of the Sewalik range. Of these, one portion, which
comprises the contents of upwards of two hundred chests, is now deposited in the British
Museum, having been presented to the national collection by Captain Cautley, and will
with the consent of the Trustees, supply the chief part of the descriptive details and illus-
trations of the Work. Other large collections in the India House wiU be resorted to
when requisite ; and in cases where their own materials may be less complete, and they
will have access to specimens from the very^extensive collections made by their friends
and fellow-labourers. Colonel Colvm and Captains Baker and Durand, of the Bengal
Engineers, whose published researches will be incorporated in the projected publication.

In order to embrace in it as far as may be possible a gfeneral Fossil Fauna of the Con-
tinent of India during the tertiary period, illustrations will be drawn from the Irawaddi
fossil discoveries of Messrs. Clift and Crawford ; from the researches of Dr. Spilsbury in
the valley of the Nerbudda ; and from those of Dr. Lush and Lieutenant Fuljames in the
Gulf of Cambay, all of which localities have yielded fossil remains like those found in the
Sewalik Hills. With the same object, all the available materials relating to the osseous
remains of the elevated plains of Thibet, which are so importantly connected with the
geological h»tory of the Himalayahs, will be examined by the Authors, and described or
figrured when necessary.

On the completion of the palaBontological details, a comprehensive account will follow,
embracing the general results of the fossil inquiries, together with a geological descriptbn
of the Sewalik Hills, to serve as an Introductory Chapter to the work. The Authors will
have the aid of some of the most eminent living Naturalists in describing such depart-
ments as they may feel themselves but imperfectly qualified to deal with, such as the Fossil
Fishes, Crustacea, and Mollusca.

The Authors have been induced to undertake the work by the belief, that the scientific
reputation of this country and the credit of the Indian services are concerned in bringing
to light researches embracing so many new facts, and bearing so importantly on the past
physical history of the vast iiossessions of the British Empire in India. They are not
insensible to the difficulty and extent of the subject, but they hope that they are in some
measure prepared for it, by previous investigations, extending through several years.

In order to secure to science the full advantage of the Sewalik fossil researches, in a
suitable form of publication. Her Majesty's Government and the Honourable Court of
Directors of the East India Company have been pleased to accord such an amount of aid
in linune as will ensure the successful progress of the work. The Publishers anticipate
that a corresponding measure of support will be afforded by the scientific classes in Eng-
land, by the British community in the three Presidencies of India, and by scientific men
abroad.

Plan of Publication. — ^The Work will appear in about Twelve Parts, to be published
at intervals of about four months, each containing from twelve to fifteen folio Plates, or
an equivalent number of a larger size, where the nature of the subject may require it.
The Plates to be accompanied by royal octavo letter-press. The price of each Part irill
be One Guinea in Europe, and Sixteen Rupees in India.

Part I.— Containing the Mastodons and Elephants will be published on the 1st of
July, 1845.

Subscribers' Names will be received by the Publishers, Messis. Smith, Elder and Co.,
66, Comhill, London; and by Messrs. Thacker and Co,, Calcutta j^Forbes and Co.
Bombay j and Messrs. Frank and Co., Madras.

May, 1845.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, xlvii

Bead the following memorandum and letters : —

Memorandum,

The Secretary has to transmit two letters from the Baron Van Hoe veil, and Baron
de Gambee (the latter grentleman being now in Calcutta) touching the establishment of
■« correspondence between our Society and that of Batavia. . .

I propose being authorised to send an acknowledgment of the books received, a series,
as far as available, of the Journal, and the vols, of the Researches available for distribu-
tion, with a letter of thanks, and reciprocrating wish to correspond.

If Messrs. Piddington and Blyth would draw each of them a note of objects in natural
science desirable for our Museum from Java, with a request that we in our turn may be
instructed from Batavia in like manner, these would materially add to the value of my
lettec

I have seen the Baron de Cambee, and have come to a most satisfactory understand-^
ing as to the footing on which the Societies would correspond.

H. TORRENS,

Vice-President and Secretary, Asiatic Society,

The Curators are requested to peruse the accompanying note and letters, and to put

in a brief statement of the desiderata from Batavia in their several departments, which I

can send down with my letter to the Society there. I have ascertained from Baron de

Cambee that English will be a convenient language of'correspondence.

The Curators may state generally what duplicates or sets of duplicates they hold ready
to transmit.

The Batavian Society are rich in Volcanic specimens.

H. ToRRENS.

Vice-President and Secretary, Asiatic Society *
A Monsieur H. Torrens, Secretaire de la Society Asiatique a Calcutta, etc,

MoN CHER Monsieur, — ^Je me rappelle avec plaisir notre entrevue d'hier. L'irit^rfet
que vous manifestiez au d^veloppement et progres dela Soci^t^ Scientifique a Bataviai
causera je vous en donne Tassurance, la plus grande satisfaction a tons les membres,
et moi je me f^licite de pouvoir leur communiquer 1' heureux r6sultat de mes d-marches.
Sir Stamford Raffles, pendant plusieurs ann6es president de notre Soci6t6, disait dans
un de ses discours : " The objects of the Asiatic Society in Calcutta are so fully explain-
ed in the discourse of Sir WiUiam Jones, that it is unnecessary to enter into any explana-
tion of them here. The researches of that Society are not confined immediately to West-
em India ; they extend throughout the whole regions of Asia. The whole circle and the
vnde field of Asia are alike open to your observations, but it occurs to me, that the
interests and objects of the Institution will be more advantageously promoted by its
Exertions being directed to what falls more immediately within your reach, &c.''

J'espere que vous partagerez mon intime conviction qu'une correspondance reguliere
et continue, contribuera a servir efficacement le but de nos Societes reciproques.

J'ai eu rhonneur de vous fairs voir quelques ouvrages r6cemment publics a Batavia.
Vous m'obligeriz d'accepter de ma part pour votre Soci^t6 un exemplaire du : " Cata-
logus Plantamm in Horto Botanico Bog^jensi ; auctore J. C. Haskarl, 1844," et un
6xemplabe du :" — " Natuur und Geneeskundig Archief voor Neerlands Indie" (Archive
pour les Sciences naturelles et medicales des Indes Neerlandaises 1st Ann6e 1844.)

Avant mon depart de Calcutta j'^crirai a Monsieur le Baron van Ijboevell (President
de notre Soci6t^) qui vous offrira d'autres publications entre autres le " Tydgchrift voor

slviii Proceedings of the Asiatic Society^ [May^ 1845*

Neeriandfl Indie/' qui existe dejasept amines, etcontieiitplusieurs articles int^resHuits par
rapport a la litt^ratuie Javanaise et autres branches scientifiques. A mon retour en
Europe je pourrai traduire et arranger en Anglais quelques articles de ma composition
traitant des Islea our de TAivhipel de la Sonde, etc et je me tnniverei heureoz si apres
avoir k\k examine, ils pourraient Itre plac^ dans le Journal de la Soci6t6 Asiatique
a Calcutta, Enfin, Monsieur, je. vous prie d'accepter Tassttrance de mon respeet et

conad^ntion et me ngne

y otre trea humble Serviteur,

Bs. G. MbLVILL de CAIllfBEB.

Cakutla, de 27 Man, 1845.

A Mamntwr le Secretaire de la SoeUtS Asiatique ik Calcutta,
Monsieur, — ^Monsieur la Baron Melvill de Cambeey ofiicier distingu6 de la Marine
HollandaJse, chevalier de I'ordre Royal du Hon Belgique et membre correspondant de la^
Sod^t^ des arts et sciences de Batavia, se proposant de partir en pen de jours pour Cal-
cutta, nous profitons avec empressement de cette occasion favorable pour adresser a
votre honorable Soci6t6 les deux exemplaires ci-joint des 18 et 19 volumes des Transac-
tiotts de notre Soci^t^, qui renfennent des documens precieux pour la litterature orientale
Nous vous prions Monmeur, de voulcir honorer Monsieur le Baron Melvill de votre
bont6, et bienveillance et de faciliter, tant que possible, les recherches scientifiques qu'
il se propose de faire dans I'lnde Brittanique.
Becevez Monmeur, I'assurance de notre consideration distingufe.

La Direction de la Soci6t6 des Arts et Sciences de Batavia,

Van Hoevell,
Lefecrehavie*
Batavia, le 2 Janvier, 1845. N. Myeb*

The Secretary stated that he had received from the curator of the
Geological and Mineralogical Departments, his note of desiderata, and
forthwith handed it to M. de Camhee, and that he held now in his
hand that of the Zoological curator which would he forwarded with his
reply to the Society of Batavia.

Read the following letter from the Rev. Mr. Long : —

To H. ToRRENS, Esq. Secretary, Asiatic Society^

Dear Sir, — When on a visit to Kishnagar last January, I was favoured with a view
of several pictures belonging to the Bajah of Kishnagar > three new portraits of various
members of his family, and among the rest of Rajah Krishna Chandra Roy, of whom a
most interesting memoir has been published in Bengali.

The drawings are kept in a damp place and are rapidly going to decay.

As one object of the Asiatic Society is to obtain rare drawings or portraits Ulustrative of
the history of the country, it would be a desirable object to obtain the loan of those por«
traits in order to have copies taken.

The East India Company lie under deep obligations to Rajah Krishna Chandra Roy, as
through his friendly disposition towards the English, and his influence over various Hindu
rajas ; the overthrow of the tyrant Suraj ad Doulah was facilitated.

Calcutta, April VJth, 1845. James Long.

May,^ 1845.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. xlix

Mr. Long not being present the Secretary was desired to make some
further inquiries.

Read the following letter from W. H. Hoff, Esq., the coins and hu-
man hand being on the table.

To H. ToRRCNS, Esq., Secretary, Atiatie Society,

Sir, — ^I have in my possesidon a few articles which I will send over if you think that
diey will be acceptable to the Asiatic Society.

The first is one of fifteen coins found in the interior and uncultivated parts of Siagti^
pore. On having a patch of land dug up, a gentleman discovered an earthen pot
containing them. I have been unable to ascertain of what metal or mixture of metals
the coin is composed ; but I am inclined to think that zinc and silver have been employed
in its manufacture. The obverse side bears the faint traces of some unknown characters,
and on the reverse side there is a rude device of a lion or some other beast.

The next is a glass vessel containing a human hand kept in pepper. It belonged to a
notorious footpad or robber who was long a terror to the inhabitants of the Nicobars,
and had for a considerable time escaped punishment. He used to propel poisoned
arrows through a null or tube about a yard in length merely with his breath ! He was
at last shot ; but it was found impracticable to extricate the null from his death-grasp :
it was consequently sawed off on both sides. The remaining portion is still in the
clutch of the largre and hairy hand.

24 March, 1845. Wm. H. Hopp.

The Secretary submitted, from the Sub-Secretary, a prospectus of a
New Zodaical Map, to be edited by J. W. WooUgar, F. E. A. S., upon
a new projection, and to a convenient scale ; corresponding with the
Maps of Schwink, and a little larger than those of Professor Argelan-
der, containing about 1000 stars visible to the naked eye. The Sub-
Secretary suggested that such a map (the price being also only 7«.
6d.) would be a useful addition to the Society's port-folios, and more*
over that the Society might appropriately present one to the Prince
of Mekhara. (See Proceedings October, 1844.) Two copies were
ordered to be subscribed for.

The Sub-Secretary presented on the part of Captain F. M. Crisp of
Moulmein, a grass petticoat and scarf worn by the women of the better
classes at Teresa, one of the Car Nicobar Islands.

Read a letter from the Count Ange de St. Prieux, proposing that the
Society should contribute either by funds or by the purchase of copies
of a work entitled, " Antiquit^s Mexicaines" to the expenses of a joint
*' Commission Scientifique Amerieaine" formed at Paris for the further
exploration of American Antiquities.

1 Proceedings of the Anaiic Society., [Mat^. 184^

It was resolved ; that the Society regret its inability to co-operate, but
that it feels it to be its duty in the first place to lend all its assistance ta
the efforts which may be made to investigate the yet unexplored fields
of purely Indian Antiquities.

The Secretary read extracts from a private letter to his address from
Lieutenant Fletcher Hayes, 62nd N. I., dated from Kya Ghurra, N. W.
of Shikarpore, in which that officer who had just returned with the
troops from the campaign in the Murree and Bhoogtee hills, mentions
his having found the great, utility of the " admirable vocabulary" of
the Beloochee languages (by Major Leech), published in the Society's
Journal, (Vol. VII. p. 538) and offers additions to it both in words
and in phrases : this the Society would most thankfully accept and.
give early publication to.

Read the following memorandum, accompanying one of' the New
Zealand Jade-stone idols presented to the Society by Captain Fox.

Memorandum,
This stone was sent from New Zealand by a Mr. Lucette to me, — ^The stone is of;
value, — and ]>articularl7 so in China. The Idol is often passed as a heirloom from gene-
ration to greneration, as the supposed certain means of preventing any casualty in a.
family when contagious diseases predominate.

W. Fox.
3l5t March, 1845.

Read the following letter from Colonel Ouseley : —

My omr Sir, — I promised to send you a copy of the original Sketch I did, and for--
warded June 13, 1834, to Lord William Bentinck, of the Nerbudda. I have added to this
now sent the great coal field of Benar (and other coal) I discovered ; and hope you
will complete the sketch you gave in No. 151. (No. 67, 2nd Series).

From the nature of the coal procured at Benar I am quite sure, that the Bombay
and Calcutta railways should pass there. The best iron and the best coal in India,
are produced there. The line should run along the foot of the Hills, where the Nulas
are small, not near the Nerbudda when the nullas become wide chasms, and ravines
of such width and depth as would greatly add to the expense of the road.

J. H. OUSBLET. .

Chota Nagpur, 29tA Aprils 1845.

P. S. The whole of the remarks on the left and right banks of the Nerbudda noticed

in the printed sketch are verbatim from my own map, and the divisions on both sides of

Estates, &c. as you could see if you ask Major Wroughton, Deputy Surveyor General, to

allow you to look at the original.

J. H. O.

The map sent hy Colonel Ouseley extending from Juhhulpore to
Hoshungabad, and that compiled by the order of the Government
N. W. P. and reduced for the Journal, Vol. XIIL, from Hoshungabad

Mat, 1845.] Proceedings of tke Asiaiic Society. li

to the sea, were both on the table. The Editors of the Journal were
directed to give all due publicity to Colonel Ouselej's labours by an
additional lithograph in the journal, including the coal site of Benar
and railroad sketch as added by him.

Bead the following letter from Captain Fox, giving an account of the.
toss of the collection made by him for the Museum : —

H. ToRRENS, Esq. Secretary, Asiatic Society.

Sir, — ^In the month of January last year, Mr. Blyth of the Museum, put on board the
nesael I commanded a box, together with a quantity of Arsenical Soap, and other articles.
for the cure of such of the desiderata at New Holland and New Guinea, I might be>-
enabled to procure. The boy and I succeeded in obtaining at New South Wales a tolera-
bly good and large variety of specimens, which were packed up, but getting wet I was
compelled to order their being thrown away in consequence of the offensive effluvia
they emitted. A Satin and Regent Bird I cured myself, and being badly done, I took less
care of them ; they were suspended in my cabin, and remained good, and I beHeve a
hawk the boy kept with his clothes. I did not visit Maulmein, having resigned command
of the vessel. Among other things I lost a beautiful £agle-hawk. Black-swan and a
Wallahby. I had foodly hoped to have been the first to have brought a large quantity o£'
spechnens from New Guinea for our Calcutta Museum; but that gratification I was
compelled to foregx) in consequence of annoyance in Sydney. Subsequently I brought
the boy with me in the ** Minerva,'' by which vessel we returned passengers, and owing
to the crowded state of so small a vessel, (146 tons with 100 souls on board) the Cap-
tain directed the large box to be put under the stern boat, and one Sunday morning we
all saw the box for a few seconds astern, it having fallen overboard and sunk. The
boy behaved very well and is an excellent lad, and no blame whatever can attach itself
to hinu I am very sorry for so great a loss ; but I trust the explanation will meet your
approbation.

Your most obedient Servant,

W. Fox.
Calcutta, IQth April, 1845.

The Secretary stated that he held in his hand two MSS. books, con-'
taining notes and sketches made in the Hills, which had been kindlj
forwarded for publication in the Journal by Captain Marshall, but that
the Editors had thought with reference to the time elapsed, since the
notes were made, and their somewhat private and domestic character,
that they were not exactly suitable for the pages of the Journal.

Memorandum.^These note books were subsequently withdrawn by
Captain Marshall..

Bead the following letter from the Local Committee of Education at
Agra : —

To H. ToRRENs, Esq. Secretary, Asiatic Society, Calcutta*
Sir, — The X^ocal Committee of Education at Agra being engaged in the formation

lii Proeeedin^s of the Jsiaiie Soeieiy. [May» 1845.

of a Muwum of Eoottomic Geology* in connezioQ with the Agra College, direct me to
addraes you on the sabjecty and to state that—

% They doubt not but that they may rely on the 83rmpathy of the Asiatic Society in
favor of an undertaking which has for its ultimate aim the ascertaimnent and development
of the mineral resources of this country, and primarily, of the North Western Provinces^
as yet so imperfectly determined.

3. That should your Sodety be possessed of any disposable Geobgical Spedmena
of the economic kind, the Committee would feel greatly obliged by being &vored with
them.

4 As this work has been but just oommenoed, the Committee are at present unable
to offer to your Society any thing in return ; but they trust they may by and by be in a
position to reci{MOcate the favor for which they now ask.

I have die honor to be, Sir, Your most obdt Servant,

J* MlDDLKTON,

Secretary^
Agra CoUsgt, lit May, 1845.

The Curator Museum Economic Geology stated that a few specimens
would be available from that Department, and is preparing them for
forwarding was accordingly sanctioned.

Report of the Curator Geological and Mineralogical Department and
MusEtTM OP Economic Geology for the months of March and April.

Geological and Mineralogical,

We have received from Government a report addressed by Captain Tremenheere B. £.
of Maulmem to the Military Board, on the prices of tin ore, with spedmens of tin ore
from a new locality called Henzai to the north of Maulmein, and also of some supposed
copper ores, or indications of copper, from the Maulmein hills in that vicinity, but on
examination they prove to be only the well-known pavonine Antimonial coatings, as
nothing but Antimony and Iron can be traced in them ; though so much resembling*
copper as to be taken for it even by experienced persons.

This has been duly reported upon to Govemment,and Captain Tremenheere's attention
directed to the scite of Batto Kayen Karian near Maulmein, from whence we have a
true copper ore in the Museum ; supposed to have been sent by Lieutenant Foley to Mr.
James Prinsep.

Captain Phayre, Assistant Commissioner, Arracan has sent us from Sandoway a series
of specimens carefully numbered and catalogued, with the following letter : —

'* My dear Mr. Piddington, — You may remember you asked me to procure a series
of the rocks occurring from the foot to the top of the Aeng pass. I have not been able
to do this, but having gone in December to the top of the Yoma range of monntams,
direct east of this toivn, I collected a complete series of the rocks and have now the plea'
sure to send them, together with a map, and a note on the route, &c.

I hope my remarks may be intelligible, though I have great doubts thereon, however,
I have done my best to meet your wishes. I looked out particularly for die minerals you
mentioned (and of which you sent a box of specimens, herewith returned with many
thanks) but was. not fortunate enough to meet with any. I could not delay at the
spot, or I should have remained a day or two longer.

Sandoway, Feb, 25th, 1846. A. P. Phatre.

MaYj 184fi.] Proeeedififfs of the Anatk Soeietf. Uii

P. S. In your letter dated the 4th Augrust, 1844, you allude to a paper of queries re-
garding the volcanic islands on the coast 3 this papier I never received, and I fear I shall
scarcely be able to proceed to the islands this season ; but if you will kindly transmit the
queries, they may induce me to go, and show me also what you require."

Captain J. Abbott, B* A. has obliged us with a paper on Kunkur, with specimens con-
taining his views on its formation, which will doubtless be printed in the Journal, as
offering, especially, views formed on the spot and in the alluvial soil : to which I refer
more particularly, as Captain Newbold has lately favored us with his views principally
firom the Kunkur fields in the great trap formation of Central India.

Through Captain Baker, B. £. we have received a letter from Lieutenant Blagrave
which should have accompanied his boxes of Scinde fossils and fish. It is as follows :—

7*0 the Secretary to the Agiatic Society, Calcutta,

Sib, — ^I have the pleasure of sending you a few fossil shells and zoophytes found in the
neighbourhood of B.oree, Tatta, and Kurachee, also a few recent sea shells found in the
tops of the sand hills in the vicinity of the Ullah Bund, and some fish from the Sindra
lake. As I hear that the Society are publishing Sir A. Burnes' illustrations of the fishes
of Scmde, some of these may be new, as I believe he got none of the fishes of the Sindra
lake, and thought that none existed in it on account of the extreme saltness of its waters ;
but when I visited it, in July last, the banks were strewn with fish and water insects
evidently thrown upon the shore by some recent storm, along with several small dead
birds and thousands of locusts, which had evidently perished in trying to cross the lake.
There were several other kinds of fish both large and small, which I had not the meana
of carrying away with me ; many quite new, at least to me ; however, if I re-visit that
neighbourhood, I will make a collection for the Society's Museum. I had intended
sending a collection of recent shells {nm the beach at Clifton, (Kurachee) along with
the fossil ones, for comparison, but I have had no time to make the selections or even to
Ibok over the fossils, among which there may be a lot of trash ; but should I be here
another year, should the Society wish it, I will endeavour to make a good collection ef
both for them. I shall be employed in surveying the hills on the western boundary during
the cold weather, and if I find anything worth sending will do so. Can you g^ive me any
hints for analizing soils, as I think it would be to the advantage of Government were the
different kinds of 'soils in Scinde known, and oblige. Yours truly,

1st October, 1844, Camp Kurachee, T. C. Blagrave.

From Mr. Conductor Dawe we are apprised of the dispatch of five chests of fossils
selected by him, under Captain Baker's directions, from the remains of the Dadoopoor
Museum, which are on their way down to us.

We have to announce also two more papers of great importance from Capt Newbold,
being " Notes on the Geolog^y of the Southern Mahratta Country," and " Geological
Notes across the Peninsula," which will no doubt find an early place in our Journal.

MtTSEUM Economic Geology.

We have received from Captain Sherwill a box of stones for trial as lithographic stones
from the table-land of Rhotasghur, but I fear most of them will be found too siUceous
or too thin. Many indeed are evidently defective, but some promise well, and I shall take
steps to have them fairly tried.

Major Williams of Kyook Phyoo, who some time ago sent us a minute specimen of
a stone called Samy stone in the West of India, as having been sold to his brother by a

liT ProceedingB of the Jsiatie Society. '[May, 1845;

t!avalry soldier, as highly valuable for the purpose of polishingr the bits of bridles, (See
Proceedings of January, 1845,) has now sent us a larger specimen, which proves it to be the
common Agalmatolite only, and not as I had judged by the examination of the previous
pepper-corn specimen, the fine variety called Pagodite. Major Williams says : —

My dear Sir, — My brother has sent me a larger piece of the " Samy Stone," and
requests I would send it to you, and I shall feel extremely obliged if you could infonn
me where I can obtain a quantity of it Dr. Rose has kindly consented to convey it to you.
My brother mentions also hii having sent your former letter to me on this subject to Mr.
Murcluson, the Geologist ; the stone appears to be in request at home, more so perhaps
than in India, where its use is not known apparently.

Kedgeree, 2Sth February, 1845. D. Williams.

Whence I presume that it has been found, as I supposed, of use at home, or at least that,
as I have remarked,it was thought well-worth attention when a quantity could be procur-
ed. I have written to Captain Ouseley requesting him to send us a good cooley load of his
Agalmatolite from Chota Nagpore, vrith which this is identical.

We have received from the Dundee Watt Institution, through Dr. Wise, a box of
Mineralogical and Geological specimens, some of which are handsome and of interest,
but many, indeed most of them are unfortunately without labels, which, for the Geolo^
gical specimens particularly, is a very great drawback on their value.

Mr. W. St. Quintin, C. S. has referred to us from Darjeeling specimens of a quartz
pebble and of fibrous hornblende rock,suppo6ed to contam Gold, but the appearance is due
merely to common pyrites. This might nevertheless be auriferous, but is in too small quao^
tity to be detected in such very minute specimens ; the rock might contain but one-tenth
part of pyrites and the pyrites but one hundredth part of gold and yet be worth work-
ing on the large scale.

Por all the above presentations and communications the best thanka
lof the Society were accorded.

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, June, 1845.

»^

The stated monthly meeting of the Asiatic Society was held at the

Rooms, at \ past 8 p. m. on Tuesday the 17th June, Charles Huffna-
gle, Esq. senior memher of the Committee of Papers, in the chair.

The proceedings of the May meeting were read, and with a few addi-
tions and corrections confirmed.

Read the following list of Books presented, purchased and exchanged
during the last month :

Bookt received for the Meeting of Tuesday, the VJth June, 1845.

Presented.

The Meteorological Kegister, for April, 1845.

The Oriental Christian Spectator, Nos. 5 and 6, for May and June, 1845. — By the
Editor.

The Calcutta Christian Observer, for June, 1845.— By the Editors.

The London, Edinburgh, and DubUn Philosophical Magazine, and Journal of Science,
for January, 1846. — By the Editor.

The Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, October, 1844, to January, 1845.— By
the Editor.

Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, for March and
April, 1844. — By the Academy.

Ditto, ditto, ditto, for May and June, 1844. — By the Academy.

An Address to the Students of the Benares College. — By J. Muir, Esq.

Brief Lectures on Mental Philosophy, delivered in Sanskrit. — By J. Muir, Esq.

Annales des Sciences Physiques, et Naturelles D* Agriculture et D'Industrie. — By the
Royal Agricultural Society of Lyons, Vol. 6.

Archsologia or Miscellaneous Tracts relating to Antiquity, Vol. XXX. — By the Ar-
chsological Society.

Index to Archsologia, from Vol. XVI. to XXX. — By the Archsological Society.

Magnetical and Meteorological Observations. — By the Honorable the Court of Direc-
tors.

Prasastiprak^sika. — By the author, Krishnolall Deb.

Supplement to the Glossary of Indian Terms.— By H. M. ElUott, Esq. Civil Service,
from the Government N. W. P.

Ivi Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [June, 1845.

^ Exchanged.

Calcutta Journal of Natural History.

Journal of the Agricultural and Horticultural Society of India.

Journal Afiiatique, Vol. VI.

Tlie Athensum, for March 29th, 1845, and dth, 12th, and 19th April, 1845.

Purchased.

Mantell's Medals of Creation, Vols. 1 and 2.
The History of Etruria, Fart II.

The History of the Rei^ of Tippoo Sultan, transkted from an Original Persian MSS.
The Classical Museum, No. VII.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, April, 1845.
Journal Des Savans, November and December, 1844.
Illustrations of Indian Ornithology. — By T. C. Jerdon, Esq.

The Asiatic Journal and Monthly Register, for the years 1841, 42, 43, 44, and the first
No. of 1845.
Map of the Kuree Vesetra. — By lichashahaba.

Read the following letter accompanying the very valuable and cari-
ous work to which it refers : —

No. 413.

From J. Thornton, Esq. Secretary to Government N, W» P.
To the Secretary, Adatic Society Calcutta, dated Agra, 2lst April, 1845.
Genl. Dept. N. W. p.

Sir, — I am directed to transmit to you, for the Society's use, a printed copy of Sup-
plementary Glossary of Indian Terms prepared by Mr. H. M. Elliot, Secretary to the
Sudder Board of Revenue N. W. P.

J. Thornton,
Agra, 21«t April, 1845. Secretary to Government N. W. P.

Read the following letter accompanying the paper to which it refers
which was handed to the Editors of the Journal for puhlication : —

(No. 1353, of 1845.)

From F. Cvrrie, Esq. Secretary to the Government of India,
To the Secretary to the Asiatic Society, dated Fort WiUiam, the 9ih May, 1845.
Foreign Dept.

Sir,— In continuation of my letter to your address, No. 1289, dated the 2nd instant,
I am directed by the Governor General in Council to transmit, for such notice as the
Society may deem it to merit, the accompanying copy of a report by lieutenant DaHon,
of the traffic carried on with the tribes of Meris and Abors, and some information of a
tribe of hill people called Ankas or Jamaee.

F. Currie,
Fort William, the 9th May, 1845. Secretary to the Government cf India,

JuNE> 1845.] ProeeedingB of the Asiatic Society. lyii

Read the following letters relative to a Grold Medal of H. I. M. the
Emperor of Russia, presented by him to'the Society which was on the
table:

To THB Right Hon'blb Sir Hemby Hardinoe, G. C. B.

&c. &c. &c.

Sir, — ^I have the honor to transmit to you, with a request that you will have the
goodness to direct them to be safely delivered, a letter and a box containing a gol^
medal which have been addressed to the Asiatic Society of Bengal, by command of the
Emperor of Russia.

have the honor to be. Sir,

Your most obdt. Servant,

(Signed,) Ripon.

India House, March 29, 1845.

A hi SoeUti Aiiatique du BengaU.

J'ai eu llionneur de porter & la connaissancede Sa Majesty Imp^riale Fhommage fait
par la Soci^t^ Aaatique du Bengale de ses principales pubUcations concemant les Utiera-
tures Arabe, Sanscrite et Tib^taine.

LTmpereur mon auguste Maitre, ayant daign6 agr^er avec bont^ Toffre de Tassocia-
tion savante, m'a ordonn^ de lui transmettre Tezpression de sa haute bienveillance ; en
temoignage de laquelle Sa Majesty a daign^ conf6rer a la Soci6te Asiatique du Bengale
une grande medaille en dr dl'effigie de Sa Majesty.

Je viens de reoevoir par Tentremise de la maison de commerce du Baron StiegUtz, une
caisse conteiumt un seul ezemplaire des publications sus mentionnees et je m'empresse
de m'acquitter de Fordre Supreme, en transmettant ci-joint a la Soci6t6 Aaatique du
Bengrale, la medaille en dr, que Sa Majesty a bien vonlu lui accorder.

En joignant a cette office un ezemplaire des principaux ouvrages, port^ sur la liste

ci-apres, du domaine de la litt^rature orientale, qui out paru en Russie, je me f(§Ucite

d'avoir €t€ Torg&ne des rapports litt^raires entre la Soci6t^ Asiatique du Bengale et

TEmpire de Russie.

(Signed,)

OUVAROPF,

Le Ministre de Tinstruction publique.
St, Petenbaurgf ce 25 October, 1844, Ith Novembre.

Uste det ouvrages destines a la SoeUt^ Asiatique du Bengale.

1. Der Weise und der Thor. Aus dem Tibetischen iibersetzt und mit dem Original-
texte herausgegeben von T. J. Schmidt, St. Petersburg, 1843, 1 vol.

2. Die Thaten Bogda Gasser Chan's, des Vertilgers der Wurzel der zehn Ubel in den
zehn Gegenden. Ans dem MongoUschen iibersetzt von T. J. Schmidt, St. Petersburg,
1839, 1 vol.

3. Idem. Traduction russe.

4. Tibetisches Deutsches Worterbuch von T. J. Schmidt, St. Petersburg, 1841, 1 vol.

5. Dictionnaire Mongol Allemand-russe, public par T. J. Schmidt, St. Petersburg,
1835, 1 vol.

Iviii Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [June, 1845.

6. Gnmmatik der mongolischen Sprache, verfasst von T. J. Schmidt, St Peten-
burg, 1831, 1 vol.

7. Gnmmatik der tibetischen Sprache, verfasst von T. J. Schmidt, St. Petersburg,
1839, 1 vol.

8. Ch. M . Fraehnii Recensio numorum Muhamedanorum Academic Imp. sdent
Petiopolitane ; inter prima Academis Imp. saecularia edita. Petropoli, 1826, 1 voL

9. Die Miinzen der Chane tom lUus Dschutschi's order von der goldenen Horde,
von Ch. M. von Fraehn, St Petersburg, 1832, 1 vol.

10. Ibn Feszlan's und anderer Araber Berichte iiber die Russen alterer Zeit, von C.
M. Fraehn, St. Petersburg, 1823, 1 vol.

11. Monogrraphie des monnaies armeniennes, par M. Brosset St Petersburg, 1839,
1vol.

12. Description g6ographique de la G6orgie, par le Tsarevitch Wakhought, publi-
ke d'apres Foriginal autographe par M. Brosset, St Petersburg, 1842, 1 vol.

13. Catalogue de la bibliotheque d'Edchmiadzin, publi6e par M. Brosset, St Peters-
burg, 1840, 1 vol.

14. Sammlungen historischer Nachrichten iiber die Mongolischen Volkerschaften
duTch. P. S. Pallas, St Petersburg, 1776, 2 vols.

15. Dictionnaire g^orgien nuse franfais, compost par David Tchoubinof, St Peters-
burg, 1840, 1 vol.

16. Archiv fiir Asiatische litteratur, Geschichte und Sprachkunde, vpfiisst von
Julius von Klaproth, St. Petersburg, 1810, 1 vol.

17. Chrestomathie mongole, public^ par T. Kovaleffsky, Casan, 1836, 2 vols.

18. Chrestomathie mongole, publie6 par A. Popoff, Casan, 1836, 1 vol.

19. Chrestomathie persane, publie6 par A. Boldyreff, M oscou, 1833, 2 vols.

20. Grammaire de la langue turco-tatare, publie6 par le Prof. Kasim. Bek. Casan,
1839, 1 vol.

21. Dictionnaire arm^nien russe, publiee par A. HoudobachefF, Moscou, 1038, 2 vols.

22. Asseb. O. Seyar on sept planetes ; Histoire des Chans de la Crim^ ; Ouvrage de
Seid Muhammed Risa, Casan, 1832, 1 vol.

23. Recueil de maximes, pri^res, fables, etc, traduites en langue mongole, Casan,
1841, 1 vol.

24. Arithm^tique en langue mongole, publi6e par A. Popoff, Casan, 1837, 1 vol.

25. Grammaire chinoise, compos^e par le p^re Hyacynthe, St Petersburg, 1838, 1 vol.

26. Ghata Karparam, par P. Petroff, Casan, 1844.

27. San. Tsi. Tsin, traduit du Chinois par le p^ra Hyacynthe, St Petersburg,
1829, 1 vol.

(Signed,) K. Komoskey,

Directeur de le Chamberie du Ministre.

The Secretary was requested to convey to the Russian Minister of
Public Instruction^ and to request him to express to His Imperial Mas-
ter, the expression of the Society's most respectful thanks for the high
honour conferred on it ; as also for the very yaluable additions to the
library comprised in H. I. M. donation.

•

June, 1845.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. lix

Read the following letter from Major Leech, C. B. Acting Secretary
to the Grovemor General, N. W. P.

H. ToRRENS, Esq. V, P. and Secretary, Asiatic Society,

My dear Sir, — With reference to my letter to your address of the 14th of February-
last, and to your reply of the 2d of last March, erroneously addressed to Mr. Cust,
I have now the pleasure to transmit to you the commencement (10 times as much will
follow) of the manuscript Sanscrit to accompany the Maps of the Kuruk Ghetr which I
dispatched by banghy dawk on the 26th ultimo.

I am much flattered to find that my undertaking is highly interesting to the Society,
and was also so last cold weather by the great interest the Lieutenant-Governor of Agra
did me the honor to express in the same.

Wherever I have been stationed I have felt that I owed it as a duty to the literary
public, as well as to Government, to enquire as much as my leisure moments would per-
mit, into the language, reUgious customs, and andent history of the people I have been
placed among.

Judging from the interest felt in my undertaking in this neighbourhood where the
people are familiarized with the scene, I am led to believe that there is not a Native
(Hindoo) Court or seat of learning, or possessors of a copy of the Mahabharut in India,
at which and to whom a copy of the maps at least would not be a most valuable and
highly prized acquisition, while to your learned correspondents in Europe you flatter me
by saying it would not be wholly unacceptable.

I anticipate its being said by a few, and I hope a very few, that the publication of such
documents is a prostitution of the press, an offering to Hindoo Idols. But by far the
greater numbers will regard it in its true light, as an illustration of the Ancient Geogra-
phy of one of the most classic spots in India, tending to create or increase a taste for
printing and lithographing among the Natives. And perchance, by making the district of
Uglhul the more frequent resort of men of rank, tend to a prosperity to which it has for
so many years before lapsing to the British Government been a stranger.

I am indebted to my friend Captain Abbott, who succeeded me in charge of the district
of Uglhul, for the loan of surveying instruments, and of his valuable map of the district,
and to the Rajahs of Pateala and Jheend, and the Surdurnea of Thanesur for their
ready permission to survey such part of their territories as came within the Kuruk Ghetr.

You will perceive in this instance, as in others that have come under the notice of the
Society (Journals of Natives employed by me in travelling across the Indus published by
them) that I have not, as is too often the fashion, robbed the real though humble labourer
of his hure, but have made the Pundit of the small Ambalah School^ Jwaharlal, enter his
name as the compiler of the present manuscript. I have made him again enter the name
of Dander, from whose Mahatma he has condensed most of his Urdu.

Labour I have had none. Expense I have incurred little, perhaps not more than 200
rupees. I was alone fortunate in the undertaking suggesting itself to me.

I have in preparation a Persian map and a Persian Mahatma, comprising the local
legends, undertaken at the request of most of the chiefs with whom I am acquainted in
these parts.

I cannot here refrain from calling attention to a little mistake or two made by the im-
maculate authority as to the history and country of the Seikhs, who writes in the Calcutta

Ix Proceedings of the Atiatic Society, [June, 1845.

Review, page 156, Cthe Seikhs and their country.) " The word Kora-Chetre denotes
the field of Kora, the opponent of the Pandus."

" With Thanesur nearly as the centre of the country around in a radius of twenty miles
is holy ground, and every ghat on the Saraswati, and nearly every tank within that area
is a Teeruth, a place of pilgrimage."

The words " opponent and centre" are of course the trifiing mistakes I allude to.

Should there be a difficulty in lithographing the Teeruths in red letters it will not sig-
nify their being black with the rest

By this day's banghy dawk I have despatched a drawing of a Prathanea found at
Bhyn Jahsh some years back, which ought to be reduced to quarter its present size to
bear binding in the account of that Teeruth.

I have to apologize for the execution of the map. Having had no time myself to devote
to it I have been obliged to entrust it to a very indifferent Native draughtsman, but
still the best procurable, of its correctness notwitlistanding I am well satisfied.

The border of the map which is very incorrectly drawn being taken from the Pratha-
nea is suitably antique.

I shall be happy to publish the map and account myself on ascertaining the probable
expense through your kind assistance, should the Society, from the fact of their not being
in English, consider them unadapted to the Journal or the Researches, or I shall be hap-
py to see them put into any other shape or language under the auspicies of the Society
by any one having the necessary leisure which I have not

Your's very truly,
(Signed,)
Ambalah, 2d June, 1845.

Read the following letter from the Archaeological Society : —

The Secretary of the Asiatic Society , Calcutta,
Sir, — I am directed by the President and Council of the Society of Antiquaries of
London, to forward to you tlie following publications, for the use of the Asiatic Society,
Calcutta, viz.
Archaeologia, Vol. XXX.
Index to ditto, from Vol. XVI. to Vol. XXX.

Somerset PlacCf Q9th Nov. 1844. Nigh. Carlisle,

Secretary.

Read the following letter : —

To H. ToRRENS, Esq. Vice President and Secretary, Asiatic Society,

Sir, — ^I have the pleasure to forward the accompanying (7) seven volumes, being the
only works in Sanskrit in the Calcutta School Book Society's Depository. I regret that
our stores should furnish so meagre a supply, but works in the Sanskrit language are so
little called for that the Society have not considered it worth while to enlarge their selec-
tion at present.

The amount of the books is 8 Rs. 9 an. ; which you can either pay now, or allow to
stand over to some future tune, as most convenient to yourself.

C. S. B. S. Library, May 23, 1845, J. Sykes,

Sec, C» S. S, S.

June, 1845.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. Ixi

Resolved that, pending Messrs. Konig's final orders the bills be
allowed to stand over, as kindly offered by the School Book Society.

Read a letter to the Snb-Secretary from the Rev. J. J. Moore, Secy.
Agra School Society, acknowledging the receipt of the copy of the
Rekha Ganita made here for him* (See proceedings April, 1844) and
inclosing a drafl for the amount : —

Read a memorandam from the Sub*Secretary noticing that Dr.
Campbell, of Darjeeling, bad obliged the Society with 44 old numbers
of the Journal.

Read the following note relative to the model of the Gun '* Zubber-
jung :"—

Mt Dear Sib,— Some time ago a model of the celebrated " Zubbeijungr*' Ovlu, which
was burst on the return of the army from Afghanistan, was sent to the museum of the
Asiatic Society by mistake. It should have been forwarded to Mr. Cumin of the Mint, and
since I have been apprized of the error, will you kindly do me the favor to make it over
to the bearer, and I will agreeably to Colonel Stacy's instructions, send it on to Mr.

Cumin.

Believe me, your's sincerely,

Ballygunge, May 21(f , 1845. Robt. Wrovghton.

And the Secretary stated that in returning the model he has requested
Major Wroughton to oblige the Society with a cast also, on paying for
the expense, which he had kindly promised to procure for it.

Read the following letter from Captain Russell, H. C. Steamer Gan-
ges relative to the presentation to which it alludes : —

Henry Torrens, Esq., Secretary to the Asiatic Society,
Dear Sir^ — On my last trip in the H. C. Steamer Ganges to the Nioobar Islands, I
found a curious custom existing^ amongst the Natives of preserving* the bones of their
chiefs or principal persons. At Lalone, a village in the N« £. side of the island of
Theresa, at the place where the brig or schooner Mary was cut off in either May, June, or
July, 1844, Captam Ventura and his crew were all murdered, and the vessel burnt, part
of her rig^ng and stores were found in the houses, the natives having fled to the jungles.
Close to this village under a tree were several, say 15 or 16, of the bones of these persons
dressed up as you will find by the specimen, which Captain Patterson has the kindness
to take up to you from me, which I request you will present to the Asiatic Society.

On enquiry I find that from three to four months after bdng buried, the bones are
carefully taken up, and dried, afterwards at their feasts carried about to every house
by the young girb, and then placed under a tree with cocoanuts, yams, &c. laid near
them. Trusting this may be deemed acceptable to your Society.

Moulmaiiif lAth May, 1845. J. Russell,

Commander H. C. Steamer " Ganges"

* But we have not been able to obtain one with the diagrams. We should be obliged
to any friend who could indicate to us where a copy exists with the diagrams. — Eds.

Ixii Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [June^ 1845.

Read the following letter in Persian accompanying the work to
which it alludes : —

iJuvG (2)U 45^ (*^j e^^H^j c)^^F^ e)'*^^ S<^T \s)^ ^^ji J^

• ••

oy^jj G <X)^ (>^iuo S;^ ^1 2{^e)^^ ^U^ c5^^> Vjyt (3^19 ci>blxp

^yo oU^lj diJOi 4^ "^J^^ Ai|»i^ iSJJ) *««3Juk^ <X)(<X) b dj|,> tr^j^
v:«)jj^<> U>(i <3^^mj^ &xju« ^UIp cIaaAj Jjtfijt j|;,> ^^^^ (i^i tJ^ «>)ttt

•'S-'^^t^ tt)t (•^ iS^ji ^^^ t*^' «^^ ?;Jt)>^ )^ ts'^l***^ *^ C5)*«^

JJiiLjJ CU-»| 4.flJr^ ^^f cUla. Jjar* ^^^ ^jfi ^[yG ^b fj^yc\A.

June, 1842.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, Ixiii

The Secretary was desired to write to the author, expressing in the
name of the Society its high approbation of the work, and especially as
regards the introduction of the Copemican system into it.

Report of the Curator Museum of Economic Geology, and Geological and
Miner ALOGicAL Departments, for the month of May.

Geological and Mineralogical.

Lieutenant Sherwill, whose beautiful Geological map and collection of specimens of
Zillah Behar was brought before the Society in January has at my request, added to it*
— I may say he has doubled its value — ^by giving us first a note of the heights of forty- two
points measured or estimated, and then a general geological memorandum of the district.
He has further, and this is not mere ornament, added to the map a set of vignettes most
capitally executed, and admirably chosen to convey a faithful idea of that district.

From the whole we shall, I doubt not, be able to give as good a preliminary geo-
logical ideH of the district as can be desired, or indeed expected, for nothing short of a
geological survey can of course produce a correct one.

We have also received Captain Phayre's sketch map to accompany the series of speci-
mens from Sandoway to the top of the Yoma mountains exhibited at the last meeting.
The map had been left on board the H. C. S. Amherst.

Lieutenant Strover has forwarded to us, at the request of Captain Abbott, some speci-
mens illustrative of his paper on the occurrence of granite in the bed of the Nerbudda.
Lieutenant Strover says,

My dear Sir, — In a letter I received from Captain Abbott, he mentions that some
specimens of trap blended with granite found in the bed of the Nerbudda here would be
acceptable to the Society. I therefore, without delay, despatch them by Banghy Dawk
franked by the political ofHcer here ; I have sent five different packets, viz., 1st the trap,
2nd granite, 3rd the granite and trap where the former preponderates, 4th where the lat-
ter is in excess, 6th indistinct blending of the two. Should the society require other speci-
mens or layer, I shall be happy to meet with their wishes.

Museum of Economic Geology*

We have received from Captain Ousely a good supply of the Agalmatohte which as
mentioned in my last report, we had recognised Major Williams' Samy stone to be ; and
some of it really proves to be a very fine variety, almost approaching the Fagodite.

A box of 8 or 10 lbs. weight has been sent, in the name of the Society, to Major
Williams' brother, with a request that he would inform us of the success of it as a polish-
ing material, for which, and as an anti-attritioh one also, it seems admirably adapted.

I shall also endeavour to have trials made of it soon ; the different varieties we have
received, I have distinguished as follows in our collection and to Mr. Williams :

A. Large block, light greenish-white fracture, talcky in some parts; the weathered
surface yellowish.

B. Sawn piece ; whitish, slaty grey where cut ; on the firactured surface green, grain
finer and even.

C. Thinly laminated, and contorted. Impure between the laminations.

Ixiv ' Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [June, 1845.

D. Thick laminated and contorted, perhaps a harder kind.

Msyor General CuUen has forwarded to us firom Trevandrum two specimens of Gra-
phite. This graphite is of the soft, loose scaly kind which would evidently not serve for
pencils, and for inferior uses it is probably too cheap at home to render it wortk shij^ing.
Nevertheless a few maunds might be tried since its collection and package would be
made at a trifling expense.

General CuUen says — ^fior though not writing for publication I cannot do better than
borrow his words :

Cochin, dr<2 March, 1845.

" I send you by a vessel bound for Calcutta some specimens of what I suppose to be
Graphite which I lately discovered near Trevandrum in Travancore. You may perh^is
have observed in a late No. (90) of the Madras Journal of Science a slight notice of the
discovery by me of this mineral in Tinnevelly as well as Travancore 1 At first the indica-
tions of it were trifling, consisting merely of small scales or sometimes of thin plates about
the size of a dollar disseminated in the LvmsUme or Gneiss of Tinnevelly or the Gneiss
or Laterite of Travancore. Subsequent researches, have proved to me that it is not only
very generally (widely) distributed, but that it is not improbable it may be found in
such abundance and purity as to render it an article of commerce.

I have procured some specimens of very fine sorts, ia lumps about the si^e of a small
^99, from pits in a Kunkur deposit at Tinnevelly, but I have not yet been able to visit and
examine the spot carefully. The lumps, howeyec* s^m to consist of scales or lamina
rather closely aggregated, but not so much so as to admit of leads being cut out of them
fit for pencils, it is also exceedingly flexible or soft

Perhaps, however, at a great depth or inoumbent pressujDe its solidity may be gzeater.

Small scales or plates of graphite are also exceedii^ly common in Travancore, pasti-
ticularly south of Trevandrum, but I have found traces of it. as. far north even aaXochin^

The variety of graphite which I hi^ve sent you by sea. was discovered in my search for
finer specimens of the laminar kind. I learnt that the potters, of Trevandrum occasion-
ally, at the great festivals, blackened th^ earthen, vessels w;ith a mineral which was sup-
posed to be plumbago.

I visited the spot, which was 5 or 6 miles from Trevandum, on the slope of a gpneiss hill,
the lower portions of which were overlaid with laterite \ or rather the gneiss rock was
there decomposed into laterite, to a certain depth from the surface j small lumps of laterite
containing the plumbago were lying about on the surface, there was no regular work-
ings, but I oi>ened the soil or laterite in the bed of a water course for a distance of about
40 or 50 feet, and found a regular stratum at vein of the mineral mone or less rich ; imbed-
ded and lying parallel to the strata of. laterite as the specimens now sent It appeared
to become rich as we went deeper. I brought away, some hundred pounds of the. mixed
ore or laterite. It has not yet been turned to any account*

Its fibrous appearance only excepted, or ra^er its granular texture aiid its application
to pottery, made me suppose at first that it might be an ore of antimony, nor does it soil
so strongly as the laminar varieties. The fibrous varieties are very Hke specimens which
I have of the Ceylon graphite ^ the geological rektion to the deposit in Ceylon will b«
interesting.

June, 1845.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, Ixv

You are aware probably of the singular carbonaceous deposits in the south of Travan-
core, have these a connection with the occurrence of the Graphite? probably not. These
carbonaceous or Hgnite beds are chiefly immediately on the coast between Quilon and
Trevandrum, but they are found also 30 miles south of Trevandrum, and also in Mala«
bar near Calicut, as noticed by Captain Newbold."

Col. Ousely has forwarded throufirh Mr. Secretary HaUiday a fine set of specimens of
the Galena of Hisato, which will be I hope more fully reported on at our next meeting.

r » ■

->'

/ . 1

» S

> ' , V .

. ) ■

,>, •

I • ■.

I*'

I ' -. ."■

' i'

-. ■ J Y „' I ■ ,

r -t

. ' .7 ' ' ■

> . - -* ■■•■.-''■

'■ \ •" . ' V

'"->■

.» ''.»''.

V V '

- ■- i

V. ,.ti ^- ., «

•» , -

.: '•-

.* ,' . '■* . '

"-''•; ; ■--

■' ■ •"■■'/;:• '.:

« »

. »

r , *

^ 1

I .

■I

■ i

-I ^ ,;

■•(■-. .
1

->\\

' I

.■■•• (

\- / ■

f ,.'

. i

■ . .1

■ (

'. \

^-l

' ■ . I

.1 ^

- ■•1

'^5

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal"

See other formats